Loading...
HomeMy WebLinkAboutSurfside-Specs Part 2 of 2 - Division 01 - 46 SURFSIDE WASTEWATER TREATMENT FACILITY UPGRADES Contract Bid Documents Part 2 of 2 Specifications CWSRF No. 4034 229123 Town of Nantucket Department of Public Works September 2016 woodardcurran.com COMMITMENT & INTEGRITY DRIVE RESULTS 980 Washington Street | Suite 325 Dedham, Massachusetts 02026 T 781.251.0200 | F 781.251.0847 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA TABLE OF CONTENTS – BIDDING DOCUMENTS WOODARD & CURRAN 00 01 10-1 SECTION 00 01 10 TABLE OF CONTENTS – BIDDING DOCUMENTS PART 1 OF 2 BIDDING AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS DIVISION 00 PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS INTRODUCTORY INFORMATION 00 01 07 Seals Page 00 01 10 Table of Contents 00 01 15 List of Drawing Sheets PROCUREMENT/BIDDING REQUIREMENTS 00 11 16 Invitation to Bid 00 21 13 Instructions to Bidders 00 22 13 Supplementary Instructions to Bidders 00 31 00 Available Project Information 00 41 02 Form for General Bid 00 41 03.01 Form for Sub-Bid and Annex – Roofing & Flashing 00 41 03.02 Form for Sub-Bid and Annex – Miscellaneous Metals 00 41 03.03 Form for Sub-Bid and Annex – Painting 00 41 03.04 Form for Sub-Bid and Annex – HVAC 00 41 03.05 Form for Sub-Bid and Annex – Electrical 00 41 03.06 Form for Sub-Bid and Annex – Masonry 00 43 13 Bid Bond – Penal Sum Form 00 43 93 General Bid Submittal Checklist 00 43 93.01 Sub-Bid Submittal Checklist 00 45 05 General Bidder’s Representations and Certifications 00 45 05.01 Sub-Bidder’s Representations and Certifications 00 45 19 Non-Collusion Affidavit 00 45 55 DCAMM General Contractor Update Statement 00 45 56 DCAMM Sub-Bidder Update Statement 00 45 57 Disadvantaged Business Enterprise Requirements DIVISION 00 PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS (CONTINUED) CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS Sample Notice of Intent to Award (C-00 50 55) Sample Notice of Award (C-00 51 00) 00 52 10 Agreement Form Performance Bond Form (C-00 61 13.13) Payment Bond Form (C-00 61 13.16) Sample Notice to Proceed (C-00 55 00) 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA TABLE OF CONTENTS – BIDDING DOCUMENTS WOODARD & CURRAN 00 01 10-2 00 60 00 Project Forms (listing) Application for Payment Form (C-00 62 76) Request for Interpretation/Information Form (C-00 63 15) Field Order Form (C-00 63 36) Work Change Directive Form (C-00 63 49) Change Request Form (C- 00 63 60) Change Order Form (C-00 63 63 MA) Change Order Form (DEP-DMS) Notice of Substantial Completion Form (C-00 65 15) Certificate of Substantial Completion Form (C-00 65 16) Notice of Completion Form (C-00 65 18) 00 72 05 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract (EJCDC C-700, 2007) Including modifications Supplementary Conditions 00 73 10 Project Specific Requirements 00 73 37 Equal Employment Opportunity/Affirmative Action Requirements 00 73 38 D/MBE & D/WBE Requirements 00 73 43 Wage Rate Requirements 00 73 73 Statutory Requirements 00 73 76 State Revolving Fund Requirements 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA TABLE OF CONTENTS – BIDDING DOCUMENTS WOODARD & CURRAN 00 01 10-3 PART 2 OF 2 SPECIFICATIONS DIVISION 01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01 11 00 Summary of Work 01 11 20 Summary of Filed Sub-Bid Requirements 01 15 30 Payment and Administrative Procedures and Quality Requirements 01 50 00 Temporary Facilities and Controls 01 51 40 Temporary Sewage Bypass 01 60 00 Product Requirements 01 70 00 Execution and Closeout Requirements 01 91 15 Startup and Commissioning DIVISION 02 - EXISTING CONDITIONS 02 40 00 Demolition DIVISION 03 - CONCRETE 03 01 05 Concrete Repair 03 01 06 Cementitious Crystalline Leak Repair 03 11 00 Concrete Forming 03 16 00 Concrete Specialties 03 20 00 Concrete Reinforcing 03 30 00 Cast-in-Place Concrete 03 30 20 Concrete Placing, Curing, and Finishing 03 41 26 Precast Structures 03 63 00 Injection Grouting DIVISION 04 – UNIT MASONRY 04 20 00 Unit Masonry (Filed Sub-Bid Required) DIVISION 05 – METALS 05 31 00 Metal Deck 05 50 00 Metal Fabrications (Filed Sub-Bid Required) DIVISION 06 – WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES 06 10 00 Rough Carpentry 06 17 53 Shop-Fabricated Wood Trusses 06 20 00 Finish Carpentry 06 70 00 Structural Composites (Bid Alternate #4) DIVISION 07 – THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 07 19 00 Water Repellents 07 21 00 Thermal Insulation (Filed Sub-Bid Required) 07 31 13 Asphalt Shingles (Filed Sub-Bid Required) 07 60 00 Flashing and Sheet Metal (Filed Sub-Bid Required) 07 92 00 Joint Sealants (Filed Sub-Bid Required) 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA TABLE OF CONTENTS – BIDDING DOCUMENTS WOODARD & CURRAN 00 01 10-4 DIVISION 08 - OPENINGS 08 16 15 Fiberglass Doors and Frames 08 33 23 Overhead Coiling Doors 08 54 00 Composite Windows 08 71 00 Door Hardware 08 81 00 Glass Glazing DIVISION 09 – FINISHES 09 77 00 FRP Panels 09 90 00 Painting and Coating (Filed Sub-Bid Required) 09 97 00 Specialty H2S Lining For Concrete (Filed Sub-Bid Required) DIVISION 10 – SPECIALTIES 10 44 16 Fire Extinguishers DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING 22 00 00 Plumbing DIVISION 23 - HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING (HVAC) 23 05 00 Common Work Results for HVAC (Filed Sub-Bid Required) 23 05 23 General-Duty Valves for HVAC Piping (Filed Sub-Bid Required) 23 05 29 Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment (Filed Sub-Bid Required) 23 05 53 Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment (Filed Sub-Bid Required) 23 05 93 Testing, Adjusting and Balancing for HVAC (Filed Sub-Bid Required) 23 09 00 Instrumentation and Control for HVAC (Filed Sub-Bid Required) 23 31 17 Fiberglass-Reinforced Plastic Ducts (Filed Sub-Bid Required) 23 34 00 HVAC Fans (Filed Sub-Bid Required) 23 80 00 Decentralized HVAC Equipment (Filed Sub-Bid Required) 23 82 39 Unit Heaters (Filed Sub-Bid Required) 23 90 00 Louvers and Vents (Filed Sub-Bid Required) DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL 26 05 00 Common Work Results for Electrical (Filed Sub-Bid Required) 26 05 19 Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables (Filed Sub-Bid Required) 26 05 23 Control-Voltage Electrical Power Cables (Filed Sub-Bid Required) 26 05 26 Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems (Filed Sub-Bid Required) 26 05 33 Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems (Filed Sub-Bid Required) 26 05 43 Underground Ducts and Raceways for Electrical Systems (Filed Sub-Bid Required) 26 05 73 Short Circuit Analysis and Coordination Study (Filed Sub-Bid Required) 26 08 00 Commissioning of Electrical Systems (Filed Sub-Bid Required) 26 22 00 Low Voltage Dry-Type Transformers (Filed Sub-Bid Required) 26 24 16 Panelboards (Filed Sub-Bid Required) 26 27 26 Wiring Devices (Filed Sub-Bid Required) 26 28 16 Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers (Filed Sub-Bid Required) 26 29 13 Enclosed Controllers (Filed Sub-Bid Required) 26 29 23 Variable Frequency Drives (Filed Sub-Bid Required) 26 41 00 Facility Lightning Protection (Filed Sub-Bid Required) 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA TABLE OF CONTENTS – BIDDING DOCUMENTS WOODARD & CURRAN 00 01 10-5 DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL (CONTINUED) 26 43 00 Surge Protective Devices (Filed Sub-Bid Required) 26 51 00 Interior Lighting (Filed Sub-Bid Required) 26 56 00 Exterior Lighting (Filed Sub-Bid Required) DIVISION 27 - COMMUNICATIONS 27 05 00 Tele/Data Communications System (Filed Sub-Bid Required) DIVISION 31 – EARTHWORK 31 00 00 Earthwork 31 10 00 Site Clearing DIVISION 32 – EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS 32 12 16 Asphalt Paving DIVISION 33 – UTILITIES 33 31 00 Sanitary Utility Sewerage Piping DIVISION 40 – PROCESS INTEGRATION 40 05 15 Process Pipe Supports 40 05 23 Process Valves & Strainers 40 05 35 Surface Spray System – Circular Tanks 40 05 59 Hydraulic Gates 40 23 00 Process Piping 40 61 01 Instrumentation and Controls General Requirements 40 63 43 Programmable Logic Controllers 40 67 00 Control System Equipment Panels and Racks 40 70 00 Instrumentation for Process Systems DIVISION 43 - PROCESS GAS AND LIQUID HANDLING, PURIFICATION, AND STORAGE EQUIPMENT 43 23 11 Horizontal Chopper Pumps 43 23 80 Double Disc Pumps 43 24 11 Submersible Propeller Pumps 43 25 11 Submersible Chopper Pumps 43 25 13 Wet Pit Submersible Centrifugal Wastewater Pumps DIVISION 44 - POLLUTION AND WASTE CONTROL EQUIPMENT 44 31 19 Packaged Odor Control System 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA TABLE OF CONTENTS – BIDDING DOCUMENTS WOODARD & CURRAN 00 01 10-6 DIVISION 46 – WATER AND WASTEWATER EQUIPMENT 46 24 23 In-Line Grinders 46 33 00 Liquid Chemical Feed Equipment 46 41 41 Hyperbolic Mixers 46 71 13 Circular Gravity Thickeners END OF SECTION 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA SUMMARY OF WORK WOODARD & CURRAN 01 11 00-1 SECTION 01 11 00 SUMMARY OF WORK PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES Project Description Description of the Work Work Sequence and Coordination Special Requirements 1.02 PROJECT DESCRIPTION A. The Surfside WWTF currently receives an average daily flow of about 1.3 million gallons per day (mgd), and wet weather peak hourly flow up to 4.1 mgd. Internal recycle flows through the advanced treatment tanks can be as high as 14.7 mgd. Seasonal variation in flow is evident with higher than average flows typically experienced between June through September and from mid- November through mid-January and lower flows throughout the rest of the year. B. The facility dewaters sludge typically six days per week for more than 12 hours per day during the summer months. Dewatered sludge is hauled offsite in roll-off containers several times each week. Dewatered sludge hauled from the site is between 20 to 25 percent solids. Access to the roll-off container bay in the lower level of the Solids Processing Building shall be maintained at all times during construction. C. The facility accepts septage from septic haulers on a daily basis. Septage is processed by the existing Lakeside septage receiving unit. Access to this equipment shall be maintained at all times during construction. If access must be disrupted, a temporary means of accepting septage that is acceptable to the Owner shall be provided by the General Contractor at no additional cost. D. Unless specifically noted below, the construction activities under this Contract shall not, under any circumstances reduce the treatment capability of the plant, reduce the ability to hydraulically convey peak flow through the plant or reduce effluent quality. The treatment capability of the plant refers to all portions of wastewater 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA SUMMARY OF WORK WOODARD & CURRAN 01 11 00-2 treatment including screenings, grit removal, influent pumping, primary treatment, secondary treatment, disinfection, sludge dewatering and laboratory capabilities. E. The Owner will continue to operate the treatment plant during the construction period and will be responsible for maintaining effluent quality to comply with the NPDES permit. If NPDES permit requirements are not met due to the Contractor’s actions, the Contractor shall be liable for any monetary damages levied by the DEP or EPA. The Contractor shall fully cooperate with the Owner, coordinate the construction schedule with the Owner and Engineer, and provide the necessary labor, equipment and materials to prevent interruption to flow, treatment, and solids processing. The Owner and Engineer reserve the right to modify or expand the schedule during construction to meet permit limits and prevailing conditions. F. All wastewater samplers and analyzers required for proper plant operation and reporting shall remain operational throughout construction. Maintain safe access to samplers at all times. G. The work specified herein shall be accomplished at such times that will be acceptable or agreed to by the Owner and Engineer. Any construction activity defined herein to be performed during a low flow period shall meet the following criteria. Low influent flow periods are defined as early weekday and weekend mornings (between midnight and 6:00 a.m.), during dry weather periods only. Overtime work by the Contractor to conform to these requirements shall be considered as normal procedure under this Contract, and the Contractor shall make no claim for extra compensation as a result thereof. H. The Owner's personnel will operate valves and equipment as necessary for diverting flow, draining of tanks, etc. However, it is emphasized that the operations of the existing facilities take precedence over all construction activities. Operational assistance given to the Contractor by the Owner will be provided when the Owner's schedule and manpower permit. Such assistance by the Owner may be limited on specific occasions because of process limitations or unavailability of personnel. Delays caused by such limitations shall be expected and shall not be the basis for claim of extra costs by the Contractor. I. The Contractor shall fully cooperate with the Owner and coordinate construction activities to prevent interference or disruption to ongoing wastewater treatment and sludge processing activities. This includes, but is not limited to, maintaining wastewater treatment and sludge processing operations while installing new instrumentation and control systems and new electrical service, maintaining site access and traffic patterns, maintaining conveyance systems as required, and completing all demolition, modifications, and new construction activities. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA SUMMARY OF WORK WOODARD & CURRAN 01 11 00-3 1.03 DESCRIPTION OF THE WORK The Work includes labor, material and equipment, services required for construction, testing, and commissioning of the Project in accordance with the Contract Documents and as more specifically described in the Specifications and Drawings and includes, but is not limited to, the following principal features: 1. Construction of a new building enclosing the existing Headworks structure, including a separate electrical room and associated structural, electrical, and controls improvements. Installation of a new odor control system for the Headworks building and grit chamber, including all associated electrical and controls improvements. 2. Demolition and replacement of the three primary sludge pumps, grinders, valves, electrical and controls within the existing Primary Sludge Building. 3. Demolition and replacement of the existing polymer feed systems, including associated electrical and control components. 4. Construction of three new gravity thickeners, gravity thickener distribution box, and scum well, including associated electrical and controls components. Installation of two new scum pumps, one new scum recirculation pump, one new press feed pump, piping and valves, and associated electrical and controls. Demolition of the aeration piping in one of the existing sludge holding tanks. 5. Demolition and replacement of the Return Activated Sludge (RAS) pumps, draft pumps, Pre-Anoxic mixers, including electrical and control components as well as structural modifications to the existing Advanced Treatment Tanks. Work also includes construction of a new RAS distribution box. 6. Modifications to the existing aeration piping, process piping, and associated valves in the Advanced Treatment Tanks and Advanced Treatment Building. 7. Upgrades to the existing Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition (SCADA) system. Work Site location: Generally at the Surfside WWTF in Nantucket, Massachusetts 1.04 WORK COORDINATION Coordination 1. The Surfside WWTF treats flow 24 hours per day, seven days per week. The existing facility is not (and will not be) manned round-the-clock, but will be maintained in continuous operation by the Owner at all times 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA SUMMARY OF WORK WOODARD & CURRAN 01 11 00-4 during the entire construction period except for periods specifically delineated within this Section. The Contractor shall schedule and conduct his work such that it will not impede any treatment process, create potential hazards to operating equipment and/or personnel, reduce the quality of the plant effluent, disrupt dewatered sludge hauling operations, or cause odor or other nuisance. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to ensure complete compatibility with the facility operations in his working schedule. 2. Obtain written approval of the Engineer for shutdowns. Notify Engineer a minimum of two weeks prior to any required shutdowns. a. Prepare a Shutdown Plan for each requested shutdown indicating what existing valves must be operated by Owner personnel during the shutdown. 1) Perform Work requiring shutdowns at the Wastewater Treatment Facility Monday through Friday between the hours of 7:00PM and 5:00AM unless otherwise authorized by the Owner and Engineer. b. Coordinate Work with the Town and provide public notice, as required. B. Maintain access to facilities for the Owner throughout the Project. All work connecting with, cutting into, and reconstructing existing pipes or structures shall be thoroughly planned to only interfere with the operation of the existing facilities for the shortest possible time and only when the demands on the facilities best permit such interference, even though it may be necessary to work outside of normal working hours to meet these requirements. C. Portions of some pipelines must remain in service while alterations are being made on other portions. Piping systems that must remain in service shall be isolated by placing blind flanges, plugs, caps or valves on all open ends and suitably restrained as required. The Contractor is responsible for the stability of all partial piping systems and will provide temporary bracing as required. All wastewater within pipes to be opened shall be collected and discharged into a process drain, sewer, or other sanitary pipeline. Wastewater shall not be pumped to nor allowed to flow to the storm drainage system. D. Before starting work which will interfere with the operation of existing facilities, the Contractor shall do all possible preparatory work and shall see that all labor, tools, materials, and equipment are made ready. The Contractor shall also assist in instructing operations and maintenance personnel in any new operating procedures. E. The Contractor shall provide, maintain, and operate all temporary facilities such as dams, pumping equipment, conduits, and all other labor and equipment necessary to intercept the sewage flow before it reaches the points where it would interfere with his work, carry it past his work, and return it to the system below his work. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA SUMMARY OF WORK WOODARD & CURRAN 01 11 00-5 F. Flow to and through the treatment facility generally shall not be interrupted. Flow through portions of the plant may only be shut-down to perform work as delineated herein and must be conveyed around the isolated area during the shut-down. All shut-downs shall occur only upon written request and with prior written authorization from the Owner and Engineer. Such authorizations will be limited to times when the hydraulic capacity of units remaining in service shall not be exceeded. When work requires that a portion of the plant be shut down, the Contractor shall be fully prepared to execute the work in the most expeditious manner. The Contractor shall plan the work by taking into consideration all potential problems that may be encountered. Spare pumps, pipe and fittings, and any other equipment appropriate for the work to be done shall be readily available for use in an emergency. The Contractor shall be prepared to work continuously (24 hours per day, 7 days per week) during the time when any units or pipelines that are out of service could affect the treatment process. G. When bypass pumping is required, sufficient pumping capacity shall be provided to meet the specified peak flow rate. The internal recycle flows shall be added to the peak flowrate if the bypass pumping occurs within the advanced treatment tanks. See Section 01 51 40 for bypass pumping system requirements. H. The Contractor shall provide the Owner's personnel and agents with vehicular and personnel access to all areas of the existing facility which remain in operation. I. Potable water supply, protected water supply and effluent plant water supply shall remain operational at all times. Existing plumbing systems such as roof and floor drains, sump pumps, sanitary facilities, potable and protected water etc., shall be kept in operation at all times. Systems to be removed or replaced shall be kept in operation until new systems have been tested, accepted and authorized for use. If sewers or drains must be taken out of service to facilitate construction operations, alternative provisions shall be made to collect wastewater or drainage and dispose of them. 1.05 WORK SEQUENCE – GENERAL A. The Contractor shall at all times conduct his operations so as to interfere as little as possible with existing works. The Contractor shall develop a sequence of construction and operation, in cooperation with the Engineer and Owner, which shall provide for the construction and start-up of the new works in the most orderly manner possible. Within 60 calendar days of the Notice to Proceed the Contractor shall submit complete descriptions of procedures to maintain plant operations during construction to supplement the construction schedule. The description shall include: 1. Step-by-step procedures for all work in each area of the plant, required durations for procedures, and specific procedures required to be performed by the Contractor as well as assistance from the Owner's personnel that the Contractor will request. The procedures shall include a minimum two 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA SUMMARY OF WORK WOODARD & CURRAN 01 11 00-6 week notification to the Owner and Engineer for any alterations that affect operation of the treatment facility. 2. Step-by-step procedures for connecting new and existing instrumentation to the new SCADA system including all temporary connections. 3. Step-by-step procedures for connecting new and existing electrical systems to the new electrical distribution system including all temporary connections. 4. Complete plans and description of temporary systems and facilities required as part of this Contract to maintain plant operations. These plans shall clearly delineate the intended location of these items and the Contractor's proposed methods for phasing from existing to temporary to completed facilities. 5. All connections to existing systems, including coordination activities performed by Contractor and Owner personnel. 6. Heating and ventilation shall be provided for and maintained in the existing buildings. Temperatures to be maintained in any areas occupied by Plant operating personnel shall be at least 65 degrees Fahrenheit in cold weather months. The temperatures to be maintained in all other interior Plant areas, whether new, existing or temporary, shall be a minimum of 55 degrees Fahrenheit in cold weather months and not to exceed 90 degrees Fahrenheit in warm weather months and shall be modified as required to maintain adequate environmental conditions to facilitate progress of the work, to meet minimum conditions for the installation of materials and to protect materials and finishes from damage due to temperature or humidity. New electrical rooms shall be heated to maintain a minimum of 55 degrees and shall be cooled so the maximum temperature does not exceed 80 degrees Fahrenheit. 7. Electric power and lighting service shall be uninterrupted in all areas that remain in operation except as otherwise specified herein. The existing electrical distribution system shall remain in service until the new utility transformers, switchgear, standby power equipment and distribution network around the site has been installed, tested, accepted and made ready for operation. Temporary service to existing MCCs, panelboards, site lighting and other facilities requiring power shall be provided until replaced by new facilities. A. Sequence Work to minimize shutdowns and reflect sequencing in the construction schedule. B. The following project improvements shall be considered a priority and sequenced at the beginning of the construction schedule. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA SUMMARY OF WORK WOODARD & CURRAN 01 11 00-7 1. Replacement of primary sludge pumps, grinders and associated valves and appurtenances. D. The detailed sequence of construction shall be based upon the schedule submitted by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer as specified above. As a guide for bidders in the preparation of their Bid and for the Contractor in the preparation of his schedule, the general constraints are described in this Section. E. The order of construction shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer; such approval or direction, however, shall in no way relieve the Contractor's responsibility to perform the work in strict accordance with the Contract Documents and ensure that plant operations are maintained at all times. The Contractor shall note the requirements of this Section with regard to the operation of the facility and the phasing of construction when developing the Work sequence. F. The following equipment shall be available at all times or as noted below. The list does not purport to cover any sequences necessitated by the actual construction methods. This is a partial outline only. Portions of the work not specifically itemized must be scheduled by the Contractor in accordance with the requirements of the approved construction sequence. The Contractor is required to account for all details in formulating his own complete plan for implementation of the project. 1. Influent to the plant is conveyed to the plant by pumps at the Sea Street Pumping Station. These pumps transport flow to the headworks area of the plant which includes two influent screens located adjacent to the grit chamber. In addition to the raw wastewater, effluent from the in-plant pump station is also conveyed to the headworks area. This effluent includes filtrate from the rotary screw presses, decant from the sludge holding tanks, and sanitary waste from the buildings. Septage is currently pumped to the main channel in the headworks. These flows will need to be maintained while the new headworks building is constructed. 2. Primary effluent is conveyed by gravity to the anoxic zone of the advanced treatment tanks. At least one anoxic zone must remain online at all times during construction of this project, except for when making inter-tank connections. 3. From the anoxic zone, the wastewater is pumped to one of three aeration trains by the draft pumps. These pumps and the discharge piping will be replaced as part of this project. At least two aeration trains must be kept online at all times except during periods of low flow when two trains can be taken offline to allow piping between the trains to be installed. The time when only one train is online must be minimized and coordinated with the Owner and Engineer. 4. Primary and waste activated sludge are currently discharged into both of the aerated sludge holding tanks. Three gravity thickeners will be constructed inside one of these tanks. Since sludge production is highest during the 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA SUMMARY OF WORK WOODARD & CURRAN 01 11 00-8 summer months, work inside this tank cannot occur during this time, unless the Contractor provides a temporary storage tank for the primary and waste activated sludge. 5. The existing polymer system shall remain operational until the new polymer systems are on-line and accepted. 6. Emergency (standby) power shall be available at all times. 7. All wastewater samplers and analyzers required for proper plant operation and reporting shall remain operational throughout construction. Safe access shall be maintained to samplers and analyzers at all times. Contractor shall coordinate with Owner and Engineer when access to samplers or sampling will be disrupted or modified. 8. Existing instrumentation and controls shall remain fully functional until control is switched to the new control system. PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION - NOT USED END OF SECTION 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA MAc149 SUMMARY OF FILED SUB-BID REQUIREMENTS WOODARD & CURRAN 01 11 20-1 SECTION 01 11 20 SUMMARY OF FILED SUB-BID REQUIREMENTS This Contract is subject to the provisions of MGL Chapter 149, Sections 44A through 44H, inclusive. Pursuant to MGL Chapter 149, section 44F(1)(a), the estimate for each of the following classes of Work exceeds $20,000, separate sub-Bids must be filed, and the Work for these classes of Work has been segregated and is as identified in the Filed Sub-Bid Requirements included in this Section. roofing and flashing miscellaneous and ornamental iron, painting heating, ventilating and air-conditioning, electrical work (including direct electrical radiation for heating) masonry END OF SECTION 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA MAc149 SUMMARY OF FILED SUB-BID REQUIREMENTS WOODARD & CURRAN 01 11 20-2 This page intentionally left blank 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA MAc149 SUMMARY OF FILED SUB-BID REQUIREMENTS WOODARD & CURRAN 01 11 20-3 ROOFING AND FLASHING FILED SUB-BID REQUIREMENTS A. The Work covered by the Specifications and Drawings listed below requires a filed sub-Bid in accordance with MGL c149, §44A through 44J, inclusive, as amended. B. The Contracting Requirements in Division 00 and other General Requirements in Division 01 apply to the Work covered by the Specifications and Drawings listed below. C. Examine all Drawings and Specifications for requirements that affect the Work identified. D. Coordinate the Work covered by the Specifications and Drawings listed below with related Work of other trades and cooperate with such trades to assure the steady progress of all Work under the Contract Documents. E. The term “Contractor” used herein and in Specifications and Drawings listed below shall mean the Roofing and Flashing Subcontractor except where “General Contractor” is used. F. The Work under the Roofing and Flashing sub-Bid is specified in the following Specification sections: 07 21 00 Thermal Insulation (Filed Sub-Bid Required) 07 31 13 Asphalt Shingles (Filed Sub-Bid Required) 07 60 00 Flashing and Sheet Metal (Filed Sub-Bid Required) 07 92 00 Joint Sealants (Filed Sub-Bid Required) and on the following Drawings: A-101 Bid Alternate #1 – Headworks Building Architectural Elevations A-102 Bid Alternate #1 – Headworks Building Architectural Floor Plan & Notes A-103 Bid Alternate #1 – Headworks Building Architectural Sections A-801 Architectural Schedules & Details A-802 Architectural Details S-102 Bid Alternate #1 – Headworks Building Structural Roof Framing Plan S-105 Bid Alternate #1 – Headworks Building Structural Roof Sections & Details This listing of Drawings shall not limit the responsibility of the Roofing and Flashing Subcontractor to determine the full extent of the Work required by the complete set of Drawings. G. Requirements for Submitting Sub-Bids 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA MAc149 SUMMARY OF FILED SUB-BID REQUIREMENTS WOODARD & CURRAN 01 11 20-4 1. Sub-Bids for Work covered by the Specifications and Drawings listed above shall comply with the requirements of MGL c149, §44F. 2. Sub-Bids shall be filed on the forms furnished by the Awarding Authority in the Bidding Requirements in a sealed envelope, at the time and place stipulated in the Advertisement for Bids and in accordance with the procedures and requirements set forth in the Bidding Requirements. H. Sub sub-Bids are required for the following Work per paragraph E of the Form for Sub-Bid – Roofing and Flashing which is customarily performed under subcontract with the Roofing and Flashing Subcontractor. NONE END OF SECTION 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA MAc149 SUMMARY OF FILED SUB-BID REQUIREMENTS WOODARD & CURRAN 01 11 20-5 MISCELLANEOUS AND ORNAMENTAL IRON FILED SUB-BID REQUIREMENTS A. The Work covered by the Specifications and Drawings listed below requires a filed sub-Bid in accordance with MGL c149, §44A through 44J, inclusive, as amended. B. The Contracting Requirements in Division 00 and other General Requirements in Division 01 apply to the Work covered by the Specifications and Drawings listed below. C. Examine all Drawings and Specifications for requirements that affect the Work identified. D. Coordinate the Work covered by the Specifications and Drawings listed below with related Work of other trades and cooperate with such trades to assure the steady progress of all Work under the Contract Documents. E. The term “Contractor” used herein and in Specifications and Drawings listed below shall mean the Miscellaneous and Ornamental Iron Subcontractor except where “General Contractor” is used. F. The Work under the Miscellaneous and Ornamental Iron sub-Bid is specified in the following Specification sections: 05 50 00 Metal Fabrications (Filed Sub-Bid Required) and on the following Drawings: C-003 WWTF Proposed Site Plan C-004 WWTF Proposed Yard Piping Plan C-801 Civil Details 1 C-802 Civil Details 2 A-001 Architectural Notes, Legend & Abbreviations A-101 Bid Alternate #1 – Headworks Building Architectural Elevations A-102 Bid Alternate #1 – Headworks Building Architectural Floor Plan & Notes A-103 Bid Alternate #1 – Headworks Building Architectural Sections A-301 Advanced Treatment Building Electrical Room Plan & Sections A-801 Architectural Schedules & Details A-802 Architectural Details S-001 Structural General Notes SD-101 Bid Alternate #1 – Headworks Area Structural Demolition Plan & Notes SD-301 Sludge Holding Tanks Demolition Plan S-101 Bid Alternate #1 – Headworks Building Structural Foundation Plan S-102 Bid Alternate #1 – Headworks Building Structural Roof Framing Plan 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA MAc149 SUMMARY OF FILED SUB-BID REQUIREMENTS WOODARD & CURRAN 01 11 20-6 S-103 Bid Alternate #1 – Headworks Building Structural Foundation Sections & Details 1 S-104 Bid Alternate #1 – Headworks Building Structural Foundation Sections & Details 2 S-105 Bid Alternate #1 – Headworks Building Structural Roof Sections & Details S-301 Advanced Treatment Building Overall Lower Level Plan S-302 Advanced Treatment Building Overall Upper Level Plan S-303 Gravity Thickeners Lower Level Plan S-304 Gravity Thickeners Upper Level Plan S-305 Gravity Thickeners Sections and Details 1 S-306 Gravity Thickeners Sections and Details 2 S-307 Gravity Thickeners Distribution Box & Scum Well Plan, Sections & Details S-308 IMLR Tank Plans, Sections & Details S-309 Anoxic Tank Mixer Supports, Sections & Details S-310 RAS Distribution Box Plans, Sections & Details S-801 Concrete Tank Details S-802 Concrete Wall and Floor Penetration Details S-803 Concrete Floor Slab and Wall Footing Details S-804 Concrete Equipment Pad & Misc. Concrete Details S-805 Masonry Wall Details and Lintel Schedule S-806 Aluminum Railing Details This listing of Drawings shall not limit the responsibility of the Miscellaneous and Ornamental Iron Subcontractor to determine the full extent of the Work required by the complete set of Drawings. G. Requirements for Submitting Sub-Bids 1. Sub-Bids for Work covered by the Specifications and Drawings listed above shall comply with the requirements of MGL c149, §44F. 2. Sub-Bids shall be filed on the forms furnished by the Awarding Authority in the Bidding Requirements in a sealed envelope, at the time and place stipulated in the Advertisement for Bids and in accordance with the procedures and requirements set forth in the Bidding Requirements. H. Sub sub-Bids are required for the following Work per paragraph E of the Form for Sub-Bid – Miscellaneous and Ornamental Iron which is customarily performed under subcontract with the Miscellaneous and Ornamental Iron Subcontractor. NONE END OF SECTION 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA MAc149 SUMMARY OF FILED SUB-BID REQUIREMENTS WOODARD & CURRAN 01 11 20-7 PAINTING FILED SUB-BID REQUIREMENTS A. The Work covered by the Specifications and Drawings listed below requires a filed sub-Bid in accordance with MGL c149, §44A through 44J, inclusive, as amended. B. The Contracting Requirements in Division 00 and other General Requirements in Division 01 apply to the Work covered by the Specifications and Drawings listed below. C. Examine all Drawings and Specifications for requirements that affect the Work identified. D. Coordinate the Work covered by the Specifications and Drawings listed below with related Work of other trades and cooperate with such trades to assure the steady progress of all Work under the Contract Documents. E. The term “Contractor” used herein and in Specifications and Drawings listed below shall mean the Painting Subcontractor except where “General Contractor” is used. F. The Work under the Painting sub-Bid is specified in the following Specification sections: 09 90 00 Painting and Coating (Filed Sub-Bid Required) 09 97 00 Specialty H2S Lining for Concrete (Filed Sub-Bid Required) and on the following Drawings: A-001 Architectural Notes, Legend & Abbreviations A-101 Bid Alternate #1 – Headworks Building Architectural Elevations A-102 Bid Alternate #1 – Headworks Building Architectural Floor Plan & Notes A-103 Bid Alternate #1 – Headworks Building Architectural Sections A-301 Advanced Treatment Building Electrical Room Plan and Sections A-801 Architectural Schedules & Details A-802 Architectural Details S-001 Structural General Notes S-101 Bid Alternate #1 – Headworks Building Structural Foundation Plan S-102 Bid Alternate #1 – Headworks Building Structural Roof Framing Plan S-103 Bid Alternate #1 – Headworks Building Structural Foundation Sections & Details 1 S-104 Bid Alternate #1 – Headworks Building Structural Foundation Sections & Details 2 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA MAc149 SUMMARY OF FILED SUB-BID REQUIREMENTS WOODARD & CURRAN 01 11 20-8 S-105 Bid Alternate #1 – Headworks Building Structural Roof Sections & Details S-301 Advanced Treatment Building Overall Lower Level Plan S-302 Advanced Treatment Building Overall Upper Level Plan S-303 Gravity Thickeners Lower Level Plan S-304 Gravity Thickeners Upper Level Plan S-305 Gravity Thickeners Sections & Details 1 S-306 Gravity Thickeners Sections & Details 2 S-307 Gravity Thickeners Distribution Box & Scum Well Plans, Sections, & Details S-308 IMLR Tank Plans, Sections, & Details S-309 Anoxic Tank Mixer Supports, Sections, & Details S-310 RAS Distribution Box Plans, Sections, & Details S-801 Concrete Tank Details S-802 Concrete Wall and Floor Penetration Details S-803 Concrete Floor Slab and Wall Footing Details S-804 Concrete Equipment Pad & Misc. Concrete Details S-805 Masonry Wall Details and Lintel Schedule S-806 Aluminum Railing Details M-101 Headworks Plan and Section M-201 Primary Treatment Plans & Sections M-301 Advanced Treatment Building Basement Layout M-302 Advanced Treatment Building RAS/IMLR Mechanical Piping Plan M-303 Advanced Treatment Building WAS/Scum Mechanical Piping Plan M-304 Advanced Treatment Building Process Air Mechanical Piping M-305 Advanced Treatment Building RAS/IMLR Mechanical Piping Sections & Details M-306 Advanced Treatment Building WAS/Scum Mechanical Piping Sections & Details M-307 Advanced Treatment Building Ground Floor Process Air Mechanical Piping Plan M-308 Advanced Treatment Building Process Air Discharge Mechanical Piping Sections M-309 Advanced Treatment Building Process Air Intake Mechanical Piping Sections M-310 Gravity Thickeners Mechanical Plan and Section M-311 Gravity Thickeners Distribution Box and Scum Well Sections M-312 Bid Alternate #4 – Advanced Treatment Building Gravity Thickener FRP Cover System lan M-401 Solids Processing Building Proposed Plan 1 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA MAc149 SUMMARY OF FILED SUB-BID REQUIREMENTS WOODARD & CURRAN 01 11 20-9 M-402 Solids Processing Building Proposed Plan 2 M-801 Mechanical Details 1 M-802 Mechanical Details 2 M-803 Mechanical Details 3 H-001 HVAC Legend, Notes & Abbreviations H-101 Bid Alternate #1 – Headworks Building HVAC Floor Plan H-301 Advanced Treatment Building Ground Floor HVAC and Odor Control Plan H-401 Solids Processing Building HVAC Plans & Sections H-801 HVAC Schedules and Details E-001 Electrical Legend E-002 Headworks & Primary Treatment Building Part Plan/Overall Site Plan E-050 Main Switchboard ‘MSB’ One-line Diagram Existing Conditions E-051 Primary Treatment Building MCC4 & DP4A One-Line Diagrams E-052 Advanced Treatment Building SWBD & MCC10 One-Line Diagrams E-053 Advanced Treatment Building DP10 & DP10B One-Line Diagrams E-054 Headworks Building Panel PPHW Panel Schedules E-101 Bid Alternate #1 – Headworks Building Power & Systems Plan E-102 Bid Alternate #1 – Headworks Building Lighting Plan E-201 Primary Treatment Building Ground Level and Pipe Gallery Power Plan E-301 Advanced Treatment Building Basement Power Plan E-302 Advanced Treatment Building Ground Level Power Plan E-401 Solids Processing Building Demolition & Power Plans E-601 Instrumentation & Control Riser Diagram E-701 Wiring Diagrams – Sheet 1 E-801 Electrical Details Sheet 1 This listing of Drawings shall not limit the responsibility of the Plumbing Subcontractor to determine the full extent of the Work required by the complete set of Drawings. G. Requirements for Submitting Sub-Bids 1. Sub-Bids for Work covered by the Specifications and Drawings listed above shall comply with the requirements of MGL c149, §44F. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA MAc149 SUMMARY OF FILED SUB-BID REQUIREMENTS WOODARD & CURRAN 01 11 20-10 2. Sub-Bids shall be filed on the forms furnished by the Awarding Authority in the Bidding Requirements in a sealed envelope, at the time and place stipulated in the Advertisement for Bids and in accordance with the procedures and requirements set forth in the Bidding Requirements. H. Sub sub-Bids are required for the following Work per paragraph E of the Form for Sub-Bid – Painting which is customarily performed under subcontract with the Painting Subcontractor. NONE END OF SECTION 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA MAc149 SUMMARY OF FILED SUB-BID REQUIREMENTS WOODARD & CURRAN 01 11 20-11 HVAC FILED SUB-BID REQUIREMENTS A. The Work covered by the Specifications and Drawings listed below requires a filed sub-Bid in accordance with MGL c149, §44A through 44J, inclusive, as amended. B. The Contracting Requirements in Division 00 and other General Requirements in Division 01 apply to the Work covered by the Specifications and Drawings listed below. C. Examine all Drawings and Specifications for requirements that affect the Work identified. D. Coordinate the Work covered by the Specifications and Drawings listed below with related Work of other trades and cooperate with such trades to assure the steady progress of all Work under the Contract Documents. E. The term “Contractor” used herein and in Specifications and Drawings listed below shall mean the HVAC Subcontractor except where “General Contractor” is used. F. The Work under the HVAC sub-Bid is specified in the following Specification sections: 23 05 00 Common Work Results for HVAC (Filed Sub-Bid Required) 23 05 23 General-Duty Valves for HVAC Piping (Filed Sub-Bid Required) 23 05 29 Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment (Filed Sub- Bid Required) 23 05 53 Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment (Filed Sub-Bid Required) 23 05 93 Testing, Adjusting and Balancing for HVAC (Filed Sub-Bid Required) 23 09 00 Instrumentation and Control for HVAC (Filed Sub-Bid Required) 23 31 17 Fiberglass-Reinforced Plastic Ducts (Filed Sub-Bid Required) 23 34 00 HVAC Fans (Filed Sub-Bid Required) 23 80 00 Decentralized HVAC Equipment (Filed Sub-Bid Required) 23 82 39 Unit Heaters (Filed Sub-Bid Required) 23 90 00 Louvers and Vents (Filed Sub-Bid Required) and on the following Drawings: H-001 HVAC Legend, Notes & Abbreviations H-101 Bid Alternate #1- Headworks Building HVAC Floor Plan H-301 Advanced Treatment Building Ground Floor HVAC and Odor Control Plan H-401 Sludge Processing Building HVAC Plans & Sections H-801 HVAC Schedules and Details 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA MAc149 SUMMARY OF FILED SUB-BID REQUIREMENTS WOODARD & CURRAN 01 11 20-12 This listing of Drawings shall not limit the responsibility of the HVAC Subcontractor to determine the full extent of the Work required by the complete set of Drawings. G. Requirements for Submitting Sub-Bids 1. Sub-Bids for Work covered by the Specifications and Drawings listed above shall comply with the requirements of MGL c149, §44F. 2. Sub-Bids shall be filed on the forms furnished by the Awarding Authority in the Bidding Requirements in a sealed envelope, at the time and place stipulated in the Advertisement for Bids and in accordance with the procedures and requirements set forth in the Bidding Requirements. H. Sub sub-Bids are required for the following Work per paragraph E of the Form for Sub-Bid – HVAC which is customarily performed under subcontract with the HVAC Subcontractor. NONE END OF SECTION 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA MAc149 SUMMARY OF FILED SUB-BID REQUIREMENTS WOODARD & CURRAN 01 11 20-13 ELECTRICAL FILED SUB-BID REQUIREMENTS A. The Work covered by the Specifications and Drawings listed below requires a filed sub-Bid in accordance with MGL c149, §44A through 44J, inclusive, as amended. B. The Contracting Requirements in Division 00 and other General Requirements in Division 01 apply to the Work covered by the Specifications and Drawings listed below. C. Examine all Drawings and Specifications for requirements that affect the Work identified. D. Coordinate the Work covered by the Specifications and Drawings listed below with related Work of other trades and cooperate with such trades to assure the steady progress of all Work under the Contract Documents. E. The term “Contractor” used herein and in Specifications and Drawings listed below shall mean the Electrical Subcontractor except where “General Contractor” is used. F. The Work under the Electrical sub-Bid is specified in the following Specification sections: 26 05 00 Common Work Results for Electrical (Filed Sub-Bid Required) 26 05 19 Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables (Filed Sub- Bid Required) 26 05 23 Control-Voltage Electrical Power Cables (Filed Sub-Bid Required) 26 05 26 Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems (Filed Sub-Bid Required) 26 05 33 Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems (Filed Sub-Bid Required) 26 05 43 Underground Ducts and Raceways for Electrical Systems (Filed Sub-Bid Required) 26 05 73 Short Circuit Analysis and Coordination Study (Filed Sub-Bid Required) 26 08 00 Commissioning of Electrical Systems (Filed Sub-Bid Required) 26 22 00 Low Voltage Dry-Type Transformers (Filed Sub-Bid Required) 26 24 16 Panelboards (Filed Sub-Bid Required) 26 27 26 Wiring Devices (Filed Sub-Bid Required) 26 28 16 Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers (Filed Sub-Bid Required) 26 29 13 Enclosed Controllers (Filed Sub-Bid Required) 26 29 23 Variable Frequency Drives (Filed Sub-Bid Required) 26 41 00 Facility Lightning Protection (Filed Sub-Bid Required) 26 43 00 Surge Protective Devices (Filed Sub-Bid Required) 26 51 00 Interior Lighting (Filed Sub-Bid Required) 26 56 00 Exterior Lighting (Filed Sub-Bid Required) 27 05 00 Tele/Data Communications System (Filed Sub-Bid Required) 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA MAc149 SUMMARY OF FILED SUB-BID REQUIREMENTS WOODARD & CURRAN 01 11 20-14 and on the following Drawings: E-001 Electrical Legend E-002 Headworks & Primary Treatment Building Part Plan/Overall Site Plan ED-051 Primary Treatment Building MCC4 & DP4A Demolition One-Line Diagrams ED-052 Advanced Treatment Building SWBD & MCC10 Demolition One- Line Diagrams ED-053 Advanced Treatment Building DP10 & DP10B One Line Diagrams ED-054 Sludge Processing Building DP6 Demolition One-Line Diagram ED-101 Bid Alternate #1 – Headworks Building Electrical Demolition Plan ED-301 Advanced Treatment Building Basement Demolition Plan ED-302 Advanced Treatment Building Ground Level Demolition Plan E-050 Main Switchboard ‘MSB’ One-Line Diagram Existing Conditions E-051 Primary Treatment Building MCC 4 & DP4A One Line Diagrams E-052 Advanced Treatment Building SWBD & MCC10 One-Line Diagrams E-053 Advanced Treatment Building DP10 & DP10B One-Line Diagrams E-054 Headworks Building Panel PPHW Panel Schedules E-101 Bid Alternate #1 – Headworks Building Power & Systems Plan E-102 Bid Alternate #1 – Headworks Building Lighting Plan E-201 Primary Treatment Building Ground Level and Pipe Gallery Power Plan E-301 Advanced Treatment Building Basement Power Plan E-302 Advanced Treatment Building Ground Level Power Plan E-401 Sludge Processing Building Demolition & Power Plans E-601 Instrumentation & Control Riser Diagram E-701 Wiring Diagrams – Sheet 1 E-801 Electrical Details Sheet 1 This listing of Drawings shall not limit the responsibility of the Electrical Subcontractor to determine the full extent of the Work required by the complete set of Drawings. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA MAc149 SUMMARY OF FILED SUB-BID REQUIREMENTS WOODARD & CURRAN 01 11 20-15 G. Requirements for Submitting Sub-Bids 1. Sub-Bids for Work covered by the Specifications and Drawings listed above shall comply with the requirements of MGL c149, §44F. 2. Sub-Bids shall be filed on the forms furnished by the Awarding Authority in the Bidding Requirements in a sealed envelope, at the time and place stipulated in the Advertisement for Bids and in accordance with the procedures and requirements set forth in the Bidding Requirements. H. Sub sub-Bids are required for the following Work per paragraph E of the Form for Sub-Bid – Electrical which is customarily performed under subcontract with the Electrical Subcontractor. NONE END OF SECTION MAc149 SUMMARY OF FILED SUB-BID REQUIREMENTS WOODARD & CURRAN 01 11 20-16 This page intentionally left blank. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA MAc149 SUMMARY OF FILED SUB-BID REQUIREMENTS WOODARD & CURRAN 01 11 20-17 MASONRY FILED SUB-BID REQUIREMENTS A. The Work covered by the Specifications and Drawings listed below requires a filed sub-Bid in accordance with MGL c149, §44A through 44J, inclusive, as amended. B. The Contracting Requirements in Division 00 and other General Requirements in Division 01 apply to the Work covered by the Specifications and Drawings listed below. C. Examine all Drawings and Specifications for requirements that affect the Work identified. D. Coordinate the Work covered by the Specifications and Drawings listed below with related Work of other trades and cooperate with such trades to assure the steady progress of all Work under the Contract Documents. E. The term “Contractor” used herein and in Specifications and Drawings listed below shall mean the Masonry Subcontractor except where “General Contractor” is used. F. The Work under the Masonry sub-Bid is specified in the following Specification sections: 04 20 00 Unit Masonry (Filed Sub-Bid Required) and on the following Drawings: A-001 Architectural Notes, Legend & Abbreviations A-101 Bid Alternate #1 – Headworks Building Architectural Elevations A-102 Bid Alternate #1 – Headworks Building Architectural Floor Plan & Notes A-103 Bid Alternate #1 – Headworks Building Architectural Sections A-301 Advanced Treatment Building Electrical Room Plan and Sections A-801 Architectural Schedules & Details A-802 Architectural Details S-001 Structural General Notes S-805 Masonry Wall Details and Lintel Schedule This listing of Drawings shall not limit the responsibility of the Masonry Subcontractor to determine the full extent of the Work required by the complete set of Drawings. G. Requirements for Submitting Sub-Bids 1. Sub-Bids for Work covered by the Specifications and Drawings listed above shall comply with the requirements of MGL c149, §44F. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA MAc149 SUMMARY OF FILED SUB-BID REQUIREMENTS WOODARD & CURRAN 01 11 20-18 2. Sub-Bids shall be filed on the forms furnished by the Awarding Authority in the Bidding Requirements in a sealed envelope, at the time and place stipulated in the Advertisement for Bids and in accordance with the procedures and requirements set forth in the Bidding Requirements. H. Sub sub-Bids are required for the following Work per paragraph E of the Form for Sub-Bid – Masonry which is customarily performed under subcontract with the Masonry Subcontractor. NONE END OF SECTION 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA PAYMENT AND ADMINISTRATIVE PROCEDURES For use with EJCDC C2007 AND QUALITY REQUIREMENTS WOODARD & CURRAN 01 15 30-1 SECTION 01 15 30 PAYMENT AND ADMINISTRATIVE PROCEDURES AND QUALITY REQUIREMENTS PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements relating to payment, the process of contract administration, and the methods of communicating, controlling, and assuring quality. This Section applies to all Specifications and Drawings and provisions of this Section may be supplemented in other sections of Division 01. B. Certain provisions required by Laws and Regulations may be referenced. Contractor is responsible to determine and obtain applicable Laws and Regulations and to review and interpret the full text of such Laws and Regulations. C. Section Includes 1.02 PAYMENT PROCEDURES Schedule of Values Payment Procedures Change Procedures Measurement and Payment Procedures Correlation of Submittals 1.03 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS Project Management and Coordination; Meetings Documentation of Progress Submittal Procedures Closeout Procedures 1.04 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS Reference Standards and Regulatory Requirements Qualifications 1.05 ATTACHMENTS 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA PAYMENT AND ADMINISTRATIVE PROCEDURES For use with EJCDC C2007 AND QUALITY REQUIREMENTS WOODARD & CURRAN 01 15 30-2 1.02 PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Schedule of Values: in accordance with Article 2 of the Standard General and Supplementary Conditions, if any. 1. Provide sufficient detail to allow for determination of the value of the Work at any degree of completion. Submit electronically: by email in PDF format B. Payment Procedures: in accordance with Article 14 of Standard General and Supplementary Conditions, if any. 1. Submit Application for Payment using the form included in the Project Forms section. Utilize latest approved Schedule of Values for listing items in Application for Payment. Provide supporting documentation for items included in the Application for Payment. Number of hardcopies: 6 2. Payment Period: at intervals stipulated in the Agreement. 3. Submit an updated Progress Schedule with each Application for Payment. C. Change Procedures: in accordance with Articles 10 and 12 of Standard General and Supplementary Conditions, if any, utilizing forms included in Section 00 60 00 Project Forms. Submit electronically: by email in PDF format 1. Field Order: as authorized by Paragraph 9.04 of the Standard General and Supplementary Conditions, if any. 2. Change Request: issued by Engineer, Owner or Contractor to request or authorize minor variations and deviations, amendments or supplements to the Contract Documents. Initiate requests for substitute items per Paragraph 6.05 of the Standard General and Supplementary Conditions, if any, using a Change Request. a. Engineer or Owner to include a detailed description of a proposed change with supplementary or revised Drawings and Specifications, including a change in Contract Times related to the change (with a stipulation for any overtime work required) and the period of time during which the requested price (if any) will be considered valid. Prepare and submit an estimate within 15 days. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA PAYMENT AND ADMINISTRATIVE PROCEDURES For use with EJCDC C2007 AND QUALITY REQUIREMENTS WOODARD & CURRAN 01 15 30-3 b. Describe the proposed change and its full effect on the Work. Describe the reason for the change and the effect on the Contract Price and Contract Time with full documentation (and a statement describing the effect on Work by separate or other contractors). 3. Work Change Directive: as defined in Paragraph 1.01.A.51 of the Standard General and Supplementary Conditions, if any. 4. Change Order: in accordance with Articles 10 and 12 of the Standard General and Supplementary Conditions, if any. a. Stipulated Price Change Order: based on Contractor's maximum price quotation or Contractor's request for a Change Order as approved by Engineer or Owner. b. Unit Price Change Order: for pre-determined unit prices and quantities and executed on a fixed unit price basis. Execute Work under a Work Change Directive for unit costs or quantities of Work not pre-determined. Changes in Contract Price and Contract Time to be computed as specified for Time and Material Change Order. c. Time and Material Change Order: based on itemized account and supporting data after completion of change within time limits indicated in the Standard General and Supplementary Conditions, if any. Engineer or Owner and Contractor to determine the change allowable in Contract Price and Contract Time as provided in the Standard General and Supplementary Conditions, if any. Maintain detailed records of Work completed on this basis, provide provide full information for evaluation of proposed changes, and substantiate costs for changes in the Work. 5. “Or Equals” and Substitutes: Request “Or-Equal” and substitute items items as a Change Request per subparagraph 1.02.C.2 above, with complete data substantiating compliance with Contract Documents. a. Or-Equal” and substitute items will be processed in accordance with Paragraph 6.05 of the Standard General and Supplementary Conditions, if any, and subparagraph 1.03.C.6 below. D. Measurement and Payment Procedures 1. Payment includes full compensation for required labor, material and equipment, tools, plant, transportation, services and incidentals; erection, 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA PAYMENT AND ADMINISTRATIVE PROCEDURES For use with EJCDC C2007 AND QUALITY REQUIREMENTS WOODARD & CURRAN 01 15 30-4 application or installation and construction of an item of the Work; and overhead and profit, unless otherwise indicated. E. Correlation of Submittals 1. Promptly revise Schedule of Values and Applications for Payment to record each authorized Change Order as a separate line item and adjust the Contract Price. 2. Promptly revise Progress Schedule to reflect any change in Contract Times and revise sub-schedules to adjust time for other items of the Work affected by the change. 3. Promptly enter changes in Project Record Documents. 1.03 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Project Management and Coordination; Meetings 1. Contact information for Owner and other entities related to the Project and special coordination requirements and contacts during prosecution of the Work are identified in the Project Contact list included as an attachment to this section. 2. Inform Owner and Engineer of the address for sending official correspondence and the address and telephone number of Contractor's representative who will be project manager and Site superintendent for the Contract. 3. During periods of construction and testing keep Owner and Engineer informed in writing with name, address, and telephone number of Contractor's representative who will be responsible and available outside of normal working hours for emergency repairs and the maintenance of safety devices. 4. Identify correspondence, submittals, drawings, data and materials, packing slips or other items associated with this Contract as follows. SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES 5. Coordinate scheduling, submittals, and Work of the various Specifications to effectuate an efficient and orderly sequence for installing interdependent construction elements, with provisions for accommodating items installed later. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA PAYMENT AND ADMINISTRATIVE PROCEDURES For use with EJCDC C2007 AND QUALITY REQUIREMENTS WOODARD & CURRAN 01 15 30-5 6. Preconstruction Conference and Site Mobilization Meeting a. Owner to schedule an initial preconstruction conference in accordance with Paragraph 2.06 of the Standard General and Supplementary Conditions, if any. b. Attendance required by Owner, Contractor, Engineer, Contractor's Superintendent, Project Manager, and Subcontractors as a minimum. c. Sample Agenda · Distribute Contract Documents · Discuss design concepts · Discuss preliminary Progress Schedule, Schedule of Submittals, Schedule of Values and preliminary cash flow projections. · Designate personnel representing each party; communication procedures · Procedures and processing of submittals, substitutions, applications for payments, Change Orders and Contract closeout procedures · Scheduling · Use of premises by Owner and Contractor · Owner's requirements and partial occupancy · Construction facilities and controls provided by Owner · Temporary utilities provided by Owner and Contractor · Survey and Site Layout · Security and housekeeping procedures · Schedules · Procedures for testing · Procedures for maintaining record documents · Requirements for start-up · Inspection and acceptance of equipment put into service during construction period · Access, laydown and coordination with others d. Engineer will record minutes and distribute draft copies promptly after meeting to Owner and Contractor for review, then revise as required and distribute thereafter to meeting participants, with copies to Owner and Contractor, and those affected by decisions made. 7. Progress Meetings a. Owner to schedule progress meetings beginning no later than 60 days after the Initial Conference and continue thereafter on a monthly basis throughout progress of the Work. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA PAYMENT AND ADMINISTRATIVE PROCEDURES For use with EJCDC C2007 AND QUALITY REQUIREMENTS WOODARD & CURRAN 01 15 30-6 b. Attendance required by Contractor, Contractor's Superintendent, major Subcontractors and Suppliers, Owner and Engineer as appropriate to agenda topics for each meeting. c. Sample Agenda · Review minutes of previous meetings – unresolved issues · Overall project status · Work Completed · Anticipated Work · Schedule · Pay Applications · Change Orders · Submittals · Observations, problems, and decisions · General Discussion/Comments · Action Items · Date and time for next meeting d. Engineer will record minutes and distribute draft copies promptly after meeting to Owner and Contractor for review, then revise as required and distribute thereafter to meeting participants, with copies to Owner and Contractor, and those affected by decisions made. 8. Pre-installation Conference and Coordination Meetings a. When required, convene a pre-installation conference at Site before commencing certain Work that requires coordination or has special requirements or approval. b. Convene coordination meetings as may be generally required. c. Attendance required by parties directly affecting, or affected by, Work of the specific Specification section. 1) For pre-installation conference, notify Owner and Engineer 5 days in advance. 2) For coordination meetings, party requesting coordination meeting to notify other party(s). d. Review conditions, preparation and procedures, and coordination with related Work. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA PAYMENT AND ADMINISTRATIVE PROCEDURES For use with EJCDC C2007 AND QUALITY REQUIREMENTS WOODARD & CURRAN 01 15 30-7 B. Documentation of Progress 1. Submit preliminary and final Progress Schedules as specified in Paragraphs 2.05 and 2.07 of the Standard General and Supplementary Conditions, if any, or as established in Notice to Proceed. Submit electronically: by email in PDF format a. Show complete sequence of construction by activity, identifying Work of separate stages and other logically grouped activities. Indicate the early and late start, early and late finish, float dates, and duration. b. Indicate estimated percentage of completion for each item of Work at each submission. c. Indicate dates for fabrication, factory testing, delivery, shipping and field testing, and material and equipment delivery dates, including those furnished by Owner. Coordinate with Schedule of Submittals. 2. Submit revised Progress Schedule on monthly basis and with each Application for Payment, identifying changes since previous version. Coordinate content with Schedule of Values, if any. 3. Documentation of Pre-Construction Conditions, Construction Progress, and Final Conditions a. Construction Photographs: to record Site conditions. Ensure existing conditions of roadway surfaces, curbing, berms, sidewalks, driveways, property bounds, landscaped areas, abutters property and any other items that might be affected by the Work are clearly recorded. 1) Submit prior to starting construction. 2) Submit photographs with Payment Application monthly during progress of Work. Construction photographs: electronic in PDF or JPG format, minimum 300 dpi quality and a minimum resolution of 6.0 megapixels. Identify photographs with date, time, orientation and Project identification. Submit electronically: on CD 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA PAYMENT AND ADMINISTRATIVE PROCEDURES For use with EJCDC C2007 AND QUALITY REQUIREMENTS WOODARD & CURRAN 01 15 30-8 b. Digital Video Recording: Video record, in color, all areas of the Project Site. Ensure existing conditions of roadway surfaces, curbing, berms, sidewalks, driveways, property bounds, landscaped areas, abutters’ property and any other items that might be affected by the Work are clearly recorded. 1) Submit prior to the starting construction. 2) Arrange for video recordings to be conducted by a professional videographer in digital videodisc (DVD) format. Include clear and concise audio descriptions of the existing Project Site conditions. 3) Submit 1 copy of the first completed video recording to the Engineer for review of visual and audio quality. Re-record any recording furnished which, in the opinion of the Engineer, are poor quality or incomplete at no additional cost to Owner. Submit 2 copies of approved videos. 4. Reports a. Submit weekly Safety Reports signed by the Safety Representative. C. Submittal Procedures 1. Schedule submittals to expedite the Project and coordinate with schedules required by Paragraph 1.03.B above. Deliver each submittal in the quantity and electronic form indicated to Engineer (with copy to Owner where required) at the addresses specified below. Coordinate submission of related items. Engineer: Woodard & Curran 980 Washington Street, Suite 325 Dedham, MA 02026 Attn: Krista Forti Phone: 781-251-0200 Email: kforti@woodardcurran.com 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA PAYMENT AND ADMINISTRATIVE PROCEDURES For use with EJCDC C2007 AND QUALITY REQUIREMENTS WOODARD & CURRAN 01 15 30-9 Owner: Town of Nantucket Department of Public Works P.O. Box 239 188 Madaket Road Nantucket, MA 02554 Attn: Kara Buzanoski, Director Phone: 508-228-7244 Email: kbuzanoski@nantucket-ma.gov 2. Present submittals in a clear and thorough manner, in English and using English units. Provide space for Contractor, Engineer, and Owner's review stamps. Use sheet size of not less than 8 1/2 by 11 inches and not more than 24 by 36 inches. 3. Revise and resubmit documents as required. Identify all changes made since previous submittal. Distribute copies of reviewed submittals to concerned parties. Instruct parties to promptly report any inability to comply with provisions. Submittals not requested on the submittal schedule may not be recognized or processed. 4. Submit preliminary and final Schedule of Submittals as specified in Article 2 of the Standard General and Supplementary Conditions, if any, or as established in Notice to Proceed. Include all submittals specified in the Standard General and Supplementary Conditions, if any, General Requirements, and other Specification sections. Submit electronically: by email in PDF format a. Include description of each submittal, date by which each submittal will be delivered to Engineer and Owner, date by which each submittal must be approved to maintain project schedule, and relevant section reference. b. Include which submittals will be provided with a Certificate of Compliance with AIS Requirements, per Section 00 7376. c. Allow 15-30 days from receipt of submittal/resubmittal for Engineer review of submittals and possible resubmittal. 5. Shop Drawings and Samples: Submit in accordance with Paragraph 6.17 of the Standard General and Supplementary Conditions, if any, and as follows, and coordinate with the Schedule of Submittals required in subparagraph 4 above. Electronic format: PDF Submit electronically: by email 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA PAYMENT AND ADMINISTRATIVE PROCEDURES For use with EJCDC C2007 AND QUALITY REQUIREMENTS WOODARD & CURRAN 01 15 30-10 a. Complete the submittal transmittal form included as an attachment to this Section as is indicated, numbering each submittal consecutively. Assign resubmittals the same transmittal number as the original with a suffix of a sequential letter to indicate the resubmittal (e.g. the first resubmittal of submittal 25 would be number 25A.) Include only those documents previously issued under original transmittal number in resubmittals. Do not combine new submittals with resubmittals. b. Attach a transmittal form to each group of Shop Drawings, manufacturer's literature, equipment data and Samples submitted. Use a sufficient number of transmittal forms so that: items on a single transmittal form pertain to the same equipment item, Specification section or element of Work; items on a single transmittal form are either original submittals or the same number resubmittal; and each Sample is listed on a separate transmittal form. c. Engineer to complete review in accordance with Paragraph 6.17.D. of the Standard General and Supplementary Conditions, if any. d. Submittals which do not have a fully completed transmittal form will be returned along with unreviewed attachments. Returned submittals, even though incomplete, will be counted as a submittal. e. Contractor shall reimburse Owner for Engineer’s time for resubmittals per Paragraph 6.17.E. of the Standard General and Supplementary Conditions. f. Submission of any Shop Drawing or Sample bearing Contractor's and Engineer's approval shall constitute a representation to Owner that the requirements of Paragraph 6.17 of the Standard General and Supplementary Conditions, if any, have been fulfilled. g. Submit Certification of Compliance with AIS Requirements with each applicable submittal, as indicated in Section 00 73 76, Paragraph SC-6.17. 6. Variations: Identify variations from Contract Documents and material and equipment or system limitations which may be detrimental to successful performance of the completed Work and identify reasons therefor in accordance with subparagraph 6.17.C.3 of the Standard General and Supplementary Conditions, if any. a. Clearly identify requests for “Or-Equal” and substitute items and submit per Paragraph 6.05 of Standard General and Supplementary Conditions, if any, and subparagraph 1.02.C.5 above. Substitute items will not be considered when indicated or implied on Shop Drawing or material and equipment data submittals without separate 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA PAYMENT AND ADMINISTRATIVE PROCEDURES For use with EJCDC C2007 AND QUALITY REQUIREMENTS WOODARD & CURRAN 01 15 30-11 written request, or when acceptance will require revision to the Contract Documents. 7. Manufacturers' Installation Instructions and Certificates: Submit printed instructions for delivery, storage, assembly, installation, start-up, adjusting, and finishing. Electronic format: PDF Submit electronically: by email a. Indicate special procedures, perimeter conditions requiring special attention and special environmental criteria required for application or installation. b. Submit manufacturers' certificates for recent or previous test results on material or equipment, but they must be acceptable to Engineer and Owner. Indicate material or equipment conforms to or exceeds specified requirements and provide supporting reference date, affidavits, and certifications as appropriate. c. Submit test results, data, and reports and certifications to Engineer based on tests performed. Submit test reports and certifications for independent testing services specified. 8. Record Documents and Closeout Submittals: submit in accordance with Paragraph 6.12 of the Standard General and Supplementary Conditions, if any, and Paragraph 1.03.D below. a. As-Builts for Material and Equipment Number of prints: 3 Electronic format: PDF and DWG Submit electronically: on CD Indicate "As-Supplied" in revision block and sign. Show all changes and revisions to Final Completion per execution and closeout requirements. b. Conformed to Construction Record Drawings: Submit for Engineer’s use in preparing final Record Drawings. Number of prints: 3 Electronic format: PDF and DWG Submit electronically: on CD 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA PAYMENT AND ADMINISTRATIVE PROCEDURES For use with EJCDC C2007 AND QUALITY REQUIREMENTS WOODARD & CURRAN 01 15 30-12 Indicate "Conformed by Contractor to Construction Records" in revision block and sign. Show all changes and revisions to Final Completion per execution and closeout requirements. c. Warranties and Guarantees: Submit duplicate notarized copies of warranty documents which are executed and transferable from Subcontractors, Suppliers, and manufacturers. For items of Work delayed beyond date of Substantial Completion, provide updated submittal within 10 days after acceptance, listing date of acceptance as start of Warranty Period. Assemble in three ring binders with durable plastic cover with a table of contents 1) Submit in PDF format on CD. 2) Submit duplicate notarized copies of warranty documents which are executed and transferable from Subcontractors, Suppliers and manufacturers. For items of Work delayed beyond date of Substantial Completion, provide updated submittal within 10 days after acceptance, listing date of acceptance as start of warranty period. d. Operation and Maintenance Data 1) Submit draft of completed volumes 30 days prior to equipment startup. Revise content of all sets as required prior to final submission. Number of hardcopies: 4 Submit in PDF format on CD. 2) Submit final volumes within 10 days after final inspection. Submit in PDF format on CD. Submit data in ring binders with durable plastic covers with 8 1/2 by 11 inch text pages. Cover: title "OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS", title of Project, and subject matter of binder when multiple binders are required. a) Subdivide binder contents with permanent page dividers, logically organized as described below with laminated plastic tabs and clearly print the contents. Prepare a Table of Contents for each volume, with material, equipment, or system description identified, in three parts as follows. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA PAYMENT AND ADMINISTRATIVE PROCEDURES For use with EJCDC C2007 AND QUALITY REQUIREMENTS WOODARD & CURRAN 01 15 30-13 Part 1: Directory, listing names, addresses, and telephone numbers of Contractor, Subcontractors, and major equipment Suppliers, and service representative. Part 2: Operation and maintenance instructions arranged by system and subdivided by Specification section. For each system, identify names, addresses, and telephone numbers of Subcontractors and Suppliers. Identify the following: Significant design criteria List of equipment with As-Builts certified “As- Supplied” Parts list for each component Operating instructions Inspection, maintenance and adjustment instructions for equipment and systems Lubrication and maintenance schedules Maintenance instructions for special finishes, including recommended cleaning methods and materials, and special precautions identifying detrimental agents Troubleshooting guides Schematic diagrams Part 3: Material Safety Data Sheets Part 4: Other Project documents and certificates, including the following: • Certificates • Photocopies of warranties D. Closeout Procedures 1. Substantial Completion shall have been achieved when the following has been completed and the requirements of Paragraph 14.04 of the Standard General and Supplementary Conditions, if any, have been met. a. Work is complete, systems are successfully operating, and final testing has been successfully completed. b. A full inventory of the spare parts and special tools purchased by the Owner are replenished and in the custody of the Owner. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA PAYMENT AND ADMINISTRATIVE PROCEDURES For use with EJCDC C2007 AND QUALITY REQUIREMENTS WOODARD & CURRAN 01 15 30-14 c. The Site has been restored to the satisfaction of the Owner. d. An inspection of the Work has been completed by the Engineer and the Owner. e. An updated Punch List is provided. f. The Contractor’s written warranty and guarantee has been submitted as required by Paragraph 16.19.D. of the Standard General and Supplementary Conditions, if any. g. A Certificate of Substantial Completion has been provided in accordance with Paragraph 14.04.C. of the Standard General and Supplementary Conditions, if any. 2. The Contractor shall have sole care, custody, and control of the Work until achievement of Substantial Completion. During the period between Substantial Completion and the date for Final Completion, Contractor shall be given access to correct items on the Punch List and achieve Final Completion. 3. The date of achieving Substantial Completion is the date set forth in the Certificate of Substantial Completion that is accepted and signed by the Owner. 4. Final Completion shall have been achieved when the Work is complete, the requirements of Paragraphs 14.06 and 14.07 of the Standard General and Supplementary Conditions, if any, have been met, and when the following is complete. a. Substantial Completion has been achieved and liquidated damages for failure to meet Substantial Completion Date have been paid. b. All Work including Punch List Items has been completed. c. Final cleaning has been conducted and Contractor equipment and supplies including waste materials have been removed from the Site and legally disposed of. d. A full set of record documents have been submitted as specified in subparagraph 1.03.C.8 above and Contractor’s written warranty and guarantee has been resubmitted if adjusted. e. Inspections required by Laws and Regulations are complete. Certificates and permits to occupy and operate have been issued if required. f. Spare parts, maintenance and extra materials have been delivered in quantities specified to Project Site and stored as directed. g. A request for final inspection in accordance with Paragraph 14.06 of the Standard General and Supplementary Conditions, if any, has 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA PAYMENT AND ADMINISTRATIVE PROCEDURES For use with EJCDC C2007 AND QUALITY REQUIREMENTS WOODARD & CURRAN 01 15 30-15 been submitted to the Engineer and the inspection has been completed and the results accepted by the Owner. h. A Final Application for Payment has been submitted to the Engineer identifying total adjusted Contract Price, previous payments, and balance due along with required documentation in accordance with Paragraph 14.07.A. of the Standard General and Supplementary Conditions, if any. 1.04 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS A. Reference Standards and Regulatory Requirements 1. Reference to standards, specifications, manuals or codes of any technical society, organization or association, or Laws or Regulations of any governmental authority are used in accordance with Paragraph 3.02 of the Standard General and Supplementary Conditions, if any. 2. Acronyms and abbreviations used are defined in the applicable versions of the Encyclopedia of Associations published by Gale (part of Cengage Learning) generally available in large libraries and on the internet. 3. Specific requirements applicable to the Project include the following: a. Comply with the Massachusetts Department of Transportation - Highway Division’s (referred to as “MassDOT”) Construction Specifications (including Interim Supplemental Specifications and Supplemental Specifications but not including Compensation sections), Construction Details (including Standard Drawings), and Design Guides as incorporated into the Specifications and Drawings, and as may be modified therein or superseded by the Owner’s requirements through the direction of the Engineer. b. Specific sections of the MassDOT documents are referenced in the Specifications and Drawings. References to “Department” in the MassDOT documents shall mean Owner or Resident Project Representative for this Project. See MassDOT Highway Division website listing of documents included as an attachment to this Section. www.massdot.state.ma.us/highway/DoingBusinessWithUs/Manuals PublicationsForms B. Qualifications 1. Meet or provide capability to meet the criteria specified in individual Specification sections in connection with various portions of the Work of the Contract Documents. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA PAYMENT AND ADMINISTRATIVE PROCEDURES For use with EJCDC C2007 AND QUALITY REQUIREMENTS WOODARD & CURRAN 01 15 30-16 2. As a minimum, Contractor shall: a. have been regularly and actively engaged in similar Work as described in the Contract Documents, operating under the same business name and business organization structure, for the last 5 years on at least 5 projects; b. have successfully completed at least 3 projects involving construction of similar facilities in the same state as the Project covered by the Contract Documents; c. have a full-time project manager in responsible charge of the Work with at least 10 years’ experience as project manager on comparable projects; and d. carry at least the insurance coverage and amounts required in Article 5 of the Standard General and Supplementary Conditions, if any. 3. Additional requirements include the following. a. Sheet metal work must be performed by a contractor licensed in accordance with 271 CMR 1.00, et seq. governing licensing, permitting, and sheet metal work in Massachusetts. b. General Bidders must be certified by the Commonwealth of Massachusetts Division of Capital Asset Management and Maintenance (DCAMM) for sewage and water treatment plants. 1.05 ATTACHMENTS A. Transmittal form B. Project Contact list C. List of MassDOT Highway Division documents END OF SECTION This page intentionally left blank Surfside WWTF Upgrades (CWSRF 4034) Master Contact List Town of Nantucket Town Hall, 16 Broad Street, Nantucket, MA 02554 WWTF Address: 81 South Shore Road, Nantucket, MA 02554 Name Title Office Phone Cell Phone Fax Email Kara Buzanoski DPW Director (508) 228-7244 Kbuzanoski@nantucket-ma.gov David Gray WWTF Chief Operator (508) 228-4824 dgray@nantucket-ma.gov Woodard & Curran Office Address: (Dedham office) 980 Washington Street, Suite 325, Dedham, MA 02026 Name Title Office Phone Cell Phone Fax Email Mike Burns Project Manager (860) 253-2461 (860) 268-9566 mburns@woodardcurran.com Krista Forti Project Engineer (781) 613-0573 (860) 690-7502 (781) 251-0847 kforti@woodardcurran.com Kate Roosa Engineer (781) 613-0572 (781) 251-0847 kroosa@woodardcurran.com Weston & Sampson David Burke Owners Project Manager (978) 532-1900 x2327 (978) 977- 0100 burked@wseinc.com This page intentionally left blank 12/7/2015 Manuals, Publications & Forms ­ Doing Business With Us ­ Highway Division http://www.massdot.state.ma.us/highway/DoingBusinessWithUs/ManualsPublicationsForms.aspx 1/3 MassDOT Home | About Us | Employment | Contact Us | Site Policies     The Official Website of The Massachusetts Department of Transportation ­ Highway Division Home > Doing Business With Us > Manuals Publications & Forms   Manuals, Publications & Forms Construction Design/Engineering Contractor/Vendor Information Approved Materials and Fabricators Local Aid Programs Permits & Road Access Programs Seasonal Manuals Publications & Forms Doing Business With Us Construction Specifications Construction Details Design Guide and Manuals Environmental Documents Project Management Guides Highway Access Permits Miscellaneous Publications MassDOT posts most of its manuals, publications and forms on its website. To view the documents listed below, click on the links. If you can't find what you're looking for below, please browse by department. Construction Specifications Title Date File Type/Size Standard Specification for Highways and Bridges (English Edition) 1988 HTML Standard Specifications for Highways and Bridges (Metric Edition) 1995 PDF | 2.49MB 2015 Supplemental Specifications to the Standard Specifications for Highways and Bridges 7/1/2015 PDF | 2.1MB Interim Supplemental Specifications 9/18/2015 PDF | 68KB Price Adjustments Updated Monthly View Pages Superseded Publications 2012 Supplemental Specifications to the Standard Specifications for Highways and Bridges 6/15/2012 PDF | 1.6MB 2010 Supplemental Specifications to the 1988 Standard Specifications for Highways and Bridges (Combined English and Metric Edition) (Combined English and Metric Edition) 2/25/2010 PDF | 1MB 2006 Supplemental Specifications to the 1988 Standard Specifications for Highways and Bridges (English Edition) 6/6/2006 PDF | 1.73MB 2006 Supplemental Specifications to the 1995 Standard Specifications for Highways and Bridges (Metric Edition) 6/6/2006 PDF | 1.41mb Construction Details Title Date File 12/7/2015 Manuals, Publications & Forms ­ Doing Business With Us ­ Highway Division http://www.massdot.state.ma.us/highway/DoingBusinessWithUs/ManualsPublicationsForms.aspx 2/3 Type/Size 2014 Construction Standard Details Jun 2014 PDF | 15.2MB Notes on Walks and Wheelchair Ramps for Designers and Construction Engineers March 2012 PDF | 140KB Traffic Management Plans and Detail Drawings HTML link Standard Drawings for Signs and Supports 1990 PDF | 7MB Standard Drawings for Traffic Signals and Highway Lighting 1968 PDF | 3.25MB Superseded Publications 2012 Construction Standard Details Mar 2012 PDF | 27MB 2012 Construction Standard Details: Drawing History Index 2012 PDF | 119KB 2010 Construction Standard Details (English Edition) 2010 PDF | 13MB Metric/English Supplemental Drawings Supplement to the 1996 Metric Edition of the Construction and Traffic Standard Details and the 1977 Mass. Department of Public Works Construction Standards Apr 2003 PDF | 5.6MB Construction and Traffic Standard Details (Metric Edition) 1996 PDF | 7.8MB 1966 Construction Standards 1st Edition (Obsolete) May 1966 PDF | 10MB Design Guide and Manuals Title Date File Type/Size Project Development & Design Guide 2006 HTML Separated Bike Lane Planning and Design Guide 2015 LRFD Bridge Manual ­ 2013 Edition Jun 2013 HTML 2005 Bridge Manual, Revised August 2007 Aug 2007 HTML CAD Standards   Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices FHWA Link Massachusetts Amendments to the 2009 Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices and the Standard Municipal Traffic Code HTML link Survey Manual 1996 HTML Historic Parkway Preservation Treatment Guidelines (DCR) Mar 2007 PDF | 28MB Superseded Publications Addenda to the 1997 Highway Design Apr PDF | 12/7/2015 Manuals, Publications & Forms ­ Doing Business With Us ­ Highway Division http://www.massdot.state.ma.us/highway/DoingBusinessWithUs/ManualsPublicationsForms.aspx 3/3 Select Language  Powered by  Translator MassDOT Home | About Us | Employment | Contact Us | Site Policies Copyright © 2015 Commonwealth of Massachusetts  | Translation Support Manual 2003 2.7MB Highway Design Manual 1997 PDF | 6.65MB Miscellaneous Publications Title Date File Type/Size Bridge Inspection Handbook 2015 Edition May 2015 HTML Design Build Procurement Guide 2012 PDF | 233KB Diesel Equipment Retrofit HTML English Bid Item Nomenclature List 9/25/2015 PDF | 935KB Metric Bid Item Nomenclature List 9/25/2015 PDF | 950KB Guide Sign Policy for Secondary State Highways 2008 HTML Identification of Massachusetts Freight Issues and Priorities Nov 1999 PDF | 7.4MB Procedures for Speed Zoning on State and Municipal Roadways 2012 PDF | 2.2MB Utility Accommodation Policy May 2013 PDF | 6.5MB Vegetation Management Plans District 1 Yearly Operational Plan 2015 2015 PDF | 580KB District 1 Vegetation Management Plan 2012 ­ 2016 2012 PDF | 452KB Herbicide Alternatives Research Jul­2008 PDF | 8.9MB This page intentionally left blank 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA For use with EJCDC 2007 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS WOODARD & CURRAN 01 50 00-1 SECTION 01 50 00 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. This Section specifies temporary facilities and controls for execution of the Work put into place for use only during the period of construction, that will be removed when no longer required for construction operations. This Section applies to all Specifications and Drawings and provisions of this Section may be supplemented in other sections of Division 01. B. Certain provisions required by Laws and Regulations may be referenced. Contractor is responsible to determine and obtain applicable Laws and Regulations and to review and interpret the full text of such Laws and Regulations. C. Section Includes 1.02 TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES Barriers Protection of Work Security Safety Facilities Access Roads Parking Field Offices Staging Area Project Identification Progress Cleaning and Waste Removal 1.03 TEMPORARY UTILITIES 1.04 TEMPORARY CONTROLS Dust Control Water Control and Dewatering Erosion and Sediment Control Noise Control Pollution Control Traffic Regulation 1.05 REMOVAL OF TEMPORARY UTILITIES, FACILITIES, AND CONTROLS 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA For use with EJCDC 2007 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS WOODARD & CURRAN 01 50 00-2 1.02 TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES A. Barriers 1. Comply with the requirements of Paragraph 6.11. of the Standard General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions, if any. 2. Furnish barriers to prevent unauthorized entry to and clear delineation of construction areas, to allow for Owner's use of Site, and to protect existing facilities and adjacent properties from damage from construction operations as recommended by OSHA and as otherwise required for the protection of life and property during construction. 3. Construct barricades and protective facilities in accordance with local and state regulations. Furnish and install signs, lights, reflectors, and such protection facilities as may be required. 4. Furnish barricades required by governing authorities for public rights of way. 5. Provide protection for plant life designated to remain. Replace damaged plant life. 6. Protect non owned vehicular traffic, stored materials, Site and structures from damage. 7. Furnish a commercial grade, minimum 8 foot high chain link fence around construction Site. Equip with vehicular gates with locks. B. Protection of Work 1. Protect Work during working and non-working hours. 2. Provide special protection where specified in Specifications or Drawings and in accordance with manufacturer recommendations. 3. Furnish temporary and removable protection for installed equipment and material. Control activity in immediate Work area to minimize damage. 4. Protect exterior areas of Work from damage. Prohibit traffic from landscaped areas. 5. Buildings and Enclosures a. Furnish protective coverings at walls, projections, jambs, sills, and soffits of openings and protect finished floors, stairs, and other surfaces from traffic, dirt, wear, damage, or movement of heavy objects, by protecting with durable sheet materials. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA For use with EJCDC 2007 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS WOODARD & CURRAN 01 50 00-3 b. Prohibit traffic or storage upon waterproofed or roofed surfaces. If traffic or activity is necessary, obtain recommendations for protection from waterproofing or roofing material manufacturer. 6. Whenever gale or high winds are forecast, take measures to secure loose material, equipment or other items that could be blown and be damaged or cause damage. Do not leave such loose items unsecured at end of a working day. Particular attention shall be taken with scaffolding and items placed or stored on roofs or within a structure prior to being enclosed. 7. Provide for removal of snow and ice which may impede Work, damage the finishes or materials, be detrimental to workers, or impede trucking, delivery, or moving of materials at the Site, or prevent adequate drainage of the Site or adjoining areas. 8. Comply with the following additional requirements of MGL Chapter 149, Sections 44F(1)(a) and 44G(d). a. Contractor shall furnish and install weather protection to provide for adequate heat in the area so protected during the months of November through March. Per DCAMM, "weather protection," means temporary protection of that Work adversely affected by moisture, wind and cold. Weather protection shall be achieved by covering, enclosing and/or heating working areas such that a minimum temperature of 40 degrees Fahrenheit is maintained at the working surface during the months of November through March in order to permit construction to be carried on during such period in accordance with the Progress Schedule. b. After the building or portion thereof is completely enclosed by either permanent construction or substantial temporary materials having a resistance comparable to the specified permanent construction, the Contractor shall provide heat therein of not less than 55 degrees F. nor more than 75 degrees F. The foregoing provisions do not supersede any specific requirements for methods of construction, curing of materials and the like. Such weather protection shall be consistent with the Progress Schedule, shall permit the continuous progress of the Work necessary to maintain an orderly and efficient sequence of construction operations, shall include one thermometer for every 2,000 square feet of floor space or fraction thereof, shall be subject to the Approval of the Awarding Authority, and shall meet such additional requirements as may be specified by Awarding Authority. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA For use with EJCDC 2007 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS WOODARD & CURRAN 01 50 00-4 C. Security 1. Provide protection to stored items, the Work and Owner's operations from unauthorized entry, vandalism, or theft, and against fire, storms and other losses during working and non-working hours. 2. Coordinate with Owner's security program. D. Safety Facilities 1. Provide first aid and other safety facilities required by Laws and Regulations during working and non-working hours. E. Access Roads 1. Construct and maintain temporary roads accessing public thoroughfares to serve construction area. Control dust and water. 2. Extend and relocate as Work progress requires. Provide detours necessary for unimpeded traffic flow. 3. Provide for emergency access and maintain throughout the Work Site. F. Field Offices: as specified below. 1. Furnish and maintain weather tight field offices (trailer or equivalent) with lighting, electrical outlets, heating, cooling and ventilating equipment, locking doors and windows, and equip with furnishings and accessories to accommodate supervision of Work, maintenance of records, and Project meetings, including, but not limited to the following. · Desk and chairs (2 cushioned office desk chairs and 4 metal folding chairs) · Plan table with light and stool · 3 locking file cabinets · Hanging plan rack · Book case with 4 shelves · Conference table and chairs to accommodate minimum 10 people · “All-in-one” color copier, printer, scanner and fax machine, capable of 11 inches by 17 inches output (OR separate color copier, color printer, color scanner, all capable of 11 inches by 17 inches output, and fax machine) · Paper stock and printer supplies for duration of Project · Telephone with answering machine (or telephone service with voicemail feature) · Refrigerator, microwave, and water cooler with bottled water supply for duration of Project 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA For use with EJCDC 2007 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS WOODARD & CURRAN 01 50 00-5 · Trash and recycling receptacles · First aid kit · Personal protective equipment for use by visitors 2. Furnish separate field office (trailer) with minimum 1 office and 1 meeting space for use by Engineer and Resident Project Representative similarly equipped with fully functional equipment and furniture. Furnish sign at main entrance with “Woodard & Curran New England, Inc.”. 3. Maintain utilities per Article 1.03 below for the duration of the Project. 4. Location of Field Offices: as determined in the field. G. Staging Area: as shown on the Drawings. H. Project Identification: as specified below. 1. Town of Nantucket, MA Surfside WWTF Improvements I. Progress Cleaning and Waste Removal 1. Comply with the requirements of Paragraph 6.11. B and C of the Standard General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions, if any. 2. Maintain areas free of waste materials, debris, and rubbish and maintain the Site in a clean and orderly condition. 3. Remove debris and rubbish from spaces and other closed or remote spaces before enclosing the space. 4. Collect and remove waste materials, debris, and rubbish from Site at least weekly and legally dispose off-Site. 1.03 TEMPORARY UTILITIES A. Power service: as specified below. 1. Arrange for and pay for required power service from local electric utility for duration of Project. Exercise measures to conserve energy. Furnish and install required equipment including pole of sufficient height to provide proper clearance and install weatherproof box of such size to house service disconnect, overcurrent protection, electric meter, and other required equipment. 2. Location: as designated by Owner. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA For use with EJCDC 2007 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS WOODARD & CURRAN 01 50 00-6 B. Telephone service and internet access to field offices: as specified below. 1. Arrange for, pay for, and maintain telephone service and internet access to field offices at time of Project mobilization and for duration of Project. 2. Obtain voicemail feature if answering machine not provided. 3. Provide wireless, high speed broadband internet access via DSL, cable, fiber, satellite, or T1. C. Water service: as specified below. 1. Arrange for, pay for and maintain suitable quality water service as required for duration of Project. D. Furnish and maintain required sanitary facilities and enclosures. Do not use existing facilities. E. Furnish lighting for construction operations. Furnish lighting for exterior staging and storage areas and for security purposes. Maintain lighting and provide routine repairs. F. Furnish heat devices and heat and cooling devices as required to maintain specified conditions for construction operations. G. Ventilate enclosed areas to assist cure of materials, to dissipate humidity, and to prevent accumulation of dust, fumes, vapors, or gases. H. Fire Protection 1. Provide temporary fire protection equipment and services during construction per NFPA and local fire code and regulations, and fire marshal’s requirements. 2. Use Work procedures that minimize fire hazards to the extent practicable and materials that are fire resistant where possible. Collect and remove combustible debris and waste materials from the Site each day. Store fuels, solvents, and other volatile or flammable materials away from the construction and storage areas in well-marked, safe containers in accordance with Laws and Regulations. 1.04 TEMPORARY CONTROLS A. Dust Control: Execute Work by methods to minimize raising dust from construction operations. Provide positive means to prevent air-borne dust from dispersing into atmosphere. Utilize the application of sprinkled water to reduce the emission of air-borne soil particulates from the Project Site. B. Water Control and Dewatering: as specified below. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA For use with EJCDC 2007 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS WOODARD & CURRAN 01 50 00-7 1. Grade Site to drain away from excavations to approved drainage collection facilities. Ensure collected surface drainage water meets permitted criteria for sediment content prior to discharge. 2. Maintain excavations free of water. Furnish, operate and maintain pumping equipment. 3. Dewater excavations and legally dispose of water in a manner that will not cause injury to public and private property. 4. Protect Site from puddling, ponding or running water. 5. Design, furnish, install, maintain, operate and remove temporary dewatering systems as required to lower and control water levels and hydrostatic pressures in excavations during construction; legally dispose of pumped water; construct, maintain, observe and, except where indicated or required to remain in place, remove dewatering equipment and system at the completion of construction. a. Dewatering may include: lowering the water table, intercepting and collecting seepage which may penetrate the support of excavation, slopes or bottom of the excavation; increasing the stability of excavated slopes; preventing loss of material from beneath the slopes or bottom of the excavation; reducing lateral loads on sheeting and bracing; limiting horizontal displacements and stresses in support of excavation to tolerable and allowable levels; preventing displacements of existing structures, utilities, pavements, and sidewalks; improving the excavation and hauling characteristics of sandy soil; preventing rupture or heaving of the bottom of any excavation; and disposing of pumped water. b. Normal Dewatering is defined as using conventional pumps installed in open excavations, ditches, or sumps to control water and allow for installation of the pipe in a dry trench. c. Special Dewatering is defined as installing wellpoints, deep wells, or eductor and ejector systems to control groundwater and hydrostatic pressures to allow for installation of the work. Special dewatering includes design of the dewatering system by a Professional Engineer currently registered in the state where the Project is located in good standing, and conducting additional borings or subsurface explorations deemed necessaryby the Contractor, and approved by the Engineer, to support design. 1) For Special Dewatering, retain the services of a professional engineer currently registered in the state where the Project is located in good standing, experienced in design of dewatering systems, to independently evaluate the boring logs and other soils information available to determine those 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA For use with EJCDC 2007 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS WOODARD & CURRAN 01 50 00-8 areas that will require special dewatering techniques and to design the required system. If, in the opinion of the Contractor or Contractor’s dewatering professional engineer, additional borings are needed to design special dewatering systems or determine areas where special dewatering techniques will be required, the Contractor shall retain and pay for the services of a boring subcontractor. Contractor's dewatering professional engineer shall provide sufficient on-Site inspection and supervision to assure that the dewatering is carried out in accordance with the approved design. d. Design a dewatering system capable of: 1) effectively reducing the hydrostatic pressure and lowering the groundwater levels to a minimum of 2 feet below excavation subgrade in the existing fills and any organic peat, and below the excavation subgrade in the existing organic silts/clays unless otherwise directed by the Engineer, so that all excavation bottoms are firm and dry; 2) maintaining a dry and stable subgrade until the structures, pipes, appurtenances, and drainage pipe and structure bedding to be built therein have been completed to the extent that structures, pipes, and appurtenances will not be floated or otherwise damaged; and 3) lowering of the groundwater level within the work area without adversely affecting existing structures, utilities, pavements, sidewalks or wells outside of the Work area. e. Submit the following. 1) Plans and description of the Normal and/or Special Dewatering systems, including the number, location and depth of wells, wellpoints or sumps; designs of filters to prevent pumping of fine soil; method and location for filtering, sedimentation tanks and legal disposal of pumped water; and flow capacity of proposed system, accounting for groundwater level relative to tide cycles if applicable 2) Design calculations, description and complete layout drawings, stamped and signed by Contractor’s dewatering professional engineer, at least two weeks prior to scheduled installation of Special Dewatering system 3) Locations of observation wells 4) Records of pump operation and groundwater elevations 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA For use with EJCDC 2007 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS WOODARD & CURRAN 01 50 00-9 6. Dewatering Operations and Procedures a. Provide electrically operated dewatering equipment, powered with dedicated generators adequately sized to operate the dewatering system and capable of running on commercial power. Provide standby equipment independent of commercial power and provide for dewatering within 24 hours upon primary pump or power failure. No work shall be performed by the Contractor below the pre- construction groundwater level during dewatering system failure. b. Provide suitable temporary pipes, flumes or channels for water that may flow along or across the Site of the Work. c. Provide dewatering equipment with noise attenuation systems capable of meeting the governing noise regulation requirements. d. Encapsulate the suction end of the pump with crushed stone, filter fabric, and other materials to minimize the amount of silt discharged to the amount allowed by the construction dewatering permit. e. Do not operate equipment on paved surfaces to prevent damaging these surfaces. f. Locate dewatering facilities to prevent interference with utilities and construction work to be done by others. g. For dewatering operations with relatively minor flows, direct pump discharges using filtration bag or system per Erosion and Sediment Control below, or pump into hay bale sedimentation traps lined with filter fabric. Filter water through the hay bales and filter fabric prior to seepage into storm drainage or any natural water course. h. For dewatering operations with larger flows, provide pump discharges into a steel dewatering/sedimentation basin. Use steel baffle plates to slow water velocities, to increase the contact time, and allow adequate settlement of sediment prior to discharge into waterways, storm drainage or discharge point allowed by the construction dewatering permit. i. Utilize silt sacks in catch basins when excess silt is suspended in the discharge water per Erosion and Sediment Control below. j. If siltation basin is used, size to effectively filter for the volume and discharge rate of water anticipated without overflow. k. Provide treatment necessary to prevent discharge of silty and/or contaminated ground water caused by the Contractor’s operations, or any contaminated ground water that may pass from excavated surfaces and/or through the excavation support system selected by the Contractor. l. Dispose of water pumped or drained from the Work in accordance with permit requirements and in a manner to prevent undue 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA For use with EJCDC 2007 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS WOODARD & CURRAN 01 50 00-10 interference with other work or damage to adjacent properties, pavements and other surfaces, buildings, structures and utilities. m. Obtain necessary regulatory approvals for the disposal of dewatering flows, including, among others, approval by the Environmental Protection Agency under the National Pollutant Discharge Elimination System (NPDES) program for construction dewatering activities. Submit the completed and approved construction dewatering permit to the Engineer immediately upon receipt. 7. Special Dewatering a. Use Special Dewatering as necessary if Normal Dewatering methods are inadequate to ensure dry and stable excavation subgrade conditions. b. Special Dewatering techniques may consist of one- or two-stage wellpoint systems, deep wells, or eductor and ejector type systems. Design with suitable screens to prevent pumping of fines and to address specified Work Site conditions. c. In areas requiring special dewatering, lower the groundwater level to a minimum of 2 feet below the existing fill and/or organic peat subgrades or to the excavation subgrade for organic silt/clay subgrades prior to any installation and maintain that groundwater level until the excavation has been backfilled and provide monitoring by Contractor’s dewatering professional engineer to ensure conformance with the requirements herein. d. Furnish materials and install at least two observation wells at each excavation area. The location of the wells shall be proposed in the field by the Contractor’s dewatering professional engineer and reviewed and approved by the Engineer. C. Erosion and Sediment Control: as specified below. 1. Comply with: • Massachusetts Erosion and Sediment Control Guidelines for Urban and Suburban Areas, prepared by the MassDEP 2. Plan and execute construction using methods to control surface drainage from cuts and fills, from borrow and waste disposal areas and prevent erosion and sedimentation. 3. Submit erosion and sediment control plan to Engineer prior to the start of construction. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA For use with EJCDC 2007 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS WOODARD & CURRAN 01 50 00-11 4. Install erosion and sediment controls as may be shown on the Drawings and as required by Laws and Regulations. Install additional erosion and sedimentation control measures beyond those shown on the Drawings as necessary to stabilize the Site. Coordinate temporary erosion controls with permanent erosion controls to the extent practical. Provide and maintain devices to control erosion, siltation, and sedimentation that occur during construction operations. Undertake reasonable precautions and measures to avoid erosion of soil and to prevent silting of drainage ditches, storm sewers, rivers, streams, and lakes. 5. Employ pollution prevention measures, erosion and sedimentation control before, during, and after soils are exposed. Implement measures prior to soil disturbance or soil storage to the extent possible to ensure that such measures are in place before activity occurs and employ additional measures as the Work progresses. Implement and maintain as necessary until the Site is permanently stabilized. 6. Perform inspections of disturbed soil areas, material storage areas exposed to precipitation, and erosion control measures with Engineer a minimum of once every 14 days and also within 24 hours after any storm event greater than 0.5-inches of rainfall. Immediately correct deficiencies in the erosion control measures identified or indicated by failures or erosion by implementing additional measures or different techniques to correct and prevent subsequent erosion at no additional cost to Owner. 7. In the event that silt or debris breaches erosion control, immediately remove and clean silt or debris from drainage ditches and storm sewers and revise erosion control measures as required by the Conservation Commission or the Engineer. Should silt or debris breach erosion controls and reach rivers, streams or lakes, immediately notify local, state or Federal representatives as required and implement required remediation methods at no additional cost to Owner. 8. Limit duration of the exposure of soils on embankments, excavations, and graded areas to a minimum. 9. Provide temporary measures such as berms, dikes and drains to prevent water flow. Install erosion control measures in any ditch, swale or channel before water is allowed to flow in the waterway. Handle water pumped from trenches to minimize discharge of silty water to the maximum extent practicable. 10. Stabilize storm drain outfalls as shown on the Drawings before the discharge points become operational. Install inlet protection immediately upon construction of culverts. 11. Stabilize disturbed areas with temporary and permanent erosion control practices as soon as practicable, but no more than 14 days after construction 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA For use with EJCDC 2007 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS WOODARD & CURRAN 01 50 00-12 activity on a particular portion of the Site has temporarily or permanently ceased. Exceptions to this time requirement include: a) where construction activities will resume on the particular portion of the Site within 21 days; and b) where snow cover delays initiation of stabilization measures. 12. Place stockpiled topsoil on the Site away from natural drainages, in piles with side slopes of 50 percent to 70 percent. Install siltation fence around the base of the pile to prevent eroding soil from washing into drainages. Cover topsoil piles which are to remain for a period of 21 days or more with temporary seed and mulch immediately following stockpiling. 13. Conduct pavement sweeping to remove sediment and soil debris accumulation on pavement resulting from construction activity 14. Siltation/Silt Fence a. Filter fabric: suitable for erosion control. b. Wood posts: oak, 2 inches by 2 inches in section, and at least 4.5 feet in length. c. Erosion control fencing: heavy-duty filter fabric towed into the existing soil as shown on the Drawings. d. Construct as shown on Drawings or as directed by Engineer. Install parallel to contours where possible, prior to Site clearing and grading activities. 1) Dig a 6 inch by 6 inch minimum trench where the fence is to be installed. Position the fence in the trench with the fence posts set at 8 feet on center (maximum). Curve ends of fence uphill to prevent flow around ends. 2) Staple sedimentation control fabric and the industrial netting to each post. When joints are necessary, splice filter fabric together only at support posts with 6-inch overlap and securely seal. 3) Bury lower edge of fabric at least 6 inches below ground surface to prevent underflow. Backfill trench and compact soil over filter fabric. 4) Installed height: minimum 2.5 feet and 36 inches maximum. 5) Inspect frequently; repair or replace any damaged sections. 15. Temporary Erosion Control Matting 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA For use with EJCDC 2007 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS WOODARD & CURRAN 01 50 00-13 a. Rolled matting blanket consisting of curled wood excelsior, coconut fiber, straw or paper bound with a weave of twisted craft paper, cotton cord or plastic mesh. b. Provide staples for fastening matting to the ground. Staples: fabricated in a "U" shape from 11 gage or heavier stiff steel wire, 6 to 12 inches in length and 1 to 2 inches across. c. Surface Preparation and Installation 1) Conform to grades and cross sections for slopes and ditches shown on the Drawings. Finish to a smooth and even condition with all debris, roots, stones, and lumps raked out and removed. Loosen soil surface to permit bedding of the matting. 2) Unless otherwise directed, apply seed prior to placement. When directed, spread additional seed over matting, particularly at those locations disturbed by building slots. Press matting onto the ground with a light lawn roller or by other similar means. 3) Bury edges of matting around the edges of catch basins and other structures. 16. Seeding a. Select seed variety and applied rates based upon the date of application per the following table. Equivalent seed mixture based on suitability for use in controlling erosion of the various soil types and slopes may be used as approved by the Engineer. Dates Seed Applied Rate (pounds per 1,000 feet2) 4/1 to 7/1 8/15 to 9/15 Oats 1.8 4/1 to 7/1 Annual Ryegrass 0.9 5/15 to 8/15 Sundangrass 0.9 9/15 to 10/15 Winter Ryegrass 2.6 1) Sow seed at the rates indicated, on the pure live seed basis. 2) Mulch areas where temporary seeding has been applied. Do not mulch seeded areas where matting will be immediately installed. If temporary seeding does not achieve adequate growth by November 1, apply an additional layer of mulch. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA For use with EJCDC 2007 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS WOODARD & CURRAN 01 50 00-14 3) Mulch temporarily or permanently seeded areas, areas which cannot be seeded within the recommended seeding dates, and any soil stockpile areas, immediately following seeding. Straw or hay mulch, wood fiber mulch, and hydromulch are recommended. 17. Sod: grown from certified seed of adapted varieties to produce high quality sod free of any serious thatch, weeds, insects, diseases and other pest problem, be at least one year old and not older than three years, and cut with a 1/2 inch to 1 inch layer of soil. a. Lay sod strips on the prepared soil, perpendicular to the slope or direction of water flow, starting at the lowest elevation. Butt the edges and ends of the sod strips together and tamp or roll. Stagger joints. b. Staple sod strips at ends and at 3-foot intervals along the center of the strip. c. Irrigate sodded area immediately after installation. 18. Catch Basin Silt Sacks a. Style: Silt Sack Regular Flow. b. Test Method: ASTM D-4884 165.0 lbs./inch. c. Silt sack seams: certified average wide width strength. d. Meet the following ASTM D-4884 standards. Properties are Minimum Average Roll Values (MARV). Property Test Method Units Test Results Grab Tensile ASTM D-4632 lbs. 315x300 Grab Elongation ASTM D-4632 % 15x15 Puncture ASTM D-4833 lbs. 125 Mullen Burst ASTM D-3786 psi 650 Trapezoid Tear ASTM D-4533 lbs 120x150 UV Resistance ASTM D-4355 % 90 Apparent Opening ASTM D-4751 US Sieve 40 Flow Rate ASTM D-4491 gal/min/ft 2 40 Permittivity ASTM D-4491 sec -1 0.55 1) Utilize silt sacks in catch basins as required when excess silt is suspended in discharge water. 19. Filtration Bag or System for Discharge from Excavation Dewatering 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA For use with EJCDC 2007 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS WOODARD & CURRAN 01 50 00-15 a. Meet the following standards. Properties are Minimum Average Roll Values (MARV). Property Test Method Units Test Results Flow Rate ASTM D-4491 gal/min/ft 2 40 Permittivity ASTM D-4491 sec -1 0.55 b. For discharge from excavation dewatering, install filtration bag or system or dewatering siltation basin constructed of a hay bale barrier lined with filter fabric sized to handle the volume of dewatering without overflowing. 20. Compost Filter Socks a. Furnish and install biodegradable mesh “socks” filled with mature, clean compost per EPA National Pollutant Discharge Elimination System (NPDES) specifications. 1) Install per EPA and manufacturers recommendations. 2) Install parallel to contours where possible. Stake socks as needed to stabilize. Inspect frequently and repair as necessary. 21. Provide detention basins or water filtration systems for dewatering and coordinate locations with Engineer. See Dewatering in Paragraph B. above. 22. Other Temporary Measures a. Provide and maintain temporary slope drains as required. b. Employ other temporary erosion control measures as directed by the Engineer or local Conservation Commission. 23. Maintenance a. Inspect erosion control practices immediately after each rainfall and at least daily during prolonged rainfall or snowmelt for damage. Make appropriate repairs or replacement until Final Completion at no additional cost to the Owner. b. Remove silt from siltation fence and/or haybale when it has reached one-quarter of the bale and/or fence height, or prior to expected heavy runoff or siltation. c. Repair matting if any staples become loosened or raised, or if any matting becomes loose, torn, or undermined, make satisfactory repairs immediately. d. Maintain areas mulched or matted until Final Completion, at no additional cost to the Owner. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA For use with EJCDC 2007 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS WOODARD & CURRAN 01 50 00-16 e. Maintain sediment basins by removing silt that reaches a depth of over one foot, at no additional cost to the Owner, until Final Completion. 24. Removal of Temporary Erosion Control a. Remove temporary materials and devices upon completion of the Work when permanent soil stabilization has been achieved. Re-use materials in good condition if approved by Engineer. 1) If silt socks are used, remove in paved areas or cut open and disperse media in unpaved areas. b. Level and grade to preconstruction conditions and to the extent required to prevent any obstruction of the flow of water or any other interference with the operation of or access to the permanent works. c. Remove siltation fences only when adequate grass growth has been established. d. Repair areas damaged by silt fences and hay bales to preconstruction conditions to the satisfaction of the local Conservation Commission and the Engineer. e. Remove unsuitable materials from Site and dispose of in a lawful manner. D. Noise Control 1. Provide methods, means, and facilities to minimize noise from construction operations. 2. Provide noise attenuation systems capable of meeting the Department of Environmental Protection Division of Air Quality Control regulations governed by the following policy: "A source of sound will be considered to be violating the Department's noise regulation (310 CMR 7.10) if the source: • Increases the broadband sound level by more than 10 dB(A) above ambient, or • Produces a "pure tone" condition when any octave band center frequency sound pressure level exceeds the two adjacent center frequency sound pressure levels by 3 decibels or more. “These criteria are measured both at the property line and at the nearest inhabited residence. Ambient is defined as the background A-weighted sound level that is exceeded 90% of the time measured during equipment operating hours. The ambient may also be established by other means with the consent of the Department." 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA For use with EJCDC 2007 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS WOODARD & CURRAN 01 50 00-17 3. Construct sound enclosures or utilize other noise reduction techniques if the equipment does not meet the noise level requirements. E. Pollution Control: as specified below. 1. Provide methods, means, and facilities to prevent contamination of soil, water, and atmosphere from discharge of noxious, toxic substances, and pollutants produced by construction operations. a. Water Pollution Control 1) Ensure that sediment, debris, petroleums, chemicals, or other contaminants will not enter existing drainage facilities and channels. Use construction methods that will prevent entrance of pollutants and wastes into existing streams, rivers, lakes, and flowing and dry watercourses. 2) Obtain legal disposal sites and dispose of pollutants and wastes in a legal manner. 3) Respond immediately to emergencies as directed when water quality of existing streams, rivers, lakes and flowing and dry watercourses is threatened. Take corrective action to remove or contain pollutants until a permanent solution is determined. b. Air Pollution Control 1) Equipment and vehicles that exhibit excessive exhausts emissions due to poor engine adjustments or inefficient operation will not be permitted to operate until corrective repairs or adjustments are made. 2) Burning of materials from clearing or grubbing operations, combustible construction materials, and rubbish will not be allowed. F. Traffic Regulation: as specified below. 1. Control and maintain traffic within the Project area. a. A traffic control plan is not required for the Project. 2. Provide and maintain traffic control and maintenance devices in accordance with Part 6, Temporary Traffic Control, of the "Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices for Streets and Highways", published by the U.S. Department of Transportation, Federal Highway Administration and other applicable codes and standards as specified. Operate devices 24 hours per day as required. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA For use with EJCDC 2007 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS WOODARD & CURRAN 01 50 00-18 a. Comply with applicable portions of the “Massachusetts Amendments to the 2009 Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices and the Standard Municipal Traffic Code” published by the Massachusetts Department of Transportation Highway Division. 3. Provide for access by emergency vehicles, such as police, fire, and disaster units at all times. Contractor shall be liable for damages resulting from failure to provide such access. 4. During construction hours, traffic flow must be controlled by uniformed traffic police officers or other traffic controllers allowed by Laws and Regulations. The services of traffic controllers shall in no way relieve the Contractor of its responsibilities under the Contract. a. Coordinate schedule of police details with Owner. b. Police details will be direct billed to the Owner. 5. Maintain minimum of one moving lane on roadways at all times. a. Where detours are permitted, provide necessary barricades, flashers, flashing arrows and signs in accordance with referenced Manuals and Laws and Regulations. b. Provide gravel borrow and bituminous concrete to maintain temporary passable travel lane ramps, temporary bridging, steel plates, temporary pavement, wood-framed walkways, caution, safety and other necessary signs directing the pedestrian and vehicular traffic towards unblocked and safe areas. 6. Provide safe access/egress to businesses and abutting property owners within the Project area. In areas where the construction activity is in progress, install directional signs in front of businesses indicating "OPEN FOR BUSINESS" or similar for guidance of customers. a. Certain construction operations such as utility work and roadway/sidewalk reconstruction may restrict access/egress on some roads and to businesses and abutting property owners. Under these circumstances, schedule operations during off-peak hours or late evenings with Owner approval so that a particular work activity can be completed in the shortest possible time. b. Provide 48 hours notice to businesses and abutting property owners when access/egress will not be available or restrictions will exist. 7. Exercise particular care to establish and maintain such methods and procedures that will not create hazards. a. Remove or properly cover traffic control, safety devices and/or signs having messages that are irrelevant to normal traffic conditions at 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA For use with EJCDC 2007 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS WOODARD & CURRAN 01 50 00-19 the end of each Work period. Keep signs clean at all times and provide that legends are distinctive and unmarred. b. Place excavated material and construction equipment so that vehicular and pedestrian traffic is maintained at all times unless road closure permit is obtained. If the Contractor's operations cause traffic hazards, implement appropriate safety measures immediately. c. In areas of high pedestrian and vehicular traffic volume, the remove waste materials and construction equipment from the Work Site on a daily basis. Do not park construction equipment overnight on the Site or the adjacent roads unless permitted by Owner. d. Provide night watchmen where special hazards exist. 8. Post signage clearly stating that any vehicle impeding the progress of construction will be towed at the vehicle owner’s expense. Towing charges incurred by Owner for Contractor’s failure to post such signs will be borne by the Contractor. 1.05 REMOVAL OF TEMPORARY UTILITIES, FACILITIES, AND CONTROLS A. Remove temporary utilities, equipment, and facilities before Final Application for Payment inspection. B. Remove temporary underground installations and grade Site as indicated. Clean and repair damage caused by installation or use of temporary utilities, facilities, and controls. C. Restore existing facilities and areas used during construction to original condition. Restore permanent facilities used during construction to specified condition. END OF SECTION This page intentionally left blank 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA TEMPORARY SEWAGE BYPASS WOODARD & CURRAN 01 51 40-1 SECTION 01 51 40 TEMPORARY SEWAGE BYPASS PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Provide, operate, and maintain a functional bypass pumping system capable of bypassing each area of Work without leakage or spillage of sewage upon the ground or streets or back up of sewage into any building or onto any property for the duration of the Project. B. Design Requirements: 1. Provide a bypass pumping plan designed by a Professional Engineer registered in the state in which the Project is located. 2. Provide temporary bypass pumping adequate to handle dry weather and wet weather flows and to protect against surcharging of the existing system upstream of the Work area. Bypass pumping system shall operate continuously for the entire time between when the existing pumps are brought-off line and when new pumps are started up, tested, and brought into continuous service and both wet wells are returned to continuous service. It is anticipated that this time period will be several months at a minimum. Design bypass pumping system to be robust and permanent enough for this duration. 1.02 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Measurement and payment requirements: per Division 01 General Requirements. 1.03 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination, Sequencing, and Scheduling: in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. 1. Bypass pumping plan for each bypass location, stamped by a Professional Engineer registered in the state in which the Project is located, prior to implementation and prior to the start of construction 2. Minimum contents of sewage bypass pumping plan: a. Standard Operating Procedure: Describe the normal sequence of events to be followed while pumping and setting up and breaking 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA TEMPORARY SEWAGE BYPASS WOODARD & CURRAN 01 51 40-2 down pumping equipment. Plan must address strategies and safeguards to ensure that public safety and environmental health is maintained at all times, the possibility of property damage and wetlands impacts, and overall level of inconvenience is minimized. Plan shall include a bypass routing diagram for each Work zone, estimates of anticipated bypass flows, an emergency response plan, and a list of the equipment that will be used. b. Layout drawing showing locations of equipment on Site and how access to the Site is maintained c. Equipment lists d. Pump curves and motor and engine data demonstrating equipment is sufficiently sized to meet all specified and anticipated operating conditions e. Notification form f. Emergency Response Plan: Describe the intended means of handling the following situations, including response and clean-up measures, and emergency backup power or backup fuel storage. List equipment to be used and where it will be stored. · Break or failure of bypass line (pipe) · Failure of bypass pump · Overflow · Back up into dwelling or onto private property · Failure of bypass pumping system to accommodate flow 3. Shop Drawings for equipment and materials including, but not limited to: · Pumps · Engines and/or Motors · Sound Enclosures · Pipe or hose · Joints/couplings · Plugs and/or bladders 4. Statement of Qualifications demonstrating experience of the firm in accordance with Article 1.04 and listing a minimum of 20 successful bypass pumping projects conducted in the last ten years. Provide contact information for no fewer than 5 of these projects which: · Have been completed in the last 5 years, · Involved similar equipment to that proposed for this Project, and · Had duty capacities of not less than 3 mgd. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA TEMPORARY SEWAGE BYPASS WOODARD & CURRAN 01 51 40-3 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. B. Qualifications: per Division 01 General Requirements and as follows. 1. Bypass pumping system shall be provided, operated, and maintained by a firm which has been regularly engaged in providing bypass pumping for a minimum of 10 years. 1.06 SITE CONDITIONS A. Existing Conditions: per Division 01 General Requirements. B. The Project area consists of active sanitary sewers; therefore, flows and flow data are variable depending on location and conditions. Visit the Work locations prior to start of Work to visually inspect flow conditions as necessary. The fluid to be pumped is raw sanitary wastewater which contains typical solids, rags, and debris. Flows are subject to typical diurnal variations and also increase significantly during wet weather and high groundwater. Provide that the bypass pumping system is capable of handling all of these conditions. C. Portions of the Project are subjected to infiltration and inflow. Account for infiltration and inflow volume in the planning and conduct of the Work. D. Use the following design flows as the basis of design for each bypass pumping plan. Flow Summer Average (MGD) Summer Peak (MGD) Non-Summer Average (MGD) Non-Summer Peak (MGD) WWTF Influent 1.56 7.75 1.14 4.06 Return Activated Sludge (RAS) 6.24 14.7 4.56 5.44 Notes: 1.) Additional bypass pumping may be required at the WWTF. Contractor shall assess additional bypassing requirements on a case-by-case basis. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 BYPASS PUMPING SYSTEM A. Godwin Pumps (a Xylem brand) 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA TEMPORARY SEWAGE BYPASS WOODARD & CURRAN 01 51 40-4 B. Griffin Dewatering C. Rain for Rent D. Or equal 2.02 PUMPS, PIPES & FITTINGS A. Provide pumps suitable for use with raw, unscreened sewage and capable of conveying the volume of flow anticipated with a sufficient margin of safety. Provide for 100 percent redundancy (2 pumps the Site for every 1 pump required) if flow cannot be returned to the sewer at any time if pumping system failure occurs. 1. Redundant pumping: suction and discharge piping with quick connect couplings to facilitate change out of pumps. B. Pumps: hydraulically-driven submersible. Provide two duty pumps and one redundant pump of equal size. C. Pump Connections: quick connect couplings to facilitate change out of pumps D. Pipe: carbon steel, fused high-density polyethylene pipe, or equal. E. Joints: Victaulic or approved equal. F. Fittings: quick-connect type. G. Lay-flat hose: extra heavy duty, highly abrasion resistant, fitted with gasketed couplings, and rated for 150 percent of working pressure. H. Provide sound attenuation enclosure for engines and pumps in accordance with state and local noise requirements. I. Control: automatic level control for pumps. Redundant pump shall start automatically if one duty pump fails. J. Autodialers: provide autodialers with capacity to call up to 3 different phone numbers upon low fuel and pump failure. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Maintain flows under all flow conditions. Adequately handle flows, even instantaneous peak flows, without damage or overflow, providing for potential large instantaneous flow contributors connected to the sewer under repair. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA TEMPORARY SEWAGE BYPASS WOODARD & CURRAN 01 51 40-5 B. Allow for passage of traffic and protect bypass piping at driveway and street crossings. C. Coordinate bypassing with low-flow times to the extent possible. Prevent overflows or backups. D. If Contractor determines bypass pumping is not required at a location due to lack of flow or determines that a Work item does not require bypass pumping to be performed, and Engineer agrees, protect flows from construction debris and ensure no debris enters the sewer system. 3.02 SHUTDOWN A. Shutdown is not permitted. Maintain flow of wastewater at all times with no interruption of service. 3.03 TEMPORARY POWER A. Provide fuel and power to run bypass pumps at no additional cost to Owner. 3.04 PIPING A. Provide that piping system has adequate water tightness. Perform a leakage test with clean water at Engineer’s direction, at no additional cost to Owner. B. Lay temporary piping along the general lines of streets or roadways in a manner that causes the minimum amount of disruption and is least likely to be damaged. Use temporary bituminous pavement, cold patch, or other approved material to form a ramp on each side of the pipe or depress the pipe at driveways to allow for property owners to drive over the temporary pipe as directed by the Engineer. 3.05 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE A. Continuously monitor bypassing operations regardless of duration or timing of bypassing. Unattended bypass pumping is prohibited. B. Arrange for bypass pumping past working hours with Engineer and provide adequate sound attenuation and an attendant. C. Do not allow leaks in bypass pumping systems. Clean and disinfect leaks at no additional cost to Owner. END OF SECTION This page intentionally left blank 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA For use with EJCDC 2007 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS WOODARD & CURRAN 01 60 00-1 SECTION 01 60 00 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. This Section specifies general requirements for products, materials and equipment. This Section applies to all Specifications and Drawings and provisions of this Section may be supplemented in other sections of Division 01. B. Certain provisions required by Laws and Regulations may be referenced. Contractor is responsible to determine and obtain applicable Laws and Regulations and to review and interpret the full text of such Laws and Regulations. C. Section Includes 1.02 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL General Independent Testing Agency Certification Factory Testing 1.03 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS General Transportation and Handling Storage and Protection 1.04 WARRANTIES 1.02 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. General 1. Subject material and equipment furnished under the Contract Documents to a complete factory testing program as specified. 2. Shop Drawings and submittals: reviewed by Engineer before initiating testing program. 3. Perform checks and tests in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and referenced standards. 4. Evaluate test results and advise Owner immediately of any discrepancy between test results and test limits or the failure of any device or system 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA For use with EJCDC 2007 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS WOODARD & CURRAN 01 60 00-2 under test. Include test limits for acceptability applicable to each test on the certified test records. 5. Record test information, including the evaluation of testing results, on forms approved by Owner and Engineer. B. Independent Testing Agency Certification 1. If specified, furnish certificates from an independent testing agency. 2. Independent testing agency to certify that material and equipment components have been examined and tested and are in conformance with the requirements specified in the Contract Documents. 3. Take Samples in accordance with the requirements specified in the Contract Documents, as selected by Owner or independent testing agency. Furnish and ship at no additional cost to Owner. C. Factory Testing 1. Provide 14 days prior written notice of factory inspections and tests to Owner and Engineer. 2. If failure to give proper written notice results in material and equipment being assembled or covered before a factory inspection or test, make material and equipment ready for inspection or test and reassemble or recover at no additional cost to Owner. 3. Owner may inspect any portion of material and equipment furnished at any reasonable time during manufacture and may witness testing of any portion of material and equipment wherever located. Owner and Engineer to witness tests only. 4. Furnish, set up and operate test equipment and facilities. 5. If facilities for conducting required tests are unavailable to the manufacturer, conduct tests elsewhere or have them performed by an independent agency approved by Owner. 6. Protect material and equipment after testing and checking to provide that subsequent testing of other equipment or systems does not disturb, damage or otherwise interfere with functional capability of material and equipment. 7. Assume responsibility for protection of material and equipment and safety of all personnel during factory testing program. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA For use with EJCDC 2007 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS WOODARD & CURRAN 01 60 00-3 8. Grounds for rejection: failure to withstand tests; failure to meet ratings; failure to meet applicable standards. 9. In the event of failure a. Submit revisions of documents requiring approval for changes required for rectification. b. Obtain Owner's and Engineer’s approval before making such changes. c. Provide written details of any changes to be made not requiring approval. d. Notify Owner and Engineer in writing before retesting. e. Furnish new material and equipment which meets requirements of the Specifications if rejected material and equipment cannot be rectified to satisfaction of Owner and Engineer. f. Retest after rectification in presence of Owner or Engineer. 10. Assume responsibility for all costs, including, but not limited to: loss or damage to materials and equipment resulting from testing; retesting; rectification; new material and equipment to replace damaged or non- rectifiable material and equipment; removal, furnishing, transportation, unloading, and installation of replacement material and equipment; and witness of testing by Owner and Engineer including travel, lodging, meals, and payroll. 11. Submit certified test reports which define tests, list results, and are signed by Contractor's representative, and copies of raw data collected during tests. Submission of certified test reports does not relieve Contractor of responsibility for material and equipment meeting requirements of the Contract Documents after installation. 1.03 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS A. General 1. Products include new material and equipment incorporated into the Work and may also include existing material and equipment required for reuse. This does not include machinery and equipment used for preparation, fabrication, conveying, installation and erection of the Work. 2. Do not use materials and equipment removed from existing Work Site, except as specifically permitted. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA For use with EJCDC 2007 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS WOODARD & CURRAN 01 60 00-4 3. Provide complete with accessories, trim, finished, safety guards, and other devices and details need for a complete installation and for the intended use or effect. 4. Provide standard products which have been produced and used successfully on other similar projects for similar applications. Provide products which are likely to be available to Owner in the future for items required for maintenance and repair or replacement Work. 5. Furnish interchangeable components of the same manufacturer, for similar components. B. Transportation and Handling 1. Transport and handle material and equipment in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 2. Notify Engineer and Owner in writing upon acceptance of a shipment. 3. Promptly inspect shipments to assure that material and equipment comply with requirements, quantities are correct, and material and equipment are undamaged. 4. Furnish equipment and personnel to handle material and equipment by methods to prevent soiling, disfigurement, or damage. 5. Uncrate equipment and dispose of packing material properly. C. Storage and Protection 1. Store and protect material and equipment in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, with seals and labels intact and legible. Store sensitive material and equipment in weather tight, climate controlled enclosures. 2. For exterior storage of fabricated material and equipment, place on sloped supports, above ground. 3. Provide for bonded off Site storage and protection when Site does not permit on Site storage or protection. 4. Cover material and equipment subject to deterioration with impervious sheet covering. Furnish ventilation to avoid condensation or potential degradation of material and equipment. 5. Store loose granular materials on solid flat surfaces in a well-drained area. Avoid mixing with foreign matter. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA For use with EJCDC 2007 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS WOODARD & CURRAN 01 60 00-5 6. Furnish equipment and personnel to store material and equipment by methods to prevent soiling, disfigurement, or damage. 7. Arrange storage of material and equipment to permit access for inspection. Periodically inspect to assure material and equipment are undamaged and are maintained in acceptable conditions. 8. After receipt of material and equipment, assume responsibility for loss and damage including but not limited to breakage, corrosion, weather damage, and distortion. 1.04 WARRANTIES A. Provide warranties for equipment and material in accordance with Paragraphs 6.19 and 14.03 of the Standard General and Supplementary Conditions, if any. B. Provide extended or special warranties as indicated in individual Specification sections. END OF SECTION This page intentionally left blank 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA For use with EJCDC 2007 EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS WOODARD & CURRAN 01 70 00-1 SECTION 01 70 00 EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. This Section specifies general execution requirements and startup/commissioning and performance testing for closeout of the Work. This Section applies to all Specifications and Drawings and provisions of this Section may be supplemented in other sections of Division 01. B. Certain provisions required by Laws and Regulations may be referenced. Contractor is responsible to determine and obtain applicable Laws and Regulations and to review and interpret the full text of such Laws and Regulations. C. Section Includes 1.02 OVERALL EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS Coordination Existing Conditions Field Engineering Record Documents Cutting and Patching Electrolytic Corrosion Prevention Quality Assurance and Control of Installation Manufacturers’ Field Services Independent Testing 1.03 STARTUP, TESTING, AND COMMISSIONING Spare Parts Consumables Checkout and Starting Systems Starting, Adjusting, and Balancing Startup and Commissioning/Performance Testing Demonstration and Training 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA For use with EJCDC 2007 EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS WOODARD & CURRAN 01 70 00-2 1.02 OVERALL EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination 1. Conduct preconstruction and pre-installation meetings before commencing certain Work that requires coordination or has special requirements or approvals. 2. Comply with the required Work sequence and coordination as may be specified in Summary of Work and reflect in the Project scheduling. 3. Coordinate Work such that Work is completed with minimum disruption to residents and businesses. 4. Coordinate space requirements and installation of Work. Utilize spaces efficiently to maximize accessibility for other installations, maintenance, and repairs. 5. Coordinate Work of the various Specifications with interdependent responsibilities for installing, connecting to, and placing in service, operating equipment. 6. Coordinate related Work at the Site in accordance with Article 7 of the Standard General and Supplementary Conditions, if any. 7. Coordinate completion and cleanup of Work of separate sections in preparation for Substantial Completion and for portions of Work designated for Owner's partial occupancy. 8. After Owner occupancy of premises, coordinate access to Site for correction of defective Work and/or incomplete Work to minimize disruption of Owner's activities. 9. Specific requirements applicable to the Project include the following. a. Coordinate with Owner and Engineer prior to performing any Work that will impact the treatment plant. B. Existing Conditions 1. Paragraph 4.01 of the Standard General and Supplementary Conditions, if any, covers Availability of Lands. 2. Paragraph 4.02 of the Standard General and Supplementary Conditions, if any, covers Subsurface and Physical Conditions. 3. Pursuant to Paragraph 4.04 of the Standard General and Supplementary Conditions, if any, existence and location of Underground Facilities and 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA For use with EJCDC 2007 EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS WOODARD & CURRAN 01 70 00-3 other utilities and construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning Work investigate and verify the existence and location of Underground Facilities and other utilities and construction. a. Conduct test pits and other utility research and properly restore utilities interfered with or damaged during construction at no cost to the Owner. b. Contact DIGSAFE (www.digsafe.com) by dialing 811. 4. Paragraph 4.05 of the Standard General and Supplementary Conditions, if any, covers Reference Points. 5. Paragraph 4.06 of the Standard General and Supplementary Conditions, if any, covers Hazardous Environmental Conditions at Site. C. Field Engineering: as specified below. 1. Prior to initiating construction, engage an independent professional land surveyor registered in the state where the Project is located to provide surveys and permanent reference points for all bounds and property markers along the line of the Work that may be disturbed during construction. Submit copies of all ties to the bounds and property markers to the Engineer prior to excavation at the Site(s). 2. Maintain surveyor's log of control and other survey work. Keep log available for reference. 3. Verify layout information shown on the Drawings in relation to existing benchmarks before lay out of the Work. Locate and protect existing benchmarks and control points. Preserve permanent reference points during construction. 4. Promptly report lost or destroyed reference points, benchmarks, or control points. Promptly report requirements relocate reference and control points due to changes in grades. Promptly replace lost or destroyed bounds or markers and control points based on the original survey control points utilizing the services of a professional land surveyor registered in the state where the Project is located. The cost of replacing markers disturbed by the Contractor's operations shall be at the Contractor's expense. D. Record Documents 1. Provide Record Documents in accordance with Paragraph 6.12 of the Standard General and Supplementary Conditions, if any, and in accordance with Section 01 15 30. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA For use with EJCDC 2007 EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS WOODARD & CURRAN 01 70 00-4 2. Store Record Documents separate from documents used for construction. Record information concurrent with construction progress. 3. Legibly mark each item to record description of actual equipment and material installed and actual construction on approved submittals, including the following. a. Manufacturer's name and equipment and material model and number b. Material and equipment substitutions or alternates utilized c. Approved changes d. Measured depths of foundations e. Measured horizontal and vertical locations of Underground Facilities and appurtenances, referenced to permanent surface improvements f. Measured locations of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in construction, referenced to visible and accessible features of the Work g. Field changes of dimension and detail h. Details not on original Contract Documents or Shop Drawings E. Cutting and Patching 1. Employ skilled and experienced personnel to perform cutting and patching. 2. Submit written request in advance of cutting or alteration which affects: a. structural integrity of any element of Project; b. integrity of weather exposed or moisture resistant elements; c. efficiency, maintenance, or safety element; d. safety, traffic, or hazard barriers; e. visual qualities of sight exposed elements; and f. work of Owner or separate contractor. 3. Execute cutting, fitting, and patching including excavation and fill to complete Work and to: a. fit materials together, to integrate with other work; b. uncover Work to install ill-timed Work; c. remove and replace defective or non-conforming Work; 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA For use with EJCDC 2007 EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS WOODARD & CURRAN 01 70 00-5 d. remove Samples of installed Work for testing when requested; and e. provide openings in element of Work for penetration of mechanical and electrical work. 4. Execute Work by methods to avoid damage to other work and which will provide appropriate surfaces to receive patching and finishing. 5. Provide adequate temporary support for Work to be cut. 6. Restore Work with new materials in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents. Use materials identical with original materials where recognized that satisfactory results can be produced. 7. Provide protection from elements for areas which may be exposed by uncovering work. 8. Refinish surfaces to match adjacent finishes. For continuous surfaces, refinish to nearest intersection or natural break. For an assembly, refinish entire unit. Restore exposed finishes of patched areas; and, where necessary extend finish restoration onto retained adjoining Work in a manner, which will eliminate evidence of patching. 9. Identify any Hazardous Waste, Hazardous Environmental Condition, or hazardous substance exposed during the Work to Owner for decision or remedy in accordance with Paragraph 4.06 of the Standard General and Supplementary Conditions, if any. 10. Cut work by methods least likely to damage Work to be retained and work adjoining. Cut Work with sawing and grinding tools, not with hammering, chopping, or burning tools. Cut masonry and concrete materials with masonry saw or core drill. Do not use pneumatic tools without prior approval. Core drill openings through concrete Work. Adhere to mandatory cutback requirements when saw cutting concrete and roadway openings. 11. Do not cut and patch structural Work in a manner resulting in reduction of load-carrying capacity or load/ deflection ratio. 12. Fit Work tight to pipes, sleeves, ducts, conduit, and other penetrations through surfaces. Maintain supports to ensure structural integrity of the Work. Provide devices and methods to protect other portions of Project from damage and seal voids. For interior work at penetrations of fire rated walls, partitions, ceiling, or floor construction, completely seal voids with fire resistant material, to full thickness of the penetrated element. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA For use with EJCDC 2007 EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS WOODARD & CURRAN 01 70 00-6 13. Do not cut and patch operational or safety-related components that reduce capacities to perform in manner intended. Do not cut and patch Work that reduces visual qualities. Remove and replace unsatisfactory cutting patching as directed by Engineer or Owner. F. Electrolytic Corrosion Prevention 1. Prevent galvanic action, bimetallic corrosion, anodic or cathodic action, and electrolysis at all electrical grounds and for all galvanic scale (electromotive series or table of oxidation potentials). Do not allow contact of dissimilar metals further apart than 0.35 on the galvanic scale (electromotive series or table of oxidation potentials). The electrode potential of common metals is listed below. Electrode Potential Volts (Relative to Hydrogen) Magnesium +2.37 Aluminum +1.70 Zinc+ +0.76 Chromium +0.56 Iron and Steel +0.44 Cadmium +0.40 Nickel +0.25 Tin +0.14 Lead +0.13 Copper -0.34 2. Unless otherwise indicated, provide dielectric insulators between ferrous and nonferrous pipe and equipment. G. Quality Assurance and Control of Installation 1. Monitor quality control of Subcontractors, Suppliers, manufacturers, material, equipment, services, Site conditions, and workmanship, to produce Work of specified quality. Conduct field quality control and testing specified. 2. Comply fully with manufacturers' installation instructions, including each step in sequence. If manufacturers' instructions conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Engineer before proceeding. 3. Comply with specified standards as a minimum quality for the Work except when more stringent tolerances, codes, or specified requirements indicate higher standards or more precise workmanship. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA For use with EJCDC 2007 EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS WOODARD & CURRAN 01 70 00-7 4. Perform Work using persons qualified to produce workmanship of specified quality. 5. Install field Samples and mockups at the Site as required in Specifications for review. Acceptable Samples and mockups represent a quality level for the Work. Where field Sample or mockup is specified to be removed, clear area after field Sample or mockup has been accepted by Engineer or after Work is complete when mockup is to serve as a control reference. 6. Protect adjacent construction in accordance with Paragraph 6.11 of the Standard General and Supplementary Conditions, if any. H. Manufacturers' Field Services 1. If required in the Specifications, arrange and pay for material or equipment Suppliers or manufacturers to provide qualified staff personnel (field representative) to perform the following services and services specified. Submit reports of activities, actions taken and test results to Engineer within 10 days of completion. a. Observe Site conditions, conditions of surfaces and installation, quality of workmanship. b. Report observations and Site decisions or instructions given to applicators or installers that are supplemental or contrary to manufacturers' written instructions. c. Assist with field assembly as required. d. Furnish, setup, and operate required test equipment and facilities. e. Perform and record results of manufacturer recommended inspections and tests, and tests specified for material and equipment. f. Be responsible for protection of material and equipment and safety of all personnel during testing. g. Perform any other services normally provided by field representative's company. h. Instruct operating personnel in proper use of material and equipment. i. Instruct and supervise field repairs before acceptance by Owner. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA For use with EJCDC 2007 EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS WOODARD & CURRAN 01 70 00-8 I. Independent Testing 1. Employ and pay for specified services of an independent firm in accordance with Paragraph 13.03 of the Standard General and Supplementary Conditions to perform inspection and testing as may be specified except where responsibility for a specific inspection or test is expressly allocated to Owner in the Specifications or by Laws and Regulations. 2. Reports will be submitted by the independent firm to Owner, in duplicate indicating observations and results of tests and indicating compliance or noncompliance with Contract Documents. 3. Inspection, testing, and source quality control may occur on or off the Project Site. 4. Cooperate with independent firm. Furnish samples of materials, design mix, equipment, tools, storage and assistance as requested. 5. Notify Owner and independent firm 24 hours before expected time for operations requiring services. 6. Make arrangements with independent firm and pay for additional Samples and tests required for Contractor's use. 7. Retesting required because of nonconformance to specified requirements will be performed by the same independent firm if instructed by Owner. Payment for retesting will be charged to Contractor by deducting inspection or testing charges from the Contract Price. 8. Testing or inspecting does not relieve Contractor from performing Work in accordance with requirements of the Contract Documents. 1.03 STARTUP, TESTING, AND COMMISSIONING A. Spare Parts 1. Provide spare parts required for construction, startup, testing and commissioning of the Work prior to achievement of Substantial Completion, including spare parts for flushing and consumable supplies such as bolts, nuts, gaskets, filters, insulating tape, etc., normally consumed in the startup, commissioning and testing. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA For use with EJCDC 2007 EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS WOODARD & CURRAN 01 70 00-9 2. If spare parts are to be purchased by Owner as specified, Contractor shall have the right to use the spare parts purchased by Owner provided that such spare parts are replaced prior to Substantial Completion at Contractor’s expense. Replacement spare parts, replaced by Contractor, shall be new, unused and identical as the original spare part used. B. Consumables 1. Provide initial fills of consumables including equipment lubricants, resins, chemicals, desiccants, and fuels. Provide subsequent fills if required during Warranty Period if acts or omissions of Contractor cause such consumables to require replacement. 2. Coordinate with Owner for consumables required. C. Checkout and Starting Systems 1. Coordinate schedule for startup and operation of various equipment and systems with Owner. 2. Notify Owner 7 days before startup of each major piece of equipment or system, including a staffing request for Owner’s operations and maintenance personnel required to adequately and safely support each specific start-up and operation activity. 3. Verify that each system or piece of equipment item has been assembled, constructed, or completed in accordance with the Contract and capable of functioning as intended. 4. Verify that each piece of equipment or system has been checked for proper lubrication, drive rotation, magnetic center alignment, belt tension, control sequence, or other conditions which may cause damage. 5. Verify that each piece of equipment or system has successfully completed construction testing and cold commissioning, including hydrostatic testing, loop checks, relay checks, calibration, and continuity checks and that all tests, meter readings, and specified electrical characteristics agree with those required by the equipment or system manufacturer. 6. Verify wiring and support components for equipment are complete and tested. 7. Execute start up under supervision of responsible manufacturers’ representative or Contractor's personnel in accordance with manufacturers' instructions utilizing Owner’s qualified operations and maintenance staff trained by Contractor. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA For use with EJCDC 2007 EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS WOODARD & CURRAN 01 70 00-10 8. When specified in individual Specification Sections, require manufacturer to provide field representative to be present at Site to inspect, check and approve equipment or system installation before start up, and to supervise placing equipment or system in operation. D. Adjusting and Balancing 1. Supply necessary equipment, material, construction power, and consumables (except for those provided by Owner) needed to startup and fully test the Work and replenish the same until Substantial Completion is achieved. Contractor may utilize Owner’s operating spare parts, such use requiring timely replacement at Contractor’s expense. 2. Coordinate as required for conduct of independent testing. 3. Perform specified and required adjusting and balancing concurrently to the maximum extent possible on individual equipment and systems and prior to startup and commissioning/performance testing. E. Startup and Commissioning/Performance Testing 1. Conduct startup and commissioning/performance tests to demonstrate the Work meets the requirements of the Contract Documents, satisfies the Owner’s requirements, and is in accordance with Paragraph 14.04. of the Standard General and Supplementary Conditions, if any. Conduct testing in accordance with individual Specification sections and Section 01 91 15. F. Demonstration and Training 1. Provide formal demonstration and training of Owner’s personnel as specified in individual Specification sections. END OF SECTION 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA STARTUP AND COMMISSIONING WOODARD & CURRAN 01 91 15-1 SECTION 01 91 15 STARTUP AND COMMISSIONING PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes 1. Startup and commissioning of the systems for gravity thickeners, draft pumps, press feed pumps, return activated sludge pumps, scum pumps, scum recirculation pumps, sump pumps, polymer feed, grinders, sluice gates, valves, HVAC equipment, instrumentation and process control, electrical systems. B. A system is defined as an arrangement of items of equipment, components, piping, wiring, materials, or incidentals so related or connected as to form a functional and operational unit. PART 2 – PRODUCTS (NOT APPLICABLE) PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 SYSTEM STARTUP & DEMONSTRATION REQUIREMENTS A. Pre-Startup Requirements 1. Prior to startup, undertake the following procedures, in the order listed. a. Ensure required written statements and/or guarantees from manufacturers of individual Specification sections comply with Contract Documents. Use a checklist to identify such requirements, by Specification section and submit a copy of completed checklist to the Engineer with manufacturers’ written statements and/or guarantees. b. Ensure Work is complete before startup of any unit or system. Certify to Owner that specifically services or respective equipment manufacturers’ representative required by individual Specifications have been performed in accordance with Contract Documents. c. Ensure systems are tested hydraulically, mechanically, and electrically. Ensure systems requiring calibration, commissioning, and balancing are fully certified as complete in performance in accordance with Contract Documents. Ensure required tagging, identification, and stenciling is complete. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA STARTUP AND COMMISSIONING WOODARD & CURRAN 01 91 15-2 d. Schedule startup a minimum of 30 days prior, with written notice issued, but not limited to: Owner, Engineer, Subcontractors, and applicable regulatory agencies. e. Provide labor, supervision, utilities, chemicals, equipment, tools, materials, vehicles and other items necessary to startup, operate, and demonstrate the system. f. Provide gauges, meters, recorder and monitors as required by the Engineer to supplement or augment the instrumentation system provided under this Contract to properly demonstrate that equipment fully satisfies the requirements of the Contract Documents. Select specific devices employed for the purpose of measuring the performance of the facility’s equipment and systems to provide a level of certainty consistent with the variables to be monitored. Provide that instruments are recently calibrated, and be prepared to demonstrate, through recalibration, the certainty of instruments employed for testing purposes. Perform calibration procedures per applicable standards of ASTM, ISA and IEEE. The adequacy of gauges, meters, recorders and monitors are subject to review of the Engineer. g. Provide sign off forms for each item of mechanical, electrical and instrumentation equipment provided or installed and include provisions for recording relevant performance data for original testing, and not less than 3 retests. Provide separate sections on the form to record values for pre-operation checkout, initials of representatives of equipment manufacturers, Contractor and Engineer. h. Maintain a master file of equipment sign off forms and make available for inspection by the Engineer. Upon completion of equipment testing, submit the original and two copies of the sign off forms for each equipment item. B. System Startup and Demonstration 1. Startup, operate and demonstrate specified performance of each item of equipment and each system at full operation without interruption of equipment or system or need of adjustment or repair to the satisfaction of the Engineer. 2. During startup of equipment, provide knowledgeable and experienced person(s) to instruct Owner’s designated personnel on the operation and maintenance of each system in addition to services provided by equipment manufacturer’s authorized representative(s) prescribed by individual Specifications. Provide instructions during the startup period in the form of a comprehensive “overview”; do not simply repeat previous operation and maintenance instructions. Provide a minimum of 8 hours of operation and maintenance instructions on each system per the Specifications. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA STARTUP AND COMMISSIONING WOODARD & CURRAN 01 91 15-3 3.02 EQUIPMENT START-UP & PERFORMANCE TEST PROTOCOL A. Conduct start-up in the following order. 1. Equipment Pre-Start-up Check 2. Equipment Start-up and Performance Testing 3. Manufacturers’ Equipment Testing B. Equipment Pre-Start-Up 1. Check out each item of equipment in the presence of the Engineer to demonstrate proper installation, functioning and ready for equipment start- up and performance testing. 2. Minimum requirements include, but are not limited to, the following. a. Coordinate with electrical and SCADA systems for connections, terminations and controls as required. b. Ensure equipment is properly installed, painted, leveled, wired and/or insulated. c. Ensure piping is properly installed and valving is properly set. d. Ensure piping is cleaned and pressure tested, as required. e. Ensure equipment is properly lubricated. f. Ensure safety related accessories are properly installed. g. Bump or momentarily jog equipment to establish operation and proper rotation. 3. Arrange for equipment manufacturers to be present, or verify that these procedures may be done without the manufacturer’s representatives being present. C. Equipment Start-up 1. Prior to testing any equipment, obtain written certification from the manufacturer that the equipment is properly installed, calibrated and ready for safe and efficient operation as intended by the Engineer and manufacturer. 2. Thoroughly clean and flush equipment and associated piping, channels, basins, and wetwells prior to start-up and testing of any item of equipment. 3. Start-up and operate each item of equipment, with assistance from the manufacturer’s factory trained service engineer and in the presence of the Engineer, to demonstrate equipment performs according to the requirements of the Specifications to ensure equipment is ready for performance testing. D. Performance Tests 1. General 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA STARTUP AND COMMISSIONING WOODARD & CURRAN 01 91 15-4 a. Coordinate with Owner's electrical and SCADA contractors for performance testing. b. Make full tests at the Site on each item of equipment after it has been properly installed, started and certified ready for operation to demonstrate that each item of equipment will operate properly by itself and in conjunction with other facility equipment in accordance with the Specifications. c. Furnish necessary labor, tools, equipment, power, chemicals and clean water, to perform field tests to determine that the supplied equipment, including controls and alarms, meet hydraulic, electric mechanical and performance requirements in accordance with the Specifications. d. Repeat incomplete and/or unsuccessful tests to the satisfaction of the Engineer. 2. Pumps a. Determine maximum pumpage. b. Ensure pump rate falls on pump curves. c. Record the following readings on each pump. 1) Test Flow Rate and TDH during Test 2) Amperes per phase, at the Test Flow Rate and TDH 3) Voltage each phase, at the Test Flow Rate and TDH 4) HP input to motor, at the Test Flow Rate and TDH d. Determine efficiency of pumping units at test and design conditions. e. Record maximum ampere and voltage readings of each motor and determine that they compare to the nameplate data. f. Verify proper operation of valves. g. Verify pump speed. 3. Process Equipment, Instrumentation, and Controls a. Calibrate and/or verify calibration and proper operation and function of all process and analytical instruments, and documents results, for the following. 1) Flow measurement 2) Indicating controllers 3) Indicators 4) Miscellaneous equipment 4. Electrical a. Coordinate with Owner's electrical contractor to verify proper operation and function of electrical equipment and instruments, and document results, for the following. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA STARTUP AND COMMISSIONING WOODARD & CURRAN 01 91 15-5 1) Variable Frequency Drives 5. SCADA a. Coordinate with Owner's SCADA contractor to calibrate and/or verify proper operation and function of all SCADA equipment and document results. E. Manufacturer’s Training 1. Comply with requirements in Specifications for manufacturer’s training. 2. No training can be conducted until the Owner has received approved manufacturer’s operation & maintenance manuals. 3. Owner will not accept any item of equipment prior to receiving approved manufacturer training for the equipment. This applies only to equipment requiring manufacturer’s training in accordance with the Specifications. 4. Conduct training in addition to and exclusive of start-up and performance testing. 5. Engineer shall approve the completeness of training and provide written verification of manufacturer’s equipment training. END OF SECTION This page intentionally left blank 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA DEMOLITION WOODARD & CURRAN 02 40 00-1 SECTION 02 40 00 DEMOLITION PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes 1. Perform selective demolition work in accordance with this Section. 2. Demolition includes, but is not limited to, modification, removal, relocation, and/or disposal of the following: Removal of building components, site piping, equipment, fixtures, ducts, accessories, electrical components, related piping and incidentals. 1.02 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Measurement and payment requirements: per Division 01 General Requirements. 1.03 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination, Sequencing, and Scheduling: per Division 01 General Requirements. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. B. Schedule 1. Submit for review proposed methods, equipment and operating sequences. Include coordination of all applicable items to ensure no interruption of Owner’s operations. 2. Include coordination for shutoff, capping and continuation of utility services as required, together with details for dust and noise control protection. C. Closeout and Maintenance Material Submittals: per Division 01 General Requirements. 1.05 SITE CONDITIONS A. Existing Conditions: per Division 01 General Requirements. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA DEMOLITION WOODARD & CURRAN 02 40 00-2 B. Occupancy: Conduct selective demolition work in manner that will minimize need for disruption of Owner’s normal operations. Weatherproof all structural openings. Maintain continuous treatment capacity at all times unless shutdown is specifically provided elsewhere in these documents. Contractor shall provide temporary piping and pumping as required to reroute flows around work areas. C. Conditions of Structures: The Owner assumes no responsibility for actual condition of structures to be demolished. 1. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purposes will be maintained by Owner in so far as practicable. However, variations within structure may occur by Owner’s removal and salvage operations prior to start of demolition work. D. Partial Removal: Items must be removed from structure as work progresses. Salvaged items must be transported from site as they are removed. 1. Items property of Owner: Coordinate with Owner before removing any items. Owner reserves the right to retain demolished items or portions thereof at designated location on site. Allow Owner to remove components from demolished items. Items Owner does not retain become property of Contractor and must be removed and disposed of properly. E. Explosives: Use of explosives will not be permitted. F. Traffic: Conduct demolition operations and removal of debris to ensure no interference with roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities. 1. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks or other occupied or used facilities without permission from authorities having jurisdiction. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways. G. Protections: Ensure safe passage of persons around area of demolition. Conduct operations to prevent injury to adjacent buildings, structures, other facilities, and persons. 1. Provide interior and exterior shoring, bracing, or support to prevent movement, settlement or collapse of adjacent facilities to remain. H. Damages: Promptly repair damages caused to adjacent facilities by demolition operations at no cost to Owner I. Utility Services: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect against damage during demolition operations. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA DEMOLITION WOODARD & CURRAN 02 40 00-3 PART 2 – PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Contractor shall protect all existing equipment, facilities, piping, and instrumentation not identified for demolition. 1. Pollution Control: Use water sprinkling, temporary enclosures, and other suitable methods to limit dust and dirt rising and scattering in air to lowest practical level. 2. Comply with governing regulations, permits, laws, ordinances, etc. pertaining to environmental protection. 3. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing prior to the start of work. Reform adjacent concrete areas and repair to previous condition. B. All existing instrumentation not scheduled for demolition or alterations, including instruments that relate to new monitoring or control loops, shall remain in operation in their existing location, unless otherwise indicated on the drawings, specified, or directed by the Engineer. C. Completely fill below grade areas and void resulting from demolition work. Provide fill material as shown on the Drawing or as specified. D. Demolition/Removal 1. Demolish concrete and masonry in small sections. Cut concrete and masonry at junctures with construction to remain using power driven masonry saw or hand tools. 2. Contractor shall dispose of all demolition materials, equipment, debris, and all other items not marked by the Owner to remain as his, off the site and in conformance with all existing applicable laws and regulations. 3. Complete all demolition, alterations, and modifications as indicated on the drawings, specified, and/or directed by the Engineer. 3.02 PIPE CORING A. Application: Core holes for all pipe protrusions through existing concrete structures to allow watertight installation of pipe and link seal or pipe sleeve as required. Double link seals shall be installed at all pipe protrusions through concrete walls containing liquid or saturated conditions on either side. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA DEMOLITION WOODARD & CURRAN 02 40 00-4 3.03 CLEANING A. Remove from Project site debris, rubbish, and other materials resulting from demolition operations. B. Burning of removed materials from demolished structures will not be permitted on site. C. Dispose of demolition debris in a lawful manner. D. Management of hazardous materials not specifically identified in this specification shall be extra work. This provision does not relieve Contractor of his responsibility to respond promptly and appropriately to indications of hazardous material. E. In the event that unanticipated hazardous materials are discovered or suspected, contractor shall carry out suitable measures to minimize hazards and immediately report conditions to Engineer. 3.04 SALVAGE A. All items to be salvaged shall be carefully removed and delivered to a location identified by the Owner up to ten miles from the project site. Contractor shall maintain equipment in weather protected facilities at all times. 3.05 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. B. Contractor shall remove from the site all debris resulting from the demolition operations as it accumulates. Upon completion of the Work, all materials, equipment, waste, and debris of every sort shall be removed and premises shall be left, clean, neat and orderly. END OF SECTION 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA CONCRETE REPAIR WOODARD & CURRAN 03 01 05-1 SECTION 03 01 05 CONCRETE REPAIR PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes 1. Repair new concrete when permitted by the Engineer and repair deteriorated concrete areas as defined on the Drawings, in accordance with this Section and applicable reference standards listed in Article 1.03. B. Related Requirements 1. Section 03 30 20 Concrete Placing, Curing and Finishing 1.02 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Measurement and payment requirements: per Division 01 General Requirements. 1.03 REFERENCES A. Reference Standards 1. American Association Of State Highway And Transportation Officials (AASHTO) a. AASHTO T 277 Standard Method of Test for Electrical Indication of Concrete’s Ability to Resist Chloride Ion Penetration 2. ASTM International (ASTM) a. ASTM C109 Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Hydraulic Cement Mortars (Using 2-in. or (50-mm) Cube Specimens) b. ASTM C1202 Standard Test Method for Electrical Indication of Concrete's Ability to Resist Chloride Ion Penetration c. ASTM C78 Standard Test Method for Flexural Strength of Concrete (Using Simple Beam with Third-Point Loading) d. ASTM C496 Standard Test Method for Splitting Tensile Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens e. ASTM C882 Bond Strength of Epoxy-Resin Systems Used with Concrete by Slant Shear 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA CONCRETE REPAIR WOODARD & CURRAN 03 01 05-2 f. ASTM C884 Thermal Compatibility between Concrete and Epoxy- Resin Overlay g. ASTM G109 Determining the Effects of Chemical Admixtures on the Corrosion of Embedded Steel Reinforcement in Concrete Exposed to Chloride Environments 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination, Sequencing, and Scheduling: per Division 01 General Requirements. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. B. Product Data 1. Trowel-grade polymer modified portland cement repair mortar 2. Non-sag polymer modified portland cement repair mortar 3. Reinforcing steel primer C. Notarized certificate stating that repair material meets the specified requirements and the manufacturer's current printed product literature. D. Closeout and Maintenance Material Submittals: per Division 01 General Requirements. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. 1. Deliver products in original, unopened containers with the manufacturer's name, labels, product identification, and batch numbers. 2. Store in accordance with manufacturer recommendations. 1.08 SITE CONDITIONS A. Existing Conditions: per Division 01 General Requirements. 1. Take precautions to avoid damage to surface due to mixing and handling of the specified repair material near the area of Work. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA CONCRETE REPAIR WOODARD & CURRAN 03 01 05-3 PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 MORTAR A. Performance/Design Criteria 1. Mixed Properties a. Application time: approximately 15 minutes. b. Finishing time: 20-60 minutes. c. Color: concrete gray. 2. Cured Properties a. Compressive strength (ASTM C109) 1) 1 day: 3,000 psi minimum. 2) 28 day: 7,000 psi minimum. b. Splitting Tensile Strength (ASTM C496) 1) 28 day: 750 psi minimum c. Flexural Strength (Modulus of Rupture, ASTM C78) 1) 28 day: 2,000 psi minimum. d. Bond Strength (ASTM C882, modified) 1) 28 day: 2,200 psi minimum. e. Thermal Compatibility (ASTM C884, modified) 1) Passes test f. Permeability (ASTM C1202, AASHTO T 277) 1) 28 day: approximately 500 coulombs. g. Cracked Beam Corrosion Tests (ASTM G 109, modified) 1) Reduced corrosion rates: 63 percent versus control specimens. B. Acceptable level of quality: equivalent to products manufactured by Sika Corporation meeting the specified performance requirements. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA CONCRETE REPAIR WOODARD & CURRAN 03 01 05-4 1. Trowel grade mortar: SikaTop 122 Plus 1. Non-sag mortar: SikaTop 123 Plus 2. Steel reinforcement primer: Sika Armatec 110 EpoCem 2.02 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Do not apply material in inclement weather or if inclement weather is imminent. B. Condition product as recommended by the manufacturer. 3.02 SURFACE PREPARATION A. Mechanically prepare areas to be repaired so they are clean, sound and free of contaminants. Remove loose and deteriorated concrete by mechanical means. Remove dirt, oil, grease, and bond-inhibiting materials from the surface. B. Except where tie holes are filled, saw cut perimeter 1/8 inch minimum when a neat mortar is to be applied, and 1-inch minimum when an extended mortar is to be applied. C. Prepare concrete substrate to obtain a minimum surface profile of 1/16 inch in depth with a new aggregate fractured surface using steel shot blasting, abrasive blasting, or water jetting (hydrodemolition). Do not use of scabblers, bush hammers, or pneumatic hammers. Provide that the area to be repaired is not less than 1/8 inch in depth. D. Prepare substrate to saturated surface dry condition with no standing water. E. Steel Reinforcement Primer 1. Where reinforcement with active corrosion is encountered, sandblast to remove contaminants and rust, pressure wash, and apply primer. 2. Determine section loss and splice new reinforcement where there is more than 15 percent to 25 percent loss, as directed by the Engineer. If half or more of the diameter of the bar is exposed, chip out 1/2 inch minimum behind the bar. F. Treat cracks in the substrate in the area of repair as directed by the Engineer. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA CONCRETE REPAIR WOODARD & CURRAN 03 01 05-5 3.03 MIXING AND APPLICATION A. The following describes the specific procedures applicable for the Sika products specified in Part 2. Mix and apply in strict accordance with, and adhere to limitations and cautions of manufacturer's instructions. 1. Horizontal surfaces: SikaTop 122 Plus (trowel-grade) or equal. 2. Vertical and overhead surfaces: SikaTop 123 Plus (non-sag) or equal. B. Trowel-Grade Polymer Mortar 1. Pour entire Component A into mixing container. Add entire Component B while mixing. For extended mix, introduce 3/8 inch coarse aggregate at desired quantity. Mix to uniform consistency, maximum 3 minutes. a. Addition rate not to exceed 42 pounds per bag. b. Aggregate: non-reactive, clean, well-graded, saturated surface dry, with low absorption/high density. 2. Scrub mortar into substrate, filling pores and voids. Force material against edge of repair, working toward center. After filling repair, consolidate, then screed. Allow mortar or concrete to set to desired stiffness and finish with wood or sponge float for a smooth surface. a. Minimum application thickness: 1/8 inch for a neat mortar; 1 inch if extended. b. Maximum application thickness in a single lift: 1 inch for a neat mortar; 3 inches if extended. c. Where multiple lifts are required, score top surface of the preceding lift to produce a roughened surface. Allow preceding lift to reach final set prior to applying the next lift. C. Non-Sag Polymer Mortar 1. Pour entire Component A into mixing container. Add entire Component B while mixing. Mix maximum 3 minutes to uniform consistency. 2. Scrub mortar into substrate, filling pores and voids. Force material against edge of repair, working toward center. After filling repair, consolidate, then screed. Allow mortar or concrete to set to desired stiffness and finish with wood or sponge float for a smooth surface. a. Minimum application thickness: 1/8 inch. b. Maximum application thickness in a single lift: 1-1/2 inches. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA CONCRETE REPAIR WOODARD & CURRAN 03 01 05-6 c. Where multiple lifts are required, score top surface of the preceding lift to produce a roughened surface. Allow preceding lift 30 minutes minimum to reach final set prior to applying the next lift. D. Curing 1. Moist cure with wet burlap and polyethylene using a fine mist of water or water based compatible curing compound. Do not use curing compounds for curing between successive lifts. Do not use solvent-based curing compounds. Commence moist curing immediately after finishing. Protect newly applied material from direct sunlight, wind, rain, and frost. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. B. Manufacturer Field Services 1. Furnish the services of a qualified manufacturer’s field representative prior to commencement of application to provide instruction, demonstrate proper application and inspection procedures, and to inspect the finish of the prepared surfaces prior to application. 3.05 CLEANING A. Leave finished Work and Work area in a neat, clean condition without evidence of spillovers on adjacent areas. 3.06 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. END OF SECTION 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA CEMENTITIOUS CRYSTALLINE LEAK REPAIR WOODARD & CURRAN 03 01 06-1 SECTION 03 01 06 CEMENTITIOUS CRYSTALLINE LEAK REPAIR PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes 1. Provide all labor, materials, services and equipment necessary for the supply and installation of cementitious crystalline leak repairs to concrete substrates, above-grade or below-grade, on either dry side or wet side of substrates, as indicated on drawings and as specified herein. 2. Provide cementitious crystalline leak repairs per this specification and/or injection grouting per Section 03 63 00 to seal leaks in concrete structures. B. Work performed by General Contractor 1. Concrete tank tightness testing in accordance to ACI 350.1 will be performed by the General Contractor. C. Related Requirements 1. 03 16 00 – Concrete Specialties 2. 03 30 00 – Cast-In-Place Concrete 3. 03 30 20 – Concrete Placing, Curing, and Finishing 4. 03 63 00 – Injection Grouting 1.02 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Measurement and payment requirements: per Division 01 General Requirements. 1.03 REFERENCES A. Reference Standards 1. American Concrete Institute (ACI) a. ACI 350.1 Specification for Tightness Testing of Environmental Engineering Concrete Containment Structures. 2. ASTM International (ASTM) a. ASTM C267 Chemical Resistance of Mortars, Grouts, and Monolithic Surfacings and Polymer Concretes 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA CEMENTITIOUS CRYSTALLINE LEAK REPAIR WOODARD & CURRAN 03 01 06-2 b. ASTM C39 Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens 3. German Institute for Standardization (DIN) a. DIN 1048 Part-5 Testing of Hardened Concrete (Water Penetration) 4. NSF International (NSF) a. NSF/ANSI 61 Drinking Water System Components – Health Effects 5. U.S. Army Corps of Engineers (USACE) a. CRD C48-73 "Permeability of Concrete" 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination, Sequencing, and Scheduling: per Division 01 General Requirements. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. B. Product Data C. Certificates D. Sample Test Reports and Evaluations E. Manufacturer Instructions F. Manufacturer Reports G. Qualification Statements H. Manufacturer Warranty I. Closeout and Maintenance Material Submittals: per Division 01 General Requirements. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. B. Qualifications: Per Division 01 General Requirements and as follows for installation contractor. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA CEMENTITIOUS CRYSTALLINE LEAK REPAIR WOODARD & CURRAN 03 01 06-3 1. Manufacturer Qualifications: Manufacturer shall be ISO 9001 registered, and shall have no less than 10 years of experience in manufacturing the cementitious crystalline leak repair materials for the required work. C. Independent Testing 1. Potable Water Approval: Independent testing shall be performed according to NSF Standard 61 and approval for use of waterproofing material on structures holding potable water shall be evidenced by NSF certification. 2. Crystalline Penetration: Crystallizing capability of waterproofing material shall be evidenced by independent SEM (Scanning Electron Microscope) photographs documenting penetration of crystal-forming waterproofing material to a depth of 2 inches. 3. Permeability: Independent testing shall be performed according to USACE CRD C48-73 "Permeability of Concrete" or DIN 1048 Part-5: a. No admixtures permitted in test sample b. Coatings to have maximum thickness of 0.05 inches per coat with up to two coats permitted. c. Samples to be pressure tested to 70 psi. d. Treated samples, after crystalline growth has occurred, shall exhibit no measurable leakage. D. Pre-Installation Conference: Prior to installation of cementitious crystalline leak repairs, conduct meeting or conference call with applicator, installers of work adjacent to or which penetrates repairs, Engineer, owner’s representative, and manufacturer’s representative to verify and review the following: 1. Project requirements per contract documents 2. Manufacturer’s product data including application instruction, curing, and protection. 3. Substrate conditions, anticipated air and surface temperatures, and preparation requirements on cementitious crystalline leak repairs application E. Technical Consultation: The manufacturer of the cementitious crystalline leak repair products shall provide technical consultation on application of product and shall 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA CEMENTITIOUS CRYSTALLINE LEAK REPAIR WOODARD & CURRAN 03 01 06-4 B. Packing, Shipping, Handling, and Unloading C. Storage and Protection D. Waste Management and Disposal 1.08 SITE CONDITIONS A. Existing Conditions: per Division 01 General Requirements. 1. Product will be used to seal actively leaking cracks identified during tightness testing of concrete structures per specification 03 30 20. Application of cementitious crystalline leak repairs will occur during concrete tank tightness testing in accordance with ACI 350.1. 2. Comply with manufacturer’s product data regarding condition of substrate to receive cementitious crystalline leak repairs, weather conditions before and during installation, and protection of the installed system. 1.09 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer Warranty: Standard 10 year limited warranty. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Xypex Chemical Corporation B. Kryton International Inc C. Penetron D. Or equal 2.02 PRODUCTS A. General: 1. Products listed below are grouped by Manufacturer. Contractor shall submit product data from one manufacturer. 2. Materials shall not contain chlorides 3. Materials shall not provide waterproofing by way of hydrophobic ingredients such as oils, stearates, silanes, silicate salts or other hydrophobic treatments. B. Xypex Chemical Corporation: 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA CEMENTITIOUS CRYSTALLINE LEAK REPAIR WOODARD & CURRAN 03 01 06-5 1. WaterStop Plug: Xypex Patch’n Plug 2. Repair Grout: Xypex Concentrate 3. Crystalline Concentrate Powder : Xypex Concentrate 4. Curing: Spray Method (water) or Gamma Cure C. Kryton International Inc: 1. WaterStop Plug: Krystol Plug 2. Repair Grout: Krystol Repair Grout 3. Crystalline Concentrate Powder: Krystol T1 4. Curing: Spray Method (water) D. Penetron: 1. WaterStop Plug: PenePlug 2. Repair Grout: Penecrete Mortar 3. Crystalline Concentrate Powder: Penetron 4. Curing: Spray Method (water) E. Mixes 1. Mixes shall be in accordance with manufacturer’s product data and written instructions. For any discrepancies in manufacturer’s instructions and information listed herein, mixes shall be per manufacturer’s instructions 2. General: Mix waterproofing material by volume with clean water which is free from salt and deleterious materials. Mix waterproofing material in quantities that can be applied within 20 to 30 minutes from time of mixing. As mixture thickens, stir frequently, but do not add additional water. Do not mix bonding agents or admixtures with crystalline waterproofing materials. 3. Brush or Trowel Application: Measure dry powder and place in mixing container. Measure water and mix into the dry powder with a paddle on a slow speed electric drill (250 RPM) or other type mixer which is acceptable to manufacturer. Mixing proportions shall be as follows 4. Spray Application: Mixing shall be same as specified for brush application except that mixture shall be thinner. Use following proportions as a guide 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA CEMENTITIOUS CRYSTALLINE LEAK REPAIR WOODARD & CURRAN 03 01 06-6 only. Adjust proportions to match type of spray equipment and pressures used 5. Dry-Pack Mix: Using a trowel, mix clean water for 10 to 15 seconds. It is acceptable that lumps may be present in mixture. Mix only as much as can be applied in 15 minutes F. Curing Compounds (Preferred Method) 1. Provide manufacturer’s recommended curing compound to protect product after installation and during curing period. 2. If curing compounds are not available from cementitious crystalline leak repair manufacturer, contractor shall water cure (fog spray) or shall provide a curing compound that is compatible with and approved by the cementitious crystalline leak repair manufacturer. G. Accessories 1. Tools 2. Extra Supplies H. Source Quality Control: Obtain cementitious crystalline leak repairs from a single manufacturer 1. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. 2. Manufacturer Field Services 3. Coordination of Other Tests and Inspections PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLERS A. Qualified per Division 01 General Requirements. 3.02 EXAMINATION A. Site Visit: Prior to installation, visit the site with a manufacturer’s representative to inspect and certify that concrete surfaces are in acceptable condition to receive treatment. B. Verification of Substrates: Verify concrete surfaces are sound and clean, and that form release agents and materials to cure and seal the concrete are compatible with the treatment. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA CEMENTITIOUS CRYSTALLINE LEAK REPAIR WOODARD & CURRAN 03 01 06-7 C. Defects: Examine surfaces to be treated for form tie holes and defects such as honeycombing, rock pockets, faulty construction joints, and cracks. D. Tightness Testing: Leaks shall be examined during concrete tank tightness testing in accordance with ACI 350.1, while the concrete tank is filled with water. All leaks shall be sealed in accordance with ACI 350.1 and to the satisfaction of the Engineer and Owner’s representative. 3.03 PREPARATION A. General: Preparation shall be in accordance with manufacturer’s product data and written instructions. For any discrepancies in manufacturer’s instructions and information listed herein, preparation shall be per manufacturer’s instructions. B. Concrete Finish: Concrete surfaces to receive cementitious crystalline leak repair treatment shall have an open capillary system to provide tooth and suction, and shall be free from scale, excess form oil, laitance, curing compounds and foreign matter. Horizontal surfaces shall have a rough wood float or broom finish C. Surface Preparation: Smooth surfaces (e.g. where steel forms are used) or surfaces covered with excess form oil or other contaminants shall be 1. Washed, lightly sand-blasted, water-blasted, or acid etched with muriatic acid as necessary to provide a clean absorbent surface. Surfaces to be acid- etched shall be saturated with water prior to application of acid. 2. Surface areas that are mechanically removed as part of repair are not required to be acid etched, sand-blasted, or water-blasted. D. Demolition/Removal: 1. Cracks, Construction Joints, and Tie Holes: Chip out or saw cut defective areas in a "U" shaped slot one 1-inch wide and a minimum of 1-1/2 inch deep extending at least 4 inches past termination of existing defect. A V- shaped slot or joint is not acceptable. Clean slot of debris and dust 2. Rock Pockets, Honeycombing or Other defective concrete: Rout out defective areas to sound concrete. Remove loose materials and clean area of debris and dust. 3.04 INSTALLATION A. General: Installation shall be in accordance with manufacturer’s product data and written installation instructions. For any discrepancies in manufacturer’s instructions and information listed herein, installation shall be per manufacturer’s instructions. B. Cracks, Construction Joints and Tie Holes: 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA CEMENTITIOUS CRYSTALLINE LEAK REPAIR WOODARD & CURRAN 03 01 06-8 1. Chip out or saw cut defective area in a U-shaped slot per Article 3.03 Preparation. 2. Saturate any dry areas with water and allow water to soak in. Remove all excess surface water. 3. To stop water flow apply waterstop plug to half the depth of slot immediately after removing surface water. Mix waterstop plug dry powder with water to form a dry-pack mix per manufacturer’s instructions Waterstop plug should be applied to full length of crack/joint area. Repair fill length of cracks or construction joints, even if only a portion of the crack is visibly leaking. Do not proceed until water flow has stopped. This step may be omitted only is crack or construction joint is not actively leaking. 4. Mix crystalline concentrate powder with water per manufacturer’s instructions to form slurry. Apply slurry coat over the installed waterstop plug and on a 6-inch wide strip of concrete surface both sides of the slot. Application may be by brush or gloved hand at manufacturer’s recommended thickness. Allow application to set per manufacturer’s instructions. For Kryton repair products, skip this step and directly apply repair grout per step 5. 5. Mix repair grout with water per manufacturer’s instructions to form dry- pack mix. While prior coat is still tacky, fill remaining slot depth flush with adjacent surface. Apply dry-pack by gloved hand, then compress it tightly by using a pneumatic packing toll or a hammer and block. 6. Wet the dry-pack surface lightly with water, then apply a final slurry coat of crystalline concentrate powder over the repaired area and to 6-inches on both sides of the slot at manufacturer’s recommended thickness. 7. Cure with manufacturer’s curing compound (preferred) or fog spray with water three times a day for 3 days. C. Rock Pockets, Honeycombing or Other defective concrete which are actively leaking: 1. Rout out defective area per Article 3.03 Preparation. 2. Saturate any dry areas and allow time for concrete to absorb water, then remove any free-standing water. 3. To stop the flow of water, fill the cavity to surface with waterstop plug mixed with water to form dry-pack mix. For large cavities, first handrub a layer of waterstop plug into the cavity to help “key” the patch. Large patches may require the addition of aggregate to the waterstop plug. For the size and amount of aggregate, refer to manufacturer’s product data 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA CEMENTITIOUS CRYSTALLINE LEAK REPAIR WOODARD & CURRAN 03 01 06-9 sheet. Do not proceed until water flow has stopped. This step may be omitted only if crack or construction joint is not actively leaking 4. After the patch has set, apply slurry coat of crystalline concentrate powder over the repair area at manufacturer’s recommended dosage. Allow repair to set per manufacturer’s instructions. For Kryton repair products, skip this step and directly apply repair grout per step 5 5. While the prior coat is still tacky, fill the cavity with repair grout. 6. Allow the patch to set, then apply a final slurry coat of crystalline concentrate powder over the repaired area at manufacturer’s recommended application thickness 7. Cure with manufacturer’s curing compound (preferred) or fog spray with water three times a day for 3 days. D. Concrete tanks: Where cementitious crystalline leak repairs are applied to interior surfaces of concrete tanks, prior to tightness testing in accordance with ACI305.1, the applied products shall be cured for 3-days and then allowed to set (air cure) for an additional 12 days. Unless otherwise noted, concrete tanks cannot be tightness tested until concrete obtains its 28-day design compressive strength. E. Backfilling: Do not backfill against cementitious crystalline leak repair materials prior to 7 days after application. Unless otherwise noted, concrete tanks cannot be backfilled until concrete has obtained its 28-day design compressive strength. 3.05 WORKMANSHIP AND FINAL APPEARANCE: A. All repairs to surfaces that are exposed to view including but not limited to: all interior concrete tank surfaces, all interior basement walls, and all exterior tank walls and basement walls that are above final grade: 1. Surface preparation shall include additional care and workmanship to allow final slurry coat of crystalline of concentrate powder to be applied flush with adjacent surfaces. 2. Final application of repairs that are not flush with adjacent surfaces or do not match finish of adjacent surfaces shall be repaired or re-installed at no additional cost to owner. B. Cementitious crystalline leak repair materials applied to surfaces noted, scheduled, or specified in contract documents to receive a grout-cleaned rubbed finish per specification 03 30 20 shall not be visible to view after application of grout-cleaned rubbed finish. C. Cementitious crystalline leak repair materials applied to surfaces not exposed to view nor to receive a grout cleaned rubbed finish shall be applied per 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA CEMENTITIOUS CRYSTALLINE LEAK REPAIR WOODARD & CURRAN 03 01 06-10 manufacturer’s instructions and per contractor’s means and methods to provide a repair that seals all leaks in accordance to ACI 350.1 and to the satisfaction of the engineer and owner’s representative. 3.06 RE-INSTALLATION AND REPAIRS A. Any leaks that develop during any period of construction are required to be sealed to the satisfaction of the Engineer and Owner’s representative. B. Cementitious crystalline leak repair materials not installed according to the workmanship and final appearance requirements of Article 3.05, shall be re- installed or repaired to the satisfaction of the engineer and owner’s representative. 3.07 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. B. Manufacturer Field Services END OF SECTION 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA CONCRETE FORMING WOODARD & CURRAN 03 11 00-1 SECTION 03 11 00 CONCRETE FORMING PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. The Work of this section comprises all materials, tools, equipment and labor required for the design, preparation and cleaning, construction, and removal of all concrete formwork, and the installation of all concrete embedments furnished under other sections, necessary for the proper completion of the Work in accordance with this Section and applicable reference standards listed in Article 1.03. B. Related Requirements 1. Section 03 30 20 – Concrete Placing, Curing and Finishing 1.02 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Measurement and Payment requirements: per Division 01 General Requirements. 1.03 REFERENCES A. Reference Standards 1. American Concrete Institute International (ACI) a. ACI 117 Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials and Commentary b. ACI 301 Specifications for Structural Concrete c. ACI 347 Guide to Formwork for Concrete 2. ASTM International (ASTM) a. ASTM C31 Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field b. ASTM C39 Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens 3. U.S. Army Corps of Engineers (USACE) a. COE CRD-C 572 Corps of Engineers Specifications for Polyvinylchloride Waterstops 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA CONCRETE FORMING WOODARD & CURRAN 03 11 00-2 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination, Sequencing, and Scheduling: per Division 01 General Requirements. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. B. Product Data 1. Form Ties 2. Form Release Agent 3. Waterstops, including details at all corners and intersections, which shall be factory formed C. Manufacturer's Instructions 1. Form Ties 2. Form Release Agent 3. Waterstops D. Closeout and Maintenance Material Submittals: per Division 01 General Requirements. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. 1.08 SITE CONDITIONS A. Existing Conditions: per Division 01 General Requirements. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. General 1. Formwork shall conform dimensionally to the concrete Work as shown on the Drawings. To minimize the number of panel joints, formwork panels shall be of the largest practicable sizes. Cylindrical walls shall be formed 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA CONCRETE FORMING WOODARD & CURRAN 03 11 00-3 with circular formwork, not straight-segmented forms. Formwork shall be sufficiently tight to prevent leakage. 2. Undamaged smooth form facing materials such as plywood, hardboard, metal, and plastic, that will produce a smooth form finish, shall be used. Formwork shall not result in fins or offsets exceeding 1/8 inch. If used, aluminum forms with un-oxidized surfaces shall be pretreated with a paste made of calcium hydroxide and water, followed by water rinsing, repeated until hydrogen bubbles do not form. B. Form Release Agent 1. Form release agent shall be non-grain raising, non-staining, and shall not leave a residue on the concrete nor adversely affect bonding of materials to be applied. C. Form Ties 1. General Requirements: a. Form ties shall be adjustable length, sized to withstand construction loads, and upon removal shall prevent concrete spalling. Ties shall have break back indentation. b. Plastic Cones: Form tie assembly with cone-shaped depressions at the concrete surfaces with break back ties. The protion of the tie remaining embedded in the concrete upon removal shall be equal to the depth of the cone specified. c. Neoprene Washers: Flat washer sized to fit tightly on tie wire and positioned at the center of the tie wire. d. Tie Systems that include plug style waterstops inserted into tie holes after removal of forms are not permitted. 2. Concrete tanks, Secondary Containment Structures, and Basement Walls: a. Plastic Cones: 1” diameter x 1-1/2 inches deep (Special Order) b. Neoprene Washers: Required on all form ties 3. All other work: a. Plastic Cones: 1” diameter x 1” deep (Standard) b. Neoprene Washers: Not required, unless noted otherwise on drawings. D. PVC Waterstops 1. PVC waterstops shall meet COE CRD-C 572 except: the tensile strength shall exceed 2,000 psi; the minimum ultimate elongation shall be 300 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA CONCRETE FORMING WOODARD & CURRAN 03 11 00-4 percent; and they shall be manufactured from virgin polyvinyl chloride with no scrap, reclaimed material, or pigment. 2. Waterstops for construction joints shall be 6 inch wide, ribbed, and flat: Sika Greenstreak 679, Vinylex R638, Wirestop FR-6380, or approved equal. 3. Waterstops for containment curbs, where shown as 4-inch waterstops, shall be 4 inch wide, ribbed, and flat: Sika Greenstreak 781, Vinylex R4316T, Wirestop FR-4316, or approved equal. 4. Retrofit waterstop shall be 3/16 inch thick, L-shaped with a 3 inch long ribbed vertical leg, and 3 inch long non-ribbed horizontal leg: Sika Greenstreak 655 or approved equal. Stainless steel batten bars with pre- drilled holes 6 inch on center and approved stainless steel fasteners shall be provided. A bedding epoxy recommended by the waterstop manufacturer shall also be provided, Greenstreak 7300 Epoxy, or approved equal. 5. Corners and intersections shall be factory formed and tested. 6. A system of hog rings or grommets spaced 12 inches apart along both edges of waterstop shall be provided for proper positioning and securing of waterstop to adjacent reinforcement by wiring. E. Hydrophilic Waterstops 1. Hydrophilic waterstops, where noted on the Drawings, shall be non- bentonite, expansive rubber strip: CJ-1020-2K by Sika Hydrotite, Swellseal Joint as manufactured by DeNeef Construction Chemicals, Inc., ConSeal CS-231 by Concrete Sealants, Inc., or approved equal. 2.02 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS A. The Contractor shall design, erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork in accordance with ACI 301 to support all loads, including construction loads, until the concrete structure can support such loads. 3.02 CONSTRUCTION A. Tolerances 1. Tolerances shall be in accordance with ACI 117. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA CONCRETE FORMING WOODARD & CURRAN 03 11 00-5 B. Form Alignment 1. At locations where continuous surfaces are formed in successive units, forms shall be tightly fitted over the hardened concrete surface to obtain accurate surface alignment and to prevent leakage of mortar and the formation of fins, ridges, and other defects. C. Chamfered Edges 1. All exposed concrete corners shall be formed with beveled strips to provide 3/4 inch chamfers, unless otherwise shown, specified, or directed by the Engineer. 2. Where concrete walls, columns, and beams abut masonry walls, the chamfer shall be omitted. 3. Where masonry walls are flush with the face of supporting concrete curbs, the chamfer shall be omitted. 4. Chamfering by grinding is prohibited. D. Openings 1. Form openings in concrete where required for other Work. Upon failing to form such openings, provide them in a manner approved by the Engineer at no additional cost to the Owner. 2. Provide 6-inch PVC waterstop at the perimeter of such openings required to be watertight. 3. Except as otherwise specified, all such openings shall be filled with concrete after the Work to be installed therein is complete. E. Cleanouts and Access Panels 1. Temporary openings shall be provided to facilitate cleaning and inspection prior to concrete placement, including at the bottom of wall forms. Cleanout openings are not permitted in exposed concrete, concrete exposed to view upon completion of the Work, whether or not it is painted, without the approval of the Engineer. 2. All refuse, sawdust, shavings, etc. shall be removed, and the forms broom cleaned before concrete placement. F. Form Release Agent 1. Forms shall be coated with the approved form release agent before placement of reinforcing steel. Do not apply form release agent at locations of monolithic construction joints, which are construction joints 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA CONCRETE FORMING WOODARD & CURRAN 03 11 00-6 with all the reinforcement continuous through the joint. Excess agent applied to the forms, and on the reinforcing steel and other surfaces requiring a concrete bond, shall be removed. 2. Forms for unexposed surfaces may be thoroughly wetted in lieu of the approved form release agent immediately before concrete is placed. However, form release agent shall be used in freezing weather. G. PVC Waterstops 1. Waterstops shall be stored under tarpaulins, protected from sunlight, precipitation, soiling, etc. 2. Center waterstop in joint and secure in correct position with hog rings or grommets spaced 12 inches apart along both edges of waterstop, and wired to adjacent reinforcement prior to concrete placement. 3. Install retrofit waterstops in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Grind or shot blast concrete surface to receive waterstop. Apply approximately an epoxy bed 1/8 inch thick, and slightly wider than the waterstop. Place waterstop in epoxy bed prior to epoxy cure and secure waterstop to substrate with stainless steel batten bars and approved stainless steel anchors 6 inches on center. Fasten vertical leg of waterstop to reinforcement with wire ties every 12 inches prior to concrete placement. 4. Waterstops shall be continuous throughout . 5. Only straight butt splices shall be made in the field. All field splices shall be heat fused welded using a Teflon coated thermostatically controlled waterstop splicing iron at 380 degrees F, and following manufacturer's recommendations. Unacceptable field splices include, but are not limited to, the following a. Tensile strength less than 80 percent of parent section. b. Misalignment of center bulbs and ribs more than 1/16 inch or that reduces cross section by more than 15 percent. c. Visible porosity, bubbles, or inadequate bonding. If while prodding the joint with a penknife, the knife breaks through the outer portion of the weld into a bubble. d. Visible signs of splice separation when cooled splice is bent by hand at a sharp angle, including bond failure greater than 1/16 inch depth. e. Combined misalignment and bond failure with net cross sectional reduction of more than 15 percent. f. Charred or burnt material. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA CONCRETE FORMING WOODARD & CURRAN 03 11 00-7 g. Edge welded tee intersections. H. Hydrophilic Waterstop 1. Hydrophilic waterstop shall be continuous, and installed in strict accordance with the manufacturer's instructions, in double rows with a space between, at each joint. Any extended contact with standing water, such as puddles, is not permitted. 3.03 INSTALLATION OF EMBEDDED ITEMS A. General 1. Coordinate the setting of anchor bolts, thimbles, inserts, wall pipe, sleeves, and other embedded items. Before placing concrete, ensure that all items are accurately located and firmly secured against displacement. 2. All items shall be thoroughly cleaned and free of loose rust, mill scale, dirt, grease, etc. Wood used for removable keys shall be thoroughly dampened before concrete is placed against it. B. Electrical Conduit 1. Electrical conduit may be embedded in concrete provided the following conditions are met. a. Outside diameter of conduit shall not exceed 1/3 of concrete thickness. b. Conduit shall not be placed closer than 3 diameters on center. c. Conduit shall not significantly impair the strength of the construction. d. Conduit shall not be embedded in structural concrete slabs less than 4 inches thick. e. Only 2 conduits may cross at any point. The sum of the outside diameter of the crossing conduits shall not exceed 1/3 of the concrete thickness. f. A 1-1/2 inch minimum concrete cover shall be provided for conduits in structural slabs. g. Conduit shall not be located between bottom of reinforcing steel and bottom of slab. h. Conduit is not permitted in beams, girders, and columns without the approval of the Engineer. i. Aluminum conduit shall not be embedded in concrete. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA CONCRETE FORMING WOODARD & CURRAN 03 11 00-8 j. Conduit shall be installed so that cutting, bending, or displacement of reinforcement from its proper location is not necessary. 2. Contractor shall notify Engineer of any embedded conduits not installed according the conditions specified herein a minimum of 24 hours prior to concrete placement. Noncompliant conduit placements shall be repositioned or removed to the satisfaction of the engineer and owner’s representative. 3.04 REMOVAL A. Form Removal 1. Form removal per ACI 347, as modified herein. 2. Forms shall be removed while ensuring the complete safety and serviceability of the structure. Forms or shoring for slabs, beams, and other suspended members shall not be removed until members are of sufficient strength to safely support their own weight and the weight thereon. 3. Newly unsupported portions of the structure shall not be subjected to heavy construction or material loading. Additional shores or re-shores shall be provided as required to adequately support the members during the construction period. 4. The Contractor shall be responsible for the proper removal of forms, shores, and bracing. 5. Spalling of concrete surfaces shall be prevented. 6. When forms are removed before the specified curing period (as specified in Section 03 30 20) is complete, measures shall be taken to continue curing and to continue providing thermal protection for the concrete. 7. Forms may be removed when the cumulative time during which the temperature of the air surrounding the concrete is above 50 degrees F are as follows a. Walls, columns, sides of beams and girders, and similar parts of the Work not supporting the weight of the concrete: 24 hours. b. When design superimposed load is less than the self-weight 1) Beam and Girder Soffits a) Clear span less than 10 feet: 7 days b) Clear span 10 feet to 20 feet: 14 days 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA CONCRETE FORMING WOODARD & CURRAN 03 11 00-9 c) Clear span more than 20 feet: 21 days 2) Slabs a) Clear span less than 10 feet: 4 days b) Clear span 10 feet to 20 feet: 7 days c) Clear span more than 20 feet: 10 days c. When design superimposed load is more than the self-weight 1) Beam and Girder Soffits a) Clear span less than 10 feet: 4 days b) Clear span 10 feet to 20 feet: 7 days c) Clear span more than 20 feet: 14 days 2) Slabs: a) Clear span less than 10 feet: 3 days b) Clear span 10 feet to 20 feet: 4 days c) Clear span more than 20 feet: 7 days d. Alternatively to the stripping times specified, additional concrete cylinders shall be made using representative concrete, witnessed and approved by the Engineer, and tested at no additional cost to the Owner. Such specimens shall be field cured in accordance with ASTM C31 under conditions that are not more favorable than the most unfavorable conditions for the portions of the concrete that the test specimens represent. The supporting forms and shores may be removed when the concrete strength as tested per ASTM C39 is a minimum of 70 percent of the specified design strength, as determined by the field-cured cylinders according to ACI 301. B. Tie Holes 1. Filling of form tie holes and concrete finishing are specified in Section 03 30 20. 3.05 CLEANING AND REPAIR OF FORMS A. Parts of forms reserved for reuse shall be inspected, cleaned, and repaired. Any parts dented, deformed, or otherwise rendered unfit for reuse shall be discarded. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA CONCRETE FORMING WOODARD & CURRAN 03 11 00-10 3.06 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. 3.07 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. END OF SECTION 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA CONCRETE SPECIALTIES WOODARD & CURRAN 03 16 00-1 SECTION 03 16 00 CONCRETE SPECIALTIES PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes 1. Provide all materials, tools, equipment, and labor necessary for the construction of concrete specialties as specified, as shown on the Drawings, and as necessary for the proper completion of the Work in accordance with this section and applicable reference standards listed in Article 1.03. 2. Epoxy adhesive for installing drilled and epoxy rebar is specified herein. 3. Post-installed expansion anchors and adhesive anchoring systems are specified in Section 05 50 00. B. Related Requirements 1. Section 03 30 00 – Cast-In-Place Concrete 2. Section 03 30 20 – Concrete Placing, Curing and Finishing 3. Section 05 50 00 – Metal Fabrications 4. Section 26 05 43 – Underground Ducts and Raceways for Electrical Systems 1.02 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Measurement and payment requirements: per Division 01 General Requirements. 1.03 REFERENCES A. Reference Standards 1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) a. ASTM A615 Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Carbon-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement b. ASTM A1064 Standard Specification Carbon-Steel Wire and Welded Wire Reinforcement, Plain and Deformed, for Concrete c. ASTM C1107 Standard Specification for Packed Dry, Hydraulic- Cement Grout (Non-shrink) 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA CONCRETE SPECIALTIES WOODARD & CURRAN 03 16 00-2 d. ASTM D4832 Preparation and Testing of Controlled Low Strength Material (CLSM) Test Cylinders 2. ICC Evaluation Service (ICC-ES) a. ICC-ES AC308 Acceptance Criteria for Post-Installed Adhesive Anchors in Concrete Elements 3. American Concrete Institute (ACI) a. ACI 355.2 Qualification of Post-Installed Mechanical Anchors in Concrete b. ACI 355.4 Qualification of Post-Installed Adhesive Anchors in Concrete 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination, Sequencing, and Scheduling: per Division 01 General Requirements. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. B. Product Data 1. Non-Shrink Grout 2. Epoxy Adhesive (for drill and epoxy rebar) a. ICC-ES report for manufacturer’s specific product b. Epoxy ultimate bond strength c. Manufacture’s chart for embedment to develop yield strength and tensile strength of ASTM A615, grade 60, rebar sizes #3 thru #11. d. Storage requirements e. Gel and cure times as a function of temperature f. Installation temperature requirements for cartridges and base material g. Drilling method (diamond drill bit shall be prohibited) h. Drill bit diameter and depth of hole for rebar sizes i. Hole cleaning procedure and required condition of hole j. Requirements for discarding initial discharge to ensure proper mixing k. Hole filling procedure 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA CONCRETE SPECIALTIES WOODARD & CURRAN 03 16 00-3 l. Time period when anchor cannot be contacted or otherwise disturbed C. Design Data and Test Reports 1. Concrete for concrete fill and duct banks. a. Submittals as required in Section 03 30 00. 2. Controlled Low Strength Material a. Submittals as required in Section 03 30 00. b. Both 28-day and 90-day compressive strength test results. D. Shop Drawings 1. Reinforcement E. Closeout and Maintenance Material Submittals: per Division 01 General Requirements. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. B. Qualifications: per Division 01 General Requirements for anchor installation and as follows. 1. Anchors shall be installed by qualified personnel trained to install adhesive anchors. 2. Adhesive anchors shall be installed in strict accordance with the Manufacturer’s Printed Installation Instructions (MPII). 3. Each installer shall have the MPII in their possession at all times. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. 1.08 SITE CONDITIONS A. Existing Conditions: per Division 01 General Requirements. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 GROUT A. Grout shall be non-metallic, cementitious non-shrink grout meeting ASTM C1107, grade C. Grout shall be Five Star Grout by U.S. Grout Company, Crystex or 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA CONCRETE SPECIALTIES WOODARD & CURRAN 03 16 00-4 Premier by L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc., Sure-Grip High Performance Grout, by Dayton Superior, or approved equal. 2.02 CONCRETE FILLS A. Concrete shall be as specified in Section 03 30 00, except it shall have a 28-day design compressive strength of 4,000 pounds per square inch, and a maximum water-to-cementitious ratio of 0.45. B. Concrete fills of minimum thickness less than 2-1/4 inches, and those screeded into place by process equipment, shall have a 1/2 inch maximum size aggregate. 2.03 DUCTBANKS A. All underground electrical duct banks shall be concrete encased. Concrete shall be as specified in Section 03 30 00, except it shall have a 3/8 inch maximum aggregate size and a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 3,000 pounds per square inch. B. Duct banks shall be reinforced as detailed where crossing under roads, driveways, parking areas, all areas subject to vehicular traffic, and whereas shown or specified in the Contract Documents. Reinforcement shall extend a minimum of 4 feet beyond the specified areas. C. Coordinate red shake-on red pigmented dye, acid stains, or integral coloring as required in Section 26 05 43. 2.04 CONTROLLED LOW STRENGTH MATERIAL A. A rigid-setting mixture of portland cement, sand, and water shall not require vibration during placement, flow without noticeable segregation, self-consolidate, and be excavatable with hand tools. B. Sand gradation (U.S. Standard Sieve/Percent Passing) 1. 3/8-inch/100 2. No. 4/95-100 3. No. 16/45-80 4. No. 50/10-30 5. No. 100/2-10 6. No. 200/0-3 C. Cement, water, and chemical admixtures shall meet the requirements of Section 03 30 00. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA CONCRETE SPECIALTIES WOODARD & CURRAN 03 16 00-5 D. The 28-day and 90-day compressive strengths, measured in accordance with ASTM D4832, shall be between 30-80 psi and less than 100 psi, respectively. 2.05 CONCRETE FILLED STAIR TREAD A. Concrete shall be as specified in this section for concrete fills. B. Reinforcement shall be 2x2–W1.4xW1.4 welded wire, meeting ASTM A1064. 2.06 EPOXY ADHESIVE A. Epoxy adhesive for installation of post-installed reinforcing bars denoted as “Drill and Epoxy” or “Drill & Epoxy” on drawings. B. Evaluation Requirements: ICC-ES evaluation report stating product is compliant with 2015 International Buildng Code and approved for use to resist static, wind and earthquake (Seismic Design Categories A through F) tension and shear loads in cracked and uncracked normal-weight concrete having a compressive strength of 2,500 psi to 8,500 psi. Evaluation reports with a listed renewal date month/year which is prior to the month/year the product is submitted for engineer’s review will be rejected. C. Epoxy adhesive for anchoring reinforcement to concrete shall be a 2-component solid epoxy based system supplied in manufacturer's standard side-by-side cartridge and dispensed through manufacturer's standard static-mixing nozzle. Epoxy adhesive shall be: 1. Simpson Strong Tie: SET-XP or ET-HP a. SET-XP Compliance Report (ESR-2508) b. ET-HP Compliance Report (ESR-3372) 2. Hilit: HIT-RE 500-SD a. Compliance Report (ESR-2322) 3. Approved equal based a. Compliance Report to be submitted D. Epoxy adhesive shall pass the creep test requirements of ICC-ES AC58. E. The embedment depth shall be per the manufacturer's requirements and the ultimate strength exceeds the tensile strength of the bar, and the ultimate strength divided by a minimum factor of safety of 3.75 is at least 40 percent of the yield strength of the bar. 2.07 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA CONCRETE SPECIALTIES WOODARD & CURRAN 03 16 00-6 PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 EQUIPMENT PADS A. New concrete surfaces upon which equipment pads are to be built shall receive a scratched finish in accordance with Section 03 30 20. B. All laitance shall be removed and the surface shall be saturated with water for a minimum of 6 hours. Excess water shall then be removed and the epoxy bonding compound applied as specified in Section 03 30 20. C. All equipment pads shall be sized to suit the approved equipment, and reinforcement shall be as shown on the Drawings. D. The top surface shall be level within 1/8-inch. All exposed faces shall be formed with smooth forms and shall be smooth and free of sands streaks, bug holes, and honeycomb. All exposed surfaces shall have a smooth, even surface with all exterior corners chamfered. Exposed faces of pads shall receive a sack-rubbed finish as specified in Section 03 30 20. E. All anchor bolts, dowels, sleeves, and other fittings required for the equipment shall be built in. 3.02 GROUTING A. Grouting is required for structural, mechanical, and electrical items, and shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. B. Concrete surfaces to receive grout shall be cleaned of all contamination and debris. Surface roughening shall be required if laitance or poor concrete is evident. C. Grout placement shall be rapid and continuous such that grout completely fills the space to be grouted, absent of air pockets. D. Grout may be placed by gravity or pumped. When practical, grout shall be placed from one side and made to flow to the open side to prevent the formation of air pockets. 3.03 CONCRETE FILLS A. New unformed concrete surfaces upon which concrete fills are to be placed shall receive a rough broom scratched, rough screed, or rough wood float finish in accordance with Section 03 30 20. However, where concrete fills are to be screeded into place by process equipment, the concrete surface shall receive a scratched finish in accordance with Section 03 30 20. B. All laitance shall be removed and the surface shall be saturated with water for a minimum of 6 hours. Excess water shall then be removed and the epoxy-bonding compound applied as specified in Section 03 30 20. However, where concrete fills 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA CONCRETE SPECIALTIES WOODARD & CURRAN 03 16 00-7 are to be screeded into place by process equipment, it shall be permitted to scrub in a stiff cement slurry immediately prior to placing concrete fill, in lieu of epoxy bonding compound. 3.04 EXISTING CONCRETE A. Where equipment pads are to be constructed, grouting is to be performed, and concrete fills are to be placed against existing concrete, the following surface preparation shall be required. 1. The existing concrete surface shall be cleaned of all contamination and debris, and roughened by steel shot blasting, abrasive sand blasting, or water jetting. Use of scabblers, scarifiers, bush hammers, and pneumatic hammers is not permitted. 2. The existing concrete surface shall be water-saturated for a minimum of 6 hours, after which the excess water shall be removed immediately prior to placement of new concrete or grout. 3. In areas where equipment pads are to be constructed and concrete fills are to be placed, apply epoxy-bonding compound (as specified in Section 03 30 20) to prepared concrete surface prior to concrete placement. 3.05 DUCTBANKS A. There shall be a minimum of 4 inches of concrete between the outside of a duct and surrounding soil. There shall be not less than 3 inches of concrete between adjacent ducts. B. All ductbank concrete placements shall be continuous between manholes and handholes, and between manholes, handholes, and structures. C. Where ducts pass through a foundation wall, the concrete encasement shall extend through the wall and be flush with inside face per the details on the Drawings. Watertight construction joints shall be provided. 3.06 EPOXY ADHESIVE A. Installation: Per manufacturer’s installation instructions and as listed in the product ICC-ES Evaluation Report B. Drilled and epoxied rebar shall be installed in concrete having a minimum age of 21 days at time of installation. C. All cartridges shall have the expiration date clearly visible. Material past its expiration date shall not be used, and shall be immediately removed from the Site. D. Diamond drill bits are not permitted. Hammer drills shall be used. Hole diameter size per manufacturer’s installation instructions. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA CONCRETE SPECIALTIES WOODARD & CURRAN 03 16 00-8 E. The initial material extruded from each cartridge shall be discarded in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions to ensure that all material is properly mixed. F. Depth stop shall be used to ensure correct drilling depth. Drilled holes shall be blown out with air, thoroughly wire brushed with a repeated back and forth movement, blown out, thoroughly wire brushed, and blown out again. Adhesive shall be injected, starting from the bottom of the hole and slowly withdrawn as filling progresses to prevent air pockets. G. Rebar shall remain completely undisturbed between the manufacturer's specified gel time and the full cure time. Zero load shall be applied during this time. 3.07 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. 3.08 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. END OF SECTION 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT WOODARD & CURRAN 03 20 00-1 SECTION 03 20 00 CONCRETE REINFORCING PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes 1. Provide all materials, tools, equipment, and labor necessary for the fabrication and installation of all reinforcement (except installation only of reinforcement for masonry construction which is included in Section 04 20 00, Unit Masonry) as shown on the Drawings, as specified, and as necessary for the proper completion of the Work in accordance with this Section and applicable reference standards listed in Article 1.03. B. Related Requirements 1. 04 20 00 – Unit Masonry 1.02 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Measurement and payment requirements: per Division 01 General Requirements. 1.03 REFERENCES A. Reference Standards 1. American Concrete Institute (ACI) a. ACI 117 Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials and Commentary b. ACI SP-66 ACI Detailing Manual 2. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) a. ASTM A615 Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Carbon-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement b. ASTM 1064 Standard Specification for Carbon-Steel Wire and Welded Wire Reinforcement, Plain and Deformed, for Concrete 3. American Welding Society (AWS) a. AWS D1.4 Structural Welding Code – Reinforcing Steel 4. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (CRSI) a. CRSI 10MSP Manual of Standard Practice 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT WOODARD & CURRAN 03 20 00-2 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination, Sequencing, and Scheduling: per Division 01 General Requirements. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. B. Product Data 1. Certified mill reports, including chemical and physical analyses 2. Dowel bar splicers and dowel inserts C. Shop Drawings 1. Reinforcement Drawings: Comply with ACI SP-66, and include the following information a. Sizes, dimensions, and locations for reinforcement and supports b. Bending diagrams and schedules c. Splices d. Cover and clearances e. Class designation and details of bar supports f. Pertinent reinforced concrete details with dimensions and elevations g. Items furnished by other trades or under other sections of the Specification that are to be cast in concrete where interference with reinforcement may occur h. Reinforcement shall be shown on wall elevations with required sections, on beam elevations with required sections, on plan views of slabs with required sections. Provide plan details where walls intersect. D. Closeout and Maintenance Material Submittals: per Division 01 General Requirements. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. B. Fabricate reinforcement in accordance with ACI 117. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT WOODARD & CURRAN 03 20 00-3 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. B. Deliver reinforcement in bundles with tags indicating size, length, and identification mark. C. Store materials off the ground to prevent soiling and to facilitate subsequent inspection and handling. 1.08 SITE CONDITIONS A. Existing Conditions: per Division 01 General Requirements. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 STEEL REINFORCEMENT A. General: Steel reinforcement shall include all bars, anchorages, stirrups, dowels, ties, tie-wire, chairs and other steel supports, and spacers as noted on the Drawings, specified, and as required for the proper completion of the Work. B. Materials 1. Reinforcement bars shall be formed from new billet steel conforming to ASTM A615, Grade 60 except as otherwise specified. 2. Plain wire fabric shall conform to ASTM 1064. Flat sheets shall be used, rolls are not permitted. C. Tie Wire 1. 16-gauge minimum 2. FS QQ-W-461 annealed black, except for architectural concrete D. Bar Supports 1. Chairs, bolsters, spacers and other supports to properly position reinforcement shall conform to the bar support recommendations of CRSI 10MSP, and shall be of adequate strength and design to prevent displacement of reinforcement and discoloration of concrete. 2. Supports shall be Class 1 - plastic protected. 3. Supports for bottom reinforcement of slabs on soil shall be chairs with integral plates, or precast concrete blocks not less than 4-inches square with a compressive strength equal to that of the surrounding concrete. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT WOODARD & CURRAN 03 20 00-4 Precast blocks may only be used to support reinforcement not more than 3-inches from the bottom of the slab. E. Fabrication 1. Steel reinforcement shall be fabricated to the sizes, shapes and dimensions shown on the Drawings, details and schedules. All bending shall be in accordance with CRSI 10MSP. All steel shall be bent cold and shall not be bent or straightened in a manner that will injure the metal. Bars with kinks or bends not so detailed shall not be used. 2. Bends for stirrups and ties shall be made around a pin having a diameter not less than 4 times the diameter of the bar. Bends for other bars shall be made around a pin having a diameter not less than 6 times the diameter of the bar, except for bars larger than 1-inch, the pin shall be not less than 8 times the diameter of the bar. F. Dowel Bar Splicers and Dowel Inserts (DBS/DI) 1. Dowel bar splicers shall be a 2-component threaded rebar splice system. The internally threaded component shall be forged from Grade 60 deformed rebar material free of external machining or welding. It shall contain an integral flange with nailing holes and be threaded with Unified National Coarse (UNC) or UN (unified) threads to a depth equal to the nominal diameter of the threads plus 1/4 inch. The externally threaded splice component shall be fabricated from Grade 60 deformed rebar material and supplied with rolled threads corresponding with the internally threaded component. The root diameter of the threads shall provide a minimum cross sectional area equal to the cross sectional area of the nominal bar size. Manufacturer testing shall indicate ultimate tension failure occurring in the nominal bar diameter, not at the mechanical splice. 2.02 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Reinforcement 1. Tolerances shall conform to ACI 117. 2. Placement 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT WOODARD & CURRAN 03 20 00-5 a. Reinforcement shall be accurately positioned both horizontally and vertically, and shall be properly secured and sufficiently rigid to prevent displacement during concrete placement. b. Reinforcement shall be securely tied at intersections with tie wire or clips in a manner that will keep all metal away from exposed concrete surfaces. 3. Splices a. Reinforcement splices shall be as shown on the Drawings. Where not shown, splices shall be located away from areas of maximum stress, and shall be approved by the Engineer. b. Welding shall only be permitted by written approval of the Engineer, and shall be in accordance with AWS D1.4. 4. All reinforcement within an area of a continuous concrete placement shall be installed, supported, and secured before beginning the concrete placement. 5. Reinforcement Adjustment a. Adjust to within allowable tolerances to avoid interference with other reinforcement, conduits, or embedded items. b. Reinforcement shall not be moved beyond allowable tolerances without the Engineer's approval. c. Reinforcement shall not be heated, bent or cut without approval Engineer's approval. B. Wire Fabric 1. Wire fabric shall be installed in the longest practicable sheet. 2. Adjoining sheets shall be lapped a minimum of 1-1/2 wire spacing’s and securely wired together. 3. End laps in adjacent sheets shall be offset. C. All reinforcement shall be entirely free from flaking rust, loose mill scale, grease, dirt, etc. that might reduce its bond with the concrete. D. Concrete cover for reinforcement shall conform to the dimensions shown on the Drawings. E. Notify the Engineer at least 24 hours before placing concrete. All reinforcement within the area of 1 day's concrete placement shall be tied in place and observed by the Engineer or Owner’s representative, prior to commencing concrete placement. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT WOODARD & CURRAN 03 20 00-6 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. 3.03 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. END OF SECTION 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE WOODARD & CURRAN 03 30 00-1 SECTION 03 30 00 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes 1. Provide cast-in-place concrete in accordance with this Section and applicable reference standards listed in Article 1.03. B. ACI 301 is hereby made a part of this Specification, except as otherwise modified by the Contract Documents. C. Related Requirements 1. Section 03 16 00 – Concrete Specialties 2. Section 03 30 20 – Concrete Placing, Curing and Finishing 1.02 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Measurement and payment requirements: per Division 01 General Requirements. 1.03 REFERENCES A. Reference Standards 1. American Concrete Institute International (ACI) a. ACI 117 Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials and Commentary b. ACI 301 Specifications for Structural Concrete 2. ASTM International (ASTM) a. ASTM C31 Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field b. ASTM C33 Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates c. ASTM C40 Standard Test Method for Organic Impurities in Fine Aggregates for Concrete d. ASTM C88 Standard Test Method for Soundness of Aggregates by Use of Sodium Sulfate or Magnesium Sulfate e. ASTM C94 Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE WOODARD & CURRAN 03 30 00-2 f. ASTM C131 Standard Test Method for Resistance to Degradation of Small-Size Coarse Aggregate by Abrasion and Impact in the Los Angeles Machine g. ASTM C143 Standard Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic- Cement Concrete h. ASTM C150 Standard Specification for Portland Cement i. ASTM C173 Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Volumetric Method j. ASTM C231 Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Pressure Method k. ASTM C260 Standard Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete l. ASTM C494 Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete m. ASTM C535 Standard Test Method for Resistance to Degradation of Large-Size Coarse Aggregate by Abrasion and Impact in the Los Angeles Machine n. ASTM C595 Standard Specification for Blended Hydraulic Cements o. ASTM C618 Standard Specification for Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan for Use in Concrete p. ASTM C989 Standard Specification for Slag Cement for Use in Concrete and Mortars q. ASTM C1116 Standard Specification for Fiber-Reinforced Concrete r. ASTM C1157 Standard Specification for Hydraulic Cement s. ASTM C1260 Standard Test Method for Potential Alkali Reactivity of Aggregates (Mortar-Bar Method) t. ASTM C1293 Standard Test Method for Determination of Length Change of Concrete Due to Alkali-Silica Reaction u. ASTM C1567 Standard Test Method for Potential Alkali-Silica Reactivity of Combinations of Cementitious Materials and Aggregate (Accelerated Mortar-Bar Method) v. ASTM C1602 Standard Specification for Mixing Water Used in Production of Hydraulic Cement Concrete w. ASTM E329 Standard Specification for Agencies Engaged in the Testing and/or Inspection of Materials Used in Construction 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE WOODARD & CURRAN 03 30 00-3 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination, Sequencing, and Scheduling: per Division 01 General Requirements. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with the Division 01 General Requirements. 1. Test Reports a. Provide reports by testing agencies meeting ASTM E329. 2. Design Data for Each Concrete Mixture a. Submit at minimum 14 days before initial placement of concrete. b. Proportions for all ingredients, 28-day design compressive strength, water to cementitious materials ratio, admixture dosages, slump, and air content. c. Test data supporting proportions based upon laboratory trial batches or field test records per ACI 301 Section 4, Concrete Mixtures. 1) Field test data used to determine the standard deviation used for establishing the required average design strength shall be from within the previous 12 months, per ACI 301. 2) Field test data documenting that the proposed concrete proportions will produce an average compressive strength equal to or greater than the required average compressive strength shall be from within the 12 months. 3) Laboratory trial batch data shall be from within the previous 24 months. 3. Cement: Certified mill reports, not older than 90 days. 4. Supplementary cementitious materials: Source and test reports for actual material to be used in the Work, not older than 90 days. a. Fly ash b. Ground granulated blast-furnace slag 5. Aggregate a. Data not older than 90 days, except test data for soundness, abrasion, and alkali reactivity - not older than 1 year. b. Fine and coarse aggregate data, except as noted 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE WOODARD & CURRAN 03 30 00-4 1) Sources 2) Specific gravity 3) Sieve analyses per ASTM C33 (including fineness modulus of fine aggregate) 4) Organic impurities for fine aggregate per ASTM C40 5) Potential alkali reactivity (not required if a cement containing less than 0.60 percent alkalis is used, per ASTM C33) per ASTM C1260, ASTM C1293, or ASTM C1567 6) Soundness per ASTM C88 7) Abrasion for coarse aggregate per ASTM C131 and ASTM C535 6. Product Data and Instructions a. Admixtures 7. Certificates a. Plant certification: Concrete plant certified by the National Ready Mixed Concrete Association. 8. Sample Batch Ticket a. Sample blank batch ticket from concrete batch plant B. Closeout and Maintenance Material Submittals: per Division 01 General Requirements. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. B. Storage and Protection for Material for On Site Batching 1. Carefully store cement immediately upon receipt in a weatherproof structure, as airtight as practical to prevent moisture absorption, stacked closely to reduce air circulation, but not against exterior walls. Allow easy access for inspection and shipment identification. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE WOODARD & CURRAN 03 30 00-5 2. Transfer bulk cement to elevated airtight weatherproof bins. Test quality of cement that has been stored for suitability if quality is questionable and do not use without approval. 3. Store aggregates to prevent contamination by foreign materials and in separate piles by size. Build coarse aggregate stockpiles in horizontal layers not exceeding 4 feet in depth to avoid segregation. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 SOURCE A. Provide concrete supplied from a single commercial ready-mix plant, mixed and delivered in accordance with the requirements of ASTM C94, except if plant does not exist within a reasonable distance from Site, furnish material for on Site batching and store per Article 1.07. 2.02 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Concrete mixture design 1. Per ACI 301, Section 4, Concrete Mixtures. 2. 28-day design compressive strength: 4,500 pounds per square inch, except as otherwise specified. 3. Water to cementitious materials ratio: Not to exceed 0.42 except as otherwise specified. 4. Provide designs of required strength, water to cementitious materials ratio, slump, and workability for placing conditions and specified finishes without segregation. 5. Slump a. Per ASTM C143. b. Specified Slump Range: 1) 3-inches to 5-inches c. Specified Slump Range (mixes with mid-range water reducer): 1) 2-inches to 4-inches, before admixture is added 2) Maximum 6-inches, after admixture is added d. Specified Slump range (mixes with high-range water reducer) 1) 2-inches to 4-inches, before admixture is added 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE WOODARD & CURRAN 03 30 00-6 2) Maximum 8-inches, after admixture is added B. Cement: per ASTM C150, Type II or ASTM C595 IP(MS), IS(<70)(MS). Do not use ASTM C595 cements that contain ASTM C1157 cement. C. Supplementary cementitious materials 1. Fly ash (optional) a. ASTM C618, Class F b. Maximum loss of ignition: 3.0 percent c. Not less than 15 percent or more than 25 percent of weight of cement plus fly ash 2. Ground-granulated blast furnace (GGBF) slag (optional) a. ASTM C989 b. Activity classification: Grade 100 or 120 c. Not less than 25 percent or more than 50 percent of weight of cementitious material 3. Fly ash plus GGBF slag a. Maximum 50 percent of total cementitious materials b. Fly ash portion maximum 25 percent of total cementitious materials c. Minimum portland cement: 337 pounds per cubic yard of concrete D. Aggregate 1. Meet ASTM C33, as amended herein. Evidence of a satisfactory service record in lieu of testing for alkali reactivity is not permitted. 2. Do not use crushed hydraulic cement concrete for aggregate. 3. Aggregate reactivity testing: per ASTM C1260. Do not use aggregate having a 14 day expansion greater than 0.10 percent (considered potentially reactive), except if tested per ASTM C1567, the 14 day expansion is not greater than 0.10 percent, or if tested per ASTM C1293, the 2-year expansion is not greater than 0.04 percent, or if cement containing less than 0.60 percent alkalis is used per ASTM C33. 4. Fine aggregates: Sand or screenings of gravel or crushed stone, well graded from fine to coarse; clean and free from soft particles, clay, loam and organic matter, with the volume removed by sedimentation not more than 3 percent. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE WOODARD & CURRAN 03 30 00-7 a. Organic impurities testing: per ASTM C40. Color of the supernatant liquid above the test Sample, not darker than organic plate No. 3. b. Grading U.S. Standard Sieve Percent Passing Size 3/8 inch 100 No. 4 95 - 100 No. 8 80 - 100 No. 16 50 - 85 No. 30 25 - 60 No. 50 5 -30 No. 100 0-10 c. Not more than 45 percent retained between any 2 consecutive sieves listed above. Fineness modulus, not less than 2.3 nor more than 3.1. 5. Coarse Aggregates: Crushed stone or washed gravel of clean, hard, durable, uncoated particles, free from dust, dirt, or other deleterious substances, and free from thin, flat, or elongated particles. a. Nominal maximum aggregate size for slabs poured on ground, at least 15 inches thick, except where clear spacing between reinforcing bars is less than 2 inches: 1-1/2 inches. b. Nominal maximum aggregate size at all other locations, except as specified otherwise or approved: 3/4 inch. c. Nominal maximum aggregate sizes per grading in Table 2 of ASTM C33: No. 467 (1-1/2 inches), No. 57 (1 inch), No. 67 (3/4 inch), No. 7 (1/2 inch), and No. 8 (3/8 inch). 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE WOODARD & CURRAN 03 30 00-8 E. Admixtures 1. Air-entraining admixture a. Per ASTM C260 and chloride free b. Provide air entrainment, except as noted below, per manufacturer's directions and this Specification to produce the following total entrained air content determined per the procedure in ASTM C173 or ASTM C231. Nominal Maximum Size Coarse Aggregate (inches) Air Content By Volume (percent plus or minus 1.5) 3/8 7.5 1/2 7.0 3/4 6.0 1 6.0 1-1/2 5.5 c. Maximum air content for interior concrete slabs to be hard- troweled: 3.0 percent. 2. Mid-range water reducing agents: per ASTM C494, Type A, and with consideration of the air entraining effect of the water reducing agent. 3. Water reducing-retarding agents: For use when ambient temperature above 70 degrees F, replace water reducing agent in whole or part with water reducing-retarding agent meeting ASTM C494, Type D. Use amounts to produce concrete with set time equal to that at 70 degrees F without the retarder. 4. Set accelerator: Non-chloride type conforming to ASTM C494, Type C or E where allowed under Section 03 30 20. 5. High-range water reducing agent: ASTM C494, Type F or G (added in plant or field). F. Water 1. Meet ASTM C1602. 2. Fresh and free from oil, acid, salt, alkali, sewage, organic matter, and other deleterious substances. 3. The amount of water carried on the aggregate and the effect of admixtures is included in the water content. Provide that water carried on the aggregate is determined periodically by test and the amount of free water on the aggregate subtracted from water added to the mixture. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE WOODARD & CURRAN 03 30 00-9 4. Residual, wash, or other water in drums: Completely discharged prior to concrete batching (drums backed out). 5. Maximum amount of water required to produce a plastic mixture of the strength and water to cementitious materials ratio specified and the required density, uniformity and workability. Consistency of mixture required for the specific placing conditions and methods. 6. Slump adjustment: Not made at wash down, slump rack, or by any other means prior to arrival at point of delivery at the Site. 7. Water added after arrival at Site: Accurately metered and recorded on the batch ticket. 2.03 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 ON SITE BATCHING PLANT A. Provide bins with adequate separate compartments for fine aggregates and for each required size of coarse aggregate. Design each compartment to discharge efficiently and freely into weighing hopper. Provide means of control so that material may be added slowly and shut off with precision as the quantity desired in the weighing hopper is approached. B. Construct weighing hoppers to eliminate accumulation of materials and to discharge fully. Provide beam type or the springless-dial type scales for weighing aggregates and cement, accurate within 1/2 of 1 percent under operating conditions. Maintain ten 50-pound weights at the plant for checking accuracy. 1. Provide means for beam type scales to alert operator that required load in the weighing hopper is being approached within the last 200 pounds of load and within 50 pounds overload. Provide weighing and indicating devices are in full view of the operator and convenient access to controls while charging the hopper. C. Keep exposed fulcrums, clevises, and similar working parts of scales clean. 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. B. Advise testing laboratory and field observers minimum 24 hours in advance of placing concrete to allow for scheduling observation and testing. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE WOODARD & CURRAN 03 30 00-10 C. Assist testing laboratory and Engineer in obtaining and handling Samples at the Site and other sources of material. D. Provide space and electrical power at the Site for facilities to be provided by Owner’s testing agency for proper initial curing and storage of concrete test cylinders to be lab-cured as required by ASTM C31 for 48 hours after casting. For cylinders to be field-cured: per Section 03 30 20. E. Contractor’s testing agency to store cylinders to be lab-cured at 60 degrees F to 80 degrees F in an environment preventing moisture loss from the specimens such as storage in wooden boxes, and placement in damp sand pits. Shield specimens from direct sunlight and radiant heating devices. Control storage temperature by use of heating and cooling devices as necessary and record temperature with a maximum-minimum thermometer. 3.03 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. END OF SECTION 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA CONCRETE PLACING, CURING, AND FINISHING WOODARD & CURRAN 03 30 20-1 SECTION 03 30 20 CONCRETE PLACING, CURING, AND FINISHING PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes 1. Provide placing, curing and finishing of cast-in-place concrete accordance with this Section and applicable reference standards listed in Article 1.03. 2. Concrete sampling and field testing by an independent technician certified in accordance with the requirements of ACI Concrete Field Testing Technician – Grade 1 certification program, or the requirements of ASTM C1077. Paid for by Contractor. 3. Laboratory testing of concrete cylinders by an independent, accredited and certified testing laboratory. Paid for by Contractor. 4. Tightness testing of concrete tanks in accordance with ACI 350.1 and concrete tank leak repairs. Contractor is responsible for all costs associated with testing and completing all repairs to successfully pass the testing requirements of ACI 350.1. Contractor’s construction schedule shall account for sufficient time to perform testing and leak repairs prior to backfilling concrete tanks. B. Related Requirements 1. Section 03 01 06 – Cementitious Crystalline Leak Repair 2. Section 03 11 00 – Concrete Forming 3. Section 03 16 00 – Concrete Specialties 4. Section 03 30 00 – Cast-In-Place Concrete 5. Section 03 63 00 – Injection Grouting 6. Section 07 19 00 – Water Repellents 1.02 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Measurement and payment requirements: per Division 01 General Requirements. 1.03 REFERENCES A. Reference Standards 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA CONCRETE PLACING, CURING, AND FINISHING WOODARD & CURRAN 03 30 20-2 1. American Concrete Institute International (ACI) a. ACI 117 Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials and Commentary b. ACI 301 Specifications for Structural Concrete c. ACI 306.1 Standard Specification for Cold Weather Concreting d. ACI 308.1 Standard Specification for Curing Concrete e. ACI 350.1 Specification for Tightness Testing of Environmental Engineering Concrete Containment Structures f. ACI 306R Cold Weather Concreting 2. ASTM International (ASTM) a. ASTM C31 Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field b. ASTM C39 Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens c. ASTM C42 Standard Test Method for Obtaining and Testing Drilled Cores and Sawed Beams of Concrete d. ASTM C143 Standard Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic- Cement Concrete e. ASTM C144 Standard Specification for Aggregate for Masonry Mortar f. ASTM C171 Standard Specification for Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete g. ASTM C172 Standard Practice for Sampling Freshly Mixed Concrete h. ASTM C173 Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Volumetric Method i. ASTM C231 Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Pressure Method j. ASTM C309 Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane- Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete k. ASTM C404 Standard Specification for Aggregates for Masonry Grout l. ASTM C578 Standard Specification for Rigid, Cellular Polystyrene Thermal Insulation m. ASTM C881 Standard Specification for Epoxy-Resin-Base Bonding Systems for Concrete n. ASTM C920 Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA CONCRETE PLACING, CURING, AND FINISHING WOODARD & CURRAN 03 30 20-3 o. ASTM C1064 Standard Test Method for Temperature of Freshly Mixed Hydraulic-Cement Concrete p. ASTM C1077 Standard Practice for Agencies Testing Concrete and Concrete Aggregates for Use in Construction and Criteria for Testing Agency Evaluation. q. ASTM C1315 Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane- Forming Compounds Having Special Properties for Curing and Sealing Concrete r. ASTM D1751 Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction (Nonextruding and Resilient Bituminous Types) s. ASTM D1752 Standard Specification for Preformed Sponge Rubber Cork and Recycled PVC Expansion t. ASTM E96 Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials u. ASTM D2240 Standard Test Method for Rubber Property - Durometer Hardness v. ASTM E1155 Standard Test Method for Determining Floor Flatness and Floor Levelness Numbers w. ASTM E1745 Standard Specification for Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Soil or Granular Fill under Concrete Slabs B. Definitions 1. Construction joint refers to a monolithic construction joint in which the surface between successive placements is prepared to enhance bond and shear transfer and reinforcement is continuous. 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination, Sequencing, and Scheduling: per Division 01 General Requirements. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. B. Product Data and Manufacturer’s Instructions 1. Delivery Tickets a. Provide duplicate delivery tickets at time of delivery for each truckload of concrete delivered b. Serial number of ticket 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA CONCRETE PLACING, CURING, AND FINISHING WOODARD & CURRAN 03 30 20-4 c. Date and Project location d. Name and location of ready mixed concrete plant e. Truck number, time loaded, cubic yardage delivered f. Dispatcher's name g. Mixture design, cement type, and admixtures with brand names h. Types and quantities of cement, fly ash and/or slag (if included in approved mix design) and admixtures. Quantities of water and fine and coarse aggregate including moisture content, and nominal maximum aggregate size i. Water added subsequent to plant batching, if any. (Only applicable if total water per mixture design is not added at plant. Addition of water such that the water content of the approved mixture design is exceeded will be strictly prohibited.) j. Concrete temperature upon delivery k. Unloading time and location 2. Curing Paper 3. Bond Breaker 4. Epoxy Bonding Compound 5. Evaporation Retardant 6. Floor Hardener 7. Cure and Seal Compound 8. Curing Compound 9. Preformed Joint Filler C. Source and Field Quality Control Submittals 1. Methods to be used to protect concrete placed during cold weather. The Engineer's review shall not constitute approval as the Contractor shall be responsible for the protection of concrete placed during cold weather. 2. Methods to be used to protect concrete placed during hot weather. The Engineer's review shall not constitute approval as the Contractor shall be responsible for the protection of concrete placed during hot weather. D. Closeout and Maintenance Material Submittals: per Division 01 General Requirements. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA CONCRETE PLACING, CURING, AND FINISHING WOODARD & CURRAN 03 30 20-5 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. B. Concrete sampling and testing per Article 3.11. C. Tightness Test Concrete Tanks per Article 3.12. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. B. Protection 1. Provisions shall be made for maintaining new concrete in a continuously moist condition for at least seven days after placement 2. Fresh concrete shall be protected from freezing, premature drying, flowing water, and mechanical injury 3. Concrete shall not be placed while rain, sleet, or snow is falling unless acceptable protection is provided. Precipitation shall not be allowed to enter into the concrete mix or damage concrete surfaces 1.08 SITE CONDITIONS A. Existing Conditions: per Division 01 General Requirements. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 PREFORMED JOINT FILLER A. Preformed joint filler: Conform to ASTM D4819, closed cell polyethylene foam isolation joint material, 1/2” thick unless noted otherwise on drawings. Joint filler shall be X-Tech by C2 Products, Inc., or approved equal. 2.02 CURE AND SEAL COMPOUND A. Water Based Cure and Seal Compound: Conform to ASTM C309, Type 1, and ASTM C1315, Type 1 with minimum 25 percent solids, non-yellowing, non- staining, and UV light resistant. 1. MasterKure CC 1315WB, by Master Builders; Vocomp-25, by W.R. Meadows; Dress & Seal WB 25, by L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.; or approved equal shall be provided. 2. Approved Use: Water based products are preferred and approved for application to surfaces with a surface temperature above 50F for interior or exterior surfaces. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA CONCRETE PLACING, CURING, AND FINISHING WOODARD & CURRAN 03 30 20-6 3. Limitations: Not permitted for Cold weather application to surfaces temperatures less than 50F. Not permitted for surfaces to receive additional concrete fills, chemical hardeners, sealers, waterproofing, and architectural finishes such as concrete stain, paints and coatings, tile, carpet, and floor covering adhesives. Not permitted for surfaces to receive a sack-rubbed finish. B. Solvent Based Cure and Seal Compound: Conform to ASTM C309, Type 1, and ASTM C1315, Type 1 with minimum 25 percent solids, non-yellowing and non- staining, and UV light resistant. 1. MasterKure CC 250 SB, by Master Builders; CS-309-25, by W.R. Meadows;Dress & Seal 30, by L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.; 2. Approved Use: Exterior surfaces with surface temperature above 40F. 3. Limitations: Not permitted for surfaces with a surface temperature less than 40F. Not permitted for surfaces to receive additional concrete fills, chemical hardeners, sealers, waterproofing, and architectural finishes such as concrete stain, paints and coatings, tile, carpet, and floor covering adhesives. Not permitted for surfaces to receive a sack-rubbed finish. 2.03 CURING COMPOUND A. Curing Compound: Conform to ASTM C309, Type 1, Class A. 1. 1300 Clear, by W.R. Meadows; L&M Cure, by L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.; 2. Approved Use: Building wall footings, building foundation walls, exterior face of basement walls, and concrete sidewalks. 3. Limitations: Not permitted for building interior surfaces; exterior concrete equipment pads; concrete tank structures. 2.04 DISSIPATING CURING COMPOUND A. Curing Compound: Conform to ASTM C309, Type 1, Class B resin based curing compound that will normally oxidize and begin to wear off in 30 to 60 days. 1. 1100 Clear, by W.R. Meadows; L&M Cure W, by L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.; 2. Approved Use: Concrete sidewalks and building floor slabs to receive carpet, tile, and floor covering adhesives. 2.05 CURING PAPER A. Curing Paper: Conform to ASTM C171, for regular or white waterproof paper. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA CONCRETE PLACING, CURING, AND FINISHING WOODARD & CURRAN 03 30 20-7 2.01 BOND BREAKER A. Bond breaker shall be 15-pound asphalt saturated roofing felt, or approved liquid applied bond prohibitive. 2.02 EPOXY BONDING COMPOUND A. Epoxy Bonding Compound: Conform to ASTM C881, contain 100 percent solids, and be moisture tolerant. Sikadur 32 Hi-Mod or Sikadur 32 Hi-Mod LPL, by Sika Corporation; Sure-Bond (J-58, or J-58 LPL), by Dayton Superior; or approved equal shall be provided. 2.03 FLOOR HARDENER A. Floor Hardener: Clear potassium silicate solution that rapidly penetrates concrete surface without scrubbing and rinsing. Once absorbed, product shall react with the free lime and calcium hydroxide, producing a permanent chemical reaction that hardens, densifies and tightens the concrete surface. StarSeal PS Clear, by Vexcon Chemicals, Inc, or approved equal. B. Performance Requirements: 1. VOC: 0 grams/liter 2. Abrasive Scrub: ASTM D2486, minimum 1200 cycles 3. Bond Strength: ASTM D4541, greater than 50 psi 4. Percent Solids: Min 18% C. Manufacturer’s warranty: 20-years 2.04 EVAPORATION RETARDANT A. Evaporation Retardant: water based polymer liquid placed on fresh concrete to control the rate of evaporation and extend workability. E-CON as manufactured by L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.; SikaFilm by Sika Corporation; MasterKure ER 50 by Master Builders; or approved equal. 2.05 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 CONCRETE PLACEMENT AND JOINTING A. Tolerances: Tolerances shall conform to all requirements of ACI 117 except as modified. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA CONCRETE PLACING, CURING, AND FINISHING WOODARD & CURRAN 03 30 20-8 B. Cold Weather Requirements 1. Cold weather concreting provisions shall be followed during cold weather: any and all periods when for more than three consecutive days the average daily outdoor temperature drops below 40 degrees F. (The average daily temperature is the average of the highest and lowest temperature during the period from midnight to midnight.) When temperatures higher than 50 degrees F occur during more than half of any 24-hour duration, the period shall not be regarded as cold weather. 2. When freezing temperatures may occur during periods not defined as cold weather, concrete surfaces shall be protected against freezing for at least the first 24 hours after placing. 3. Concrete shall not be placed on frozen subgrade. Insulate or heat subgrade to ensure temperature above 32 degrees F when concrete is placed. 4. All embedment’s having a cross sectional area of 1.0 square inch or greater, and including #9 reinforcing bars, shall be at a temperature not less than 10 degrees F at time of concrete placement. 5. Thermal protection must be provided immediately after concrete placement. Procedures for covering, insulating, housing, and/or heating concrete shall be prearranged. Except when supplemental heat is provided, the R-value of the insulation shall be per the recommendations of chapter 9 of ACI 306R. 6. Accelerating admixtures shall be approved at the Engineer's discretion, however those containing calcium chloride shall not be permitted 7. When combustion heaters are used, flue gases shall be vented to the exterior of enclosures 8. Concrete shall be placed and maintained at the following minimum concrete placement temperatures (measured at concrete surface) a. Sections of less than 12-inch minimum dimension: 55 degrees F b. Sections of 12 to 36 inches minimum dimension: 50 degrees F 9. The concrete placement temperature shall not be higher than the minimum concrete placement temperature by more than 20 degrees F 10. The minimum concrete temperature as mixed shall be: 5 degrees F higher than the minimum concrete placement temperature when the air temperature is above 30 degrees F; 10 degrees F higher when the air temperature is between 0 and 30 degrees F; and 15 degrees F higher when the air temperature is less than 0 degrees F 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA CONCRETE PLACING, CURING, AND FINISHING WOODARD & CURRAN 03 30 20-9 11. The temperature shall be monitored at the surface of the concrete, including at corners and edges, which are more vulnerable to freezing. The concrete surface temperature and the corresponding outside air temperature shall be recorded a minimum of twice per each 24 hour period 12. Concrete shall be maintained at the minimum specified temperatures for a protection period of 6 days. When an approved accelerating admixture is used the protection period may be reduced to 4 days. 13. Slabs, regardless of air content, shall not be exposed to freezing temperatures when exposed to rain, snow or other water sources, prior to reaching a compressive strength of 3,500 psi. 14. Concrete shall be cooled gradually at the end of the protection period. The maximum allowable temperature drop at the concrete surface during the first 24 hours after the protection period shall be: 50 degrees F for concrete sections of less than 12 inch minimum dimension; and 40 degrees F for concrete sections of 12 to 36 inch minimum dimension. C. Hot Weather Requirements 1. The temperature of the concrete when placed shall not exceed 90 degrees F. When the air temperature is 90 degrees F and above, procedures to cool mixture ingredients may be warranted. These include: providing shaded storage for aggregate, frequent sprinkling or fog spraying of coarse aggregate, and using chilled batch water and/or ice. Forms and reinforcement shall be sprinkled with cold water just prior to concrete placement. When possible, placement of slabs should be scheduled after walls and roof structure are in place in order to minimize problems associated with direct sunlight and/or drying winds. Newly placed concrete shall be protected from the direct sunlight. 2. Records shall be maintained of: time and location of concrete placement, air temperature, weather conditions (i.e. calm, windy, clear, and/or cloudy), relative humidity, and concrete temperature as delivered and after placement. 3. When the air temperature is 90 degrees F and above: the time between the addition of water to cement or cement to aggregate (whichever occurs first) and the time of concrete placement shall not exceed 60 minutes, except upon approval of the Engineer when all tests for air content, slump and temperature are acceptable. D. Placing 1. Concrete shall be handled from the truck to the place of final deposit as rapidly as practicable by methods preventing segregation and/or loss of ingredients. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA CONCRETE PLACING, CURING, AND FINISHING WOODARD & CURRAN 03 30 20-10 2. The time between the addition of water to cement, or cement to aggregates (whichever occurs first), and the placement of concrete shall not exceed 90 minutes. When air temperature is 90 degrees F and above, this time shall be reduced to 60 minutes. These times may be exceeded only upon approval of the Engineer, and only if all tests for air content, slump, and temperature are also acceptable. 3. Water shall be removed from all forms and excavations and the Work shall be kept dry during placement. No water shall be thrown on, allowed to flow over, or rise upon the concrete until it is thoroughly set. 4. Prior to placement of slabs on soil, the subgrade shall be moist with no free water and no muddy or soft spots. 5. The concrete shall be directly deposited as close as possible to its final location, and shall be deposited in such manner so as to maintain a homogeneous, plastic, approximately horizontal surface. 6. Where concrete may contact soil while being placed, free fall shall be limited to a maximum of 3 feet. Concrete that has been contaminated by soil and/or other foreign matter shall be rejected. The accumulation of concrete on the forms and/or on reinforcement above the level of placement shall be avoided. The splashing of concrete upon formwork that is set for a subsequent concrete placement shall be prevented due to the resulting marks on the finished concrete. 7. Re-tempering of concrete and concrete placement against partially hardened concrete shall not be permitted. A concrete placement, once started, shall be carried out as a continuous operation until the placement of the entire section between construction joints is complete. E. Runways: Runways shall be provided for wheeled concrete handling equipment which shall not be wheeled over reinforcement. Runways shall not be supported upon reinforcement that is part of the Work. F. Chuting 1. Minimum slope shall be 3 horizontal to 1 vertical and maximum slope shall be 2 horizontal to 1 vertical. Between these limits, the slope shall be that which will prevent segregation and ensure continuous flow. 2. A baffle shall be provided at the end of the chute to prevent segregation. If the end of the chute is more than 3 feet above the surface of deposit, a spout shall be used. The spout shall be kept full of concrete with the end kept as near as practical to the surface of deposit. 3. The chute shall be steel or steel lined, and sections shall have the same slope throughout. Aluminum chutes are not permitted. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA CONCRETE PLACING, CURING, AND FINISHING WOODARD & CURRAN 03 30 20-11 4. The chute shall be thoroughly flushed with water before and after each use, the water discharged outside the forms. G. Pumping: The inside diameter of pipes and hoses used to convey the concrete shall be a minimum of three times the maximum size aggregate of the mixture. In order to minimize altering the concrete properties, long vertical sections at the end of the pump line shall be avoided. A horizontal hose run, a hose loop, or a slide gate at the end of the hose may be used to reduce loss of entrained air. H. Compaction 1. Provide at least one standby vibrator, and at least one for each three in use. 2. Concrete may be deposited in one or multiple layers. Each layer shall be compacted by mechanical internal vibrating equipment supplemented by hand spading, rodding, and tamping as required. The depth of each layer shall not exceed the smaller of 36 inches and the depth that can be properly vibrated with the equipment used. When deposited in multiple layers, the vibrator shall penetrate the previous layer approximately 6 inches. Ensure initial setting of the previous layer does not occur prior to placement of subsequent layer. 3. Vibrators shall be relocated frequently, and over-vibration resulting in segregation shall be prevented. Vibrators shall not be used to move concrete within the forms. Concrete shall be thoroughly consolidated around reinforcement, embedments, and into the corners of the forms. 4. Ensure that vibrator is kept several inches clear of waterstops. 5. Where internal vibration is impractical, the use of form vibrators will be considered, and will be allowed only with the Engineer's written approval. When allowed, the vibrator shall be placed so that motion is horizontal I. Construction Joints 1. Construction joints shall be located where shown on the Drawings, or, if not shown, locations shall be approved by the Engineer. Where required to be watertight, waterstops as specified in Section 03 11 00 shall be used. 2. Horizontal construction joints: laitance shall be removed immediately after initial set and the surface shall roughened in an acceptable manner that exposes the aggregate uniformly and doesn't leave laitance or loose aggregate. After the concrete has set to a degree that precludes laitance removal by shovels or scrapers, the Contractor shall remove it, and create a roughened surface, by water jetting or other effective method. The use of pneumatic hammers is not permitted. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA CONCRETE PLACING, CURING, AND FINISHING WOODARD & CURRAN 03 30 20-12 3. Vertical construction joints: the surface shall be thoroughly cleaned of laitance by water jetting, or by wire brushing followed by air blasting. 4. Before concrete is placed against set concrete, the surface shall be thoroughly wetted with standing water removed. Horizontal construction joints shall be in a saturated surface dry condition: saturated for a minimum of 6 hours, with standing water removed. 5. Where noted on the Drawings, and as approved by the Engineer where an unplanned interruption within a concrete placement has occurred, epoxy- bonding compound shall be used in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. 6. Reinforcement shall be continuous at construction joints unless otherwise shown on the Drawings. Waterstops shall be provided where called for in the Contract Documents. All necessary precautions to ensure that the waterstop is properly located and aligned and remains so during concrete placement shall be taken. In the event that the waterstop is improperly located, allowing a tolerance of plus or minus 1/2-inch, the Engineer may order the waterstop extended, or replaced, or such other action as deemed necessary, and at no additional cost to the Owner. J. Concrete Fills 1. New unformed concrete surfaces upon which concrete is placed shall receive a rough (broom, scratched, rough screed, or rough wood float) finish. K. Existing Concrete 1. Where concrete is placed against existing concrete, the following surface preparation shall be required. 2. The existing concrete surface shall be cleaned of all contamination and debris, and roughened by steel shot blasting, abrasive (sand) blasting, or water jetting (hydrodemolition). Use of scabblers, scarifiers, bush hammers, or pneumatic hammers is not permitted. 3. The existing concrete surface shall be water-saturated for a minimum of six hours, after which the excess water shall be removed immediately prior to placement of new concrete. 4. Apply epoxy-bonding compound to prepared concrete surface prior to concrete placement. 3.02 CURING AND PROTECTION A. Temperature 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA CONCRETE PLACING, CURING, AND FINISHING WOODARD & CURRAN 03 30 20-13 1. When the ambient temperature falls below 40 degrees F or rises above 95 degrees F, a record shall be kept of concrete temperatures and of protection given to concrete during placement and curing. 2. The temperature of in-place concrete shall be the surface temperature of the concrete. The surface temperature may be determined by placing temperature sensors in contact with concrete surfaces or between concrete surfaces and covers used for curing, such as insulation blankets or plastic sheeting. B. Curing 1. Provide curing per ACI 308.1 except as modified. 2. During cold weather, as previously defined, the application of water shall not be required. Curing shall be accomplished by the use of curing paper, curing compounds, cure and seal compounds, or other approved methods. Thermal blankets are not an approved curing method and shall be used in conjunction with curing provisions previously stated. 3. Provisions shall be made for maintaining new concrete in a continuously moist condition for a minimum of 7 days. Curing shall commence as soon as possible after final finishing when it will not mar, erode, or stain the concrete surface. 4. Curing shall be accomplished by the use of curing paper, curing compounds (except as noted below), wet methods (ponding, fog spray, damp sand or burlap, sprinkling, soaker hoses) or other methods. 5. Water used for curing shall be no more than 20 degrees F cooler than the concrete surface temperature. 6. Concrete slabs to receive a coating or bonded finish, including chemical hardeners, that aren't wet cured, shall be covered with curing paper as specified, laid with side joints lapped 4 inches and end joints lapped 6 inches. Paper shall be applied no earlier than 24 hours and no later than 30 hours after finishing the slab and shall be left in place at least seven days. (Wet methods shall be used for the first 24-30 hours.) The slab surface shall be maintained in a wet condition beneath the paper at all times. Joints shall be taped and paper shall be weighted to prevent displacement. Tears during the first 7 days after a slab is completed shall be immediately repaired. 7. Curing paper shall also be used to protect newly poured concrete floors from damage. Where heavy tools and/or equipment may be used, provide additional protection as required. Only light traffic will be permitted until 7 days after concrete placement. Slabs shall be protected from damage for 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA CONCRETE PLACING, CURING, AND FINISHING WOODARD & CURRAN 03 30 20-14 the Contract duration, with any and all damage repaired by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner. 8. The use of a curing compound or cure and seal compound on surfaces to receive applied toppings, chemical hardeners, water repellents, coatings, or a rubbed or bonded finish will not be allowed. Where used, curing compound shall be applied immediately following the disappearance of the surface water sheen after the final finishing pass for slabs, and immediately upon removal of forms for formed concrete. Apply two coats per manufacturer’s installation instructions. Apply each coat uniformly with no gaps in coverage. If applied by spray, provide additional spray tank and spray nozzles as required to provide uninterrupted application of product. Cure and seal compounds have high solid content and shall be applied by trays and rollers, if application by spray tanks is not completed in a timely manner and to the satisfaction of the engineer. 9. Soaker hoses shall be used at tops of walls and columns before forms are removed. Wood forms shall be kept continuously wet in hot weather. 3.03 DEFECTIVE CONCRETE A. The Engineer may direct the Contractor to remove and replace, at no additional cost to the Owner, concrete Work that is not formed as shown and/or specified in the Contract Documents, or that contains a defective surface. B. Upon the Engineer's approval, minor imperfections may be patched as specified herein. 3.04 REPAIR OF SURFACE DEFECTS AND PATCHING A. After form removal, all form ties shall be cut off, all fins and irregularities removed, and all defective areas, holes, honeycombs, cavities and irregularities shall be repaired where surface finish defects exceed the finish tolerances of Section 3.05 B. Exposed patchwork shall match adjacent finish and shall include a sack rubbed finish to blend repair into adjacent surfaces, and cured and protected as specified for concrete. C. Filling Form Tie Holes: Tie holes shall be filled solid with non-shrink grout, specified in Section 03 16 00, in the same manner as specified under patching above. 3.05 FINISH OF FORMED SURFACES A. General 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA CONCRETE PLACING, CURING, AND FINISHING WOODARD & CURRAN 03 30 20-15 1. Concrete surfaces "exposed to view" shall be defined as those exposed to view upon completion of the Work, whether or not a painted finish is specified. Surfaces which will be covered by fill, such as exterior faces of walls, shall not be considered exposed to view. 2. Surface tolerance classes indicated herein are specified in ACI 117, and include abrupt surface irregularities that are measured within 1-inch of the irregularity, and gradual surface irregularities measured as the maximum gap between the concrete and the near surface of a 5-foot straight-edge, measured between contact points. B. Surface Finish – 1.0 (SF-1.0) 1. SF-1.0 shall be provided for formed surfaces not exposed to view for concrete not containing liquids and/or gases, and not below design groundwater elevation. 2. Patch voids larger than 1 1/2-inch wide or 1/2-inch deep. 3. Remove projections larger than 1-inch. 4. Tie holes need not be patched. 5. Surface tolerance Class D, with formed surface irregularities not more than 1-inch. C. Surface Finish – 2.0 (SF-2.0) 1. SF-2.0 shall be provided for formed surfaces not exposed to view for concrete not containing liquids, and/or gases, and below design groundwater elevation. 2. Patch voids larger than 3/4-inch wide or 1/2-inch deep. 3. Remove projections larger than 1-inch 4. Fill Tie holes 5. Surface tolerance Class D, with formed surface irregularities not more than 1-inch. D. Surface Finish – 3.0 (SF3.0) 1. SF-3.0 shall be provided for formed surfaces exposed to view, for exterior face of walls to receive waterproofing per Specification 07 10 00, and for concrete not containing liquids, and/or gases. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA CONCRETE PLACING, CURING, AND FINISHING WOODARD & CURRAN 03 30 20-16 2. Patch voids larger than 1/2-inch wide or 1/4-inch deep. For surfaces to receive waterproofing, patch all voids per the waterproofing manufacturer’s written installation instructions. 3. Remove projections larger than 1/8-inch. For surfaces to receive waterproofing, remove all projections per the waterproofing manufacturer’s written installation instructions. 4. Fill tie holes 5. Surface tolerance Class C, with formed surface irregularities not more than 1/2-inch. E. Environmental Surface Finish-1.0 (ESF-1.0) 1. ESF-1.0 shall be provided for exterior and interior formed surfaces of concrete tanks containing liquids or gases. 2. Patch voids larger than 1/2- inch wide or 1/4-inch. All interior formed surfaces to receive grout-cleaned rubbed finish, unless noted otherwise on drawings. 3. Remove projections larger than 1/8-inch. 4. Fill tie holes. 5. Surface tolerance Class A, with formed surface irregularities not more than 1/8-inch. F. Grout-cleaned rubbed finish (Sack-Rubbed) 1. All interior and exterior concrete surfaces that are exposed to view shall receive a grout-cleaned rubbed finish and shall have a smooth and even surface, free of bug holes, when completed, unless specifically noted otherwise on drawings. 2. Wet the surface, and apply a thin coat of medium consistency neat cement slurry to the concrete surface by means of bristle brushes to provide a bonding coat. Before the slurry has dried or changed color, grout comprising one part cement to 1 1/2 parts sand meeting ASTM C144 or ASTM C404, with sufficient water to produce the consistency of thick paint, shall be applied and scrubbed into voids, with excess removed. The cement shall be that used in the concrete mix adjusted with white cement as necessary to match color of exposed concrete. Grout shall be applied with slightly damp pads of coarse burlap approximately 6 inches square used as a float, and shall be well scrubbed into the surface to provide a dense mortar. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA CONCRETE PLACING, CURING, AND FINISHING WOODARD & CURRAN 03 30 20-17 3. The mortar shall be allowed to partially harden for 1 to 2 hours depending upon weather conditions. Work in direct hot sunlight shall be avoided. In hot dry conditions the concrete shall be kept damp during this period with a fine fog spray. Grout shall not be allowed to remain on the surface too long as it will become very difficult to remove. Grout shall not be left on the concrete overnight. 4. After the grout has hardened sufficiently, all that can be removed with a trowel shall be. 5. The surface shall then be allowed to dry thoroughly, and be rubbed vigorously with clean, dry burlap to completely remove any dried grout. There should be no visible film of grout remaining after rubbing. 6. The entire rubbing operation shall be completed in a single working day. Sufficient time shall be allowed for this. 7. On the following day, the concrete shall again be wiped clean with dry burlap to remove dust. The use of burlap containing old hardened mortar may be used since it will act as a mild abrasive. After this treatment, no build-up film should remain on the surface, but if it does, a fine abrasive stone shall be used to remove it without breaking through the surface film of the parent concrete. Do not work up a lather. 8. After application of the surface grout, the surface shall be thoroughly washed down with stiff brushes and the concrete maintained in a continuously damp condition for at least three days above 50 degrees F by the periodic application of a fine fog spray, the use of damp fabric covered with polyethylene or other methods. 3.06 FINISHING OF RELATED UNFORMED SURFACES A. Tops of exposed walls and similar unformed surfaces shall be struck off smooth and hand steel troweled to produce a smooth hard level surface. Line and elevation shall be pre-established by means of preset wood screeds, which shall be removed during the troweling operation. B. After troweling is completed and after the curing period, the surface shall be dry honed to a smooth non-directional surface texture satisfactory to the Engineer. 3.07 FINISH OF SLABS A. General 1. The evaporation retardant specified may be used in accordance with manufacturer recommendations to control plastic shrinkage cracking and as an aid in slab finishing operations. Conditions that may warrant its use include: high temperature, low humidity, high winds, and direct sunlight. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA CONCRETE PLACING, CURING, AND FINISHING WOODARD & CURRAN 03 30 20-18 2. Loss of bleed water and surface drying shall be allowed to proceed naturally. Means to accelerate drying such as applying dry cement, sand, or other materials shall be prohibited. B. Floor Flatness and Floor Levelness 1. Elevated floor slabs constructed on formwork and all concrete tank base slabs shall be true to the gradient and elevation shown on the Drawings. Flat Slabs shall be level with a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 10 feet. Sloped slabs shall be true to the gradient shown, within a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 10 feet. Slabs shall be pitched to drains as indicated on the Drawings. C. Floated Finish 1. Slabs to receive a seamless floor finish or roofing, and all tank bottom slabs, shall receive a floated finish. Floating shall also precede a troweling, where a troweled finish is required as specified below. After consolidating, screeding, and leveling, the slab shall not be worked further until it is ready for floating. 2. Floating shall begin when the water sheen has disappeared, and when the slab has stiffened sufficiently to allow proper operation of a power-driven float. Hand floating with wood, aluminum or magnesium floats shall be used at locations inaccessible to the power-driven float. 3. Surface trueness shall be verified at this stage with a 10-foot straightedge applied in multiple angles. High spots shall be cut down and low spots filled so that the finished surface is true. The slab shall then be immediately refloated to a uniform, smooth, granular texture. D. Troweled Finish 1. All interior slabs left exposed shall receive a troweled finish. 2. The surface shall be finished with power floats as specified above for floated finish, followed by power trowels, and finally hand trowels. The first power troweling shall produce a smooth surface relatively free of defects but which may contain trowel marks. Subsequent trowel shall be by hand after the surface has sufficiently hardened. The surface shall be thoroughly consolidated by the hand troweling, and final troweling shall be done when a ringing sound is produced as the trowel is moved over the surface. The finished surface shall be free of trowel marks and uniform in texture and appearance. 3. Interior concrete slabs to be hard-troweled shall have a maximum air content of 3.0 percent. After the curing period, they shall be protected from freezing temperatures for a minimum of 8 weeks. Thereafter, and for the duration of the Contract, if such slabs might be subject to freezing 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA CONCRETE PLACING, CURING, AND FINISHING WOODARD & CURRAN 03 30 20-19 temperatures, they shall be fully sheltered from rain, snow and all other water sources. 4. Subsequent trowels shall be by hand after the surface has sufficiently hardened. The surface shall be thoroughly consolidated by the hand troweling, and final troweling shall be done when a ringing sound is produced as the trowel is moved over the surface. The finished surface shall be free of trowel marks and uniform in texture and appearance. E. A broom finish shall be provided for all exterior slabs, sidewalks, platforms, ramps, exterior stairs and as specified herein or shown on the Drawings. After floating, and between initial and final set, the surface shall be given a coarse transverse scored texture by drawing a broom across the surface. F. After consolidating, screeding and leveling, the surface shall be roughened with stiff brushes or raked before final set. At sloped surfaces scratches shall be made parallel to the direction of slope, to facilitate subsequent cleaning. G. A wood float finish, a broom finish with open pores, or a finish as otherwise required by the waterproofing manufacturer shall be provided for concrete slabs that will receive a wet slurry application of cementitious waterproofing. 3.08 FLOOR HARDENER A. Floor hardener shall be applied for exposed interior concrete building floor slabs. It shall be applied at a coverage rate recommended by the manufacturer. It shall be applied per the manufacturer's specifications after curing. Slabs to receive hardener shall be wet cured or cured using curing paper. 3.09 WATER REPELLENT A. Water repellent: Per Specification 07 19 00. 3.10 CLEANING CONCRETE A. Cleaning during progress of the Work shall not be permitted. Cleaning shall not commence until the structure is entirely completed. B. Rust and other stains and discolorations shall be removed with a non-etching cleaning agent used in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Cleaning of all surfaces to receive a painted finish is also required. C. Rust stains may be removed by applying a bleaching agent such as oxalic acid. Acid etching, sandblasting, or cleaning by other methods may be used as approved by the Engineer. 3.11 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. General: 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA CONCRETE PLACING, CURING, AND FINISHING WOODARD & CURRAN 03 30 20-20 1. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. 2. During the progress of the Work, an independent, accredited and certified testing laboratory shall conduct concrete testing as specified herein, including the preparation and testing of concrete cylinders. All testing shall be paid for by the Contractor. 3. Field technicians in charge of sampling concrete; testing for slump, unit weight, air content, and temperature; and making and curing test specimens shall be certified in accordance with the requirements of ACI Concrete Field Testing Technician – Grade 1 certification program, or the requirements of ASTM C1077. 4. Scheduling: Contractor to advise testing laboratory and field technician(s) a minimum 24 hours in advance of placing concrete to allow for scheduling observation and testing. 5. Test Cylinder Storage: Provide space and electrical power at the Site for temperature controlled storage of concrete laboratory test cylinders to be standard cured per Specification 03 30 00. Temperature controlled storage containers to be provided by testing agency. B. Field Testing and Sampling Procedures 1. Concrete samples shall be taken in accordance with ASTM C172 for slump, entrained air, unit weight, and strength tests. 2. Entrained air content and slump requirements are listed in Specification 03 30 00. 3. Air Content: Test in accordance with ASTM C173 or ASTM C231. Pumped concrete shall be sampled and tested for air content at the point of placement, as opposed to at the point of delivery. Upon the Engineer's approval: once the slump loss and the loss of entrained air due to pumping is established, correlated acceptance limits at the point of delivery, where sampling and testing may then be performed, shall be made applicable. When the pump line configuration is changed significantly, sampling and testing shall again be performed at the point of placement until new acceptance limits at the point of delivery may be determined. 4. Slump: Measured in accordance with ASTM C143 at the point of delivery. 5. Temperature shall be measured in accordance with ASTM C1064 at the point of delivery 6. Test Cylinders: Concrete cylinders shall be prepared in accordance with ASTM C31 and be 4 inches diameter by 8 inches tall. Refer to Article 3.11, part D for number of cylinders required. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA CONCRETE PLACING, CURING, AND FINISHING WOODARD & CURRAN 03 30 20-21 a. Lab-Cured (Standard Cured) Cylinders: Filed cured in temperature controlled storage per Specification 03 30 00. Cylinders shall be transported to the testing lab within 48 hours of forming, but not sooner than 8 hours after final set. b. Field Cured Cylinders: Cured in the field under conditions that are not more favorable than the most unfavorable conditions for the portions of the concrete that the cylinders represent. C. Laboratory Testing of Test Cylinders: 1. Cylinders shall be tested for compressive strength in accordance with ASTM C39. 2. Test concrete cylinders per Section 3.11, Part D. 3. The compressive strength shall be the average strength of three cylinder breaks per ASTM C39 and tested at 28-days. 4. Test Results: Submit test results to Engineer and concrete supplier within 24 hours of laboratory testing. D. Field and Laboratory Testing Frequency: 1. Minimum field testing frequency for each day concrete is delivered and placed at the project site shall be as follows. a. Take concrete test cylinders at frequency stated herein from truckload determined by technician, contractor, or engineer b. 1st truck load: Test air content, slump, and temperature. c. 2nd and 3rd truck load: No testing unless noted otherwise. d. 4th truck load: Test air content, slump, and temperature e. 5th and 6th truck load: No testing unless noted otherwise f. 7th truck load: Test air content, slump, and temperature. g. Repeat test frequency for additional truckloads of concrete delivered during each day of concrete placement. h. Concrete temperature shall be tested for each truckload of concrete during cold weather or hot weather as defined within this specification. i. Contractor, Owner’s representative, or Engineer shall increase testing frequency as required to verify mix designs, address workability concerns, and to ensure all concrete placed complies with specifications 2. Lab-Cured (Standard Cure) Cylinders: 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA CONCRETE PLACING, CURING, AND FINISHING WOODARD & CURRAN 03 30 20-22 a. Lab-cured cylinders are required for all concrete on the project, and shall be in addition to field-cured cylinders, where provided. b. One set of 5 cylinders shall be prepared for each 100 cubic yards, or fraction thereof, of each different mix placed in each single day; or for each 5,000 square foot of slab or wall surface area placed each day. c. Test one cylinder at 7 days, three at 28 days, and reserve one cylinder for 56-days. d. Test 56-day cylinder as needed or requested by Contractor or Engineer. 3. Field-Cured Cylinders: a. Contractor is responsible for taking additional field-cured test cylinders to verify concrete compressive strength prior to tightness testing concrete tanks, backfilling concrete basement walls, or early removal of formwork. b. One set of 3 field-cured cylinders shall be prepared for each 100 cubic yards, or fraction thereof, of the concrete placed in each single day. c. Test field cured cylinders at 14 days or as requested by Contractor or Engineer. E. Acceptance Criteria and Additional Testing Requirements: 1. Concrete strength shall be evaluated in accordance with ACI 301 Section 1.6.5, "Evaluation of concrete strength tests", and Section 1.6.6, "Acceptance of concrete strength" 2. Construction will be considered potentially deficient if concrete fails to meet any requirements that affect the strength and durability of the structure, including but not necessarily limited to a. Low strength concrete per ACI 301, Section 1.6.5, "Evaluation of concrete strength tests", and Section 1.6.6, "Acceptance of concrete strength" b. Water-to-cementitious materials ratio higher than that of the specified mix c. Reinforcing steel size, quantity, strength, position or arrangement that does not meet the requirements of the Contract Documents d. Reinforced concrete that differs from the dimensions or locations shown on the Drawings e. Curing that does not meet the requirements of the Contract Documents, including premature formwork removal 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA CONCRETE PLACING, CURING, AND FINISHING WOODARD & CURRAN 03 30 20-23 f. Hot or cold weather concreting that doesn't meet the requirements of the Contract Documents g. Mechanical damage from accidents or fire h. Poor construction practices F. The Engineer may order load and/or core tests in accordance with ASTM C 42. Such testing shall be paid for by the Owner if the concrete is proven to meet the requirements specified. 3.12 TIGHTNESS TESTING OF CONCRETE TANKS A. General: 1. The Contractor shall individually test the following concrete basins for water tightness before backfilling operations, except where backfilling is necessary in order to construct tank: a. Gravity Thickener #1 b. Gravity Thickener #2 c. Gravity Thickener #3 d. Gravity Thickener Distribution Box e. Gravity Thickener Scum Well f. Advanced Treatment Distribution Box 2. Testing shall be in accordance with ACI 350.1, Section 2- “Hydrostatic tightness test for open or covered containment structures”. a. Testing Criteria: Volume loss shall not exceed 0.10 percent net liquid loss per day B. Testing Sequence and Schedule: 1. Contractor shall submit tank basin testing sequence and testing schedule for Engineer’s review. 2. Prior to submitting testing sequence and testing schedule, Contractor shall request and obtain test documentation forms prepared by Engineer. Forms will be provided to Contractor within 14-calender days of request. C. Documentation: 1. Contractor shall document test results for each tank test basin using Engineer’s documentation forms. D. Failed Test: 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA CONCRETE PLACING, CURING, AND FINISHING WOODARD & CURRAN 03 30 20-24 1. If any basin fails Part 1: Qualitative Criteria or Part 2: Quantitative Criteria per ACI 350.1, the Contractor shall correct the problem and retest at Contractor’s expense. E. Tank Leak Repairs: 1. Contractor shall repair leaks per Section 03 01 06 and/or Section 03 63 00. 3.13 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. B. Submit signed and completed concrete tank tightness testing forms for each tank basin required to be tested. END OF SECTION 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA PRECAST STRUCTURES WOODARD & CURRAN 03 41 26-1 SECTION 03 41 26 PRECAST STRUCTURES PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes 1. Provide a precast concrete structure (gravity thickener, scum well, top section only) in accordance with this Section and the applicable reference standards listed in Article 1.03. B. Related Requirements 1. Section 05 50 00 Metal Fabrications 1.02 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Measurement and payment requirements: per Division 01 General Requirements. 1.03 REFERENCES A. Reference Standards. B. The documents listed below are referenced in this section. They are referred to within the text by basic designation only. C. AMERICAN ASSOCIATION OF STATE HIGHWAY AND TRANSPORTATION OFFICIALS (AASHTO) 1. AASHTO HB-17 Standard Specifications for Highway Bridges, 17th edition 2. AASHTO T 111 Standard Method of Test for Mineral Matter or Ash in Asphalt Materials D. ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM) 1. ASTM A48/A48M Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings 2. ASTM A615/A615M Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Carbon-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement 3. ASTM A1064/1064M Standard Specification for Carbon-Steel Wire and Welded Wire Reinforcement, Plain and Deformed, for Concrete 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA PRECAST STRUCTURES WOODARD & CURRAN 03 41 26-2 4. ASTM C32 Standard Specification for Sewer and Manhole Brick (Made from Clay or Shale) 5. ASTM C33/C33M Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates 6. ASTM C144 Standard Specification for Aggregate for Masonry Mortar 7. ASTM C150/C150M Standard Specification for Portland Cement 8. ASTM C207 Standard Specification for Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes 9. ASTM C260/C260M Standard Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete 10. ASTM C478 Standard Specification for Precast Reinforced Concrete Manhole Sections 11. ASTM C494/C494M Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete 12. ASTM C857 Standard Practice for Minimum Structural Design Loading for Underground Precast Concrete Utility Structures 13. ASTM C890 Standard Practice for Minimum Structural Design Loading for Monolithic or Sectional Precast Concrete Water and Wastewater Structures 14. ASTM C990 Standard Specification for Joints for Concrete Pipe, Manholes and Precast Box Sections Using Preformed Flexible Joint Sealants 15. ASTM D113 Standard Test Method for Ductility of Bituminous Materials 16. ASTM D1227 Standard Specification for Emulsified Asphalt Used as a Protective Coating for Roofing 17. ASTM D217 Standard Test Methods for Cone Penetration of Lubricating Grease 18. ASTM D4 Standard Test Method for Bitumen Content 19. ASTM D6/D6M Loss on Heating of Oil and Asphaltic Compounds 20. ASTM D71 Standard Test Method for Relative Density of Solid Pitch and Asphalt (Displacement Method) E. FEDERAL SPECIFICATIONS (FED) 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA PRECAST STRUCTURES WOODARD & CURRAN 03 41 26-3 1. FED SS-S-210A Sealing Compound, Preformed Plastic, for Expansion Joints And Pipe Joints 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination, Sequencing, and Scheduling: per Division 01 General Requirements. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with the Division 01 General Requirements. B. Closeout and Maintenance Material Submittals: per Division 01 General Requirements. C. Shop Drawings 1. Precast Concrete Structures, including construction details, dimensions, reinforcement placement, openings, etc. D. Product Data 1. Joint Sealant 2. Aluminum Hatches 3. Anchorage Hardware E. Design Data 1. Structural and Buoyancy Design Calculations sealed by a professional engineer registered in the project state, and submitted a minimum of two weeks prior to scheduled manufacture. These will be reviewed for consistency with project intent; the engineer who seals the calculations and shop drawings shall be responsible for the design. See Part 2 of this specification for Engineer’s prerogative pertaining to buoyancy. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. B. The materials covered by this specification are intended to be standard materials of proven ability as manufactured by reputable concerns. Materials shall be designed and constructed in accordance with the best practice of the industry and shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. The specifications call attention to certain features but do not purport to cover all details entering into the construction of the materials. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA PRECAST STRUCTURES WOODARD & CURRAN 03 41 26-4 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. B. Products shall be shipped, stored and handled in a manner consistent with the written recommendations of the manufacturer and so as not to degrade quality, serviceability and/or appearance. Any unit found to be defective either before or after installation shall be removed from the project site and replaced with a sound unit. 1.08 SITE CONDITIONS A. Existing Conditions: per Division 01 General Requirements. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 PRECAST CONCRETE STRUCTURES A. General 1. Structure: Provide precast structures with interior steps, wall sleeves, seals, and access hatches as shown on the Drawings. Provide joint seals, pipe seals, coatings, etc., to ensure no groundwater shall enter the structures. 2. Placement: Place structures on compacted bedding material. Structures shall be plumb and level and pipe inverts shall be at proper elevations. Plug all lifting holes inside and out with non-shrink grout. 3. Joints: Follow manufacturers’ instructions for sealing joints between precast sections. Provide two rings of 1-inch diameter butyl rubber sealant. Point joints with butyl caulking. 4. Inverts and Penetrations: As indicated on Drawings. 5. Steps: Polypropylene reinforced with steel rod, minimum tread width of 14-inches complying with OSHA requirements. Coat aluminum to be cast into concrete with bituminous paint. 6. Pipe to Structure Connections: Flexible manhole sleeves equal to CP series manufactured by Interpace Corp. Size to fit diameter and type of pipe without use of gaskets. 7. Dampproofing: Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings, the exterior surfaces of all precast structures shall be given a minimum of two shop coats of bituminous dampproofing using cutback asphalt, AASHTO M81 or M82, Asphalt emulsion AASHTO M140 or approved equal, at 5 gallons per 100 square feet minimum per coat. Touch up in the field prior to backfilling as required by Engineer. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA PRECAST STRUCTURES WOODARD & CURRAN 03 41 26-5 B. Precast Materials 1. Concrete a. Concrete compressive strength shall be 5,000 psi after 28 days. b. Minimum concrete thickness shall be 6 inches. c. Portland cement shall be Type II conforming to ASTM C150/C150M. d. Fine aggregate shall consist of natural sand conforming to ASTM C33/C33M. e. Coarse aggregate shall consist of 1/2-inch maximum well graded crushed stone conforming to ASTM C33/C33M. f. Air entrainment admixture shall conform to ASTM C260/C260M. The air-entrained content shall be not less then 4 percent nor greater than 7 percent. g. A super plasticizer shall be used and shall conform to ASTM C494/C494Mtype F or G. Concrete shall be placed at a slump of between 5 and 8 inches. 2. Reinforcement a. Wire fabric shall conform to the requirements of ASTM A1064/1064M. b. Reinforcing bars shall be new billet steel, deformed, conforming to the requirements of ASTM A615/A615M, Grade 60. c. Minimum clear concrete cover to reinforcement shall be 1-1/2 inches. C. Design Loads 1. Vehicle Loads a. Except as otherwise specified herein, the design shall meet the requirements of AASHTO HB-17, including a HS-20 vehicle load. b. A lateral vehicle surcharge load of 125 psf shall be applied. 2. Lateral Pressure a. The equivalent lateral fluid pressure shall be 100 psf/lf below flood and/or design groundwater elevation and 60 psf/lf above such elevation. The specified lateral vehicle surcharge load shall be added to this load. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA PRECAST STRUCTURES WOODARD & CURRAN 03 41 26-6 3. Buoyancy a. The structure shall be designed with a factor of safety of 1.15 against buoyancy with an assumed flood elevation at the top of the structure. Frictional resistance in this calculation shall not be permitted. Where the structure is composed of successive vertical segments, the weight of the segments shall be such as to provide the same factor of safety for buoyancy, or stainless steel mechanical connections shall be used to connect the segments together. The design shall include positive anchorage to a reinforced concrete anti-buoyancy slab of the required size. b. Note that the buoyant force acting on an object is equal to the weight of the volume of water displaced by the object. It is the density of a volume that determines whether or not the volume is buoyant. c. If the Engineer determines, at his sole discretion, that the pre- caster's buoyancy calculations are incorrect, the Engineer shall direct the Contractor to implement specific measures to counteract buoyancy to the Engineer's satisfaction. Any and all costs associated with such measures shall be borne entirely by the Contractor and shall be at no additional cost to the Owner. 4. Water & Wastewater Structures Design Load a. Except where higher loads are specified herein, water and wastewater structures shall be designed for the loads prescribed in ASTM C890. 5. Utility Structures Design Load a. Except where higher loads are specified herein, utility structures shall be designed for the loads prescribed in ASTM C857. D. Joints 1. Concrete sections shall be provided with bell and spigot or tongue-in- groove ends to ensure proper connection of the joints. 2. Each joint shall be sealed with a butyl rubber sealant. A compatible primer shall be applied as recommended by the manufacturer. Sealant shall be Conseal CS-102 (CS-202 when the temperature during installation is less than 30 ⁰F) by Concrete Sealants, Inc., Kent Seal #2 by Hamilton Kent, Pro-Stik by Press-Seal Gasket Corporation, or approved equal, and shall be applied in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Sealant properties shall be as follows: a. AASHTO T 111: 30% minimum ash content, b. ASTM C990, 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA PRECAST STRUCTURES WOODARD & CURRAN 03 41 26-7 c. ASTM D4: 50% minimum hydrocarbon content, d. ASTM D6/D6M: 2% maximum volatile matter, e. ASTM D71: specific gravity between 1.15 - 1.50, f. ASTM D113: 5.0 minimum, g. ASTM D217: 55-100 mm at 77 ⁰F, h. FED SS-S-210A: no deterioration, no cracking and no swelling after 30 days immersion in 5% solutions of HCl, H2SO4, NaOH, KOH, and H2S. 2.02 DAMPPROOFING A. Dampproofing shall be Hydrocide 700 Mastic as made by Sonneborn, Karnak 920 Anti Hydro Mastic Emulsion, or approved equal, conforming to ASTM D 1227. 2.03 MANHOLE STEPS A. Manhole steps shall be of steel reinforced copolymer polypropylene conforming to ASTM C478/C478M, cast-in-place or installed utilizing inserts approved by the Engineer. B. All steps shall be 12 inches on center with abrasive step surface and safety edge, drop front design, 1-inch diameter and 16 inches wide. Metal items embedded in concrete shall be painted with a zinc chromate primer. 2.04 PIPE CONNECTIONS A. Pre-molded elastomeric sealed joints shall be used at the joints between the pipe and precast sections. Pre-molded elastomeric sealed joints shall be A-Lok, Res- Seal, Press-Wedge II, Lock Joints Flexible Manhole Sleeve, Kor-N-Seal Joint Sleeve, or equal. 2.05 MANHOLE COVERS AND FRAMES A. Manhole covers and frames shall be cast iron conforming to the requirements of ASTM A48/A48M, Class 30, and shall be of noiseless, non-rocking design with pick holes. The words "Town of Billerica" and "Sewer" shall be cast on each cover in three-inch letters. B. Watertight Frames and Covers 1. Watertight manhole frames and covers shall have a minimum total weight of 1,125 pounds with a clear opening of 34 inches unless otherwise indicated on the drawings. Watertight manhole covers shall have a gasketed interior cover of watertight design, and shall also contain a locking bar. Watertight manhole frames and covers shall be LeBaron 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA PRECAST STRUCTURES WOODARD & CURRAN 03 41 26-8 Model LBW388-000 or approved equal models as manufactured by Neenah Foundry, or Campbell Foundry. C. Access Hatches (for Scum Well): Access hatch to be cast into precast structures shall be provided by the precast manufacturer and shall be as specified in Section 05500- Miscellaneous Metal Work. 2.06 BRICK A. Brick shall conform to ASTM C32/C32M, and shall be new, first quality, whole, sound brick. B. For setting manhole frames, Type MS brick shall be used. 2.07 MORTAR A. Mortar shall be composed of one part Portland cement and two parts sand with 20% hydrated lime. B. Portland cement shall conform to ASTM C150/C150M. Sand shall conform to ASTM C144/C144M. Hydrated lime shall conform to ASTM C207/C207M. 2.08 ALUMINUM HATCHES A. Manufacturers: Bilco Company, Halliday Products, Inc., Babcock-Davis, or equal. B. Styles, types and sizes: per Drawings, and of single manufacturer. 1. Type J and JD: single leaf and double leaf, respectively, watertight, self- draining type. a. Door leaf: 1/4-inch thick aluminum diamond pattern plate reinforced with aluminum stiffeners, capable of withstanding live load of 300 pounds per square foot. Equip each door leaf with minimum 2 hinges with stainless steel pins, compression spring operators enclosed in telescopic tubes to afford easy operation. b. Provide automatic hold-open arm with vinyl grip handle to release cover for closing. c. Equip with snap lock and removable handle. d. Channel frame: 1/4-inch thick aluminum with anchor flange around the perimeter. Except where connected to a drainage system per Drawings, provide extension from frame drainage coupling to drain to area below. e. Mechanically attach a continuous EPDM debris gasket to frame. Provide 1-1/2 inch drainage coupling in channel frame. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA PRECAST STRUCTURES WOODARD & CURRAN 03 41 26-9 f. Hardware: stainless steel with factory mill finish g. Bituminous coating applied to areas to be embedded in concrete. h. Where not connected to a drainage system per Drawings with extensions to the drainage coupling to allow drainage to the area below. C. Fall protection 1. Equip hatch covers with fall protection grating system of fiberglass or aluminum construction and 316 stainless steel hardware, with live load capacity of 300 psf. 2. Safety color: orange or yellow. 3. Provide with spring loaded lifting handle and aluminum or stainless steel hold open arm and release handle, and automatic lock at 90 degree open position. 4. Provide capability for locking with padlock in the closed position. 2.09 ANCHORAGE HARDWARE A. Hardware for fastening the precast structure to the anti-buoyancy slab, and to fasten precast segments together for buoyancy shall be stainless steel and as specified in Section 05 50 00 Metal Fabrications. 2.10 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 PRECAST STRUCTURES A. Precast structures shall be installed as shown on the drawings. Precast sections shall be installed so that the entire structure is vertically plumb and aligned, and when not so shall be removed and replaced. All erection holes shall be filled solid with non-shrink grout. The Contractor shall furnish and use suitable slings, hooks and cables for the proper handling of the sections. 3.02 APPLICATION OF DAMPPROOFING A. Application of dampproofing shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. B. Application shall not be permitted in spaces exposed to inclement weather or when air temperatures are below 40 ⁰F, or are expected to go below 40 ⁰F within 24 hours after application. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA PRECAST STRUCTURES WOODARD & CURRAN 03 41 26-10 C. Dampproofing can be applied to "green" or slightly damp surfaces. D. Apply dampproofing at a rate of 4 to 6 gallons per 100 square feet. If applying 2 coats, each coat shall be 2 to 3 gallons per 100 square feet. First coat must be allowed to dry prior to the application of the second coat. Coating must be continuous and free from breaks and pinholes. 3.03 CLEANUP A. Upon completion of all construction, and prior to final acceptance, any and all debris shall be removed from precast structures. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. 3.05 STARTUP & COMMISSIONING A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. 3.06 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. END OF SECTION 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA INJECTION GROUTING WOODARD & CURRAN 03 63 00-1 SECTION 03 63 00 INJECTION GROUTING PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes 1. Provide polyurethane injection grouting for repair of cracks as indicated on Drawings, in accordance with this Section, and applicable reference standards listed in Article 1.03. 2. Provide injection grouting per this specification and/or cementitious crystalline leak repair per Section 03 01 06 to seal leaks in concrete structures. B. Work Performed by General Contractor 1. Concrete tank tightness testing in accordance to ACI 350.1 will be performed by the General Contractor. C. Related Requirements 1. Section 03 01 06 – Cementitious Crystalline Leak Repair 2. Section 03 30 20 – Concrete Placing Curing Finishing 1.02 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Measurement and payment requirements: per Division 01 General Requirements. 1.03 REFERENCES A. Reference Standards 1. American Concrete Institute (ACI) a. ACI 350.1 Specification for Tightness Testing of Environmental Engineering Concrete Containment Structures. 2. ASTM International (ASTM) a. ASTM C 273 Shear Properties of Sandwich Core Materials b. ASTM D412 Standard Test Methods for Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic Elastomers—Tension 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA INJECTION GROUTING WOODARD & CURRAN 03 63 00-2 c. ASTM D638 Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics d. ASTM D2842 Water Absorption of Rigid Cellular Plastics 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination, Sequencing, and Scheduling: per Division 01 General Requirements. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. B. Manufacturer’s product data and instructions C. Manufacturer’s certification D. Closeout and Maintenance Material Submittals: per Division 01 General Requirements. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. 1.07 CONTRACTOR QUALIFICATIONS A. Installation contractor must have a minium of five years of experience successfully sealing cracks with submitted product. On-site personnel installing system must have minium five years experience installing the product. 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. B. Packing, Shipping, Handling, and Unloading 1. Deliver material in original, unopened containers with manufacturer's name, labels, product identification, and batch numbers. 1.09 SITE CONDITIONS A. Existing Conditions: per Division 01 General Requirements. 1. Product will be used to seal actively leaking cracks identified during tightness testing of concrete structures per Section 03 30 20. Application of cementitious crystalline leak repairs will occur during concrete tank tightness testing in accordance with ACI 350.1. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA INJECTION GROUTING WOODARD & CURRAN 03 63 00-3 2. Comply with manufacturer’s product data regarding condition of substrate to receive cementitious crystalline leak repairs, weather conditions before and during installation, and protection of the installed system. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. Acceptable level of quality equivalent to: 1. Mountain Grout – SLV with Accelerator, as manufactured by Green Mountain International, LLC. 2. SikaFix HH LV with SikaFix Accelerator, as manufactured by Sika Corporation. B. Coordinate compatibility of material with waterproofing materials. 2.02 PERFORMANCE CRITERIA A. Shear strength: 17 psi (ASTM C273). B. Tensile strength: 29 psi (ASTM D638). C. Elongation: plus 44 percent (ASTM D412). D. Shrinkage: less than 1 percent. E. Water absorption: less than 1 percent (ASTM D2842) 2.03 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Do not apply material during periods of rain or snow or if rain or snow is imminent. B. Take precautions to avoid damage to surfaces near Work zone due to mixing and handling of grouting material. C. Fills cracks as indicated on the Drawings and repair all leaks as specified herein. 3.02 INSTALLERS A. Qualified per Division 01 General Requirements. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA INJECTION GROUTING WOODARD & CURRAN 03 63 00-4 3.03 EXAMINATION A. Site Visit: Prior to installation, visit the site with a manufacturer’s representative to inspect and certify that concrete surfaces are in acceptable condition to receive treatment. B. Verification of Substrates: Verify concrete surfaces are sound and clean, and that form release agents and materials to cure and seal the concrete are compatible with the treatment. C. Defects: Examine surfaces to be treated for form tie holes and defects such as honeycombing, rock pockets, faulty construction joints, and cracks. D. Tightness Testing: Leaks shall be examined during concrete tank tightness testing in accordance with ACI 350.1, while the concrete tank is filled with water. All leaks shall be sealed in accordance with ACI 350.1 and to the satisfaction of the Engineer and Owner’s representative 3.04 SURFACE PREPARATION A. Ensure cracks and adjacent substrate are clean, sound, and free of frost. Remove dust, laitance, grease, curing compounds, waxes, impregnations, foreign particles, efflorescence and other bond inhibiting materials from surface by mechanical means. B. Ensure sufficient moisture is present to activate grout. If moisture is insufficient for activation, inject crack with a small amount of water prior to injecting grouting material. 3.05 MIXING AND APPLICATION A. Mixing and application per manufacturer’s written instructions and product data sheets. B. Mixing for injection of cracks 1. Agitate vigorously by shaking a 5 gallon pail or by mixing thoroughly with drill and paddle, bung mixer for 2 minutes maximum with low speed (400- 600 rpm). 2. Do not allow water to enter mix and avoid "whipping" air into material. C. Placement Procedure 1. Drill 5/8 inch diameter holes alongside of crack at a 45 degree angle. Drill holes to intersect crack midway through substrate at a spacing of 6 inches minimum to 18 inches maximum. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA INJECTION GROUTING WOODARD & CURRAN 03 63 00-5 2. Install injection packers in holes and tighten. If crack to be injected is 1/2 inch or greater at surface, pack with open cell polyurethane foam, saturated with mixed grouting material, into the crack. Spray with small amount of water to activate grout and create a surface seal. 3. Pump grouting material at over 250 psi into cracks for 45 seconds and then pause to allow material to flow into all cracks. Watch for material flow and water movement to appear on surface. When movement stops, begin injecting into next packer. Begin injecting at bottom of crack and work vertically when sealing vertical cracks. 4. Reinject to ensure cracks are properly sealed. 3.06 CLEANING A. Remove excess material and injection ports from all areas that are exposed to view. 3.07 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. B. Manufacturer Field Services 1. Furnish the services of a qualified manufacturer’s field representative at the Site to demonstrate proper application and inspection procedures prior to commencement of application. 3.08 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. END OF SECTION This page intentionally left blank 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA UNIT MASONRY (FILED SUB-BID REQUIRED) WOODARD & CURRAN 04 20 00-1 SECTION 04 20 00 UNIT MASONRY (FILED SUB-BID REQUIRED) PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes 1. Provide services, material, and equipment necessary to complete the masonry work shown on the Drawings and as required to complete the Work in accordance with this Section and applicable reference standards listed in Article 1.03. a. Furnishing and installing concrete masonry units (CMU). b. Furnishing and installing masonry joint reinforcement, ties, and anchors. c. Furnishing and installing wall insulation, which is specified in Section 07 21 00. d. Furnishing and installing bond beam lintels for openings required for Work specified under other sections. e. Building into masonry-embedded items such as anchors, anchor bolts, inserts, flashing, steel and concrete lintels, etc. furnished and located by the Contractor. f. Building into masonry door and window frames, louvers, vents, conduits, etc., furnished and set by the Contractor. g. Furnishing and installing membrane wall flashing, and other specified items. B. Products Installed But Not Supplied Under This Section 1. Deformed steel reinforcement as specified in Section 03 20 00. C. Related Requirements 1. Section 03 11 00 –Concrete Forming 2. Section 03 20 00 –Concrete Reinforcing 3. Section 07 21 00 –Thermal Insulation 4. Section 07 92 00 –Joint Sealants 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA UNIT MASONRY (FILED SUB-BID REQUIRED) WOODARD & CURRAN 04 20 00-2 1.02 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Measurement and payment requirements: per Division 01 General Requirements. 1.03 REFERENCES A. Reference Standards 1. American Concrete Institute International (ACI) a. ACI 530.1 Specification for Masonry Structures 2. ASTM International (ASTM) a. ASTM A82 Standard Specification for Steel Wire, Plain, for Concrete Reinforcement b. ASTM A153 Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware c. ASTM A951 Standard Specification for Steel Wire for Masonry Joint Reinforcement d. ASTM C67 Standard Test Methods for Sampling and Testing Brick and Structural Clay Tile e. ASTM C90 Loadbearing Concrete Masonry Units f. ASTM C126 Standard Specification for Ceramic Glazed Structural Clay Facing Tile, Facing Brick, and Solid Masonry Units g. ASTM C140 Standard Test Methods for Sampling and Testing Concrete Masonry Units and Related Units h. ASTM C143 Standard Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic- Cement Concrete i. ASTM C144 Standard Specification for Aggregate for Masonry Mortar j. ASTM C150 Standard Specification for Portland Cement k. ASTM C207 Standard Specification for Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes l. ASTM C216 Facing Brick (Solid Masonry Units Made from Clay or Shale) m. ASTM C270 Standard Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry n. ASTM C404 Standard Specification for Aggregates for Masonry Grout o. ASTM C476 Standard Specification for Grout for Masonry p. ASTM C494 Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA UNIT MASONRY (FILED SUB-BID REQUIRED) WOODARD & CURRAN 04 20 00-3 q. ASTM C1329 Standard Specification for Mortar Cement r. ASTM C1384 Standard Specification for Admixtures for Masonry Mortars 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination, Sequencing, and Scheduling: per Division 01 General Requirements. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with the Division 01 General Requirements. B. A letter from the masonry Contractor indicating that they have reviewed the reinforcement Shop Drawings for the masonry Work C. Product Data 1. Brochures for all items furnished, including, but not limited to a. Anchors and fasteners b. Grout ingredients c. Masonry Units: CMU d. Metal accessories e. Reinforcement supports/spacers f. Mortar ingredients g. Joint reinforcement and wall ties D. Design Data 1. Mortar mix designs in accordance with the proportion Specification of ASTM C270 for each mortar mix. 2. Grout mix designs in accordance with the proportion Specification of ASTM C476. E. Material Certificates 1. Certifications shall be signed, dated, and notarized, and for the Work of this specific Project. New certifications shall be submitted any and all times there is a change in material or material Supplier. 2. Anchors and Fasteners 3. Grout Ingredients 4. Masonry Units: CMU 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA UNIT MASONRY (FILED SUB-BID REQUIRED) WOODARD & CURRAN 04 20 00-4 5. Metal Accessories including reinforcement supports and spacers 6. Mortar Ingredients 7. Joint Reinforcement and Wall Ties F. Hot Weather and Cold Weather Construction Procedures 1. The Engineer's review shall not constitute approval, as the Contractor shall be responsible for all Work performed during hot and cold weather. G. Closeout and Maintenance Material Submittals: per Division 01 General Requirements. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. B. Cement, lime, and all other cementitious materials shall be delivered to the Site in unbroken packaging that is plainly labeled with brand and manufacturer, and stored in dry, weather tight enclosures. They shall be stored and handled in a manner to prevent contamination by foreign materials, water, and dampness. C. Masonry units shall be handled with care in order to prevent chipping and other damage. Damaged units shall not be used in exposed Work. D. Materials stored on newly constructed floors shall be placed such that the load does not exceed 50 pounds per square foot. E. CMU shall be shipped with each pallet wrapped in polyethylene plastic film. The wrapping shall not be removed until the CMU is to be placed in the wall to prevent moisture absorption. F. CMU left exposed, or is otherwise allowed to pick up moisture, will be rejected and shall be removed from the Site. 1.08 SITE CONDITIONS A. Existing Conditions: per Division 01 General Requirements. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. Gauges 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA UNIT MASONRY (FILED SUB-BID REQUIRED) WOODARD & CURRAN 04 20 00-5 1. Wire gauge standard shall be United States Steel Wire. Sheet gauge standard shall be U.S. Standard. B. Materials 1. Cement shall be portland cement conforming to ASTM C150, Type I or Type II. Alternatively, for mortar, the cement may be mortar cement as specified. 2. Hydrated Lime shall conform to ASTM C207, Type S, and shall not contain air-entrainment additives. 3. Aggregates for mortar shall conform to ASTM C144. 4. Aggregates for grout shall conform to ASTM C404. 5. Water shall be clean, fresh, and potable. 6. Concrete Masonry Units (CMU) a. CMU shall be supplied by a single manufacturer that is capable of providing all types, sizes, shapes, and textures described below. b. CMU shall conform to ASTM C90. CMU shall be normal weight. Surfaces shall be smooth and dense. The minimum CMU net section compressive strength shall be 1900 pounds per square inch (psi) (average of 3 units) and 1700 psi (individual unit) measured in accordance with ASTM C140. 1) f'm= 1500 psi, where f'm = specified compressive strength of masonry at age 28 days. c. Bond beam units, lintel units and all other special shapes shall be furnished as required, and the exposed face shall closely match that of the stretcher units. d. Stretcher units of 6 inches and greater nominal thickness shall be 2-core units. Stretcher units of 4 inch nominal thickness shall be 3-core units. Open-ended units shall be permitted in order to facilitate positioning units at vertical reinforcement. 7. Joint Reinforcement and Wall Ties a. Masonry joint reinforcement and wall ties shall be factory fabricated from cold-drawn steel wire conforming to ASTM A82, galvanized after fabrication in accordance with ASTM A153. b. Joint reinforcement shall conform to ASTM A951 and shall be fabricated of W1.7, 9-gauge, 0.148-inch diameter wire in a ladder- type configuration. Smooth cross wires, at a maximum spacing of 16 inches, shall be welded to deformed longitudinal wires. The 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA UNIT MASONRY (FILED SUB-BID REQUIRED) WOODARD & CURRAN 04 20 00-6 out-to-out dimension of the longitudinal wires shall be approximately 2 inches less than the nominal thickness of the wythe. Prefabricated corners shall be used. Joint reinforcement shall be supplied in flat sections 10 feet to 20 feet in length. 8. CMU Anchors a. Wire components shall be hot dip galvanized per ASTM A153. Sheet metal components and components fabricated from steel plate shall be hot dip galvanized per ASTM A153 Class B. b. Anchors where CMU partition walls intersect exterior walls shall be strap anchors, 1/4 inch by 1-1/2 inch by 24 inches, including a 2-inch long 90-degree bend at each end to form a Z-shape. They shall be #344 Rigid Partition Anchor as manufactured by Hohmann & Barnard, Inc. c. 9. Wire mesh. For use under all knockout block bond beams, and for bonding where noted, shall be 16-gauge, 1/2 inch mesh galvanized hardware cloth. 10. Membrane wall flashing shall be a full 5-ounce copper sheet permanently bonded between 2 layers of textured, woven, high tensile strength glass fiber fabric with a ductile asphalt compound. 11. Compressible filler shall be PolySeal compressible polyurethane foam saturated with polybutylene as made by Sandell Manufacturing Co., or equal. In general, material shall be twice as wide as joint to be filled. Depth to be equal to width if not noted. 12. Pre-molded joint filler: 3/8 inch thick closed cell neoprene. Acceptable level of quality: NS by Hohmann & Barnard, Inc. 13. Control joint: Regular rubber. Acceptable level of quality: RS by Hohmann & Barnard, Inc. 14. CMU Lintels a. CMU lintels shall be provided where shown on the Drawings and above all openings required by other trades. b. They shall be formed of knockout web (not low web) bond beam units with open bottoms. c. Unless indicated otherwise, they shall be reinforced with a minimum of 2, #5 bars, and filled solid with grout. Reinforcement shall extend a minimum of 40 times the diameter of the bar past the face of openings, except it shall terminate 2 inches from control joints. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA UNIT MASONRY (FILED SUB-BID REQUIRED) WOODARD & CURRAN 04 20 00-7 d. Exposed Work shall be of the same material and texture as the adjoining masonry. 15. CMU Bond Beams a. CMU bond beams shall be provided where shown on the Drawings b. They shall be constructed of knockout web (not low web) bond beam units with open bottoms. c. Unless indicated otherwise, they shall be reinforced with a minimum of 2, #5 bars, and filled solid with grout. Wire mesh shall be placed in the bed joint to contain the grout. d. Exposed Work shall be of the same material and texture as the adjoining masonry. 16. Mortar a. Aggregate shall be measured in a damp, loose condition b. Except as noted below, mortar for concrete masonry shall conform to ASTM C270, Type S, consisting of the following proportions by volume. 1) 1 part Type S mortar cement, 2-1/4 to 3 parts aggregate, or 2) 1/2 part portland cement, 1 part Type N mortar cement, 2-1/4 to 3 times the sum of the cement volumes, parts aggregate, or 3) 1 part portland cement, 1/4 to 1/2 part hydrated lime, 2-1/4 to 3 times the sum of the cement and lime volumes, parts aggregate c. Mortar for veneer shall conform to ASTM C270, Type N, and shall consist of the following proportions by volume. 1) 1 part Type N mortar cement 2-1/4 to 3 parts aggregate, or 2) 1 part portland cement, 1/2 to 1-1/4 parts hydrated lime, 2-1/4 to 3 times the sum of the cement and lime volumes, parts aggregate 17. Grout a. Conform to ASTM C476 for fine grout, and meet either the specified compressive strength or proportion requirements. b. If by proportion (by volume) 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA UNIT MASONRY (FILED SUB-BID REQUIRED) WOODARD & CURRAN 04 20 00-8 1 part portland cement, 0 to 1/10 part hydrated lime, 2-1/4 to 3 times the sum of the cement and lime volumes parts fine aggregate (with aggregate measured in a damp, loose condition). 18. Self-Adhered Wall Flashing a. Self-adhered wall flashing shall be a 40-mil membrane comprising a polyethylene or polyvinyl chloride (PVC) membrane integrally bonded to a rubberized asphalt adhesive. b. Provide primer and rubberized asphalt mastic for sealing edges c. Self-adhered wall flashing shall be Perm-A-Barrier Flashing by W. R. Grace and Company, Hyload S/A Flashing by Hyload, or equal. 2.02 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS A. Masonry materials and construction shall conform to ACI 530.1 except as modified by the Contract Documents. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Inspection 1. Examine all areas scheduled for Work to determine whether existing masonry or other conditions will adversely affect execution of the Work including meeting specified tolerances. Report any such conditions to the Engineer. B. Workmanship 1. Masonry shall be constructed level, square, plumb and true within the following tolerances. a. Dimensions 1) Cross section and elevation: minus 1/4 inch, plus 1/2 inch 2) Mortar joint thickness (except glass block) a) Bed joints: minus 1/8 inch, plus 1/8 inch b) Head and collar joints: minus 1/4 inch, plus 3/8 inch 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA UNIT MASONRY (FILED SUB-BID REQUIRED) WOODARD & CURRAN 04 20 00-9 3) Grout space and cavity width, except for walls passing framed construction: minus 1/4 inch, plus 3/8 inch b. Elements 1) Variation from level a) Bed joints within 10 feet: minus 1/4 inch, plus 1/4 inch b) Bed joints maximum: minus 1/2 inch, plus 1/2 inch c) Top surface of bearing walls, in 10 feet: minus 1/4 inch, plus 1/4 inch d) Top surface of bearing walls, maximum: minus 1/2 inch, plus 1/2 inch 2) Variation from plumb a) In 10 feet: minus 1/4 inch, plus 1/4 inch b) In 20 feet: minus 3/8 inch, plus 3/8 inch c) Maximum: minus 1/2 inch, plus 1/2 inch 3) True to a line a) In 10 feet: minus 1/4 inch, plus 1/4 inch b) In 20 feet: minus 3/8 inch, plus 3/8 inch c) Maximum: minus 1/2 inch, plus 1/2 inch 4) Alignment of columns and walls (bottom versus top) a) Bearing walls: minus 1/2 inch, plus 1/2 inch b) Nonbearing walls: minus 3/4 inch, plus 3/4 inch c. Location of elements 1) Indicated in plan a) In 20 feet: minus 1/2 inch, plus 1/2 inch b) Maximum: minus 3/4 inch, plus 3/4 inch 2) Indicated in elevation a) In story height: minus 1/4 inch, plus 1/4 inch 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA UNIT MASONRY (FILED SUB-BID REQUIRED) WOODARD & CURRAN 04 20 00-10 b) Maximum: minus 3/4 inch, plus 3/4 inch 2. The tolerance for the placement of reinforcement in walls and other flexural members when the distance from the centerline of reinforcement to the opposite face of masonry "d" is not more than 8 inches shall be plus or minus 1/2 inch. For "d" greater than 8 inches but not more than 24 inches, the tolerance shall be plus or minus 1 inch. For "d" greater than 24 inches, the tolerance shall be plus or minus 1-1/4 inches. Tolerances shall be considered in conjunction with the cover requirements specified. 3. Elevations shall be checked by instrument as often as necessary to maintain the tolerances specified. 4. Anchors, ties, wall plugs, accessories and other items to be built into the Work shall be installed as the masonry work progresses. Cutting and fitting of masonry, including that required to accommodate the Work of others, shall be done with masonry saws or other approved methods which provide cuts that are straight and true. 5. Mortar shall be used within 2 hours of initial mixing. Pigmented mortar shall not be re-tempered. No mortar shall be used after it has begun to set. 6. Grout shall be placed within 1-1/2 hours of introduction of water into the mix, and before initial set. Grout shall not be re-tempered by the addition of water. 7. During erection, walls shall be kept dry by covering the top with a strong, waterproof membrane at the end of each day or shutdown. Partially completed walls shall be covered at all times when Work is not in progress. Cover shall extend a minimum of 2 feet down both sides, and shall be securely held in place. 8. Unfinished Work shall be stepped back for joining with new Work. 9. Hollow concrete masonry units shall be protected against wetting prior to use, and shall be dry when laid. Each unit shall be adjusted to its final position while mortar is still soft and plastic. Any unit disturbed after mortar has stiffened shall be removed and re-laid with fresh mortar. Vertical cells to be filled with grout shall be aligned to provide a continuous unobstructed opening. C. CMU Construction 1. Interior, single wythe exterior shall be laid in full running bond. Mortar joints at CMU shall be 3/8 inch thick. Units shall be laid with full mortar coverage on horizontal and vertical face shells. Webs shall also be bedded in all courses where adjacent to cells or cavities filled with grout, and shall be bedded in the starting course on solid foundation walls or floors. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA UNIT MASONRY (FILED SUB-BID REQUIRED) WOODARD & CURRAN 04 20 00-11 Remove mortar protruding more than 1/2 inch into cells or cavities to be filled with grout. Corners shall interlock: alternating courses shall overlap in running bond. Intersecting walls shall not interlock. 2. Joint reinforcement shall be placed so that the longitudinal wires are located over face-shell mortar beds, and are fully embedded in the mortar for their entire length. Joint reinforcement shall have a minimum clear cover of 5/8 inch when exposed to earth or weather and 1/2 inch otherwise. Reinforcement shall be lapped a minimum of 6 inches. Reinforcement shall be placed in the second and in each alternate course. At openings, reinforcement shall be provided in the first course above and below the opening, extending at least 2 feet beyond the opening on each side. Joint reinforcement shall be interrupted at all control and isolation joints. 3. Intersecting bearing or shear walls shall be joined by strap anchors, 1/4 inch by 1-1/2 inch by 24 inches, including a 2-inch long, 90 degree bend at each end to form a Z-shape. The strap anchors shall be spaced at 2 feet maximum. 4. Intersections where partition walls intersect interior nonbearing shear walls or partition walls, shall be joined at vertical intervals of not more than 16 inches by prefabricated tee joint reinforcement or by 16-gauge by 1/2 inch mesh galvanized hardware cloth. 5. Steel bar reinforcement shall be completely embedded in grout. Place reinforcement in grout spaces prior to grouting. Pushing reinforcement into grout shall be strictly prohibited. Fasten reinforcement together and provide hot-dip galvanized bar supports and spacers to prevent reinforcement displacement beyond the permitted tolerances. Where units are placed where vertical reinforcement projects, the block shall be either positioned into place over the top of the vertical bar, or open-ended units shall be provided. The clear distance between parallel bars shall not be less than the nominal diameter of the bar, nor less than 1 inch. In columns and pilasters, the clear distance between vertical bars shall not be less than 1 and 1/2 times the nominal bar diameter, nor less than 1-1/2 inches. Steel reinforcement shall be positioned as follows. a. The thickness of grout between the reinforcement and the masonry units shall not be less than 1/4 inch b. Where masonry wythe contains a single row of reinforcement, it shall be positioned at the center of the units, equidistant from each masonry face c. Where masonry wythe contains 2 rows of reinforcement, each masonry face shall be reinforced. The clear cover shall be 2 inches at each face, with zero negative tolerance. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA UNIT MASONRY (FILED SUB-BID REQUIRED) WOODARD & CURRAN 04 20 00-12 d. Splice lengths for bar reinforcement shall conform to the following, unless noted otherwise on the drawings. 1) #4: 1 feet – 8 inches 2) #5: 2 feet – 6 inches 3) #6: 3 feet – 7 inches 4) #7: 5 feet – 0 inches e. Vertical wall reinforcement splices shall consist of the following: 1) Base of CMU wall vertical dowels shall be contact spliced 2) Vertical wall dowels within the height of the CMU wall shall be spliced with dowel bar splicers and dowel inserts (DBS/DI) as specified in Section 03 20 00. 3) Top of wall hook dowels shall be contact spliced. 6. Grout a. At the time of placement, the grout shall have a slump between 8 inches and 11 inches as determined by ASTM C143. b. Grout lifts shall not exceed 5 feet. Grout pours shall meet the height limitations of ACI 530.1. The level of grout for each grout pour shall be stopped 1-1/2 inches from the top of the masonry. c. Grout shall be consolidated in place between grout lifts by vibration or other approved methods to ensure complete filling of cells. d. For grout pours exceeding 5 feet, clean-outs are required at the base of each grout pour. D. Insulation 1. All exterior walls shall be insulated. The backup CMU shall be erected first, and the wire reinforcement installed as the Work progresses. Joints of the backup CMU wall shall be struck off smooth and level. The insulation shall be placed between wall ties, with long ends horizontal and ends and edges butted. Insulation shall be adhered to the wall with mastic adhesive that is compatible with the dampproofing and recommended by the insulation manufacturer. E. Cutting and Fitting 1. Wherever possible, full units shall be used in lieu of cut units. Where cut units are required to accommodate the design, cutting shall be done by masonry mechanics using power masonry saws, except that cutting of 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA UNIT MASONRY (FILED SUB-BID REQUIRED) WOODARD & CURRAN 04 20 00-13 units in unexposed Work may be accomplished with masonry hammers and chisels. Wet-cut units shall be dried to the same surface-dry appearance as uncut units before being placed in the Work. Cut edges shall be clean, true, and sharp. Openings to accommodate pipes, conduits, and other accessories shall be neatly formed so that framing or escutcheons required will completely conceal the cut edges. Insofar as practicable, all cutting and fitting shall be accomplished while masonry work is being erected. F. Penetrations 1. Conduits, pipes, and sleeves in masonry shall be no closer than 3 diameters on center. G. Flashing 1. Where flashing is to be laid on or against masonry, the surface of the masonry shall be smooth and free from projections. Flashing shall be continuous, and installed in accordance with the details shown on Drawings and manufacturer's recommendations. Flashing shall be installed with 1/2 beds of mortar above and below the flashing. Joints shall be lapped 4 inches, and the contact surface coated with fibrated asphalt mastic made for use with the flashing. Membrane flashing at masonry openings shall be extended a minimum of 8 inches beyond the opening. The flashing ends shall be turned up to form a pan. 2. Self-adhered wall flashing is to be applied only when surface temperatures are above 25 degrees F. Substrate must be smooth, clean, dry, and sound, without any sharp protrusions. Apply primer to substrate where recommended by flashing manufacturer. Seal all top termination edges with a bead of flashing mastic. H. Tooling 1. Mortar joints, which have become thumbprint hard, shall be tooled with a round jointer. The jointer shall be slightly larger than the width of the mortar joint so that complete contact is made along the edges of the units, compressing and sealing the surface of the joint. Joints in unexposed surfaces shall be cut flush. I. Caulking Recesses 1. Outside joints around the perimeter of exterior door, louver and window frames shall be cleaned out, ready for placement of caulking specified elsewhere. J. Pointing and Cleaning 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA UNIT MASONRY (FILED SUB-BID REQUIRED) WOODARD & CURRAN 04 20 00-14 1. At the completion of the Work, holes in joints of masonry surfaces to be exposed, except weep holes, shall be filled with mortar and suitably tooled. Masonry walls shall be dry brushed at the end of each day's Work, and after final pointing and shall be left clean and free from mortar spots and droppings. Defective joints shall be repointed. K. Final Cleanup 1. At the conclusion of masonry work, remove all scaffolding and equipment used in the Work, clean up all debris, refuse, and surplus material, and remove from the premises. Remove Sample panel from premises after acceptance of the Work by the Engineer. 3.03 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS A. Masonry work shall not be performed when climatic conditions or the limitations of the facilities furnished by the Contractor prevent setting and curing of mortar joints or obtaining proper bond. B. Hot weather: When the ambient temperature exceeds 100 degrees F, or exceeds 90 degrees F with wind velocity exceeding 8 mph, the hot weather procedures of ACI 530.1 shall be implemented. C. Cold weather: When the ambient temperature is below 40 degrees F, the cold weather procedures of ACI 530.1 shall be implemented. Admixtures shall meet ASTM C1384 or ASTM C494, Type C, and shall not be used without the Engineer's written approval. Type III cement may be substituted for Type I and Type II cement in masonry grout. D. Masonry not constructed in accordance with the protective measures listed above will be considered defective and rejected. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. 3.05 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. END OF SECTION 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA METAL DECK WOODARD & CURRAN 05 31 00-1 SECTION 05 31 00 METAL DECK 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes 1. Provide metal deck in accordance with this Section and applicable reference standards listed in Article 1.03. 2. The Work of this section comprises all materials, tools, equipment and labor required to furnish, fabricate and install the metal deck, including all accessories, including pour stops and closures, as shown on the Drawings, specified herein, and evidently required to complete the Work. 1.02 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Measurement and payment requirements: per Division 01 General Requirements. 1.03 REFERENCES A. Reference Standards 1. American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI) a. AISI SG02-1 North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members 2. American Welding Society (AWS) a. AWS D1.3 Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel 3. ASTM International (ASTM) a. ASTM A653 Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process b. ASTM B117 Standard Practice for Operating Salt Spray (Fog) Apparatus c. ASTM B633 Standard Specification for Electrodeposited Coatings of Zinc on Iron and Steel 4. Society of Automotive Engineers International (SAE) a. SAE J78 Steel Self-Drilling Tapping Screws 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA METAL DECK WOODARD & CURRAN 05 31 00-2 B. Shop Drawings 1. Detailed shop and erection Drawings shall be prepared by the material fabricator. 2. Shop Drawings shall indicate length of sheets, methods of attachment to other Work, and locations and sizes of all openings requiring deck reinforcement. 3. Indicate erection procedures and welding requirements. 4. Provide details of accessories including pour stops, all closures including column closures, and their attachments. C. Product Data 1. Indicate gauge of metal, section properties, and finish. 2. For mechanical fasteners, provide manufacturer data and allowable load values. D. Welding Certificates 1. For welding procedures and personnel 2. Procedure Qualification Record E. Closeout and Maintenance Material Submittals: per Division 01 General Requirements. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. B. The deck installation Contractor shall follow AWS D1.3 and the Welding Procedure Specification (WPS) documents, and shall be responsible for inspection and testing of WPS qualification tests and welder performance testing as described in AWS D1.3, including providing a Procedure Qualification Record (PQR). C. The deck installation Contractor shall comply with the quality procedures of ANSI/SDI QA/QC-2011. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA METAL DECK WOODARD & CURRAN 05 31 00-3 1.07 SITE CONDITIONS A. Exiting Conditions: per Division 01 General Requirements. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 PRODUCT HANDLING A. All material shall be unloaded as soon as it is delivered, and carefully handled and stacked to prevent deformation and damage. Metal deck shall be carefully stored on substantial pallets, dunnage, or other supports and spacers, free from the earth and properly drained, preventing splattering with dirt and other foreign matter. B. Store to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Protect deck from deterioration. Maintain markings. 2.02 METAL DECK A. The metal deck shall be fabricated in the shop in accordance with the Shop Drawings. It shall be of the length, shape, and sizes required to fit the framing assembly indicated. 2.03 METAL DECK A. 9/16-inch (0.6), 24 gauge, galvanized Type C form deck, manufactured by Canam Group, Vulcraft, Wheeling Corrugating Co., New Millennium Building Systems, or approved equal. B. The deck shall be fabricated from steel conforming to ASTM A653, with a minimum yield strength of 33,000 psi, and coating class G90. 2.04 MECHANICAL FASTENERS A. Mechanical fasteners shall be self-drilling, and of the size indicated, and shall meet ASTM C954 and SAE J78. They shall be zinc electroplated and meet ASTM B633 as tested in accordance with ASTM B117. 2.05 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 FABRICATION A. Deck shall be cut to required lengths so that end joints occur at supporting members. Joints shall be lapped. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA METAL DECK WOODARD & CURRAN 05 31 00-4 B. Deck shall be cut to required lengths so that end bearing fully on supporting members. C. Deck shall extend 3 or more spans wherever possible. 3.02 ERECTION A. Deck shall be installed in accordance with the Shop Drawings. Sheets shall be placed on supporting members and adjusted into final position before they are permanently fastened in place. B. If approved by the Engineer, any and all deformed side laps shall be straightened such that entire lap is properly positioned. C. Fastening: 1. Deck shall be fastened as noted on the Drawings. D. All welding shall be performed by qualified welders in strict accordance with AWS D1.3. All welds are to be inspected for effective hold after cooling. 1. Openings: The Contractor shall cut the deck for penetrations. The Contractor shall coordinate the Work of the trades involved to ensure proper provision for the support and attachment of deck around such openings. 3.03 TOUCH-UP PAINTING A. Upon completion of deck installation, all burn holes shall be repaired with galvanized sheet metal. All welds shall be touched up with cold galvanizing compound specified in Section 05 50 00, and in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. 3.04 CLEANING A. The surface of the deck shall be clean, free from dirt and debris, and in proper condition to receive roofing or concrete. The underside of all deck shall be left in a clean condition, free from dirt and foreign matter. 3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. 3.06 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. END OF SECTION 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA METAL FABRICATIONS WOODARD & CURRAN 05 50 00-1 SECTION 05 50 00 METAL FABRICATIONS (FILED SUB-BID REQUIRED) PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes 1. Provide the following metal fabrications in accordance with this Section and applicable reference standards listed in Article 1.03. a. Railings and components including mounting brackets b. Grating and grating supports not attached to structural steel c. Aluminum planks d. Frames for miscellaneous openings e. Hatches f. Retrofit safety gates for existing hatches g. Miscellaneous steel items h. Anchor bolts i. Expansion Bolts j. Adhesive Anchors k. Stairs l. Weirs and baffle m. Steel bollards n. Embedded metal items not receiving structural steel (excluding items embedded in precast concrete) o. Equipment supports not attached to structural steel p. Tread plates and tread plate supports not attached to structural steel 2. Epoxy adhesive for installing drilled and epoxy rebar is specified in Section 03 16 00. B. Related Requirements 1. Section 03 11 00 – Concrete Forming 2. Section 03 16 00 – Concrete Specialties 3. Section 03 30 00 – Cast-in-Place Concrete 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA METAL FABRICATIONS WOODARD & CURRAN 05 50 00-2 4. Section 04 20 00 – Unit Masonry 5. Section 09 90 00 – Painting and Coating 1.02 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Measurement and payment requirements: per Division 01 General Requirements. 1.03 REFERENCES A. Reference Standards 1. American Concrete Institute (ACI) a. ACI 355.2 Qualification of Post-Installed Mechanical Anchors in Concrete b. ACI 355.4 Qualification of Post-Installed Adhesive Anchors in Concrete Elements 2. American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC) a. AISC 303 Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges 3. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) a. A14.3 American National Standard for Ladders-Fixed-Safety Requirements 4. American Welding Society (AWS) a. AWS D1.1 Structural Welding Code - Steel b. AWS D1.2 Structural Welding Code - Aluminum c. AWS D1.6 Structural Welding Code - Stainless Steel 5. ASTM International (ASTM) a. ASTM A6 Standard Specification for General Requirements for Rolled Structural Steel Bars, Plates, Shapes, and Sheet Piling b. ASTM A36 Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel c. ASTM A53 Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot- Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless d. ASTM A123 Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products e. ASTM A153 Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA METAL FABRICATIONS WOODARD & CURRAN 05 50 00-3 f. ASTM A239 Standard Practice for Locating the Thinnest Spot in a Zinc (Galvanized) Coating on Iron or Steel Articles g. ASTM A325 Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength h. ASTM A500 Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes i. ASTM A563 Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts j. ASTM A572 Standard Specification for High-Strength Low-Alloy Columbium-Vanadium Structural Steel k. ASTM A653 Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process l. ASTM A780 Standard Practice for Repair of Damaged and Uncoated Areas of Hot-Dip Galvanized Coatings m. ASTM A992 Standard Specification for Structural Steel Shapes n. ASTM A36 Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel o. ASTM B209 Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate p. ASTM B211 Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Bar, Rod, and Wire q. ASTM B308 Standard Specification for Aluminum-Alloy 6061-T6 Standard Structural Profiles r. ASTM D6386 Standard Practice for Preparation of Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coated Iron and Steel Product and Hardware Surfaces for Painting s. ASTM F436 Hardened Steel Washers t. ASTM F959 Compressible-Washer-Type Direct Tension Indicators for Use with Structural Fasteners u. ASTM F1554 Standard Specification for Anchor Bolts, Steel, 36, 55, and 105-ksi Yield Strength v. ASTM F1852 Standard Specification for "Twist Off" Type Tension Control Structural Bolt/Nut/Washer Assemblies, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength 6. ICC Evaluation Services (ICC-ES) a. ICC-ES AC58 Acceptance Criteria for Adhesive Anchors in Masonry Elements. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA METAL FABRICATIONS WOODARD & CURRAN 05 50 00-4 b. ICC-ES AC308 Acceptance Criteria for Post-Installed Adhesive Anchors in Concrete Elements. 7. National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers (NAAMM) a. AMP 500 Metal Finishes Manual b. MBG 531 Metal Bar Grating Manual c. MBG 533 Welding Specification for Fabrication of Steel, Aluminum, & Stainless Steel Bar Grating 8. Research Council on Structural Connections (RCSC) a. Specification for Structural Joints Using High-Strength Bolts 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination, Sequencing, and Scheduling: per Division 01 General Requirements. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. B. Shop Drawings 1. Details of connections, copes, splices, holes, hardware, finish, and other pertinent information 2. Anchor bolt embedment Drawings 3. Indicate welds by standard AWS symbol 4. Indicate bolts and identify slip-critical connections as applicable 5. Identify areas of slip-critical connections to be masked from shop painting C. Product Data 1. Expansion Bolts a. ICC-ES Compliance Report b. Allowable and ultimate load tables per embedment depths c. Capacity reduction factors for bolt spacing and edge distances d. Installation Instructions including bolt torque 2. Adhesive Anchors a. ICC-ES Compliance Report 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA METAL FABRICATIONS WOODARD & CURRAN 05 50 00-5 b. Allowable and ultimate load tables per embedment depths c. Storage requirements d. Gel and cure times as a function of temperature e. Installation temperature requirements f. Drilling method (diamond drill bit shall be prohibited) g. Drill bit diameter and depth of hole for each size anchor h. Hole cleaning procedure and required condition of hole i. Dual-nozzle instructions to ensure proper mixing j. Hole Filling procedure k. Time period anchor cannot be contacted or disturbed D. Manufacturer Instructions E. Source and Field Quality Control Submittals F. Certificates 1. Mill test reports for structural shapes, bolts, nuts, and washers 2. Welding certifications for welding procedures and personnel G. Closeout and Maintenance Material Submittals: per Division 01 General Requirements. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. B. Assemble and ship ASTM F1852 and galvanized ASTM A325 bolt assemblies in the same container. Do not re-lubricate ASTM F1852 tension-control bolt assemblies. C. Carefully unload material and equipment and stack to prevent deformation and damage. Store items on substantial pallets, dunnage, or other supports and spacers, free from the earth and properly drained, preventing splattering with dirt and other foreign matter. D. Store material and equipment to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Protect from deterioration and maintain markings. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA METAL FABRICATIONS WOODARD & CURRAN 05 50 00-6 E. Provide protective storage for fastener components. Protect fastener components removed from protective storage from dirt and moisture in closed containers at the location of installation. Do not clean or modify fastener components from as- delivered condition. Do not use fastener components accumulating rust or dirt, and remove from the Site. 1.08 SITE CONDITIONS A. Existing Conditions: per Division 01 General Requirements. 1.09 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty/Extended Correction Period 1. Hatch covers: 5-year manufacturer’s warranty covering proper operation and defects in material or workmanship. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. Make field measurements prior to fabrication to ensure proper fit. Report discrepancies in existing conditions that require detail changes to Engineer prior to fabrication. B. Assemble built-up Work in sections in the shop as much as practicable and match mark components for field assembly. C. Bolt holes (including those for attaching wood blocking and other components): by fabricator and not made or modified by burning. D. Gauges 1. For iron sheets and steel: U.S. Standard 2. For non-ferrous products: Brown & Sharpe 3. For wire: United States Steel Wire E. Weld carbon steel per ANSI/AWS D1.1, with electrodes with a tensile strength of 70 ksi. F. Fusion weld aluminum by the inert gas-shielded arc method per ANSI/AWS D1.2. Use alloy rods similar to alloy being welded where appearance match is required. Alloy 4043 rods may be used where appearance is not a factor and anodizing is not required. G. Weld stainless steel per AWS D1.6 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA METAL FABRICATIONS WOODARD & CURRAN 05 50 00-7 H. Steel 1. Comply with AISC 303 2. Steel mill material tolerances: per ASTM A6 3. Steel W-shapes: ASTM A992 (50 ksi yield strength) 4. Steel channels and angles: ASTM A992 (50 ksi yield strength) ASTM A572 grade 50, or ASTM A36 5. Other steel shapes, plates and bars: ASTM A36 6. Steel pipe: ASTM A53, Grade B 7. Hollow structural shapes: ASTM A500, Grade B. I. Bolts: ASTM A325 Type I, heavy-hex J. Nuts: ASTM A563, heavy-hex K. Washers: ASTM F436 hardened steel L. Tension-control bolt assemblies: ASTM F1852 Type I, heavy-hex M. Direct tension indicators: ASTM F959, Type 325, compressible washer type N. Threaded rods: ASTM A36 O. Aluminum items: Fabricated from bars, plates, pipes, rolled and extruded shapes conforming to the following alloy designation unless otherwise specified. 1. Standard structural shapes: Rolled 6061-T6 per ASTM B308 2. Rolled rod and bar: 6061-T6 per ASTM B211 3. Sheets, Plates, Checkered Plates: 6061-T6 per ASTM B209 4. Bolts: AISI 316 stainless steel 5. Nuts: AISI 316 stainless steel 6. Washers: AISI 316 stainless steel P. Stainless steel items: Type 316 (Type 316L if welded) 2.02 ALUMINUM RAILING A. Aluminum railing: All-welded construction formed of 1-1/2 inch round aluminum pipe. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA METAL FABRICATIONS WOODARD & CURRAN 05 50 00-8 B. Furnish railing in the largest practical sections with the locations and details of field connections indicated on Shop Drawings. Close exposed ends of railing members. After fabrication, clean, lightly circumferentially brush, caustic etch and clear anodize (0.4 mil minimum thickness) railings in accordance with NAAMM AMP 500, M3lC22A31. C. Welds: Continuous at intersections and ground smooth on all exposed areas. Use radius corners only, do not use mitered corners. Where intersections occur, shape and cut pieces to fit with no distortion of the circular shape. D. Posts 1. Schedule 80, alloy 6061-T6, single un-spliced pipe length 2. Spacing: Maximum 4-feet on centers measured along the rail E. Rails 1. Schedule 40, alloy 6063-T6 2. Top rails a. Continuous wherever possible with single un-spliced length attached to minimum of 3 posts. b. At platforms and other level runs: 42 inches from the top of rail to floor, tank wall or other horizontal surface unless otherwise specified. c. On stair flights: 42 vertical inches from the top of rail to a line connecting the toes of the treads. 3. Lower rails a. Single, un-spliced length between posts b. At level runs and at stairs: Approximately half the height of the top rail F. Toeboard: Extruded aluminum toeboard 4-inches high, mechanically clamped to posts except where specifically shown to be omitted on Drawings. Do not weld, drill or screw directly to the posts. G. Provide expansion joints at each railing and toe plate, allowing 1/2 inch of joint movement at each location and space at intervals of maximum 24 feet. Provide internal aluminum slip sleeve fastened securely to one side and extend a minimum of 2 inches beyond each side of the joint. Locate within 6 inches of posts. H. On stairs: Provide additional (third) rail forming a handrail, bracketed off the vertical posts at height of 34 inches from the upper surface to a line connecting 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA METAL FABRICATIONS WOODARD & CURRAN 05 50 00-9 the toes of the treads. Provide 3-inch minimum clearance from posts and obstructions. I. Completed railing structure and anchorage: Capable of withstanding the loads prescribed by the building code at Project location. J. Mount railing posts into flanged cast or extruded aluminum sleeve brackets, and secure with stainless steel set screws. Support wall mounted railing with cast brackets and fasten with stainless steel expansion or toggle bolts. K. Furnish removable railings where indicated on the Drawings, and mounted so that when the railing is removed, it is separated from the mounting bracket. 2.03 ALUMINUM GRATINGS AND FRAMES A. Manufacturers: IKG Industries, Klemp Corporation, Ohio Gratings, Inc., or equal. 1. Grating: I-bar swage locked with 1/4 inch flanged bars at 1-3/16 inches on center and cross bars at 4 inches on center per NAAMM AMP 500, NAAMM MBG 531, and NAAMM MBG 533. 2. Supporting members: Aluminum of the size and shape per Drawings. 3. Grating: Alloy 6063-T6 bearing bars and alloy 6063-T5 cross bars with mill finish. 4. Straps, bolts, ties, and accessories: Aluminum 5. Band grating with 1/4 inch thick band of width equal to the full depth of grating, welded on at the ends of all sections and at openings. 6. Where not shown, provide suitable supporting members as required when span of grating changes direction. B. Fasteners: manufacturer's standard clips using micarta between the aluminum and dissimilar materials. C. Coat portions of aluminum to be embedded in, or in contact with, concrete with heavy bodied bituminous paint. D. Limit grating sections to a size that can be removed by one man. 2.01 ALUMINUM PLANKS A. Manufacturers: Ohio Gratings, Inc., or equal. B. Planks: heavy duty, unpunched (solid top surface), with interlocking side joints available in 20-ft or 26-ft lengths. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA METAL FABRICATIONS WOODARD & CURRAN 05 50 00-10 C. Depth: 1-inch and 2-inch planks are required per Contract Documents. D. Minimum Capacity: 1. 1-inch Plank: 200 psf for spans up to 4’-0” 2. 2-inch Plank: Support a 2,500 lb concentrated load for spans up to 3’-0” E. Width: 6-inch sections factory banded together to form standard panel widths. F. Banding: factory end banded. G. Factory Cutout: Provide factory cutout and banding where indicated on plans. H. End Supports: Extruded aluminum frames for embedment into concrete. 2.02 STEEL FRAMES FOR MISCELLANEOUS OPENINGS A. Fabricate from structural shapes and plates in sizes per Drawings. B. Accurately square, miter, butt, or cope frames. Weld flush and grind smooth. C. Stops: Plug-welded and ground smooth. D. Seal weld joints exposed to weather. 2.03 EXPANSION BOLTS (INTO CONCRETE) A. General: Torque controlled expansion anchor suitable for seismic loads and cracked concrete applications. B. Material: 1. AISI 316 stainless steel anchor body, nut, washer, and expansion sleeve, unless noted otherwise C. Evaluation Requirements: ICC-ES evaluation report stating product is compliant with 2015 International Building Code and approved for use to resist static, wind and earthquake (Seismic Design Categories A through F) tension and shear loads in cracked and uncracked normal-weight concrete having a compressive strength of 2,500 psi to 8,500 psi. Evaluation reports with a listed renewal date month/year which is prior to the month/year the product is submitted for engineer’s review will be rejected. D. Approved expansions bolts: 1. Simpson Strong-Tie: Strong-Bolt 2 a. Compliance Report (ESR-3037) 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA METAL FABRICATIONS WOODARD & CURRAN 05 50 00-11 2. Hilti: Kwik Bolt TZ a. Compliance Report (ESR-1917) 3. Powers: Power-Stud + SD6 a. Compliance Report (ESR-2502) 4. Or Engineer Approved Equal 2.04 ADHESIVE ANCHORS (INTO CONCRETE) A. General: Epoxy adhesive for installing post-installed bolts into concrete denoted as “Adhesive Anchors” on drawings. B. Evaluation Requirements: ICC-ES evaluation report stating product is compliant with 2015 International Building Code and approved for use to resist static, wind and earthquake (Seismic Design Categories A through F) tension and shear loads in cracked and uncracked normal-weight concrete having a compressive strength of 2,500 psi to 8,500 psi. Evaluation reports with a listed renewal date month/year which is prior to the month/year the product is submitted for engineer’s review will be rejected. C. Epoxy adhesive for anchoring reinforcement to concrete shall be a 2 component solid epoxy based system supplied in manufacturer's standard side-by-side cartridge and dispensed through manufacturer's standard static-mixing nozzle. Epoxy adhesive shall be: 1. Simpson Strong Tie: SET-XP or ET-HP a. SET-XP Compliance Report (ESR-2508) b. ET-HP Compliance Report (ESR-3372) 2. Hilti: HIT-RE 500-SD a. Compliance Report (ESR-2322) 3. Powers: PE1000+ a. Compliance Report (ESR-2583) 4. Or Engineer Approved Equal D. Epoxy adhesive shall pass the creep test requirements of ICC-ES AC58. E. Hardware: From same manufacturer as epoxy adhesive for a complete anchoring system. 1. Threaded Steel Rods: Continuously threads (all-thread). 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA METAL FABRICATIONS WOODARD & CURRAN 05 50 00-12 2. Material: AISI 316 stainless steel threaded steel rods, nut and washers, unless noted otherwise. 2.05 ADHESIVE ANCHORS (INTO MASONRY) A. General: Adhesive anchor system for installing post-installed threaded steel rods to grouted and ungrouted CMU, solid and hollow brick walls, and unreinforced multiple wythe brick walls denoted as “Adhesive Anchors” on drawings. 1. All products shall be furnished by the same manufacturer including steel threaded rods, mesh screen tubes, adhesive, and installation equipment. B. Evaluation Requirements: ICC-ES evaluation report stating product is compliant with 2015 International Building Code and approved to anchor building components to hollow (ungrouted) and fully grouted concrete masonry walls to resist static, wind , and earthquake loads. C. Adhesive for anchoring reinforcement to masonry shall be furnished in a side-by- side cartridge and dispensed through manufacturer's standard static-mixing nozzle. Adhesive system shall be: 1. Simpson Strong Tie: SET-XP or ET-HP a. SET Compliance Report (ESR-1772) b. ET-HP Compliance Report (ESR-3638) 2. Hilti: HIT-HY 70 a. Compliance Report (ESR-3342) 3. Powers: AC100+ Gold a. Compliance Report (ESR-3200) 4. Or Engineer Approved Equal D. Hardware: From same manufacturer as epoxy adhesive for a complete anchoring system. 1. Threaded Steel Rods: Continuously threads (all-thread). 2. Material: AISI 316 stainless steel threaded steel rods, nut and washers, unless noted otherwise. 3. Screen Tubes/ threaded insets: Manufacturer’s standard screen tubes or threaded inserts. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA METAL FABRICATIONS WOODARD & CURRAN 05 50 00-13 2.06 ALUMINUM HATCH COVERS A. Manufacturers: Bilco Company, Halliday Products, Inc., Babcock-Davis, or equal. B. Styles, types and sizes: Per Drawings, and of single manufacturer. Sizes indicated on drawings is the required clear opening. Contractor shall box-out openings per manufacturer instructions to account for hatch frame thickness. 1. Type J and JD: Single leaf and double leaf, respectively, watertight, self-draining type a. Door leaf: 1/4-inch thick aluminum diamond pattern plate reinforced with aluminum stiffeners, capable of withstanding live load of 300 pounds per square foot. Equip each door leaf with minimum 2 hinges with stainless steel pins, compression spring operators enclosed in telescopic tubes to afford easy operation. b. Provide automatic hold-open arm with vinyl grip handle to release cover for closing. c. Equip with snap lock and removable handle. d. Channel frame: 1/4-inch thick aluminum with anchor flange around the perimeter. Except where connected to a drainage system per Drawings, provide extension from frame drainage coupling to drain to area below. e. Mechanically attach a continuous EPDM debris gasket to frame. Provide 1-1/2 inch drainage coupling in channel frame. f. Hardware: Stainless steel with factory mill finish . g. Bituminous coating applied to areas to be embedded in concrete. h. Where not connected to a drainage system per Drawings with extensions to the drainage coupling to allow drainage to the area below. 2. Type K and KD: Single leaf and double leaf, respectively. a. Door leaf: 1/4-inch thick aluminum diamond pattern plate reinforced with aluminum stiffeners, capable of withstanding live load of 150 pounds per square foot. Equip door leaf with minimum 2 hinges bolted to underside and pivoted on torsion bars to counterbalance door for easy operation. b. Provide automatic hold-open arm at 90-degree open position, with vinyl grip handle to release cover for closing. c. Equip with snap lock and removable handle. d. Channel frame: 1/4-inch thick extruded aluminum with built-in neoprene cushion and strap anchors. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA METAL FABRICATIONS WOODARD & CURRAN 05 50 00-14 e. Hardware: Stainless steel with factory mill finish. f. Bituminous coating applied to areas to be embedded in concrete. 3. Type T: Same as Type K except provide recessed door leaf to receive floor covering. C. Fall protection 1. Equip hatch covers with fall protection grating system of fiberglass or aluminum construction and 316 stainless steel hardware, with live load capacity of 300 psf. 2. Safety color: Orange or yellow 3. Provide with spring-loaded lifting handle and aluminum or stainless steel hold open arm and release handle, and automatic lock at 90-degree open position. 4. Provide capability for locking with padlock in the closed position. D. Retrofit Safety Gates 1. Hinged and lockable aluminum grating panel that can be installed beneath existing access covers regardless of the original hatch cover manufacturer equal to RetroGrate manufactured by Halliday Products. 2. Construction: a. Aluminum I-bar grating b. Stainless Steel Hardware c. Spring loaded lift handle d. 300 psf load rating e. Hinged with automatic hold open arm f. Safety orange powder-coat finish g. 10-year warranty 3. Size: Contractor to field measure existing hatches and coordinate with manufacturer as required to verify size and installation requirements. 4. Quantity and Locations: As indicated on Structural Drawings S-304 and S-302 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA METAL FABRICATIONS WOODARD & CURRAN 05 50 00-15 2.07 MISCELLANEOUS STEEL ITEMS A. Fabricate and furnish miscellaneous steel items, galvanized angles, relieving angles, plates, channels, and all required fastenings per Drawing details. Miscellaneous steel items shall be galvanized as specified. 2.08 ANCHOR RODS A. ASTM F1554 Grade 36 steel, galvanized except where stainless steel specified, headed and threaded. B. Type 316 stainless steel: to attach aluminum and in all submerged locations – and including washers and nuts. C. Sizes: per Drawings 2.09 ALUMINUM STAIRS A. Per Drawing details and furnished with stainless steel bolts, nuts, and washers B. Grating stairway treads: I-bar type with extruded aluminum corrugated nosing 1. Furnish treads with 3-inch by 3/16- inch carrier plates welded to the ends of tread, punched for bolting to stringers. 2. Bar size: as recommended by the manufacturer for the length of the tread, and approved C. Solid stairway treads and risers: 1/4-inch non-slip aluminum safety tread or diamond plate, fabricated for fastening to angle supports welded to stringers. D. Railings: per Article 2.02 2.10 WEIRS AND BAFFLES A. Per Drawings details and furnished with required stainless steel bolts, nuts, washers 2.11 LIFTING EYE BOLTS A. Material: Stainless steel and per Drawing details 2.12 MANHOLE-TYPE RUNGS A. Steps: Alloy 6061-T6. Coat portions to be embedded in concrete with a coat of zinc chromate paint. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA METAL FABRICATIONS WOODARD & CURRAN 05 50 00-16 B. Expected level of quality for manhole-type rungs Part No. F-14-2-D as manufactured by Washington Aluminum, or similar as made by Neenah Foundry, Flockhart Foundry or equal. 2.13 STEEL BOLLARDS A. Pipe: ASTM A53, 6 inches nominal diameter, schedule 40, galvanized B. Length: To allow bollards to extend 4 feet above and below grade, except as otherwise shown on the Drawings 2.14 PROTECTIVE GUARDS A. Fabricate protective guards for louvers, exhaust fans, gas vents and windows per Drawings with the following 1. Guards: 6063-T6 aluminum rectangular-bar swage-locked grating with 1/8 inch by 1-1/2 inch bearing bars spaced 1-3/16 inches on center, with cross bars at 4 inches on center 2. Ends: Banded with 1/8 inch by 1-1/2 inch welded bars. Weld 1/4 inch thick anchor blocks to grating, 3 per jamb B. Frames for guards: 6063-T6 aluminum of the size and shape per Drawings, with corners mitered and welded. C. Furnish stainless steel vandal-resistant bolts to fasten grating to frame. D. After fabrication, clean caustic etch and clear anodize guards per NAAMM AMP 500 M31C22A31 with 0.4 mil minimum anodizing thickness. E. Furnish 3/8 inch diameter stainless steel vandal-resistant sleeve anchors. F. Anchors and fasteners: Type 304 stainless steel 2.15 SHOP COATING A. Prepare ferrous items and paint per Section 09 90 00, except where otherwise specified. B. Do not prime paint galvanized steel not specified to be painted, stainless steel surfaces embedded in concrete or masonry (except for partially embedded components, extend priming 2 inches into the embedment), surfaces to be field welded, and faying surfaces at bolted connections designated as slip-critical. C. Coat items specified as galvanized by the hot-dip process per ASTM A123, ASTM A153, or ASTM A653, as applicable, in molten zinc, to produce a continuous coating of uniform thickness of weight required by the referenced standards. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA METAL FABRICATIONS WOODARD & CURRAN 05 50 00-17 1. Coating: Commercial quality, free from injurious defects, flux and uncoated spots, and per ASTM A239: capable of enduring not less than 4 immersions in copper sulfate without penetration of the coating. 2. Identify galvanized items with a stamp showing the name of the galvanizer, the weight of the coating, and applicable ASTM compliance. D. Galvanized steel specified to be painted 1. Do not quench. 2. Phosphatize and prepare to be painted per ASTM D6386 3. Prime with paint compatible with the finish paints specified in Section 09 90 00. 2.16 SOURCE OF QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 DISSIMILAR MATERIAL A. Keep aluminum surfaces from direct contact with metals other than stainless steel by painting the dissimilar metal with a coating of zinc chromate paint, or provide non-absorptive tape between dissimilar metals. B. Paint aluminum with a coat of bituminous paint where aluminum is embedded in, or comes in contact with, concrete, masonry or by-products of these materials. 3.02 STEEL CONNECTIONS A. Comply with RCSC Specifications for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts. B. Design bolted connections as N-type bearing connections, installed snug-tight, except where shown as slip critical on Drawings. C. Minimum size: 3/4 inch D. Minimum number of bolts per connection: 2 E. Slip critical joints are required per Drawings and at connections that include oversized holes or slotted holes, including braces, except where the direction of the load is normal to the slot. F. Where bolts are specified to be installed loose or finger tight, snug up the connection to ensure that plies are in contact. Then back off the between 1/2 and 1 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA METAL FABRICATIONS WOODARD & CURRAN 05 50 00-18 turn to permit intended movement of the connection. Provide double nuts on bolts to prevent loosening. G. Weld steel per AWS D1.1. Grind exposed welds smooth. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Verify elevations of concrete and masonry bearing surfaces and locations of anchor rods, bearing plates, and other embedments. Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of bond reducing materials and roughen surfaces prior to setting plates. B. Set bearing plates using leveling nuts or galvanized leveling plates, and grout with non-shrink grout as specified in Section 03 16 00. Promptly grout leveling plates after set and checked for line, levelness and elevation. C. Grout bearing plates after framing is plumb when leveling nuts are used. D. Concrete embedments: Installed under Section 03 11 00 E. Bar rack components to be fastened to concrete: Install from field measurements of cast concrete. F. Use stainless steel hardware when anchoring aluminum and in submerged locations. G. Masonry embedments: Installed under Section 04 20 00 H. Steel bollards: Encased in concrete and filled inside of pipe per Section 03 30 00 3.04 BOLTS A. Install bolts snug tight except where indicated as slip critical. Install bolt at least flush with the outer face of the nut. Cut off bolts projecting more than 5/8 inch beyond the nut in exposed Work as close to nut as possible and as directed. B. Provide required cutting, fitting, drilling, and tapping. Do not use thermal cutting during installation and erection. Do not make or modify bolt holes by burning. 3.05 ADHESIVE BOLTS A. Installation: Per manufacturer’s installation instructions and as listed in the product ICC-ES Evaluation Report B. Drilled and epoxied bolts shall be installed in concrete having a minimum age of 21 days at time of installation. C. All cartridges shall have the expiration date clearly visible. Material past its expiration date shall not be used, and shall be immediately removed from the Site. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA METAL FABRICATIONS WOODARD & CURRAN 05 50 00-19 D. Diamond drill bits are not permitted. Hammer drills shall be used. E. Drill Holes: 1. Diameter: Per manufacturer’s instructions 2. Embedment: Manufacturer’s standard embedment for anchor size, unless noted otherwise on drawings. Depth stop shall be used to ensure correct drilling depth. 3. Installation Torque: Per manufacturer’s instructions. F. The initial material extruded from each cartridge shall be discarded in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions to ensure that all material is properly mixed. G. Drilled holes shall be blown out with air, thoroughly wire brushed with a repeated back and forth movement, blown out, thoroughly wire brushed, and blown out again. Adhesive shall be injected, starting from the bottom of the hole and slowly withdrawn as filling progresses to prevent air pockets. H. Installed bolt shall remain completely undisturbed between the manufacturer's specified gel time and the full cure time. Zero load shall be applied during this time. 3.06 EXPANSION BOLTS A. Installation: Per manufacturer’s installation instructions and as listed in the product ICC-ES Evaluation Report. B. Drill Holes: 1. Diameter: Per manufacturer’s instructions 2. Embedment: Manufacturer’s standard embedment for anchor size, unless noted otherwise on drawings. Depth stop shall be used to ensure correct drilling depth C. Installation Torque: Per manufacturer’s instructions. 3.07 ALUMINUM GRATINGS, SUPPORTS, AND NECESSARY ACCESSORIES A. Components embedded in concrete: installed under Section 03 11 00 3.08 STAIR NOSINGS FOR INTERIOR CONCRETE STAIRS A. Install per Section 03 11 00, and anchor in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA METAL FABRICATIONS WOODARD & CURRAN 05 50 00-20 3.09 PROTECTIVE GUARDS A. Secure frame to masonry with stainless steel, vandal-resistant, sleeve anchors. 3.10 FIELD TOUCH UP A. Where galvanized steel is field cut and locations where galvanized coating is removed: Touch up steel surface with zinc rich paint meeting ASTM A780 and containing a minimum of 65 percent zinc at locations. 3.11 CLEANING A. Immediately after installation, round or chamfer sharp edges and grind burrs, jagged edges and surface defects smooth. Remove weld splatter. 3.12 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. 3.13 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. END OF SECTION 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA ROUGH CARPENTRY WOODARD & CURRAN 06 10 00-1 SECTION 06 10 00 ROUGH CARPENTRY PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes 1. Provide materials, tools, equipment and labor required to furnish, fabricate and complete the rough carpentry work in accordance with this Section and applicable reference standards listed in Article 1.03. 2. Items to be embedded in concrete and masonry shall be furnished under this section, but installed under Division 03, Concrete, or Division 04, Masonry. 1.02 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Measurement and payment requirements: per Division 01 General Requirements. 1.03 REFERENCES A. Reference Standards 1. ASME INTERNATIONAL (ASME) a. ASME B18.2.1 - Square and Hex Bolts and Screws (Inch Series) b. ASME B18.6.1 - Wood Screws (Inch Series) 2. ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM) a. ASTM A153 - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware b. ASTM A563 - Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts c. ASTM D2559 - Standard Specification for Adhesives for Bonded Structural Wood Products for Use Under Exterior Exposure Conditions d. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials e. ASTM F1554 - Standard Specification for Anchor Bolts, Steel, 36, 55, and 105-ksi Yield Strength f. ASTM F1667 - Driven Fasteners: Nails, Spikes, and Staples 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA ROUGH CARPENTRY WOODARD & CURRAN 06 10 00-2 3. AMERICAN WOOD PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (AWPA) a. AWPA U1 - Use Category System: User Specification for Treated Wood 4. ICC-EVALUATION SERVICES a. ESR-1539 - Power-Driven Staples and Nails 5. NATIONAL INSTITUTE OF STANDARDS AND TECHNOLOGY (NIST) a. NIST PS 1 - DOC Voluntary Product Standard PS 1-07, Structural Plywood b. NIST PS 20 - American Softwood Lumber Standard 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination, Sequencing, and Scheduling: per Division 01 General Requirements. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in Accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. B. Product Data 1. Engineered Wood Products: including manufacturer's load tables 2. Building Paper 3. Metal Framing Anchors 4. Wood Treatment Data: including chemical treatment manufacturer's instructions for storage, handling, installation and finishing 5. Water-Borne-Treated Products: include statement that moisture content of treated materials was reduced to levels indicated prior to shipment to project site 6. Warranty of chemical treatment manufacturer for each type of treatment C. Material Certificates 1. For dimension Lumber, indicating species and grade for each use, and compliance with minimum specified allowable unit stresses per values approved by the American Lumber Standards Committee. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA ROUGH CARPENTRY WOODARD & CURRAN 06 10 00-3 2. For each type of preservative-treated wood product include certification by treating plant stating type of preservative solution and pressure process used, net amount of preservative retained, and compliance with applicable standards. 3. For fire-retardant-treated wood products include certification by treating plant that treated material complies with specified standard. 4. Certificates of inspection stating species and grades of plywood used for roof and wall sheathing. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. B. Keep materials under cover and dry. Protect against exposure to weather and contact with damp or wet surfaces. Stack lumber and plywood; provide for air circulation within and around stacks and under temporary coverings including polyethylene and similar materials. C. For lumber and plywood pressure-treated with waterborne chemicals, place spacers between each bundle to provide air circulation. 1.08 SITE CONDITIONS A. Existing Conditions: per Division 01 General Requirements. B. Coastal Construction: Building is constructed within 1,000 feet from coastline. Construction shall account for salt-laden air and coastal exposure. Contractor shall provide the following: 1. Nails and fasteners: AISI 316 stainless steel, unless noted otherwise 2. Metal Plate Connectors: AISI 316L stainless steel. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 LUMBER GENERAL A. Furnish lumber manufactured to comply with NIST PS 20 and with applicable grading rules of inspection agencies certified by ALSC Board of Review. B. Inspection Agencies: 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA ROUGH CARPENTRY WOODARD & CURRAN 06 10 00-4 1. RIS - Redwood Inspection Service 2. SPIB - Southern Pine Inspection Bureau 3. WCLIB - West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau 4. WWPA - Western Wood Products Association 5. NELMA - Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers Association 6. NSLB - Northern Softwood Lumber Bureau 7. NLGA - National Lumber Grades Authority C. Each piece of lumber shall factory-marked with grade stamp of inspection agency indicating grade, species, and moisture content at time of surfacing and milling. D. Nominal sizes are indicated, except as shown by detail dimensions. Provide actual sizes as required by NIST PS 20 for moisture content specified for each use. 1. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Provide lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content at time of dressing and shipment for sizes 2 inches or less in nominal thickness, unless otherwise indicated. 2.02 DIMENSION LUMBER A. For structural framing (2 to 4 inches nominal thickness) provide the following (size factors NOT included): 1. Allowable bending stress of 575 psi minimum (661 psi under repetitive member use); allowable compressive stress parallel to the grain of 825 psi minimum; and a modulus of elasticity of 1,100,000 psi minimum. These values are for No. 2 Eastern Softwoods graded under NELMA or NSLB. Other species and grades meeting these properties are acceptable. B. Top sill plate shall meet the specifications for dimension lumber. Bottom sill plate shall meet the specifications for miscellaneous lumber. 2.03 BOARDS A. Exposed Boards: 15 percent maximum moisture content: Eastern White Pine, Idaho White, Lodgepole, Ponderosa or Sugar Pine; D Select (Quality), grade per NELMA, NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA. Exposed boards shall be pre-primed. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA ROUGH CARPENTRY WOODARD & CURRAN 06 10 00-5 B. Concealed Boards: 15 percent maximum moisture content: Hem-Fir (North), Spruce-Pine-Fir (South), Spruce-Pine-Fir; Construction or 2 Common, grade per NELMA, NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA. 2.04 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER A. Provide miscellaneous lumber for support and attachment of other construction, including: bottom sill plate, nailers, blocking, furring, and similar members. Provide 19 percent maximum moisture content at time of dressing & shipment; Hem-Fir, Hem-Fir (North), Spruce-Pine-Fir; Construction or No. 2 grade per NELMA, NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA. B. Fabricate miscellaneous lumber from dimension lumber of sizes indicated and into shapes shown. 2.05 ENGINEERED WOOD PRODUCTS A. General 1. Provide engineered wood products for which current model code evaluation/research reports provide evidence of compliance for the indicated application and the building code of Project state. B. Plywood Sheathing 1. All sheathing shall conform to NIST PS 1, and shall be factory marked. 2. Roof sheathing: 5/8 inch APA Rated Sheathing, 32/16, C-D Grade; Exposure 1 Durability; ply clips as required. 3. Wall sheathing: 1/2 inch APA Rated Sheathing, C-D Grade, Exposure 1 Durability. 2.06 BACKING PANELS A. Plywood panels for mounting electrical or telephone equipment: provide fire- retardant-treated plywood panels with grade designation, NIST PS 1 A-C, Exterior, not less than 3/4-inch. 2.07 FASTENERS A. Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this article for material and manufacture. Provide AISI 316 stainless steel fasteners. B. Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F1667. Nails shall be common nails, except as otherwise noted. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA ROUGH CARPENTRY WOODARD & CURRAN 06 10 00-6 C. Power Driven Fasteners: ESR-1539. D. Wood Screws: ASME B18.6.1. E. Lag Bolts: ASME B18.2.1. F. Anchor Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM F1554, Grade 36; with ASTM A563 hex nuts and where indicated, flat washers. Provide hot-dip galvanized finish per Section 05 50 00. 2.08 METAL FRAMING ANCHORS A. Provide metal framing anchors of type, size, metal, and finish indicated that comply with requirements specified including the following: 1. Provide products for which current model code evaluation/research reports provide evidence of compliance for the indicated application and the building code of Project state. 2. Provide products for which manufacturer publishes allowable design loads that are determined from empirical data or by rational engineering analysis and that are demonstrated by comprehensive testing performed by a qualified independent testing laboratory. 3. Finish: AISI 316L stainless steel. 2.09 PRESERVATIVE TREATED WOOD A. Where lumber or plywood is indicated as pressure-treated, preservative-treated, or is specified herein to be treated, comply with applicable requirements of AWPA U1 Commodity Specifications A-"Sawn Products" for lumber, and F-"Wood Composites" for plywood. B. Pressure-treat items with water-borne preservative chemicals, legal for use in the project state, with a minimum chemical preservative retention of 0.25 pcf. After treatment, kiln-dry lumber and plywood to a maximum moisture content, of 19 percent for lumber and 15 percent for plywood. Discard materials that are warped or that do not comply with requirements for untreated materials. C. Treat indicated items and: bottom wood sill plate, sleepers, blocking, furring, stripping, and similar members in contact with masonry or concrete. 2.10 FIRE-RETARDANT TREATED WOOD A. Pressure treated fire-retardant wood shall have a flame spread rating of 25 or less when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. Fire retardant shall be listed in AWPA U1 Commodity Specifications H-"Fire Retardant Treated Products," and shall be Pyro-Guard, as manufactured by Hoover Treated Wood Products, Inc., or 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA ROUGH CARPENTRY WOODARD & CURRAN 06 10 00-7 Fire-Pro, as manufactured by Osmose, Inc. Lumber shall be kiln dried after treatment to a moisture content of 19%. All treated wood shall be identified with UL and Timber Products Inspection Stamps and shall include identification of treating manufacturer, name of fire-retardant treatment, wood species, flame spread and smoke developed index, and drying method used after treatment. 2.11 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION - GENERAL A. Discard pieces with defects that impair quality of rough carpentry construction and that are too small to use in fabricating rough carpentry with minimum joints or optimum joint arrangement. B. Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb and true to line and cut and fitted. C. Fit rough carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as required for accurate fit. Correlate location of furring, nailers, blocking, grounds, and similar supports to allow attachment of other construction. D. Securely attach rough carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated. E. Countersink nail heads on exposed carpentry work and fill holes. F. Use common wire nails, unless otherwise indicated. Use finishing nails for finish work. Select fasteners of size that will not penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting of wood; predrill as required. 3.02 TOP PLATES A. The top plates at top of CMU walls shall be pressure-treated and attached per drawings. 3.03 WOOD NAILERS AND BLOCKING A. Install wood nailers and blocking where shown and where required for attachment of other work. Form to shapes as shown and as required for true line and level of work to be attached. Coordinate location with other work involved. B. Attach to substrates as required to support applied loading. Countersink bolts and nuts flush with surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA ROUGH CARPENTRY WOODARD & CURRAN 06 10 00-8 3.04 FURRING A. Install plumb and level with closure strips at edges and openings. Shim with wood as required for tolerance of finished work. B. Firestop furred spaces on walls at each floor level and at ceiling line of top story, with wood blocking or noncombustible materials, accurately fitted to close furred spaces. 3.05 FRAMING – GENERAL A. Anchor and nail as shown, and to comply with the following: 1. ESR-1539 2. Published requirements of manufacturer of metal framing anchors B. Do not splice structural members between supports. 3.06 ROOF SHEATHING A. Configuration of panel sheets shall be as shown on the Drawings. Panel sheets shall span perpendicular to supporting members. B. Blocking: Continuous at ridge; as shown on the Drawings at eaves; additional continuous blocking where shown on the Drawings. C. Nailing: As shown on Drawings. D. Panels shall be placed with 1/16 inch clearance at end joints and 1/8 inch clearance at side joints. 3.07 WALL SHEATHING A. Panel sheets shall span perpendicular to supporting furring strips B. Blocking: At all panel edges. C. 8d nailing: 6 inches on center at panel edges, 12 inches on center at intermediate supports. D. Panels shall be placed with 1/16 inch clearance at end joints and 1/8 inch clearance at side joints. 3.08 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA ROUGH CARPENTRY WOODARD & CURRAN 06 10 00-9 3.09 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. END OF SECTION This page intentionally left blank 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA SHOP FABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES WOODARD & CURRAN 06 17 53-1 SECTION 06 17 53 SHOP FABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes 1. The Work of this section comprises all materials, tools, equipment and labor required to furnish, fabricate and install the metal-plate-connected wood trusses as shown on the Drawings, specified herein, and evidently required to complete the Work. 2. Design and provide roof and ceiling common framing members between girder trusses as shown on Drawing S-102 for future equipment removal through building roof. Design and provide metal framing anchors to attach common framing members to girder trusses. B. Related Requirements 1. Section 06 10 00 – Rough Carpentry 1.02 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Measurement and payment requirements: per Division 01 General Requirements. 1.03 REFERENCES A. Reference Standards 1. AMERICAN FOREST & PAPER ASSOCIATION (AF&PA) a. AF&PA T101 - National Design Specification (NDS) for Wood Construction 2. ASME INTERNATIONAL (ASME) a. ASME B18.2.1 - Square and Hex Bolts and Screws (Inch Series) b. ASME B18.6.1 - Wood Screws (Inch Series) 3. ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM) a. ASTM A153 - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware b. ASTM A653 - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA SHOP FABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES WOODARD & CURRAN 06 17 53-2 c. ASTM F1667 - Driven Fasteners: Nails, Spikes, and Staples 4. ICC-EVALUATION SERVICES a. ESR-1539 - Power-Driven Staples and Nails 5. NATIONAL INSTITUTE OF STANDARDS AND TECHNOLOGY (NIST) a. NIST PS 20 - American Softwood Lumber Standard 6. TRUSS PLATE INSTITUTE (TPI) a. TPI 1 - National Design Standard for Metal Plate Connected Wood Truss Construction; Commentary and Appendices 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination, Sequencing, and Scheduling: per Division 01 General Requirements. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. 1. Shop Drawings a. Lumber species and group, size, and stress grade for each truss component b. Span, pitch, configuration, and spacing for each truss c. Size, material, finish, locations of connector plates d. Bearing details: Truss connectors for each location where trusses are supported by other trusses e. Design loads, load combinations, and allowable and actual stresses f. Permanent bracing requirements and details g. Shop Drawings shall be stamped by a professional Engineer licensed in the Project state 2. Product Data a. Lumber, hardware, metal connector plates, and fasteners 3. Material Certificates a. Certificates of inspection stating species, grade, and percent moisture content of all lumber used in truss fabrication 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA SHOP FABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES WOODARD & CURRAN 06 17 53-3 b. Certification by treating plant, stating type of preservative solution, pressure process used, net amount of preservative retained, and compliance with applicable standards c. Water-Borne-Treated Products: include statement that moisture content of treated materials was reduced to levels indicated prior to shipment to Project Site. 4. Manufacturer's Instructions a. Requirements for handling, storage, erection, temporary and permanent bracing, and connections 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. B. Truss manufacturer shall be a member of the Truss Plate Institute (TPI), and shall comply with TPI quality control procedures for the manufacturer of connector plates published in TPI 1. C. Manufacturer shall comply with applicable requirements of TPI 1. D. Manufacturer shall comply with applicable requirements of AF&PA T101. E. A professional Engineer licensed in the Project state, who is experienced in the design of wood trusses similar to those used in the Work, with a successful record of in-service performance, shall be responsible for the truss designs, and shall sign and stamp the Shop Drawings. F. Connector plates and wood trusses shall each be provided by a single manufacturer 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. B. Comply with manufacturer's instructions and TPI recommendations for handling and storing trusses. Avoid damage from improper handling which can induce stresses the trusses are not designed to resist. C. Stack trusses off the ground. Protect from rain and snow inside a well-ventilated enclosure. D. Contractor shall coordinate delivery and erection of trusses to avoid lengthy on-site storage. E. Defective or damaged trusses shall be removed from the Site and replaced by the Contractor, at no additional cost to the Owner. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA SHOP FABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES WOODARD & CURRAN 06 17 53-4 1.08 SITE CONDITIONS A. Existing Conditions: per Division 01 General Requirements. B. Coastal Construction: Trusses will be used for building construction within 1,000 feet from the coast. Roof construction will be similar to residential roofs with a ventilated attic. 1. Truss manufacturer shall account for salt-laden air and coastal exposure of metal connector plates. Metal plate connectors for wood to wood connections of roof trusses shall be hot-dip galvanized with G90 coating. 2. Metal Framing Anchors: AISI 316 stainless steel 3. Nails to attach metal framing anchors: AISI 316 stainless steel. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 METAL CONNECTOR PLATES A. Fabricate connector plates for wood-to-wood truss connections from hot-dip galvanized steel sheet complying with ASTM A653, grade A, G90. Minimum- coated metal thickness is 0.036 inches. B. Acceptable manufacturers include, but are not limited to 1. Alpine Engineered Products, Inc., 2. Truswal Systems Corporation, 3. MiTek Industries, Inc. 2.02 LUMBER A. Each piece of lumber shall be factory marked with grade stamp of inspection agency indicating type, grade, species, and moisture content at time of surfacing and milling, and grading agency. B. Lumber shall comply with NIST PS 20 and with applicable grading rules of inspection agencies certified by the American Lumber Standards Committee (ALCS) Board of Review. Machine stress rated (MSR) lumber grades shall be used except that visual graded lumber may be used for web members. C. Inspection agencies include the following 1. SPIB - Southern Pine Inspection Bureau 2. WCLIB - West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA SHOP FABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES WOODARD & CURRAN 06 17 53-5 3. WWPA - Western Wood Products Association D. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, manufactured to sizes required by NIST PS 20. Lumber shall have 19 percent maximum moisture content at time of dressing and shipment for dimension lumber, except as otherwise indicated. 2.03 BRACING A. Sway bracing, lateral bracing, and runners shall be provided as recommended by the truss manufacturer. Permanent truss diagonal web bracing shall be coordinated with web lateral bracing as required by the truss designer. 2.04 FASTENERS A. Provide fasteners of size and type indicated. AISI Type 316 stainless steel. B. Nails, brads, and staples shall conform to ASTM F1667 C. Power driven fasteners shall conform to ESR-1539 D. Wood screws shall conform to ASME B18.6.1 E. Lag bolts shall conform to ASME B18.2.1 2.05 METAL FRAMING ANCHORS A. Provide metal framing anchors of type, size, and finish indicated, that comply with requirements specified including the following 1. Manufacturer published allowable design loads that are determined from empirical data or by rational engineering analysis, and that are demonstrated by comprehensive testing performed by a qualified independent testing laboratory 2. Finish: Per Drawings 3. Nails: AISI 316 nails, nail size and type per metal framing anchor manufacturer’s requirements. 4. Truss tie-downs (hurricane ties) shall be as indicated on the Drawings 5. Acceptable manufacturers include, but are not limited to a. Alpine Engineered Products, Inc. b. Simpson Strong-Tie Company, Inc. 1) Drawings reference Simpson Strong-tie product numbers c. United Steel Products Company, Inc. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA SHOP FABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES WOODARD & CURRAN 06 17 53-6 2.06 FABRICATION A. Cut truss members to accurate lengths, angles, and sizes to produce close-fitting joints with wood-to-wood bearing in assembled units. B. Assemble truss members using jigs or other means to ensure uniformity and accuracy of assembly, with joints closely fitted to comply with specified tolerances. C. Fabricate metal connector plates to size, configuration, thickness, and anchorage required to withstand design loads. D. Metal connector plates shall be accurately located and securely fastened to each side of wood members. E. Finished trusses shall conform to the following tolerances 1. Overall length and height of each truss shall be accurate within 1/4 inch 2. Chord members shall be straight between panel points within 1/4 inch 3. Camber shall be measured with the truss supported at its normal bearing points and supporting its own weight, and shall be within 1/8 inch. Trusses shall be designed such that there is no camber when subjected to full dead load. F. Ends of chords shall be cut to exact design length and bevel. Bearing surfaces shall be flat and square across. Foreign matter shall be cleaned from bearing surfaces. 2.07 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Erect and brace trusses to comply with applicable requirements of TPI standards specified herein. B. Trusses shall not be altered in the field, except for minor modifications as approved by the Engineer. Trusses that do not fit shall be returned to the fabricator and replaced with properly sized trusses. C. Trusses shall be erected with the plane of the truss webs vertical and parallel to each other. Trusses shall be accurately located at the proper design spacing. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA SHOP FABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES WOODARD & CURRAN 06 17 53-7 D. Trusses shall be hoisted into place by means of lifting equipment suited to sizes and types of trusses. Care shall be taken not to damage truss members or joints by out-of-plane (weak axis) bending and other causes. E. Trusses shall be securely anchored at all bearing points. Toe nailing truss bottom chords to wall top plates at bearing locations shall be prohibited due to the likelihood for splitting the truss chord. F. Install permanent bracing to ensure trusses maintain design spacing along their span and properly withstand all design loads. 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. 3.03 STARTUP & COMMISSIONING A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. 3.04 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. END OF SECTION This page intentionally left blank 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA FINISH CARPENTRY WOODARD & CURRAN 06 20 00-1 SECTION 06 20 00 FINISH CARPENTRY PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes 1. Provide finish carpentry in accordance with this Section and applicable reference standards listed in Article 1.03. This section includes: a. Exterior trim b. Cedar shakes c. Wall RainScreen (Building Paper) d. Flashing Tape B. Products Installed But Not Supplied Under this Section 1. Eave Vents specified under Section 07 60 00 2. Gutter and downspouts specified under Section 07 60 00 3. Metal drip edge flashing specified under Section 07 60 00 4. Metal flashing specified under Section 07 60 00. C. Related Requirements 1. Section 06 10 00 – Rough Carpentry 2. Section 07 60 00 – Flashing and Sheet Metal 3. Section 07 92 00 – Joint Sealants 4. Section 09 90 00 – Painting and Coating 1.02 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Measurement and payment requirements: per Division 01 General Requirements. 1.03 REFERENCES A. Reference Standards 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA FINISH CARPENTRY WOODARD & CURRAN 06 20 00-2 B. The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only. 1. American Hardboard Association (AHA) a. AHA A135.6 Hardboard Siding 2. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) a. ANSI A208.1 Mat-Formed Wood Particle Board b. ANSI B18.2.1 Square and Hex Bolts and Screws Inch Series c. ANSI B18.6.1 Wood Screws 3. American Wood-Preservers' Association (AWPA) a. AWPA C1 All Timber Products - Preservative Treatment by Pressure Processes b. AWPA C2 Lumber, Timber, Bridge Ties and Mine Ties - Preservative Treatment by Pressure Processes c. AWPA C20 Structural Lumber Fire-Retardant Treatment by Pressure Processes d. AWPA C27 Plywood - Fire-Retardant Treatment by Pressure Processes e. AWPA C9 Plywood - Preservative Treatment by Pressure Processes f. AWPA M2 Standard for Inspection of Treated Wood Products g. AWPA M4 Standard for the Care of Preservative-Treated Wood Products 4. APA - The Engineered Wood Association (APA) a. APA E445S Performance Standards and Qualification Policy for Structural-Use Panels (APA PRP-108) 5. Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI) a. AWI Qual. Stds. AWI Quality Standards 6. ASME International (ASME) a. ASME B18.2.2 Square and Hex Nuts 7. ASTM International (ASTM) 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA FINISH CARPENTRY WOODARD & CURRAN 06 20 00-3 a. ASTM D1970 Self-Adhering Polymer Modified Bituminous Sheet Materials Used as Steep Roofing Underlayment for Ice Dam Protection. b. ASTM A687 Standard Specification for High-Strength Nonheaded Steel Bolts and Studs c. ASTM D2898 Accelerated Weathering of Fire-Retardant-Treated Wood for Fire Testing d. ASTM F547 Nails for Use with Wood and Wood-Base Materials 8. Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association (BHMA) a. BHMA A156.9 Cabinet Hardware 9. Hardwood Plywood And Veneer Association (HPVA) a. HPVA HP-1 American National Standard for Hardwood and Decorative Plywood 10. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) a. NEMA LD 3 High-Pressure Decorative Laminates 11. National Hardwood Lumber Association (NHLA) a. NHLA Rules Rules for the Measurement & Inspection of Hardwood & Cypress 12. Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers Association (NELMA) a. NELMA Grading Rules Standard Grading Rules for Northeastern Lumber 13. Redwood Inspection Service (RIS) of the California Redwood Association (CRA) a. RIS Grade Use Redwood Lumber Grades and Uses 14. Southern Cypress Manufacturers Association (SCMA) a. SCMA Spec Standard Specifications for Grades of Southern Cypress 15. Southern Pine Inspection Bureau (SPIB) a. SPIB 1003 Standard Grading Rules for Southern Pine Lumber 16. U.S. Department Of Commerce (DOC) a. PS-58 Basic Hardboard 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA FINISH CARPENTRY WOODARD & CURRAN 06 20 00-4 b. PS1 Construction and Industrial Plywood (APA V995) c. PS2 Wood-Based Structural-Use Panels (APA 5350) d. PS20 American Softwood Lumber Standard 17. West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau (WCLIB) a. WCLIB 17 Standard Grading Rules 18. Western Wood Products Association (WWPA) a. WWPA G-5 Western Lumber Grading Rules 19. Window And Door Manufacturers Association (WDMA) a. WDMA I.S. 4 Water-Repellent Preservative Non-Pressure Treatment for Millwork 20. Wood Moulding and Millwork Producers Association (WMMPA) a. WMMPA WM 6 Industry Standard for Non-Pressure Treating of Wood Millwork 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination, Sequencing, and Scheduling: per Division 01 General Requirements. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. B. Product Data: 1. Submit product data for all wood items and trim. 2. Wall Rainscreen 3. Flashing tape 4. Cedar Trim 5. Composite Trim C. Samples: 1. Cedar Shake 2. Cedar Trim D. Certificates of grade: 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA FINISH CARPENTRY WOODARD & CURRAN 06 20 00-5 1. Provide certificates of grade from the grading agency on graded but unmarked lumber or plywood attesting that materials meet the grade requirements specified herein. 2. Grade Certificate for Cedar Shakes E. Certificates of compliance: 1. Provide certificates of compliance unless materials bear certification markings or statements. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. B. Deliver lumber, plywood, trim, and millwork to job site in an undamaged condition. Stack materials to ensure ventilation and drainage. Protect against dampness before and after delivery. Store materials under cover in a well- ventilated enclosure and protect against extreme changes in temperature and humidity. Do not store products in building until wet trade materials are dry. 1.08 SITE CONDITIONS A. Existing conditions: per Division 1 General Requirements. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 CEDAR TRIM A. All Exterior Trim: White cedar B. Thickness: 5/4 thickness, 1-inch nominal , unless noted otherwise on drawings. C. Grade: Clear D/Better D. Moisture Content: Kiln-Dried, moisture content less than 15 percent 2.02 COMPOSITE TRIM A. Composite Trim 1. Provide prefinished Miratec Exterior Trim manufactured by Craftmaster Manufacturing, Inc., or AZEK trimboards, or approved equal. Provide manufacturer's standard white prefinished color. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA FINISH CARPENTRY WOODARD & CURRAN 06 20 00-6 2. Product shall have a minimum 25-year manufacturer's warranty covering substrate and a minimum 15-year warranty on finish. 3. Provide widths as indicated on Drawings. All trim shall be 4/4 thickness ((3/4 inch) nominal). B. Poly-ash trim 1. Provide Poly-ash trim boards consisting of a blend of polymers and coal combustion products (ash) manufactured by Boral and equal to Boral TruExterior® Trim. 2. Product shall have a 20-year limited manufacturer warranty. 3. Provide widths as indicated on Drawings. All trim shall be 4/4 thickness ((3/4 inch) nominal). C. Stainless Steel Nails 1. Attach all exterior fascia and trim with AISI 316 stainless steel nails 2.03 CEDAR BREATHER A. Ventilated underlayment with space for continuous airflow between solid roof deck and shingles or shakes. Underlayment shall have three dimensional design to allow entire underside of shingle to dry and eliminating excess moisture, thermal cupping and warping, and reducing potential for rotting. 1. Acceptable Products: a. Cedar Breather Manufactured by Benjamin Obdyke b. Approved Equal 2. Width: 39-inches 3. Thickness: ¼-inch 2.01 WALL CEDAR SHAKES A. Manufacturer: Maibec or equal B. Species: White Cedar C. Grade: D. Dimensions: 1. Length: 16-inches long 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA FINISH CARPENTRY WOODARD & CURRAN 06 20 00-7 2. Width: 3 ½ - 11 inches 3. Thickness: 3/8-inch at base E. Grade: Nantucket, knot-free with no imperfections on the exposed face 2.02 WALL RAINSCREEN A. Ventilated building paper with space for continuous airflow between cedar wall shakes and plywood sheathing. Rainscreen shall be factory attached to housewrap to eliminate the threat of trapped moisture behind the cedar shakes. 1. Acceptable Products: a. Home Slicker Plus® Typar® Manufactured by Benjamin Obdyke b. Approved Equal 2. Width: 39-inches 3. Thickness: ¼-inch 4. Max UV Exposure: 30 days 5. Warranty: 20-years 6. Composition: Polypropylene 7. Vapor Permeability: 12 perms. 2.03 FLASHING TAPE A. Self-adhered flashing for critical non-roof areas for premium protection against water infiltration. 1. Acceptable Products: a. VYCOR V40 manufactured by GCP Applied Technologies, Inc., b. Approved equal 2. Thickness: 40 mil 3. Carrier Film: Cross-laminated HDPE 4. Adhesive: Rubberized asphalt 5. Release Liner: Paper 6. UV Exposure Limit: 30-days 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA FINISH CARPENTRY WOODARD & CURRAN 06 20 00-8 B. Primer: Manufacturer’s standard primer 1. Perm-A-Barrier WB primer, or equal. 2. Required for adhesion to concrete substrates. 2.04 MOISTURE CONTENT OF WOOD PRODUCTS A. Air-dry or kiln-dry lumber. Kiln-dry treated lumber after treatment. Maximum moisture content of wood products at time of delivery to the job site, and when installed, shall be as follows: 1. Exterior Treated and Untreated Finish Lumber and Trim 89 mm (4 Inches Nominal) or Less in Thickness: 19 percent. 2. Moisture content of other materials shall be in accordance with the applicable standards. 2.05 HARDWARE A. Provide sizes, types, and spacing of manufactured building materials recommended by the product manufacturer except as otherwise indicated or specified. 1. Wood Screws: a. ANSI B18.6.1., AISI 316 stainless steel 2. Bolts, Nuts, Lag Screws, and Studs: a. AISI 316 stainless steel. 3. Nails: a. Nails shall be the size and type best suited for the purpose and shall conform to ASTM F 547. Nails shall be AISI 316 stainless steel. For siding, length of nails shall be sufficient to extend 40 mm (1-1/2 inches) into supports, including wood sheathing over framing. Screws for use where nailing is impractical shall be size best suited for purpose. 2.06 FABRICATION A. The terms "Premium," "Custom," and "Economy" refer to the quality grades defined in AWI Quality Standards. Items not specified to be of a specific grade shall be Custom grade. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA FINISH CARPENTRY WOODARD & CURRAN 06 20 00-9 2.07 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 WALL FINISHES A. General: Coordinate installation of door, window, and miscellaneous wall openings as required to provide a weathertight installation of wall finishes. B. Flashing Tape: Install flashing tape per manufacturer’s instructions around all critical areas to ensure protection against water and moisture infiltration including: 1. Around Door openings and door trim 2. Around windows 3. Behind building wall corner trim 4. Bottom of wall sheathing 5. Behind all seams of wall rainscreen product 6. All other areas prone to leak and are otherwise difficult to seal C. Rain Screen: Install over all wall surfaces to protect cedar shakes from moisture built-up behind the shakes. 1. Nail or staple the Rain Screen to wall sheathing with 316 stainless steel nails or staples a minimum of every 3 square feet. 2. Do not overlap rain screen. 3. Roll out rain screen horizontally across the wall, starting at the base of the wall with channels running vertically with the layer of water resistance barrier (WRB) on top. The bottom of subsequent layers shall lap over the WRB flap of the lower course. 4. To create vertical seams add a 12” layer of flashing tape behind the vertical seam or the Rain Screen. 5. Add extra flashing tape at all terminations, ends, corners, seams, and any other discontinuities of the Rain Screen, except for edges where rain screen have factory applied (WRB). D. Cedar Shakes: 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA FINISH CARPENTRY WOODARD & CURRAN 06 20 00-10 1. Installation: a. Attach with a minimum of (2) 316 stainless steel nails per shingle, approximately 3/4-inches from the edge and approximately 1 1/2 - inches above the exposure line. Nails shall be long enough to penetrate into the roof sheathing all the way through. Contractor shall account for thickness of Cedar Breather when selecting nail lengths. b. Drive nails flush with surface of shingle. c. Staples are not permitted. 2. Electro-galvanized fasteners are not permitted. 3. Immediately remove and discard shingles that split as a result of nail attachment and replace with a new shingle. 4. Provide starter courses per standard framing practice. 3.02 FINISH WORK A. Provide samples, sizes, materials, and designs as indicated and as specified. Apply primer to finish work before installing. Where practicable, shop assemble and finish items of built-up millwork. Joints shall be tight and constructed in a manner to conceal shrinkage. Miter trim and moldings at exterior angles and cope at interior angles and at returns. Material shall show no warp after installation. Install millwork and trim in maximum practical lengths. Fasten finish work with finish nails. Provide blind nailing where practicable. Set face nails for putty stopping. B. Exterior Finish Work 1. General: Machine-sand exposed flat members and square edges. Machine- finish semi-exposed surfaces. Construct joints to exclude water. In addition to nailing, glue joints of built-up items with waterproof glue as necessary for weather-resistant construction. Provide well-distributed end joints in built-up members. Provide shoulder joints in flat work. Hold backs of wide-faced miters together with metal rings and waterproof glue. Fascia’s and other flat members, unless otherwise indicated, shall be 19 mm (3/4 inch) thick. Provide door and window trim in single lengths. Provide braced, blocked, and rigidly anchored cornices for support and protection of vertical joints. Install soffits in largest practical size. Joints of plywood shall occur over center lines of supports. Fasten soffits with stainless steel nails. Back prime all concealed surfaces of exterior trim. 2. Exterior Trim: Install exterior trim with AISI 316 stainless steel nails. Coutersink nails and infill with wood putty prior to finish painting. All nails shall be concealed from view after painting. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA FINISH CARPENTRY WOODARD & CURRAN 06 20 00-11 3. Interior Finish Work: After installation, sand exposed surfaces smooth. Provide window and door trim in single lengths. 4. Window Stools and Aprons: Provide stools with rabbet over windowsill. Provide aprons with returns cut accurately to profile of member. 3.03 EXTERIOR TRIM A. Provide joint sealant per Section 07 92 00 to infill any gaps between trim boards or between trim boards and adjacent materials or construction. B. Infill all nail holes with trim board manufacturer’s recommended material. C. Field prime and paint all trim boards per Section 09 90 00 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. 3.05 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. END OF SECTION 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA FINISH CARPENTRY WOODARD & CURRAN 06 20 00-12 This page intentionally left blank 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA STRUCTURAL COMPOSITES WOODARD & CURRAN 06 70 00-1 SECTION 06 70 00 STRUCTURAL COMPOSITES (BID ALTERNATE #4) PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes all labor and materials necessary to provide fiberglass reinforced plastic (FRP) flat covers for a 72’ x 27’ tank containing three (3) 21’ diameter Gravity Thickener (GT) Tanks, and one adjacent (1) 8’ x 6’ GT Distribution Box and one (1) 13.5’ x 6’ GT Scum Well including, but not be limited to: 1. Tank cover deck panels 2. Structural supports 3. Flashing and trim 4. Fasteners and anchors 5. Bulb gaskets and sealant 6. Tank cover accessories and appurtenances indicated on drawings B. This Section applies to Bid Alternate #4, as indicated in Section 00 41 02 Form For General Bid. Work included in this specification shall only be included if Alternate #4 is part of the project. C. Related Requirements 1.02 REFERENCES A. Reference Standards 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Drawings including layouts; connection and framing details; fastener types and spacing; product description. B. Material certifications. C. Engineering calculations, signed by a registered professional engineer in the state of Massachusetts, confirming compliance with specified structural design criteria. D. Operation and maintenance data for FRP cover & hatches. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA STRUCTURAL COMPOSITES WOODARD & CURRAN 06 70 00-2 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Contractor shall be responsible for verifying all field dimensions for development of manufacturer’s drawings. B. Contractor shall review and confirm in writing the approval of manufacturer’s drawings. C. Tank cover manufacturer shall have full responsibility for design and supply of all tank cover materials. Split responsibility for materials and design is not acceptable. D. Within the last five years, tank cover manufacturer shall have completed a minimum of fifteen (15) projects of similar type as those required in this scope. E. System supplier shall be ISO9001 certified, and shall manufacture all FRP components in their own facility. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Enduro Systems, Inc. B. GEF, Inc. C. Fiberglass Fabricators, Inc. D. Engineer approved equal 2.02 DESIGN CRITERIA A. Design Loads: Combined loads shall be determined by Allowable Stress Method. 1. Cover Design Live Load: a. 50 psf unless otherwise noted b. At designated equipment removal pathway 1) 150 psf uniform load 2) (4) 1,500 pound concentrated wheel loads * 4 ft OCEW 2. Snow Load: 25 psf 3. Wind Uplift: as per Mass Building Code 780 CMR, 6th Edition 4. Dead Load: cover panel system weight 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA STRUCTURAL COMPOSITES WOODARD & CURRAN 06 70 00-3 a. Deck panels: Individual units and other materials attached to and supported by the decking panels. b. Structure: Total weight of the cover structure and other material attached to and supported by the cover structure. B. Deflection Limits and Factors of Safety 1. Dead + Live or Snow Load: Deflection Limit – L/D = 240, Factor of Safety of 2.5 2. Wind Uplift less Dead Load: Deflection Limit of L/60, Factor of Safety 1.88 C. Foot Traffic 1. Tank cover decking shall support foot traffic and shall have slip-resistant surface. D. Hatches 1. Hatch covers accessible to foot traffic shall support a 300 lb. load (spread over the top surface of the hatch). E. Lateral Bracing 1. FRP primary structural members shall be capable of supporting all design loads without lateral bracing. F. Air Infiltration 1. Air infiltration for tank cover under .5 inch water column negative pressure shall not exceed 1 CFM/LF of gasketed panel side joint and 2.2 CFM/LF of tank cover perimeter and penetrations. 2.03 MATERIALS A. Fiberglass reinforced plastic (FRP) structural components including decking, beams, and framing shall be manufactured by pultrusion process. Contact molded or hand-laid up fiberglass materials are not acceptable as structural components. B. Tank Cover Deck Panels: 1. Resin type for FRP tank cover decking shall be UV stabilized, isophthalic polyester. General purpose or orthothalic polyester is not acceptable. 2. Glass fiber reinforcements shall be 50% (minimum) of the material weight. 3. Materials shall be fire retardant and have a flame spread rating of 25 or less when tested in accordance with ASTM E84 (UL723). 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA STRUCTURAL COMPOSITES WOODARD & CURRAN 06 70 00-4 4. Materials shall exhibit these Physical Properties (at a minimum): Tensile Strength 40,000 psi ASTM D 638 Flexural Strength 45,000 psi ASTM D 790 Flexural Modulus 1,600,000 psi ASTM D 790 Compressive Strength 37,000 psi ASTM D 695 Izod Impact (Notched) 25 ASTM D 256 Water Absorption .25% maximum ASTM D 570 5. Deck panels shall be sealed at side-laps with non-adhesive, 1-inch diameter neoprene bulb gasket (conforming to ASTM C864). The side-lap gaskets shall be factory installed and oriented vertically so they are compressed when an adjacent panel is placed into position. 6. Each deck panel shall be accessible for vertical lifting with integral handles located at each end and not above the tank cover surface. 7. Deck panels shall be removable by detachment of a minimal number of fasteners at each panel end (except where structural conditions require panel attachment to interior supports). 8. The top of the tank cover decking shall be flat with factory applied, non- skid, UV resistant surface. 9. Color of deck panels shall be standard gray, except where noted in the drawings. Deck panels shall be clearly striped or colored to indicate equipment removal pathway. C. Hatches: (if indicated on drawings) 1. Access hatches shall be raised with one-leaf hatch door and fabricated from pultruded fiberglass components. 2. Standard FRP hatch and framing shall fit inside a single deck panel so that individual deck panels with hatches can be removed without affecting adjacent panels. 3. Underside of hatch lids shall be fully sealed with factory installed, 3/8” diameter neoprene bulb gasket. Perimeter hatch curb shall be sealed to decking surface with Sikaflex-1A sealant, or approved equal. 4. Hatches shall have a stainless steel hold-open device to prevent door from blowing open or closing on itself. Hatches shall be secured with hand- operable latches and without special tools. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA STRUCTURAL COMPOSITES WOODARD & CURRAN 06 70 00-5 5. Hatch lids shall have a factory applied non-skid, UV resistant surface with plastic or stainless steel lift handles. 6. View port hatches, if indicated on drawings, shall be 12-inches square or less. 7. Hatch openings shall be factory cut into the tank cover decking by manufacturer. D. FRP Structural Framing: (if indicated on drawings) 1. Resin type for FRP beams and framing members shall be UV stabilized vinyl ester. 2. Glass fiber reinforcements shall be 50% (minimum) of the material weight. 3. Structural components shall be fire retardant and have a flame spread rating of 25 or less when tested in accordance with ASTM E84 (UL723). 4. Metallic angles or plates attached to FRP beams or fastening connections shall be 316 Stainless Steel. E. Trusses: (if indicated by manufacturer or on drawings) 1. Trusses shall be designed and provided by tank Cover Manufacturer and conform to these specifications: 2. Truss components not exposed to inside of tank shall be galvanized steel. 3. Truss components exposed to inside of tank shall be stainless steel. 4. Trusses shall have minimum 7 foot of headspace from top of tank cover to bottom of top chord. 5. Trusses shall be field assembled and bolted by the Contractor. F. Sampling Ports: 1. Sampling ports shall be sized and located as indicated on drawings. G. Flashing and Trim: 1. Fiberglass flashing shall be isophthalic polyester with thickness, dimensions, and profile as shown on the drawings. 2. Non-radius end flashing shall be factory attached to individual deck panels. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA STRUCTURAL COMPOSITES WOODARD & CURRAN 06 70 00-6 3. Flashing with a radius or at the perimeter of a circular tank shall be a separate part and field attached by the installing contractor. 4. Slide gate flashings (if indicated on drawings) shall be aluminum brush type. H. Air Vents and Connections: (if indicated on drawings) 1. FRP gooseneck ventilation piping (if indicated on drawings) with bird screen shall be provided by cover manufacturer. Size and quantity shall be as indicated on drawings. 2. FRP stub-vent connections with a blind flange (if indicated on drawings) shall be provided by cover manufacturer. Connections shall extend at least 6 inches from top of tank cover deck. Size and quantity shall be as indicated on drawings. I. Pipe Penetrations: 1. Any existing or new pipe penetrations shall be retrofitted by Contractor to penetrate tank cover at 90-degree angles. 2. Pipe penetrations shall be flashed in the field with a Sealtite retrofit, zipper type, pipe flashing or equal as provided by cover manufacturer. J. Hardware: 1. Fasteners, anchorage, hinges, and other structural accessories located on the underside of cover shall be 316 Stainless Steel. 2. Non-structural hardware shall be either of the materials specified under I.1. or FRP. 3. Perimeter flashing anchors, concrete anchors, or other hardware not exposed to the inside environment of the tank shall be 304 Stainless Steel. 4. Fasteners to attach tank cover decking to structural supports shall be 316 Stainless Steel. K. Gaskets and Sealants: 1. All panel side laps and perimeter conditions shall be gasketed. a. Gaskets located along longitudinal side laps between panels shall be factory installed, 1-inch diameter neoprene, bulb type. b. Gaskets under non-radius end flashing shall be factory installed, bulb type. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA STRUCTURAL COMPOSITES WOODARD & CURRAN 06 70 00-7 c. Gaskets under flashing with a radius and at perimeter of circular tanks shall be installed by the Contractor. 2. Sikaflex®-1A sealant, or approved equal, shall be applied by Contractor at various locations as required by manufacturer to maximize odor containment. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. At the time of delivery, all materials shall be inspected for shipping damage. The freight company and manufacturer should be notified immediately of any damage or quantity shortages. B. The Contractor shall protect FRP materials from cuts, scratches, gouges, abrasions, and impacts. When lifting crated FRP materials, spreader bars shall be used (not wire slings unless materials are fully protected). FRP components shall not be dragged across one another unless separated by a non-scratching spacer. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Before placing and attaching components, the erector must confirm alignment and location of bearing plates, surfaces, brackets, saddles, etc. All bearing surfaces must be clean and free of debris. B. Before placing secondary framing members or deck, the erector must check the alignment and location of truss members. C. Erection shall proceed according to sequences shown on the approved drawings. D. If applicable, Contractor shall assemble any trusses and ledger angles as shown on manufacturer’s drawings. Install trusses, beam seats or structural and ledger angles in locations shown on the approved drawings. E. Position FRP tank cover beams (if applicable) in locations, as shown on the approved manufacturer’s drawings. Field modifications (cuts, copes, holes, etc.) other than work shown on the drawings are not allowed without the manufacturer’s written consent. Field cutting shall be indicated on drawings by manufacturer where needed. F. Anchor FRP beams and adjust tank cover components into final position with proper bearing and alignment at joints, laps, and supports before fastening. Refer to manufacturer’s installation instructions for proper fastener selection, fastener location, driving techniques, and pertinent information for fastening equipment. G. Starting at the end shown by manufacturer on Field Drawings, position and place tank cover deck panels in locations as shown. Field modifications (cuts, copes, 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA STRUCTURAL COMPOSITES WOODARD & CURRAN 06 70 00-8 holes, etc.) other than work shown on the drawings are not allowed without the manufacturer’s written consent. H. Fasten or anchor FRP tank cover deck panels into location as shown on approved drawings. I. Place and attach flashing as shown on approved drawings. END OF SECTION 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA WATER REPELLENTS WOODARD & CURRAN 07 19 00-1 SECTION 07 19 00 WATER REPELLENTS PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes 1. Provide water repellent treatment in accordance with this Section and applicable reference standards listed in Article 1.03 to the following surfaces: a. Exterior concrete equipment pads b. Exterior concrete site stair c. Where indicated on drawings. 1.02 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Measurement and payment requirements: per Division 01 General Requirements. 1.03 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination, Sequencing, and Scheduling: per Division 01 General Requirements. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. B. Product Data for water repellent C. Certificates 1. Manufacturer Warranty 2. Material Safety Data Sheets D. Manufacturer instructions including preparation, application, recommended equipment to be used, safety measures, and protection of completed application. E. Closeout and Maintenance Material Submittals: per Division 01 General Requirements. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA WATER REPELLENTS WOODARD & CURRAN 07 19 00-2 B. Qualifications 1. Manufacturer's qualifications: Minimum five years record of successful in-service experience of water repellent treatments manufactured for concrete masonry application. 2. Applicator's qualifications: Minimum five years successful experience in projects of similar scope using specified or similar treatment materials and manufacturer's approval for application. C. Performance Requirements 1. Water absorption: ASTM C 140. Comparison of treated and untreated specimens. 2. Moisture vapor transmission: ASTM E 96. Comparison of treated and untreated specimens. 3. Water penetration and leakage through masonry: ASTM E 514. D. Evidence to support request for substitution 1. The difference between the specified product and the proposed substitution 2. A comparative analysis of the specified product and the proposed substitution, including tabulations of the composition of pigment and vehicle 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. B. Deliver materials in original sealed containers, clearly marked with the manufacturer's name, brand name, type of material, batch number, percent solids by weight and volume, and date of manufacturer. Store materials off the ground, in a dry area where the temperature will be not less 50 degrees F nor more than 85 degrees F. 1.07 SITE CONDITIONS A. Existing Conditions: per Division 01 General Requirements. 1.08 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty/Extended Correction Period: 5 year joint warranty, from manufacturer and applicator of the water repellent treatment against moisture penetration through the treated structurally sound surface covering material, labor, and equipment necessary to remedy problems. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA WATER REPELLENTS WOODARD & CURRAN 07 19 00-3 PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Water repellent solution shall be a clear, non-yellowing, deep-penetrating, VOC compliant solution. Material shall not stain or discolor and shall produce a mechanical and chemical interlocking bond with the substrate to the depth of the penetration. 2.02 WATER REPELLENTS A. Series 632 Prime-A-Pell H20 Concentrate by Chemprobe. B. Silane, 20 Percent Solids: Penetrating water repellent. A monomeric compound containing approximately 20 percent alkyltrialkoxysilanes with alcohol, mineral spirits, water, and other proprietary solvent carrier. 1. Composition: Modified alkylalkoxysilane. 2. Active alkylalkoxysilane content: ASTM D 2369 20 percent by weight, plus or minus 1 percent. 3. Appearance: White, milky liquid. 4. Average depth of penetration: Up to 3/8 inch depending on substrate. 5. VOC content: Less than 350 grams per liter. 6. Flash point, ASTM D 3278. 7. Specific gravity, at 78 degrees F: 0.96 to 0.98. 8. Density: 0.0 to 8.2 pounds per gallon. C. Or Engineer Approved Equal 2.03 PERFORMANCE CRITERIA A. Silane, 20 Percent Solids: 1. Water absorption test: ASTM C 642 and ASTM E 514. 2. Moisture vapor transmission: ASTM D 1653, 28.33 perms or 51.61 percent maximum compared to untreated surfaces. 3. Scaling resistance: ASTM C 672/C 672M, non-air-entrained concrete, zero rating, no scaling, 100 cycles treated concrete. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA WATER REPELLENTS WOODARD & CURRAN 07 19 00-4 4. Resistance to chloride ion penetration: AASHTO T 259 and AASHTO T 260. 5. Water penetration and leakage through masonry, ASTM E 514percentage reduction of leakage: 97 percent minimum. 6. Resistance to accelerated weathering, ASTM G 53 testing 2,500 hours: No loss in repellency. 7. Drying time under normal conditions: Four hours per 75 degrees F. 2.04 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine masonry surfaces to be treated to ensure that: 1. visible cracks, voids or holes have been repaired; 2. mortar joints in masonry are tight and sound, have not been re-set or misaligned and show no cracks or spalling; 3. moisture contents of walls does not exceed 15 percent when measured on an electronic moisture register, calibrated for the appropriate substrate; and 4. concrete surfaces are free of form release agents, curing compounds and other compounds that would prevent full penetration of the water repellent material. B. Do not start water repellent treatment Work until all deficiencies have been corrected, examined and found acceptable to the Engineer and the water repellent treatment manufacturer. Do not apply treatment to damp, dirty, dusty or otherwise unsuitable surfaces. Comply with the manufacturer's recommendations for suitability of surface. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Surface Preparation: Prepare substrates in accordance with water repellent treatment manufacturer's recommendation. Clean surfaces of dust, dirt, efflorescence, alkaline, and foreign matter detrimental to proper application of water repellent treatment. B. Protection: Provide masking or protective covering for materials which could be damaged by water repellent treatment 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA WATER REPELLENTS WOODARD & CURRAN 07 19 00-5 1. Protect glass, glazed products, and prefinished products from contact with water repellent treatment. 2. Protect landscape materials with breathing type drop cloths: plastic covers are not acceptable. C. Compatibility 1. Confirm treatment compatibility with each type of joint sealer within or adjacent to surfaces receiving water repellent treatment in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 3.03 SAFETY METHODS A. Apply coating materials using safety methods and equipment in accordance with manufacturer's application recommendations. B. Toxic Materials: To protect personnel from overexposure to toxic materials, conform to the most stringent guidance of: 1. The coating manufacturer when using solvents or other chemicals. Use impermeable gloves, chemical goggles or face shield, and other recommended protective clothing and equipment to avoid exposure of skin, eyes, and respiratory system. Conduct Work in a manner to minimize exposure of building occupants and the general public. 2. 29 CFR 1910.1000. 3. Threshold Limit Values (R) of the American Conference of Governmental Industrial Hygienists. 4. Manufacturer's material safety data sheets. 3.04 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS A. Apply coating materials using safety methods and equipment in accordance with manufacturer's A. Weather and Substrate Conditions: Do not proceed with application of water repellents under any of the following conditions, except with written recommendations of manufacturer. 1. Ambient temperature is less than 40 degrees F. 2. Substrate faces have cured less than one month. 3. Rain or temperature below 40 degrees F are predicted for a period of 24 hours before or after treatment. 4. Earlier than three days after surfaces are wet. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA WATER REPELLENTS WOODARD & CURRAN 07 19 00-6 5. Substrate is frozen or surface temperature is less than 40 degrees F and falling. B. Moisture Condition: Determine moisture content of substrate meets manufacturer's requirements prior to application of water repellent material. 3.05 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Masonry Surfaces: Do not start water repellent coating until all joint tooling, pointing and masonry cleaning operations have been completed. Allow masonry to cure for at least 60 days under normal weather conditions before applying water repellent. B. Sealants: Do not apply water repellents until the sealants for joints adjacent to surfaces receiving water repellent treatment have been installed and cured. 1. Water repellent Work may precede sealant application only if sealant adhesion and compatibility have been tested and verified using substrate, water repellent, and sealant materials identical to those used in the Work. 2. Provide manufacturers' test results of compatibility. 3.06 MIXING A. Mix water repellent material thoroughly in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Mix, in quantities required for that days’ Work, all containers prior to application. Mix each container the same length of time. 3.07 APPLICATION A. Water Repellent Treatment: In strict accordance with the manufacturers written requirements. Do not start application without the manufacturer's representative being present or his written acceptance of the surface to be treated. 1. Spray Application: Spray apply water repellent material to exterior masonry surfaces using low-pressure airless spray equipment in strict accordance with manufacturer's printed application, instructions, and precautions. Maintain copies at the job Site. Apply flood coat in an overlapping pattern allowing approximately 200 to 250 mm (8 to 10 inch) rundown on the vertical surface. Maintain a wet edge at all overlaps, both vertical and horizontal. Hold gun maximum 450 mm (18 inches) from wall. 2. Brush or Roller Application: Brush or roller apply water repellent material only at locations where overspray would affect adjacent materials and where not practical for spray applications. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA WATER REPELLENTS WOODARD & CURRAN 07 19 00-7 3. Covered Surfaces: Coat all exterior masonry surfaces including back faces of parapets, tops of walls, edges and returns adjacent to window and door frames, window sills, and free-standing walls. 4. Rate of Application: Apply materials to exterior surfaces at (150 SQ. FT./GAL.) coverage rate. 5. Number of Coats: The sample panel test shall determine the number of coats required to achieve full coverage and protection. 6. Appearance: If unevenness in appearance, lines of Work termination or scaffold lines exist, or detectable changes from the approved sample panel occur, the Engineer may require additional treatment at no additional cost to the Owner. Apply any required additional treatment to a natural break off point. 3.08 CLEANING A. Clean all runs, drips, and overspray from adjacent surfaces while the water repellent treatment is still wet in a manner recommended by the manufacturer. 3.09 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. B. Do not remove drums containing water repellent material from the Site until completion of all water repellent treatment and authorized by the Engineer. 3.10 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. END OF SECTION This page intentionally left blank 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA THERMAL INSULATION WOODARD & CURRAN 07 21 00-1 SECTION 07 21 00 THERMAL INSULATION (FILED SUB-BID REQUIRED) PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes 1. Provide the following insulation in accordance with this Section and applicable reference standards listed in Article 1.03: a. Headworks Building exterior wall rigid insulation b. Headworks Building foundation wall rigid insulation c. Headworks Building rigid insulation below concrete slabs d. Headworks Building loose-fill insulation in attic e. Insulation accessories as specified herein f. All other insulation as noted on drawings B. Related Requirements 1. Section 04 20 00 – Unit Masonry 1.02 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Measurement and Payment requirements: per Division 01 General Requirements. 1.03 REFERENCES A. Reference Standards 1. ASTM International (ASTM) a. ASTM C518 Standard Test Method for Steady-State Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Heat Flow Meter Apparatus. b. ASTM C578 Standard Specification for Rigid, Cellular Polystyrene Thermal Insulation c. ASTM C687 Standard Practice for Determination of Thermal Resistance of Loose-Fill Building Insulation d. ASTM C764 Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Loose-Fill Thermal Insulation 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA THERMAL INSULATION WOODARD & CURRAN 07 21 00-2 e. ASTM D4397 Standard Specification for Polyethylene Sheeting for Construction, Industrial, and Agricultural Applications f. ASTM E84 Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. g. ASTM E96 Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials 2. International Code Council (ICC) a. IBC International Building Code 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination, Sequencing, and Scheduling: per Division 01 General Requirements. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. B. Product Data: 1. Rigid Insulation 2. Loose-Fill Insulation 3. Vapor Retarder 4. Protection Board 5. Insulation Baffle C. Manufacturer’s Instructions: Submit manufacturer’s installation instructions 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING: A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. B. Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store inside and in a dry location C. Protect plastic insulation as follows: 1. Do not expose to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of installation and concealment 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA THERMAL INSULATION WOODARD & CURRAN 07 21 00-3 2. Protect against ignition at all times. Do not deliver plastic insulating materials to the Project Site ahead of installation time 3. Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each area of construction 1.08 SITE CONDITIONS A. Existing Conditions: per Division 01 General Requirements. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 RIGID INSULATION A. Extruded polystyrene board insulation: Rigid, cellular polystyrene thermal insulation with closed cells and integral high density skin, formed by the expansion of polystyrene base resin in an extrusion process to comply with ASTM C578 and the following requirements: 1. ASTM C578 classification: Type IV a. Compressive Strength: 25 psi b. Density: 1.80 pcf c. Minimum Thermal Resistance (R-Value): 5.00 per inch thickness d. Water vapor permeance: 1.50 for 1-inch thick 2. Surface Burning Characteristics per ASTM E84: a. Maximum flame spread value: 75 b. Maximum smoke development index: 450 B. Approved for use at the following locations: 1. Insulation at exterior side of Headworks Building exterior walls 2. Insulation of foundation walls 3. Insulation below slabs-on-grade 4. Insulation below exterior equipment pads for frost protection C. Limitations: 1. Per IBC, rigid insulation shall be separated from the interior of a building by an approved thermal barrier of ½-inch gypsum wallboard or equivalent thermal barrier as defined by IBC. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA THERMAL INSULATION WOODARD & CURRAN 07 21 00-4 2.02 LOOSE-FILL INSULATION A. Thermal insulation produced by combining mineral fibers manufactured from glass or slag with thermosetting resins to comply with ASTM C764 and as follows: 1. ASTM C764 Designation: Type I – Pneumatic Application. 2. Minimum Thermal Resistance (R-Value) a. Thermal Resistance: Per ASTM C518 and ASTM C687 b. Minimum Installed R-value: 38 c. Thickness: Per manufacturer charts to obtain required R-Value 3. Surface Burning Characteristics: ASTM E84 or CAN/ULC S102.2 a. Maximum flame spread value: 25 b. Maximum smoke developed value: 50 B. Approved for use at the following locations: 1. Attic spaces constructed of shop-fabricated wood trusses C. Limitations: 1. Contractor shall provide a continuous vapor retarder to the underside of the shop-fabricated wood trusses. 2.03 VAPOR RETARDER A. Polyethylene vapor retarder: 6 mil thick polyethylene sheeting conforming to ASTM D4397 and having a water vapor permeance of 1 perm or less when tested in accordance in with ASTM E96. B. Tape for vapor retarder: Pressure sensitive tape of type recommended by vapor retarder manufacturer for sealing joints and penetration in vapor retarder. 2.04 INSULATION ACCESSORIES A. Adhesive for Bonding Insulation: Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation or mechanical anchors securely to substrates indicated without damaging or corroding either insulation, anchors, or substrates. B. Rigid Insulation Pin Anchors: Rigid Insulation manufacturer’s recommended large diameter washers to attach rigid insulation to substrate 1. Plate: Plastic plate washers or similar nonmetallic, noncorrosive material. 2. Screws: AISI 316 stainless steel screws to attach to wood framing. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA THERMAL INSULATION WOODARD & CURRAN 07 21 00-5 3. Plate Washer pins: Plate washers with integral plastic pin for insertion into CMU predrilled holes. 4. Products shall flatten into surface of rigid insulation for flush mounting of plywood wall sheathing to exterior side of rigid insulation. C. Protection Board: Pre-molded, semi rigid asphalt or fiber composition board, 1/4-inch thick, formed under heat and pressure, standard sizes D. Insulation Baffle: Preformed rigid fiberboard or plastic sheets designed and sized to fit between roof framing members and to provide cross ventilation between insulated attic spaces and vented eaves 2.05 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Examine substrates and conditions with installer present, for compliance with requirements of the Sections in which substrates and related work are specified and to determine if other conditions affecting performance of insulation are satisfactory. Do not proceed with installation of insulation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. B. Clean substrates of substances harmful to insulations or vapor retarders, including removal or projections that might puncture vapor retarders. C. Close off opening in cavities receiving poured in place insulation to prevent the escape of insulation. Provide bronze or stainless steel screen inside where openings must be maintained for drainage or ventilation. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Installation in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions. 3.03 INSTALLATION OF GENERAL BUILDING INSULATION A. Apply installation units to substrate by method indicated, complying with manufacturer's recommendations. If no specified method is indicated, bond units to substrate with adhesive or use mechanical anchorage to provide permanent placement and support of units. Where insulation units are not held tightly in place by adjacent materials on all sides, provide wire ties or another acceptable mechanical means to prevent displacement or sagging of insulation. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA THERMAL INSULATION WOODARD & CURRAN 07 21 00-6 B. Extend insulation to full thickness as indicated to envelop entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit tightly around obstructions, and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement. C. Apply a single layer of insulation of required thickness, unless otherwise shown or required to make up total thickness. D. Seal joints between closed cell, non-breathing insulation units by applying adhesive, mastic, or sealant to edges of each unit to form a tight seal as units are shoved into place. Fill voids in completed installation with adhesive, mastic, or sealant as recommended by insulation manufacturer. E. Set vapor retarder faced units with vapor retarder to warm side of construction, except as otherwise indicated. Do not obstruct ventilation spaces, except for fire stopping. Tape joints and ruptures in vapor retarder, and seal each continuous area of insulation to surrounding construction to ensure airtight installation. F. Place loose-fill insulation into spaces and onto surfaces as shown by machine blowing. Level horizontal applications to uniform thickness as indicated, lightly settle to uniform density, but do not excessively compact. G. Stuff loose-fill insulation into miscellaneous voids and cavity spaces where shown. Compact to approximately 40 percent of normal maximum volume, to a density of approximately 2.5 per cubic feet. 3.04 INSTALLATION OF PERIMETER AND UNDER SLAB RIGID INSULATION A. On vertical surfaces, set units in adhesive applied in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Use type of adhesive recommended by manufacturer of insulation. B. Protect below grade insulation on vertical surfaces from damage during back filling by application of protection board. Set in adhesive in accordance with recommendations of manufacturer of insulation. C. Protect top surface of horizontal insulation from damage during concrete work by application of protection board. 3.05 INSTALLATION OF EXTERIOR WALL RIGID INSULATION A. Attach rigid insulation between wall furring strips and attach to CMU or wood substrate with rigid insulation pin anchors at manufacturer’s recommended spacing. 3.06 INSTALLATION OF VAPOR RETARDER A. Extend vapor retarder to extremities of areas to be protected from vapor transmission. Secure in place with adhesives or other anchorage system as 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA THERMAL INSULATION WOODARD & CURRAN 07 21 00-7 indicated. Extend vapor retarder to cover miscellaneous voids in insulated substrates, including those filled with loose fiber insulation. B. Seal vertical joints in vapor retarders over framing by lapping not less than 2 wall studs. Fasten vapor retarders to framing at top, end, and bottom edges, at perimeter of wall openings, and at lap joints; space fasteners 16-inches on center. C. Seal overlapping joints in vapor retarders with adhesives or tap per vapor retarder manufacturer's printed directions. Seal butt joints and fasteners penetrations with tape of type recommended by vapor retarder manufacturer. Locate all joints over framing members or other solid substrates. D. Firmly attach vapor retarders to substrates with mechanical fasteners or adhesives as recommended by vapor retarder manufacturer E. Repair any tears or punctures in vapor retarders immediately before concealment by other work. Cover with tape or another layer of vapor retarder 3.07 PROTECTION A. Protect installed insulation and vapor retarders from damage due to harmful weather exposures, physical abuse, and other causes B. Provide temporary coverings or enclosures where insulation will be subject abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction immediately after installation 3.08 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. 3.09 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. END OF SECTION This page intentionally left blank 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA ASPHALT SHINGLES WOODARD & CURRAN 07 31 13-1 SECTION 07 31 13 ASPHALT SHINGLES (FILED SUB-BID REQUIRED) PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes 1. Provide the labor, tools, equipment, and materials necessary to furnish and install asphalt shingles in accordance with this Section and applicable reference standards listed in Article 1.03. B. Related Requirements 1. Section 07 60 00 – Flashing and Sheet Metal 1.02 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Measurement and Payment requirements: per Division 01 General Requirements. 1.03 REFERENCES A. Reference Standards 1. ASTM International (ASTM) a. ASTM D 1970 - Self-Adhering Polymer Modified Bituminous Sheet Materials Used as Steep Roofing Underlayment for Ice Dam Protection b. ASTM D 226 - Standard Specification for Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt Used in Roofing and Waterproofing c. ASTM D 3018 - Class A Asphalt Shingles Surfaced With Mineral Granules d. ASTM D 3462 - Asphalt Shingles Made From Glass Felt and Surfaced with Mineral Granules e. ASTM D 41 - Standard Specification for Asphalt Primer Used in Roofing, Damp proofing, and Waterproofing f. ASTM D 4586 - Asphalt Roof Cement, Asbestos-Free g. ASTM D 4869 - Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt Underlayment Used in Steep Slope Roofing h. ASTM E 108 - Fire Tests of Roof Coverings 2. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA ASPHALT SHINGLES WOODARD & CURRAN 07 31 13-2 a. UL 790 - Test Methods for Fire Tests of Roof Coverings b. UL 997 - Wind Resistance of Prepared Roof Covering Materials B. Definitions 1. Top Lap: That portion of shingle overlapping shingle in course below 2. Head Lap: The triple coverage portion of top lap which is the shortest distance from the butt edge of an overlapping shingle to the upper edge of a shingle in the second course below 3. Exposure: That portion of a shingle exposed to the weather after installation 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination, Sequencing, and Scheduling: per Division 01 General Requirements. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. B. Product Data: 1. Including type, weight, class, UL labels, and special types of underlayment and eave flashing. 2. Roof Underlayment C. Samples: Color charts D. Manufacturer's instructions for application 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. B. Deliver materials in the manufacturer's unopened bundles and containers bearing the manufacturer's brand name. Keep materials dry, completely covered, and protected from the weather. Roll goods shall be stored on end in an upright position or in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Immediately before laying, roofing felt shall be stored for 24 hours in an area maintained at a temperature not lower than 50 degrees F 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA ASPHALT SHINGLES WOODARD & CURRAN 07 31 13-3 1.08 SITE CONDITIONS A. Existing Conditions: per Division 01 General Requirements. 1.09 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty/Extended Correction Period: 1. Manufacturer's Warranty: Furnish the asphalt shingle manufacturer's lifetime warranty for the Landmark TL shingles. Shingles shall have lifetime-limited warranty with 10-year SureStart Protection. The warranty shall run directly to the Owner 2. Extended warranty: 5 years warranting the asphalt shingle roofing system, as installed, is free from defects in workmanship. 3. Wind warranty: Provide 120 mph wind warranty PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Shingles: Landmark TL by CertainTeed or approved equal, 13-1/4 inch by 40 inch three-piece laminated fiber glass, architectural-grade shingles consisting of the following properties; UL certified to meet ASTM D 3462, ASTM E 108 Class A external fire exposure label, wind warranty up to 110 miles per hour, weighing not less than 340 pounds per square. Color as selected by Owner from manufacturer's color charts. 1. Wind Warranty: Provide manufacturer’s starter and ridge components required per manufacturer’s 120 mph wind warranty. B. Roof Underlayment: 1. Self-adhering sheet membrane roof underlayment: Grace Ice and Water Shield manufactured by GCP Applied Technologies, Inc., or approved equal, with the following properties: a. Material: Cold applied, self-adhering membrane composed of a high strength polyethylene film coated on one side with a layer of rubberized asphalt adhesive and interwound with a disposable release sheet. An embossed, slip resistant surface is provided on the polyethylene. b. Color: Gray-black c. Membrane Thickness: 40 mil C. Nails for applying shingles and asphalt-saturated felt: stainless steel with sharp points and flat heads 3/8 inch to 7/16 inches in diameter. Shank diameter of nails 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA ASPHALT SHINGLES WOODARD & CURRAN 07 31 13-4 shall be a minimum of 0.105 inch, and a maximum of 0.135 inch, with garb or otherwise deformed for added pullout resistance. Nails shall be long enough to penetrate completely through, or extend a minimum of 3/4 inch into roof deck, whichever is less, when driven through materials to be fastened D. Asphalt Roof Cement: ASTM D 4586, Type II E. Asphalt Primer: ASTM D 41 F. Ventilators 1. Nailable plastic shingle over type ridge vents: Ridge vents shall be constructed of UV stabilized nailable rigid polypropylene material, approximately 1 foot wide and 1 inch thick, and shall be 4 foot long interlocking sections with self-aligning ends or corrugated polyethylene rigid roll or rigid strip ridge vent with aluminum wind deflectors on each side. Vents shall be designed to prevent infiltration of insects, rain, and snow 2. Nailable mesh shingle over type ridge vents: Ridge vents shall be constructed of UV stabilized nailable polyester mesh material, approximately one foot wide. Vents shall be designed to prevent infiltration of insects, rain, and snow 2.02 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 VERIFICATION OF CONDITIONS A. Ensure that roof deck is smooth, clean, dry, and without loose knots. Roof surfaces shall be firm and free from loose boards, large cracks, and projecting ends that might damage the roofing. Vents and other projections through roofs shall be properly flashed and secured in position, and projecting nails shall be driven flush with the deck 3.02 SURFACE PREPARATION A. Cover knotholes and cracks with sheet metal nailed securely to sheathing. Flash and secure vents and other roof projections, and drive projecting nails firmly home 3.03 APPLICATION A. Apply roofing materials as specified herein unless specified or recommended otherwise by shingle manufacturer's written instructions 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA ASPHALT SHINGLES WOODARD & CURRAN 07 31 13-5 B. Underlayment: Install Grace Ice and Water Shield over all roof sheathing according to manufacturer's written instructions. Underlayment shall be covered with shingles within one week of installation C. Drip Edges: Provide alum drip edges as specified in Section 07 60 00 applied directly on the wood deck at eaves and over the underlayment at rakes. Extend back from edge of deck a minimum of 3 inches, and secure with nails spaced a maximum of 4 inches on center along inner edge D. Starter Strip: Apply starter strip at eaves, using 9 inch wide strip of mineral- surfaced roll roofing of a color to match shingles. Optionally, use a row of shingles with tabs removed and trimmed to ensure that joints are not exposed at shingle cutouts. Apply starter strip along eaves, overlaying and finishing even with lower edge of eave flashing strip; fasten in a line parallel to, and 3 to 4 inches above eave edge. Place nails so top of nail is not exposed in cutouts of first course of shingles. Fasten with 6 nails per strip of shingles or space nails at 6 inches on center for roll roofing. Seal tabs of first course of shingles with asphalt roof cement as specified below E. Shingle Courses: Start first course with full shingle, and apply succeeding courses with joints staggered at thirds or halves. Butt-end joints of shingles shall not align vertically more often than every fourth course. Apply shingle courses as follows 1. Fastening: Do not drive fasteners into or above the factory-applied adhesive unless adhesive is located 5/8 inch or closer to top of cutouts. Place fasteners so they are concealed by shingle top lap and penetrate the head lap 2. Shingles applied with nails: Nominal 5 5/8 inch exposure. Apply each shingle with minimum of four nails. Place 1 nail, 1 inch from each end, and evenly space nails on a horizontal line a minimum of 5/8 inch above top of cutouts F. Hips and Ridges: Form with 12 by 12 inch shingles cut from 12 by 36 inch strip shingles. Bend shingles lengthwise down center with equal exposure on each side of hip or ridge. Lap shingles to provide a maximum 5-inch exposure, and nail each side in unexposed area 5-1/2 inches from butt, and one inch in from edge. Use CertainTeed's Shadow Ridge shingles of like color G. Flashing 1. Eave Flashing: Install Grace Bituthene over all roof sheathing. Bituthene shall overhang metal drip edge 1/4 inch to 3/8 inch 2. Vent and Stack Flashing: Apply shingles up to point where vent or stack pipe projects through roof, and cut nearest shingle to fit around pipe. Before applying shingles beyond pipe, prepare flange of metal pipe vent flashing as specified in Section 07 60 00, by applying a 1/8 inch thick coating of asphalt roof cement on bottom side of flashing flange. Slip flashing collar 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA ASPHALT SHINGLES WOODARD & CURRAN 07 31 13-6 and flange over pipe, and set coated flange in 1/16 inch coating of asphalt roof cement. After applying flashing flange, continue shingling up roof. Lap lower part of flange over shingles. Overlap flange with side and upper shingles. Fit shingles around pipe, and embed in 1/16 inch thick coating of asphalt roof cement where shingles overlay flange 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. 3.05 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. END OF SECTION 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA FLASHING AND SHEET METAL WOODARD & CURRAN 07 60 00-1 SECTION 07 60 00 FLASHING AND SHEET METAL (FILED SUB-BID REQUIRED) PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes 1. Provide the following finished sheet metal work in accordance with this Section and applicable reference standards listed in Article 1.03, including cutting, fitting, drilling, and other operations in connection with sheet metal required to accommodate the Work of other trades. a. Eave Vents b. Gutter and Downspouts c. Drip Edges d. Rigid Flashing and sheet metal where indicated on drawings and as required for weathertight construction. 2. Coordinate installation of sheet metal items used in conjunction with roofing Work to permit continuous roofing operations. B. Related Requirements 1. Section 06 20 00 – Finish Carpentry 1.02 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Measurement and payment requirements: per Division 01 General Requirements. 1.03 REFERENCES A. Reference Standards 1. MA 271 CMR: Rules and Regulations Governing Sheet Metal Workers 2. SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual 3. ASTM B69 Standard Specification for Rolled Zinc 4. ASTM B101 Standard Specification for Lead-Coated Copper Sheet and Strip for Building Construction 5. ASTM B209 Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA FLASHING AND SHEET METAL WOODARD & CURRAN 07 60 00-2 6. ASTM B221 Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination, Sequencing, and Scheduling: per Division 01 General Requirements. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. B. Product Data 1. Eave Vents 2. Gutters and Downspouts 3. Drip Edge 4. Rigid Flashing C. Samples and Mockups: color palettes for metal flashing. D. Manufacturer Instructions E. Closeout and Maintenance Material Submittals: per Division 01 General Requirements. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. B. Package and protect materials during shipment. Uncrate and inspect materials for damage, dampness, and wet-storage stains upon delivery to the Site. Remove from the Site and replace damaged materials that cannot be restored to like-new condition. Handle sheet metal items to avoid damage to surfaces, edges, and ends. Store materials in dry, weather-tight, ventilated areas until immediately before installation. 1.08 SITE CONDITIONS A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA FLASHING AND SHEET METAL WOODARD & CURRAN 07 60 00-3 PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Do not use lead, lead-coated metal, or galvanized steel. Use any metal listed by SMACNA Arch. Manual for a particular item, unless otherwise specified or indicated. Conform to the requirements specified and to the thicknesses and configurations established in SMACNA Arch. Manual for the materials. Different items need not be of the same metal, except that if copper is selected for any exposed item, all exposed items must be copper. B. Furnish sheet metal items in 8 to 10 foot lengths. Single pieces less than 8 feet long may be used to connect to factory-fabricated inside and outside corners, and at ends of runs. Factory fabricate corner pieces with minimum 12 inch legs. Provide accessories and other items essential to complete the sheet metal installation. Make these accessories of the same materials as the items to which they are applied. Fabricate sheet metal items of the materials specified below: 1. Exposed Sheet Metal Items: Must be of the same material. Consider the following as exposed sheet metal: cap, valley, steeped, base, and eave flashings and related accessories. 2. Aluminum Alloy Sheet and Plate: ASTM B209, Baked enamel finish; 0.032-inch thick except as otherwise indicated. Brake form to profiles needed. 3. Fasteners: Use the same metal or a metal compatible with the item fastened. Use stainless steel fasteners to fasten dissimilar materials. 2.02 FLASHING TAPE A. Specified under Section 06 20 00. 2.03 EAVE VENT A. Prepainted aluminum continuous eave soffit vents, 2-inches wide, 8-ft lengths, and a min 68 square inches of net free area per 8-ft length. 2.04 GUTTERS AND DOWNSPOUTS A. Gutters: 6” wide x 4 ½” deep prepainted aluminum K-style gutters manufactured from 0.032-inch thick coil stock. B. Downspouts: 3”x4” rectangular downspouts manufactured from 0.019-inch thick coil stock. C. Accessories: Provide rectangular elbows, fittings, attachment brackets, and AISI 316 stainless steel screws to attach to building. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA FLASHING AND SHEET METAL WOODARD & CURRAN 07 60 00-4 D. Color: Submit manufacturer color charts for owner selection of colors. 2.05 DRIP EDGE A. Manufactured from prefinished aluminum coil stock manufactured from 0.032- inch thick coil stock. B. Color: Submit manufacturer color charts for owner selection of colors. 2.06 RIGID FLASHING A. Material: AISI 316L stainless steel B. Thickness: 0.018-inch, 26 gage. C. Rigid flashing is required at the following locations and where indicated on drawings: 1. At the head of all framed openings for exterior doors 2. Continuous along all roof rakes 3. Where otherwise indicated on Drawings. 2.07 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Workmanship: Make lines and angles sharp and true, forming weather tight construction without waves, warps, buckles, fastening stresses or distortion, which allows for expansion and contraction. Free exposed surfaces from visible wave, warp, buckle, and tool marks. Fold back exposed edges neatly to form a 1/2 inch hem on the concealed side. Make sheet metal exposed to the weather watertight with provisions for expansion and contraction. 1. Make surfaces to receive sheet metal plumb and true, clean, even, smooth, dry, and free of defects and projections. For installation of items not shown in detail or not covered by Specifications conform to the applicable requirements of SMACNA Arch. Manual, Architectural Sheet Metal Manual. Provide sheet metal flashing in the angles formed where roof decks abut walls, curbs, ventilators, pipes, or other vertical surfaces and wherever indicated and necessary to make the Work watertight. B. Nailing: Confine nailing of sheet metal generally to sheet metal having a maximum width of 18 inch. Confine nailing of flashing to one edge only. Space 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA FLASHING AND SHEET METAL WOODARD & CURRAN 07 60 00-5 nails evenly not over 3 inch on center and approximately 1/2 inch from edge unless otherwise specified or indicated. Face nailing will not be permitted. Where sheet metal is applied to other than wood surfaces, include in Shop Drawings, the locations for sleepers and nailing strips required to secure the Work. C. Cleats: Provide cleats for sheet metal 18 inch and over in width. Space cleats evenly not over 12 inch on center unless otherwise specified or indicated. Unless otherwise specified, provide cleats of 2 inch wide by 3 inch long and of the same material and thickness as the sheet metal being installed. Secure one end of the cleat with two nails and the cleat folded back over the nail heads. Lock the other end into the seam. Where the fastening is to be made to concrete or masonry, use screws and drive in expansion shields set in concrete or masonry. D. Bolts, Rivets, and Screws: Install bolts, rivets, and screws where indicated or required. Provide compatible washers where required to protect surface of sheet metal and to provide a watertight connection. Make joints in aluminum sheets 0.050 inch or less in thickness. E. Seams: Straight and uniform in width and height. 1. Flat-lock Seams: Finish not less than 3/4 inch wide. 2. Lap Seams: Overlap seams not soldered, not less than 3 inch. 3. Flat Seams: Make seams in the direction of the flow. F. Aluminum Drip Edge: Provide an aluminum drip edge, designed to allow water run-off to drip free of underlying construction, at eaves and rakes prior to the application of roofing shingles. Apply directly on the wood deck at the eaves and over the underlay along the rakes. Extend back from the edge of the deck not more than 3 inch and secure with compatible nails spaced not more than 10 inch on center along upper edge. G. Flashing at Roof Penetrations and Equipment Supports: Provide pre-fabricated flashing for all pipes, ducts, and conduits projecting through the roof surface and for equipment supports, guy wire anchors, and similar items supported by or attached to the roof deck. H. Stepped Flashing: Stepped flashing shall be installed where sloping roofs surfaced with shingles abut vertical surfaces. Separate pieces of base flashing shall be placed in alternate shingle courses. 3.02 PROTECTION FROM CONTACT WITH DISSIMILAR MATERIALS A. Refer to Specification Section 01 70 00, Paragraph 1.02F for electrolytic corrosion prevention. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA FLASHING AND SHEET METAL WOODARD & CURRAN 07 60 00-6 B. Copper or Copper-bearing Alloys: Paint with heavy-bodied bituminous paint surfaces in contact with dissimilar metal, or separate the surfaces by means of moisture-proof building felts. C. Aluminum: Do not allow aluminum surfaces in direct contact with other metals except stainless steel, zinc, or zinc coating. Where aluminum contacts another metal, paint the dissimilar metal with a primer followed by two coats of aluminum paint. Where drainage from a dissimilar metal passes over aluminum, paint the dissimilar metal with a non-lead pigmented paint. D. Metal Surfaces: Paint surfaces in contact with mortar, concrete, or other masonry materials with alkali-resistant coatings such as heavy-bodied bituminous paint. 3.03 CLEANING A. Clean exposed sheet metal Work at completion of installation. Remove grease and oil films, handling marks, contamination from steel wool, fittings and drilling debris, and scrub-clean. Free the exposed metal surfaces of dents, creases, waves, scratch marks, and solder or weld marks. 3.04 REPAIRS A. Scratches, abrasions, and minor surface defects of finish may be repaired in accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions and as approved. Repair damaged surfaces caused by scratches, blemishes, and variations of color and surface texture. Replace items which cannot be repaired. 3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. 3.06 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. END OF SECTION 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA JOINT SEALANTS WOODARD & CURRAN 07 92 00-1 SECTION 07 92 00 JOINT SEALANTS (FILED SUB-BID REQUIRED) PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes 1. Provide joint sealant as shown on Drawings and in accordance with this Section and applicable reference standards listed in Article 1.03. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 03 30 20 – Concrete Placing, Curing, Finishing 2. Section 04 20 00 – Unit Masonry 1.02 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Measurement and payment requirements: per Division 01 General Requirements. 1.03 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination, Sequencing, and Scheduling: per Division 01 General Requirements. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. B. Product Data 1. Shelf Life 2. Curing Time 3. Mixing and Application Instructions 4. Primer Data C. Certificates 1. Material Safety Data Sheets 2. Certification of Compliance 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA JOINT SEALANTS WOODARD & CURRAN 07 92 00-2 D. Closeout and Maintenance Material Submittals: per Division 01 General Requirements. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. B. Compatibility with Substrate: Verify that each of the sealants are compatible for use with joint substrates. C. Joint Tolerance: Provide joint tolerances in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. D. Mock-Up: Project personnel is Responsible for installing sealants in mock-up prepared by other trades, using materials and techniques approved for use on the Project. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. B. Deliver materials to the Site in unopened manufacturers' external shipping containers, with brand names, date of manufacture, color, and material designation clearly marked thereon. Label elastomeric sealant containers to identify type, class, grade, and use. Carefully handle and store materials to prevent inclusion of foreign materials or subjection to sustained temperatures exceeding 90 degrees F or less than 0 degrees F. 1.07 SITE CONDITIONS A. Existing Conditions: per Division 01 General Requirements. 1.08 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS A. Apply sealant when the ambient temperature is between 40 and 90 degrees F. 1.09 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty/Extended Correction Period: 5 years against failure of sealant and against water penetration through each sealed joint. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 SEALANTS A. Typical Interior Sealant: Provide polyurethane sealants that meet requirements of ASTM C 920, Type M, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT, M, G, A, O. Locations and color of sealant for the following: 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA JOINT SEALANTS WOODARD & CURRAN 07 92 00-3 LOCATION COLOR Small voids between walls or partitions and adjacent door frames, built-in or surface-mounted equipment and fixtures, and similar items. As selected by Engineer Perimeter of frames at doors, windows, and access panels which adjoin exposed interior concrete and masonry surfaces. As selected by Engineer Joints of interior masonry walls and partitions which adjoin columns, pilasters, concrete walls, and exterior walls unless otherwise detailed. As selected by Engineer Interior locations, not otherwise indicated or specified, where small voids exist between materials specified to be painted. As selected by Engineer . Joints occurring where substrates change. As selected by Engineer B. Exterior Sealant: For joints in vertical and horizontal surfaces, polyurethane sealant that meets requirements of ASTM C 920, Type M, Grade NS, Class 25, Use M, G, A, O. Provide locations and colors of sealant as follows: LOCATION COLOR Joints and recesses formed where frames and subsills of windows, doors, louvers, and vents adjoin masonry, concrete, or metal frames. Use sealant at both exterior and interior surfaces of exterior wall penetrations. As selected by Engineer Joints between new and existing exterior masonry walls. As selected by Engineer Expansion and control joints. As selected by Engineer Interior face of expansion joints in exterior concrete or masonry walls. As selected by Engineer Voids where items pass through exterior As selected 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA JOINT SEALANTS WOODARD & CURRAN 07 92 00-4 walls. by Engineer Metal reglets, where flashing is inserted into masonry joints, and where flashing is penetrated by coping dowels. As selected by Engineer Metal-to-metal joints where sealant is indicated or specified. As selected by Engineer C. General Sealant: 1. Floor Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type M, Grade NS, Class 25, Use T. Provide locations and colors of sealant as follows: LOCATION COLOR Seats of metal thresholds for exterior doors. As selected by Engineer Control and expansion joints in floors, slabs, and walkways. As selected by Engineer 2. Preformed Sealant: Provide preformed sealant of polybutylene or isoprene-butylene based pressure sensitive weather resistant tape or bead sealant capable of sealing out moisture, air and dust when installed as recommended by the manufacturer. At temperatures from minus 34 to plus 71 degrees C (30 to plus 160 degrees F), the sealant must be non-bleeding and no loss of adhesion. 2.02 PRIMERS A. Provide a non-staining, quick-drying type and consistency recommended by the sealant manufacturer for the particular application. 2.03 BOND BREAKERS A. Provide the type and consistency recommended by the sealant manufacturer to prevent adhesion of the sealant to backing or to bottom of the joint. 2.04 SEALANT BACK-UP ROD A. Provide polyethylene foams free from oil or other staining elements as recommended by sealant manufacturer. Provide 25 to 33 percent oversized backing for closed cell, unless otherwise indicated. Make backstop material compatible with sealant. Do not use oakum and other types of absorptive materials as backstops. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA JOINT SEALANTS WOODARD & CURRAN 07 92 00-5 2.05 CLEANING SOLVENTS A. Provide type(s) recommended by the sealant manufacturer except for aluminum and bronze surfaces that will be in contact with sealant. 2.06 SOURCE OF QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 SURFACE PREPARATION A. Clean surfaces from dirt frost, moisture, grease, oil, wax, lacquer, paint, or other foreign matter that would tend to destroy or impair adhesion. Remove oil and grease with solvent. Surfaces must be wiped dry with clean cloths. When resealing an existing joint, remove existing calk or sealant prior to applying new sealant. For surface types not listed below, contact sealant manufacturer for specific recommendations. B. Steel Surfaces: Remove loose mill scale by sandblasting or, if sandblasting is impractical or would damage finish Work, scraping and wire brushing. Remove protective coatings by sandblasting or using a residue-free solvent. C. Aluminum or Bronze Surfaces: Remove temporary protective coatings from surfaces that will be in contact with sealant. When masking tape is used as a protective coating, remove tape and any residual adhesive just prior to sealant application. For removing protective coatings and final cleaning, use non-staining solvents recommended by the manufacturer of the item(s) containing aluminum or bronze surfaces. D. Concrete and Masonry Surfaces: Where surfaces have been treated with curing compounds, oil, or other such materials, remove materials by sandblasting or wire brushing. Remove laitance, efflorescence and loose mortar from the joint cavity. E. Wood Surfaces: Keep wood surfaces to be in contact with sealants free of splinters and sawdust or other loose particles. 3.02 SEALANT PREPARATION A. Do not add liquids, solvents, or powders to the sealant. Mix multi-component elastomeric sealants in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.03 APPLICATION A. Joint Width-To-Depth Ratios: 1. Acceptable Ratios: 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA JOINT SEALANTS WOODARD & CURRAN 07 92 00-6 JOINT WIDTH JOINT DEPTH Minimum Maximum For metal, glass, or other nonporous surfaces: 1/4 inch (minimum) 1/4 inch 1/4 inch over 1/4 inch 1/2 of width Equal to width For wood, concrete, or masonry: 1/4 inch (minimum) 1/4 inch 1/4 inch Over 1/4 inch to 1/2 inch 1/4 inch Equal to width Over 1/2 inch to 2 inch 1/2 inch 5/8 inch Over 2 inch. (As recommended by sealant manufacturer) 2. Unacceptable Ratios: Where joints of acceptable width-to-depth ratios have not been provided, clean out joints to acceptable depths and grind or cut to acceptable widths without damage to the adjoining Work. Grinding is not required on metal surfaces. B. Masking Tape: Place masking tape on the finish surface on one or both sides of a joint cavity to protect adjacent finish surfaces from primer or sealant smears. Remove masking tape within 10 minutes after joint has been filled and tooled. C. Backstops: Install backstops dry and free of tears or holes. Tightly pack the back or bottom of joint cavities with backstop material to provide a joint of the depth specified. Install backstops in the following locations: 1. Where indicated. 2. Where backstop is not indicated but joint cavities exceed the acceptable maximum depths specified in paragraph entitled, "Joint Width-to-Depth Ratios.” D. Primer: Immediately prior to application of the sealant, clean out loose particles from joints. Where recommended by sealant manufacturer, apply primer to joints in concrete masonry units, wood, and other porous surfaces in accordance with sealant manufacturer's instructions. Do not apply primer to exposed finish surfaces. E. Bond Breaker: Provide bond breakers to the back or bottom of joint cavities, as recommended by the sealant manufacturer for each type of joint and sealant used, to prevent sealant from adhering to these surfaces. Carefully apply the bond 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA JOINT SEALANTS WOODARD & CURRAN 07 92 00-7 breaker to avoid contamination of adjoining surfaces or breaking bond with surfaces other than those covered by the bond breaker. F. Sealants: Provide a sealant compatible with the material(s) to which it is applied. Do not use a sealant that has exceeded shelf life or has jelled and can not be discharged in a continuous flow from the gun. Apply the sealant in accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions with a gun having a nozzle that fits the joint width. Force sealant into joints to fill the joints solidly without air pockets. Tool sealant after application to ensure adhesion. Make sealant uniformly smooth and free of wrinkles. Upon completion of sealant application, roughen partially filled or unfilled joints, apply sealant, and tool smooth as specified. Apply sealer over the sealant when and as specified by the sealant manufacturer. 3.04 PROTECTION AND CLEANING A. Protection: Protect areas adjacent to joints from sealant smears. Masking tape may be used for this purpose if removed 5 to 10 minutes after the joint is filled. B. Final Cleaning: Upon completion of sealant application, remove remaining smears and stains and leave the Work in a clean and neat condition. 1. Masonry and Other Porous Surfaces: Immediately scrape off fresh sealant that has been smeared on masonry and rub clean with a solvent as recommended by the sealant manufacturer. Allow excess sealant to cure for 24 hour then remove by wire brushing or sanding. 2. Metal and Other Non-Porous Surfaces: Remove excess sealant with a solvent-moistened cloth. 3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. 3.06 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. END OF SECTION This page intentionally left blank 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA FIBERGLASS DOORS AND FRAMES WOODARD & CURRAN 08 16 15-1 SECTION 08 16 15 FIBERGLASS DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes 1. Provide fiberglass doors and frames in accordance with this Section and applicable reference standards listed in Article 1.03. B. Design Requirements: Design door opening assemblies to resist failure from corrosion. Design door opening assemblies to have minimum fiberglass content of 30 percent mean, by weight. C. Performance Requirements: 1. Door Opening Assemblies a. Door opening assemblies: Maximum flame spread 25 in accordance with ASTM E 84, self-extinguishing in accordance with ASTM D 635. b. Door opening assemblies: FDA accepted. c. Door opening assemblies: USDA accepted. D. Related Requirements: 1. Section 04 20 00 – Unit Masonry 2. Section 08 71 00 – Door Hardware 3. Section 08 81 00 – Glass Glazing 1.02 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Measurement and payment requirements: per Division 01 General Requirements. 1.03 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination, Sequencing, and Scheduling: per Division 01 General Requirements. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. B. Product Data 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA FIBERGLASS DOORS AND FRAMES WOODARD & CURRAN 08 16 15-2 1. Manufacturer's printed product data indicating characteristics of products specified in this section. 2. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions 3. Manufacturer's standard warranty documents, executed by manufacturer's representative, countersigned by Contractor. C. Shop Drawings 1. Fabrication and Installation Drawings 2. Plans: Indicate location of each door opening assembly in Project. 3. Elevations: Dimensioned elevation of each type of door opening assembly in Project, indicate sizes and locations of door hardware, lites and louvers, if specified. 4. Details: Installation details of each type installation condition in Project, indicate installation details of glazing, if specified. 5. Schedule: Indicate each door opening assembly in Project, cross-reference to plans, elevations, and details. D. Closeout and Maintenance Material Submittals: per Division 01 General Requirements. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. B. Source: Provide doors and frames by a single manufacturer for the entire Project. C. Manufacturer Qualifications: Manufacturer: Minimum twenty (20) continuous years documented experience producing products specified in this section. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. B. Deliver, handle and store doors and frames at the job Site in such a manner as to prevent damage. Doors shall not be received before the building is enclosed. Only remove cartons upon arrival of doors at job Site if cartons are wet or damaged. Doors shall be stored out of weather and/or extreme temperatures. The doors shall be stored in a vertical position on blocking, clear of the floor and with blocking between the doors to permit air circulation between the doors. All damaged or otherwise unsuitable doors and frames, when so ascertained, shall be immediately removed from the job site. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA FIBERGLASS DOORS AND FRAMES WOODARD & CURRAN 08 16 15-3 1.07 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer's 10-year warranty against failure due to corrosion from specified environment. 1.08 SITE CONDITIONS A. Existing Conditions: per Division 01 General Requirements. B. Coastal Construction: FRP doors and frames will be used for building construction within 1,000 feet from the coast. Provide materials that will withstand salt-laden air and coastal environments. 1. Screws and hardware shall be AISI 316L stainless steel. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Products manufactured by the following companies complying with these Specifications will be acceptable for interior and exterior doors: 1. CORRIM Company, Oshkosh, Wisconsin 54901. Telephone: (920) 231-2000. Fax: (920) 231-2238. Website: www.corrim.com 2. Chem-Pruf Door Company, Brownsville, TX 78521. Telephone: 1-800-444-6924. Fax: (956) 544-7943. Website: www.chem-pruf.com 3. Simon Door Company, Brownsville, TX 78523 Telephone: (866) 894-7511. Fax: (956) 831-7530 Website: www.simondoor.com 4. Approved Equal B. Products manufactured that have successfully completed ANSI A250.4 Mod. Swing Cycle test in excess of 1,000,000 cycles, with no failure of any design features of the door. 2.02 DOORS A. Door Fabrication FRP (Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic) Face Sheets: 1. Face Sheets: Standard face sheets shall be manufactured using a corrosion resistant resin system with light stabilizing additives. The resin shall be reinforced with fiberglass. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA FIBERGLASS DOORS AND FRAMES WOODARD & CURRAN 08 16 15-4 2. Face sheets shall be 0.070” to 0.125” thickness. Standard being 0.120”. Total door thickness to be a nominal 1-3/4”. 3. Finish: a. Color shall be selected by Engineer from manufacturer's full range of colors, including all available standard and optional colors. b. Minimum 15 mil thick coverage, +/– 3 mils. c. Smooth, seamless finish. B. Internal Construction: Polyurethane Foam Core, a 1-1/2” thick rigid block of polyurethane or a 2 psf expanded polyurethane foam shall be laminated to the interior or the panels. The “R-value” shall be 11–12. C. Stiles and Rails: Stiles and rails shall be 1-1/2” square pultruded fiberglass tubes. A polyester-based resin filled with 1/4” chopped glass strands and aerosil shall be used for reinforcements and corner blocks, etc. The bottom rail shall allow 1-1/4 inches of height alterability without loss of the panel’s integrity. No metal or wood lumber reinforcements will be allowed. D. Hardware Preparations: Hardware is specified in Section 08 71 00. 1. Reinforcement Blocking: a. Lockset – non-swelling polymer blocking. b. Surface mount hardware – non-swelling polymer blocking. c. Thru-bolted hardware – non-swelling polymer blocking. 2. Hardware: a. Full mortise hinges – non-swelling polymer blocking. b. Mortise locksets – to suit template provided. c. Exit devices – to suit template provided. 3. All doors shall be mortised and reinforced to allow application of hinges and locks, in accordance with hardware schedule and manufacturer’s templates. The hinges shall be attached by using AISI 316L stainless steel wood screws. Pilot holes shall be in strict accordance to manufacturer’s recommendations. E. Door Accessories 1. Glazing: Glass and glazing is specified in Section 08 81 00. Glazing support structures shall ensure that the glass area is weather sealed as not to permit moisture to enter the core of the door. This is to be accomplished by utilizing pultruded FRP tubes to fabricate the window opening. Glazing must allow for ready access for repair, in the event of damage or 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA FIBERGLASS DOORS AND FRAMES WOODARD & CURRAN 08 16 15-5 replacement, without affecting the sealed integrity of the cutout in the door panel itself. Openings cut directly into the core material will not be allowed. 2. Fasteners: Provide AISI 316L stainless steel fasteners as required for glazing openings and louvers. 3. Transoms: All transom panels will be identical to the doors in materials, thickness, color and reinforcement. 4. Astragals: Astragals for pairs of doors to be fabricated of FRP material of manufacturer’s standard flat design. 2.03 FRAMES A. Frame Fabrication FRP (Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic): 1. Jamb Depth: Refer to Architectural Drawings. 2. Face Dimension: 2” standard. Headers available in 2” and 4.” Refer to Architectural Drawings 3. Return: 7/16” 4. Stop: 5/8” 5. Rabbet: 1-15/16” 6. Corner Miter: Head and Jamb members shall be standard 45 deg. miter, providing a neatly mitered corner connection, fabricated for Knocked Down (KD) field assembly. 7. Pultrusion: In compliance with pultrusion industry standards. B. Reinforcements and Braces/Supports: 1. Corner Reinforcement: 4” x 4” x 5-3/8” x 1/4” thick pultruded fiberglass angle. Attached to head bar at factory using stainless steel screws or suitable polymer rivets. 2. Mortise Hinge Reinforcement: 1-1/2” x 7” x 1/4” thick polymer. Attached to frame by means of bonding and stainless steel countersunk screws. 3. Closer Reinforcement: Same as mortise hinge reinforcement, less screws. 4. Strike Reinforcement: 1-1/2” x 9” x 3/4” thick polymer material. Attached to frame by means of bonding and stainless steel countersunk screws or suitable polymer rivets. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA FIBERGLASS DOORS AND FRAMES WOODARD & CURRAN 08 16 15-6 C. Anchoring Systems: “T”-Strap or Wire Anchor for masonry construction or concealed AISI 316L stainless steel anchors per Contractor's option. D. Finish: Gel coat: 15 mils thick, +/- 3 mils on all exposed surfaces. Color to match door unless otherwise indicated. 2.04 FABRICATION A. Fabricate FRP doors and frames as shown on the Drawings and in accordance with best shop practices. Frames shall be rigid, neat in appearance and free from defects. Field measurements shall be taken as required for coordinating with adjoining Work. B. Form exposed surfaces free from warp, wave and buckle, with all corners square, unless otherwise shown. Set each member in proper alignment and relationship to other members with all surfaces straight and in a true plane. C. Reinforce members and joints with plates, tubes or angles for rigidity and strength. D. Doors and frames shall be mortised and reinforces for hardware in accordance with the hardware manufacturer’s instructions and templates. The reinforcing shall be designed to receive hinges, locks, strikes, closures, etc. E. Furnish at least three (3) metal anchors or polymer spacers in each jamb of frames up to 84” high and one (1) additional anchor for each 24” in height above 84”, in shapes, sizes and spacing shown or required for anchorage into adjoining wall construction. Fabricate joint anchor of stainless steel. F. Terminate bottom of frames at the indicated finished floor level. G. Provide clearance for doors of 1/8” at jambs and heads; 1/4” clearance above threshold. 2.05 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Installer shall examine the substrate and conditions under which fiberglass reinforced plastic Work is to be installed and notify the general Contractor in writing of any conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the Work. Do not proceed with the Work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the installer. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA FIBERGLASS DOORS AND FRAMES WOODARD & CURRAN 08 16 15-7 3.02 INSTALLATION A. General; Install FRP doors, frames and accessories in accordance with fabrication and installation Drawings, NFPA 80 standards at fire-rated openings, and as herein specified. Installation to be similar to that of hollow metal doors and frames, and in accordance with FRP manufacturer’s installation instructions. B. Frame Installation: Place frames prior to construction of enclosed walls and ceilings. Set frames accurately in position, plumed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is completed, remove temporary braces and spreaders leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged. Frame must not be drilled for bracing supports as finish may be damaged. C. In masonry construction, locate three (3) wall anchors per jamb at hinge and strike levels. Frames may be grouted full of mortar at jambs and anchors shall be built into the joints as walls are laid up. A continuous bead of silicone sealant is to be applied between the head and jamb at the miter joint. D. Door Installation: Fit FRP doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified in this section. 3.03 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Diagonal Distortion: 1/4” measured with a straight edge, corner to corner. Maximum measurable plane is 4-0’ x 7-0’. 3.04 ADJUSTING A. At substantial completion, adjust all operable components to ensure proper installation and that they function smooth and freely. 3.05 CLEANING A. Remove dirt and excess sealant from exposed surfaces. Follow the manufacturer’s recommended cleaning techniques and procedures for cleaning all surfaces. Use only cleaning products that will not scratch or damage the surfaces, and are recommended by the manufacturer. B. Remove debris from Project Site. 3.06 WARRANTY A. To include ten (10) years free from defects in material and workmanship from date of shipment, and 25 years from degradation of failure due to corrosion from date of shipment, provided that the structural integrity of the doors and frames have not been violated or compromised. No unauthorized cuts, bores, or other structural alterations affecting the core of the door, or the structure of the frame. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA FIBERGLASS DOORS AND FRAMES WOODARD & CURRAN 08 16 15-8 B. Normal wear and tear, or physical abuse of a specific installation is not part of this warranty. 3.07 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. 3.08 STARTUP & COMMISSIONING A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. 3.09 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. END OF SECTION 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA OVERHEAD COILING DOORS WOODARD & CURRAN 08 33 23-1 SECTION 08 33 23 OVERHEAD COILING DOORS PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes 1. Provide overhead coiling doors in accordance with this Section and applicable reference standards listed in Article 1.03. a. Headworks Building Overhead Coiling Door, insulated, motor operated, with high wind load upgrade package. 2. Performance Requirements a. Wind Loads: Design door assembly to withstand wind/suction load of 40 PSF without damage to door or assembly components in conformance with ASTM E330. Required for 120 MPH wind loads per ASCE 7-05 and State Code. b. Thermal Performance: Maximum door Assembly U-factor=0.84 per NFRC 102. c. Operation: Design door assembly, including operator, to operate for not less than 20,000 cycles. d. Products requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. e. Safety Features: Doors with electric operators shall comply with UL 325. f. Air Infiltration: Less than 1.00 cfm/ft2. g. All enclosures, motors, control stations, safety devices, and wiring shall conform to NEMA 7 & 9, explosion-proof construction. 1.02 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Measurement and payment requirements: per Division 01 General Requirements. 1.03 REFERENCES A. Reference Standards 1. American Architectural Manufacturers Association (AAMA) a. AAMA 611 Voluntary Specification for Anodized Architectural Aluminum 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA OVERHEAD COILING DOORS WOODARD & CURRAN 08 33 23-2 b. AAMA 2603 Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for Pigmented Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels 2. American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE) a. ASCE 7-05 Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures 3. ASTM International (ASTM) a. ASTM A653 Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process b. ASTM A666 Standard Specification for Austenitic Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar. c. ASTM A924 Standard Specification for General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Metallic-Coated by the Hop-Dip Process d. ASTM B209 Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate e. ASTM B221 Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes f. ASTM E84 Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials g. ASTM E330 Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Doors, Skylights and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference. 4. National Association Of Architectural Metal Manufacturers (NAAMM) a. NAAMM AMP 500 Metal Finishes Manual 5. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) a. NEMA 250 Enclosures for Electrical Equipment b. NEMA MG 1 Motors and Generators 6. National Fenestration Rating Council (NFRC) a. NFRC 102 Test Procedure for Measuring the Steady-State Thermal Transmittance of Fenestration Systems 7. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) a. NFPA 70 National Electrical Code 8. Underwriters Laboratory (UL) 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA OVERHEAD COILING DOORS WOODARD & CURRAN 08 33 23-3 a. UL 325 Door, Drapery, Gate, Louver, and Window Operators and Systems. 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination, Sequencing, and Scheduling: per Division 01 General Requirements. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with the Division 01 General Requirements. B. Product Data: For each type and size of overhead coiling door and accessory, include the following 1. Construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components, profiles for slats, metal gauges including minimum metal decimal thickness, and finishes 2. Rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished accessories C. Shop Drawings 1. For each installation and for special components not dimensioned or detailed in manufacturer's product data. Include Plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other Work 2. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection D. Samples 1. Color Charts for selection of powder coat finish E. Certificates 1. NFRC test report confirming maximum assembly U-factor of 0.84. 2. UL 325 compliance certificate 3. Air Leakage Certificate F. Closeout and Maintenance Material Submittals: per Division 01 General Requirements. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA OVERHEAD COILING DOORS WOODARD & CURRAN 08 33 23-4 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. B. Installer qualifications: Provide manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for both installation and maintenance of units required for this Project C. Source limitations: Obtain overhead coiling doors from single source from single manufacturer. Obtain operators and controls from overhead coiling door manufacturer D. Electrical components, devices and accessories: listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. 1.08 SITE CONDITIONS A. Existing Conditions: per Division 01 General Requirements. 1.09 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer’s limited door warranty for 2 years for all parts and components except counterbalance springs and finish to be free of defects for 2-years or 20,000 cycles, whichever occurs first. B. Powder Coat Finish: 5-year finish warranty against fading, cracking, blistering, flaking or peeling of the coating system. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 DOOR ASSEMBLY MANUFACTURERS A. Cookson Company B. Cornell Iron Works, Inc. C. Overhead Door Corporation D. Raynor E. Wayne-Dalton Corp. F. Or approved Equal 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA OVERHEAD COILING DOORS WOODARD & CURRAN 08 33 23-5 2.02 DOOR MATERIALS AND CONSTRUCTION A. Fabricate overhead coiling-door curtain of interlocking metal slats, designed to withstand wind loading indicated, in a continuous length for width of door without splices. Unless otherwise indicated, provide slats of thickness and mechanical properties recommended by door manufacturer for performance, size, and type of door indicated, and as follows 1. Aluminum door curtain slats: ASTM B209 sheet or ASTM B221 extrusions, alloy, and temper standard with manufacturer for type of use and finish indicated. a. Front Slat Thickness: 0.040-inch minimum b. Back Slat Thickness: 0.024-inch minimum 2. Insulation: Fill slat cavity with manufacturer's standard rigid, foamed-in- place, CFC-free polyurethane thermal insulation complying with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 75 and 450, respectively, according to ASTM E84. Enclose insulation completely within slat faces. a. Door assembly U-Factor: 0.84 max per NFRC 102. 3. Weatherseals: Air infiltration package including: a. Guide Cover and guide cap b. Interior and Exterior EPDM triple finned guide weatherseal c. Finned lintel brush seal and vinyl bottom seal d. Or, approved weatherseals to comply with air infiltration performance requirements. 4. Performance Requirements: Meet or exceed performance requirements listed in Article 1.01. B. Windlocks: Malleable-iron casings galvanized after fabrication, secured to curtain slats with galvanized rivets or high-strength nylon. Provide locks on not less than alternate curtain slats for curtain alignment and resistance against lateral movement and to resist wind load performance requirements. C. Bottom Bar: Two angles, not less than 1-1/2 inches by 1-1/2 inches by 1/8 inch thick, fabricated from manufacturer's standard aluminum extrusions to match curtain slats and finish. D. Curtain jamb guides: Manufacturer's standard angles or channels with short slots for guide adjustment, weatherseals, removable stops, and continuous bar for holding windlocks. 1. Material: Stainless steel or aluminum 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA OVERHEAD COILING DOORS WOODARD & CURRAN 08 33 23-6 2. Thickness: 3/16-inch minimum E. Slot bolt holes for guide adjustment. Guides shall be weather-stripped with weather seal at each jamb, on both the exterior and interior of the curtain. Provide removable stops on guides to prevent overtravel of curtain and a continuous bar for holding windlocks. 2.03 HOOD A. Form sheet metal hood to enclose coiled curtain and operating mechanism entirely at opening head. Contour to fit end brackets to which hood is attached. Roll and reinforce top and bottom edges for stiffness. Form closed ends for surface-mounted hoods and fascia for any portion of between-jamb mounting that projects beyond wall face. Equip hood with intermediate support brackets as required to prevent sagging. 1. Aluminum: 0.040 inch thick aluminum sheet complying with ASTM B209, of alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer and finisher for type of use and finish indicated 2.04 COUNTERBALANCING MECHANISM A. Counterbalance doors by means of manufacturer's standard mechanism with an adjustable tension, steel helical torsion spring mounted around a steel shaft and contained in a spring barrel connected to top of curtain with barrel rings. Use grease-sealed bearings or self-lubricating graphite bearings for rotating members 1. Counterbalance barrel: Fabricate spring barrel of manufacturer's standard hot-formed, structural-quality, welded or seamless carbon-steel pipe, of sufficient diameter and wall thickness to support rolled-up curtain without distortion of slats and to limit barrel deflection to not more than 0.03 inch per foot of span under full load 2. Spring balance: One or more oil-tempered, heat-treated steel helical torsion springs. Size springs to counterbalance weight of curtain, with uniform adjustment accessible from outside barrel. Secure ends of springs to barrel and shaft with cast-steel barrel plugs 3. Torsion rod for counterbalance shaft: Fabricate of manufacturer's standard cold-rolled steel, sized to hold fixed spring ends and carry torsional load 2.05 BRACKETS A. Stainless steel brackets and hardware to support counterbalance, curtain, and hood assemblies. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA OVERHEAD COILING DOORS WOODARD & CURRAN 08 33 23-7 2.06 FINISHES A. General: Comply with NAAMM AMP 500 "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. C. Coating Descriptions: 1. Mill Finish: Uncoated aluminum, not permitted. 2. Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A41, Class I, 0.018 mm or thicker for aluminum substrates. 3. Baked-Enamel or Powder-Coat Finish: AAMA 2603. Comply with coating manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning, conversion coating, application, and baking. D. Coating Schedule: 1. Aluminum Door Slats: Clear Anodic Finish. 2. Aluminum Bottom Bar: Clear Anodic Finish 3. Curtain Jamb Guides: a. Stainless Steel: Uncoated b. Aluminum: Clear Anodic 2.07 ELECTRIC DOOR OPERATORS A. Furnish electric door operator assembly of size and capacity recommended and provided by door manufacturer with electric motor, remote-control station, integral gearing for locking door, safety devices, brake system, and accessories required for proper operation. B. Material and Construction Requirements. 1. Comply with NFPA 70. 2. Materials and equipment shall be listed by UL unless it can be demonstrated that no UL standards exist for a specific item or class of equipment. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA OVERHEAD COILING DOORS WOODARD & CURRAN 08 33 23-8 3. All enclosures, motors, control stations, safety devices, and wiring shall conform to NEMA 7 & 9, explosion-proof construction. [OR] 4. Minimum NEMA enclosure ratings: a. Operator: NEMA 1 b. Control Station and Safety Devices: NEMA 4X C. Operator Features: 1. Dual Voltage Connections: Enable installer to select voltage within phase. 2. Limit Switches: Equip each motorized door with adjustable switches interlocked with motor controls and set to automatically stop door at fully opened and fully closed positions 3. Emergency Manual Operation: Floor level chain hoist with electrical interlock for easy disconnect and manual operation in an emergency. a. Equip operator with hand-operated disconnect mechanism for automatically engaging manual operator and releasing brake for emergency manual operation while disconnecting motor without affecting timing of limit switch. Mount mechanism so it is accessible from floor level. Include interlock device to automatically prevent motor from operating when emergency operator is engaged 4. Heavy-Duty worm gear-in-oil reducer 5. Control Function Selector: For easy field selection and programming of operator functionality to meet owner needs. 6. Timer-To-Close: Closes door automatically after predetermined time has elapsed. 7. Mid-Stop: Enable partial opening of door to a preprogramed position. 8. Maximum Run Timer: Reverses or stops door if closing time exceeds programmed time-frame to limit damage to door and operator. 9. Motor Removal: Design operator so motor may be removed without disturbing limit-switch adjustment and without affecting emergency manual operation. D. Operator Location: Interior mounted at left or right of head plate, as indicated on drawings. Confirm clearance requirements at existing door openings 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA OVERHEAD COILING DOORS WOODARD & CURRAN 08 33 23-9 1. Front-of-hood mounted: Mounted to the right or left door head plate with the operator on coil side of the door-hood assembly and connected to the door drive shaft with drive chain and sprockets E. Electric Motors 1. Continuous-Duty, TEFC, high-starting torque with instant reverse and overload protection. a. Electrical characteristics: 1) Single-Phase: 115V and 230V 2) 3-Phase: 208V, 230V, or 460V b. Motor size: Minimum 1/2 HP, sized by manufacturer c. Coordinate wiring requirements and electrical characteristics of motors and other electrical devices with building electrical system and each location where installed F. Safety device: Equip motorized door with external automatic safety sensor capable of protecting full width of door opening. Activation of device immediately stops and reverses downward door travel 1. Monitored Dual-Sided Photo Eyes: Automatic primary entrapment protection for compliance with UL 325 G. Remote-control station: Momentary-contact, 3-button control station with push- button controls labeled OPEN, CLOSE, and STOP. Interior units, full-guarded, surface-mounted, and heavy-duty type. 2.08 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates areas and conditions, with installer present, for compliance with requirements for substrate construction and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Verify opening szies, tolerances and conditions are acceptable. C. Examine locations of electrical connections. D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA OVERHEAD COILING DOORS WOODARD & CURRAN 08 33 23-10 3.02 PREPARATION A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation. B. Prepare surfaces using methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install overhead coiling doors and operating equipment complete with necessary hardware, anchors, inserts, hangers, and equipment supports according to manufacturer's written instructions and as specified B. Install overhead coiling doors, hoods, and operators at the mounting locations indicated for each door. C. Complete wiring from disconnect to unit components. 3.04 ADJUSTING A. Adjust hardware and moving parts to function smoothly so that doors operate easily, free of warp, twist, or distortion B. Lubricate bearings and sliding parts as recommended by manufacturer. Adjust seals to provide weather tight fit around entire perimeter 3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. B. Manufacturer Field Services: Performed by a factory-authorized service representative 1. Perform installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions 2. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment 3. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain overhead coiling doors 3.06 STARTUP & COMMISSIONING A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. 3.07 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA OVERHEAD COILING DOORS WOODARD & CURRAN 08 33 23-11 END OF SECTION This page intentionally left blank 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA COMPOSITE WINDOWS WOODARD & CURRAN 08 54 00-1 SECTION 08 54 00 COMPOSITE WINDOWS PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes 1. Provide the following fixed picture windows and related items in accordance with this Section, applicable reference standards listed in Article 1.03: a. Headworks Building Windows per Architectural Drawings. B. Related Requirements 1. Section 07 60 00 – Flashing and Sheet Metal 2. Section 07 92 00 – Joint Sealants 1.02 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Measurement and payment requirements: per Division 01 General Requirements. 1.03 REFERENCES A. Reference Standards 1. ASTM International (ASTM) a. ASTM C1036 Standard Specification for Flat Glass b. ASTM C1048 Standard Specification for Heat-Strengthened and Fully Tempered Flat Glass c. ASTM D2244 Standard Practice for Calculation of Color Tolerances and Color Differences from Instrumentally Measured Color Coordinates d. ASTM E90 Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound Transmission Loss of Building Partitions and Elements e. ASTM E1105 Standard Test Method for Field Determination of Water Penetration of Installed Exterior Windows, Skylights, Doors, and Curtain Walls 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA COMPOSITE WINDOWS WOODARD & CURRAN 08 54 00-2 f. ASTM E2190 Standard Specification for Insulating Glass Unit Performance and Evaluation g. ASTM F2090 Standard Specification for Window Fall Prevention Devices with Emergency Escape (Egress) Release Mechanisms 2. Insulating Glass Certification Council (IGCC) 3. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination, Sequencing, and Scheduling: per Division 01 General Requirements. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. B. Shop Drawings: Showing methods of installation, plans, sections, elevations and details of walls, specified loads, flashings, vents, sealants, and interfaces with all materials not supplied by the window manufacturer, and identification of proposed component parts and finishes. C. Certifications: Signed by manufacturer certifying materials comply with specified performance characteristics, criteria and physical requirements. D. Test and Evaluation Reports: Showing compliance with specified performance characteristics and physical properties. E. Manufacturer Instructions: Manufacturer installation, storage, and other instructions. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. B. Comply with manufacturer’s ordering instructions and lead time requirements to avoid construction delays. C. Deliver materials to Project in manufacturer’s original unopened, undamaged containers with identification labels intact. D. Storage and Protection: Store materials and accessories protected from exposure to harmful environmental conditions and at temperature and humidity conditions 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA COMPOSITE WINDOWS WOODARD & CURRAN 08 54 00-3 recommended by manufacturer off ground, under cover and not exposed to weather and construction activities. 1.08 SITE CONDITIONS A. Existing Conditions: per Division 01 General Requirements. B. Coastal Construction: Windows will be used for building construction within 1,000 feet from the coast. Windows shall resist salt-laden air and coastal environment. 1.09 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer’s transferrable, non-prorated limited warranty. 1. Warranty Period, Glass: 20-years 2. Warranty Period, Non-Glass Parts: 10-years PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 COMPOSITE WINDOWS A. General: Provide composite windows complying with the performance requirements indicated and tested according to NAFS (AAMA/WDMA/CSA/101/I.S.2/A440). B. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements provide: 1. Andersen Corporation: Andersen 100 Series Windows. 2. Approved Equal 2.02 MATERIALS A. Material Composition: Extruded composite profile consisting of 40 percent reclaimed pre-consumer wood fiber and 60 percent thermoplastic polymer, by weight. B. Manufacturer Designation: Fibrex material C. Interior Color: White D. Exterior Color: White E. Exterior Color Retention: Resist fading with a change of no more than 5 Delta E units over 10 years in compliance with color retention provisions of AAMA 615 and ASTM D2244. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA COMPOSITE WINDOWS WOODARD & CURRAN 08 54 00-4 2.03 WINDOWS A. Window Type: Picture Window (Specialty-fixed) B. Performance Requirements: Comply with NAFS(AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S. 2) 1. Specialty Fixed, Performance Class and Grade: LC-PG30 (95-1/2 inches by 83-1/2 inches). C. Environmental Qualifications: 1. ENERGY STAR performance. D. Overall Depth: 3-1/4 inches E. Attachment Flange: 1-3/8 inches Flange Setback 1. Manufacturer to verify flange requirements with Contractor F. Hardware: None for fixed window G. Grilles: 1. Type: Sculpted profile, factory installed between glass 2. Pattern: Colonial, per drawings 3. Exterior and Interior Color: White 2.04 GLAZING A. General: Provide windows with the following performance requirements: 1. Thermal Transmission (U-Factor), NFRC 100: 0.28 2. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient (SHGC), NFRC 200: 0.29 3. Visible Light Transmittance (VLT), NFRC 200: 0.50 B. Glass Units: Provide insulating glass units certified through The Insulating Glass Certification Council as conforming to the requirements of IGCC and ASTM E2190 1. Manufacturer Designation: Andersen Low-E Glass or Engineer Approved Equal. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA COMPOSITE WINDOWS WOODARD & CURRAN 08 54 00-5 2. Seal and Spacer Type: Dual sealed insulating glass units with polyisobutylene primary seal, silicone secondary seal and metal spacers with bent or soldered corners. 3. Glass Type: Heat strengthened tempered glass, ASTM C1048 4. Glass Pattern: None 2.05 SOURCE OF QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that all substrate conditions are suitable for installation in compliance with manufacturer’s recommendations. B. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared and any conditions not in compliance with manufacturer’s recommendations have been corrected. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with manufacturer’s product recommendations, including but not limited to the Andersen Unit Installation Guide, and installation information in product literature and on product packaging. Comply with Drawings and Shop Drawings for installing windows, hardware, accessories, and other components B. Install windows plumb, level and square. Anchor windows securely to structure in correct orientation to flashing and adjacent construction as indicated. Comply with installation instructions for proper flashing integration of window into wall system. Install windows so as to drain condensation and moisture penetration to the exterior. C. Joints shall be sealed between window frame and adjoining surfaces. Installations shall be weather tight. D. Joint sealing and caulking between window frame and masonry is specified in Section 07 92 00. E. Flashing between window frame and exterior wall is specified in Section 07 60 00. 3.03 CLEANING A. Clean interior and exterior surfaces of window units of mortar, plaster, paint spattering spots, and other foreign matter to present a neat appearance. Avoid damaging coatings and finishes. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA COMPOSITE WINDOWS WOODARD & CURRAN 08 54 00-6 B. Remove protective films and non-permanent labels prior to 90 days after installation. C. Touch-up, repair or replace glass or other window components broken, scratched or damaged during construction prior to Substantial Completion. 3.04 PROTECTION A. Protect installed windows and finish surfaces from damage during construction until completion of Project and acceptance by Owner. 3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. 3.06 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. END OF SECTION 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA DOOR HARDWARE WOODARD & CURRAN 08 71 00-1 SECTION 08 71 00 DOOR HARDWARE PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes 1. Provide finish hardware for doors to provide correct functions for intended use, provide related items and services, as indicated on Drawings and in accordance with this Section and applicable reference standards listed in Article 1.03. 2. Furnish hardware schedules and templates as required for fabrication of doors and frames under other Sections. B. Related Requirements 1. Section 07 92 00 Joint Sealants 2. Section 08 16 15 Fiberglass Doors and Frames 1.02 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Measurement and payment requirements: per Division 01 General Requirements. 1.03 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination, Sequencing, and Scheduling: per Division 01 General Requirements. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. B. Product Data: manufacturer's product data, catalog cuts, descriptive data, UL listings, and other pertinent technical data for each of the products used C. Shop Drawings 1. Final hardware and keying schedule. Format schedule vertically. List each door opening using same designations indicated on Drawings. D. Manufacturer Instructions 1. Installation Templates: for Work installed or prepared for installation by others. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA DOOR HARDWARE WOODARD & CURRAN 08 71 00-2 E. Closeout and Maintenance Material Submittals: per Division 01 General Requirements. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. B. Provide the services of a certified hardware consultant to prepare hardware and keying schedules and to certify that the Work of this Section meets or exceeds requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. B. Packaging: Package and label each hardware item separately with all screws, bolts and accessories required for a complete and proper installation. Coordinate the labeling of packages with hardware set numbers. C. Hardware Storage: Store hardware items in locked spaces. Replace all hardware items lost or damaged. Provide copies of Supplier receipts for hardware items delivered to the Project. 1.07 SITE CONDITIONS A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. B. Coastal Construction: Door hardware will be used for building construction within 1,000 feet from the coast. All hardware shall be marine grade suitable for long-term exposure to salt-laden air and coastal environment. 1.08 MAINTENANCE A. Provide services of hardware Supplier's representative to inspect hardware six months after final completion of Project. Readjust and restore hardware. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 FINISH HARDWARE - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. One manufacturer and catalog number is listed for each type of hardware specified herein. These catalog numbers are listed to set the standard of quality required. Provide the specified hardware item, or an equal product from one of the following manufacturers, which meet or exceed the standard. 1. Schwepper, or equal marine grade hardware supplier for the following: a. Locksets and Latchsets 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA DOOR HARDWARE WOODARD & CURRAN 08 71 00-3 b. Keying and Lock Cylinders c. Spring Hinges 2. Local Distributor for Schwepper hardware is The Brass Works Inc. B. For each type of hardware, provide products of a single manufacturer. C. Provide the proper hardware, which permits the swing and hand of each door as indicated on the Drawings. D. Material: All hardware shall be 100% non-ferrous metal E. Fasteners: Provide concealed fasteners to the greatest extent possible. Do not use through-bolts unless otherwise acceptable to the Engineer. 2.02 LOCKSETS AND LATCHSETS A. As manufactured by Schwepper, or approved equal, that meet or exceed the requirements specified. All material shall be 100% non-ferrous material. B. Mortise Locksets: Schwepper 3811Z, 100% stainless steel construction. C. Profile Cylinders: Schwepper 1407, non-ferrous metals with finish to match trim plates and handle. Provide with lever turn. D. Trim Plates: Schwepper 6645, 100% stainless steel. E. Handle: Schwepper 2210, 100% stainless steel with finish to match trim plates F. Strikes: Provide manufacturer's standard non-ferrous strikes. 2.03 KEYING AND LOCK CYLINDERS A. Metals: Provide cylinders and keys from stainless steel. B. Provide three keys for each lock. 2.04 SPRING HINGES A. Provide the products specified herein or provided an approved equal that meets or exceeds the requirements of these Specifications. B. Provide stainless steel adjustable tension spring hinges as follows: 1. Schwepper 3102 – STST- Adjustable Tension Spring Hinge C. Hinge Quantity: Provide three hinges for doors up to 7 ft.-6 in. high, and one additional hinge for each additional 2 ft.-6 in. of height. Provide one additional hinge for doors over 3 ft.-6 in. wide. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA DOOR HARDWARE WOODARD & CURRAN 08 71 00-4 2.05 KICK PLATES A. Provide the products specified herein or provide and approved equal that meets or exceeds the requirements of these Specifications. B. Provide Hager No. 194S kick plates, beveled on all four sides. C. Width: kick plates which are 1/2 inch less than door width when mounted on the pull side, and 1-1/2 inches less than door width when mounted on stop side. D. Height: 10 inch high for kick plates. E. Material: 0.05 inch gage stainless steel. Plated metal door trim units are not acceptable. 2.06 KICK-DOWN DOOR HOLDER A. Provide the products specified herein or provide and approved equal that meets or exceeds the requirements. B. Provide Hager No 271D cast brass kick-down holder with 4 -7/16” long arm with mounting base for (3) fasteners. Provide 316 SS fasteners. C. Finish: US 26D 2.07 WEATHERSTRIPPING AND THRESHOLDS A. Provide the products specified herein or provide an approved equal that meets or exceeds the requirements of these Specifications. B. Weather stripping: Provide weather stripping for every exterior door, doors with unheated spaces on one side, and wherever scheduled. Weather stripped doors are required to provide a continuous seal at the entire perimeter of door with no cracks. 1. Door Sweep: Clear anodized aluminum door sweep with neoprene insert equal to Reese Catalog #323C. 2. Gaskets: Provide Reese Catalog #797B gaskets at door heads and jambs. C. Thresholds: Mill aluminum saddle threshold ½-inch high x 5-inch wide equal to Reese Catalog # S105A. 2.08 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA DOOR HARDWARE WOODARD & CURRAN 08 71 00-5 PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Examine doors, frames and conditions under which the Work of this Section will be performed. Notify Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper completion of the Work. Do not proceed with Work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. Commencing Work means Installer accepts substrates and conditions. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Hardware schedule: as shown on the Drawings. B. Installation Templates: Provide installation templates for Work installed or prepared for installation by others. C. Comply with manufacturers' instructions and recommendations, except where more restrictive requirements are specified in this Section. D. Set hardware plumb, level, and in exact alignment and location. Conceal and countersink fasteners wherever possible. E. Set exterior thresholds in bed of sealant provided in accordance with Section 07 92 00 Joint Sealants. 3.03 ADJUSTING, CLEANING, AND PROTECTION A. Adjust hardware items to Work smoothly, easily, and correctly. B. Clean exposed surfaces using non-abrasive materials and methods recommended by manufacturer of hardware being cleaned. Remove and replace Work which cannot be successfully cleaned, as judged solely by the Engineer. C. Provide temporary protection to ensure Work being without damage or deterioration at time of final acceptance. Remove protections and re-clean as necessary immediately prior to final acceptance. D. Cover knobs, levers, pulls, and push plates with heavy cloth to protect against damage until Final Acceptance of the Project. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. 3.05 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA DOOR HARDWARE WOODARD & CURRAN 08 71 00-6 END OF SECTION 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA GLASS GLAZING WOODARD & CURRAN 08 81 00-1 SECTION 08 81 00 GLASS GLAZING PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes glass glazing for fiberglass doors as indicated on drawings. 1.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Glazing systems shall be fabricated and installed watertight and airtight to withstand thermal movement and wind loading without glass breakage, gasket failure, deterioration of glazing accessories, and defects in the work. Glazed panels shall comply with the safety standards, as indicated in accordance with ANSI Z97.1. Glazed panels shall comply with indicated wind/snow loading in accordance with ASTM E 1300. 1.03 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Measurement and payment requirements: per Division 01 General Requirements. 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination, Sequencing, and Scheduling: per Division 01 General Requirements. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with the Division 01 General Requirements. B. Closeout and Maintenance Material Submittals: per Division 01 General Requirements. C. Shop Drawings: Submit drawings showing complete details of the proposed setting methods, edge blocking, size of openings, frame details, materials, and types and thickness of glass. D. Certificates: Submit certificates stating that the glass meets the specified requirements. Labels or manufacturers marking affixed to the glass will be accepted in lieu of certificates. E. Manufacturer's Instructions: Submit glass manufacturer's recommendations for setting and sealing materials and for installation of each type of glazing material specified. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING: A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA GLASS GLAZING WOODARD & CURRAN 08 81 00-2 B. Deliver products to the site in unopened containers, labeled plainly with manufacturers' names and brands. Store glass and setting materials in safe, enclosed dry locations and do not unpack until needed for installation. Handle and install materials in a manner that will protect them from damage. 1.07 SITE CONDITIONS A. Existing Conditions: per Division 01 General Requirements. 1.08 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS: A. Do not start glazing work until the outdoor temperature is above 40 degrees F and rising, unless procedures recommended by the glass manufacturer and approved by the Contracting Officer are made to warm the glass and rabbet surfaces. Provide ventilation to prevent condensation of moisture on glazing work during installation. Do not perform glazing work during damp or rainy weather. 1.09 WARRANTY: A. Warranty for Insulating Glass Units: Warranty insulating glass units against development of material obstruction to vision (such as dust, fogging, or film formation on the inner glass surfaces) caused by failure of the hermetic seal, other than through glass breakage, for a 10-year period following acceptance of the work. Provide new units for any units failing to comply with terms of this warranty within 45 working days after receipt of notice from the Engineer. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 TEMPERED GLASS: A. ASTM C 1048, Kind FT (fully tempered), Condition A (uncoated), Type I, Class 1 (transparent), Quality q3. All panels of tempered glass shall be (1/4 inch) thick. 1. Type I, Class 1 (clear), Quality q4. B. Interior Door Glass: Provide single pane of 1/4 inch fully tempered glass. Provide clear glass. 2.02 INSULATING GLASS UNITS: A. Two panes of tempered glass separated by a dehydrated airspace and hermetically sealed. Dimensional tolerances shall be as specified in IGMA TR-1200. The units shall conform to ASTM E 773 and ASTM E 774, Class A. Spacer shall be roll-formed, with bent or tightly welded or keyed and sealed joints to completely seal the spacer periphery and eliminate moisture and hydrocarbon vapor transmission into airspace through the corners. Primary seal shall be compressed polyisobutylene and the secondary seal shall be a specially formulated silicone. 1. Glass U-value (winter) = 0.42 (max) 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA GLASS GLAZING WOODARD & CURRAN 08 81 00-3 2. Condensation Resistance Factor = 69 (min) 2.03 SETTING AND SEALING MATERIALS: A. Provide as specified in the GANA Glazing Manual, IGMA TM-3000, IGMA TB- 3001, and manufacturer's recommendations, unless specified otherwise herein. Do not use metal sash putty, nonskinning compounds, nonresilient preformed sealers, or impregnated preformed gaskets. Materials exposed to view and unpainted shall be gray or neutral color. B. Sealants: Provide elastomeric and structural sealants. 1. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 12.5, Use G. Use for channel or stop glazing wood and metal sash. Sealant shall be chemically compatible with setting blocks, edge blocks, and sealing tapes, with sealants used in manufacture of insulating glass units, and with plastic sheet. Color of sealant shall match adjacent frame. 2. Structural Sealant: ASTM C 1184, Type S. C. Joint Backer: Joint backer shall have a diameter size at least 25 percent larger than joint width; type and material as recommended in writing by glass and sealant manufacturer. D. Preformed Channels: Neoprene, vinyl, or rubber, as recommended by the glass manufacturer for the particular condition. E. Sealing Tapes: Preformed, semisolid, PVC-based material of proper size and compressibility for the particular condition, complying with ASTM D 2287. Use only where glazing rabbet is designed for tape and tape is recommended by the glass or sealant manufacturer. Provide spacer shims for use with compressible tapes. Tapes shall be chemically compatible with the product being set. F. Setting Blocks and Edge Blocks: Closed-cell neoprene setting blocks shall be dense extruded type conforming to ASTM C 509 and ASTM D 395, Method B, Shore A durometer between 70 and 90. Edge blocking shall be Shore A durometer of 50 (+ or - 5). Silicone setting blocks shall be required when blocks are in contact with silicone sealant. Profiles, lengths and locations shall be as required and recommended in writing by glass manufacturer. Block color shall be black. G. Glazing Gaskets: Glazing gaskets shall be extruded with continuous integral locking projection designed to engage into metal glass holding members to provide a watertight seal during dynamic loading, building movements and thermal movements. Glazing gaskets for a single glazed opening shall be continuous one-piece units with factory-fabricated injection-molded corners free of flashing and burrs. Glazing gaskets shall be in lengths or units recommended 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA GLASS GLAZING WOODARD & CURRAN 08 81 00-4 by manufacturer to ensure against pull-back at corners. Glazing gasket profiles shall be as indicated on drawings. 1. Fixed Glazing Gaskets: Fixed glazing gaskets shall be closed-cell (sponge) smooth extruded compression gaskets of cured elastomeric virgin neoprene compounds conforming to ASTM C 509, Type 2, Option 1. 2. Wedge Glazing Gaskets: Wedge glazing gaskets shall be high-quality extrusions of cured elastomeric virgin neoprene compounds, ozone resistant, conforming to ASTM C 864, Option 1, Shore A durometer between 65 and 75. 3. Aluminum Framing Glazing Gaskets: Glazing gaskets for aluminum framing shall be permanent, elastic, non-shrinking, non-migrating, watertight and weathertight. H. Accessories: Provide as required for a complete installation, including glazing points, clips, shims, angles, beads, and spacer strips. Provide non-corroding metal accessories. Provide primer-sealers and cleaners as recommended by the glass and sealant manufacturers. 2.04 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION: A. Preparation, unless otherwise specified or approved, shall conform to applicable recommendations in the GANA Glazing Manual, GANA Sealant Manual, IGMA TB-3001, IGMA TM-3000, and manufacturer's recommendations. Determine the sizes to provide the required edge clearances by measuring the actual opening to receive the glass. Grind smooth in the shop glass edges that will be exposed in finish work. Leave labels in place until the installation is approved, except remove applied labels on heat-absorbing glass and on insulating glass units as soon as glass is installed. Securely fix movable items or keep in a closed and locked position until glazing compound has thoroughly set. 3.02 GLASS SETTING: A. Shop glaze items to be glazed using glass of the quality and thickness specified or indicated. Glazing, unless otherwise specified or approved, shall conform to applicable recommendations in the GANA Glazing Manual, GANA Sealant Manual, IGMA TB-3001, IGMA TM-3000, and manufacturer's recommendations. Aluminum windows, wood doors, and wood windows may be glazed in conformance with one of the glazing methods described in the standards under which they are produced, except that face puttying with no bedding will not 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA GLASS GLAZING WOODARD & CURRAN 08 81 00-5 be permitted. Handle and install glazing materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Use beads or stops which are furnished with items to be glazed to secure the glass in place. Verify products are properly installed, connected, and adjusted. B. Sheet Glass: Cut and set with the visible lines or waves horizontal. C. Insulating Glass Units: Do not grind, nip, or cut edges or corners of units after the units have left the factory. Springing, forcing, or twisting of units during setting will not be permitted. Handle units so as not to strike frames or other objects. Installation shall conform to applicable recommendations of IGMA TB-3001 and IGMA TM-3000. 3.03 CLEANING: A. Clean glass surfaces and remove labels, paint spots, putty, and other defacement as required to prevent staining. Glass shall be clean at the time the work is accepted. Clean plastic sheet in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.04 PROTECTION: A. Glass work shall be protected immediately after installation. Glazed openings shall be identified with suitable warning tapes, cloth or paper flags, attached with non-staining adhesives. Reflective glass shall be protected with a protective material to eliminate any contamination of the reflective coating. Protective material shall be placed far enough away from the coated glass to allow air to circulate to reduce heat buildup and moisture accumulation on the glass. Upon removal, separate protective materials for reuse or recycling. Glass units which are broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or otherwise damaged during construction activities shall be removed and replaced with new units. 3.05 WASTE MANAGEMENT: A. Disposal and recycling of waste materials, including corrugated cardboard recycling, shall be in accordance with the Waste Management Plan. Separate float glass and reuse or recycle. Upon removal, separate protective materials and reuse or recycle. Separate tempered glass for use as aggregate or nonstructural fill. Close and seal tightly all partly used sealant containers and store protected in well-ventilated, fire-safe area at moderate temperature. 3.06 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. 3.07 STARTUP & COMMISSIONING A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA GLASS GLAZING WOODARD & CURRAN 08 81 00-6 3.08 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. END OF SECTION 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA FRP PANELS WOODARD & CURRAN 09 77 00-1 SECTION 09 77 00 FRP PANELS PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes 1. Provide fiberglass reinforced composite ceiling panels as shown on the Drawings, in accordance with this Section and applicable reference standards listed in Article 1.03. 1.02 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Measurement and payment requirements: per Division 01 General Requirements. 1.03 REFERENCES A. Reference Standards 1. ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM) a. ASTM D 256 Determining the Izod Pendulum Impact Resistance of Plastics b. ASTM D 638 Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics c. ASTM D 790 Flexural Properties of Unreinforced and Reinforced Plastics and Electrical Insulating Materials d. ASTM E 84 Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination, Sequencing, and Scheduling: per Division 01 General Requirements. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. B. Product Data C. Installer qualifications D. Samples of surfacing 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA FRP PANELS WOODARD & CURRAN 09 77 00-2 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. B. Installer Qualifications: minimum of 5 years of experience with composite panel work similar in scope and size to this Project. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. B. Comply with manufacturer's ordering instructions and lead time requirements to avoid construction delays. C. Deliver materials in manufacturer's original, unopened, undamaged containers with identification labels intact. D. Store materials protected from exposure to harmful environmental conditions and at temperature and humidity conditions recommended by the manufacturer. 1. Store panels indoors. 2. Lay panels flat. Do not stand panels on edge. 3. Protect panels from moisture. 4. Do not store panels in contact with the floor or against an outside wall. 5. Do not remove protective film from panel surface until after installation (if applicable). 6. Maintain optimum storage conditions of 60-75 degrees F at 35 - 55% relative humidity. Avoid extremes in temperature and humidity. E. Remove foreign matter from face of panel by using a soft bristle brush, avoiding abrasive action. 1.08 SITE CONDITIONS A. Existing Conditions: per Division 01 General Requirements. 1.09 MAINTENANCE A. Provide 5 percent additional material for use by Owner in building maintenance and repair. 1.10 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty/Extended Correction Period: 5 year manufacturer’s warranty. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA FRP PANELS WOODARD & CURRAN 09 77 00-3 PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 FRP CEILING PANELS A. FRP ceiling panel manufacturer: one of the following or equal. 1. Nudo: 1500 Taylor Avenue, Springfield, IL 62703; Telephone: (800) 826- 4132, (217) 528-5636; Fax: (217) 528-8722; E-mail: info@nudo.com; website: www.nudo.com 2. Crane Composites: 23525 W Eames, Channahon, IL 60410; Telephone: (800) 435-0080; (815) 467-8600; Fax: (815) 467-8666; E-mail: sales@cranecomposites.com; website: www.cranecomposites.com 3. Prime Panels: 2651 Colt Road, Springfield, IL 62707; Telephone: (800) 990-3468; (217) 789-7898; Fax: (217) 789-7897; Email: info@PrimePanels.com; website: www.primepanels.com B. Ceiling Panel System: Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic (FRP) overlay that is factory laminated to a corrugated plastic core equal to FiberCorr by Nudo, meeting the following requirements. 1. Texture: Smooth. 2. Thickness: 0.400” 3. Fire-Rating Class: C. 4. Color: selected by Owner. 5. Size: 4 feet by 4 feet 6. Physical Properties a. Flexural Strength (ASTM D790): 2,407 lbf/in2. b. Flexural Modulus (ASTM D790): 105,782 psi c. Tensile Strength (ASTM D638): 1,121 psi. d. Barcol Hardness (ASTM D2583): -- e. Izod Impact (ASTM D256): 2.87 ft-lb/in. f. Surface Burning Characteristics (ASTM E84): Class C. 2.02 ACCESSORIES A. Provide trim pieces and moldings required to provide a finished composite ceiling panel system. 1. Moldings: Provide PVC moldings of a color selected by Owner. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA FRP PANELS WOODARD & CURRAN 09 77 00-4 2.03 SOURCE OF QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Comply with the instructions and recommendations of the ceiling panel manufacturer. B. Verify substrate conditions, which have been previously installed under other sections, are acceptable for product installation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Verify that site conditions are acceptable for installation of ceiling panels. Examine back-up surfaces to determine that corners are plumb and straight, surfaces are smooth, uniform, clean and free from foreign matter, nails are countersunk and joints and cracks are filled flush and smooth with the adjoining surface. Do not proceed with installation of panels until unacceptable conditions are corrected. 1. Installation shall not begin until building is enclosed, permanent heating and cooling equipment is in operation and residual moisture from plaster, concrete or terrazzo work has dissipated. 2. Install panels between 60 degrees F and 75 degrees F and relative humidity below 55 percent, ideally at the same conditions as the room's normal operating temperatures after building is occupied. 3. Provide ventilation to disperse fumes during application of adhesive as recommended by adhesive manufacturer. 4. Do not install ceiling system until normal lighting conditions exist. Normal lighting conditions are described as those in place when the project is finished. C. Verify actual measurements/openings by field measurements before fabrication; show recorded measurements on shop drawings. Coordinate field measurements and fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid construction delays. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. General 1. Inspect panels for any defects immediately. Do not install panels of unacceptable quality. Field cutting of all systems should be accomplished using a circular saw with fine tooth carbide blade. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA FRP PANELS WOODARD & CURRAN 09 77 00-5 2. Position panel so that the saw blade enters the finished HPL side first to avoid chipping or damage. Protect decorative laminate face of panel by covering work area, do not remove protective cover until after installation. 3. Follow adhesive manufacturer's recommendations for appropriate height of adhesive bead left by trowel and do not allow adhesive to skin over. When interior paneling is on an exterior wall or wet area, provide a barrier sheet and/or follow the adhesive manufacturer's installation recommendations for a secure bond. B. Installation Using PVC Trims 1. Start in the corner. Mark plumb line 48 1/8 inches from corner. 2. Apply adhesive directly to entire back of composite panel using correct trowel with 100% adhesive coverage using crosshatch pattern. Apply adhesive to within 1/2 inch of all edges of panel. 3. Slide panel into molding and withdraw 1/8 inch for PVC moldings to provide appropriate gap. Align with plumb line. 4. Begin in top corner nearest molding with laminate roller, rolling down and out toward the edge without molding. 5. Continue rolling down and out working across panel away from previously installed panel or initial molding. Remove all trapped air. 6. Install one-piece division bar and caps or next molding by sliding onto panel. 7. Repeat process, working in one direction around room. 8. Immediately remove all adhesive residue. To remove, clean with nonabrasive cotton cloth and warm water. If necessary, use a mild nonabrasive detergent. For cleanup with solvent based adhesives, use mineral spirits or acetone to remove residue. 3.03 CLEANING A. Clean panel surfaces in compliance with manufacturer's recommendations. 1. Use a clean, damp, nonabrasive cotton cloth and a mild liquid detergent or household cleaner. 2. Rinse with clean water using a clean, nonabrasive cotton cloth. 3. Dry panels with a soft, clean nonabrasive cotton cloth. 4. Do not use cleaners containing acid, alkali or sodium hypochlorite. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA FRP PANELS WOODARD & CURRAN 09 77 00-6 3.04 PROTECTION A. Protect installed work from damage due to subsequent construction activity on the site. 3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. 3.06 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. END OF SECTION 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA FILED SUB-BID - PAINTING PAINTING AND COATING WOODARD & CURRAN 09 90 00-1 SECTION 09 90 00 PAINTING AND COATING (FILED SUB-BID REQUIRED) 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes 1. Provide surface preparation and painting in accordance with this Section and applicable reference standards listed in Article 1.03. 2. Provide the following types of painting Work per the Paint Schedules attached and on Drawings. a. Painting of Headworks Building exterior trim. b. Painting of Headworks Building interior CMU walls. c. Painting and labeling of ductile iron pipes, PVC/CPVC pipes, and fittings. d. Painting of equipment where indicated, and labeling of all equipment. e. Painting of existing walls where existing equipment is demolished. f. Painting of the new wall in the Advanced Treatment Building g. Painting of new concrete equipment bases. h. Painting of the existing concrete equipment bases for the primary sludge pumps and grinders. i. Touch-up painting of factory-coated equipment j. Painting of HVAC equipment and ducts where indicated B. Related Sections 1. Section 09 97 00 Specialty H2S Lining for Concrete (Filed Sub-Bid Required) 1.02 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Measurement and payment requirements: per Division 01 General Requirements. 1.03 REFERENCES A. Reference Standards 1. Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC) 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA FILED SUB-BID - PAINTING PAINTING AND COATING WOODARD & CURRAN 09 90 00-2 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination, Sequencing, and Scheduling: per Division 01 General Requirements. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. B. Product Data 1. Block Fillers 2. Primers 3. Manufacturer's technical information including label analysis and instructions for handling, storage, and application of each material proposed for use. 4. Manufacturer's material data and certificates of performance for proposed substitutions. 5. List each material and cross-reference the specific coating, finish system, and application. Identify each material by the manufacturer's catalog number and general classification. C. Certificates: from manufacturer that products supplied comply with local regulations controlling use of volatile organic compounds (VOCs). D. Closeout and Maintenance Material Submittals: per Division 01 General Requirements. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. B. Applicator Qualifications: Engage experienced applicators who have completed painting system applications similar in material and extent to those indicated for the Project that have resulted in a construction record of successful in-service performance. C. Field Samples: On wall surfaces and other exterior and interior components, duplicate finishes of prepared samples. Provide full-coat finish samples on at least 100 square ft. of surface until required sheen, color, and texture are obtained; simulate finished lighting conditions for review of in-place Work. 1. Final acceptance of colors will be from Project-applied samples. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA FILED SUB-BID - PAINTING PAINTING AND COATING WOODARD & CURRAN 09 90 00-3 2. The Engineer will select one room or surface to represent surfaces and conditions for each type of coating and substrate to be painted. Apply coatings in this room or surface according to the Paint Schedules attached and on the Drawings or as specified. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. B. Deliver materials to the Site in the manufacturer's original, unopened packages and containers bearing manufacturer's name and label, and the following information: 1. Product name or title of material 2. Product description (generic classification or binder type) 3. Manufacturer's stock number and date of manufacture 4. Contents by volume, for pigment and vehicle constituents 5. Thinning instructions 6. Application instructions 7. Color name and number C. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in a well-ventilated area at a minimum ambient temperature of 45 degrees F. Maintain containers used in storage in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 1. Protect from freezing. Keep storage area neat and orderly. Remove oily rags and waste daily. Take necessary measures to ensure that workers and Work areas are protected from fire and health hazards resulting from handling, mixing, and application. 1.08 SITE CONDITIONS A. Existing Conditions: per Division 01 General Requirements. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Tnemec, Sherwin Williams (S-W), PPG Coating, or Engineer Approved Equal per Paint Schedules attached and on the Drawings. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA FILED SUB-BID - PAINTING PAINTING AND COATING WOODARD & CURRAN 09 90 00-4 2.02 PAINT MATERIALS A. Provide materials designated by item or area to be painted in Paint Schedules attached and on Drawings. Use of manufacturer's proprietary product names to designate colors or materials is not intended to imply that products named are required to be used to the exclusion of equivalent products of other manufacturers. B. Provide primers and undercoat paint produced by the same manufacturer as the finish coats. C. Material Compatibility: Provide block fillers, primers, finish coat materials, and related materials that are compatible with one another and the substrates indicated under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by the manufacturer based on testing and field experience. D. Material Quality: manufacturer's best-quality trade sale paint material of the various coating types specified. Ensure paint material containers display manufacturer's product identification. E. Colors: from the manufacturer's full range of standard colors. 2.03 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions under which painting will be performed for compliance with paint application requirements. Ensure surfaces receiving paint are thoroughly dry before paint is applied. Do not begin to apply paint until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. B. Coordination of Work: Review other Specifications in which primers are provided to ensure compatibility of the total system for various substrates. On request, furnish information on characteristics of finish materials to ensure use of compatible primers. Notify the Engineer about anticipated problems using the materials specified over substrates primed by others. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Remove hardware and hardware accessories, plates, machined surfaces, lighting fixtures, and similar items already installed that are not to be painted, or provide surface-applied protection prior to surface preparation and painting. Following completion of painting operations in each space or area, ensure workers skilled in the trades involved reinstall items. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA FILED SUB-BID - PAINTING PAINTING AND COATING WOODARD & CURRAN 09 90 00-5 B. Before applying paint or other surface treatments, clean the substrates of substances that could impair the bond of the various coatings. Remove oil and grease prior to cleaning. Schedule cleaning and painting so dust and other contaminants from the cleaning process will not fall on wet, newly painted surfaces. C. Clean and prepare surfaces to be painted according to the manufacturer's instructions for each particular substrate condition and as specified. 1. Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and reprime. Notify Engineer in writing about anticipated problems using the specified finish-coat material with substrates primed by others. 2. Ensure existing painted surfaces are structurally sound, dry, clean, and free of oil, grease, dirt, mildew, form release agents, curing compounds, efflorescence, loose and flaking paint, or other foreign material. Engineer will approve condition of prepared substrate prior to application of coating system. Test old coatings for lifting per coating manufacturer's recommendations. 3. Cementitious Materials: Prepare concrete and concrete masonry block, to be painted. Remove efflorescence, chalk, dust, dirt, grease, oils, and release agents. Roughen, as required, to remove glaze. If hardeners or sealers have been used to improve curing, use mechanical methods of surface preparation. a. Use abrasive blast-cleaning methods if recommended by the paint manufacturer. b. Determine alkalinity and moisture content of surfaces by performing appropriate tests. If surfaces are sufficiently alkaline to cause the finish paint to blister and burn, correct this condition before application. Do not paint surfaces where moisture content exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's printed directions. 4. Ferrous Metals: Clean un-galvanized ferrous metal surfaces that have not been shop-coated; remove oil, grease, dirt, loose mill scale, and other foreign substances. Use solvent or mechanical cleaning methods that comply with recommendations of the Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC), as specified below: a. Non-submerged ferrous metal components scheduled for priming shall be sandblasted clean in accordance with SSPC-SP-6, Commercial Grade, immediately prior to priming. b. Submerged components for priming shall be sandblasted clean in accordance with SSPC-SP-10, Near White, immediately prior to priming. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA FILED SUB-BID - PAINTING PAINTING AND COATING WOODARD & CURRAN 09 90 00-6 5. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean galvanized surfaces with nonpetroleum-based solvents so that the surface is free of oil and surface contaminants. Remove pretreatment from galvanized sheet metal fabricated from coil stock by mechanical methods. 6. Carefully mix and prepare paint materials according to manufacturer's directions. 7. Maintain containers used in mixing and applying paint in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 8. Stir material before application to produce a mixture of uniform density; stir as required during application. Do not stir surface film into material. Remove film and, if necessary, strain material before using. 9. Use only thinners approved by the paint manufacturer and only within recommended limits. 3.03 COLOR SELECTION A. Colors of finish coats: as indicated or specified or as selected by Owner. 3.04 APPLICATION A. General 1. Apply water-based paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air temperatures are between 50 degrees F and 90 degrees F. 2. Apply solvent-thinned paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air temperatures are between 45 degrees F and 95 degrees F. 3. Do not apply paint in snow, rain, fog, or mist; or when the relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; or to damp or wet surfaces. Painting may continue during inclement weather if surfaces and areas to be painted are enclosed and heated within temperature limits specified by the manufacturer during application and drying periods. 4. Apply paint according to manufacturer's directions. Use applicators and techniques best suited for substrate and type of material being applied. a. Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, or conditions detrimental to formation of a durable paint film. b. Paint colors, surface treatments, and finishes: indicated in the Paint Schedules. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA FILED SUB-BID - PAINTING PAINTING AND COATING WOODARD & CURRAN 09 90 00-7 c. Provide finish coats that are compatible with primers used. d. The number of coats and the film thickness required are the same regardless of the application method. Do not apply succeeding coats until the previous coat has cured as recommended by the manufacturer. Sand between applications where sanding is required to produce a smooth even surface according to the manufacturer's directions. e. Apply additional coats if undercoats, stains, or other conditions show through final coat of paint until paint film is of uniform finish, color, and appearance. Give special attention to ensure that surfaces, including edges, corners, crevices, welds, and exposed surfaces/fasteners, receive a dry film thickness equivalent to that of flat surfaces. f. The term “exposed surfaces” includes areas visible when permanent or built-in fixtures, convector covers, covers for finned tube radiation, grilles, and similar components are in place. Extend coatings in these areas, as required, to maintain the system integrity and provide desired protection. g. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture the same as similar exposed surfaces. Before the final installation of equipment, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only. h. Paint interior surfaces of ducts, where visible through registers or grilles, with a flat, non-specular black paint. i. Paint back sides of access panels and removable or hinged covers to match exposed surfaces. j. Finish exterior doors on tops, bottoms, and side edges same as exterior faces. k. Sand lightly between each succeeding enamel or varnish coat. l. Omit primer on metal surfaces that have been shop-primed and touch-up painted. m. Prime CMU walls and apply 1 finish coat prior to installation of any wall mounted equipment, piping, conduits, or fixed objects that would limit access for application of coating system and/or conceal portions of the wall surface. Apply second finish coat after all Work of other trades is completed. B. Apply first coat to surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated, or otherwise prepared for painting as soon as practicable after preparation and before subsequent surface deterioration. 1. Allow sufficient time between successive coats to permit proper drying. Do not recoat until paint has dried to where it feels firm, does not deform 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA FILED SUB-BID - PAINTING PAINTING AND COATING WOODARD & CURRAN 09 90 00-8 or feel sticky under moderate thumb pressure, and where application of another coat of paint does not cause the undercoat to lift or lose adhesion. C. Apply paints and coatings by brush, roller, spray, or other applicators according to the manufacturer's directions. 1. Brushes: Use brushes best suited for the material applied. 2. Rollers: Use rollers of carpet, velvet back, or high-pile sheep's wool as recommended by the manufacturer for the material and texture required. 3. Spray Equipment: Use airless spray equipment with orifice size as recommended by the manufacturer for the material and texture required. D. Apply materials no thinner than the manufacturer's recommended spreading rate. Provide the total dry film thickness of the entire system as recommended by the manufacturer. E. Paint only mechanical and electrical Work exposed in mechanical equipment rooms and in occupied spaces and paint mechanical, electrical, HVAC, process equipment, and other utility items as indicated on the Drawings. Do not paint items that are factory painted. Factory applied coating systems are specified in the Specification where the product or item is specified. Items to be painted include: 1. Piping 2. Pumps 3. Heat exchangers 4. Tanks 5. HVAC ductwork 6. Insulation 7. Supports 8. Motors and mechanical equipment 9. Accessory items F. Ferrous metals indicated on the Drawings to be painted will be provided with a shop primer compatible with the coatings specified herein. Paint ferrous metals specified in Section 05 50 00 that are not galvanized and indicated to be painted on the Drawings. G. Block Fillers: Apply block fillers to concrete masonry block at a rate to ensure complete coverage with pores filled. 3.05 PRIME COATS A. Before applying finish coats, apply a prime coat of material as recommended by the manufacturer, to material that is required to be painted or finished and that has not been prime-coated by others. Recoat primed and sealed surfaces where 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA FILED SUB-BID - PAINTING PAINTING AND COATING WOODARD & CURRAN 09 90 00-9 evidence of suction spots or unsealed areas in first coat appears, to ensure a finish coat with no burn-through or other defects due to insufficient sealing. Apply prime coat to previously painted surfaces if finish coats are not compatible with existing coating. 3.06 PIGMENTED (OPAQUE) FINISHES A. Completely cover to provide a smooth, opaque surface of uniform finish, color, appearance, and coverage. Cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections will not be acceptable. 3.07 PIPE, VALVE/EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION AND COLOR CODING A. Provide identification of pipes, valves and pumps by color as specified in the Section 22 00 00 Plumbing, 23 05 53 Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment, and 40 23 00 Process Piping. 3.08 COMPLETED WORK A. Match approved samples for color, texture, and coverage. Remove, refinish, or repaint Work not complying with specified requirements. 3.09 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. B. Site/Field Tests and Inspections: may be required by Owner up to four times during the period when paint is being applied. 1. Engage the services of an independent testing agency with minimum 5 years of experience to sample the paint material used. Provide that samples of material delivered to the Project are taken, identified, sealed, and certified in the presence of the Contractor. 2. The independent testing agency shall perform appropriate tests at no additional cost to the Owner for the following characteristics. a. Quantitative materials analysis b. Abrasion resistance c. Apparent reflectivity d. Flexibility e. Washability f. Absorption g. Accelerated weathering h. Dry opacity i. Accelerated yellowness j. Recoating k. Skinning 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA FILED SUB-BID - PAINTING PAINTING AND COATING WOODARD & CURRAN 09 90 00-10 l. Color retention m. Alkali and mildew resistance 3. If test results show material being used does not comply with specified requirements, stop painting, remove noncomplying paint, repaint surfaces coated with rejected paint, and remove rejected paint from previously painted surfaces if, upon repainting with specified paint, the two coatings are incompatible. 3.10 CLEANING A. At the end of each Work day, remove empty cans, rags, rubbish, and other discarded paint materials from the Site. Clean up debris resulting from Work and dispose in Project on-Site trash receptacles. B. After completing painting, clean glass and paint-spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paint by washing and scraping. Be careful not to scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces. 3.11 PROTECTION A. Protect Work of other trades, whether being painted or not, against damage by painting. Correct damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainting, as acceptable to Engineer. B. Provide "Wet Paint" signs to protect newly painted finishes. Remove temporary protective wrappings provided by others to protect their Work after completing painting operations. C. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces. 3.12 ATTACHMENTS A. Paint Schedule END OF SECTION 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA FILED SUB-BID - PAINTING PAINTING AND COATING WOODARD & CURRAN 09 90 00-11 PAINT SCHEDULE Number of coats scheduled is as a minimum. Painting and finishing shall conform to applicable Laws and building code regarding fire hazard classifications and volatile organic content of finish materials. Provide products by the manufacturers named or approved equal. Refer to "Room Finish Schedule" on the Drawings for building areas to be painted. Provide paint and coating systems listed below where the Drawings refer to this Specification section or reference any item to be painted or coated, unless a specific paint or coating system is specified elsewhere. This list is intended to cover all potential conditions that may require painting and not all paint and coating systems listed below may not be included in the Work. Equipment: Exterior Non-Submerged Ferrous Metals: Factory Applied 1. Tnemec “Series 1 Omnithane” DFT 2.5-3.5 mils Primer 2. S-W “Corothane I Galvapac Zinc Primer” DFT 3-4 mils 3. PPG “Amercoat 68HS” DFT 2-5 mils Factory Applied 1. Tnemec "Series 66HS Hi-Build Epoxoline" DFT 3-5 Prime Coat mils 2. S-W “Macropoxy 646” DFT 3-5 mils 3. PPG “Amercoat 370” DFT 4-6 mils Factory Applied 1. Tnemec “Series 73-color Endura-Shield” DFT 2.5-5 Finish Coat mils 2. S-W “Hi-Solids Polyurethane” DFT 3-5 mils 3. PPG “Amercoat 450H Shield” DFT 2-5 mils Equipment: Interior Non-Submerged Ferrous Metals: Factory Applied 1. Tnemec “Series 1 Omnithane” DFT 2.5-3.5 mils Primer 2. S-W "Recoatable Epoxy Primer" DFT 4-6 mils 3. PPG “Amerlock2/400” DFT 4-8 mils Factory Applied 1. Tnemec "Series 66HS Hi-Build Epoxoline" DFT 3-5 Prime Coat mils 2. S-W “Macropoxy 646” DFT 3-4 mils 3. PPG “Amerlock2/400” DFT 4-8 mils Factory Applied 1. Tnemec “Series 66HS Hi-Build Epoxoline” DFT 3-5 Finish Coat mils 2. S-W – “Macropoxy 646” DFT 3-4 mils 3. PPG – “Amerlock2/400” DFT 4-8 mils 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA FILED SUB-BID - PAINTING PAINTING AND COATING WOODARD & CURRAN 09 90 00-12 Equipment: Exterior or Interior Submerged Ferrous Metals Factory Applied 1. Tnemec “Series 1 Omnithane” DFT 2.5-3.5 mils Primer 2. S-W “Dura-Plate 235” DFT 4-6 mils 3. PPG “Amercoat 68HS” DFT 2-5 mils Factory Applied 1. Tnemec "Series 66HS Hi-Build Epoxoline" DFT 6-8 Prime Coat mils 2. S-W “Dura-Plate 235” DFT 3-4 mils 3. PPG “Amercoat 370” DFT 4-6 mils Factory Applied 1. Tnemec "Series 66HS Hi-Build Epoxoline" DFT 6-8 Finish Coat mils 2. S-W “Dura-Plate 235” DFT 4-6 mils 3. PPG “Amercoat 450H Shield” DFT 2-5 mils Galvanized Repair Paint Galvanizing Repair 1. Tnemec "Series 90-97 Tneme-Zinc" 2. S-W "Corothane I Galvapac 1K Zinc Primer" DFT 3- 4 mils 3. PPG "Amercoat 68HS” DFT 2-5 mils Finish Coat 2. S-W “Fast Clad Urethane” DFT 6-9 mils Ferrous metals listed in Section 05 50 00 Metal Fabrications Interior Exposure for Epoxy Coating Shop Applied 1. Tnemec "Series 27 Typoxy" DFT 2-3 mils Prime Coat 2. S-W "Recoatable Epoxy Primer" DFT 4-6 mils 3. PPG "Amerlock 370” DFT 4-6 mils Field Applied 1. Tnemec "Series 66HS Hi-Build Two Finish Coats Epoxoline" DFT 2-3 mils 2. S-W "Macropoxy 646" DFT 3-5 mils 3. PPG "Amerlock 2” DFT 4-8 mils/ct Ferrous metals listed in Section 05 50 00 Metals Fabrication Exterior Exposure for Epoxy Coating Shop Applied 1. Tnemec "Series 66HS Hi-Build Prime Coat Epoxoline" DFT 2-3 mils 2. S-W "Macropoxy 646" DFT 4-6 mils 3. PPG "Amercoat 385” DFT 4-8 mils Field Applied 1. Tnemec "Series 175 Endura-Shield" Two Finish Coats DFT 2-5 mils/ct 2. S-W "High Solids Polyurethane" DFT 3-4 mils/ct 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA FILED SUB-BID - PAINTING PAINTING AND COATING WOODARD & CURRAN 09 90 00-13 3. PPG "Amercoat 450H” DFT 2-3 mils/ct Ductile, Cast Iron, Copper, Aluminum or PVC - Interior or Exterior Exposure for Epoxy/Polyurethane Coating PVC Surface Scarify Preparation Field Applied 1. Tnemec "Series 66HS Hi-Build Prime Coat Epoxoline" DFT 2-3 mils 2. S-W "Macropoxy 646" DFT 3-5 mils 3. PPG "Amerlock 2” DFT 4-8 mils Field Applied 1. Tnemec "Series 66HS Hi-Build Intermediate Coat Epoxoline" DFT 4-6 mils 2. S-W "Macropoxy 646" DFT 3-5 mils 3. PPG "Amerlock 2” DFT 4-8 mils Field Applied 1. Tnemec Series 175 Endura-Shield" Finish Coat @ DFT 2-5 mils 2. S-W "High Solids Polyurethane" DFT 4-5 mils 3. PPG "Amercoat 250H 2-3” DFT 4-6 mils Ductile Iron Pipe - Submerged Field Applied 1. Tnemec "Series N140 Pota-Pox-Plus” Prime Coat DFT 2-3 mils 2. S-W "Dura-Plate 235" DFT 4-6 mils 3. PPG "Amerlock 2” DFT 4-8 mils Field Applied 1. Tnemec "Series 66HS Hi-Build Intermediate Coat Epoxoline" DFT 4-6 mils 2. S-W "Dura-Plate 235" DFT 3-4 mils 3. PPG "Amerlock 2/400” DFT 4-8 mils Field Applied 1. Tnemec "Series N140 Pota-Pox-Plus” Finish Coat DFT 2-3 mils 2. S-W "Dura-Plate 235" DFT 4-6 mils 3. PPG "Amerlock 2/400” DFT 4-8 mils Insulated Pipe Interior or Exterior Exposure for Acrylic Coating Field Applied 1. Tnemec "Series 151-1051 Elasto- Grip Primer" @ DFT 1.0-1.5 mils 2. S-W "DTM Acrylic/Primer" DFT 2.5-4.0 mils 3. PPG "Pitt Tech Plus Primer” DFT 2-4 mils Field Applied 1. Tnemec "Series 1029 Enduratone" 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA FILED SUB-BID - PAINTING PAINTING AND COATING WOODARD & CURRAN 09 90 00-14 Two Finish Coat @ DFT 2.0-3.0 mils/ct 2. S-W "Sher-Cryl HPA" DFT 2.5-4.0 mils/ct 3. PPG "Pitt Tech Plus 90-131” DFT 2-4 mils/ct Interior CMU walls for Waterborne Epoxy Coating Field Applied 1. Tnemec "Series 130 Envirofill" 60-80 sf/gal Prime Coat 2. S-W "Cement-Plex 875" DFT 50-100 SF/GAL 3. PPG "Amerlock 400BF” DFT 10-20 mils Field Applied 1. Tnemec "Series 113 Tufcoat" DFT 4-6 mils/ct Two Finish Coats 2. S-W "Waterbased Catalyzed Epoxy" DFT 2.5-3 mils/ct 3. PPG "Aquapon WB Water Base Epoxy” DFT 2-3 mils/ct Exterior Trim for Acrylic Coating, eggshell Field Applied 1. Tnemec "Series 10-99W” DFT 2-3 mils Prime Coat 2. S-W “Exterior Latex Wood Primer” DFT 2-3 mils 3. PPG "17-921 Seal grip Primer” DFT 2-3 mils/ct Field Applied 1. Tnemec "Tneme-Cryl Series 6” DFT 2-3 mils/ct Two Finish Coats 2. S-W "A-100 Exterior Acrylic Latex" DFT 1.5-2 mils/ct 3. PPG "Sun Proof Exterior House Paint” DFT 1-2 mils/ct 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA SPECIALTY H2S LINING FOR CONCRETE WOODARD & CURRAN 09 97 00-1 SECTION 09 97 00 SPECIALTY H2S LINING FOR CONCRETE (FILED SUB-BID REQUIRED) 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes 1. Provide all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals as specified, shown, and required to furnish, install, and place into satisfactory service the protective liner including surface preparation and painting in accordance with this Section and applicable reference standards listed in Article 1.03 for the following new concrete tanks: a. Gravity Thickener Tanks: T-0611, T-0612, and T-0613 per drawings S-303, and S-305 (Bid Alternate #4). b. Gravity Thickener Scum Well and Distribution Tank: T-0711 and T-0614 per drawings S-306 (Bid Alternate #4). c. Return Activated Sludge Distribution Tank T-0621 per drawings S- 309 2. Where not otherwise shown, extent of the protective lining shall be located as shown on the Drawings. 3. Types of protective lining for concrete Work required include, but are not necessarily limited to, the following: a. Trowelable, rapid-setting, cementitious repair mortar b. Trowelable, fast-setting, epoxy- modified cementitious thin overlay (resurfacer) c. Corrosion-resistant, spray-applied, fiber-reinforced high-build epoxy lining (basecoat) d. Corrosion-resistant, high-build epoxy glaze coat (topcoat) e. Miscellaneous materials. 4. Cleaning, surface preparation, lining application, and thicknesses shall be as specified herein and shall meet or exceed the lining manufacturer’s recommendations. When the manufacturer’s minimum recommendations exceed the specified requirements, CONTRACTOR shall comply with the Manufacturer’s minimum recommendations. B. This Section applies to the Base Bid and to Bid Alternate #4, as indicated in Section 00 41 02 Form for General Bid. Work included in this specification for the Return Activated Sludge Distribution Tank (T-0621) shall be part of 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA SPECIALTY H2S LINING FOR CONCRETE WOODARD & CURRAN 09 97 00-2 the Base Bid. Work included in this specification for the Gravity Thickener Tanks (T-0611, T-0612, and T-0613), Gravity Thickener Scum Well (T-0711), and Distribution Tank (T-0614) shall only be included if Alternate #4 is part of the project. C. Related Sections: 1. Section 03 30 00, Cast-in-Place Concrete 2. Section 07 92 00, Joint Sealants 3. Section 09 90 00, Painting and Coating (Filed Sub-Bid Required) 1.02 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Measurement and payment requirements: per Division 01 General Requirements. 1.03 REFERENCES A. This Section contains references to the governing standards and documents listed below. They are a part of this Section as specified and modified; the current version shall apply unless otherwise noted. In case of conflict between the requirements of this section and those of the listed documents, the more stringent of the requirements shall prevail. 1. American Concrete Institute, (ACI) a. ACI 301 – Specifications for Structural Concrete b. ACI 308R – Guide to Curing Concrete c. ACI 350 – Code Requirements for Environmental Engineering Concrete Structures and Commentary d. ACI 515 – A Guide to the use of Waterproofing, Damproofing, Protective, and Decorative Barrier Systems for Concrete e. ACI 546.R – Concrete Repair Guide f. ACI 546.3R – Guide for the Selection of Materials for the Repair of Concrete 2. ASTM International, (ASTM) a. ASTM C 868 – Standard Test Method for Chemical Resistance of Protective Linings b. ASTM C 1583/1583M – Standard Test Method for Tensile Strength of Concrete Surfaces and the Bond Strength or Tensile Strength of Concrete Repair and Overlay Materials by Direct Tension (Pull-off Method) c. ASTM D 2794 – Standard Test Method for Resistance of Organic Linings to the Effects of Rapid Deformation (Impact) 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA SPECIALTY H2S LINING FOR CONCRETE WOODARD & CURRAN 09 97 00-3 d. ASTM D 4060 – Standard Test Method for Abrasion Resistance of Organic Linings by the Taber Abraser e. ASTM D 4285 – Standard Test Method for Indicating Water or Oil in Compressed Air f. ASTM D 4263 – Standard Test Method for Indicating Moisture in Concrete by the Plastic Sheet Method g. ASTM D 4414 – Standard Practice for Measurement of Wet Film Thickness by Notch Gages h. ASTM D 6944 Standard Test Method for Measuring Humidity with a Physchrometer i. ASTM F 1869 – Standard Test Method for Measuring Moisture Vapor Emission Rate of Concrete Subfloor Using Anhydrous Calcium Chloride j. ASTM F 2414 – Standard Practice for Sealing Sewer Manholes Using Chemical Grouting 3. International Concrete Repair Institute, (ICRI) a. Guideline No. 310.1R – Guide for Surface Preparation for the Repair of Deteriorated Concrete Resulting from Reinforcing Steel Corrosion b. Guideline No. 310.2 – Selecting and Specifying Concrete Surface Preparation for Sealer, Linings, and Polymer Overlays 4. NACE International, (NACE) a. NACE Publication 6D-173 – A Manual for Painter Safety b. NACE SP0188 – Standard Practice for Discontinuity (Holiday) Testing of Protective Linings c. NACE SP0892 – Standard Practice for Coatings and Linings over Concrete for Chemical Immersion and Containment Service d. NACE No. 6/SSPC-SP13 – Surface Preparation of Concrete 5. Occupational Safety and health Administration, (OSHA) a. Safety and health Standards (29 CFR 1910/1926) 6. SSPC: The Society for Protective Linings, (SSPC) a. SSPC-SP13/NACE No. 6 – Surface Preparation of Concrete b. SSPC-Guide 12 – Guide for Illumination of Industrial Painting Projects 7. Standard Practice for the Rapid Evaluation of Coatings and Linings by Severe Wastewater Analysis Test, (S.W.A.T.) 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA SPECIALTY H2S LINING FOR CONCRETE WOODARD & CURRAN 09 97 00-4 B. Unless otherwise specified, references to documents shall mean the documents in effect at the time of receipt of Bids. If referenced documents have been discontinued by the issuing organization, references to those documents shall mean the replacement documents, the last version of the document before it was discontinued. 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination, Sequencing, and Scheduling: per Division 01 General Requirements. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. B. Shop Drawings: Submit for approval prior to commencing any Work: 1. Product Data Sheets: Copies of current technical data for each component specified and applied as outlined in this Section. 2. Material Safety Data Sheets: Copies of current MSDS for any materials brought on-site including all clean-up solvents and lining materials. 3. Qualification Data: Approved Installer Training Certificates from manufacturer. 4. Performance Testing Reports: Copies of test data for the entire physical, chemical, and permeation properties listed herein and as outlined within this Section. 5. Installation Instructions: Manufacturer’s written installation instructions for the materials specified in this Section. 6. Construction Details: Copies of manufacturer’s computer generated standard lining details for specified materials, including: leading edge termination, metal embedment in concrete, joint detail, wall-to-slab detail, pipe termination detail, and any other detail at the request of the ENGINEER. 7. Maintenance Manual: Upon completion of the Work, submit five copies of corrosion protection lining manufacturer’s written instructions for recommended maintenance practices. Include the following information: a. Product name and number. b. Name, address, e-mail address and telephone number of manufacturer and local representative. c. Detailed procedures for routine maintenance and cleaning. d. Detailed procedures for repairs. 8. Product Substitution: The specified corrosion protection lining is the minimum standard of quality for this project. Equivalent materials of other 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA SPECIALTY H2S LINING FOR CONCRETE WOODARD & CURRAN 09 97 00-5 manufacturers may be substituted only by approval of Engineer. Requests for material substitutions shall be in accordance with requirements of the project specification. a. Manufacturers of “or equal” products shall provide direct property comparison with the materials specified in addition to complying with all other requirements of these Specifications. “Or equal” products shall employ the same generic materials and system components as the corrosion protection lining specified. “Or equal” products shall provide equivalent performance as the corrosion protection lining specified. C. Jobsite Reports: Submit at the completion of Work 1. Daily Reports: Include surface preparation, substrate conditions, ambient conditions application procedures, lining materials applied, material quantities, material batch number(s), description of work completed and location thereof. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicator Qualifications: 1. Contractor shall be a qualified Applicator by the corrosion protection lining manufacturer prior to bid date. Only applicators that are approved by the coating manufacturer may perform coating work for this Project. Submit proof of acceptability of Applicator by manufacturer to ENGINEER. 2. Applicator shall have a minimum of 10 years of experience with completing painting system applications similar in material and extent to those indicated for the Project that have resulted in a construction record of successful in-service performance. A minimum of five (5) references shall be provided for similar coating projects. 3. Installation equipment shall be acceptable to the protective lining manufacturer. 4. Applicator to establish quality control procedures and practices to monitor phases of surface preparation, storage, mixing, application, and inspection throughout the duration of the project. Contractor to provide a fulltime, on- site person whose dedicated responsibilities will include quality control of the corrosion protection linings. 5. Quality control procedures and practices must include the following items: 6. Training of personnel in the proper surface preparation requirements. 7. Training of personnel in the proper storing, mixing, application, and inspection of the linings. B. Mock-Ups: 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA SPECIALTY H2S LINING FOR CONCRETE WOODARD & CURRAN 09 97 00-6 1. Prior to the installation of the corrosion protection lining and auxiliary system components, but after Engineer’s approval of the Samples and Shop Drawings, install 150 square foot stepped-back mock-ups of the systems showing each system component, in area selected by Engineer, to show representative installation of the Work. 2. Obtain Engineer’s acceptance of visual qualities of the mock-ups before start of Work. Retain and protect mock-ups during construction as one standard for judging completed corrosion protection lining Work. Do not alter mock-ups after approval by Engineer. a. Finished Work, in compliance with visual qualities of mock-ups, that fails other on-site quality control testing procedures shall be replaced by Contractor with new materials. 3. Build as many mock-ups as required to achieve Engineer’s acceptance of the corrosion protection lining. 4. Accepted mock-up shall be considered the acceptable minimum standard of quality. 5. Corrosion protection lining Work that proceeds without approved mock-ups shall be stopped, and mock-ups prepared for approval. C. Pre-Installation Conference: 1. Before erecting mock-ups, Contractor, Installer and technical representative of the corrosion protection lining manufacturer shall meet on-site with Engineer to discuss approved products and workmanship to ensure proper application of the corrosion protection lining components and substrate preparation requirements. 2. Review foreseeable methods and procedures related to the corrosion protection lining of coating Work, including but not necessarily limited to, the following: a. Review Project requirements and the Contract Documents. b. Review required submittals, both completed and yet to be completed. c. Review status of substrate Work, including approval of surface preparations and similar considerations. d. Review requirements of on-site quality control testing and requirements for preparing Site Quality Control Report as specified herein. e. Review availability of materials, tradesmen, equipment and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays. f. Review required inspection and testing. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA SPECIALTY H2S LINING FOR CONCRETE WOODARD & CURRAN 09 97 00-7 g. Review environmental conditions, other Project conditions, and procedures for coping with unfavorable conditions. h. Review regulations concerning code compliance, environmental protection, health, safety, fire and similar considerations. i. Review procedures required for the protection of the corrosion protection lining during the remainder of the construction period. 3. Record the discussions of the Pre-Installation Conference and the decisions and agreements or disagreements reached, and furnish a copy for the record to each party attending. Record any revision or changes agreed upon, reasons therefore, and parties agreeing or disagreeing with them. 4. Reconvene the conference at the earliest opportunity if additional information must be developed in order to conclude the subjects under consideration. D. Performance Criteria: 1. The surfaces to receive the protective lining shall be capable of withstanding, under constant exposure to, raw wastewater, permeation from hydrogen sulfide and other sewer gases, and attack from organic acids generated by microbial sources, with no adverse effects. Products must have sufficient field history and accelerated laboratory testing to substantiate product viability for these exposures. 2. The finished coating shall be uniform in color, texture and appearance. All edges that have discontinuities and other embedded items shall be sharp, uniform and cosmetically acceptable with no thick or ragged edge. The Contractor shall work out an acceptable masking technique to ensure the acceptable finish of all coated surfaces. E. Source Quality Control: Provide each component of protective lining produced by a single manufacturer, including recommended repair mortar, repair overlay (resurfacers), base coat and top coat materials. F. Reference Standards: Comply with applicable provisions and recommendations of all standards listed herein, except as otherwise shown or specified. G. Protective Linings system specified are as manufactured by Tnemec Company, Inc., Kansas City, MO (816) 483-3400. Specified system is the minimum standard of quality for this project. Request for material substitutions shall be in accordance with requirements of the project specifications. 1.07 COORDINATION A. Coordinate surface preparation of substrates to avoid later difficulty or delay in performing the Work of this Section. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA SPECIALTY H2S LINING FOR CONCRETE WOODARD & CURRAN 09 97 00-8 B. Review installation procedures under other Sections and coordinate the instillation of items that must be installed prior to application of the protective lining. C. All substrate surface preparation and lining application, including concrete resurfacing, to be completed by manufacturer’s approved Applicator. D. The CONTRACTOR shall coordinate with ENGINEER regarding the availability of work areas, completion times, safety, access and other factors which can impact plant operations. 1.08 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Delivery of Materials: 1. Deliver material in manufacturer’s original, unopened and undamaged packages. 2. Clearly identify manufacturer’s, brand name, contents, color, batch number, and any personal safety hazards associated with the use of or exposure to the materials on each package. 3. Packages showing indications of damage that may affect condition of contents are not acceptable. B. Storage of Materials: 1. Materials shall be stored in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations in enclosed structures and shall be protected from weather and adverse temperature conditions. Flammable materials shall be stored in accordance with state and local codes. Materials exceeding storage life as defined by the manufacturer shall be removed promptly from the site. Store all materials only in area or areas designated by the ENGINEER solely for this purpose. 2. Store in original packaging under protective cover and protect from damage. 3. Stack containers in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations. C. Handling of Materials: Handle materials in such a manner as to prevent damage to products or finishes. D. Follow all manufacturer’s specific instructions and prudent safety practices for delivery, storage and handling. 1.09 SITE CONDITIONS A. Existing Conditions: per Division 01 General Requirements. B. Environmental Requirements: 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA SPECIALTY H2S LINING FOR CONCRETE WOODARD & CURRAN 09 97 00-9 1. Proceed with corrosion protection lining Work only when temperature and moisture conditions of substrates, air temperature, relative humidity, dewpoint and other conditions comply with the corrosion protection lining manufacturer’s written recommendations and when no damaging environmental conditions are forecasted for the time when the material will be vulnerable to such environmental damage. Record all such conditions and include in final Site Quality Control Report. 2. Maintain substrate temperature and ambient temperature before, during and after installation above 50°F (10°C) and rising in accordance with protective lining material manufacturer’s instructions. 3. Provide adequate ventilation during instillation and full curing periods of the protective lining. 4. Protective Lining shall not be applied when ambient air temperature is within 5°F (3°C) of the dew point and falling. 5. Protective Lining shall not be applied when relative humidity is outside of material manufacturer’s recommendations. Do not prepare surfaces or apply materials in rain, snow, fog, mist, or otherwise inclement weather as per material manufacturer’s instructions. C. Dust and Contaminants: Protect work and adjacent areas from excessive dust and airborne contaminates during protective lining application and curing. Schedule Work to avoid excessive dust and airborne contaminants. D. Protect all adjacent surfaces not to be coated with masking and covers. 1.10 WARRANTY A. Protective Lining Manufacturer shall warranty its products as free from material defects for a minimum period of three (3) years. Provide associated Warranty Certificate. B. CONTRACTOR shall warranty the installed protective lining system as free from workmanship defects for a minimum period of three (3) years. C. Written warranty shall cover full labor and materials during the warranty period, as required to repair and/or replace any defects or failures observed relative to all lining and repair items included in this specification. Defects include, but are not limited to, cracking, spalling, delamination, disbonding, peeling, bubbling, flaking, rust bleeding through coating, etc. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. TNEMEC Company, Inc 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA SPECIALTY H2S LINING FOR CONCRETE WOODARD & CURRAN 09 97 00-10 B. Carboline C. Dupont D. Approved Equal E. Requests for submission will be reviewed and shall include the respective manufacturer's technical literature for each product giving the name, generic type, descriptive information, recommended dry film thickness, certified test reports showing results to equal the performance criteria as specified herein and the Manufacturer's Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) for each product. No request for substitution shall be considered that would change the generic type of coating system specified. F. Manufacturers of Approved System shall be of single source and made in the USA. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Protective Lining shall be comprised of 1) concrete repair mortar or epoxy resurfacer, 2) spray-applied, fiber-reinforced epoxy liner (basecoat), and 3) epoxy glaze (topcoat). 1. Cementitious Repair Mortar: Trowelable grade rapid-setting cementitious repair mortar when concrete is deteriorated greater than a depth of 1/4-inch and when recommended by the Manufacturer to restore concrete and provide level substrate for application of the protective lining; or 2. Epoxy Resurfacer: Epoxy-polymer modified cementitious resurfacer (thin overlay) applied to new or existing concrete to a depth up to 1/2-inch. Repair new or existing concrete and provide a uniform, level substrate for application of the protective lining; and 3. Spray-applied, fiber-reinforced high-build epoxy liner (basecoat) to provide a chemical, permeation, and abrasion resistant protective lining against physical and chemical attack phenomena typically associated with municipal wastewater headspace conditions; and 4. Epoxy glaze coat (topcoat) to provide enhanced chemical, permeation, and abrasion resistance. B. CONTRACTOR shall provide all accessory components such as polysulfide sealants, and curing compounds, as recommended by the manufacturer for maximum protective lining adhesion to substrate, and long-term service performance. C. Cementitious Shallow-Depth Repair Mortar: 1. Properties for Tnemec Series 217 MortarCrete a. Minimum Thickness = 1/4 inches 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA SPECIALTY H2S LINING FOR CONCRETE WOODARD & CURRAN 09 97 00-11 b. Maximum Thickness = 4.0 inches c. Application Time: Initial set at 75°F = 60 min; Final set at 75°F = 90 min d. Bond Strength (ASTM C 1583) 1) Applied at ¼” to Concrete --> Concrete Failure 2) Applied at 2.0” to Concrete --> Concrete Failure e. Compressive Strength (ASTM C 579) 1) 16 hours --> 8,670 psi 2) 28 days --> 10,650 psi f. Curing Requirements (ACI 308R) 1) Method --> Wet- or Membrane-cure 2) Duration --> Manufacturer Recommended g. Drying Shrinkage (ASTM C 596) = 0.0% h. Linear Shrinkage (ASTM C 531) = 0.022% i. Thermal Expansion (ASTM C 531) = 7.46 x 10-6 in/in/°F 2. Shallow-depth cementitious repair mortar shall be a rapid-setting, non- shrinking resurfacing material. Material shall have similar CLTE properties as concrete. 3. Material shall have a minimum 12-month shelf life. D. Epoxy modified Cementitious Resurfacer: 1. Properties for Tnemec Series 218-1000 MortarClad a. Minimum thickness = 1/16 inch b. Maximum thickness = 1/2 inch c. Application Working Time at 75°F = 60 min d. Bond Strength (ASTM D 7234) 1) Applied at 1/16” to Concrete --> Concrete Failure e. Compressive Strength (ASTM C 579) = 7,100 psi f. Curing Requirements (ACI 308) 1) Method --> Ambient Cure 2) Duration --> 15 hours g. Flexural Strength (ASTM C580) = 1,290 psi h. Slant Shear (ASTM C882) = 1,040 psi i. Splitting Tensile (ASTM C496) = 640 psi E. Epoxy Lining, Fiber-Reinforced Protective Lining (basecoat): 1. Properties for Tnemec Series 436 Perma-Shield FR 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA SPECIALTY H2S LINING FOR CONCRETE WOODARD & CURRAN 09 97 00-12 a. Application Time at 75°F = 30 min b. Color = Gray c. Maximum Dry Film Thickness (DFT) = 125 mils d. Severe Wastewater Analysis Test (S.W.A.T.) 1) Initial EIS Impedance (Log Z0.01 Hz Ω cm2) = 10.4 2) Final EIS Impedance (Log Z0.01 Hz Ω cm2) = 10.2 e. Bond Strength (ASTM D 7234) 1) Bare Concrete/Series 436 --> Concrete Failure 2) Bare Concrete/Series 217/Series 436 --> Concrete Failure 3) Bare Concrete/Series 218/Series 436 --> Concrete Failure f. Chemical Resistance (ASTM C 686) 1) 25% H2SO4, 100 days, 100°F --> No effect g. Compressive Strength (ASTM D 695) = 8,866 psi h. Elongation (ASTM D 638) = 7.65% i. Flexural (ASTM D 790) 1) Strength = 8,148 psi 2) Modulus of Elasticity = 5.4 x 105 psi j. Shrinkage (ASTM C 531) = 0.06% k. Tensile Strength (ASTM D 2370) = 2,940 psi l. Thermal Expansion 1) Linear Coefficient (ASTM C 531) = 5.68 x 10-5 in/in/°F 2) Thermal Cycling (ASTM D 6944) --> No effect m. Water Absorption (ASTM C 413) = 0.4% n. Water Vapor Transmission (ASTM D 1653) = 0.43 perms F. Epoxy Lining, Glaze Protective Lining (topcoat): 1. Properties for Tnemec Series 435 Perma-Glaze a. Application Time at 75°F = 30 min b. Color = Gray c. Minimum Dry Film Thickness (DFT) = 15 mils d. Maximum Dry Film Thickness (DFT) = 20 mils e. Severe Wastewater Analysis Test (S.W.A.T.) 1) Initial EIS Impedance (Log Z0.01 Hz Ω cm2) = 11.3 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA SPECIALTY H2S LINING FOR CONCRETE WOODARD & CURRAN 09 97 00-13 2) Final EIS Impedance (Log Z0.01 Hz Ω cm2) = 11.1 3) Optical Microscopy = No more than 9% 4) ∆ Tensile Strength = No more than 19% 5) ∆ Flexural Strength = No more than 6% f. Bond Strength (ASTM D7234) 1) Bare Concrete/Series 436 --> Concrete Failure 2) Bare Concrete/Series 217/Series 436 --> Concrete Failure 3) Bare Concrete/Series 218/Series 436 --> Concrete Failure g. Chemical Resistance (ASTM C686) 1) 25% H2SO4, 100 days, 100°F --> No effect h. Compressive Strength (ASTM D695) = 9,427 psi i. Elongation (ASTM D638) = 14.1% j. Flexural (ASTM D790) 1) Strength = 3,289 psi 2) Modulus of Elasticity = 3.0 x 105 psi k. Tensile Strength (ASTM D2370) = 2,053 psi l. Water Absorption (ASTM C413) = 0.07% m. Water Vapor Transmission (ASTM D1653) = 0.243 perms G. Product and Manufacturer: 1. Materials specified are those that have been evaluated for the specific service. Products of Tnemec Company, Inc. (816-483-3400) are listed to establish a standard of performance and quality. Equivalent materials from Carboline or Sauereisen may be submitted on written approval of the Engineer. As part of the proof of equality, the Engineer will require at the cost of the Contractor, comparative laboratory tests as directed by the Engineer between the product specified and the requested substitution. 2. Requests for substitution shall include manufacturer’s literature for each product giving name, product number, generic type, descriptive information, laboratory testing showing results to equal the performance criteria of the products specified herein. In addition, a list of ten projects shall be submitted in which each product has been used and rendered satisfactory service. 3. Requests for product substitution shall be made at least 10 days prior to the bid date. 4. Any material savings shall be passed to the owner in the form of a contract dollar reduction. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA SPECIALTY H2S LINING FOR CONCRETE WOODARD & CURRAN 09 97 00-14 PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. CONTRACTOR shall provide, erect, and maintain all required hoists, scaffolding, staging and planking, and perform all access related hoisting work required to complete the Work of this Section as specified. B. CONTRACTOR shall cover or otherwise protect finish work or other surfaces not being coated within the scope of this Section. Contractor shall erect and maintain protective tarps, enclosures and/or masking to contain debris, including dust or other airborne particles from surface preparation or application activities. This may include the use of dust or debris collection apparatus as required at not additional cost to OWNER. 3.02 PRE-CONSTRUCTION INSPECTION A. CONTRACTOR shall examine the areas and conditions under which the protective coating Work is to be performed in accordance with SSPC-SP13/NACE No. 6 and notify ENGINEER in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the Work. B. CONTRACTOR shall examine and report the presence of a positive side waterproofing on the exterior of the concrete structure. C. Commencement of the Work of this Section shall indicate that the substrate and other conditions of installation are acceptable to the CONTRACTOR and his Applicator, and will produce a finished product meeting the requirements of the Specifications. All defects resulting from accepted conditions shall be corrected by CONTRACTOR at his own expense. D. Stopping Active Leaks: After surface cleaning, any visible leaks or other water ingress shall be reported to the ENGINEER. Any water infiltration through minor leaks must be stopped using a polyurethane grout manufactured by Avanti International, Webster, TX (281-486-5600), or approved equal. Surface and grouting material may require additional surface preparation prior to application of protective coating. 3.03 SUBSTRATE PREPARATION A. Concrete surfaces to receive protective coating shall be cast with smooth form finish, including the leveling or grinding of form fins in accordance with ACI 301. Surfaces shall not be rubbed, sacked, troweled or otherwise finished in any manner that will obscure or cover the parent concrete surface with materials other than as specified in this Section. B. Allow concrete to cure for a minimum of 28 days before installing the corrosion protection lining system. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA SPECIALTY H2S LINING FOR CONCRETE WOODARD & CURRAN 09 97 00-15 C. All surface washing, abrasive blasting, water-jetting, grinding, patching, filling and preparation shall be completed by the Applicator in accordance with the Protective Coating Manufacturer’s recommendations. D. Substrate: Concrete surfaces to be coated shall be free of curing compounds and form release agents, laitance and foreign particles that my inhibit bonding. Prior to start of protective coating systems application, high-pressure water clean or waterjet to be covered as required, and inspect the substrate in accordance with SSPC-SP13/NACE No. 6. Surface preparation procedures shall be in accordance with SSPC-SP13/NACE No. 6 and ICRI Guideline No. 03732. Surface preparation requirement is to expose aggregate and obtain a uniform surface texture resembling an ICRI-CSP5-6. E. New Concrete Application: New Concrete voids, bugholes, and other surface depressions shall be filled with thin overlay material, re-establishing plan finished grades and concrete planes. The thin overlay shall be applied as a continuous parge coat at a minimum 1/16” thickness to the entire concrete surface. 1. All new cast-in-place concrete shall cure for a period of 28 days in accordance with ACI 308 before protective coating system is installed, unless otherwise recommended by the Protective Coating manufacturer. 2. Moisture Testing a. Floor – as per the manufacturer’s recommendations. F. Existing Concrete Application: Existing concrete structures to receive protective coating system must be capable of withstanding imposed loads. All oil, grease and chemical contaminants must be removed from the surface of concrete by chemical cleaning prior to preparation in accordance with SSPC-SP13/NACE No. 6. Surfaces must be firm, free of standing water, laitance, form release agents, and be structurally sound as determined by the engineer. Surface preparation requirement is to expose a sound, uniform surface texture resembling an ICRI- CSP 5-6. The appropriate replacement/overlay material must be applied to the prepared surface to level surface suitable for coating. 1. All existing concrete surfaces shall be decontaminated to remove all microorganisms, acid constituents, grease, oil, and other contaminants prior to commencement of surface preparation in accordance with SSPC- SP13/NACE No. 6. 2. Verify acceptable surface pH of the decontaminated concrete within. G. Metal Application: Remove all visible contaminants per SSPC-SP1. All ferrous metals shall be blast cleaned in the field conforming to SSPC-SP-5 standards. A minimum 3.0 mil anchor pattern is required. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA SPECIALTY H2S LINING FOR CONCRETE WOODARD & CURRAN 09 97 00-16 3.04 APPLICATION A. Protective coating systems shall be installed when ambient air and surface temperature is above 50°F. The substrate temperature shall be at least 5°F above the dew point. Condition the material between 70°-80°F for 24 hours prior to use. Application when temperatures outside of this range will require written instruction from the manufacturer and approval of the ENGINEER. B. Application in direct sunlight and/or with rising surface temperatures is not allowed, as this may result in blistering of the materials due to expansion of entrapped air or moisture in the concrete. In such cases, it will be necessary to postpone the application until later in the day when the temperature of the substrate is falling. C. New Concrete Application: 1. 1st Coat: Apply a parge coat of Series 218 @ 1/16th of an inch, filling all bug holes in the concrete. 2. 2nd Coat: Apply one coat of Tnemec Series 436FR @ 80.0-100.0 mils dry. 3. 3rd Coat: Apply one coat of Tnemec Series 435 @ 15.0-20.0 mils dry. D. Ferrous Metals within the Tank 1. All ferrous metals shall be blast cleaned in the field conforming to SSPC- SP5 standards. A minimum 3.0 mil anchor pattern is required. 2. Apply TWO coats of Tnemec 435 @ 15.0-20.0 mils dry per coat. E. Areas not to receive Protective Lining system shall be masked or otherwise protected to prevent the surfaces being coated. F. Ensure straight, even termination of protective lining system on wall edges and flush with the embedded steel. 3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL, INSPECTION AND TESTING A. CONTRACTOR to perform the quality control procedures listed below in conjunction with the requirements of this Section. B. Inspect all materials upon receipt to ensure that all are supplied by the approved Manufacturer. C. Inspect and record findings for the degree of cleanliness of substrates used. The pH of the concrete substrate will be measured using pH indicating papers. The pH testing is to be performed once every 50 sq. ft. Acceptable pH values shall be between 9.0 and 11.0 as measured by a full-range (1-12) color indicating pH paper with readable color calibrations and a scale at whole numbers (minimum). Use Hydrion Insta-Check Jumbo 0-13 or 1-12 or equal. The paper shall be touched to the surface once using moderate gloved finger pressure. The surface shall not be 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA SPECIALTY H2S LINING FOR CONCRETE WOODARD & CURRAN 09 97 00-17 wiped or moved laterally to disturb the surface during pH testing. Following the one touch, lift the paper vertically to not "wipe" the surface. Compare the color indicated with the scale provided and record the pH. Spot check any areas that may be questionable with phenolphthalein. D. Inspect and record substrate profile (anchor pattern). Surfaces shall be abraded, at a minimum, equal to the roughness of CSP5 in accordance with ICRI Guideline 03732 and SSPC-SP13/NACE No. 6. E. Measure and record ambient air temperature once every two hours of each shift, use a thermometer and measure and record substrate temperature once every two hours using an infrared or other surface thermometer. F. Measure and record relative humidity and dew point temperature every two hours of each shift using a sling psychrometer in accordance with ASTM E337. G. Provide correct mixing of coating materials in accordance with the Manufacturer’s instructions. H. Inspect and record that the "pot life" of coating materials is not exceeded during installation. I. Verify curing of the coating materials in accordance with the Manufacturer's instructions. J. Upon full cure, the installed lining system shall be checked by high voltage spark detection in accordance with NACE SP0188, and the Manufacturer’s printed application guide to verify a pinhole-free surface. Areas which do not pass the spark detection test shall be corrected at no cost to the Owner and rechecked upon cure. K. CONTRACTOR is responsible for keeping the ENGINEER informed of all progress so that ENGINEER may provide additional quality control at his discretion. L. Inspection by the ENGINEER or others does not absolve the CONTRACTOR from his responsibilities for quality control inspection and testing as specified herein or as required by the Manufacturer's instructions. M. Independent Coating Inspector: 1. The services of an independent coating inspector may be retained and paid for by the Owner to inspect the surface preparation and application of the specified coatings. 2. Contractor shall cooperate with inspector to provide safe access for inspection and shall conduct thorough inspection of substrates or linings to ensure that work is done in accordance with the contract documents. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA SPECIALTY H2S LINING FOR CONCRETE WOODARD & CURRAN 09 97 00-18 3. Applicator and Contractor shall be responsible to provide a minimum of 48 hours of notice to inspector for inspection points identified at the start of the lining work. 4. Should the Contractor not be ready for a mutually-agreed upon date for an inspection and the inspector shows up on site, the Contractor shall be responsible to pay for the inspector’s time for any wasted inspection trips. N. Manufacturer’s Representative: Provide site inspection by manufacturer’s field representative before and during application (minimum of 2 days per individual tank structure). 3.06 ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA A. All surfaces shall be prepared in accordance with the specification and referenced standards herein. B. Finish Criteria for coated surfaces: 1. Finished, coated surface shall have uniform color and shall be smooth, monolithic, and free of holidays, pits, drips, runs, trowel licks, cracks, blisters, bubbles, off-gassing pinholes, and other marks or defects; 2. Finish shall be equivalent to a “smooth form finish” for new concrete and as defined by Mock-Up Panel outlined in Part 1 of this specification. 3.07 ADJUSTMENT AND CLEANING A. At the completion of the Work, CONTRACTOR shall remove all materials and debris associated with the Work of this Section. B. Clean all surfaces not designated to receive protective lining. Restore all other wok in a manner acceptable to ENGINEER. 1. All finished protective lining shall be protected from damage until Final Acceptance of the Work. Protective lining damaged in any manner shall be repaired or replaced at the discretion of ENGINEER, at no additional cost to OWNER. 2. Clean all protective lining as recommended by the manufacturer to provide finished Work acceptable to OWNER, just prior to Final Acceptance. END OF SECTION 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA FIRE EXTINGUISHERS WOODARD & CURRAN 10 44 16-1 SECTION 10 44 16 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes 1. Provide fire extinguishers in accordance with this Section and applicable reference standards listed in Article 1.03. 1.02 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Measurement and payment requirements: per Division 01 General Requirements. 1.03 REFERENCES A. Reference Standards 1. International Code Council (ICC) 2. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 3. U.S. National Archives and Records Administration (NARA) 4. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination, Sequencing, and Scheduling: per Division 01 General Requirements. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. B. Product Data 1. Fire Extinguisher 2. Accessories 3. Wall Brackets 4. Replacement Parts 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA FIRE EXTINGUISHERS WOODARD & CURRAN 10 44 16-2 C. Shop Drawings 1. Fire Extinguisher 2. Accessories 3. Wall Brackets D. Certificates 1. Certification that Fire Extinguishers comply with local codes and regulations. 2. Certification that Fire Extinguishers comply with OSHA, NFPA, and UL requirements. E. Closeout and Maintenance Material Submittals: per Division 01 General Requirements. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. B. Protect materials from weather, soil, and damage during delivery, storage, and construction. C. Deliver materials in their original packages, containers, or bundles bearing the brand name and the name and type of the material. 1.08 SITE CONDITIONS A. Existing Conditions: per Division 01 General Requirements. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 TYPE A. Must conform to NFPA 10 Quantity and placement must comply with the applicable sections of IFC 1414, IFC 906, NFPA 1, NFPA 101, and 29 CFR 1910.157. B. Provide dry chemical type fire extinguishers compliant with UL 299, rated A:B:C for all extinguishers, unless noted otherwise. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA FIRE EXTINGUISHERS WOODARD & CURRAN 10 44 16-3 C. Provide carbon dioxide fire extinguishers compliant with UL 299, rated B:C, for extinguishers located within the electrical room. D. Submit Manufacturer's Data for each type of Fire Extinguisher required, detailing all related wall mounting and accessories information, complete with Manufacturer's Warranty with Inspection Tag. 2.02 MATERIAL A. Fire Extinguisher shall be red enameled steel. 2.03 SIZE A. Fire Extinguisher shall be 10 pounds. 2.04 ACCESSORIES A. Provide pressure gage on each Fire Extinguisher. 2.05 WALL BRACKETS A. Provide wall-hook Fire Extinguisher wall brackets. B. Wall bracket and accessories must be as approved. C. Mounting Height: Top of Fire Extinguishers shall not be more than (5 feet) above the floor. 2.06 SOURCE OF QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. B. Provide Manufacturer's Warranty with Inspection Tag on each extinguisher. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Class A light-hazard occupancies such as office buildings must have a Class A extinguisher within a (75-foot) travel distance with one unit of 1A rating for every (3,000 square feet) of floor area; ordinary hazard occupancies such as warehouses and department stores: (75-foot) travel distance with one unit of 2A rating for every (3,000 square feet); and extra hazard occupancies such as woodworking and spray painting locations: (75-foot) travel distance with one unit of 3A rating for every (3,000 square feet). B. Class B light-hazard occupancies must have a Class B extinguisher within (50- foot) travel distance with one unit of 4B rating; ordinary hazard occupancies: (50-foot) travel distance with one unit of 8B rating; extra hazard occupancies: 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA FIRE EXTINGUISHERS WOODARD & CURRAN 10 44 16-4 (50-foot) travel distance with one unit of 12B rating. For deep-layer flammable- liquid fire hazards such as dip tanks, one unit of Class B extinguishing potential is required for each (square foot) of the largest individual hazard unless an approved automatic system is installed. C. Class C extinguishers, where there are electrical hazards, are distributed on the same basis as Class B extinguishers. D. Install Fire Extinguishers where indicated on the Drawings. Verify exact locations prior to installation. E. Comply with the manufacturer's recommendations for all installations. F. Provide Fire Extinguishers that are fully charged and ready for operation upon installation. Provide extinguishers complete with Manufacturer's Warranty with Inspection Tag attached. 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. 3.03 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. END OF SECTION 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA PLUMBING WOODARD & CURRAN 22 00 00-1 SECTION 22 00 00 PLUMBING PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes 1. Sump pumps 2. Pipe insulation 3. Testing of drainage 4. Pipe hangers, clamps, rods, and sway bracing 5. Pipe penetrations through floors, walls, and partitions B. The Drawings are diagrammatic and do not indicate or allow for offsets, fittings, valves, vents, etc., which may be required to complete the Work. Study the Drawings showing the structural and finish design of the building, and provide fittings, valves, fixtures, trim traps, vents, etc., necessary to complete the plumbing Work for an operational, trouble free system. C. Give notices, file plans and obtain permits and licenses, and obtain necessary approvals from authorities having jurisdiction. D. Related Requirements 1. Section 09 90 00 Painting and Coating 2. Section 23 07 00 - Insulation 3. Division 23 – HVAC 4. Division 26 – Electrical 1.02 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Measurement and payment requirements: per Division 01 General Requirements. 1.03 REFERENCES A. Local and State Building, Plumbing, Mechanical, Electrical, Fire and Health Department Codes 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA PLUMBING WOODARD & CURRAN 22 00 00-2 B. Reference Standards 1. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) a. A117.1 Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities 2. American Society of Sanitary Engineering for Plumbing and Sanitary Research (ASSE International) 3. American Water Works Association (AWWA) 4. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM International or ASTM) 5. Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA) 6. Plumbing and Drainage Institute 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. B. Product data with name of manufacturer, model #, composition, finish, grade, size, capacity for the following. 1. Ball valves, backflow preventers, wall hydrants and hose bibs, and shock absorbers 2. All pipe insulation, PVC covers, tape, metal and/or rewettable cloth coverings, mastic coating (cold water above and below slab) 3. Pipe, pipe hangers, rods, clamps, pipe insulation shields, fittings, insulation and access panels 4. Piping materials and certificates 5. Pipe labels A. Complete list of valve tags. Record principal dimensions of concealed Work. Valve tags shall be recorded as they are installed. All buried piping shall be dimensioned from the nearest column or masonry wall line. B. Certifications 1. Certificate of inspection from authorities having jurisdiction showing that the Work has been properly inspected and approved 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA PLUMBING WOODARD & CURRAN 22 00 00-3 a. That all piping systems above and belowground specified herein has been tested, flushed and approved by the local plumbing Inspector. b. That all water piping systems specified above and below ground herein has been sterilized, flushed and approved by the local plumbing inspector. 2. Test certificates, registration forms, diagrams, plans, details, permits, etc. for all backflow devices, as specified herein. C. Closeout and Maintenance Material Submittals: per Division 01 General Requirements 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. All respective materials and equipment specified herein shall be of the same manufacturer, identified by maker’s name, mark, rating and approved standards where applicable B. All plumbing materials and equipment shall be selected and designed to conform to applicable state codes, local ordinances and energy codes. C. Provide mixing valves, backflow preventers, vacuum breakers, shock absorbers; check valves, etc., to provide a complete plumbing system as approved by the Engineer. A careful study of all Drawings shall be made in order to determine all of the plumbing items required to make a complete system. D. All underground soil, waste, vent, and storm drain piping shall have a factory applied bituminous coating. 2.02 SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING A. MANUFACTURERS 1. Manufacturer - Subject to compliance with requirements, provide drainage and vent systems from one of the following or an approved equal: a. Ancon, Inc. b. Josam Mfg. Co. c. Jay R. Smith Mfg. Co. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA PLUMBING WOODARD & CURRAN 22 00 00-4 d. Tyler Pipe; Subs. of Tyler Corp. e. Zurn Industries, Inc.; Hydromechanics Div. f. U.S. Pipe g. Griffin Pipe h. Atlantic States Pipe i. Charlotte Pipe B. MATERIALS 1. Above Ground Piping and Fittings a. Hubless Cast-Iron Soil Pipe - Hubless Cast Iron pipe and fittings shall be manufactured from gray cast iron and shall conform to ASTM A 888 and CISPI Standard 301. All pipe and fittings shall be marked with the collective trademark of the Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute ® and listed by NSF® International. Hubless Couplings shall conform to CISPI Standard 310 for standard couplings or ASTM C 1540 for super duty or heavy duty couplings where indicated. Gaskets shall conform to ASTM C 564. All pipe and fittings to be produced by a single manufacturer and are to be installed in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations and local code requirements. Couplings shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s band tightening sequence and torque recommendations. Tighten bands with a properly calibrated torque limiting device. Test the system hydrostatically after installation to 10 ft. of head (4.3 psi maximum). b. Copper Tube - ASTM B306, DWV with ASME B16.23 cast bronze or ASME B16.29 wrought copper fittings and ASTM B32 solder joints, Grade 50B. 2. Underground Pipe and Fittings a. Cast-Iron Soil Pipe - Hub and Spigot Cast Iron pipe and fittings shall be manufactured from gray cast iron and shall conform to ASTM A 74. All pipe and fittings shall be marked with the collective trademark of the Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute ® and listed by NSF® International. Pipe and fittings to be Extra Heavy (XH). Service Weight is NOT acceptable. b. Joints can be made using a compression gasket manufactured from an elastomer meeting the requirements of ASTM C 564 or lead and oakum. All pipe and fittings to be produced by a single manufacturer and are to be installed in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations and local code requirements. The 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA PLUMBING WOODARD & CURRAN 22 00 00-5 system shall be hydrostatically tested after installation to 10 ft. of head (4.3 psi maximum). c. Expansion Joints - Cast-iron body with adjustable bronze sleeve, bronze bolt and wing nuts. d. Cleanout Plugs - Cast-bronze or brass, threads complying with ANSI B2.1, countersunk head. 3. Floor Cleanouts - Cast-iron body and frame, with cleanout plug and adjustable round top as follows: a. Floor Cleanouts in Process Areas/Mechanical Rooms – Hot Dip Galvanized Cast-iron Top - Manufacturer's hot dip galvanized body, access cover with cleanout, heavy-duty scoriated secured hot dip galvanized ductile iron cover, internal recessed threaded bronze plug, J.R. Smith Series 423x, or equivalent model by Josam, Zurn, or approved equal. 4. Flashing Flanges - Cast-iron watertight stack or wall sleeve with membrane flashing ring. Provide under deck clamp and sleeve length as required. 5. Vent Flashing Sleeves - Cast-iron caulking type roof coupling for cast-iron stacks, cast-iron threaded type roof coupling for steel stacks, and cast- bronze stack flashing sleeve for copper tubing. 6. Frost-Proof Vent Caps - Construct of galvanized iron, copper, or lead- coated copper, sized to provide 1-inch air space between outside of vent pipe and inside of flashing collar extension. 7. Vandal-Proof Vent Caps - Cast-iron body full size of vent pipe, with caulked base connection for cast-iron pipes, threaded base for steel pipes. C. Floor Drains 1. Floor drain sizes shall be in conformance with ANSI Standard A112.21.1. 2. Floor Drain in Process Areas/Mechanical Rooms – Heavy Duty Hot Dip Galvanized Cast iron body and grate with 3 inch bottom outlet and 15 inch diameter grate. Floor drain shall be J.R. Smith series 2290 or equivalent product by Josam, Zurn or approved equal. 2.03 COPPER TUBING AND FITTING A. Copper tube shall be Type “L” hard drawn, hard temper copper conforming to ASTM B-88 for all above ground hot water, tempered hot water and cold-water piping. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA PLUMBING WOODARD & CURRAN 22 00 00-6 B. Fittings shall be wrought copper or cast bronze fittings, conforming to ASTM B- 42 Standards. C. Above ground shall be sweat type with 95/5 solder (95% tin, 5% antimony), conforming to ASTM B-32.89 Standards. D. Contractor may use Viega Pro-Press fittings, or approved equal, installed per the manufacturer’s instructions in lieu of soldered fitting. 2.04 PIPING SPECIALTIES AND ACCESSORIES A. Pipe Insulators: Non-metallic pipe insulators shall by Dielectric couplings with Plaskon bushings or Mica insulators, as manufactured by the Thermo Dynamics Corporation, Koppers, and Anchor or approved equal. B. Dielectric Pipe Unions 1. Dielectric unions shall be installed where copper connects to steel or cast iron pipe appurtenances. Couplings shall have steel bodies with non- conducting bushing on each threaded end. Couplings shall be rated at 200 psi. C. Hose Bibbs 1. Hose bibs located indoors provide Nibco Model C56-VB ¾ inch, brass body, Heavy Pattern. Provide metal handle and vacuum breaker. Nibco, Watts or approved equal. 2.05 VALVES A. BALL VALVES 1. All valves installed on potable water lines shall be of a Lead Free design. 2. Ball valves, 1½ inch and smaller - rated for 150 psi saturated steam pressure, 600 psi WOG pressure; two-piece adaptor load construction; with bronze body conforming to ASTM B 62, single reduced port, chrome-plated brass ball, glass reinforced "Teflon" or "TFE" seats and seals, blowout-proof stem, soldered, screwed or Pro-Press, and vinyl- covered steel handle. B. BRONZE SWING CHECK VALVES 1. Class 125, Bronze Swing Check Valves with Nonmetallic Buna-N Disc: 2. Standard: MSS SP-80, Type 4 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA PLUMBING WOODARD & CURRAN 22 00 00-7 3. CWP Rating: 200 psig 4. Body Design: Y-Pattern Horizontal Flow 5. Body material: ASTM B 62 Bronze 6. Ends: Threaded or Solder 7. Disc: Buna-N 2.06 SUMP PUMPS A. Provide submersible centrifugal sewage grinder pump(s) as specified herein and as shown on the drawings. The pumps furnished for this application shall be as manufactured by Zoeller Pumps or approved equal by Gould, Liberty or approved equal. B. Rating: As shown on the drawings. C. Construction: Each pump shall be of the sealed submersible type incorporating features normally found in pumps furnished for the heavy-duty industrial or municipal markets. These features include: 1. The pump volute, motor, and seal housing shall be high quality gray cast iron, ASTM A-48, Class 30. 2. The pump shall feature a multiple strainer inlet that prevents clogging from foreign objects and provides optimum operation and reduced maintenance. 3. All external mating parts shall be machined and Buna N O-Ring sealed. 4. All fasteners exposed to the pumped liquid shall be 300 series stainless steel. 5. All power cords shall be water resistant UL or CSA approved with double insulation and sized as a function of amperes draw. D. Motor and Shaft The stator, rotor and bearings shall be mounted in a sealed submersible type housing. Single-phase motors shall be Shaded Pole, with automatic reset thermal overload protection. Full Load and, Locked Rotor Amps as well as Run winding resistance shall be tabulated for each pump. E. Bearings, shaft and mechanical seal: An upper radial and lower thrust bearing shall be required. The upper bearing shall be bronze while the lower bearing is heavy-duty single row ball. They are both permanently, continuously lubricated and cooled by the dielectric oil, which fills the motor housing. The motor shaft 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA PLUMBING WOODARD & CURRAN 22 00 00-8 shall be corrosion resistant steel and sealed from the pumped liquid with a carbon ceramic mechanical seal. F. Impeller: a thermoplastic, eight vane, non-clog design with three pump out vanes on the backside. These vanes wash out grit and stringy material that will damage the shaft and mechanical seal. G. All pumps shall be capable of automatic operation. H. Provide all pumps with a tilt-sensitive wide-angle float switch sealed in a non- corrosive PVC enclosure. The switch shall be UL listed for water and sewage and QSA certified. The float switch shall also be fitted with a piggyback plug that allows the pump to be operated manually without removal from the sump. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Work shall be executed in strict conformity with the latest edition of the plumbing and building codes and all local Regulations that may apply. In case of conflict between the Contract Documents and a governing code or ordinance, the more stringent standard shall apply. If any Work is performed and subsequent changes are necessary to conform to local ordinances, these changes shall be made at no additional cost to the Owner. B. All Work, fixtures, and materials shall be protected at all times. The Contractor shall make good all damage caused by his workers either directly or indirectly. All pipe openings shall be closed with caps and/or plugs during installation. Fixtures and equipment shall be tightly covered and protected against dirt, water, chemical or mechanical injury. C. Duct tape shall be applied to the openings and finished surfaces of all floor drains, floor cleanouts, to protect against dirt, water, chemical or mechanical injury and shall be removed prior to completion of Work. Plywood covers may be secured to floor drain grates with coated wire in lieu of duct tape. D. Coordinate with all trades in executing the Work of this Section as described hereunder. E. Perform all Work such that the progress of the entire Project including the Work of all other trades, whether involved in the Work of this or other Sections shall not be interfered with or deleted. F. Observe all concrete pours in areas associated with Work performed under this Section. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA PLUMBING WOODARD & CURRAN 22 00 00-9 G. Obtain detailed information from the manufacturers of equipment to be provided under this Section as to the proper methods of installation. H. Keep fully informed as to the shape, size and position of all openings required for material or equipment and give full information so that such openings may be provided for in advance. I. Where valves cannot be placed in an accessible area, covers and frames shall be provided under this Section and built into the Work. Access doors are not indicated on the Drawings but are required. J. All piping in finished areas shall be run concealed unless directed otherwise by the Owner. K. Provide maintenance for all plumbing equipment and systems until final acceptance by the Owner, and take such measures as necessary to ensure adequate protection of all equipment and material during delivery, storage, installation and shutdown conditions. This responsibility shall include all provisions required to meet conditions incidental to delays pending final test of systems and equipment. L. Excavation and Backfill is provided by the general Contractor. M. Pipe bedding shall be in accordance with provisions of Division 31. Work under this Section shall commence only after proper bedding material has been provided, graded and properly compacted. Excavation shall be kept open until system has been inspected, tested and approved. N. All piping left exposed subsequent to backfilling shall be identified with flagged stakes and spray painted with fluorescent paint to guard against mechanical damage. O. Observe all backfilling and compaction of all underground piping associated with the Work of this section. P. After installation, clean and touch up damaged spots on equipment and accessories with factory primed or finished surfaces with the same paint as applied at the factory. Q. Plumbing Work shall be inspected and tested according to state and local codes and as follows: 1. The Contractor shall provide all necessary labor and materials to accomplish tests as part of this Contract. 2. All soil, storm drain and vent piping shall be given a hydrostatic test equivalent to filling stacks with water for a 15minute period after which 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA PLUMBING WOODARD & CURRAN 22 00 00-10 time the systems shall prove tight at all points. Test pressure shall be at least equal to the building height with a minimum of 10 feet. 3. Water piping shall be given a hydrostatic test of 100 lbs. per square inch pressure for a three-hour period with a pressure drop of not greater than two pounds. 4. Following the final slab pour within the building, the Contractor shall perform additional testing and flushing of each underground sanitary line to detect any obstructions and/or damage to pipe following backfilling, compacting and final slab pours. 3.02 CLEANING AND ADJUSTING A. At the completion of the Work all fixtures, equipment, specialties, components, and exposed trim shall be cleaned and, where required, polished ready for use. Faucet washers, which have been damaged during construction, shall be replaced. All drains, sediment buckets and traps shall be thoroughly cleaned. B. At the completion of the Work all valves and automatic control devices shall be adjusted for proper and quiet operation of all plumbing systems specified herein under this Section. END OF SECTION 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA FILED SUB-BID - HVAC COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC WOODARD & CURRAN 23 05 00-1 SECTION 23 05 00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC (FILED SUB-BID REQUIRED) PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes furnishing and installing HVAC equipment and systems in accordance with this Section. 1. The Drawings show schematically, the order of connection of the various terminal units, louvers, valves, etc. but cannot show every detail of the piping and ductwork. Whether specifically shown or not, all fixtures shall be connected in accordance with the standard details, accepted trade practice, and the intent of the Contract Documents. Coordinate with all other trades. 2. System components are identified throughout the Drawings for proper system operation. If any component is inadvertently omitted from the Drawings, provide that component as per a similar location. 1.02 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Measurement and payment requirements: per Division 01 General Requirements. 1.03 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination, Sequencing, and Scheduling: per Division 01 General Requirements. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. B. Submittals for HVAC, plumbing, and fire protection shall each be separate and organized by Specification section. Mixed submittals will not be processed. C. Certified performance data and samples will be accepted only when submitted by the HVAC Subcontractor or General Contractor. Data submitted from other Subcontractors and material Suppliers directly to the Engineer will not be processed. D. Submit welder certificates signed by HVAC Subcontractor certifying that welders comply with requirements specified. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA FILED SUB-BID - HVAC COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC WOODARD & CURRAN 23 05 00-2 E. Closeout and Maintenance Material Submittals: per Division 01 General Requirements. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. B. All Work of Division 23 shall be performed by qualified journeymen of their respective trades. C. It is the intent of these Specifications that each mechanical trade shall be thoroughly familiar and responsible for the electrical operation of their entire mechanical system and sufficiently familiar with the electrical operations and wiring of their systems so that the Owner can expect single source responsibility for the repair and maintenance of those systems. D. When two or more items of same material or equipment are required, i.e., pumps, valves, air handling units, fans, diffusers, registers and grilles, etc., they shall be products of the same manufacturer insofar as possible. This does not apply to raw or bulk materials such as pipe and fittings, sheet metal, etc. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. B. Deliver products to Project properly identified with names, model numbers, types, grades, compliance labels, and similar information needed for distinct identifications; adequately packaged and protected to prevent damage during shipment, storage, and handling. C. Coordinate deliveries of mechanical materials and equipment to minimize construction Site congestion. Limit each shipment of materials and equipment to the items and quantities needed for the smooth and efficient flow of installations. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. HVAC equipment control wiring shall be supplied with automatic temperature control system. B. All mechanical equipment to be supplied complete with motors and associated relays, magnetic starters, thermal overload protection, fuses, and special controllers except where otherwise noted. C. All substitute materials and equipment submitted for approval must fit within the spaces available with neither substantial alteration to connected piping and ductwork as designed nor increased pressure drops or air friction losses. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA FILED SUB-BID - HVAC COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC WOODARD & CURRAN 23 05 00-3 D. Provide permanent operational data nameplate on each item of power operated mechanical equipment, indicating manufacturer, product name, model number, serial number, capacity, operating and power characteristics, labels of tested compliances, and similar essential data. E. Refer to Section 23 05 93 for requirements for cleaning filters, strainers, and mechanical systems prior to final acceptance. F. All equipment shall meet the minimum energy efficient design standards as established in ASHRAE/IES standard 90.1 and the International Energy Code. Provide that equipment Suppliers are aware of the requirements. G. Provide disconnect switches for mechanical equipment as specified in Division 26, Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers. H. Electrical Subcontractor will provide the following under Division 26. 1. Power wiring for heating pumps, exhaust fans, air handling equipment, supply fans, etc. 2. Line voltage switches, fused switches, outlets, motor starters, power wiring and fuses necessary to connect and operate all electrically powered equipment specified herein. 3. Starters and disconnect switches not installed under Division 23. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 ROUGH IN A. Verify final locations for rough ins with field measurements and with the requirements of the actual equipment to be connected. 3.02 MECHANICAL INSTALLATIONS A. Coordinate equipment and materials for installation with other building components. B. Verify all dimensions by field measurements. C. Arrange for chases, slots, and openings in other building components to allow for mechanical installations. D. Coordinate the installation of required supporting devices and sleeves to be set in poured in place concrete and other structural components as they are constructed. E. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installations of mechanical materials and equipment for efficient flow of the Work. Give particular attention to large equipment requiring positioning prior to closing in the building. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA FILED SUB-BID - HVAC COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC WOODARD & CURRAN 23 05 00-4 F. Coordinate the cutting and patching of building components to accommodate the installation of mechanical equipment and materials. G. Where mounting heights are not detailed or dimensioned, install mechanical services and overhead equipment to provide the maximum headroom possible. H. Install mechanical equipment to facilitate maintenance and repair or replacement of equipment components. As much as practical, connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum of interference with other installations. I. Coordinate the installation of mechanical materials and equipment above ceilings with suspension system, lighting fixtures, and other installations. J. Coordinate connection of mechanical systems with exterior underground and overhead utilities and services. Comply with requirements of governing regulations, franchised service companies, and controlling agencies. Provide required connection for each service. K. All ductwork shall be capped during construction, dust and debris in ductwork is not acceptable. Interior of ductwork and air systems must be completely cleaned. L. Coordinate installation of identifying devices after completing coverage and painting where devices are applied to surfaces. Install identifying devices prior to installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment. M. Install equipment and materials to provide required access for servicing and maintenance. Coordinate the final location of concealed equipment and devices requiring access with final location of required access panels and doors. Allow ample space for removal of all parts that require replacement or servicing. Extend any grease fittings to an accessible location. N. Locate nameplates in accessible location. 3.03 ELECTRICAL WORK A. Coordinate Work with Electrical Subcontractor to provide a complete working system. B. The Electrical Subcontractor shall provide the main supply power for all mechanical equipment provided under Division 23. 1. Main supply power for all mechanical ATC (Automatic Temperature Controls) equipment shall be provided by the Electrical Subcontractor under Division 26. 2. It is not the intent of the Drawings to show every power feed for each control transformer, control panel or other ATC control device. While some of this may be routed directly to a circuit breaker, others can simply 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA FILED SUB-BID - HVAC COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC WOODARD & CURRAN 23 05 00-5 be taken off the supply power to an associated piece of mechanical equipment. It is expected that the details of these connections (which vary widely for different ATC systems) are to be worked out in the field for the best economy of the Project. C. Electrical Subcontractor will install the following under Division 26. 1. Power wiring for heating pumps, exhaust fans, etc. 2. Line voltage switches, fused switches, outlets, motor starters, power wiring and fuses necessary to connect and operate all electrically powered equipment specified herein. 3. Starters and disconnect switches not installed under Division 23. 4. Main power wiring connections from disconnect switch through starters, relays or other power control devices to motors except where standard factory power wiring has already been provided. END OF SECTION This page intentionally left blank 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING WOODARD & CURRAN 23 05 23-1 SECTION 23 05 23 GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING (FILED SUB-BID REQUIRED) PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes 1. Manual Operators 2. Gate Valves 3. Ball Valves 4. Dielectric Pipe Couplings B. RELATED SECTIONS 1. Section 23 05 00 – Common Work Results for HVAC Piping 2. Division 22 - Plumbing 1.02 REFERENCES A. ASTM A126, Specifications for Gray Iron Castings for Valves, Flanges, and Pipe Fittings B. ASTM A307 - Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 psi tensile C. ASTM A563 - Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts D. ASTM B62 Specification for Composition Bronze or Ounce Metal Castings E. MSS SP45 - Standard for Bypass and Drain Connections F. MSS SP80 - Standard for Bronze Gate, Globe, Angle and Check Valves 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING WOODARD & CURRAN 23 05 23-2 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. B. Product data including body material, valve design, pressure and temperature classification, end connection details, seating materials, trim material and arrangement, dimensions and required clearances, and installation instructions. C. Performance and sizing data for air release valves including manufacturer’s recommended sizing requirements. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Prepare valves for shipping as follows: 1. Ensure valves are dry and internally protected against rust and corrosion. 2. Protect valve ends against damage to threads, flange faces, and weld-end preps. 3. Set valves in best position for handling. Set globe and gate valves closed to prevent rattling; set ball valves open to minimize exposure of functional surfaces; set butterfly valves closed or slightly open: and block swing check valves in either closed or open position. B. Use the following precautions during storage: 1. Do not remove valve end protectors unless necessary for inspection; then reinstall for storage. 2. Protect valves from weather. Store valves indoors. Maintain valve temperature higher than the ambient dew point temperature. If outdoor storage is necessary, support valves off the ground or pavement in watertight enclosures. C. Use a sling to handle valves whose size requires handling by crane or lift. Rig valves to avoid damage to exposed valve parts. Do not use handwheels and stems as lifting or rigging points. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. Pressure and Temperature Ratings - As scheduled and required to suit. B. Sizes - Same size as upstream pipe, unless otherwise indicated. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING WOODARD & CURRAN 23 05 23-3 C. Extended Stems - Where insulation is indicated or specified, provide extended stems arranged to receive insulation. D. Bypass and Drain Connections - Comply with MSS SP-45 bypass and drain connections. E. Valves shall have the same end connections and an equivalent or higher pressure rating as the pipeline in which it is installed. 2.02 MANUAL OPERATORS A. Provide lever handles for quarter-turn valves 4 inches and smaller. Provide one lever handle for each valve supplied. B. Provide manual actuator chain wheels on valves 2½ inches and larger located more than 6 feet above finished floor. Chainwheel actuators shall be furnished with a galvanized chainwheel, galvanized chain guide and galvanized chain extending to 5 feet above finished floor. 2.03 GATE VALVES A. Gate Valves, 2 ½ -inch and Smaller - MSS SP-80; Class 125, body and bonnet of ASTM B62 cast bronze; with threaded or solder ends, solid disc, copper-silicon alloy stem, brass backing gland, “Teflon” impregnated packing, and malleable iron handwheel. Provide Class 150 valves meeting the above where system pressure requires. 2.04 BALL VALVES A. Ball valves, 1½ inch and smaller - rated for 150 psi saturated steam pressure, 600 psi WOG pressure; two-piece adaptor load construction; with bronze body conforming to ASTM B 62, single reduced port, chrome-plated brass ball, glass reinforced "Teflon" or "TFE" seats and seals, blowout-proof stem, soldered, screwed or flanged ends, and vinyl-covered steel handle. For air service provide stainless steel ball and stem with screwed or flanged ends. B. Ball Valves, 2 inch and larger - Rated for 150 psi saturated steam pressure, 600 psi WOG pressure; 3-piece construction; with bronze body conforming to ASTM B 62, single reduced port, chrome-plated brass ball, glass reinforced "Teflon" or "TFE" seats and seals blowout proof stem, soldered, screwed or flanged ends, and vinyl- covered steel handle. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING WOODARD & CURRAN 23 05 23-4 2.05 CHECK VALVES A. Swing Check Valves, 2 inches and smaller - MSS SP-80; Class 125, cast-bronze body and cap conforming to ASTM B 62; with horizontal swing, and bronze disc; and having threaded or solder ends. Provide Class 150 valves meeting the above Specifications, with threaded end connections, where system pressure requires or where Class 125 valves are not available. 2.06 GLOBE VALVES A. Globe Valves, 2-inch and Smaller - MSS SP-80; Class 125; body and screwed bonnet of ASTM B62 cast bronze; with threaded or solder ends, bronze or replaceable composition disc, copper-silicon alloy stem, bronze packing gland, non- Asbestos packing, and malleable iron Handwheel. Provide Class 150 valves meeting the above where system pressure requires. 2.07 DIELECTRIC PIPE COUPLINGS A. Dielectric couplings shall be installed where copper connects to steel or cast iron pipe appurtenances. Couplings shall have steel bodies with non-conducting bushing on each threaded end. Couplings shall be rated at 200 psi. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine valve interior through the end ports for cleanliness, freedom from foreign matter, and corrosion. Remove special packing materials, such as blocks used to prevent disc movement during shipping and handling. B. Actuate valve through an open-close and close-open cycle. Examine functionally significant features, such as guides and seats made accessible by such actuation. Following examination, return the valve closure member to the shipping position. C. Examine threads on both the valve and the mating pipe for form (i.e., out-or-round or local identification) and cleanliness. D. Examine mating flange faces for conditions that might cause leakage. Check bolting for proper size, length, and material. Check gasket material for proper size, material composition suitable for service, and freedom from defects and damage. E. Prior to valve installation, examine the piping for cleanliness, freedom from foreign materials, and proper alignment. F. Replace defective valves with new valves. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. General Applications - Refer to the Drawings and piping system Specification sections for specific valve applications and arrangements. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING WOODARD & CURRAN 23 05 23-5 B. Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary. C. Install valves and unions for each fixture and item of equipment arranged to allow equipment removal without system shutdown. Unions are not required on flanged devices. D. Install three-valve bypass around each pressure reducing valve using throttling-type valves. E. Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above the center of the pipe. F. Install valves in a position to allow full stem movement. G. Install swing check valves in a horizontal position with hinge pin level. H. Valves and actuators shall be installed to be plumb in the vertical direction. 3.03 SOLDER CONNECTIONS A. Cut tube square and to exact lengths. B. Clean end of tube to depth of valve socket with steel wool, sand cloth, or steel wire brush to a bright finish. Clean valve socket in same manner. C. Apply proper soldering flux in an even coat to inside of valve socket and outside of tube. D. Open gate valves to full open position. E. Remove the cap and disc holder of swing check valves having composition discs. F. Insert tube into valve socket, making sure the end rests against the shoulder inside valve. Rotate tube or valve slightly to ensure even distribution of the flux. G. Apply heat evenly to outside of valve around joint until solder will melt upon contact. Feed solder until it completely fills the joint around tube. Avoid hot spots or overheating valve. Once the solder starts cooling, remove excess amounts around the joint with a cloth or brush. 3.04 THREADED CONNECTIONS A. Note the internal length of threads in valve ends and proximity of valve internal seat or wall to determine how far pipe should be threaded into valve. B. Align threads at point of assembly. C. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to the external pipe threads (except where dry seal threading is specified). 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING WOODARD & CURRAN 23 05 23-6 D. Assemble joint, wrench tight. Wrench on valve shall be on the valve end into which the pipe is being threaded. 3.05 FLANGED CONNECTIONS A. Align flange surfaces parallel. B. Assemble joints by sequencing bolt tightening to make initial contact of flanges and gaskets as flat and parallel as possible. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads. Tighten bolts gradually and uniformly with a torque wrench. 3.06 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. After piping systems have been tested and put into service, but before final adjusting and balancing, inspect valves for leaks. Adjust or replace packing to stop leaks; replace valves if leak persists. 3.07 MANUFACTURER’S FIELD SERVICE A. The Contractor shall provide the services of a qualified manufacturer’s field service representative for a minimum of 4-hours on Site for the start-up of each of the following equipment: 1. Motorized Actuators B. A manufacturer’s field service representative shall be provided for a separate additional period of 8-hours on Site for each manufacturer to provide operator training in the calibration, use and maintenance of all equipment provided under this Section. The Contractor shall provide the Owner with a minimum 7 days written notice of planned operator training. Training shall be conducted separate from the specified start-up. 3.08 CLEANING A. Clean mill scale, grease, and protective coatings from exterior of valves and prepare valves to receive finish painting or insulation. 3.09 FINAL ACCEPTANCE AND WARRANTY A. Final acceptance of all equipment furnished under these Specifications will be withheld until after the installation and field testing by the Engineer. The manufacturer and the Contractor shall guarantee the equipment against defects of any kind for a period of one year after final testing and acceptance. END OF SECTION 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA FILED SUB-BID - HVAC HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT WOODARD & CURRAN 23 05 29-1 SECTION 23 05 29 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT (FILED SUB-BID REQUIRED) PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals, and install a complete system of pipe hangers, supports, concrete inserts and anchor bolts including all metallic hanging and supporting devices for supporting non-buried piping as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein. All pipe hanger and support systems shall be designed and constructed to resist seismic forces as specified herein. B. Pipe supports and details are generally not shown on the Drawings. The absence of pipe supports and details on the Drawings shall not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility for providing them. Pipe supports indicated on the Drawings are shown only to convey the intent of the design for a particular location and are not intended to represent a complete system. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 23 05 00 - Common Work Results for HVAC B. Division 22 – Plumbing C. Division 9 - Painting 1.03 RELATED WORK A. Concrete is included in Division 03. B. Miscellaneous metal is included in Section 05. C. Field painting is included in Division 09. D. Pipe and fittings are included in respective sections of Division 23. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit, in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements, complete sets of Shop Drawings of all items to be furnished under this Section. Submittals shall include complete layouts, schedules, location plans and complete total bill of materials for all pipe support systems. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA FILED SUB-BID - HVAC HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT WOODARD & CURRAN 23 05 29-2 B. Submittals shall include a representative catalog cut for each different type of pipe hanger or support indicating the materials of construction, important dimensions and range of pipe sizes for which that hanger is suitable. Where standard hangers and/or supports are not suitable, submit detailed Drawings showing materials and details of construction for each type of special hanger and/or support. Provide detailed information on anti-seize compound. C. Submittals shall include complete piping layout Drawings for each piping system specified in Division 23. The piping layouts shall indicate type of hanger and/or support, location, pipe support reactions transmitted to the structure and type of anchor, guide and other pipe supporting appurtenances including structural fasteners. Pipe loads supported by the pipe supports will not be accepted in lieu of pipe support reactions. Submittals shall be made for complete piping systems only. Submittals of partial piping systems will be considered as nonconformance with these Specifications and will be returned. D. Service conditions for each piping system, including service temperatures, and operating and test pressures, are tabulated in the piping sections. E. Submit complete design data for pipe support systems to show conformance with this Section. F. Description of surface preparation and shop painting including manufacture and dry film thicknesses. 1.05 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. Manufacturer's Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry (MSS) 1. MSS SP-58 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Materials, Design and Manufacture. 2. MSS SP-69 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Selection and Application. B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 1. ASTM A36 - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel. 2. ASTM A307 - Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 PSI Tensile Strength. C. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 1. ANSI B31.1 - Power Piping. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA FILED SUB-BID - HVAC HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT WOODARD & CURRAN 23 05 29-3 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The Contractor shall engage the services of an independent professional Engineer (“Support Engineer”) registered in the state of Massachusetts, with specific experience specified under paragraph below in the structural design and configuration of pipe supporting systems, including any non-standard supports that need to be designed and certified. B. The “Support Engineer” shall have not less than 3 years of experience within the last 5 years in the analysis and design of pipe supports. C. The “Support Engineer” shall be responsible for Work within the design Specifications and within the design configuration. Any construction-related deviations in criteria, materials or details within the design must be submitted to the Engineer. These submittals will be reviewed only for conformance to the Specifications. D. All hangers, supports and appurtenances shall conform to the latest applicable requirements of the Massachusetts State Building Code and ANSI B31.1, except as supplemented or modified by the requirements of this Section. E. All hanger, supports and appurtenances shall be of approved standard design where possible and shall be adequate to maintain the supported load in proper position under all operating conditions. The minimum working factor of safety for all supporting equipment, with the exception of springs, shall be one fifth the ultimate tensile strength of the material, assuming a minimum 10-ft of water filled pipe being supported. F. All pipe and appurtenances connected to equipment shall be supported in such a manner as to prevent any strain being imposed on the equipment. When manufacturers have indicated requirements that piping loads shall not be transmitted to their equipment, submit certification stating that such requirements have been complied with. G. Support arrangements shall be coordinated to eliminate interference with similar support systems to be installed by Plumbing, Electrical, and pipe support Drawings; to account for structural expansion joints with co-located piping expansion joints; and to maintain unhindered access to all equipment for both operation and removal. No material handling equipment supports shall be used for piping supports under any circumstances. Do not support from structural struts, or braces. 1.07 SEISMIC RESTRAINTS A. Provide seismic restraints for all piping systems including but not limited to free standing, suspended or wall mounted piping installed under this Section. Seismic restraints shall be sized for Seismic Hazard Exposure Group II and Seismic Performance Category C. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA FILED SUB-BID - HVAC HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT WOODARD & CURRAN 23 05 29-4 B. Use the restraints defined in the manual when the seismic criteria, and size of piping, are within the limits of the latest edition of the SMACNA Seismic Restraints Manual, at the time of bid opening. Select restraints from the Tables that represent the highest seismic hazard class or level possible within the state of Connecticut in which the Project resides. Provide members of material of equal strength to those in the standards where materials other than carbon steel are specified. C. Materials of construction for seismic restraints shall be same as those specified in PART 2 of this Section for the pipe hangers and supports. All nuts, bolts and washers shall be stainless steel regardless of locations. 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. All supports and hangers shall be crated, delivered and uncrated so as to protect against any damage. B. All parts shall be properly protected so that no damage or deterioration shall occur during a prolonged delay from the time of shipment until installation is completed. C. Finished metal surfaces not galvanized, that are not of stainless steel construction, or that are not coated, shall be grease coated, to prevent rust and corrosion. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. Due to the marine environment of the plant, all hangers, supports, threaded rod and appurtenances shall be fabricated of 316L, high molybdenum stainless steel. Standard 304 or 316 is NOT acceptable. The material is available from the following manufacturers: 1. National Pipe Hanger, Mt. Holley, NJ 2. Piping Technology Products, Houston, TX B. All of the equipment specified herein is intended to support the various types of pipe and piping systems shown on the Drawings. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to develop final details and any details associated with special conditions not already covered to meet the system conditions (in particular system temperatures and pressures) specified in the respective sections covering pipe. C. Support all pipe and tubing shall to prevent significant stresses in the pipe or tubing material, valves, fittings and other pipe appurtenances and to support and secure the pipe in the intended position and alignment. Design all supports to adequately secure the pipe against excessive dislocation due to thermal expansion and contraction, vibration due to fluid pulsation and/or equipment operation, internal flow forces and all probable external forces such as equipment, pipe and personnel contact and seismic forces. Any structural steel members required to brace any piping from excessive dislocation shall conform to the applicable requirements of Division 05 and shall be furnished and installed under this Section. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA FILED SUB-BID - HVAC HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT WOODARD & CURRAN 23 05 29-5 D. The Contractor may propose minor adjustments to the piping arrangements in order to simplify the supports, or in order to resolve minor conflicts in the Work. Such an adjustment might involve minor change to a pipe centerline elevation so that a single trapeze support may be used. E. Where flexible couplings are required at equipment, tanks, etc., the end opposite to the piece of equipment, tank, etc., shall be rigidly supported, to prevent transfer of force systems to the equipment. No fixed or restraining supports shall be installed between a flexible coupling and the piece of equipment. F. Support all pipe and appurtenances connected to the equipment in a manner to prevent any strain from being imposed on the equipment or piping system. G. Furnish all rods, clamps, hangers, inserts, anchor bolts, brackets and components for interior pipe supports per the schedule on the G-sheets and a minimum of 304L stainless steel supports for copper pipe shall be copper plated or shall be 304L stainless steel. All rods, clamps, hangers, inserts, anchor bolts, brackets and components for exterior pipe, submerged pipe, Lime Slurry piping, Alum piping, Polymer piping, interior pipe within chemical containment areas, pipe within outdoor structures and tanks, and interior pipe within manholes, and exterior pipe within channels shall be of Type 316L stainless steel. H. Supports shall be sufficiently close together such that the sag of the pipe is within limits that will permit drainage and avoid excessive bending stresses from concentrated loads between supports. I. All un-insulated non-metallic piping such as PVC, CPVC, etc., shall be protected from local stress concentrations at each support point. Protection shall be provided by 316L stainless steel protection shields or other method as approved by the Engineer. Where pipes are bottom supported 180 degrees, arc shields shall be furnished. Where 360 degree arc support is required, such as U bolts, protection shields shall be provided for the entire pipe circumference. Protection shields shall have an 18 gauge minimum thickness, not be less than 12-in in length and be securely fastened to pipe with stainless steel straps not less than 1/2-in wide. J. All insulated pipe shall be furnished with a rigid foam insulating saddle at each pipe support location as specified under respective pipe insulation. Provide protection shields as specified in at each support location. K. Where pipe hangers and supports come in contact with copper piping provide protection from galvanic corrosion by; wrapping pipe with 1/16-in thick neoprene sheet material and stainless steel protection shield; isolators similar to Elcen, Figure No. 228; 316L stainless steel hangers and supports. All stainless steel piping shall be isolated from all ferrous materials, including galvanized steel by use of neoprene sheet material and protection shields, similar to above methods. L. Pipe supports shall be provided as follows: 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA FILED SUB-BID - HVAC HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT WOODARD & CURRAN 23 05 29-6 1. Cast iron and ductile iron, steel and stainless steel piping shall be supported at a maximum support spacing of 10-ft with a minimum of one support per pipe section at the joints. 2. Insofar as is possible, floor supports shall be given preference. Typical concrete supports are shown on the structural Drawings. Base elbow and base tees shall be used where possible. 3. Support spacing for steel and stainless steel piping 2-in and smaller diameter and copper tubing shall not exceed 5-ft. 4. For all stainless steel piping, provide neoprene isolators between the pipe and support components for fixed supports and Teflon for guide supports. 5. Supports for multiple and single PVC plastic piping shall be continuous wherever possible. Individually supported PVC pipes shall be supported as recommended by the manufacturer except that support-spacing shall not exceed 3-ft. Multiple, suspended, horizontal plastic PVC pipe runs, where possible, shall be supported by V-troughs or ladder type cable trays such as the Electray Ladder by Husky-Burndy; the Globetray by the Metal Products, a Division of United States Gypsum, B-Line Cable Tray Systems by B-Line Systems, Inc. or equal. Ladder shall be of a minimum of 403L stainless steel construction. Rung spacing shall be 12-in. Tray width shall be approximately 6-in for single runs and 12-in for double runs. Ladder type cable trays shall be furnished complete with all hanger rods, rod couplings, concrete inserts, hanger clips, etc, required for a complete support system. Individual plastic pipes shall be secured to the rungs of the cable tray by strap clamps or fasteners similar to Globe, Model M-CAC; Husky-Burndy, Model SCR or equal. Spacing between clamps shall not exceed 9-ft. The cable trays shall provide continuous support along the length of the pipe. Individual clamps, hangers and supports in contact with plastic PVC pipe shall provide firm support but not so firm as to prevent longitudinal movement due to thermal expansion and contraction. 6. All vertical pipes shall be supported at each floor or at intervals of not more than 6-ft by approved pipe collars, clamps, brackets, or wall rests and at all points necessary to insure rigid construction. All vertical pipes passing through pipe sleeves shall be secured using a pipe collar. 7. Pipe supports shall not induce point loadings but shall distribute pipe loads evenly along the pipe circumference. 8. Supports shall be provided at changes in direction and elsewhere as shown in the Drawings or as specified herein. No piping shall be supported from other piping or from metal stairs, ladders and walkways, unless specifically directed or authorized by the Engineer. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA FILED SUB-BID - HVAC HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT WOODARD & CURRAN 23 05 29-7 9. Pipe supports shall be provided to minimize lateral forces through valves, both sides of split type couplings and sleeve type couplings and to minimize all pipe forces on pump housings. Pump housings shall not be utilized to support connecting pipes. 10. Effects of thermal expansion and contraction of the pipe shall be accounted for in the pipe support selection and installation. 11. Sufficient lateral bracing shall be provided to minimize horizontal motion and vibration of piping due to fluid pulsation and/or equipment vibration to less than 1/8 inch peak-to-peak throughout the range of routine operating conditions. Special attention shall be paid to lateral bracing on non-ridged piping systems such as grooved-end. M. Unless otherwise specified herein, pipe hangers and supports shall be standard catalogued components, conforming to the requirements of MSS-SP-58 and -69; Any reference to a specific figure number of a specific manufacturer is for the purpose of establishing a type and quality of product and shall not be considered as proprietary. N. Any required pipe supports for which the standard supports specified in this Section are not applicable shall be fabricated or constructed from standard structural steel shapes, concrete and anchor hardware similar to items previously specified herein and shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer. O. Expansion anchors for wall and floor pipe supports and appurtenances shall be equal to Hilti Kwik-Bolt II; Simpson Strong-Tie Wedge-All; Powers Power-Stud, or equal. The length of expansion bolts shall be sufficient to place the wedge portion of the bolt a minimum of 1-in behind the steel reinforcement. Concrete anchors for ceiling mounted pipe support and appurtenances shall be adhesive type. P. Hanger rods shall be hot rolled stainless steel, machine threaded. The strength of the rod shall be based on its root diameter. Hanger rods shall be attached to concrete structures using concrete inserts similar to F&S, Figures 180, 571 or 150; or continuous concrete inserts per F&S. Inserts shall be stainless steel. Beam clamps, C clamps or welded beam attachments shall be used for attaching hanger rods to structural steel members. Where necessary and as approved by the Engineer, expansion anchors may be used for attaching to concrete structures. 2.02 SINGLE PIPE HANGERS A. Suspended multiple pipes, running parallel in the same horizontal plane, which are adjacent to each other shall be suspended by trapeze type hangers or wall brackets. Trapeze hangers shall consist of 316L stainless steel channel supported from stainless steel threaded rod or attached to concrete walls, columns or structural steel support members as required to meet the intent of this Section. Channel shall be similar to F&S, Figure 710, rods, concrete inserts, "C" clamps, beam clamps, welded beam attachments and expansion shields shall be as specified in Paragraph 2.02 above. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA FILED SUB-BID - HVAC HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT WOODARD & CURRAN 23 05 29-8 B. Except as otherwise specified herein pipe anchors used for attaching pipe to trapeze or multiple pipe wall brackets shall be anchor or pipe chairs similar to F&S, Figures 158, 419, 160A, 160B as required. Material of construction shall be stainless steel, 316L, high molybdenum alloy. Chair "U" bolts shall be tightened to allow freedom of movement for normal expansion and contraction except where pipe must be anchored to control direction of movement or act as a thrust anchor. C. Pipes less than 3-in in diameter shall be held in position by supports fabricated from stainless steel "C" channel, welded post base similar to Unistrut, Figure P2072A and pipe clamps similar to Unistrut, Figures P1109 thru P1126. Where required to assure adequate support, fabricate supports using two vertical members and post bases connected together by horizontal member of sufficient load capacity to support pipe. Wherever possible supports shall be anchored to nearby walls or other structural member to provide horizontal rigidity. More than one pipe may be supported from a common fabricated support. D. Where shown on the Drawings, pipe shall be anchored using concrete anchor posts or pedestals. Pipe shall be securely fastened to the posts or pedestals as indicated on the Drawings. 2.03 WALL SUPPORTED PIPES A. Single or multiple pipes located adjacent to walls, columns or other structural members, whenever deemed necessary, shall be supported using welded stainless steel wall brackets similar to Carpenter and Patterson, Figure No. 69-78, 84, or 134; or "C" channel with steel brackets similar to Unistrut pipe clamps. All members shall be securely fastened to wall, column, etc., using double expansion shields or other method as approved by the Engineer. Additional wall bearing plates shall be provided where required. B. Pipe shall be attached to supports using methods specified herein to meet the intent of this Section. 2.04 BASE ANCHOR SUPPORT A. Where pipes change direction from horizontal to vertical via a bend, a welded or cast base bend support shall be installed at the bend to carry the load. The base bend shall be anchored to the floor, pipe stanchion, or concrete pedestal using expansion anchors or other method as approved by the Engineer. B. Where shown on the Drawings, pipe bends shall be anchored using concrete anchor posts. Pipes shall be securely fastened to the concrete supports with suitable metal bands as required and approved by the Engineer. A felt insert shall be used to isolate the piping from the poured concrete. 2.05 VERTICAL PIPE SUPPORTS 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA FILED SUB-BID - HVAC HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT WOODARD & CURRAN 23 05 29-9 A. Where vertical pipes are not supported by a Unistrut system as specified in Paragraph 2.06 below, they shall be supported in one of the following methods. 1. For pipes 1/4-in to 2-in in diameter, an extension hanger ring shall be provided with an extension rod and hanger flange. The rod diameter shall be as recommended by the manufacturer for the type of pipe to be supported. The hanger ring shall be stainless steel. The hanger ring shall be equal to Carpenter & Paterson, Figure No. 81 or 81CT. The anchor flange shall be stainless steel similar to Carpenter and Patterson, Figure No. 85. 2. For pipes equal to or greater than 2-in in diameter extended pipe clamps similar to Carpenter and Patterson, Figure No. 267 may be used. The hanger shall be attached to concrete structures using double expansion shields, or to stainless steel support members using welding lugs similar to Carpenter and Patterson, Figure No. 220. 3. Pipe riser clamps shall be used to support all vertical pipes extending through floor slabs. Riser clamps shall be stainless steel similar to Carpenter and Patterson, Figure No. 126. Copper clad or stainless steel clamps shall be used on copper pipes. Copper pipe hangers and clamps shall be painted per Division 9. Insulation shall be removed from insulated pipes prior to installing riser clamps. Insulation shall not be damaged by clamp installation. 4. Unless otherwise specified, shown, or specifically approved by the Engineer, vertical runs exceeding 6-ft shall be supported by base elbows/tees, clamps, brackets, wall rests and pipe collars, all located as required to ensure a rigid installation. 2.06 SUPPORTS FOR PLASTIC PIPING 3-INCHES AND SMALLER A. Pipe supports shall be provided for closely spaced vertical piping systems required to provide a rigid installation. The interval of vertical support spacing shall be as specified, but in no case shall vertical interval exceed 6-ft. The support system shall consist of a framework suitably anchored to floors, ceilings or roofs. B. Vertical and horizontal supporting members shall be U shaped channels similar to Unistrut, Series P1000. The assemblies shall be furnished complete with all nuts, bolts and fittings required for a complete assembly including end caps for all unistrut members. Vertical piping shall be secured to the horizontal members by pipe clamps or pipe straps. For support of exterior pipe, submerged pipe, pipe within outdoor structures and interior pipe within channels and chemical containment areas, all components shall be Type 316L stainless steel. In all other areas, all components shall be of 316L stainless steel. C. The framework shall be as manufactured by the Unistrut Corporation; Globe-Strut as manufactured by the Metal Products Division of U.S. Gypsum; Power Strut; B-Line Systems or equal. Material shall be 316L stainless steel. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA FILED SUB-BID - HVAC HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT WOODARD & CURRAN 23 05 29-10 D. The design of each individual framing system shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. Shop Drawings, as specified above shall be submitted and shall show all details of the installation, including dimensions and types of supports. In all instances the completed frame shall be adequately braced to provide a complete rigid structure when all the piping has been attached. E. Supports not otherwise described in this Section shall be fabricated or constructed from standard stainless steel shapes in accordance with applicable provisions of Division 05, or Unistrut-type frame; have anchor hardware similar to items previously specified herein, shall meet the minimum requirements listed below and be subject to the approval of the Engineer. 1. Pipe support systems shall meet all requirements of this Section and all related Sections. 2. Complete design details of the pipe support system and system components shall be submitted for review and approval as specified in PART 1. No hanger or support shall be installed without the written approval of the Engineer. 3. The pipe support system shall not impose loads on the supporting structures in excess of the loads for which the supporting structure is designed. 2.07 SURFACE PREPARATION AND SHOP PRIME PAINTING A. All surfaces, except stainless steel surfaces, shall be prepared and shop prime painted as part of the Work of this Section. Surface preparation and shop prime painting shall be as specified in Division 09. 2.08 SEALS A. Link-Seal by Thunderline Corporations or approved equal where a gas tight penetration is not required. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Proceed with the installation of piping and supports only after any building structural Work has been completed and new concrete has reached its specified design strength. B. The installation of pipe support systems shall in no way interfere with the operation of monorails, access hatches, etc. C. The installed systems shall not interfere with maintenance and operational access to any equipment installed under this Section, or any other related Section. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA FILED SUB-BID - HVAC HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT WOODARD & CURRAN 23 05 29-11 D. All pipes, horizontal and vertical, requiring rigid support shall be supported from the building structure by methods specified under PART 2. Supports shall be provided at changes in direction and elsewhere as shown in the Drawings or as specified herein. No piping shall be supported from existing precast concrete tees, metal stairs, ladders and walkways unless specifically directed or authorized by the Engineer. E. All pipe supports shall be designed with liberal strength and stiffness to support the respective pipes under the maximum combination of peak loading conditions to include pipe weight, liquid weight, liquid movement and pressure forces, thermal expansion and contraction, vibrations and all probable externally applied forces including seismic forces. Prior to installation, all pipe supports shall be approved by the Engineer. F. Pipe supports shall be provided to minimize lateral forces through valves, both sides of split type couplings and sleeve type couplings (within four pipe diameters) and to minimize all pipe forces on pump housings and other equipment. Pump housings and other equipment shall not be utilized to support connecting pipes. G. Inserts for pipe hangers and supports shall be installed on forms before concrete is placed. Before setting these items, all Drawings and figures shall be checked which have a direct bearing on the pipe location. Responsibility for the proper location of pipe supports is included under this Section. H. Continuous metal inserts shall be embedded flush with the concrete surface. I. Apply anti-seize compound to all nuts and bolts. Supports installed without the approved compound shall be dismantled and correctly installed, at no additional cost to the Owner. J. All sharp edges and corners within 7 feet of the floor or walking surface shall be ground down and/or protected with plastic protective covers. K. After startup of equipment and piping systems, provide additional lateral bracing if horizontal vibration exceeds limits stated in Part 2. 3.02 TESTING A. All pipe support systems shall be tested for compliance with this Section. After installation, each pipe support system shall be tested in conjunction with the respective piping pressure tests. If any part of the pipe support system proves to be defective or inadequate, it shall be repaired or augmented under this Section to the satisfaction of the Engineer. END OF SECTION This page left intentionally blank 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA FILED SUB-BID - HVAC IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT WOODARD & CURRAN 23 05 53-1 SECTION 23 05 53 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT (FILED SUB-BID REQUIRED) PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Painted Identification Materials. 2. Plastic Pipe Markers. 3. Valve Tags. 4. Plastic Equipment Markers. 5. Plasticized Tags. B. Related Sections 1. Division 22 and 23 Sections which specify Pipe and Valve marking and identification. 1.02 REFERENCES A. ANSI Standards - Comply with ANSI A13.1 for lettering size, length of color field, colors, and viewing angles of identification devices. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Manufacturer's technical product data and installation instructions for each identification material and device required. B. Samples of each color, lettering style and other graphic representation required for each identification material or system. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Mechanical identification materials shall be provided by firms regularly engaged in manufacture of identification devices of types and sizes required and whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years. 1.05 MAINTENANCE A. Extra materials 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA FILED SUB-BID - HVAC IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT WOODARD & CURRAN 23 05 53-2 1. Furnish minimum of 5% extra stock of each mechanical identification material required, including additional numbered valve tags (not less than 3) for each piping system, additional piping system identification markers, and additional plastic laminate engraving blanks of assorted sizes. 2. Where stenciled markers are provided, clean and retain stencils after completion of stenciling and include used stencils in extra stock, along with required stock of stenciling paints and applicators. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide mechanical identification materials of one of the following or an approved equal: 1. Allen Systems, Inc. 2. Brady (W.H.) Co.; Signmark Div. 3. Seton Name Plate Corp. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Mechanical Identification Materials 1. Provide manufacturer's standard products of categories and types required for each application as referenced in other Division 23 sections. Where more than single type is specified for application, selections is Installer’s option, but provide single selection for each product category. B. Painted Identification Materials 1. Provide standard fiberboard stencils, prepared for required applications with letter sizes generally complying with recommendations of ANSI A13.1 for piping and similar applications, but not less than 1-1/4 inch high letters for ductwork and not less than ¾ inch high letters for access door signs and similar operational instructions. Provide 1 inch high letters for labeling tanks between 0-20 gallons. 2. Utilize standard exterior type stenciling enamel; black, except as otherwise indicated; either brushing grade or pressurized spray-can form and grade. 3. Utilize standard identification enamel of colors indicated or, if not otherwise indicated for piping systems, comply with ANSI A13.1 for colors. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA FILED SUB-BID - HVAC IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT WOODARD & CURRAN 23 05 53-3 PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Where identification is to be applied to surfaces which require insulation, painting or other covering or finish, including valve tags in finished mechanical spaces, install identification after completion of covering and painting. Install identification prior to installation of removable concealment, if any. B. Install engraved plastic laminate sign or plastic equipment marker on or near each major item of mechanical equipment and each operational device, as specified herein if not otherwise specified for each item or device. 3.02 ADJUSTING A. Relocate any mechanical identification device which has become visually blocked by Work of this division or other divisions. 3.03 CLEANING A. Clean face of identification devices. END OF SECTION This page left intentionally blank 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA FILED SUB-BID - HVAC TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC WOODARD & CURRAN 23 05 93-1 SECTION 23 05 93 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC (FILED SUB-BID REQUIRED) PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. Furnish the necessary labor, materials, instruments, transportation and devices required to test, adjust and balance the total heating and ventilating systems. Each system as specified and detailed herein, shall perform in accordance with the intent of the Drawings and this Section. Systems to be tested, adjusted, and balanced include air systems installed by the HVAC Contractor. B. Testing, balancing and operation of the systems shall be performed by competent and experienced personnel, having formerly done similar Work and whose qualifications and performance shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer. Test and balance air system and submit testing and balancing reports to the Engineer for review and approval. Re balance when required by the Engineer, incorporating all changes and certify the systems have been tested and balanced to meet specified requirements. C. The tests shall demonstrate the specified capacities and operation of equipment and materials comprising the systems. Such tests other than as described herein, which are deemed necessary by the Engineer to indicate the fulfillment of the Contract, shall be made. D. Data required by this Section shall receive complete approval before final payment is made. E. If, in the opinion of the Engineer, the Contractor has not, will not, or cannot comply with the testing, balancing and adjusting requirements of this Section, he may advise the Owner to employ a qualified firm to perform such Work at Contractor's sole expense. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submit, in accordance with Section 01 33 00, the following: 1. Qualifications and experience information and data as detailed under Paragraph 1.03 below. 2. Proposed testing schedules and procedures. 3. Results of periodic field inspections as specified under Paragraph 3.01 below. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA FILED SUB-BID - HVAC TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC WOODARD & CURRAN 23 05 93-2 4. Preliminary draft "system" balancing reports as systems are completed and tested. 5. Final systems and Project balancing reports as final system adjustments are made as systems are accepted by the Owner. 6. All submittals shall contain a statement that Sections 23 05 93 and all other referenced Sections have been read and complied with. The certification statement shall be made by all of the following that are applicable; the Contractor, Subcontractor and the vendor. The statement shall be an individual statement for each party involved, and shall be included with every submittal and resubmittal. B. In general, corrections, comments, or lack thereof, made relative to submittals during review shall not relieve the Contractor from compliance with the requirements of the Drawings and Specifications. Submittals are for review of general conformance with the design concepts of the Project and general compliance with the Contract Documents. The Contractor is Responsible for the final design conforming and correlating all quantities and dimensions, selecting fabrication processes and techniques of construction, coordinating the Work of all trades, and performing the Work in a safe and satisfactory manner. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications standards for this Work - Affiliation with manufacturers, installing Contractors, or engineering firms will not preclude acceptability. Submit qualifications within 60 days after Contract award. Membership in the AABC or NEBB for air and water testing is required. The testing balancing Contractor shall not be affiliated with the on Site Contractors. B. The balancing Contractor shall be prepared to submit credentials and other evidence of qualifications, and Work experience. C. To perform required professional services, the balancing agency shall have a minimum of two test-and-balance Engineers certified by the AABC or NEBB. D. This certified test-and-balance Engineer shall be Responsible for supervision and certification for the total Work specified herein. E. The balancing agency shall submit records of experience in the field of air and hydronic system balancing or any other data as requested by the Engineer. The supervisory personnel for the firm shall have at least five years’ experience and all the employees used in this Project shall be qualified technicians in this specific field. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA FILED SUB-BID - HVAC TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC WOODARD & CURRAN 23 05 93-3 F. The balancing agency shall furnish all necessary calibrated instrumentation to adequately perform the specified services. An inventory of all instruments and devices in possession of the balancing agency may be required by the Engineer to determine the balancing agency's performance capability. 1.04 ENGINEERING SERVICES A. When engineering services are specified to be provided by the Contractor, the Contractor shall retain a licensed professional Engineer to perform the services. The Engineer shall be licensed at the time the Work is done and in the STATE OF Massachusetts. If the State issues discipline specific licenses, the Engineer shall be licensed in the applicable discipline. In addition, the Engineer shall be experienced in the type of Work being provided. B. All Work is to be done according to the applicable regulations for professional Engineers, to include signing, sealing and dating documents. When submittals are required by a professional Engineer, in addition to state required signing and sealing, a copy of the current wallet card or wall certificate indicating the date of expiration shall be included with the submittal. 1.05 SCHEDULE AND PROCEDURES A. A complete schedule of balancing procedures for each of the buildings or systems shall be submitted in sufficient time in advance so that the Engineer might arrange to observe these procedures as they progress. Before commencing with the balancing of the systems, submit the methods and instruments proposed to be used to adjust and balance the air systems. B. Submit proposed testing programs at least 2 weeks prior to the scheduled test to assure agreement as to personnel and instrumentation required and scope of each testing program. 1.06 DRAWING REVIEW A. The balancing organization shall thoroughly review the location of all fresh air dampers, return dampers, spill dampers, quadrant dampers, splitter dampers, bypass dampers, face dampers, fire dampers, registers, grilles, diffusers, etc. The purpose of the review is to finalize the optimum locations for dampers, test ports, and balancing valves shown on the Drawings. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA FILED SUB-BID - HVAC TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC WOODARD & CURRAN 23 05 93-4 1.07 EQUIPMENT CURVES A. Fan Characteristics Charts: The HVAC and general Contractors shall provide to the Balancing Organization any required characteristic curve charts for all fans to include air conditioning units and air handling units. Characteristic curve charts shall be not less than 8-1/2-in by 11-in and shall show the static pressure, capacity horsepower, and overall efficiency for operating conditions from no load to 130 percent of specified load. The minimum size of the actual fan curve shall be no less than 6-in by 8-in. The use of faxed copies of curves is not acceptable. 1.08 GUARANTEE A. The balancing Work shall be guaranteed to be accurate and factual data, based on readings in the field. All typewritten data shall be submitted within 14 working days of the performance of the test. Test data shall not be held until completion, but shall be submitted on an interim basis as soon as the test or appropriate groups of tests are finished. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Furnish gaskets, lubricants and other expendable materials required to be replaced during the execution of this Work. B. Fixed-pitched pulleys required for fan adjustments shall be furnished on an exchange basis by the party Responsible for the fan installation. C. Where test results indicate that air quantities at any system fan are below or in excess of the specified amount, the HVAC and general Contractor’s, at their own expense, shall change driving pulley ratio or shall make approved changes to obtain the specified or scheduled air quantities. D. Testing apparatus: Furnish plugs, caps, stops, valves, pumps, compressors, blowers, and similar devices required to perform this Work. 1. Furnish anemometers, thermometers, gauges, voltmeters, ammeters, lachometers and similar instruments, not part of the permanent installation, but required to record the performance of the equipment and systems. 2. Testing apparatus, not part of the permanent installation, shall remain the property of the Contractor, but made available to the Engineer. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA FILED SUB-BID - HVAC TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC WOODARD & CURRAN 23 05 93-5 3. Instruments used for testing shall be certified accurate to within plus or minus 0.10 degrees F for temperature or plus or minus 0.10-in wc for pressure. Calibration of the instruments shall be done within 7 days of testing for this Project and henceforth every 30 days thereafter for the duration of the testing period. Certification of calibration shall be submitted to the Engineer prior to starting the Work. 2.02 TESTING REPORTS A. Forms: Furnish test report data on 8-1/2-in by 11-in bond AABC or NEBB form paper in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Submit format for recording data and receive approval prior to use. Electronic submission shall be in Adobe pdf format. B. Reports shall be excel spreadsheets format and shall be submitted in both hard copy and as a data file. C. The report shall contain the following general data in a format selected by the balancing agency: 1. Project number 2. Contract number 3. Project title 4. Project location 5. Project architect 6. Project mechanical Engineer 7. Test and balance agency 8. Test and balance Engineer 9. General Contractor 10. Mechanical Subcontractor 11. Dates tests were performed 12. Certification D. At a minimum, the report shall include: 1. Preface. A general discussion of the systems, any abnormalities, and problems encountered. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA FILED SUB-BID - HVAC TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC WOODARD & CURRAN 23 05 93-6 2. Instrumentation list. The list of instruments including type, model, manufacturer, serial number, and calibration dates. E. Prepare 11-in by 17-in single line diagrams or 12-in by 18-in half size Drawings showing all duct systems indicating all terminal air outlets including diffusers, grilles and registers, perforated plates, nozzles and other types of air supply, exhaust or return outlets. The minimum scale for diagrams showing the measurement points shall be 1/8-in=1-ft-0-in in the final form as submitted. The use of faxed copies of diagrams is not acceptable. Location of test points shown on the diagrams shall be clear and easy to locate on the diagram. The identification mark of the test points shall be the same as is shown on the test report showing the test data. The identification for test points shall include indication of the units served, and shall not have a duplicate in the Project. Each test sheet shall include the following data: 1. Job name and address. 2. Name of HVAC Contractor. 3. Name of balancing organization. 4. Instruments used to perform the test. 5. Name of test technician or test Engineer. 6. Fan system and/or zone number. 7. Room number or area name. 8. Size of outlet. 9. Type outlet. 10. The cfm at each outlet on system and corresponding cfm at each outlet as noted on the plans. 11. Percent deviation of the measured flow versus the design flow. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA FILED SUB-BID - HVAC TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC WOODARD & CURRAN 23 05 93-7 PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. During construction, the balancing agency shall inspect the installation of sheet metal Work, temperature controls, and other component parts of the heating, ventilating, and air conditioning systems. The inspections shall be performed periodically as the Work progresses. A minimum of two inspections are required as follows: (1) when 60 percent of the ductwork is installed: (2) when 90 percent of the equipment is installed. The Balancing Agency shall submit a brief written report of each inspection to the Engineer. 3.02 START OF BALANCING A. The general Contractor shall notify the Balancing Organization and Engineer when systems become operational and ready for preliminary and final testing, adjusting, and balancing. B. Final balancing shall not begin until system has been installed complete and is capable of normal operation. Provide personnel to assist in rough balance and calibration. C. All dampers, fans, coils, pumps, valves, and linkages shall be verified to be installed and operating. D. System shall be capable of operating under control as specified on Drawings and/or contained herein. E. Start fans, verify that rotation is correct. If rotation is incorrect, coordinate with electrical Contractor to switch power leads such that the motor rotates correctly. F. Check nameplate voltage on motor, compare to scheduled voltage. Notify the Engineer immediately of any discrepancies. Measure and record actual voltage across all power leads. Notify the Engineer of discrepancies immediately. G. Check motor nameplates full load amps, measure and record amperage across all power leads. If there are marked discrepancies in amperage draws between legs, notify the Engineer immediately. H. Measure and record fan and motor rpm. Check, that motor rpm agrees with nameplate and scheduled rpm. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA FILED SUB-BID - HVAC TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC WOODARD & CURRAN 23 05 93-8 I. If, upon commencing the Work, the Balancing Contractor finds that the systems are not ready, or if a dispute occurs as to the readiness of the systems, the balancing agency shall request an inspection to be made by the Engineer. This inspection shall establish to the satisfaction of the represented parties whether or not the systems meet the basic requirements for testing and balancing. Should the inspection reveal the notification to have been premature, all costs for the inspection and Work previously accomplished by the balancing agency shall be paid for by the general Contractor. Furthermore, such items that are not ready for testing and balancing shall be completed and placed in operational readiness before testing and balancing services shall be recommenced. J. Leaks, damage and defects discovered or resulting from startup, testing and balancing shall be repaired or replaced to like-new condition with acceptable materials. Tests shall be continued until system operates without adjustments or repairs. 3.03 REQUIRED ACCURACY A. Systems shall be balanced to be within the following limits of the capacity shown on the Drawings. Limits shall be applied to both individual components and to the system totals. B. General Systems (plus/minus 10 percent) 3.04 TESTING A. HVAC Air Systems 1. Balance the supply return and exhaust air systems in accordance with AABC or NEBB Standards by the use of direct reading instruments such as an "AnemoTherm" or velometer, which has been properly calibrated. 3.05 STANDBY EQUIPMENT A. Where systems are provided with standby equipment, the system shall be balanced for operation in standby as well as normal operation. 3.06 FINAL ACCEPTANCE A. At the time of final inspection, the balancing agency shall recheck, in the presence of the Engineer, specific and random selections of data recorded in the certified test-and-balance report. B. Points and areas for recheck shall be selected by the Engineer. C. Measurements and test procedures shall be the same as the original test and balance. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA FILED SUB-BID - HVAC TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC WOODARD & CURRAN 23 05 93-9 D. Selections for recheck, specific plus random, shall not normally exceed 15 percent of the total number tabulated in the report, except where special air systems require a complete recheck for safety reasons. E. If the specific rechecks are more than 5 percent deviation from the report or specified flows, all of the systems, that require specific recheck, shall be rebalanced. If 5 percent or five of the random checks, whichever is less, exceeds a 10 percent deviation from the specified flows, the report shall be rejected. In the event the report is rejected, all systems shall be readjusted and tested, new data recorded, a new certified test-and-balance report submitted, and a new inspection test made, all at no additional cost to the GROUP. 3.07 OPPOSITE SEASON TEST A. The balancing agency shall perform an inspection of the HVAC system during the opposite season from that in which the initial adjustments were made. The balancing agency shall make any necessary modifications to the initial adjustments to produce optimum system operation. END OF SECTION This page intentionally left blank 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA FILED SUB-BID – HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS FOR HVAC WOODARD & CURRAN 23 09 00-1 SECTION 23 09 00 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC (FILED SUB-BID REQUIRED) PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes requirements for the automatic temperature control system including components, installation and commissioning. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 15766 – Unit Heaters. 2. Division 26 – Electrical 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer and Manufacturer Qualifications 1. Installer shall have an established working relationship with Control System Manufacturer for a minimum of 5 years. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Submittal Requirements: Submit in accordance with Section 01300. Submit complete bill of materials indicating quantity, manufacturer, model number, and relevant technical data of equipment to be used. 1. Wiring diagrams and layouts for each control panel. Show termination numbers. 2. Floor plan schematic diagrams indicating field sensor and controller locations. B. Controlled Systems 1. Schematic diagram of each controlled system. Label control points with point names. Graphically show locations of control elements. 2. Instrumentation list (Bill of Materials) for each controlled system. List each control system element in a table. Show element name, type of device, manufacturer, model number, and product data sheet number. C. Complete description of control system operation including sequences of operation. Include and reference schematic diagram of control 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA FILED SUB-BID – HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS FOR HVAC WOODARD & CURRAN 23 09 00-2 D. Project Record Documents. Submit three copies of record (as-built) documents upon completion of installation for approval prior to final completion. Submittal shall consist of: 1. Project Record Drawings. As-built versions of submittal shop drawings provided as AutoCAD 2006 (or newer) compatible files on magnetic or optical disk (file format: .DWG, .DXF, .VSD, or comparable) and 6 prints of each drawing on 11" x 17" paper. 2. Testing and Commissioning Reports and Checklists. Completed versions of reports, checklists, and trend logs used to meet requirements of Section 15900 Section 3.17 (Control System Demonstration and Acceptance). 3. Operation and Maintenance (O&M) Manual. 1.04 STORAGE A. Equipment shall not be stored out-of-doors. Equipment shall be stored in dry permanent shelters including in-line equipment, and shall be adequately protected against mechanical injury. If any apparatus has been damaged, the System Supplier at his own cost and expense shall repair such damage. If any apparatus has been subject to possible injury by water, it shall be thoroughly dried out and put through such tests as directed by the Engineer. This shall be at the cost and expense of the System Supplier or the System Supplier at his own expense shall replace the apparatus. 1.05 WARRANTY A. Warrant labor and materials for specified control system free from defects for a period of 12 months after final acceptance. Control system failures during warranty period shall be adjusted, repaired, or replaced at no additional cost or reduction in service to Owner. Respond during normal business hours within 24 hours of Owner's warranty service request. B. Work shall have a single warranty date, even if Owner receives beneficial use due to early system start-up. If specified work is split into multiple contracts or a multi-phase contract, each contract or phase shall have a separate warranty start date and period. C. If Engineer determines that equipment and systems operate satisfactorily at the end of final start-up, testing, and commissioning phase, Engineer will certify in writing that control system operation has been tested and accepted in accordance with the terms of this specification. Date of acceptance shall begin warranty period. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA FILED SUB-BID – HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS FOR HVAC WOODARD & CURRAN 23 09 00-3 PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 DESCRIPTION A. Provide relays, sensors, room thermostats, auxiliary contacts, transformers and ancillary devices as needed for a complete and operable system that meets the performance as listed on the Drawings. B. Use new products the manufacturer is currently manufacturing and selling for use in new installations. Do not use this installation as a product test site unless explicitly approved in writing by Owner. Spare parts shall be available for at least five years after completion of this contract. C. To the extent possible, all equipment shall be by the same manufacturer. D. Unit Heaters under Section 23 82 39 include thermostats. Provide wiring, relays or other interface hardware to allow operation in accordance with the Drawings. 2.02 MANUFACTURER A. Tekmar B. Honeywell C. Andover Controls D. Johnson Controls E. Or approved equal PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Inspect site to verify that equipment can be installed as shown. Report discrepancies, conflicts, or omissions to Engineer for resolution before starting rough-in work. B. Examine drawings and specifications for work of others. Report inadequate headroom or space conditions or other discrepancies to Engineer and obtain written instructions for changes necessary to accommodate work of this section with work of others. Controls Contractor shall perform at his expense necessary changes in specified work caused by failure or neglect to report discrepancies. 3.02 PROTECTION A. Controls Contractor shall protect against and be liable for damage to work and to material caused by Contractor's work or employees. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA FILED SUB-BID – HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS FOR HVAC WOODARD & CURRAN 23 09 00-4 B. Controls Contractor shall be responsible for work and equipment until inspected, tested, and accepted. Protect material not immediately installed. Close open ends of work with temporary covers or plugs during storage and construction to prevent entry of foreign objects. 3.03 COORDINATION A. Site. 1. Assist in coordinating space conditions to accommodate the work of each trade where work will be installed near or will interfere with work of other trades. If installation without coordination causes interference with work of other trades, Contractor shall correct conditions without extra charge. 2. Coordinate and schedule work with other work in the same area and with work dependent upon other work to facilitate mutual progress. B. Coordination with Other Controls. Integrate with and coordinate controls and control devices furnished or installed by others as follows. 1. Coordinate and resolve incompatibility issues that arise between control products provided under this section and those provided under other sections or divisions of this specification. 2. Controls Contractor shall be responsible for integration of control products provided by multiple suppliers regardless of where integration is described within the contract documents. 3.04 GENERAL WORKMANSHIP A. Install equipment, piping, and wiring or raceway horizontally, vertically, and parallel to walls wherever possible. B. Provide sufficient slack and flexible connections to allow for piping and equipment vibration isolation. 3.05 INSTALLATION A. Mount all equipment as shown on the contract drawings. Coordinate location with all other trades. 3.06 WIRING A. Control and interlock wiring and installation shall comply with national and local electrical codes, Division 26, and manufacturer's recommendations B. Maintain minimum clearance of 6 in. between raceway and high-temperature equipment such as hot water pipes and flues. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA FILED SUB-BID – HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS FOR HVAC WOODARD & CURRAN 23 09 00-5 3.07 INSTALLATION OF SENSORS A. Install sensors according to manufacturer's recommendations. B. Mount sensors rigidly and adequately for operating environment. C. Install outdoor air temperature sensors on north wall with sun shield. 3.08 CONTROL SYSTEM CHECKOUT AND TESTING A. Startup Testing. Complete startup testing to verify operational control system before notifying Owner of system demonstration. Provide Owner with schedule for startup testing. Owner may have representative present during any or all startup testing. 1. Verify that control wiring is properly connected and free of shorts and ground faults. Verify that terminations are tight. 2. Verify that binary output devices such as relays, solenoid valves, two- position actuators and control valves, and magnetic starters, operate properly and that normal positions are correct. 3. Prepare a log documenting startup testing of each input and output device, with technician's initials certifying each device has been tested and calibrated. 4. Verify that system operates according to sequences of operation. 5. Alarms and Interlocks. a. Check each alarm with an appropriate signal at a value that will trip the alarm. b. Trip interlocks using field contacts to check logic and to ensure that actuators fail in the proper direction. c. Test interlock actions by simulating alarm conditions to check initiating value of variable and interlock action. 3.09 CONTROL SYSTEM DEMONSTRATION AND ACCEPTANCE A. Demonstration. Prior to acceptance, perform the following performance tests to demonstrate system operation and compliance with specification. Provide Engineer with log documenting completion of startup tests. 1. Engineer will be present to observe and review system demonstration. Notify Engineer at least 10 days before system demonstration begins. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA FILED SUB-BID – HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS FOR HVAC WOODARD & CURRAN 23 09 00-6 2. Demonstration shall follow process submitted and approved. Complete approved checklists and forms for each system as part of system demonstration. 3. Demonstrate actual field operation of each sequence of operation as specified in Section 15940. Provide and operate test equipment required to prove proper system operation. 4. Tests that fail to demonstrate proper system operation shall be repeated after Contractor makes necessary repairs or revisions to hardware or software to successfully complete each test. B. Acceptance. 1. After tests described in this specification are performed to the satisfaction of both Engineer and Owner, Engineer will accept control system as meeting completion requirements. Engineer may exempt tests from completion requirements that cannot be performed due to circumstances beyond Contractor's control. Engineer will provide written statement of each exempted test. Exempted tests shall be performed as part of warranty. 2. System shall not be accepted until completed demonstration forms and checklists are submitted and approved. 3.10 CLEANING A. Each day clean up debris resulting from work. Remove packaging material as soon as its contents have been removed. Collect waste and place in designated location. B. On completion of work in each area, clean work debris and equipment. Keep areas free from dust, dirt, and debris. C. On completion of work, check equipment furnished under this section for paint damage. Repair damaged factory-finished paint to match adjacent areas. Replace deformed cabinets and enclosures with new material and repaint to match adjacent areas. END OF SECTION 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA FIBERGLASS-REINFORCED PLASTIC DUCTS WOODARD & CURRAN 23 31 17-1 SECTION 23 31 17 FIBERGLASS-REINFORCED PLASTIC DUCTS (FILED SUB-BID REQUIRED) PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes 1. Provide and perform all labor, materials, and equipment, and incidentals as shown, specified and required to furnish, install, and test fiberglass- reinforced plastic (FRP) odor control process ductwork and fittings in accordance with this Section, the Drawings and applicable reference standards listed in Article 1.03. B. Related Requirements 1. Section 09 90 00 – Painting 2. Section 25 05 93 – Testing, Adjusting and Balancing for HVAC 3. Section 40 05 15 – Process Pipe Supports 4. Division 43 – Process Gas and Liquid Handling, Purification, and Storage Equipment 5. Section 44 31 19 – Packaged Odor Control Systems 6. Division 46 – Water and Wastewater Equipment 1.02 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Measurement and payment requirements: per Division 01 General Requirements. 1.03 REFERENCES A. Reference Standards 1. American National Standards Institute 2. American Society of Mechanical Engineers a. RTP-1 Reinforced Thermoset Plastic Corrosion-Resistant Equipment 3. American Society of Testing and Materials 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA FIBERGLASS-REINFORCED PLASTIC DUCTS WOODARD & CURRAN 23 31 17-2 a. ASTM D 3567 Practice for Determining Dimensions of “Fiberglass” (Glass-Fiber Reinforced-Thermosetting-Resin) Pipe and Fittings. b. ASTM C 582 Standard Specification for Contact – Molded Reinforced Thermoplastic (RTP) Laminates for Corrosion – Resistant Equipment. c. ASTM D 3982 Standard Specification for Contact Molded “Fiberglass” Duct and Hoods or NBS PS 15-69 Custom Contact- Molded Reinforced Polyester Chemical-Resistant Process Equipment d. ASTM D 3839 Standard Practice for Underground Installation of Fiberglass Pipe e. ASM D 2563 Classifying Visual Defects in Glass Reinforced Plastic Laminate Parts f. ASTM D 2996 Standard Specification for Filament-Wound “Fiberglass” (Glass-Fiber-Reinforced Thermosetting-Resin) Pipe g. ASTM D 2310 Standard Classification for Machine-Made “Fiberglass” (Glass-Fiber-Reinforced Thermosetting-Resin) Pipe h. ASTM D 2992 Standard Practice for Obtaining Hydrostatic or Pressure Design Basis for “Fiberglass” (Glass-Fiber-Reinforced Thermosetting-Resin) Pipe and Fittings i. ASTM E 84 Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials 4. American Water Works Association a. AWWA M-45 American Water Works Manual of Water Supply Practices “ Fiberglass Pipe Design.” b. AWWA C950-95 Fiberglass Pressure Pipe 5. National Bureau of Standards (NBS) a. Voluntary Product Standard PS15-69 – Custom Contact-Molded Reinforced-Polyester Chemical-Resistant 6. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) 7. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) a. UL 723 – Standard for Safety Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination, Sequencing, and Scheduling: per Division 01 General Requirements. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA FIBERGLASS-REINFORCED PLASTIC DUCTS WOODARD & CURRAN 23 31 17-3 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. B. Product Data C. Submit catalog cuts, specifications, and installation instructions, for each type of pipe, tube and fitting, in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. D. Pressure and Leakage Testing Reports E. Submit test reports documenting testing activities and demonstrating compliance with testing and performance requirements. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. B. Inspection by the Engineer’s representative or failure to inspect shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility to provide materials and perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. C. The Owner and Engineer reserve the right to sample and test any materials after delivery and to reject all components represented by a sample that fails to comply with the specified requirements. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. B. Where possible, store pipe and tube inside and protected from weather. Where necessary to store outside, elevate above grade and enclose with durable, waterproof wrapping. C. Protect flanges and fittings from moisture and dirt by inside storage and enclosure, or by packaging with durable, waterproof wrapping. D. All pipe and fittings shall be subjected to a careful inspection and hammer test just prior to being installed. 1.08 SITE CONDITIONS A. Existing Conditions: per Division 01 General Requirements. B. The Contractor shall become familiar with all details of the Work, verify all dimensions in the field, and shall advise the Engineer of any discrepancy before performing the Work. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA FIBERGLASS-REINFORCED PLASTIC DUCTS WOODARD & CURRAN 23 31 17-4 PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 PIPE AND FITTINGS – GENERAL A. Unless otherwise indicated, all fittings and appurtenances shall be of the same type and grade of materials as the connecting pipe. All products provided under this section shall conform to current AWWA and ANSI specifications as appropriate to the type of pipe specified. B. Design, furnish, and install seismic restraints and braces for all ductwork and accessories as required by the building code or as shown on the Drawings. C. FRP ductwork shall be designed and fabricated for odor control service to carry warm, moister-ladden air with hydrogen sulfide, mercaptans and other organic and inorganic compounds typically associated with wastewater treatment. D. Manufacturer: Provide FRP duct as manufactured by one of the following. All equipment (duct/dampers and fittings) shall be the product of a single manufacturer. 1. ECS Environmental Solutions 2. Belco Manufacturing 3. Smith/Fibercast 4. Or Approved Equal. 2.02 FRP DUCTWORK (ODOR CONTROL DUCT, EXPOSED AND ABOVE GRADE SERVICES) A. FRP ductwork shall be filament wound in accordance with ASTM D2310 latest edition; or contact molded in accordance with National Bureau of Standards (NBS) PS15-69. Ductwork shall be capable of withstanding pressures up to 18-inches water column and vacuums up to 6-inches water column. B. Resin shall be a premium corrosion resistant and fire retardant premium vinyl ester Derakane 510A-40, Hetron FR992, Dion 9300FR, Ceilcote Duracor 4000, or equal. Antimony trioxide may be added (up to 3 percent) if required to provide a flame spread rating of 25 or less in accordance with ASTM E84, latest edition. C. Ductwork shall have a minimum wall thickness of: 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA FIBERGLASS-REINFORCED PLASTIC DUCTS WOODARD & CURRAN 23 31 17-5 Duct Size Minimum Wall Thickness (inches) 20-inch and less 0.125 24-inch to 42-inch 0.187 Greater than 42-inch 0.250 D. Ductwork shall have ultraviolet (UV) inhibitors. E. Fittings shall be flanged or butt wrapped. Resin used in field wrapping shall be identical to the ductwork. Butt wrapping shall be coated to match the color of the adjacent ductwork prior to the acceptance of work. F. Ductwork shall be painted in accordance with Section 09 90 00 or provided with a gel-coat finish. Provide color selections to the Engineer for selection. G. 90 degree elbows shall be smooth or five (5) piece minimum mitered style, with a radius to diameter (R/D) ratio of 1.5 or greater. H. Gaskets for flanged ductwork shall be EPDM. Bolts, nuts, and washers shall be Type 316 stainless steel. 2.03 EXPANSION JOINTS A. Provide expansion joints where shown on the Drawings. B. Type: W-design configuration with integral flanges suitable for service with FRP duct under the conditions specified. Expansion joints must have integral flanges. Slip on flexible connectors attached to fiberglass flanges with band clamps will not be accepted. C. Material: EPDM. D. Backing Rings: 3/8 inch thick, 2 inches wide, Type 316 stainless steel where flanged expansion joints or flex connectors are noted. E. Extension: 3 inches. F. Compression: 2.5 inches. G. Lateral Offset: 2.5 inches. H. Thickness:1/4 inch, minimum. I. Bolts, Nuts and Washers: Type 316 stainless steel. J. Expansion joints shall be manufactured by RM-Holz., The Metraflex Company, Garlock, Mercer or equal. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA FIBERGLASS-REINFORCED PLASTIC DUCTS WOODARD & CURRAN 23 31 17-6 K. Expansion joints shall be flanged where connecting ductwork to equipment, otherwise, slip-type will be acceptable. 2.04 ISOLATION DAMPERS A. Furnish and install, where indicated on the Drawings, FRP butterfly isolation dampers. Dampers shall be fabricated from materials similar to associated ductwork. B. Rating Conditions 1. Velocity through Damper 6,000 FPM. 2. Pressure Rating 30-inches water column 3. Maximum Allowable Leakage: 3 cubic feet per minute at 20 inches of water column. C. Materials 1. Bearings: Graphite filled Teflon 2. Blade : FRP Reinforced with a Corrosion Barrier on all Exposed surfaces 3. Body: FRP vinyl ester resin with a 100-mil internal corrosion barrier 4. Shaft: FRP D. Resin System: All internal surfaces shall including blade shall have a BPO/DMA cure system to increase the corrosion resistance of surfaces exposed to chemical attack. NO filler is allowed in the resin system, laminate must be translucent. E. Blade and Shaft Seals: Blade seal shall be a PTFE encapsulated O-ring. Non – PTFE seals or bladder-type seals or elastomers of any type molded into or affixed to the body are not acceptable. Shaft seal shall be a Viton Quad-ring. All seals shall be easily replaced by maintenance personnel. Shaft seals must be housed in an FRP packing gland. PVC compressing couplings utilized as shaft seals will not be acceptable. F. Operator: Epoxy coated worm gear operator on all units, hand levers are not acceptable. G. Fasteners: 316 Stainless Steel H. Flanges: Thickness, OD and Drilling to match Duct Flanges. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA FIBERGLASS-REINFORCED PLASTIC DUCTS WOODARD & CURRAN 23 31 17-7 I. Damper shall be manufactured in accordance with ASME RTP-1, ASTM 3982 and NBS PS 1569 standards. Allowable visual defects shall not exceed ASME RTP-1 visual inspection acceptance criteria. J. All Dampers shall be tested for leakage by the manufacturer or an outside independent testing agency. One unit shall be randomly selected for testing by an independent inspector and tested to confirm complete shut-off to 20” W.C. In addition to a leakage test, the manufacturer shall furnish pressure drop test information on the model being supplied. Pressure drop tests shall be furnished as part of the submittal, leakage tests shall be furnished prior to shipment of the units. 2.05 BALANCING DAMPERS A. Furnish and install where indicated on the Drawings, FRP balancing dampers. Dampers shall be fabricated from materials similar to associated ductwork. B. Rating Conditions 1. Velocity through Damper 6,000 FPM. 2. Pressure Rating 30-inches water column 3. Maximum Allowable Leakage: 1% of total airflow C. Materials 1. Bearings: Graphite filled Teflon 2. Blade : FRP Reinforced with a Corrosion Barrier on all Exposed surfaces 3. Body: FRP, vinyl ester resin with a 100-mil internal corrosion barrier 4. Shaft: FRP D. Resin System: All internal surfaces shall including blade shall have a BPO/DMA cure system to increase the corrosion resistance of surfaces exposed to chemical attack. E. Shaft Seals: Shaft seals should be a viton o-ring housed in an FRP packing gland. F. Operator: Stainless hand lever operator with locking positions. G. Fasteners: 316 Stainless Steel H. Flanges: Thickness, OD and Drilling to match Duct Flanges. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA FIBERGLASS-REINFORCED PLASTIC DUCTS WOODARD & CURRAN 23 31 17-8 I. Damper shall be manufactured in accordance with ASME RTP-1, ASTM 3982 and NBS PS 1569 standards. Allowable visual defects shall not exceed table two for in ASME RTP-1 2.06 DUCT HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. All duct supports, interior and exterior, shall meet the requirements of the Section 40 05 15 Process Pipe Supports, except that hangers and supports for fiberglass duct shall be located as follows: Duct Inside Diameter (inches) Maximum Span (feet) 3 – 18 10 20 – 24 15 30 – 36 20 B. Duct supports located on the exterior of the building shall be designed to include the weight of the duct and to withstand all applicable combinations of wind and seismic loading in accordance with the Massachusetts Building Code. Exterior supports shall be of the "saddle type" support as per the standard detail shown on the Drawings. Contractor shall be required to confirm support requirements and locations with the Engineer prior to construction. C. Contractor shall be responsible for the design of additional supports and for the overall stability of the entire support system. Support and hanger details and a detailed layout showing the location of all duct supports and hangers shall be submitted in the shop drawings. Contractor shall provide support manufacturer with ductwork OD dimension prior to manufacturing the supports. 2.07 FINISHES A. All fabricated steel, aluminum, PVC and cast iron shall be prepared and painted in accordance with Section 09 90 00. Touch-up paint shall be provided as specified to restore integrity of coating system that may be damaged during construction. All paint system components for the entire project shall be the product of a single manufacturer as required by Section 09 90 00 unless otherwise noted on the Drawings or approved by the Engineer. B. All ductwork shall have a resin-rich inner surface, an interior corrosion barrier, an interior structural layer and an exterior corrosion layer and UV resistant coating. 1. Inner surface: Nominal 10 mils thick composed of a single ply of the C glass surfacing veil embedded in a resin-rich surface. Resin content shall be 90%. 2. Interior layer: Nominal 90 mils thick composed of at least two layers of chopped strand mat. Resin content shall be 75%. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA FIBERGLASS-REINFORCED PLASTIC DUCTS WOODARD & CURRAN 23 31 17-9 3. Structural layer: Type E glass to meet minimum wall thickness as specified. The total wall thickness includes the inner surface. a. Contact molded structural layer shall include alternate layers of chopped strand mat and woven roving. b. Filament wound structural layer shall be preceded by a layer of chopped strand mat or spray chop. The structural layer shall consist of a minimum of two complete cross hatched layers of continuous filaments applied in a helix angle of 55 degrees for above-ground ductwork and 75 deg. for any buried ductwork. 4. Exterior corrosion layer: Single A or C Veil shall be applied to all duct exterior without exception. 5. Exterior UV resistant coating: Factory applied paraffiniated gel coat with UV inhibitors. Pigmentation shall be determined by the ENGINEER. C. All items that will remain unpainted shall receive a heavy application of rust resistant coating prior to installation. D. Stainless steel components will remain unpainted and uncoated. E. Labels and Colors: A pipe label and color schedule will be provided during construction. F. Pipes shall be labeled on two sides at 6' intervals. A flow direction arrow shall follow each label and be of the same color. Request color and label requirements from Engineer prior to painting and labeling. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Fabricate and erect all ductwork where shown on the Drawings, as specified herein, and in accordance with all applicable standards. B. All FRP pipes shall be installed in a neat and workmanlike manner, properly aligned, and cut from measurements taken at the site to avoid interferences with structural members, architectural features, openings, and equipment. Exposed pipes shall afford maximum headroom and access to equipment, and where necessary, all piping shall be installed with sufficient slopes for venting or drainage of liquids and condensate to low points. All installations shall be acceptable to the Engineer. Contractor shall obtain training by the pipe manufacturer’s field representative in the correct installation and support of all FRP piping. Instruction shall be a minimum of one 8-hour day. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA FIBERGLASS-REINFORCED PLASTIC DUCTS WOODARD & CURRAN 23 31 17-10 C. All ductwork shall be firmly supported with hangers and supports in accordance with Section 40 05 15 Process Pipe Supports. Where necessary to avoid stress on equipment or structural members, the pipes shall be anchored or harnessed. Expansion joints and guides shall compensate for duct expansion due to temperature differences. D. During installation, temporarily close the open ends of ducts to prevent debris and dirt from entering. E. Ducts carrying moist air that pass through areas that could cause condensation shall be pitched to facilitate condensate removal. Low points of such ducts shall be provided with drains. 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. B. Prior to installation, each duct length and all fittings shall be carefully inspected, flushed clean of any debris or dust, and straightened, if not true. All duct and fittings shall be equally cleaned before assembly. C. Prior to joining, butt and wrap joint ends shall be ground smooth. All dust and debris must be fully removed. Ends shall be resin-coated to prevent corrosion, in pipe 24” diameter and above an interior corrosion wrap is required. The joint should be of equal strength as the pipe. A butt and wrap sequence and thickness chart should be shown on the fabrication drawings. The laminate sequence for each size duct should be supported by a separate section in the design calculations. D. Odor control ductwork testing, adjusting, and balancing shall comply with Section 25 05 93 Testing, Adjusting and Balancing for HVAC. 3.03 STARTUP & COMMISSIONING A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. B. Prior to enclosure or buying, all piping systems shall be pressure tested at 1-1/2 times the maximum working pressure. The Contractor shall furnish all test equipment, labor, materials, and devices at no additional cost to Owner. 1. Leakage may be determined by loss of pressure, soap solution, chemical indicator, or other positive and accurate method. All fixtures, devices, or other accessories which are to be connected to the lines and which would be damaged if subjected to the test pressure shall be disconnected and ends of the branch lines plugged or capped as required during the testing procedures. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA FIBERGLASS-REINFORCED PLASTIC DUCTS WOODARD & CURRAN 23 31 17-11 2. Leaks shall be repaired to the satisfaction of the Engineer and the system shall be re-tested until no leaks are found. END OF SECTION This page left intentionally blank 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA FILED SUB-BID - HVAC HVAC FANS WOODARD & CURRAN 23 34 00-1 SECTION 23 34 00 HVAC FANS (FILED SUB-BID REQUIRED) PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Provide fans as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 23 05 00: Common Work Results for HVAC B. Division 26: Electrical 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. NEMA Compliance: Motors and electrical accessories shall comply with NEMA standards. B. Electrical Component Standard: Components and installation shall comply with NFPA 70 “National Electrical Code.” 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit the following: 1. Complete materials list of all items to be provided, including Supplier and estimated delivery schedule. 2. Submit Shop Drawings for all products and materials in accordance with Division 01 requirements. 3. Submit catalog cuts, complete parts listing showing materials of construction with applicable ANSI, ASTM, AMCA, or other Standards, manufacturer’s Specifications and product data to demonstrate compliance with requirements. 4. Submit details of construction including extent of shop assembly of unit and manufacturer’s recommended installation procedures. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA FILED SUB-BID - HVAC HVAC FANS WOODARD & CURRAN 23 34 00-2 5. Within 30 days of receipt of approved Shop Drawings, submit for review operation and maintenance manuals in accordance with Division 01 requirements. In addition to requirements specified in Division 01, operation and maintenance manuals shall also include detail drawing/schematic of the propeller fan being provided, complete parts list including part numbers, list of recommended spare parts, maintenance and lubrication schedules, motor horsepower/efficiency and nameplate information. 1.05 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Lift and support units with the manufacturer’s designated lifting or supporting points. B. Disassemble and reassemble units as required for movement into the final location following manufacturer’s written instructions. C. Deliver fan units as a factory assembled unit to the extent allowable by shipping limitations, with protective crating and covering. 1.06 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Coordinate the installation of roof and wall penetrations and other associated Work with the Work of other trades. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Loren Cook 2. Greenheck Fan Corp. 3. PennBarry 4. Or approved equal 2.02 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Requirements: The following factory tests are required: 1. Sound Power Level Ratings: Comply with AMCA Standard 301 “Method for Calculating Fan Sound Ratings From Laboratory Test Data.” Test fans in accordance with AMCA Standard 300 “Test Code for Sound Rating.” Fans shall bear the AMCA Certified Sound Ratings Seal. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA FILED SUB-BID - HVAC HVAC FANS WOODARD & CURRAN 23 34 00-3 2. Fan Performance Ratings: Establish flow rate, pressure, power, air density, speed of rotation, and efficiency shall be factory tested and ratings in accordance with AMCA Standard 210/ASHRAE Standard 51— Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Rating. 2.03 SUPPLY FAN SF-1 A. Description: Fan shall be an aluminum, roof mounted, belt drive, centrifugal supply fan. B. Certifications: Fan shall be manufactured at an ISO 9001 certified facility. Fan shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories (UL 705). Fan shall bear the AMCA certified ratings seal for sound and air performance. C. Construction: The fan shall be of bolted and welded construction utilizing corrosion resistant fasteners. The spun aluminum structural components shall be constructed of minimum 16 gauge marine alloy aluminum, bolted to a rigid aluminum support structure. The aluminum base shall have continuously welded curb cap corners for maximum leak protection. The discharge baffle shall have a rolled bead for added strength. A two piece top cap shall have stainless steel quick release latches to provide access into the motor compartment without the use of tools. An integral conduit chase shall be provided through the curb cap and into the motor compartment to facilitate wiring connections. The motor, bearings and drives shall be mounted on a minimum 14 gauge steel power assembly, isolated from the unit structure with rubber vibration isolators. These components shall be enclosed in a weather-tight compartment, separated from the exhaust airstream. Lifting lugs shall be provided to help prevent damage from improper lifting. Unit shall bear an engraved aluminum nameplate. Nameplate shall indicate design CFM, static pressure, and maximum fan RPM. Unit shall be shipped in ISTA certified transit tested packaging. D. Wheel: Wheel shall be centrifugal backward inclined, constructed of 100 percent aluminum, including a precision machined cast aluminum hub. Wheel inlet shall overlap an aerodynamic aluminum inlet cone to provide maximum performance and efficiency. Wheel shall be balanced in accordance with AMCA Standard 204-05, Balance Quality and Vibration Levels for Fans. E. Motor: Motor shall be NEMA design B with class B insulation rated for continuous duty and furnished at the specified voltage, phase and enclosure. F. Bearings: Bearings shall be designed and individually tested specifically for use in air handling applications. Construction shall be heavy duty re-greasable ball type in a cast iron pillow block housing selected for a minimum L50 life in excess of 200,000 hours at maximum cataloged operating speed. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA FILED SUB-BID - HVAC HVAC FANS WOODARD & CURRAN 23 34 00-4 G. Belts & Drives: Belts shall be oil and heat resistant, non-static type. Drives shall be precision machined cast iron type keyed and securely attached to the wheel and motor shafts. Drives shall be sized for 150 percent of the installed motor horsepower. The variable pitch motor drive must be factory set to the specified fan RPM. 2.04 MOTORS A. Motor Sizes: Minimum sizes and electrical characteristics as indicated on the Drawings. If not indicated, large enough so that the driven load will not require the motor to operate in the service factor range. B. Service Factor: 1.15 for polyphase motors and 1.35 for single phase motors. C. Motor Construction: NEMA Standard MG 1, severe chemical duty, Design B. Provide permanent split capacitor classification motors for shaft mounted fans and capacitor start classification for belted fans. Motors shall be permanently lubricated, heavy duty type, carefully matched to the fan load and furnished at the specified RPM, voltage, phase, and enclosure. 1. Enclosure Type: The following features are required: Totally Enclosed Fan Cooled (TEFC) chemical severe duty, explosion proof. 2. Insulation: Temperature NEMA Class B. 3. Overload protection: Built in, automatic reset, thermal overload protection. 4. Efficiency: Energy efficient motors shall have a minimum efficiency as scheduled in accordance with IEEE Standard 112, Test Method B. If efficiency not specified, motors shall have a higher efficiency than “average standard industry motors” in accordance with IEEE Standard 112, Test Method B. 5. Nameplate: Indicate the full identification of manufacturer, ratings, characteristics, construction, and special features. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install fans level and plumb, in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions. Support units as described below, using the vibration control devices indicated. 3.02 ADJUSTING, CLEANING, AND PROTECTING A. Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA FILED SUB-BID - HVAC HVAC FANS WOODARD & CURRAN 23 34 00-5 B. Clean unit cabinet interiors to remove foreign material and construction dirt and dust. Vacuum clean fan wheel and cabinet. 3.03 COMMISSIONING A. Final Checks Before Start Up: Perform the following operations and checks before start up: 1. Remove shipping blocking and bracing. 2. Verify unit is secure on mountings and supporting devices and those connections for piping, ductwork, and electrical are complete. Verify proper thermal overload protection is installed in motors, starters, and disconnects. 3. Perform cleaning and adjusting specified in this Section. 4. Lubricate bearings, pulleys, belts, and other moving parts with factory recommended lubricants as required. B. Starting procedures for fans: 1. Energize motor, verify proper operation of motor, drive system, and fan wheel. Adjust fan to indicated RPM. 2. Measure and record motor electrical values for voltage and amperage. Confirm that the readings meet the manufacturer’s Specifications. Submit test results to the Owner and Engineer. 3. Test fan for proper operation when connected to the space thermostat. END OF SECTION This page intentionally left blank 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA FILED SUB-BID - HVAC DECENTRALIZED HVAC EQUIPMENT WOODARD & CURRAN 23 80 00-1 SECTION 23 80 00 DECENTRALIZED HVAC EQUIPMENT (FILED SUB-BID REQUIRED) PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Provide room air conditioner (AC-1) and mini-split system (AC-2 & CU-1) as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 23 05 00: Common Work Results for HVAC B. Section 23 05 29 Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment C. Section 23 05 93 Testing Adjusting and Balancing for HVAC D. Division 26: Electrical 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. NEMA Compliance: Motors and electrical accessories shall comply with NEMA standards. B. Electrical Component Standard: Components and installation shall comply with NFPA 70 “National Electrical Code.” C. Air-conditioning, Heating, and Refrigeration Institute’s (AHRI) D. The units shall be tested by a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) and shall bear the ETL label. E. All wiring shall be in accordance with the National Electrical Code (N.E.C.). F. The units shall be rated in accordance with Air-conditioning, Heating, and Refrigeration Institute’s (AHRI) Standard 240 and bear the AHRI Certification label. G. The units shall be manufactured in a facility registered to ISO 9001 and ISO 14001, which is a set of standards applying to environmental protection set by the International Standard Organization (ISO). H. A dry air holding charge shall be provided in the indoor section. I. System efficiency shall meet or exceed 14.5 SEER when part of a 1:1 (indoor/outdoor) system. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA FILED SUB-BID - HVAC DECENTRALIZED HVAC EQUIPMENT WOODARD & CURRAN 23 80 00-2 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit the following: 1. Complete materials list of all items to be provided, including Supplier and estimated delivery schedule. 2. Submit Shop Drawings for all products and materials in accordance with Division 01 requirements. 3. Submit catalog cuts, complete parts listing showing materials of construction with applicable ANSI, ASTM, AMCA, or other Standards, manufacturer’s Specifications and product data to demonstrate compliance with requirements. 4. Submit details of construction including extent of shop assembly of unit and manufacturer’s recommended installation procedures. 5. Within 30 days of receipt of approved Shop Drawings, submit for review operation and maintenance manuals in accordance with Division 01 requirements. In addition to requirements specified in Division 01, operation and maintenance manuals shall also include detail drawing/schematic of the propeller fan being provided, complete parts list including part numbers, list of recommended spare parts, maintenance and lubrication schedules, motor horsepower/efficiency and nameplate information. 1.05 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Lift and support units with the manufacturer’s designated lifting or supporting points. B. Disassemble and reassemble units as required for movement into the final location following manufacturer’s written instructions. C. Deliver fan units as a factory assembled unit to the extent allowable by shipping limitations, with protective crating and covering. 1.06 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Coordinate the installation of roof and wall penetrations and other associated Work with the Work of other trades. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA FILED SUB-BID - HVAC DECENTRALIZED HVAC EQUIPMENT WOODARD & CURRAN 23 80 00-3 PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 MINI SPLIT AC-2 AND CU-1 A. Indoor Unit (Wall Mounted Style) 1. General: a. The indoor unit shall be factory assembled, wired and run tested. Contained within the unit shall be all factory wiring, piping, control circuit board, fan and fan motor. The unit shall have a self- diagnostic function, 3-minute time delay mechanism, and an auto restart function. Indoor unit shall be charged with dry air before shipment from factory. 2. Unit Cabinet: a. The casing shall have a white finish – Munsell 1.0Y 9.2/0.2. b. Multi directional drain connection and refrigerant piping, offering three (3) direction pipe alignments for all refrigerant piping and two (2) direction pipe alignments for condensate draining shall be standard. c. There shall be a separate, metal back-plate that secures the indoor unit firmly to the wall. The back plate shall be securely attached to the wall. 3. Fan: a. The indoor unit fan shall be an assembly with a line-flow fan direct driven by a single motor. b. The fan shall be statically and dynamically balanced and be powered by a motor with permanently lubricated bearing. c. A manual adjustable guide vane shall be provided with the ability to change the airflow from side to side (left to right). d. Units having capacity greater than 18,000 BTU/h shall have a “Wide Vane” feature to distribute airflow over a wide – 150° angle from right to left to provide comfort over a wider area. e. An integral, motorized, multi-position, horizontal air sweep flow louver shall provide for uniform air distribution, up and down. f. The indoor fan shall operate at of three (3) selectable speeds: High, Medium and Low. 4. Filter: a. Return air shall be filtered by means of easily removed, washable, Antioxidant Pre-filter and an Anti-allergy enzyme filter – blue, pleated type. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA FILED SUB-BID - HVAC DECENTRALIZED HVAC EQUIPMENT WOODARD & CURRAN 23 80 00-4 5. Coil: a. The indoor unit coil shall be of nonferrous construction with smooth plate fins on copper tubing. b. The tubing shall have inner groves for high efficiency heat exchange. c. All tube joints shall be brazed with phoscopper or silver alloy. d. The coils shall be pressure tested at the factory. e. A sloped, corrosion resistant condensate pan with drain shall be provided under the coil. 6. Electrical: a. The unit electrical power shall be 208-230 volts, 1-phase, 60 hertz. b. The system shall be equipped with A-Control – a system directing that the indoor unit be powered directly from the outdoor unit using a 3-wire connection plus ground. c. The outdoor unit shall be equipped with Pulse Amplitude Modulation (PAM) compressor motor control for maximum efficiency. 7. Control a. General: 1) The unit shall have a wireless controller to perform input functions necessary to operate the system. 2) The wireless controller shall have a Power On/Off switch, Mode Selector – Cool, Dry, Heat, Auto Modes - Temperature Setting, Timer Control, Fan Speed Select and Auto Vane selector. 3) The indoor unit shall perform Self-diagnostic Function and Check Mode switching. 4) Temperature changes shall be by 1ºF increments with a range of 59 - 89ºF. 5) The microprocessor located in the indoor unit shall have the capability of sensing return air temperature and indoor coil temperature, receiving and processing commands from the wireless or a wired controller, providing emergency operation and controlling the outdoor unit. 6) The indoor units shall be capable of working with single- zone or multi-zone outdoor units 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA FILED SUB-BID - HVAC DECENTRALIZED HVAC EQUIPMENT WOODARD & CURRAN 23 80 00-5 7) The system shall be capable of automatically restarting and operating at the previously selected conditions when the power is restored after power interruption. 8) Control system shall control the continued operation of the air sweep louvers, as well as provide On/Off, System/Mode function. 9) The indoor unit shall have the option of a field installed, multi-function, hard-wired, wall mounted remote controller. Controller shall be a PAR-21MAA Deluxe MA type remote controller 10) Hard-wired, wall mounted remote controller shall require a MAC-397IF-E MA Series Terminal Interface for communications. Interface will be mounted at the indoor unit. B. Outdoor Units 1. General: a. Provide an outdoor condensing unit as shown on the drawings. The outdoor units are specifically designed to work with the MSZ indoor units. The outdoor units must have a thermally fused powder coated finish. The outdoor unit shall be completely factory assembled, piped and wired. Each unit shall be run tested at the factory. 2. Unit Cabinet: a. The casing shall be fabricated of galvanized steel, bonderized, finished with an electrostatically applied, thermally fused acrylic or polyester powder coating for corrosion protection. 3. Fan: a. The unit shall be furnished with a direct drive propeller type fan. b. The outdoor unit fan motor shall be a direct current (DC) motor and have permanently lubricated bearings. c. The fan motor shall be mounted for quiet operation. d. The fan shall be provided with a raised guard to prevent contact with moving parts. e. The outdoor unit shall have horizontal discharge airflow. 4. Coil: 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA FILED SUB-BID - HVAC DECENTRALIZED HVAC EQUIPMENT WOODARD & CURRAN 23 80 00-6 a. The outdoor unit coil shall be of nonferrous construction with lanced or corrugated plate fins on copper tubing. b. The coil shall be protected with an integral metal guard. c. Refrigerant flow from the outdoor unit shall be regulated by means of an electronically controlled, precision, linear expansion valve. 5. Compressor: a. The compressor motor shall be direct current (DC). b. The compressor shall be of a high performance hermetic; inverter driven, variable speed, rotary type. c. The outdoor unit shall have an accumulator. d. The compressor will be equipped with an internal thermal overload. e. The outdoor unit must have the ability to operate over the full range with a maximum height difference of 40 feet and have refrigerant tubing length of 65 feet for capacities up to 18,000 BTU/h and a maximum height difference of 50 feet and have refrigerant tubing length of 100 feet for capacities above 18,000 BTU/h between indoor and outdoor units. f. There shall be no need for line size changes, traps shall not be used, and no additional refrigerant oil shall be required. g. The compressor shall be mounted so as to avoid the transmission of vibration. 6. Refrigeration piping a. Provide standard commercial type K copper refrigeration lines of a size as specified in the manufacturer’s installation manual. Insulate the lines with a minimum of 1” of closed foam insulation equal to Armaflex. Submit for approval per Section 01 13 00. 7. Electrical: a. The unit electrical power shall be 208/230 volts, 1-phase, 60 hertz. b. The unit shall be capable of satisfactory operation within voltage limits of 198 volts to 253 volts. c. The outdoor unit shall be controlled by the microprocessor located in the indoor unit and outdoor unit. 8. Manufacturers a. Mitsubishi “Mr. Slim” is the basis of design b. Sanyo c. Friedrich 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA FILED SUB-BID - HVAC DECENTRALIZED HVAC EQUIPMENT WOODARD & CURRAN 23 80 00-7 d. Or approved equal 2.02 ROOM AIR CONDITIONER AC-1 A. General 1. Provide a room air conditioner mounted in a wall sleeve as shown on the drawings and as specified herein. B. Features 1. Unit shall install in a thru-wall sleeve and operate from 115 volt single phase service. 2. Capacity as shown on the drawings. 3. Unit shall have Auto air sweep, 2 speed fan, 4 way air flow and auto restart on power interruption. 4. Provide washable, antimicrobial air filter. C. Manufacturers 1. Friedrich is the basis of design 2. LG 3. Fedders 4. Or approved equivalent PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions. 3.02 ADJUSTING, CLEANING, AND PROTECTING A. Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation. B. Clean unit cabinet interiors to remove foreign material and construction dirt and dust. Vacuum clean fan wheel and cabinet. 3.03 COMMISSIONING A. Final Checks Before Start Up: Perform the following operations and checks before start up: 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA FILED SUB-BID - HVAC DECENTRALIZED HVAC EQUIPMENT WOODARD & CURRAN 23 80 00-8 1. Remove shipping blocking and bracing. 2. Verify unit is secure on mountings and supporting devices and those connections for piping, ductwork, and electrical are complete. Verify proper thermal overload protection is installed in motors, starters, and disconnects. 3. Perform cleaning and adjusting specified in this Section. 4. Lubricate bearings, pulleys, belts, and other moving parts with factory recommended lubricants as required. B. Starting procedures for 1. Energize motor, verify proper operation of motor, and both indoor and outdoor units. 2. Test unit for proper operation in accordance with manufacturer’s installation instructions. END OF SECTION 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA FILED SUB-BID - HVAC UNIT HEATERS WOODARD & CURRAN 23 82 39-1 SECTION 23 82 39 UNIT HEATERS (FILED SUB-BID REQUIRED) PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Provide Electric Unit Heaters as specified below and as shown on the drawings. B. Unit heater is provided by the HVAC sub-contractor and wired by the Electrical sub-contractor. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 23 05 00 Basic Mechanical Requirements B. Section 23 05 15 Mechanical Identification C. Section 23 05 29 Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping D. Division 26 Electrical 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Products shall conform to applicable specifications of Factory Mutual (FM) or UL. B. Products shall be tested and listed by one of the above agencies. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 ELECTRIC UNIT HEATERS A. Provide electric unit heaters as shown on the Drawings. Performance shall be as indicated on the equipment Schedule. Units shall be listed by UL Std. No. 1995 “Heating and Cooling Equipment.” Units shall be Severe or Dirty duty design and pass the ASTM B117 salt spray test. B. Casing shall be Industrial grade, corrosion resistant construction fabricated from powder coated 14-gauge galvanized steel. The adjustable louvers shall have minimum opening safety stops. Casing shall be suitable for high chloride environment and Heresite coated. Casing shall have adjustable louvers. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA FILED SUB-BID - HVAC UNIT HEATERS WOODARD & CURRAN 23 82 39-2 C. Fan Motor Assembly – Unit Heater shall have an explosion-proof motor fitted with an aluminum fan blade. Fan Blade shall be Heresite coated. The motor shall have double- shielded, permanently lubricated ball bearings and automatic reset line breaking thermal overload protection. Motors furnished shall operate at line voltage and pre-wired to the control enclosure so separate field wiring to the motor is not required. The assembly shall be Heresite coated. The standard motor shall be rated for Class I, Groups C and D, Class II, Groups F and G. The minimum operating temperature is -14°F (-25°C) and the minimum storage temperature is -49°F (-45°C). D. Heat Exchanger – Unit Heater shall have a liquid-to-air design with an all welded steel header and finned tube construction with spiral wound aluminum fins. Industrial grade heating elements immersed in a nontoxic, inhibited, propylene glycol heat transfer fluid that provides freeze protection down to -49°F (-45°C). The heat exchanger shall be hydrostatically tested at 350 psig. A pressure relief valve provides excess pressure protection and is set at 70 psig. The heat exchanger shall be Heresite coated. E. Controls – Unit shall be furnished with factory mounted on the unit heater. Standard built- in controls shall include automatic and manual reset over- temperature cutouts, controlling magnetic contactor, and 24-volt control circuit transformer housed in a NEMA 7, 9 cast aluminum enclosure. F. Manufacturers – The Unit Heaters shall be as manufactured by: 1. Indeeco – the basis of design 2. Modine 3. Reznor 4. Or approved equal PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Examine areas and conditions under which the unit heaters are to be installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to the Engineer. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install Unit Heaters where indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's published installation instructions, complying with recognized industry practices to ensure that the Unit Heaters comply with requirements and serve the intended purposes. B. Install electric unit heaters in accordance with NFPA 90A and NFPA 90B. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA FILED SUB-BID - HVAC UNIT HEATERS WOODARD & CURRAN 23 82 39-3 C. Provide access space around Unit Heaters for service as indicated, but in no case less than that recommended by the manufacturer and as shown in the manufacturer’s installation manual. D. Electrical power wiring of Unit Heaters shall be by the Electrical Subcontractor. Install power wiring in conduit in accordance with Division 26 requirements. Wire shall be of a size and type the meets or exceeds the NEC or as shown on the drawings. Minimum wire size shall be #12 AWG. E. Install electrical devices furnished by the manufacturer but not specified to be factory-mounted. F. Electrical wiring installation shall be in accordance with manufacturer's submittal and installation requirements of applicable Division 26 sections. G. Provide wiring, accessories, and supports, as indicated for a complete and functional installation. 3.03 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Start-Up - Start-up in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Cleaning - Clean factory-finished surfaces. Repair any marred or scratched surfaces with manufacturer's touch-up paint. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Verify operation of each electric unit heater by measuring input voltage and current simultaneously for period of ten minutes of continuous operation. B. Start and verify proper operation of each unit heater in accordance with the manufacturer’s installation manual C. Provide Manufacturer’s written warranty of a minimum of 1 year on materials and workmanship. Submit warranty to the Owner. END OF SECTION This page left intentionally blank 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA FILED SUB-BID - HVAC LOUVERS AND VENTS WOODARD & CURRAN 23 90 00-1 SECTION 23 90 00 LOUVERS AND VENTS (FILED SUB-BID REQUIRED) PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Fixed metal wall louvers. 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. Louver Terminology: Refer to AMCA Publication 501-85 for definitions of terms for metal louvers not otherwise defined in this section or referenced standards. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product data for each product indicated per General Requirements Division 01. B. Shop drawings of louver units and accessories. Include plans, elevations, sections, and details showing profiles, angles, spacing of louver blades; unit dimensions related to wall openings and construction; free areas for each size indicated; and profiles of frames at jambs, heads and sills. 1. Where installed products are indicated to comply with certain structural design loadings, include structural computations, material properties, and other information needed for structural analysis which has been prepared by, or under the supervision of, a qualified professional engineer. C. Product test reports evidencing compliance of units with performance requirements indicated. D. Product certificates signed by louver manufacturers certifying that their products which comply with Project requirements are licensed to bear AMCA Seal based on tests made in accordance with AMCA Standard 500 and complying with AMCA Certified Ratings Program. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer's Qualifications - Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of air outlets and inlets of types and capacities required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years. B. Codes and Standards 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA FILED SUB-BID - HVAC LOUVERS AND VENTS WOODARD & CURRAN 23 90 00-2 1. ARI Compliance - Test and rate air outlets and inlets in accordance with ARI 650 "Standard for Air Outlets and Inlets". 2. ASHRAE Compliance - Test and rate air outlets and inlets in accordance with ASHRAE 70 "Method of Testing for Rating the Air Flow Performance of Outlets and Inlets". 3. ADC Compliance - Test and rate air outlets and inlets in certified laboratories under requirements of ADC 1062 "Certification, Rating and Test Manual". 4. ADC Seal - Provide air outlets and inlets bearing ADC Certified Rating Seal. 5. AMCA Compliance - Test and rate louvers in accordance with AMCA 500 "Test Method for Louvers, Dampers and Shutters". 6. AMCA Seal - Provide louvers bearing AMCA Certified Rating Seal. 7. NDPA Compliance - Install air outlets and inlets in accordance with NFPA 90A "Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems". 8. SMACNA Standard: Comply with SMACNA “Architectural Sheet Metal Manual” recommendations for fabrication, construction details, and installation procedures. 9. UL and NEMA Compliance: Provide motors and related components for motor-operated adjustable louvers which are listed and labeled by UL and comply with applicable NEMA standards. 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Check actual louver openings by accurate field measurements before fabrication; show recorded measurements on final shop drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delay of the Work. 1. Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, guarantee opening dimensions and proceed with fabrication of louvers and vents without field measurements. Coordinate wall construction to ensure that actual opening. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA FILED SUB-BID - HVAC LOUVERS AND VENTS WOODARD & CURRAN 23 90 00-3 PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 RAIN RESISTANT STATIONARY LOUVERS A. General - Except as otherwise indicated, provide manufacturer’s standard rain resistant stationary louvers where shown; of size, shape, capacity and type indicated; constructed of materials and components as indicated. B. Performance - Provide louvers that have minimum free area, and maximum pressure drop of each type as listed in manufacturer’s current data, complying with louver schedule. C. Substrate Compatibility – Provide louvers with frame and sill styles that are compatible with adjacent substrate and that are specifically manufactured to fit into construction openings with accurate fit and adequate support, for weatherproof installation. D. Louvers shall possess stationary horizontal blades designed to prevent the penetration of wind driven rain. Louver blades shall be contained within a 7- inch frame. Extended sill shall be provided to capture and drain water to exterior of building. Louver components (heads, jambs, sill and blades) shall be factory assembled by the louver manufacturer. Louver sizes too large for shipping shall be built up by the contractor from factory assembled louver sections to provide overall sizes required. Louver design shall limit span between visible mullions to 5 ft. and shall withstand a wind load of 20 lbs. per sq. ft. (equivalent of a 90 mph wind). E. Louvers shall be extruded 6063T5 aluminum alloy construction as follows: F. Frame: 0.125-inch wall thickness, caulking surfaces provided. G. Blades: 0.125-inch wall thickness, installed vertically on approximately 1-inch centers. H. Extended Sill: 0.125-inch wall thickness, with upturned side panels to prevent water leakage. I. Screen: 5/8-inch by 0.040-inch square mesh aluminum bird screen in removable frame. J. Finish: Before paint application, louvers shall be thoroughly cleaned and pretreated. Cleaning includes complete submersion in alkali cleaner, detergent deoxidization, amorphous chrome phosphate conversion coating and acidulated final rinse. Kynar 500® or Hylar 5000® finish shall be applied to provide 1.2 mils (30µm) factory applied, baked-on film build in accordance with AAMA 2605-02* “Voluntary Specification Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for Superior Performing Organic Coatings on Architectural Extrusions and Panels”. Color shall be submitted for approval. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA FILED SUB-BID - HVAC LOUVERS AND VENTS WOODARD & CURRAN 23 90 00-4 K. Manufacturer –Ruskin Mfg. Co. is the basis for design. Or an approved equal of one of the following companies: 1. Construction Specialties, Inc. 2. Louvers & Dampers, Inc. 3. Or approved equal PART 3 – EXECUTION A. Coordinate louver location and size with building manufacturer. B. Locate and place louver plumb, level, and in proper alignment with adjacent work. C. Use concealed anchorages where possible. Provide brass or lead washers fitted to screws where required to protect metal surfaces and to make a weathertight connection. D. Form closely fitted joints with exposed connections accurately located and secured. E. Provide perimeter reveals and openings of uniform width for sealants and joint fillers, as indicated. F. Repair finishes damaged by cutting, welding, soldering, and grinding operations require for fitting and jointing. Restore finishes so there is no evidence of corrective work. Return items which cannot be refinished in field to the shop, make required alterations and refinish entire unit, or provide new units. G. Protect galvanized and nonferrous metal surfaces from corrosion or galvanic action by application of a heavy coating of bituminous paint on surfaces which will be in contact with concrete, masonry, or dissimilar metals. H. Install concealed gaskets, flashings, joint fillers, and insulation, as louver installation progresses where required to make louver joints weathertight. Comply with Division 7 Section “Joint Sealers” for sealants applied during installation of louver. 3.02 ADJUSTING AND PROTECTING A. Protect louvers and vents from damage of any kind during construction period including use of temporary protective coverings where needed and approved by louver manufacturer. Remove protective covering at time of Substantial Completion. B. Restore louvers and vents damaged during installation and construction period, so that no evidence remains of correction work. If results of restoration are 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA FILED SUB-BID - HVAC LOUVERS AND VENTS WOODARD & CURRAN 23 90 00-5 unsuccessful, as judged by the Owner, remove damaged units and replace with new units. 1. Clean and touch-up minor abrasions in finishes with air-dried coating that matches color and gloss of, and is compatible with, factory-applied finish coating. 3.03 CLEANING A. Periodically clean exposed surfaces of louvers and vents, which are not protected by temporary covering, to remove fingerprints and soil during construction period; do not let soil accumulate until final cleaning. B. Before final inspection, clean exposed surfaces with water and with a mild soap or detergent not harmful to finishes. Rinse thoroughly and dry surface. END OF SECTION This page intentionally left blank 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL WOODARD & CURRAN 26 05 00-1 SECTION 26 05 00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL (FILED SUB-BID REQUIRED) PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes 1. Provide the labor, tools, equipment, and materials necessary to furnish and install all electrical work as specified herein and in accordance with the Drawings and applicable reference standards listed in Article 1.03. 2. In general, electrical Work shall include but not be limited to the following: a. All motor wiring, safety disconnects, and motor starters unless integral with equipment b. Power distribution equipment c. Power outlets and equipment connections d. Wiring devices e. Motor controls not provide by other divisions f. Control wiring not provided by other divisions g. Complete grounding system h. Service Entrance work i. Lighting – Building interior and exterior j. Lightning Protection System – Headworks Building and Gravity Thickners. k. All support material and hardware for raceway and electrical equipment l. Branch circuit wiring m. Underground electrical construction n. Installation, termination & labeling of all cable and signal wiring for instrumentation and process control equipment. o. Building wall, floor and roof penetrations for raceways p. Start up, acceptance testing test reports and instruction of systems operation to the Owner 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL WOODARD & CURRAN 26 05 00-2 1.02 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Measurement and payment requirements: per Division 01 General Requirements. 1.03 REFERENCES A. Reference Standards 1. Electrical equipment, materials, installation and workmanship shall comply with all state and local building codes, safety and fire law Regulations at the location of the Work and shall conform to the latest edition of the applicable codes and standards of the organizations listed: a. National Electrical Code (NEC) b. Underwriters' Laboratories (UL) c. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE C2) d. American National Standards Institute, Inc. (ANSI) e. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) f. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) g. Insulated Power Cable Engineers Association (IPCEA) h. Association of Edison Illuminating Companies (AEIC) i. Occupational Safety Health Act (OSHA) j. Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) 2. Where the Contract requires the Work or any part of the same, to be above the standards required by applicable Laws, ordinances, rules and Regulations and other statutory provisions pertaining to the Work, such Work shall be performed and completed in accordance with the Contract requirements. 3. Should any changes in the Specifications and Drawings be necessary to conform to the requirements of any of the above mentioned codes or standards, the Contractor shall so notify the Owner’s Representative. B. Prepare any detailed diagrams or Drawings which may be required by the governing authorities. C. Permits, Certificates, Inspections and Fees: 1. The Contractor shall obtain and make payments for all permits, licenses, and certificates that are required for the associated Work. 2. Following completion of the Work, the Contractor shall obtain certificates of approval from the responsible agencies concerned with the Work. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL WOODARD & CURRAN 26 05 00-3 3. Arrange for timely inspections required for Work under this section. 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination, Sequencing, and Scheduling: per Division 01 General Requirements. B. The electrical work shall be coordinated with the Work of other trades to prevent interferences and so that the progress in construction of the building will in no way be retarded. C. Coordinate with all local utility companies and make all installations for their services in accordance with all utility company requirements. D. Where lighting fixtures and other electrical items are shown in conflict with locations of structural members and mechanical or other equipment, furnish and install all required supports and wiring to clear the encroachment for a complete installation. E. Any Work installed contrary to or without acceptance by the Engineer shall be subject to change as directed by the Engineer, and no extra compensation will be allowed to the Contractor for making these changes. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. B. Furnish manufacturer's product data, test reports, and materials certifications as required. C. Shop Drawings shall be submitted to the General Contractor who shall review and approve them prior to submittal to the Engineer for approval. Shop Drawings shall identify the specific equipment and material being supplied; the quantity being supplied; and all accessories, dimensions, descriptions, mounting and connection details, wiring diagrams, elementary control diagrams, equipment interface diagrams and any other information necessary to determine compliance with the Plans and Specifications. Fabrication and installation shall be in accordance with the approved Shop Drawings. D. As-built copies of all Shop Drawings shall be submitted to the Engineer. E. Submit copies of reports, permits, and easements necessary for installation, use, and operation. F. Submit copies of reports of tests, inspections, and meter readings as specified. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL WOODARD & CURRAN 26 05 00-4 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. 1.08 SITE CONDITIONS A. Existing Conditions: per Division 01 General Requirements. 1.09 WARRANTY A. Compile and assemble the warranties specified in Division 26 into a separate set of vinyl covered three ring binders, tabulated and indexed for easy reference. B. Provide complete warranty information for each item. Information to include: 1. Product or equipment list 2. Date of beginning of warranty or bond 3. Duration of warranty or bond 4. Names, addresses, and telephone numbers and procedures for filing a claim and obtaining warranty services 1.10 DRAWINGS A. The Specifications supplement the Drawings and provide information pertaining to the methods and materials to be used in the execution of the Work. When a discrepancy occurs between the two, the stricter of the two shall govern. B. All electrical equipment such as junction and pull boxes, panelboards, switches, controls and such other apparatus as may require maintenance and operation from time to time shall be made easily accessible and properly labeled. C. The Contractor shall examine all Contracts and reference Drawings, and verify and properly coordinate the placement of outlets. Contractor shall also check all Drawings including mechanical Drawings and Shop Drawings for apparatus for which he must rough-in and to which he must connect. 1.11 RECORD DRAWINGS A. The Contractor shall maintain a complete and separate set of prints of Drawings and Specifications at job Site for duration of the Contract. The Contractor shall record Work completed and all changes from original Contract. Drawings shall clearly and accurately include Work installed as a modification or as an addition to the original design. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL WOODARD & CURRAN 26 05 00-5 B. At completion of Work and prior to final request for payment, the Contractor shall submit a complete set of reproducible Record Drawings showing all systems as actually installed. 1.12 JOB CONDITIONS A. Existing Conditions 1. Existing Utilities: Locate existing underground utilities in excavation areas. If utilities are indicated to remain, support and protect services during excavation operations. 2. Prior to all Work of this section, carefully inspect the installed Work of all other trades and verify that all such Work is complete to the point where this installation may properly commence. 3. Verify that the electrical installation may be made in complete accordance with all pertinent codes and Regulations and the original design. B. Coordination: 1. Coordinate the installation of electrical items with the schedules for Work of other trades to prevent unnecessary delays in the total Work. 2. Coordinate with all local utility companies and make all installations for their services in accordance with all utility company requirements if required. 3. Any changes shall be done at the Contractor’s expense. 4. Where lighting fixtures and other electrical items are shown in conflict with locations of structural members and mechanical or other equipment, furnish and install all required supports and wiring to clear the encroachment for a complete installation. 5. Any Work installed contrary to or without acceptance by the Engineer shall be subject to change as directed by the Engineer, and no extra compensation will be allowed to the Contractor for making these changes. C. Accuracy of Data: 1. The Drawings are diagrammatic and functional only, and are not intended to show exact circuit layouts, number of fittings, components and place in satisfactory operational power, lighting, and other electrical systems shown. Install additional circuits, components and material wherever needed to conform to the specific requirements of the equipment whether or not indicated or specified. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL WOODARD & CURRAN 26 05 00-6 2. Information and components called for in the Specification but not shown on Plans or vise versa shall apply and shall be provided as though required expressly by both. 3. The locations of equipment, fixtures, outlets and similar devices shown on the Drawings are approximate only. Field measurements shall take precedence over scaled dimensions from Drawings. Exact locations shall be as accepted by Engineer during construction. Obtain in the field all information relevant to the placing of electrical work and, in case of any interference with other Work, proceed as directed by the Engineer and furnish all labor and materials necessary to complete the Work in an acceptable manner. 4. The Drawings and the Specifications are intended to comply with all pertinent codes, Regulations and standards. In the event of discrepancy, the Contractor shall immediately notify the Engineer in writing of said discrepancies and apply for an interpretation and, unless an interpretation is offered in writing by the Engineer prior to the execution of the Contract, the applicable rules and Regulations shall be complied with as a part of the Contract. 5. In case of difference between building codes, Specifications, state Laws, industry standards and the Contract Documents, the most stringent shall govern. Should the Contractor perform any Work that does not comply with the requirements of the applicable building codes, state Laws, and industry standards, he shall bear all cost arising in correcting these deficiencies. 6. Verify size and ratings of motors and other electrically operated devices supplied by others. 7. Check with Engineer before installation of Work for outlets not specified as to location or for Work that interferes with other trades. 1.13 FLASHING, CUTTING, FIREPROOFING AND WATERPROOFING A. Flashing around all electrical items penetrating roof or exterior walls shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. B. All cutting of surfaces, including core drilling of walls and slabs, shall be done by the Contractor. C. Patching shall be done by the Contractor. D. The Contractor shall fireproof, waterproof and seal all openings in slabs and walls. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL WOODARD & CURRAN 26 05 00-7 1.14 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Use all means necessary to protect electrical system materials before, during and after installation and to protect the installed Work and materials of all other trades. B. In the event of damage, immediately make all repairs and replacements necessary to the acceptance of the Engineer and at no additional cost to the Owner. If any apparatus has been subject to possible injury by water, it shall be thoroughly dried out and put through such special tests as directed by the Engineer, at the cost and expense of the Contractor, or shall be replaced by the Contractor at his own expense. C. Protect the Work of other trades. Restore any damage caused to other trades to the condition existing prior to damage at no additional cost to the Owner. D. Investigate each space in the building through which equipment must pass to reach its final location. If necessary, the manufacture shall be required to ship his material in sections sized to permit passing through such restricted areas in the building. 1.15 WORK PERFORMANCE A. Electrical work shall be accomplished with all affected circuits or equipment de- energized. When an electrical outage cannot be accomplished in this manner for the required Work, the following requirements are mandatory: 1. Electricians must use full protective equipment (i.e., certified and tested insulating material to cover exposed energized electrical components, certified and tested insulated tools, etc.) while working on energized systems in accordance with NFPA 70E. 2. Electricians must wear personal protective equipment while working on energized systems in accordance with NFPA 70E. 3. Before initiating any Work, a job specific Work plan must be developed by the Contractor and the Owner. The Work plan must include procedures to be used on and near the live electrical equipment, barriers to be installed, and safety equipment to be used and exit pathways. 4. Work on energized circuits or equipment cannot begin until prior written approval is obtained from the Owner. 1.16 DEFINITIONS 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL WOODARD & CURRAN 26 05 00-8 A. As used in this Specification, “provide” means “furnish and install”, “furnish” means “to purchase and deliver to the Project Site complete with every necessary appurtenance and support and to store in a secure area in accordance with manufacturers instructions”, and “install” means “to unload at the delivery point at the Site or retrieve from storage, move to point of installation and perform every operation necessary to establish secure mounting and correct operation at the proper location in the Project”. B. Finished Areas: In general, areas with carpet or tile floors, lay-in or fixed ceiling tile, special architectural ceiling treatment, or tiled, plastered, or paneled walls shall be considered finished areas. C. Interior: For the purposes of this Specification, interior is any area within the boundaries of the foundation of any building within the superstructure or other structures not classified as a building. 1.17 TEMPORARY POWER A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. The Contractor shall furnish, install, maintain, and remove the temporary electrical power and lighting systems, including lamps, and pay for all labor, materials, and equipment required therefore. All such temporary electrical work shall meet the requirements of the National Electrical Code, the local utility company, and OSHA. B. The Contractor shall make all necessary arrangements with the local utility company as to where the temporary electric service can be obtained. C. The Contractor shall secure and pay for all required permits and back charges for Work performed by others, and other expenses incidental to the installation of the temporary electric service. 1.18 POSTED OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS: A. Provide for each system and principal item of equipment as specified in the technical sections for use by operation and maintenance personnel. The operating instructions shall include the following: 1. Wiring diagrams, control diagrams, and control sequence for each principal system and item of equipment. 2. Start up, proper adjustment, operating, lubrication, and shutdown procedures. 3. Safety precautions. 4. The procedure in the event of equipment failure. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL WOODARD & CURRAN 26 05 00-9 5. Other items of instruction as recommended by the manufacturer of each system or item of equipment. B. Print or engrave operating instructions and frame under glass or in approved laminated plastic. Post instructions where directed. For operating instructions exposed to the weather, provide weather-resistant materials or weatherproof enclosures. Operating instructions shall not fade when exposed to sunlight and shall be secured to prevent easy removal or peeling. 1.19 MANUFACTURER’S NAMEPLATE A. Each item of equipment shall have a nameplate bearing the manufacturer's name, address, model number, and serial number securely affixed in a conspicuous place; the nameplate of the distributing agent will not be acceptable. Furnish four (4) additional spare nameplates for each piece of equipment in accordance with Section 01 60 00. 1.20 FIELD FABRICATED NAMEPLATES A. Provide laminated plastic nameplates for each equipment enclosure, relay, switch, and device; as specified in the technical sections or as indicated on the Drawings. Each nameplate inscription shall identify the name of the equipment, function and, when applicable, the position. Nameplates shall be melamine plastic, 0.125 inch thick, black with white letters. Surface shall be matte finish. Corners shall be square. Accurately align lettering and engrave into the core. Minimum size of nameplates shall be one by 2.5 inches. Lettering shall be a minimum of 0.25 inch high normal block style. All electrical equipment shall be labeled with the following: 1. Panel Name 2. Fed from “Panel Name” & “CKT #” 3. Amps 4. Volts 5. Phase 1.21 ARC FLASH LABEL A. Provide arc flash labels for all electrical equipment with operating voltages greater than 50 volt per NEC 110.16. 1.22 WARNING SIGNS A. Exterior warning and caution signs shall be weather resistant, nonfading, preprinted cellulose acetate butyrate signs with 20 gauge, galvanized steel backing, with colors, legend, and size appropriate to the location. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL WOODARD & CURRAN 26 05 00-10 B. Interior warning and caution signs shall be aluminum signs with preprinted baked enamel finish and punched for fasteners. Colors, legend, and size appropriate to location. 1.23 WIRE AND CABLE MARKERS A. Underground line marking tape shall be permanent, bright colored, continuous printed, metal backed, plastic tape compounded for direct burial service not less than 6 inches wide. Printed legend indicative of general type of underground line below. B. Wire labels for wires smaller than No. 4. shall be vinyl or vinyl cloth, self adhesive, wraparound, wire markers with preprinted numbers and letters. Wire sizes No. 4 and larger and multi conductor cables shall be marked with one-piece, nylon locking marker ties equal to Panduit PLM Series. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Materials and equipment shall be listed by UL unless it can be demonstrated that no UL standards exist for a specific item or class of equipment. B. All other materials, not specifically described but required for a complete and operable electrical installation, shall be new, first quality of their respective kinds, Specification grade or better, and as selected by the Contractor subject to the acceptance by the Engineer. C. All materials and equipment furnished and installed on this Project shall meet the most stringent efficiency standards of the local utility to qualify for the maximum rebate. 2.02 MATERIAL AND CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS A. Unless otherwise shown or specified, all enclosures, motors, wiring and other materials and all construction methods shall conform to the following: 1. Indoor, Above Ground, Dry Areas - NEMA 12, General Purpose, with gasketing for applications where atmospheric conditions are normal. Enclosures shall be sheet steel, treated to resist corrosion, prime painted and finished with a gray baked-on enamel. Control stations shall have NEMA 13, oil tight and dust-tight enclosures. 2. Outdoors, Moist Areas and Indoor Below Grade Areas - NEMA 4, watertight. Enclosures shall be cast aluminum or stainless steel. Where indicated on electrical Plans provide NEMA 4X enclosures of stainless steel or reinforced non-metallic (Krydon) construction. All installations shall utilize only stainless steel fasteners/hardware. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL WOODARD & CURRAN 26 05 00-11 3. Indoor-Outdoor, Subject to Submersion in Liquid - NEMA 6, submersible, liquid tight construction. Enclosures shall be cast aluminum. 4. Hazardous Areas - NEMA 7 & 9, explosion-proof construction for Class 1, Division 1, Group D areas. Enclosures shall be cast aluminum. 5. Corrosive Atmospheres - All Work located in corrosive atmospheres, such as atmospheres in the filter area and the chemical feed pump areas shall be of such construction that the corrosive agent cannot enter into and damage the electrical work. All materials in these areas shall be non-corrodible or finished with an inert coating. NEMA 4X Stainless steel, or reinforced PVC electrical enclosures and PVC coated rigid conduit and fittings are required. In addition, provide gas tight seals in all conduits passing from or into corrosive areas (similar to Crouse Hinds Type EYS), to minimize migration of corrosive fumes to other building areas. 2.03 INTERCHANGEABILITY A. In all design and purchasing, interchangeability of items of equipment, subassemblies, parts, motors, starters, relays and other items is essential. All similar items shall be of the same manufacturer, type, model and dimensions. B. For ease of maintenance and parts replacement, to the maximum extent possible, use equipment of a single manufacturer. C. The Engineer reserves the right to reject any submittal which contains equipment from various manufacturers if suitable materials can be secured from fewer manufacturers and to require that source of materials be unified to the maximum extent possible. 2.04 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 COORDINATION A. Prior to all Work of this section, carefully inspect the installed Work of all other trades and verify that all such Work is complete to the point where this installation may properly commence. B. Field verify all locations and dimensions to ensure that the equipment will be properly located, readily accessible, and installed in accordance with all pertinent codes and Regulations, the Contract Documents, and the referenced standards. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL WOODARD & CURRAN 26 05 00-12 C. The Work shall be carefully laid out in advance, and where cutting, drilling, etc., of floors, walls, ceilings, or other surfaces is necessary for the proper installation, this Work shall be carefully done, and any damage to building, piping, or equipment shall be repaired by skilled mechanics of the trades involved at no additional cost to the Owner. D. In the event any discrepancies are discovered, immediately notify the Owner’s Representative in writing. Do not proceed with installation in areas of discrepancy until all such discrepancies have been fully resolved. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install all equipment and fixtures in complete accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations and all pertinent codes and Regulations. B. Thoroughly inspect all items of equipment and any items dented, scratched, or otherwise damaged in any manner shall be replaced or repaired and painted to match original finish. All items so repaired and refinished shall be brought to the attention of the Engineer for inspection and acceptance. C. Coordinate the installation of required supporting devices and sleeves to be set in poured-in-place concrete or supported from or on other structural components, as they are constructed. D. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installations of electrical materials and equipment for efficient flow of the Work. Give particular attention to large equipment requiring positioning prior to closing in the building and equipment which must be placed in service before further construction can take place. E. Where mounting heights are not detailed or dimensioned, install systems, materials, and equipment to provide the maximum headroom possible. F. The final routing of raceways shall be determined by structural conditions, interferences with other trades and by terminal locations on apparatus. The Engineer reserves the right of a reasonable amount of shifting at no extra cost up until time of roughing in the Work. G. Where circuits are shown as “home-runs” all necessary fittings and boxes shall be provided for a complete raceway installation. H. In general, wiring and raceway systems for security alarm, fire alarm, telephone and intercommunications systems are not indicated on the Drawings but shall be furnished and installed under this section. I. Each lighting and each receptacle circuit shall have its own neutral, dedicated to that circuit. A common neutral for more than one signal phase circuit is not allowed. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL WOODARD & CURRAN 26 05 00-13 J. Surface mounted panel boxed, junction boxes, conduits, etc., shall be supported by spacers to provide a clearance between wall and equipment. K. Upon completion of all installation, lamping, and testing, thoroughly inspect all exposed portions of the electrical installation and completely remove all exposed labels, soils, markings and foreign material. 3.03 MARKING AND LABELING A. All panelboards, indoor transformers, cabinets, control panels and other specified equipment shall be labeled with engraved laminated plastic plates with engraved letters. Punch tapes with mastic backings are not acceptable. B. All starters, disconnect switches and other specified equipment shall be marked with engraved laminated plastic plates and engraved letters. Where individual switches are circuit breakers in power or distribution panel boards do not have cardholders, they shall be marked with ½” high labels. C. All empty conduits shall have labels tied to the pull string at each end of each empty conduit, marked as to identification of each end. Junction boxes with circuits provided for future use shall be labeled with appropriate circuit designation. D. All panelboards directories shall be filled out with typewritten identification of each circuit. 3.04 WIRE AND CABLE MARKERS A. Tag control circuit conductors at both ends and at junction box splices using wire and cable markers with identification numbers as designated on equipment wiring diagrams. Provide typed listing to identify conductors by number and use. B. Identify spare conductors, individually, at both ends and at junction box splices with number between 1 and 999. Do not duplicate numbers. C. Identify wire numbers on terminal block marking strips. D. Provide permanent plastic name tag indicating load for each feeder for all junction boxes, handholes and manholes. Label all process motor wires to yard equipment in handholes and manholes. 3.05 TEST & SETTINGS A. Provide the services of an independent Testing Agency to perform the specified tests outlined in their respective specification sections. B. Provide the services of a recognized independent testing agency to perform Commissioning of Electrical Systems as specified in 26 08 00 – Commissioning of Electrical Systems. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL WOODARD & CURRAN 26 05 00-14 C. Provide necessary material, equipment, labor and technical supervision to perform and complete the Electrical Acceptance Tests as required. D. Acceptance tests as herein specified are defined as those tests and inspections required to determine that the equipment involved is acceptable as delivered to the job Site, that the equipment may be energized for final operational tests and is in accordance with the Specifications. E. Final acceptance of the equipment and/or workmanship will depend upon performance characteristics as determined by the subject tests, in addition to complete operation tests, on all electrical equipment to show that it will perform the functions for which it was designed. F. If the test and inspection data submitted should indicate deficiencies in the operation of the electrical apparatus or in the manufacturer thereof, the Contractor shall promptly implement the necessary adjustments, corrections, modifications and/or replacements necessary to be made to meet the specified requirements. G. Upon completion of the remedial Work, the Testing Agency shall repeat all of the tests on components previously found deficient on the first test or any additional test if they be required. It shall be the responsibility and obligation of the Contractor to have all remedial Work accomplished as may be required by second and/or additional tests. 3.06 CLEANING A. When all Work is complete and has been tested and accepted by the Owner’s Representative, the Contractor shall clean all light fixtures, equipment, and exposed surfaces that have been directly affected by this Work. The Contractor, insofar as the Work is concerned, shall at all times keep the premises in a neat and orderly condition and at the completion of the Work shall properly clean up and remove from the Site any excess materials. 3.07 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. 3.08 STARTUP & COMMISSIONING A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. 3.09 CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. END OF SECTION 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES WOODARD & CURRAN 26 05 19-1 SECTION 26 05 19 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES (FILED SUB-BID REQUIRED) PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes 1. Provide the labor, tools, equipment, and materials necessary to install wires, cables, and connectors in accordance with the Plans and in accordance with this section and applicable reference standards listed in Article 1.03. 2. This section includes wires, cables, and connectors for power, lighting, signal, control, and related systems rated 600 volts and less. B. Related Requirements 1. Section 26 05 00 Common Work Results for Electrical 1.02 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Measurement and payment requirements: per Division 01 General Requirements. 1.03 REFERENCES A. Reference Standards 1. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 70 2. National Electrical Code (NEC) 3. Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc. (UL) Compliance a. UL Standard 83 Thermoplastic Insulated Wires and Cables b. UL Standard 486A Wire Connectors and Soldering Lugs for Use with Copper Conductors c. UL Standard 854 Service Entrance Cable 4. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) Compliance a. WC 5 Thermoplastic Insulated Wire and Cable for the Transmission and Distribution of Electrical Energy 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES WOODARD & CURRAN 26 05 19-2 b. WC 7 Cross-Linked Thermosetting Polyethylene Insulated Wire and Cable for the Transmission and Distribution of Electrical Energy c. WC 8 Ethylene Propylene Rubber Insulated Wire and Cable for the Transmission and Distribution of Electrical Energy 5. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE) Compliance a. Standard 82 Test Procedure for Impulse Voltage Tests on Insulated Conductors 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination, Sequencing, and Scheduling: per Division 01 General Requirements. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. B. Product data 1. Product data for electrical wires, cables, and connectors 2. Product data for Megger insulation testing instrument 3. Report sheets for Megger testing C. Manufacturer Reports 1. Furnish manufacturer's product data, test reports, and materials certifications as required 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. B. Deliver wire and cable properly packaged in factory fabricated type containers, or wound on NEMA specified type wire and cable reels. C. Store wire and cable in clean dry space in original containers. Protect products from weather, damaging fumes, construction debris, and traffic. 1.08 SITE CONDITIONS A. Existing Conditions: per Division 01 General Requirements. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES WOODARD & CURRAN 26 05 19-3 PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. General 1. Provide factory-fabricated wires of sizes, ampacity ratings, and materials for applications and services indicated. Where not indicated, provide proper wire selection as determined by Installer to comply with Project's installation requirements, NEC and NEMA standards. 2. Provide color-coding for phase identification as specified herein. 3. Provide factory applied nylon or polyvinyl chloride (PVC) external jackets on wires and cables for pulls in raceways over 100 feet in length, for pulls in raceways with more than three equivalent 90 degree bends, for pulls in conduits underground or under slabs on grade, and where indicated. B. Service & Distribution Wiring 1. 98 percent conductivity copper 2. 600 volt insulation, type XHHW 3. U.L. listed for underground use in wet locations at 75 degrees C 4. Use XHHW for #4 and larger and THHN/THWN or XHHW for #6 and smaller C. Building Wiring 1. 98 percent conductivity copper 2. 600 volt insulation, type, THWN/THHN, or XHHW 3. Stranded conductor: 14 AWG and larger 4. Minimum branch circuit: 12 AWG 5. Minimum 10 AWG for 120-volt circuits more than 100 feet long 6. Minimum 10 AWG for 277-volt circuits more than 230 feet long D. Control Wiring 1. Control wiring for digital/discrete signal wiring, shall be 600V, minimum 14 AWG, THHN/THWN, copper stranded, unless specifically indicated otherwise. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES WOODARD & CURRAN 26 05 19-4 E. Variable Frequency Drive (VFD) Cable 1. VFD load-side power cable shall be shielded type specifically listed for use with Variable Frequency Drives. 2. VFD cable shall be UL listed with 600V black XLPE insulation. 3. Cable shall be equipped with 100 percent foil shield. 4. Cables shall be stranded type with number and sizes of conductors as indicated on the Drawings. 5. Cable shall be equal to Belden Series 295XX, or Engineer approved equal. F. Splices 1. No. 10 and smaller with 600-volt pressure type insulated connector of wire-nut type, or equal; soldered and crimped type not allowed. Ideal type wire nut Buchanan type B-Cap and Minnesota Mining (3M) type Scotchiok. 2. No. 8 and larger with solderless lugs or solderless connectors of lock-tite or similar type properly taped with plastic insulating tape, Minnesota Mining Co. #33, or equal, then two half-lap servings of friction tape, Manson, or equal. 3. Wire connector systems for use with underground conductors shall be UL listed specifically for such use 4. Service entrance conductors shall be installed without splices. Electrical equipment feeders shall be spliced only where shown or specifically approved. Control and metering conductors shall be installed without splices. 5. All splices shall be made only by specific permission of the Engineer and then only in manholes or pull boxes and shall be sealed watertight with a heat-shrunk insulation. 6. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals in accordance with manufacturer’s published torque tightening values. Where manufacture’s torqueing requirements are not indicated, tighten connectors and terminals to comply with tightening torques specified in UL Standards 486A and 486B. 7. Use UL listed splice for all underground wires, ducts buried, in conduit and in ducts. Connectors and splices shall be waterproof. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES WOODARD & CURRAN 26 05 19-5 2.02 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 WIRE AND CABLE INSTALLATION A. All wire and cables shall be installed in conduit of size and type indicated on the Drawings and Specifications. B. Install electrical cables, wires, and connectors in compliance with NEC. C. Pull conductors simultaneously where more than one is being installed in same raceway. Use UL listed pulling compound or lubricant, where necessary. D. Use pulling means including, fish tape, cable, rope, and basket weave wire/cable grips, which will not damage cables or raceways. Do not use rope hitches for pulling attachment to wire or cable. E. Conceal all cable in finished spaces. F. Install exposed cable parallel and perpendicular to surfaces or exposed structural members, and follow surface contours, where possible. G. Conductors shall be sized such that voltage drop does not exceed 3 percent for branch circuits or 5 percent for feeder/branch circuit combination. H. Provide adequate length of conductors within electrical enclosures and train the conductors to terminal points with no excess. Bundle multiple conductors, with conductors larger than 10 AWG cabled in individual circuits. Make terminations so there is no bare conductor at the terminal. I. All feeder and branch circuit wiring shall be color coded at all termination and splice locations. System neutrals shall be designated in addition to phase conductors. Equipment grounds shall be green. J. The number of conductors shown on the Drawings is not necessarily the correct number required. As many conductors as are required in each case shall be installed. In general, grounding conductors are not scheduled. K. In general, wiring for the following systems shall be installed in separate conduits. Do not mix categories in a single raceway. 1. 120 volt power wiring 2. 120 volt control wiring, including, digital input and output signals 3. 24 volt DC control wiring, including, digital input and output signals 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES WOODARD & CURRAN 26 05 19-6 4. 24 volt DC analog control wiring (4-20mA) 5. Communications wiring 6. Special & Emergency Systems L. Conductors 600 volts and below shall be color coded in accordance with the following: CONDUCTOR 120 / 208 COLOR 480 / 277 COLOR Phase A Black Brown Phase B Red Orange Phase C Blue Yellow Neutral White White / Gray Equipment Grounds Green Green 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. B. The Contractor shall test each electrical circuit after permanent cables are in place with terminators installed, but before cable or wire is connected to equipment or devices to demonstrate that each circuit is free from improper grounds and short circuits. C. The Contractor shall Megger Test the insulation resistance between phases and from each phase to ground for each of the following feeder and motor branch circuits: 1. Power Distribution Equipment 2. Transformers 3. Variable Frequency Drives 4. Motors D. The Megger Testing shall be witnessed by the Engineer. The Engineer shall be notified at least 48 hours in advance of testing. E. Measure the insulation resistance with a digital Megger insulation testing instrument in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations. All test instruments are to be provided by the Contractor. F. If any insulation resistance measures less than 50 megohms, the cable shall be considered faulty with the cable failing the insulation test. In moist environments, bag the ends of the cable to prevent a faulty Megger test. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES WOODARD & CURRAN 26 05 19-7 G. Any cable which fails the insulation tests or which fails when tested under full load conditions shall be replaced with new cable for the full length and retested at no additional cost to Owner. H. The below grade service or feeder splice shall be water immersion Megger tested in the presence of the Engineer. Each splice shall be immersed in a grounded water immersion bath for 24 continuous hours prior to and during the test. Criteria for failure shall be as described for cable above. 3.03 STARTUP & COMMISSIONING A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. 3.04 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. END OF SECTION This page intentionally left blank 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA CONTROL-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CABLES WOODARD & CURRAN 26 05 23-1 SECTION 26 05 23 CONTROL-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CABLES (FILED SUB-BID REQUIRED) PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes 1. Provide all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals as shown, specified and required to furnish and install instrumentation cable in accordance with this Section and applicable reference standards listed in Article 1.03. 1.02 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Measurement and payment requirements: per Division 01 General Requirements. 1.03 REFERENCES A. Reference Standards 1. National Electrical Code (NEC) B. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. Provide all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals as shown, specified and required to furnish and install wiring devices. C. Section 26 05 00 Common Work Results for Electrical. D. Section 26 05 26 Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems. E. Section 26 05 33 Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems. 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination, Sequencing, and Scheduling: per Division 01 General Requirements. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. B. Shop Drawings: Submit for approval manufacturer's technical information for shielded instrumentation cable proposed for use. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA CONTROL-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CABLES WOODARD & CURRAN 26 05 23-2 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. 1.08 SITE CONDITIONS A. Existing Conditions: per Division 01 General Requirements. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: B. Instrumentation Cable 1. Okonite Company 2. Belden Company 3. Dekoron Wire and Cable Company 4. or equal C. Cable Terminations 1. T&B Sta-Kon 2. Burndy Insulug 3. or equal 2.02 MATERIALS A. Single Shielded Pair Instrument Cable: Tinned copper, stranded conductors, 18 AWG minimum, twisted with aluminum polyester shield, stranded tinned 20 AWG copper drain wire and overall chrome vinyl jacket. Rated for 300 volts minimum. B. Multi-paired Shielded Instrument Cable: Tinned copper, 7 strand XLPE insulated conductors, 18 AWG minimum, twisted in pairs with aluminum Mylar shield over each pair, silicone rubber fiberglass fire barrier tape, tinned copper drain wire, aluminum Mylar overall shield, Hypalon outer jacket. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA CONTROL-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CABLES WOODARD & CURRAN 26 05 23-3 C. Multi-conductor Shielded Instrument Cable: Tinned copper, stranded conductors, 18 AWG minimum, with overall aluminum-polyester shield with 85 percent tinned copper braid shield and overall Teflon jacket. D. Communications Cable: 4-pair UTP Category 6 enhanced cable. E. Cable Terminals: Fork type copper compression terminals with nylon insulation for termination of cable at all terminal blocks. 2.03 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install in conformance with the National Electrical Code (NEC). Install all cable complete with proper terminations at both ends. B. Install in conduit separate from power cables unless otherwise noted. All shielded instrumentation and communications cable shall be installed in ferrous metal, steel conduit throughout the entire run of conduit from end to end. C. Ground shield on shielded cables at one end only and as recommended by instrument manufacturer. D. Install and terminate vendor furnished cable in accordance with vendor equipment requirements and cable manufacturer's specific recommendations. 3.02 TESTING A. Test shielded instrumentation cable shields with an ohmmeter for continuity along the full length of the cable and for shield continuity to ground. B. Connect shielded instrumentation cables to a calibrated 3 20-milliamp DC signal transmitter and receiver. Test at 4, 12, and 20 milliamp transmitter settings. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. 3.04 STARTUP & COMMISSIONING A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA CONTROL-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CABLES WOODARD & CURRAN 26 05 23-4 3.05 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. END OF SECTION 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS WOODARD & CURRAN 26 05 26-1 SECTION 26 05 26 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS (FILED SUB-BID REQUIRED) PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Provide all labor, tools, equipment, materials and appurtenances necessary to furnish and install grounding materials in accordance with the Drawings and as specified herein. This section includes solid grounding of electrical systems and equipment. 1.02 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Measurement and payment requirements: per Division 01 General Requirements. 1.03 REFERENCES A. The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only. Unless otherwise noted, the most recent version of the listed publications, including revisions, at time of bid opening shall apply. B. NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE (NEC), as applicable to electrical grounding and bonding, Art. 250. C. UNDERWRITERS' LABORATORIES, INC. (UL) 1. UL 467 Electrical Grounding and Bonding Equipment D. INSTITUTE OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONIC ENGINEERS (IEEE) IEEE 81 AND 142 1. 1-1983 IEEE Guide for Measuring Earth Resistivity, Ground Impedance, and Earth Surface Potentials of a Grounded System (Part 1) 2. 141-1993 IEEE Recommended Practice for Electric Power Distribution for Industrial Plants 3. 142-1991 IEEE Recommended Practice for Grounding of Industrial and Commercial Power Systems 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS WOODARD & CURRAN 26 05 26-2 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination, Sequencing, and Scheduling: per Division 01 General Requirements. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. B. All submittals shall have pertinent numerical data and information specified in the "English" language using "English" units. The submittals shall include but are not limited to the following in addition to Division 01 General Requirements. C. Product Data 1. Provide product data for all grounding equipment and appurtenances, including but not limited to; wires, connectors, lugs, clamps, ground rods, bonding jumpers and accessories. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. 1.08 SITE CONDITIONS A. Existing Conditions: per Division 01 General Requirements. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. Provide each electrical grounding system with assembly of materials required for complete installation including wires/cables, connectors, lugs, clamps, ground rods, bonding jumpers and accessories. B. Provide electrical grounding conductors for grounding connections matched to power supply wiring materials and sized according to NEC. C. Provide electrical connectors, lugs, clamps, boding jumpers and accessories as recommended by the respective manufacturer for the particular application, unless other indicated. D. Ground Rods: Solid copper clad, 3/4-inch diameter by 10 feet long. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS WOODARD & CURRAN 26 05 26-3 E. Insulated Conductors: Green in color. F. Ground Bus. Bare annealed copper bars of rectangular cross section, ¼-inch x 3- inch x length as required, with 98 percent conductivity, rigidly attached to structure. G. Bonding Strap Conductor/Connectors: Soft copper, 0.05 inch thick and 2-inches wide, except as indicated. H. Pressure Connectors: High conductivity plated units. I. Bolted Clamps: Heavy-duty units listed for the application. J. Exothermic Welded Connections: Provided in kit form and selected for the specific types, sizes, and combinations of conductors and other items to be connected. 2.02 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 GROUNDING & BONDING A. Ground main service entrance ground bus or lug to neutral of incoming service, to enclosure, to building steel, to ground rods/grounding ring, to rebar in concrete footing, and to main cold water pipe. Install grounding bushings or service conduits. Use exothermic style ground connections to the ground rods and building steel. B. Bond building ground ring to lightning protection system in accordance with NEC and as specified in Section 26 41 00 FACILITY LIGHTNING PROTECTION. C. Use of conduit system for ground conductor shall not be allowed. D. Provide and install 600 volt insulated bonding conductors throughout the distribution system with connection to bonding (or grounding) terminal on each panel and panel board with connections to other equipment where specifically indicated and noted. E. Bonding conductors shall be continuous where possible. Where splices are required, provide compression connectors of approved pattern. Insulate connectors to equivalent thickness of conductors. F. Provide grounding system for grounded circuit conductors of dry type transformer secondary’s in accordance with NEC. Use exothermic style ground connections to building steel. Enclose grounding conductors in schedule 40 PVC conduit. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS WOODARD & CURRAN 26 05 26-4 G. Provide equipment grounding conductors in all conduits containing power, control, or instrumentation conductors on the load side of the service equipment or on the load side of a separately derived system. H. Comply with NEC Article 250 for sizes and quantities of equipment grounding conductors, except that larger sizes indicated or shown on the Contract Documents shall take precedence. Use of metallic conduit systems for equipment grounding as recognized by the NEC shall not be permitted under this specification. I. Install grounding bushings on conduits at both primary and secondary entrances to transformers. Ground transformer enclosures to bushings. J. Install bonding jumper for flexible metal conduit unless fittings are approved for grounding or otherwise comply with NEC. 1. Size jumper to match over-current device. 2. Green insulation. 3. Connect to grounding bushing at each end. K. Ensure that entire electrical system is electrically continuous and permanently and effectively grounded, including all electrical equipment and motors. 1. Locate ground rods with a minimum of two rod length from each other and at least the same distance from any other grounding electrode. Connect ground conductors to ground rods by means of exothermic welds except at test wells and as otherwise indicated. Drive rods until tops are 24 inches below finished floor or final grade except as otherwise indicated. L. Route grounding electrode conductors along the shortest and straightest paths possible without obstructing access or placing conductors where they may be subjected to strain, impact, or damage, except as indicated. M. Ensure that grounding electrode conductor connections to interior piping, structural members, and the like are accessible for periodic inspection during the life of the structure. 3.02 BONDING FOR OTHER TRADES A. Signal raceways, water piping, heating piping and metallic air ducts shall be bonded together and to the grounding conductor with No. 8 soft drawn bare solid conductors. Connections to pipes shall be made with cast clamps of like material as the pipes to which attached, to ducting terminated in a secure manner by best practical means, bonding across any flexible or insulated connections. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS WOODARD & CURRAN 26 05 26-5 B. All bonding conductors shall be installed in a neat manner properly shaped for contour of surface involved and properly supported. At locations remote from the main service entrance panel boards, bond to the largest raceway nearby. 3.03 FIELD TESTING A. Provide the services of an independent Testing Agency to perform the specified tests for the following systems: 1. Ground resistance. The Testing Company shall perform all testing in accordance with National Electrical Testing Association (NETA) standards and procedures. All testing results shall be submitted on NETA forms and the testing data shall be certified by the respective Agency. Test results shall indicate recommended action for a sub-par test results. Results shall list recommended test values that should be obtained for new installation. A. Measure ground resistance without the soil being moistened by any means other than natural precipitation or natural drainage or seepage and without chemical treatment or other artificial means of reducing natural ground resistance. Perform tests by the three-point fall of potential method in accordance with Section 9.03 of IEEE 81. Simple moisture addition is not acceptable. B. Ground/resistance maximum values shall be as follows: 1. Equipment rated 500 kva and less: 10 ohms. 2. Equipment rated 500 kVA to 1000 Kva: 5 ohms. 3. Equipment rated over 1000 kVA: 3 ohms. 4. Unfenced substations and pad mounted equipment: 5 ohms. 5. Fence Grounds: 10 ohms. C. Where ground resistances exceed specified values, and if directed, modify the grounding system to reduce resistance values. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. 3.05 STARTUP & COMMISSIONING A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS WOODARD & CURRAN 26 05 26-6 3.06 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. END OF SECTION 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS WOODARD & CURRAN 26 05 33-1 SECTION 26 05 33 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS (FILED SUB-BID REQUIRED) PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes 1. Provide the labor, tools, equipment, and materials necessary to furnish and install raceways, boxes, and supporting devices in accordance with the Plans and applicable reference standards listed in Article 1.03. B. Types of products specified in this section include 1. Conduit, Raceways & Fittings 2. Supporting Devices 3. Boxes and Fittings C. Related Requirements 1. Section 26 05 00 Common Work Results for Electrical 1.02 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Measurement and payment requirements: per Division 01 General Requirements. 1.03 REFERENCES A. Reference Standards 1. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) Listing and Labeling. Items provided under this section shall be listed and labeled by UL 2. National Electrical Code (NEC) 3. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination, Sequencing, and Scheduling: per Division 01 General Requirements. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS WOODARD & CURRAN 26 05 33-2 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. B. Furnish manufacturer's product data, test reports, and material certifications as required. C. Product data for cabinets and enclosures. D. Shop Drawings for floor boxes and boxes, enclosures and cabinets that are to be shop fabricated (non-stock items) 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. 1.08 SITE CONDITIONS A. Existing Conditions: per Division 01 General Requirements. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 CONDUIT, RACEWAYS & FITTINGS A. Provide conduit with 3/4 inch diameter minimum, except where specifically shown smaller on the Drawings. B. Conduit, connectors, and fittings shall be approved for the installation of electrical conductors. C. Refer to Table 3.01A for approved conduit installation guidelines. 1. Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT) a. EMT shall be rigid metallic conduit of the thin wall type in straight lengths, elbows, or bends and must conform to NEMA C80.3 and the requirements of UL 797. b. Couplings and connectors shall be steel compression fittings. Where EMT enters outlet boxes, cabinets, or other enclosures, connectors must be the insulated-throat type, with a locknut. Fittings must meet the requirements of NEMA FB 1. 2. Rigid Galvanized Steel Conduit 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS WOODARD & CURRAN 26 05 33-3 a. Rigid steel conduit (RGS), including couplings, elbows, bends, and nipples, shall conform to the requirements of UL 6 and NEMA C80.1 Steel fittings shall be galvanized by the hot-dip process. b. Fittings for rigid steel conduit shall be threaded and shall conform to NEMA FB 1. c. Gaskets shall be solid for fittings sized 1-1/2 inches and less. Conduit fittings with blank covers shall have gaskets except in clean, dry areas or at the lowest point of a conduit run where drainage is required. d. Covers shall have captive screws and be accessible after the Work has been completed. 3. Rigid Aluminum Conduit a. RAC, including couplings, elbows, bends, and nipples, shall conform to the requirements of UL 6 and ANSI C80.5. b. Fittings for rigid aluminum conduit shall be threaded and shall conform to NEMA FB 1. Fittings shall be galvanized by the hot dip process, unless manufacturer dictates aluminum for specific application. c. Gaskets shall be solid for fittings sized 1-1/2 inches and less. Conduit fittings with blank covers shall have gaskets except in clean, dry areas or at the lowest point of a conduit run where drainage is required. d. Covers shall have captive screws and be accessible after the work has been completed. 4. PVC Coated Rigid Metal Conduit a. Rigid galvanized metal conduit coated with 40 mils thick polyvinylchloride coating. b. Fittings, elbows, supporting devices and accessories shall include factory applied 20 mils thick polyvinylchloride coating and be manufactured by the same as that of the conduit. c. Use tools as recommended by the manufacturer so as not to damage PVC coating. Where coating is damaged, touch-up with PVC paint in the field after installation. 5. Rigid Plastic Conduit a. PVC Schedule 40: Conduit shall be made of polyvinyl chloride compound that shall be homogeneous plastic material free from cracks, holes or foreign inclusions. Conduit shall be rated for use with 90 degree C conductors, UL Listed. Use solvent cement to 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS WOODARD & CURRAN 26 05 33-4 join conduits as manufactured the same as the conduit manufacturer. b. PVC Schedule 80: Heavy wall PVC conduit that shall be made of polyvinyl chloride compound that shall be homogeneous plastic material free from cracks, holes or foreign inclusions. Conduit shall be rated for use with 90 degree C conductors, UL Listed. Use solvent cement to join conduits as manufactured the same as the conduit manufacturer. 6. Flexible Metallic Conduit a. Flexible metallic (FM) conduit shall meet the requirements of UL1. b. Liquid tight flexible metallic conduit shall be provided with a protective jacket of PVC extruded over a flexible interlocked galvanized steel core to protect wiring against moisture, oil, chemicals, and corrosive fumes. c. Fittings for flexible metallic conduit shall meet the requirements of UL 514B, Type I box connector, electrical, Type III coupling, electrical conduit, flexible steel, or Type IV adapter, electrical conduit. 7. Wireways a. Wireways and auxiliary gutters for use in exposed, dry locations shall be a prefabricated channel-shaped sheet metal trough with hinged or removable covers, associated fittings, and supports for housing, and protecting electrical wires and cables in accordance with UL 870. b. Straight sections of trough, elbows, tees, crosses, closing plates, connectors, and hanging brackets shall be constructed from sheet steel of commercial quality not less than 16-gage. Sheet metal component parts shall be cleaned, phosphatized, and coated with a corrosion-resistant gray paint. c. Straight sections of wireways and auxiliary gutters shall be solid or have knockouts as indicated in both sides and bottom, 3 inches on center. d. Straight sections shall be not more than 5-feet long, with covers held closed with screws. 8. Conduit Seals a. Provide factory fabricated watertight conduit sealing bushing assemblies suitable for sealing around conduit, or tubing passing through concrete floors and walls. Provide a cast in place water stop wall sleeve with a mechanical pipe seal between the conduit 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS WOODARD & CURRAN 26 05 33-5 and the sleeve. Construct seals with steel sleeve, malleable iron body, neoprene sealing grommets or rings, metal pressure rings, pressure clamps, and cap screws. b. Provide E.Y.S. seal fittings with appropriate potting material where conduits enter or leave a Class 1, Division 1 or 2 environments or a Class 2, Division 1 or 2 environment, and chemical rooms. 2.02 SUPPORTING DEVICES A. Supports, support hardware, and fasteners shall be protected with zinc coating or with treatment of equivalent corrosion resistance using approved alternative treatment, finish, or inherent material characteristic. Products for use outdoors shall be hot dip galvanized unless material is inherently corrosion resistant. B. Refer to Table 2.02A for approved supporting device installation guidelines. 1. Conduit Supports a. Single run hangers: Galvanized steel conduit straps or clamps, or cast metal beam clamps. Perforated straps and spring steel clips and clamps will not be permitted. b. Group run hangers: Minimum 12-gauge galvanized performed U-channel rack with conduit fittings; 25 percent spare capacity c. Hanger rods: Threaded steel, 3/8-inch diameter, or as identified on the Drawings d. Vertical run supports: Minimum 12-gauge galvanized performed U-channel struts with conduit fittings 2. Equipment and Lighting Supports a. 12-gauge galvanized performed U-channel struts with fixture and conduit fittings, as applicable, unless indicated otherwise on the Drawings. 3. Corrosive Area Supports a. Clamp Hangers, Pipe Straps, and Clamp Back Spacers for use with PVC-coated rigid metal conduit shall have 40 mil gray PVC exterior coating. b. Clamp Hangers, Pipe Straps, etc. for use with PVC nonmetallic conduit shall be of nonmetallic PVC material. c. Hanger Rods: 20 mil gray PVC exterior coated rod with threaded ends only 3/8 inch and 1/2 inch sizes as required. d. Strut Support: 20 mil gray PVC exterior coating strut. Standard channel, slotted channel, and back to back channel are acceptable. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS WOODARD & CURRAN 26 05 33-6 e. Provide stainless steel supports and accessories in lieu of PVC coated supports when indicated in Table 2.02A below. TABLE 2.02A – Supporting Devices Location/Equipment Acceptable Support Type Electrical & Control Rooms Galvanized Steel U-Channel Utility & Mechanical Rooms Galvanized Steel U-Channel Chemical Rooms – Sludge Processing PVC Coated Strut Exterior Type 304 SS Class I, Division I & II Locations PVC Coated Strut Advanced Treatment Basement Galvanized Steel U-Channel Headworks Building PVC Coated Strut Primary Treatment Building Galvanized Steel U-Channel Gravity Thickeners PVC Coated Strut 2.03 BOXES AND FITTINGS A. Boxes must have sufficient volume to accommodate the number of conductors entering the box in accordance with the requirements of NFPA 70 and UL 514A. B. In general, boxes that are exposed to weather, process areas, normally wet locations, and locations exposed in mechanical spaces shall be cast-metal. Boxes in all other finished areas shall be sheet metal. Boxes installed in corrosive areas, such as the chemical feed room, shall be nonmetallic. C. Refer to Table 2.03A for approved enclosure types. 1. Sheet Metal Outlet Boxes a. Sheet Metal Outlet Boxes: Standard type galvanized steel, minimum four inch square or octagon by 1-1/2 inch deep. b. Luminaire and Equipment Supporting boxes: Rated for weight of equipment supported; include 2 inch male fixture studs where required. c. Single Wall Type: Minimum size, four inch square by 1-1/2 inch or 2-1/8 inch deep, except as noted. Provide dry wall device covers raised 3/4 inch minimum to insure flush finish mounting. d. Ganged Wall Type: Minimum depth three inches except as noted, ganged as required under common plate to contain devices shown. On 277-volt circuits, ganged boxes for switches shall contain only one circuit or equip box with permanent barriers per NEC Art 404-8. 2. Cast Outlet Boxes 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS WOODARD & CURRAN 26 05 33-7 a. Type FS shallow and type FD deep, cast ferroalloy b. Provide number of threaded hubs as required. c. Use in all exterior, damp and locations exposed in mechanical spaces. d. Provide gasketed cover and accessories by box manufacturer for complete weatherproofing. Provide correct box to accept weatherproof covers as specified. 3. Sheet Metal Pull & Junction Boxes a. Sheet metal boxes shall be standard type galvanized steel and must conform to UL 50. b. Box dimensions shall be minimum four inch square or octagon by 2/1/2 inch deep. c. Sizes up to 12 by 12 by 6 inches: Provide screw-type or hinged covers. d. Sizes greater than 12 by 12 by 6 inches: Provide hinged covers. e. Boxes shall be sized to accommodate all incoming raceways. 4. Nonmetallic Outlet, Device, and Wiring Boxes a. Conform to NEMA OS 2, Nonmetallic Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers, and box Supports, and UL 514C, Nonmetallic Outlet Boxes, Flush Device Boxes and Covers. Boxes shall be molded polyvinyl chloride (PVC), or fiberglass units of type, shape, size, and depth to suit location and application. b. Boxes shall be equipped with threaded screw holes for device and cover plate mounting. Each box shall have a molded cover of matching material suitable for the application and location installed. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS WOODARD & CURRAN 26 05 33-8 TABLE 2.03A – Electrical Enclosure Types Location/Equipment Acceptable Enclosure Type Electrical & Control Rooms NEMA 1 Utility & Mechanical Rooms NEMA 12 Chemical Rooms – Sludge Processing NEMA 4X – 316 Stainless Steel Exterior NEMA 4X – 316 Stainless Steel Class I, Division I & II Locations NEMA 7 (Explosion-proof) Advanced Treatment Building NEMA 4X – 316 Stainless Steel Headworks Building NEMA 7/9 (Explosion Proof) Primary Treatment Building NEMA 4X – 316 Stainless Steel 2.04 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 CONDUIT A. Uses Permitted 1. Use liquid tight flexible metal conduit for the final 24 inches of connections to motors or control items subject to movement or vibration. 2. Use RGS for all exterior aboveground installations unless otherwise noted. 3. Use PVC coated rigid steel conduit, or as scheduled below, for installation in corrosive areas, and other areas as identified on the Drawings. 4. Exposed raceways in Manufacturing Areas, Utility Rooms, Mechanical Rooms, Warehouse Areas, etc., shall be Rigid Galvanized Steel below 15 feet. 5. Conduit and raceway runs in finished areas concealed in or behind walls, above ceilings, or exposed on walls and ceilings 15 feet or more above finished floors and not subject to mechanical damage may be electrical metallic tubing (EMT). 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS WOODARD & CURRAN 26 05 33-9 6. Use Schedule 40 PVC conduit for exterior direct buried installations. Use Schedule 40 PVC conduit for exterior concrete encased installations. Use Schedule 80 PVC conduit for underground installations under driveways. The transition from underground and from concrete encasement to riser shall be PVC coated rigid steel conduit to a minimum of 12 inches above finished floor and/or finished grade elevation. All elbows shall be prefabricated Rigid Steel to prevent wire burn through. Reference specification 26 05 43 ‘Underground Ducts and Raceways for Electrical Systems’ for further requirements. 7. Install conduit seals for conduit penetrations of slabs on grade and exterior walls below grade and where indicated. Tighten sleeve seal screws until sealing grommets have expanded to form watertight seal. Provide seals for the interior of conduits that penetrate exterior or water bearing walls, consisting of gland type sealing bushings or RTV closed cell silicone foam. 8. Refer to Table 3.01A below for approved conduit types. TABLE 3.01A – Conduit Types Location/Equipment Approved Conduit Type Electrical & Control Rooms Electrical Metallic Tubing Utility & Mechanical Rooms Electrical Metallic Tubing Chemical Rooms – Sludge Processing PVC Coated Rigid Galvanized Steel Exterior Rigid Galvanized Steel Class I, Division I & II Locations PVC Coated Rigid Galvanized Steel Advanced Treatment Building Rigid Galvanized Steel Headworks Building Rigid Galvanized Steel Primary Treatment Building Rigid Galvanized Steel B. Power, lighting, control, emergency light and power, and special-service systems and all related components shall be installed in accordance with NFPA 70, and shall be enclosed in separate conduit or separate conduit systems as indicated on the Drawings and as specified herein. C. Any run of conduit between outlet and outlet, between fitting and fitting, or between outlet and fitting shall contain no more than the equivalent of three 90- degree bends, including those bends located immediately at the outlet or fitting. Field bends shall be made in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations, which normally require use of a one-size-larger bender than would be required for uncoated conduit. Installed conduit and fittings shall be free of dirt and trash and shall not be deformed or crushed. Empty conduit shall have a pull rope stalled. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS WOODARD & CURRAN 26 05 33-10 D. Conduit shall be installed with a minimum of 3 inches of free air space separation from mechanical piping. E. Conduit in finished areas shall be installed concealed. Conduit passing through masonry or concrete walls shall be installed in sleeves. Conduit shall be securely clamped and supported at least every 10 feet vertically and 8 feet horizontally. Galvanized pipe straps shall be fastened to structure with bolts, screws, and anchors. Wooden masonry plugs shall not be used. F. Install exposed conduits, parallel or perpendicular to walls, ceilings, or structural members. Do not run through structural members. Avoid horizontal runs within partitions or sidewalls. Avoid ceiling inserts, lights, or ventilation ducts or outlets. Do not run conduits across pipe shafts or ventilation duct openings and keep conduits a minimum of 6 inches from parallel runs of flues, hot water pipes, or other sources of heat. Wherever possible, install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping. G. Do not run conduits exposed on the exterior surface of buildings. Conduits penetrating exterior walls below grade, at grade floors, or below grade floors shall be sealed to prevent moisture migration. The exterior of the conduit shall be sealed with a mechanical pipe seal. The interior conduit seal shall be a gland type sealing bushing or RTV closed cell silicone foam. Ensure that conduits do not retain water against these seals. H. Raceways penetrating fire rated walls, floors, and partitions shall be sealed with a fire rated sealant. I. All conduits shall be supported with materials specifically made for this purpose. Do not use wire hangers. Do not attach any parts of the raceway system to ventilation ducts. Conduit supports shall be attached to the building. Support conduits on each side of bends and on a spacing not to exceed the following: 6 feet for conduits smaller than 1 1/4 inches and 8 feet for conduits 1 1/4 inches and larger. Support riser conduits at each floor level with clamp hangers. All underground conduits shall be securely anchored to prevent movement during placement of concrete or backfill. Use precast separators and heavy gauge wire ties or other approved fasteners. J. Provide E.Y.S. seal fittings with appropriate potting material where conduits enter or leave a Class 1, Division 1 or 2 environments or a Class 2, Division 1 or 2 environment, and chemical rooms. K. Conduit connections to boxes and fittings shall be supported not more than 36 inches from the connection point. Conduit bends shall be supported not more than 36 inches from each change in direction. Conduit shall be installed in neat symmetrical lines parallel to the centerlines of the building construction and the building outline. Multiple runs shall be parallel and grouped whenever possible on common supports. Exposed ends of conduit without conductors shall be sealed with watertight caps or plugs. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS WOODARD & CURRAN 26 05 33-11 L. Bonding wires shall be used in flexible conduit for all circuits. Flexible conduit shall not be considered a ground conductor. M. Liquid tight flexible metallic conduits shall be used in wet and oily locations and to complete the connection to motor-driven equipment. N. Electrical connections to vibration-isolated equipment shall be made with flexible metallic conduit in a manner that will not impair the function of the equipment. O. A polypropylene pull rope with a tensile strength not less than 130 pounds shall be installed in empty conduit. P. Electrical conduit may be embedded in concrete according to the provisions of Article 6.3 of ACI 318 Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete, provided the following conditions are met: 1. Outside diameter of conduit shall not exceed 1/3 of concrete thickness. Maximum conduit outside diameter shall not exceed 3 inches when embedded in slab. 2. Conduit shall not be placed closer than three diameters on center. Route conduit to minimize crossing of different conduit runs. 3. Conduit shall not be embedded in structural concrete slabs less than four inches thick. 4. A 1-1/2 inch minimum concrete cover shall be provided for conduits in structural concrete slabs. Q. Installation of Underground Conduit 1. Minimum of 3/4 inch conduit in or under concrete slab on grade. 2. Where conduits are installed in concrete slabs, on the ground, underground, or exposed to the weather, make all joints liquid tight and gas tight. 3. Bury all underground conduit, except under concrete slabs placed on fill, to a depth of at least 30 inches below finished grade unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings . 4. Slope ducts to drain away from buildings into manholes and/or handholes. Adjust final slopes to coordinate with existing Site utilities. 5. Install on undisturbed soil where possible. Concrete encase conduits as shown on Drawings. Use pit run gravel and sand, placed 8-inch lifts and compacted for backfill. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS WOODARD & CURRAN 26 05 33-12 6. Reference Specification 26 05 43 UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS for further requirements. R. Installation of Rigid Metal Conduit 1. Ends of conduit shall be cut square, reamed and threaded, and joints shall be brought butt-to-butt in the couplings. Joints shall be mechanically tight. Conduit shall be protected against damage and the entrance of water or foreign material during construction. 2. Ninety-degree bends of conduit with a diameter larger than 1 inch shall be made with factory-made elbows. Conduit elbows larger than 2 1/2 inches shall be long radius. Field-made bends and offsets shall be made with an approved hickey or conduit-bending machine. Changes in directions of runs shall be made with symmetrical bends or cast-metal fittings. 3. At connections to sheet metal enclosures and boxes, a sufficient number of threads shall project through to permit the bushing to be drawn tight against the end of the conduit, after which the locknut shall be pulled up sufficiently tight to draw the bushing into firm electrical contact with the box. Conduit shall be fastened to sheet metal boxes and cabinets with two locknuts where required by NFPA 70 where insulating bushings are used, where bushings cannot be brought into firm contact with the box, and where indicated. 4. Conduit joints shall be made with tapered threads set firmly. Each length of conduit cut in the field shall be reamed before installation. Where conduit is threaded in the field, each threaded end shall consist of at least five full threads. Corrosion-inhibitive compound (cold galvanizing paint) shall be used on all conduit threads or any locations where the original hot galvanized surface has been compromised. 5. Conduit stubbed-up through concrete floors for connections to free- standing equipment except motor-control centers, cubicles, and other such items of equipment shall be provided with a minimum of a 12 inch riser above the floor slab is of sufficient thickness; if not, a floor box shall be provided and set flush with the finished floor. Conduits installed for future use shall be terminated with a coupling and plug set flush with the floor. 3.01 SUPPORTING DEVICES A. Install supporting devices to fasten electrical components securely and permanently in accordance with NEC requirements. B. Coordinate with the building structural system and with other electrical installations. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS WOODARD & CURRAN 26 05 33-13 C. Conform to manufacturer's recommendations for selection and installation of supports. D. Install individual and multiple (trapeze) raceway hangers and riser clamps as necessary to support raceways. Provide U-bolts, clamps, attachments, and other hardware necessary for hanger assembly and for securing hanger rods and conduits. E. Support parallel runs of horizontal raceways together on trapeze type hangers. F. Support individual horizontal raceways by separate pipe hangers. Spring steel fasteners may be used in lieu of hangers only for 1 1/2 inch and smaller raceways serving lighting and receptacle branch circuits above suspended ceilings only. For hanger rods with spring steel fasteners, use 1/4 inch diameter or larger threaded steel. Use spring steel fasteners that are specifically designed for supporting single conduits or tubing. G. In vertical runs, arrange support so the load produced by the weight of the raceway and the enclosed conductors is carried entirely by the conduit supports with no weight load on raceway terminals. H. Support miscellaneous electrical components as required to produce the same structural safety factors as specified for raceway supports. Install metal channel racks for mounting cabinets, panelboards, disconnects, control enclosures, pull boxes, junction boxes, transformers, and other devices. I. Install sleeves in concrete slabs and walls and all other fire rated floors and walls for raceways and cable installations. For sleeves through fire rated wall or floor construction, apply UL listed fire-stopping sealant in gaps between sleeves and enclosed conduits and cables. 3.02 BOXES AND FITTINGS A. Pullboxes shall be furnished and installed where necessary in the conduit system to facilitate conductor installation. Conduit runs longer than 100 feet or with more than three right angle bends shall have a pull box installed at a convenient intermediate location. B. Boxes and enclosures shall be securely mounted to the building structure with supporting facilities independent of the conduit entering or leaving the boxes. C. Bonding jumpers shall be used around concentric or eccentric knockouts. D. Installation of Outlet Boxes 1. Use nonmetallic boxes in corrosive areas such as chemical feed area and as designated on the Plans. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS WOODARD & CURRAN 26 05 33-14 2. Use explosion proof boxes in Hazardous areas as identified on the Drawings. 3. Use cast metal boxes in all other locations. Each box with associated covers and fittings shall have a NEMA rating for each location installed. E. Installation of Pull and Junction Boxes 1. Use general-purpose boxes (NEMA 1) in finished areas with framed construction. 2. Use dust-tight and oil-tight boxes (NEMA 12) in other dry interior areas. 3. Use explosion proof boxes (NEMA 7) in hazardous areas as designated on the Plans. 4. Use watertight boxes (NEMA 4X) for exterior and wet locations on outdoor structure where moisture is present. 5. Use corrosion resistant watertight boxes (NEMA 4X) for wet locations and corrosion filled areas, such as the chemical feed area, and as identified on the Drawings. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. 3.04 STARTUP & COMMISSIONING A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. 3.05 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. END OF SECTION 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS WOODARD & CURRAN 26 05 43-1 SECTION 26 05 43 UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS (FILED SUB-BID REQUIRED) PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Provide all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals as shown, specified and required to furnish and install underground duct banks, manholes and handholes including all necessary excavation, backfill and surface restoration. B. Provide underground conduit duct banks with manholes and pullboxes for power, and lighting circuits as shown on the Drawings. C. Coordination: Duct bank routing when shown on the Drawings is diagrammatic. Coordinate installation with piping and other underground systems and structures and locate clear of interferences. Coordinate manhole and handhole installation with piping, sheet piling and other underground systems and structures and locate clear of interferences. D. Related Requirements 1. Division 26, Section 26 05 00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 2. Division 26, Section 26 05 33 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 3. Division 26, Section 26 05 19 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 4. Division 26, Section 26 05 26 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 1.02 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Measurement and payment requirements: per Division 01 General Requirements. 1.03 REFERENCES A. Reference Standards 1. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) 2. The American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 3. The Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE) 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS WOODARD & CURRAN 26 05 43-2 4. Insulated Cable Engineers Association (ICEA) 5. National Electrical Code (NEC) 6. National Electrical Safety Code (NESC) 7. ANSI A14.3, Safety Requirements for Fixed Ladders 8. OSHA 9. ASTM a. ASTM A 48, Gray Iron Castings b. ASTM D756, Procedure E: Accelerated Service Exposure c. ASTM G53: Recommended Practice for Operating Light and Water Exposure on Nonmetallic Materials (with a U.V.A. 340 bulb) d. ASTM D570, Section 5, 6.1, 6.5: Water Absorption e. ASTM D790: Flexural Properties f. ASTM D635: Flammability Test B. Definitions 1. Duct: Electrical conduit and other raceway, either metallic or nonmetallic, used underground, embedded in earth or concrete. 2. Duct bank: 2 or more conduits or other raceway installed underground in the same trench or concrete envelope. 3. Handhole: An underground junction box in a duct or duct bank with cover accessible from grade. 4. Manhole: an underground utility structure, large enough for a person to enter, with facilities for installing and maintaining cables. Where required manholes shall comply with the Utility Companies requirements. 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination, Sequencing, and Scheduling: per Division 01 General Requirements. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. B. Shop Drawings 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS WOODARD & CURRAN 26 05 43-3 1. Layouts showing the proposed routing of duct banks and the locations of manholes, handholes and areas of reinforcement 2. Profiles of duct banks showing crossings with piping and other underground systems 3. Typical cross sections 4. Installation procedures 5. Manufacturer's technical information for manholes, handholes and accessories proposed for use 6. Drawings showing interior and exterior manhole and handhole dimensions and details of openings, jointing, inserts, reinforcing, size and locations of openings, and accessory locations 7. Certificate of concrete and steel used in underground pre-cast concrete utility structures, according to ASTM C858 8. Product Data for nonmetallic conduit and manhole accessories C. Record Drawings 1. Layouts showing the actual routing of duct banks including the dimensions and depth of the top of duct bank below grade. Record Drawings for duct banks should also include cross sections of the duct bank indicating the circuit, use, conduit size, orientation and number of conduits. 2. Locations of manholes, handholes, and areas of reinforcement 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. 1.08 SITE CONDITIONS A. Existing Conditions: per Division 01 General Requirements. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS WOODARD & CURRAN 26 05 43-4 PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 DUCT BANK CONDUIT A. Duct: Schedule 40 and Schedule 80 PVC conduit and fittings in accordance with Division 26, Section Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems. B. Rigid Steel Conduit: Rigid steel conduit and fittings in accordance with Division 26, Section Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems. C. All shielded instrumentation and communications cable shall be installed in ferrous metal, steel conduit throughout the entire run of conduit from end to end. 2.02 MANHOLES A. Manholes shall conform to the requirements as shown and detailed on the Drawings. B. Material and Construction 1. Pre-cast reinforced concrete 2. Minimum interior dimensions as indicated on the Drawings or required by the Utility Company 3. Duct entrances sized and located to suit duct banks. Duct-bank penetration shall be watertight. 4. Modular sections with tongue-and-groove joints. Joints shall be gasketed and water tight. 5. Nominal inside dimensions as shown 6. Base Section: Shall include sump, grate, and ground rod openings. 7. Sump Covers; ASTM A48; Class 30B galvanized iron C. Frames and Covers 1. Material: Cast iron conforming to ASTM A 48, Class 30A 2. Covers: 42 inch minimum diameter, watertight, sealed type, marked "ELECTRICAL" in raised 2-inch letters 3. Frame shall be grouted on the manhole. 4. Manufacturer: Provide frames and covers of one of the following a. Neenah Foundry Company 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS WOODARD & CURRAN 26 05 43-5 b. Flockhart Foundry Company c. Campbell Foundry Company d. Approved equal D. Pulling Irons 1. Material: Galvanized steel 2. Cast in the wall opposite to the centerline of each incoming duct bank and 12 inches below centerline of bottom line of ducts. 3. Product and Manufacturer: Provide one of the following a. Cat. No. DU2T3 by McGraw Edison Company b. Cat. No. 8119 by A.B. Chance Company c. Approved equal E. Cable Racks 1. Cable racks shall adequately support cables with space allowed for future cables. Provide as indicated to support mounting channels and racks. Cast- in Place anchors with minimum rated pullout working capacity of 2000 pounds. Pennsylvania Insert Corp. 5/8-11-INSERT, with 5/8-11 hex head cap screw made from 316 stainless steel. 2. Each rack shall be a vertical assembly of 24-inch cable racks extending from within 6 inches of the manhole roof slab to within 6 inches of the manhole floor. 3. Cable Rack Mounting Channel: Heavy-duty non-metallic stanchions. Underground Devices, Inc., Model C36 or approved equal 4. Cable Racks: Heavy-duty non-metallic racks. 8, 14, 20 inches as indicated. 5. Product and Manufacturer: Provide one of the following a. Underground Devices, Inc., Model RA 08, RA14, RA20 or b. Approved equal F. Insulators 1. Material: Porcelain 2. Product and Manufacturer: Provide one of the following a. Cat. No. J 5122 by Joslyn Manufacturing and Supply Company b. Cat. No. 2120 by Hubbard and Company 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS WOODARD & CURRAN 26 05 43-6 c. Approved equal G. Manhole Steps 1. Material: Extruded aluminum 2. Steps spaced evenly at approximately twelve to sixteen inch centers and shall project evenly from manhole walls 3. Manufacturer: Provide manhole steps of one of the following a. Flockhart Foundry Company b. Neenah Foundry Company c. Approved equal 2.03 HANDHOLES A. The pull/splice box underground enclosures shall be constructed of polymer concrete consisting of sand and aggregate bound together with a polymer resin. Internal reinforcement may be provided by means of steel, fiberglass, or a combination of the two. Handholes for installation in roadways shall concrete reinforced H20 traffic rated. B. Enclosure 1. The enclosure must be manufactured with an open or closed bottom and a removable cover. The enclosures shall be green or concrete gray in color. 2. The enclosures shall be designed to be installed flush to grade with the cover fitting flush to the box. 3. The enclosures shall be suitable for installation in either direct or buried native soil, embedded in concrete, or embedded in asphalt surfacing. (A concrete collar is required for installation in asphalt). 4. The enclosures shall be of a stackable design for greater installation flexibility. 5. All covers are to be equipped with a minimum of two stainless steel lockdown mechanisms. All covers shall have a logo recessed into the cover and it shall read ELECTRIC. 6. All enclosure covers will have some type of recessed access point to allow removal of the cover with a hook. The access points will be placed in such a location to allow for the greatest amount of leverage and safety possible 7. Enclosures shall be designed and suitable for installation and use through a temperature range of minus 40ºC (minus 40ºF) to 60ºC (140ºF). 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS WOODARD & CURRAN 26 05 43-7 8. A certified copy of all test reports must be signed and stamped by a registered professional Engineer and submitted prior to shipment of products. C. Material Requirements 1. Permanent deflection of any surface shall not exceed 10 percent of the maximum allowable static design load deflection. 2. The covers shall be skid resistant and have a maximum coefficient of friction of 0.50 on the top surface of the cover. Coatings will not be allowed. 3. Any point on the covers must be able to withstand a 70 foot-pound impact administered with a 12-pound weight having a “C” tup (ASTM D-2444) without puncturing or splitting. The test shall be performed with the cover resting on a flat, rigid surface such as concrete or a 1 steel plate 4. Covers shall have molded lettering, ELECTRIC or COMM as applicable 5. Fastening devices used to secure the cover to the box shall be capable of withstanding a minimum torque of 15 foot-pounds and minimum straight pullout strength of 750 pounds. 6. The material is tested according to the requirements of ASTM D543, Section 7, Procedure 1, for chemical resistance. The manufacturer is responsible for proof of compliance with the latest version of the ASTM standards 7. Comply with the following acceptance standards. a. ASTM D756 b. ASTM G53 c. ASTM D570 d. ASTM D790 e. ASTM D635 D. Acceptable level of quality for handholes: equivalent to Strongwell Quazite, or approved equal. 2.04 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS WOODARD & CURRAN 26 05 43-8 PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Concrete shall be measured, mixed and placed, and compacted as required in Division 03. B. Provide not less than 3 inches of concrete between the outside of a duct and the earth. Provide not less than 2 inches of concrete between adjacent ducts. Refer to Drawings for spacing requirements. Provide side forms for each duct bank. C. All duct line concrete pours shall be continuous between manholes or handholes and between manholes or handholes and structures. D. Where duct lines pass through concrete walls, concrete envelopes shall be extended through the finished flush with inside surfaces. Watertight construction joints of an approved type shall be provided. E. Duct banks shall be reinforced when laid on backfill covering new pipelines, roads, parking lots or any are subject to vehicular traffic. Beneath these areas, install reinforcing bars as shown on the Drawings, extending 10 feet beyond area needing protection. F. Duct lines shall be laid in trenches on mats of gravel not less than 6 inches thick and well graded. G. All electrical duct banks shall be colored red for safety purposes. H. Install raceways to drain away from buildings. Raceways between manholes or handholes shall drain toward the manholes or handholes. Raceway slopes shall not be less than 3 inches per 100 feet. I. Make raceway entrances to buildings and vaults with hot dipped rigid galvanized steel conduit not less than 10 feet long. Conduits which are not concrete encased for runs below floor slabs in slab-on-grade construction shall be hot dipped rigid galvanized steel conduit. Conduits which are concrete encased for runs below floor slabs in slab-on-grade construction shall be encased under the slab to their respective equipment. J. Raceway terminations at manholes shall be with end bells for PVC conduit and insulated throat grounding bushings with lay-in type lugs for metal conduit. 3.02 PROJECT CONDITIONS AND COORDINATION A. Coordination with other Underground Utilities 1. Locate all existing underground utilities through the use of an underground utility piping location Services Company. Locate the existing underground utilities and piping before any excavation is to begin. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS WOODARD & CURRAN 26 05 43-9 2. Coordinate conduit routing, duct bank and manholes with other new and existing underground utilities. Revise locations and elevations as required to suit field conditions and ensure that conduits, duct runs, manholes, and handholes do not interfere with existing and new underground utilities and piping. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Provide excavation and backfilling required for ductbank manhole and handhole installation. B. Make duct bank installations and penetrations through foundation walls watertight. C. Assemble duct banks using non-magnetic saddles, spacers, and separators. Position separators to provide 3-inch minimum separation between the outer surfaces of the ducts. D. Firmly fix ducts in place during pouring of concrete. Carefully spade and vibrate the concrete to insure filling of all spaces between ducts. E. Make bends with sweeps of not less than 48-inch radius or 5 degree angle couplings. F. Make a transition from non-metallic to PVC coated rigid steel conduit where duct banks enter structures or turn upward for continuation above grade. Terminate the ducts in insulated grounding bushings. Continue ducts inside buildings with steel, metallic conduit. G. Where ducts enter manholes and handholes, terminate the ducts in suitable end bells. H. Provide expansion/deflection fittings in accordance with the requirements specified in Division 26, Section Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems. I. Do not backfill with material containing large rock, paving materials, cinders, large or sharply angular substances, corrosive material, or other materials that can damage or contribute to corrosion of ducts or cables or prevent adequate compaction of fill. J. Slope duct runs for drainage toward manholes and away from buildings with a slope of approximately 3 inches per 100 feet. K. After completion of the duct bank and prior to pulling cable, pull a mandrel, not less than 12 inches long and with a cross section approximately 1/4 inch less than the inside cross section of the duct, through each duct. Then pull a rag swab or sponge through to make certain that no particles of earth, sand or gravel have been left in the duct. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS WOODARD & CURRAN 26 05 43-10 L. Install a bare stranded copper duct bank ground cable in each duct bank envelope. Make ground electrically continuous throughout the entire duct bank system. Connect ground cable to building and station ground grid or to equipment ground buses. In addition, connect ground cable to steel conduit extensions of the underground duct system. Provide ground clamp and bonding of each steel conduit extension, where necessary to maintain continuity of the ground system. Terminate ground conductor at last manhole or handhole for outlying structures. M. Install a warning ribbon approximately 12 inches below finished grade over all underground duct banks. The identifying ribbon shall be a PVC tape, 3 inches wide, yellow color, permanently imprinted with CAUTION BURIED ELECTRIC LINE BELOW in black letters. N. Plug and seal all empty spare ducts entering buildings and structures. Seal all ducts in use entering buildings and structures. Seal shall be watertight, O-Z/Gedney Type Dux Duct Sealing Compound or equal. O. Install duct banks in conformance with National Electrical Code and National Electrical Safety Code. P. Install manholes and handholes where shown on Drawings. Verify final locations in field. Q. Complete installation of manholes and handholes so that structures are watertight. Provide expansion/deflection fitting for each conduit entry into the manholes. R. Provide sump opening in manhole floor. S. Provide grading rings or brick stacks for manholes when required to adjust manhole cover to proper grade. Stacks shall be a minimum of 12 inches in height, constructed on the roof slab or cone section on which the manhole frame and cover shall be placed. The height of the stack shall be such as is necessary to bring the manhole frame to the proper grade. T. Cable Racks 1. Provide cable hooks to support each cable on each rack along the cable run within the manholes. 2. Individually support each cable at each hook on porcelain insulators. 3. In the manhole, securely tie each cable in place at each insulator block to prevent excessive movement of insulators, cables, or fireproof tape. Tie cables with non-metallic 3/4 inch strapping tape as manufactured by 3M or tie down with nylon straps. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS WOODARD & CURRAN 26 05 43-11 U. Conduits shall extend 3 inches above concrete slab surface, unless otherwise indicated. All conduits shall be bushed to protect cables and provide means for grounding. V. Duct Bank Conduit Spacers: Non-metallic, snap together intermediate and bottom pieces, sized for conduit diameter and code spacing. Carlon Span-Loc or approved equal. Separators shall be compatible with the conduit utilized. The joints of the conduits shall be staggered by rows and layers to provide a duct line having the maximum strength. During construction, partially completed duct lines, shall be protected from the entrance of debris such as mud, sand, and dirt by means of suitable conduits plugs. As each section of a duct line is completed, a testing mandrel not less than 12 inches long with a diameter 1/4 inch less than the size of the conduit, shall be drawn through each conduit, after which a brush having the diameter of the duct, and having stiff bristles shall be drawn through until the conduit is clear of all particles of earth, sand and/or gravel; conduit plugs shall then be immediately installed. Provide a plastic pull rope, having a minimum of 3 additional feet at each end, in all spare ducts. 3.04 DUCT BANK INSTALLATION A. All bends shall have a radius greater than 36 inches or 12 times conduit inside diameter whichever is greater. B. Install duct with minimum slope of 4 inches per 100 feet. Slope duct away from building entrances. C. Install no more than equivalent of three 90-degree bends between pull points. D. Provide suitable fittings to accommodate expansion and deflection where required. E. Use suitable separators and chairs installed not greater than 4 feet on centers. Conduit separation shall be per code, and not less than 3 inches. F. Securely anchor duct to prevent movement during concrete placement. Use re-bar holders at spacers and secure with No. 4 re-bar driven into the earth at a minimum of 1 foot. G. Connect to manhole wall using No. 6 re-bar dowels. Dowels shall be located at each corner, and 12 inches on center. Insert dowels minimum 3 inches into manhole and 3 feet into duct bank. H. Tops of concrete-encased ducts shall be 1. Not less than 24 inches and not less than shown on the Drawings, below finished grade 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS WOODARD & CURRAN 26 05 43-12 2. Not less than 30 inches and not less than shown on the Drawings, below roads and other paved surfaces I. Tops of direct burial ducts and conduits shall be 1. Not less than 24 inches and not less than shown on the Drawings, below finished grade 2. Not less than 30 inches and not less than shown on the Drawings, below roads and other paved surfaces 3.05 PRE-CAST MANHOLE INSTALLATION A. Install and seal pre-cast sections in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. B. Install manholes plumb. C. Attach cable racks to inserts after manhole installation is complete. D. Provide 12 inches minimum gravel bedding under manholes, and 12 inches gravel fill around manholes. E. Conduit/Ductwork penetration shall be grouted and sealed. Penetration shall be watertight. 3.06 CABLE PULLING A. The inspection, handling, storage, temperature conditioning prior to installation, bending and training limits, pulling limits, and calculation parameters for installation of all cables must comply with the manufacturer’s recommendations. For ease of installation and prevention of cable damage, the Contractor shall utilize quadrant blocks located properly along the cable run. Failure to comply with any of the above shall make this Contractor responsible for any cable failures that occur within the manufacturer’s Warranty Period. B. Cable lubricant shall be soapstone, graphite, or talc for rubber or plastic jacketed cables. C. Lubricants for assisting in the pulling or jacketed cables shall be those specifically recommended by the cable manufacturer. D. Cable pulling tensions shall not exceed the maximum pulling tensions recommended by the cable manufacturer. E. All medium voltage cables shall be individually fire/arc proofed. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS WOODARD & CURRAN 26 05 43-13 3.07 CABLE TERMINATING A. Terminations of insulated power and lighting cables shall be protected from accidental contact, deterioration of coverings and moisture by the use of terminating devices and materials. Terminations shall be made using materials and method as indicated or specified herein or as designed by the written instruction of the cable manufacturer and termination kit manufacturer. 3.08 GROUNDING A. Duct banks shall be grounded with a bare stranded copper ground wire that is run within the duct bank and is bonded and grounded at both ends. Conduit shall not be used as the ground conductor. B. Manholes shall be grounded with ground rods. A bare stranded copper ground wire from the ground wire loop shall be used to bond together and ground the manhole cover frame, ladder support bracket, concrete inserts, cable racks, duct bank ground conductors, and the shields of any medium voltage cables that are spliced in the manhole. C. Grounding: Install a ground rod for each manhole. Bond all exposed metal manhole accessories and the concrete reinforcing rods with bare copper wire and connect to the ground rod and to the ductbank ground cable. Provide foam sealant for rod penetration in manhole floor for watertight seal. D. Install a bare stranded copper duct bank ground cable in each duct bank envelope. Make ground electrically continuous throughout the entire duct bank system. Connect ground cable to building and station ground grid or to equipment ground buses. In addition, connect ground cable to steel conduit extensions of the underground duct system, manholes, and handholes. Provide ground clamp and bonding of each steel conduit extension, where necessary to maintain continuity of the ground system. 3.09 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. 3.10 STARTUP & COMMISSIONING A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. 3.11 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. END OF SECTION This page intentionally left blank 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA SHORT CIRCUIT ANALYSIS AND COORDINATION STUDY WOODARD & CURRAN 26 05 73-1 SECTION 26 05 73 SHORT CIRCUIT ANALYSIS AND COORDINATION STUDY (FILED SUB-BID REQUIRED) PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Furnish an Arc Flash Hazard Analysis Study per the requirements set forth in the NFPA 70E Standard for Electrical Safety in the Workplace. The arc flash hazard analysis shall be performed according to the IEEE Standard 1584, the IEEE Guide for Performing Arc-Flash Calculations in accordance with this Section and applicable reference standards listed in Article 1.03. B. The scope of the studies shall include new distribution equipment supplied by the Contractor and modified electrical distribution equipment under this Contract. 1.02 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Measurement and payment requirements: per Division 01 General Requirements. 1.03 REFERENCES A. Reference Standards 1. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (IEEE) a. IEEE 141 Recommended Practice for Electric Power Distribution and Coordination of Industrial and Commercial Power Systems b. IEEE 242 Recommended Practice for Protection and Coordination of Industrial and Commercial Power Systems c. IEEE 399 Recommended Practice for Industrial and Commercial Power System Analysis d. IEEE 241 Recommended Practice for Electric Power Systems in Commercial Buildings e. IEEE 1015 Recommended Practice for Applying Low-Voltage Circuit Breakers Used in Industrial and Commercial Power Systems f. IEEE 1584 Guide for Performing Arc-Flash Hazard Calculations 2. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) a. ANSI C57.12.00 Standard General Requirements for Liquid- Immersed Distribution, Power, and Regulating Transformers 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA SHORT CIRCUIT ANALYSIS AND COORDINATION STUDY WOODARD & CURRAN 26 05 73-2 b. ANSI C37.13 Standard for Low Voltage AC Power Circuit Breakers Used in Enclosures c. ANSI C37.010 Standard Application Guide for AC High Voltage Circuit Breakers Rated on a Symmetrical Current Basis d. ANSI C 37.41 Standard Design Tests for High Voltage Fuses, Distribution Enclosed Single-Pole Air Switches, Fuse Disconnecting Switches and Accessories. 3. The National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) a. NFPA 70 National Electrical Code b. NFPA 70E Standard for Electrical Safety in the Workplace 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination, Sequencing, and Scheduling: per Division 01 General Requirements. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. B. Submittals for review/approval 1. The studies shall be submitted to the Engineer prior to receiving final approval of the distribution equipment Shop Drawings and/or prior to release of equipment Drawings for manufacturing. If formal completion of the study may cause delays in equipment shipments, approval from the Engineer may be obtained for a preliminary submittal of data to ensure that the selection of device ratings and characteristics will be satisfactory to properly select the distribution equipment. The formal study will be provided to verify preliminary findings. C. Submittals for construction 1. The results of the short-circuit, protective device coordination and arc flash hazard analysis studies shall be summarized in a final report. A minimum of 5 bound copies of the complete final report shall be submitted. For large system studies, submittals requiring more than 5 copies of the report will be provided without the section containing the computer printout of the short-circuit input and output data. Electronic PDF copies of the report will be provided upon request. 2. The report shall include the following sections a. Executive Summary including Introduction, Scope of Work, and Results/Recommendations 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA SHORT CIRCUIT ANALYSIS AND COORDINATION STUDY WOODARD & CURRAN 26 05 73-3 b. Short-Circuit Methodology Analysis Results and Recommendations c. Short-Circuit Device Evaluation Table d. Protective Device Coordination Methodology Analysis Results and Recommendations e. Protective Device Settings Table f. Time-Current Coordination Graphs and Recommendations g. Arc Flash Hazard Methodology Analysis Results and Recommendations including the details of the incident energy and flash protection boundary calculations, along with Arc Flash boundary distances, working distances, Incident Energy levels and Personal Protection Equipment levels. h. Arc Flash Labeling section showing types of labels to be provided. Section will contain descriptive information as well as typical label images. i. One-line system diagram that shall be computer generated and will clearly identify individual equipment buses, bus numbers used in the short-circuit analysis, cable and bus connections between the equipment, calculated maximum short-circuit current at each bus location, device numbers used in the time-current coordination analysis, and other information pertinent to the computer analysis. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. B. Qualifications: per Division 01 General Requirements and as follows. 1. The short-circuit, protective device coordination and arc flash hazard analysis studies shall be conducted under the responsible charge and approval of a Registered Professional Electrical Engineer skilled in performing and interpreting the power system studies. 2. The Registered Professional Electrical Engineer shall be an employee of the equipment manufacturer or an approved engineering firm. 3. The Registered Professional Electrical Engineer shall have a minimum of 5 years of experience in performing power system studies. 4. The approved engineering firm shall demonstrate experience with Arc Flash Hazard Analysis by submitting names of at least ten actual arc flash hazard analyses it has performed in the past year. C. The engineering firm shall have a minimum of 10 years’ experience in performing power system studies. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA SHORT CIRCUIT ANALYSIS AND COORDINATION STUDY WOODARD & CURRAN 26 05 73-4 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. 1.08 SITE CONDITIONS A. Existing Conditions: per Division 01 General Requirements. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 STUDIES A. The Contractor shall furnish an Arc Flash Hazard Analysis Study per NFPA 70E - Standard for Electrical Safety in the Workplace, reference Article 130.3 and Annex D. This study shall also include short-circuit and protective device coordination studies. B. The studies shall be performed using one of the following programs 1. ESA’s Easypower. 2. SKM 3. ETAP 2.02 DATA A. Contractor shall furnish all data as required for the power system studies. The Engineer performing the short circuit protective device coordination and arc flash hazard analysis studies shall furnish the Contractor with a listing of required data immediately after award of the Contract. The Contractor shall expedite collection of the data to assure completion of the studies as required for final approval of the distribution equipment Shop Drawings and/or prior to the release of the equipment for manufacturing. B. Source combination may include present and future motors and generators. C. Load data utilized may include existing and proposed loads obtained from Contract Documents provided by Owner, or Contractor. D. If applicable, include fault contribution of existing motors in the study. The Contractor shall obtain required existing equipment data, if necessary, to satisfy the study requirements. Contractor shall obtain existing studies and analyses from the Owner as required. 2.03 SHORT-CIRCUIT ANALYSIS A. Transformer design impedances shall be used when test impedances are not available. B. Provide the following 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA SHORT CIRCUIT ANALYSIS AND COORDINATION STUDY WOODARD & CURRAN 26 05 73-5 1. Calculation methods and assumptions 2. Selected base per unit quantities 3. One-line diagram of the system being evaluated that clearly identifies individual equipment buses, bus numbers used in the short-circuit analysis, cable and bus connections between the equipment, calculated maximum short-circuit current at each bus location and other information pertinent to the computer analysis. 4. The study shall include input circuit data including electric utility system characteristics, source impedance data, conductor lengths, number of conductors per phase, conductor impedance values, insulation types, transformer impedances and X/R ratios, motor contributions, and other circuit information as related to the short-circuit calculations. 5. Tabulations of calculated quantities including short-circuit currents, X/R ratios, equipment short-circuit interrupting or withstand current ratings and notes regarding adequacy or inadequacy of the equipment rating. 6. Results, conclusions, and recommendations. A comprehensive discussion section evaluating the adequacy or inadequacy of the equipment must be provided and include recommendations as appropriate for improvements to the system. C. For solidly grounded systems, provide a bolted line-to-ground fault current study for applicable buses as determined by the Engineer performing the study. D. Protective Device Evaluation 1. Evaluate equipment and protective devices and compare to short circuit ratings. 2. Adequacy of switchgear, motor control centers, and panelboard bus bars to withstand short-circuit stresses. 3. Vendor shall notify Owner in writing, of any circuit protective devices improperly rated for the calculated available fault current. 2.04 PROTECTIVE DEVICE TIME-CURRENT COORDINATION ANALYSIS A. Protective device coordination time-current curves (TCC) shall be displayed on log-log scale graphs. B. Include on each TCC graph, a complete title with descriptive device names. C. Terminate device characteristic curves at a point reflecting maximum symmetrical or asymmetrical fault current to which the device is exposed. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA SHORT CIRCUIT ANALYSIS AND COORDINATION STUDY WOODARD & CURRAN 26 05 73-6 D. Identify the device associated with each curve by manufacturer type, function, and, if applicable, tap, time delay, and instantaneous settings recommended. E. Plot the following characteristics on the TCC graphs, where applicable 1. Electric utility’s overcurrent protective device 2. Medium voltage equipment overcurrent relays 3. Medium and low voltage fuses including manufacturer’s minimum melt, total clearing, tolerance, and damage bands 4. Low voltage equipment circuit breaker trip devices, including manufacturer’s tolerance bands 5. Transformer full-load current, magnetizing inrush current, and ANSI through-fault protection curves 6. Medium voltage conductor damage curves 7. Ground fault protective devices, as applicable 8. Pertinent motor starting characteristics and motor damage points, where applicable 9. Pertinent generator short-circuit decrement curve and generator damage point 10. The largest feeder circuit breaker in each motor control center and applicable panelboard F. Provide adequate time margins between device characteristics such that selective operation is provided, while providing proper protection. G. Provide the following 1. A one-line diagram shall be provided which clearly identifies individual equipment buses, bus numbers, device identification numbers and the maximum available short-circuit current at each bus when known. 2. A sufficient number of log-log plots shall be provided to indicate the degree of system protection and coordination by displaying the time- current characteristics of series connected overcurrent devices and other pertinent system parameters. 3. Computer printouts shall accompany the log-log plots and will contain descriptions for each of the devices shown, settings of the adjustable devices, and device identification numbers to aid in locating the devices on the log-log plots and the system one-line diagram. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA SHORT CIRCUIT ANALYSIS AND COORDINATION STUDY WOODARD & CURRAN 26 05 73-7 4. The study shall include a separate, tabular printout containing the recommended settings of all adjustable overcurrent protective devices, the equipment designation where the device is located, and the device number corresponding to the device on the system one-line diagram. 5. A discussion section which evaluates the degree of system protection and service continuity with overcurrent devices, along with recommendations as required for addressing system protection or device coordination deficiencies. 6. Vendor shall notify Owner in writing of any significant deficiencies in protection and/or coordination. Provide recommendations for improvements. 2.05 ARC FLASH HAZARD ANALYSIS A. The arc flash hazard analysis shall be performed according to the IEEE 1584 equations that are presented in NFPA70E Annex D. The arc flash hazard analysis shall be performed in conjunction with the short-circuit analysis (Section 2.03) and the protective device time-current coordination analysis (Section 2.04). B. The flash protection boundary and the incident energy shall be calculated at significant locations in the electrical distribution system (switchboards, switchgear, motor-control centers, panelboards, busway, and splitters) where Work could be performed on energized parts. C. Working distances shall be based on IEEE 1584. The calculated arc flash protection boundary shall be determined using those working distances. D. When appropriate, the short circuit calculations and the clearing times of the phase overcurrent devices will be retrieved from the short circuit and coordination study model. Ground overcurrent relays should not be taken into consideration when determining the clearing time when performing incident energy calculations. E. The short circuit calculations and the corresponding incident energy calculations for multiple system scenarios must be compared and the greatest incident energy must be uniquely reported for each equipment location in a single table. Calculations must be performed to represent the maximum and minimum contributions of fault current magnitude for normal and emergency operating conditions. The minimum calculation will assume that the utility contribution is at a minimum. Conversely, the maximum calculation will assume a maximum contribution from the utility. Calculations shall take into consideration the parallel operation of synchronous generators with the electric utility, where applicable as well as any stand-by generator applications. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA SHORT CIRCUIT ANALYSIS AND COORDINATION STUDY WOODARD & CURRAN 26 05 73-8 F. The Arc-Flash Hazard Analysis shall be performed utilizing mutually agreed upon facility operational conditions, and the final report shall describe, when applicable, how these conditions differ from worst-case bolted fault conditions. G. The incident energy calculations must consider the accumulation of energy over time when performing arc flash calculations on buses with multiple sources. Iterative calculations must take into account the changing current contributions, as the sources are interrupted or decremented with time. Fault contribution from motors should be decremented as follows: 1. Fault contribution from induction motors should not be considered beyond 5 cycles. H. For each piece of ANSI rated equipment with an enclosed main device, two calculations shall be made. A calculation shall be made for the main cubicle, sides, or rear; and shall be based on a device located upstream of the equipment to clear the arcing fault. A second calculation shall be made for the front cubicles and shall be based on the equipment’s main device to clear the arcing fault. For all other non-ANSI rated equipment, only one calculation shall be required and it shall be based on a device located upstream of the equipment to clear the arcing fault. I. When performing incident energy calculations on the line side of a main breaker (as required per above), the line side and load side contributions must be included in the fault calculation. J. Mis-coordination should be checked amongst all devices within the branch containing the immediate protective device upstream of the calculation location and the calculation should utilize the fastest device to compute the incident energy for the corresponding location. K. Arc Flash calculations shall be based on actual overcurrent protective device clearing time. A maximum clearing time of 2 seconds will be used based on IEEE 1584 Section B.1.2. Where it is not physically possible to move outside of the flash protection boundary in less than 2 seconds during an arc flash event, a maximum clearing time based on the specific location shall be utilized. L. Provide the following 1. Results of the Arc-Flash Hazard Analysis shall be submitted in tabular form, and shall include device or bus name, bolted fault and arcing fault current levels, flash protection boundary distances, working distances, personal-protective equipment classes and AFIE (Arc Flash Incident Energy) levels. 2. The Arc-Flash Hazard Analysis shall report incident energy values based on recommended device settings for equipment within the scope of the study. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA SHORT CIRCUIT ANALYSIS AND COORDINATION STUDY WOODARD & CURRAN 26 05 73-9 3. The Arc-Flash Hazard Analysis may include recommendations to reduce AFIE levels and enhance worker safety. 2.06 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 FIELD ADJUSTMENT A. Contractor shall adjust relay and protective device settings according to the recommended settings table provided by the coordination study. B. Field adjustments to be completed by the equipment manufacturer under the separate Startup and Acceptance Testing Contract portion of Project Specifications. C. Contractor shall make minor modifications to equipment as required to accomplish conformance with short circuit and protective device coordination studies. D. Contractor shall notify Owner in writing of any required major equipment modifications. 3.02 ARC FLASH LABELS A. Provide a 4 inch by 6 inch Brady thermal transfer type label of high adhesion polyester for each Work location analyzed. B. The labels shall be designed according to the following standards 1. UL969 – Standard for Marking and Labeling Systems 2. ANSI Z535.4 – Product Safety Signs and Labels 3. NFPA 70 (National Electric Code) – Article 110.16 C. The label shall include the following information 1. System Voltage 2. Flash protection boundary 3. Personal Protective Equipment category 4. Arc Flash Incident energy value (cal/cm²) 5. Limited, restricted, and prohibited Approach Boundaries 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA SHORT CIRCUIT ANALYSIS AND COORDINATION STUDY WOODARD & CURRAN 26 05 73-10 6. Study report number and issue date D. Labels shall be printed by a thermal transfer type printer, with no field markings E. Arc flash labels shall be provided for equipment as identified in the study and the respective equipment access areas per the following 1. Floor Standing Equipment: Labels shall be provided on the front of each individual section. Equipment requiring rear and/or side access shall have labels provided on each individual section access area. Equipment line-ups containing sections with multiple incident energy and flash protection boundaries shall be labeled as identified in the Arc Flash Analysis table. 2. Wall Mounted Equipment: Labels shall be provided on the front cover or a nearby adjacent surface, depending upon equipment configuration. 3. General Use Safety labels shall be installed on equipment in coordination with the Arc Flash labels. The General Use Safety labels shall warn of general electrical hazards associated with shock, arc flash, and explosions, and instruct workers to turn off power prior to Work. F. Install labels as provided by the study. Technician providing the installation shall have completed an 8-hour instructor led Electrical Safety Training Course which includes NFPA 70E material including the selection of personal protective equipment. G. Provide labels for specific hazard categories as shown below in Figures 3.02-1 through 3.02-5. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA SHORT CIRCUIT ANALYSIS AND COORDINATION STUDY WOODARD & CURRAN 26 05 73-11 FIGURE 3.02-1 HAZARD CATEGORY 0 FIGURE 3.02-2 HAZARD CATEGORY 1 FIGURE 3.02-3 HAZARD CATEGORY 2 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA SHORT CIRCUIT ANALYSIS AND COORDINATION STUDY WOODARD & CURRAN 26 05 73-12 FIGURE 3.02-4 HAZARD CATEGORY 3 FIGURE 3.02-5 HAZARD CATEGORY 4 (NO SAFE PPE) 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA SHORT CIRCUIT ANALYSIS AND COORDINATION STUDY WOODARD & CURRAN 26 05 73-13 3.03 ARC FLASH TRAINING A. The vendor supplying the Arc Flash Hazard Analysis shall train the Owner’s qualified electrical personnel of the potential arc flash hazards associated with working on energized equipment (minimum of 4 hours). The training shall be certified for continuing education units (CEUs) by the International Association for Continuing Education Training (IACET) or equivalent. The trainer shall offer 2 sessions of training for plant staff. The trainer shall be an authorized OSHA Outreach instructor. B. The vendor supplying the Arc Flash Hazard Analysis shall offer instructor led and online NFPA 70E training classes. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. 3.05 STARTUP & COMMISSIONING A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. 3.06 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. END OF SECTION This page intentionally left blank 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS WOODARD & CURRAN 26 08 00-1 SECTION 26 08 00 COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS (FILED SUB-BID REQUIRED) PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes 1. Perform Acceptance Tests for all electrical equipment furnished in accordance with this Section and applicable reference standards listed in Article 1.03. a. The test requirements for equipment shall be as required by applicable standards and manufacturer's recommendations, and in accordance with this Specification. In no case will the absence of test requirements herein be construed as alleviation of acceptance testing. b. The purpose of electrical field acceptance tests is to ensure that all electrical equipment is operational and within industry and manufacturer's tolerances and is installed in accordance with the Specifications and approved Shop Drawings. c. Tests are in addition to factory tests at the Manufacturer's facility, and may not substitute for same. d. Tests are in addition to all other tests specified under other Specifications and shall be coordinated by the Contractor. e. Tests in general shall be conducted after the equipment installation is complete. Tests shall be complete and in order given herein and/or in Specifications for the particular equipment unless otherwise approved by the Engineer. f. Tests are also intended to provide, ensure, or determine the following: 1) Provide initial acceptance tests and recorded data that can be used as a benchmark for future routine maintenance and trouble shooting by plant personnel. 2) Ensure a successful start-up with a minimum of last minute interruptions and problems. 3) Determine the suitability of the equipment and systems for energization and placing into operation. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS WOODARD & CURRAN 26 08 00-2 4) Provide assurance that each system component is not only installed satisfactorily but performs, and will continue to perform its function in the system with reasonable reliability throughout the life of the equipment. B. Related Requirements 1. Division 26: Section 26 05 00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 1.02 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Measurement and payment requirements: per Division 01 General Requirements. 1.03 REFERENCES A. Reference Standards 1. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 2. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 3. Association of Edison Illuminating Companies (AEIC) 4. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE) 5. Insulated Cable Engineers Association (ICEA) 6. International Electrical Testing Association (NETA) 7. National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA) 8. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 9. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) 10. Underwriters Laboratory (UL) 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination, Sequencing, and Scheduling: per Division 01 General Requirements. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. B. General 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS WOODARD & CURRAN 26 08 00-3 1. Contractor shall submit detailed test procedure including test equipment for all field acceptance testing prior to testing. 2. Contractor shall submit to the Engineer six copies of all test reports. Format and types of reports, data sheets, forms, etc. shall be submitted for approval. 3. Each test report shall include as minimum the following: a. Listing of equipment tested including the list of test equipment used and the test equipment’s associated calibration dates b. Test method and standards governing the test c. Test results d. Recommendations 4. Test results shall incorporate inspection reports, instrument calibration curves, plotted test results, and all measurements and data. 5. All inspections, tests, and calibrations are to be reported in writing. The recorded data form shall have the signatures of the persons conducting the tests and authorized witnesses. The forms shall be designed to serve as the test and inspection checklist for inspection requirements. The test and checkout data shall also include any data taken prior to the adjustments, repairs, drying out, or similar Work prior to final testing and acceptance. As-found and as-left test data shall be recorded and reported in writing. 6. Copies of Test Data Reports shall be incorporated in each of the related Operations and Maintenance Manuals. The Data Reports shall include those items of equipment contained in the Service Manual. Reports shall be separated by a divider labeled Electrical Field Acceptance Tests. Reports shall contain data for all power conductors and controls including instrumentation conductors and devices for static and dynamic equipment in the Operations and Maintenance Manual. In addition, Operating Tests of the equipment shall be included in this section of the Operations and Maintenance Manual. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. B. Qualifications: per Division 01 General Requirements for testing and as follows. 1. The Contractor shall engage the services of a recognized independent testing agency approved by the Engineer to perform acceptance tests as specified herein. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS WOODARD & CURRAN 26 08 00-4 a. The testing firm shall submit proof of the certification by NETS or NICET, and proof of the qualifications for the lead, on-Site technical person when requested. 2. The testing firm shall provide all material, equipment, labor, and technical supervision to perform such tests and inspections. 3. All cost associated with the testing shall be the responsibility of the Contractor, including the expenses of retest because of defects and failure of equipment to meet Specifications. 4. Wiring and equipment which is defective, or which fails to meet Specifications, shall be replaced by the Contractor, unless specific approval for repair is given by the Engineer. The Contractor shall bear the costs for either action. 5. Contractor shall open circuits, place and connect all instruments and equipment needed for the tests, remove same and restore circuits when tests are complete. 6. Coordinate activities, and cooperate with others on Project, to ensure that systems are energized when required, loads applied, and requirements of other Specification Sections are carried out on timely, coordinated basis. 7. Other Specification Sections may require services of one or more manufacturer's representatives, to ensure that equipment supplied has been installed properly and adjusted to proper working order. Advise representative of all applicable tests in this Section, so that Work will be coordinated, and tests combined where feasible. 8. Contractor shall notify the Engineer and owner in writing at least 14 calendar days before the test are to take place. The tests shall be conducted in the presence of the owner’s representative and shall not be started without their permission. 9. Perform all tests as closely as possible to conditions of actual use. 10. All testing and checkout Work shall be performed with fully qualified personnel skilled in the particular tests being conducted. This is essential for obtaining and properly evaluating data while the tests are in progress and for insuring that important facts and questionable data are reported. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS WOODARD & CURRAN 26 08 00-5 11. It is important that equipment warranties or guarantees not be voided by the Contractor's testing and checkout Work. The tests will normally be supplemental to and compatible with the manufacturer's installation instructions and recommendations. Where deviations are apparent, the manufacturer's review and approval shall be obtained prior to testing. Reasonable cooperation is to be extended to permit witnessing by the manufacturer's representative if so requested. Where any questionable repairs, modifications, significant adjustments, tests or checks are to be made, the Contractor shall contact the Owner’s Representative to determine if the Work should be performed by or with the manufacturer's representative. 12. The Contractor shall ensure that all testing and checkout Work is conducted in a safe manner. Special safety pre-cautions such as the following to be utilized where appropriate: a. Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA) b. Accident Prevention Manual for Industrial Operations, National Safety Council c. Applicable state and local safety operating procedures d. Owner safety procedures e. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA 70E) f. American National Standards for Personnel Protection g. Locking procedures h. Barricades i. Maintenance of voice communications j. Erection of warning signs k. Stationing of guards and watchmen l. De-energize and/or isolate equipment prior to testing. Exceptions must be thoroughly reviewed to identify safety hazards and devise adequate safeguards. 13. The sequence of all tests and checks shall be such that the equipment can be energized immediately after the completion of the applicable tests. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. 1.08 SITE CONDITIONS A. Existing Conditions: per Division 01 General Requirements. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS WOODARD & CURRAN 26 08 00-6 PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Test Equipment 1. Provide all necessary test equipment and tools as specified herein and as recommended by the tested equipment manufacturer. 2. All test equipment shall be in good mechanical and electrical conditions, and shall be calibrated per NETA ATS schedule requirements. Records, which show date and results of instrument calibration or testing, must be kept up-to-date and provided with the test report upon request. 3. The accuracy shall be directly traceable to the National Institute of Standards and Technology. 4. Calibrating standard shall be of higher accuracy than that of the instrument tested. 5. Test equipment shall include but not limited to and shall have operating accuracy equal to, or better than listed. a. Portable multimeters shall be true RMS measuring b. Multimeters shall have the following accuracy limits, or better (for 60 Hz where applicable): 1) AC voltage ranges: 0.75 percent plus or minus 3 last single digits 2) AC current ranges: 0.90 percent plus or minus 3 last single digits, including adapters, transducers 3) DC voltage ranges: 0.25 percent plus or minus 1 last single digit 4) Resistance ranges: 0.50 percent plus or minus 1 last single digit 5) Frequency range: 0.10 percent plus or minus 1 last single digit c. Clamp-on ammeters: AC current plus or minus 3 percent of range plus or minus 1 last single digit d. Dissipation/power factor field equipment 1) Plus or minus 0.1 percent power factor values up to 2.0 percent 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS WOODARD & CURRAN 26 08 00-7 2) 5 percent of the reading for power factor values above 2 e. Low-range DC resistance equipment: 1.0 percent of reading, plus or minus 2 last single digits f. Transformers turns-ratio test equipment: 0.5 percent or better g. Ground electrode test equipment: plus or minus 2.0 percent of range h. Insulation (Megger) test sets: 0 - 1000V DC plus or minus 20 percent of reading at mid-scale for equipment 600 volts and less and 0 - 2500 volts DC plus or minus 20 percent of reading at mid- scale for equipment over 600 volts. i. Electrical load survey equipment 1) Plus or minus 5 percent total error, including sensors 2) 1 percent resolution 3) Current transformers plus or minus 2 percent of range 4) Voltage transformers plus or minus 0.5 percent of range j. Liquid dielectric strength test equipment: plus or minus 2 percent of scale k. Infrared scanning equipment: sensitivity of 2 degrees C l. Phase shifting equipment: plus or minus 1 degree over entire range m. High-current test equipment: plus or minus 2 percent of range n. DC high potential test equipment: plus or minus 2 percent of scale o. AC high potential test equipment: plus or minus 2 percent of scale p. Multi-amp SR-90, or equal, relay test set 2.02 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS A. All tests shall be performed with regard to protecting solid-state devices and electronic components from potential damage. Where applicable, disconnect solid-state devices and electronic components prior to applying testing voltage. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS WOODARD & CURRAN 26 08 00-8 B. Make up no connections at service entrance, transformers, substations, motors, motor control centers, and switchgear permanently until correct phase rotation of all equipment is determined and electrical tests have been completed. Install and insulate these connections temporarily, if necessary. Make permanent connections after proper rotation has been established and subsequent to completion of insulation resistance and dielectric tests. C. Wire and cable insulation resistance tests 1. Low voltage, 600V maximum a. Inspect wire and cables for physical damage and proper connection in accordance with approved Shop Drawings. b. Check color-coding with Specifications and NEC standards. c. Perform continuity test to insure proper connection. d. Perform insulation-resistance test on each conductor with respect to ground and adjacent conductors. Applied potential shall be 1000 volts DC for 1 minute. e. Evaluate test results by comparison with wires and cables of the same length and type. Investigate any values less than 50 Megaohms. 2. Medium-voltage, 15 kV Maximum a. Inspect exposed section of cables for physical damage and for proper connection in accordance with single-line diagram. b. Inspect for shield grounding, cable support and termination. Visually inspect jacket and insulation condition. c. Check for visible cable bends against IPCEA (Insulated Power Cable Engineers Association) or manufacturer's minimum allowable bending radius. d. Inspect for proper phase identification and arrangement. e. Inspect for proper fireproofing. f. If cables are terminated through window-type CT's, verify that neutrals and grounds are properly terminated for proper operation of protective devices. g. Perform a shield-continuity test on each power cable by ohmmeter method and record ohms value. h. Perform an insulation-resistance test utilizing a megohmeter with a voltage output of at least 1000 volts. Individually test each conductor with all other conductors and shields grounded. Test duration shall be 1 minute. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS WOODARD & CURRAN 26 08 00-9 i. After completing the insulation resistance test, a high potential test shall be performed in accordance with IPCEA Standard S-66-524 and NEMA WC-1. Perform test in accordance with ANSI/IEEE standard 400 and NETA AST requirements. j. The high voltage conductor tests at rated system voltage shall then be performed. The cables shall be energized and loaded for a period of eight hours. k. Shielding shall exhibit continuity. Investigate resistance value in excess of 10 ohms per 1000 feet of cable length. l. Circuit tested shall have an insulation resistance between conductors and between each conductor and ground not less than 10 Megaohms. m. In no case shall a phase conductor have an insulation resistance 40 percent less than the phase conductor with the highest insulation resistance. D. Grounding Systems 1. Verify that grounding system is in accordance with Specifications and applicable codes. 2. The grounding system shall be tested for continuity of connection and for resistance to flow of current through ground connections. a. The resistance between the main grounding electrode and ground shall be no greater than 5 ohms for 600V systems. For electrical substation grounds the ground resistance shall be no greater than 1 ohm. b. The ground resistance of conduits, equipment cases, and supporting frames shall be only fractionally higher than system ground. c. Method of measurement of ground resistance shall be as specified by NETA-AST and be approved by the Engineer before the start of tests. E. Switchboards and Switchgear Assemblies 1. Inspect for physical, electrical, and mechanical condition. 2. Compare equipment nameplate information with latest one-line diagram. 3. Check for proper anchorage, required area clearances, physical damage, and proper alignment. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS WOODARD & CURRAN 26 08 00-10 4. Inspect all bus connections for high resistance as recommended in NETA- ATS standard. Compare bus connection resistance to value of similar connections. 5. Verify torque on all bolts for bus bar connections. a. Bus bar and terminal connections shall be inspected to ensure that all joints have proper torque tightness. b. Torque values for all types of joints involved shall be in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 6. Check support and bracing a. Bus bar support insulators and barriers shall be inspected to ensure that they are free from contamination. b. Insulators shall be checked for cracks and signs of arc tracking: Mounting hardware shall be inspected and all joints checked for proper torque value. 7. Test all electrical and mechanical interlock systems for proper operation and sequencing. a. Closure attempt shall be made on locked-open devices. Opening attempt shall be made on locked-closed devices. b. Key exchange shall be made with devices operated in off-normal positions. 8. Clean switchgear. 9. Inspect accessible insulators for evidence of physical damage or contaminated surfaces. 10. Verify proper barrier and shutter installation and operation. 11. Verify appropriate contact lubricant on moving current carrying parts and surfaces. Verify appropriate lubrication on moving and sliding surfaces. 12. Exercise all active components. 13. Inspect all mechanical indicating devices for proper operation. 14. Verify proper operation of switchgear/switchboard heaters. Insure filters and/or vents are clear. 15. Electrical Tests a. Solid-state devices and electronic components shall be disconnected prior to applying 500 volts or higher to the circuit. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS WOODARD & CURRAN 26 08 00-11 b. Perform tests on all instrument transformers. c. Perform ground-resistance tests in accordance with Specification Section 26 05 26 – GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS. d. Perform insulation-resistance tests on each bus section, phase-to- phase and phase-to-ground for 1 minute. Test voltages and minimum resistance shall be as shown below: e. Over potential test voltages shall be applied in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations or NETA-ATS. Test results are evaluated on a go/no-go basis by slowly raising the test voltage to the required value. The final test voltage shall be applied for 1 minute. f. Perform resistance measurements on all bus joints with a low- resistance ohmmeter. g. Performance insulation-resistance tests at 1000 volts DC on all control wiring. Do not perform the test on wiring connected to solid state components. h. Perform control wiring performance test. Use the elementary diagrams of the switchgear to identify each remote control and protective device. Conduct tests to verify satisfactory performance of each control feature. i. Perform the following tests on dry-type control power transformers: 1) Inspect for physical damage, cracked insulation, broken leads, tightness of connections, defective wiring, and overall general condition. 2) Verify that primary and secondary fuse ratings or circuit breakers match Drawings. 3) Perform insulation-resistance test. a) Measurements shall be made from winding-to- winding and windings-to-ground. Test voltages and minimum resistance shall be in accordance with Table Switchgear Insulation-Resistance Test Voltage above. b) Determine accuracy of all meters and calibrate watt- hour meters per NETA-ATS requirements. c) Perform current injection test on the entire current circuit in each section of switchgear. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS WOODARD & CURRAN 26 08 00-12 F. Air Switches - Low Voltage and Medium Voltage Metal-Enclosed Switches 1. Provide visual and mechanical inspection to ensure proper connections and installation of cables, fuse holders, barriers. 2. Check blade alignments. Perform mechanical operation tests. Verify that fuse sizes and types are in accordance with approved coordination study. 3. Test all electrical and mechanical interlock systems for proper operation. 4. Perform electrical tests, including insulation-resistance tests on each pole, phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground for 1 minute and contact-resistance test across each switch blade and fuse holder. Test values shall be in accordance with NETA-ATS requirements unless otherwise specified by manufacturer. G. Circuit Breakers - Low Voltage 1. Circuit breakers are to be checked for possible damage during shipment or storage. 2. Inspect the breaker visually for physical damage. 3. Perform several mechanical ON-OFF operations. 4. Perform circuit continuity check on each pole with the circuit breaker in the closed position. 5. Determine short-time pickup and delay, long-time pickup and delay by primary current injection. 6. Tests solid-state trip devices at multiple setting range of pickup and time delays. 7. Apply 300 percent of breaker rated continuous current to each pole to determine that the circuit breaker will trip on an overload. H. Circuit Breaker - Medium Voltage, Vacuum Type 1. Inspect breaker for physical and mechanical damage. 2. Inspect anchorage, alignment, and grounding. 3. Perform all mechanical operational tests on both circuit breaker and its operating mechanism. 4. Measure critical dimensions such as contact gap and wipe as recommended by manufacturer. Make adjustments as needed. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS WOODARD & CURRAN 26 08 00-13 5. Perform all other tests as recommended by manufacturer before acceptance of the breaker. 6. Perform contact-resistance test. 7. Perform minimal pickup voltage tests on trip and close coils, trip circuit breaker by operation of each protective device. 8. Perform insulation-resistance tests on each pole, pole-to-pole and pole-to- ground at 2500V minimum. Test values shall be in accordance with NETA-ATS requirements unless otherwise specified by manufacturer. 9. Perform all other tests as recommended by manufacturer. I. Power Transformers 1. The field acceptance tests for power transformers shall be performed as specified herein, and as recommended by the transformer manufacturer. 2. Perform visual and mechanical inspection, insulation resistance tests, dielectric absorption tests, turn ratio tests, oil sample tests, AC over potential tests, insulation power factor tests on all windings and bushings, individual exciting current tests on each phase, winding resistance tests, top gas analysis, oil PCB levels, and any special 3. Perform tests and adjustments as applicable, and as recommended by the transformer manufacturer. 4. Test values shall be as recommended by manufacturer and specified by NETA-ATS. 5. The Contractor shall employ the services of the manufacturer and independent testing company to check, set and adjust the operation of the cooling equipment and demonstrate to the Owner that all equipment and alarms are functional and operational. J. AC Motors - Induction Motors 1. Inspect for physical damage and compare nameplate information with Drawings and Specifications 2. Inspect for proper installation, grounding, connection, and lubrication. Motor alignment, wiring capacity, speed and operation shall be checked to verify compliance with Specifications. 3. Check for unusual mechanical or electrical noise or signs of overheating during initial test run. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS WOODARD & CURRAN 26 08 00-14 4. Perform insulation-resistance tests in accordance with ANSI/IEEE Standard 43. Test duration as recommended by NETA-ATS. 5. Perform insulation-resistance test on pedestal per manufacturer's instructions. 6. Perform insulation-resistance test on surge protection device in accordance with NETA-ATS Specifications. 7. Check resistance temperature detector (RTD) circuits for conformance with Drawings. Check that metering or relaying devices using the RTD's are of the proper rating. 8. Check that the motor space heater is operating. 9. Perform a rotation test to insure proper shaft direction if the motor has been electrically disconnected. 10. Measure running current and evaluate relative to load conditions and nameplate full-load amperes. 11. Check motor operation. a. The motor shall be run for at least four-hours as close to full load as possible K. AC Motors - Synchronous Motors 1. Inspect for physical damage and compare nameplate information with Drawings and Specifications. 2. Inspect for proper installation, grounding, connection, and lubrication. 3. Perform insulation-resistance tests on the main rotating field winding, the exciter field winding, and the exciter armature winding in accordance with ANSI/MEE Standard 43. 4. Measure and record resistances of the following: a. Motor-field winding b. Exciter-stator winding c. Exciter rotor windings d. Field discharge resistors 5. Check that the field application and power-factor relay enable time-delay relays have been tested and set to the motor drive manufacturer's recommended values. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS WOODARD & CURRAN 26 08 00-15 6. The motor shall be run for at least four hours as close to full load as possible. 7. Test Values shall be in accordance with NETA-AST and NEMA publication. L. Motor Control 1. Low and medium voltage motor controls shall be tested in accordance with NETA-ATS requirements and manufacturer recommendations. M. Instrument Transformers 1. Inspect transformers for physical damage and nameplate information for compliance with Drawings and Specifications. 2. Verify proper connection of transformers with system requirements. 3. Verify tightness of all bolted connections and assure that adequate clearances exist between primary circuits to secondary circuit wiring. 4. Verify that all required grounding and shorting connections provide good contact. 5. Verify proper operation of transformer withdrawal mechanism (tip out) and grounding operation when applicable. 6. Electrical Tests - Current transformers a. Perform insulation-resistance tests on current transformer secondary and wiring to-ground winding at 1000 volts DC for 1 minute. Value of test voltage on secondary wiring shall be 1000 volts DC for 1 minute. Do not perform this test with solid-state devices connected. b. Perform a polarity test on each transformer winding, and verify manufacturer's polarity markings. c. Perform a turns-ratio verification test of each current transformer. d. The test data shall include the following: 1) Manufacturer's stated ratio for each tap position 2) Test turns ratio results 3) Percent error per tap position 4) Manufacturer's indicated polarity 5) Test result polarity 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS WOODARD & CURRAN 26 08 00-16 e. On each set of transformer windings, the turn’s ratio shall be determined for all no-loads taps, using the two-voltmeter method for control transformers and the two-ammeter method for current transformers. f. Confirm test switch wiring and operation. 1) A functional test shall be performed on the test switch of the current transformer to ensure that the secondary leads are shorted and that no open circuit conditions exist. A functional test shall also be performed on the control transformers to ensure that no short circuit exists across the secondary leads. 2) All control wiring shall be checked to ensure proper operation of the device being powered. g. Perform other tests specified by the NETA-ATS as required by application. 7. Electrical Tests - Voltage Transformers a. Perform insulation-resistance tests on voltage transformers, winding-to-winding and windings-to-ground. Value of test voltage on secondary wiring shall be 500 volts DC for 1 minute. Do not perform this test with solid-state devices connected. b. Perform a polarity test on each transformer to verify the polarity marks or H1-X1 relationship as applicable. c. Perform ratio test as specified in NETA-ATS. d. Perform a dielectric withstand test on the primary windings with the secondary windings connected to ground. The DC dielectric voltage shall be in accordance with Table Switchgear Insulation- Resistance Test Voltage above. N. Metering and Instrumentation 1. Inspect all devices for physical damage and tightness of electrical connections. 2. Check calibration and accuracy of meters at 25/50/75/100 percent of full scale. 3. Verify all instrument multipliers. O. Protective Relays 1. Inspect relays for physical damage and compliance with Drawings and Specifications. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS WOODARD & CURRAN 26 08 00-17 2. Standard testing and calibration Specifications a. To demonstrate that the relay will function as designed throughout the entire range of its operations. Acceptance tests shall be performed in accordance with NETA-ATS Protective Relay Testing Specifications: b. Calibrate and set relays in accordance with approved coordination study. c. Use approved relay test set. 3. Perform insulation-resistance test on each circuit-to-frame. 4. Test all relays in place to demonstrate that the relaying system will function as specified. Acceptance tests shall be performed as specified and in accordance with NETA-ATS. 5. Test lockout relays and associated test switch trip links and closing circuit contacts. The lockout relays shall be functionally tested to ensure proper system operation. Associated equipment shall be checked for proper alignment and contact closure. 6. All relays shall be checked and calibrated under service conditions against portable standards devices connected in series with the relay-undergoing test. For some in-Service testing the test plugs shall be used to connect devices which shall measure the currents and voltage being applied to the relays. 7. Test all electrical interlocks. a. Check all electrical interlocks for loose wiring, proper mechanical alignment, and operation. Also, inspect all contact surfaces to ensure they are clean and not pitted. b. All relays shall be checked and calibrated using the built-in test switch and test plug. 1) Test for correct settings and operation of all relay trips and operation indicating flags and seal in contacts. P. Operating Tests 1. Mechanical and electrical interlocks a. Mechanical interlocks shall be examined to ensure the interlock is free to operate and that bearing surfaces are free to perform their intended function. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS WOODARD & CURRAN 26 08 00-18 b. Checks for correct adjustment of primary disconnect mechanisms in plug-in units. Shall be mechanically interlocked with the door to ensure that the door is held closed with primary disconnect in the ON position. c. Check for padlock provisions on disconnect operating mechanisms. d. Check motor starters equipped with a defeater mechanism to ensure that they can be operated to release the door interlock with the disconnect device in the ON position. 2. Circuit Breaker Operation a. Test trip all medium voltage circuit breakers from all devices in the trip circuit and verify operation of all interlocks. b. Installation and inspection of 480V power circuit breakers shall be in accordance with NEMA Pub. No. SG-3: 1) Perform tests in accordance with NETA-ATS Specification and this Specification. c. Test all remote control stations for operation. 1) A functional test shall be performed for all remote pushbutton stations and manual motor starters to ensure their proper operation. 2) Tests shall be as included in the appropriate standards. 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. 3.03 STARTUP & COMMISSIONING A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. 3.04 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. END OF SECTION 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA LOW VOLTAGE DRY-TYPE TRANSFORMERS WOODARD & CURRAN 26 22 00-1 SECTION 26 22 00 LOW VOLTAGE DRY-TYPE TRANSFORMERS (FILED SUB-BID REQUIRED) PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes 1. Provide low-voltage dry-type distribution transformers in accordance with this Section and applicable reference standards listed in Article 1.03. B. Related Requirements 1. Division 26, Section 26 05 00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 2. Division 26, Section 26 05 26 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 1.02 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Measurement and payment requirements: per Division 01 General Requirements. 1.03 REFERENCES A. Reference Standards 1. NFPA 70, Article 100 2. IEEE C2 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination, Sequencing, and Scheduling: per Division 01 General Requirements. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with the Division 01 General Requirements. B. Product Data: Include data on features, components, ratings and performance for each type of transformer specified. Include dimensioned Plans, sections and elevation views. Show minimum clearances and installed devices and features. C. Wiring Diagrams: Detail wiring and identify terminals for tap changing and connecting field-installed wiring 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA LOW VOLTAGE DRY-TYPE TRANSFORMERS WOODARD & CURRAN 26 22 00-2 D. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of transformers certifying that the products furnished comply with requirements E. Factory Test Reports: Certified copies of manufacturer's routine factory tests required by referenced standard F. Sound-Level Test Reports: Certified copies of manufacturer's sound-level tests applicable to equipment for this Project G. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for tests specified in Part 3. H. Maintenance Data: For transformers and components to include in maintenance manuals I. Closeout and Maintenance Material Submittals: per Division 01 General Requirements. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. B. Qualifications: Per Division 01 General Requirements for listing and labeling and as follows. 1. Listing and Labeling Agency Qualifications: A Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7 2. Listing and Labeling: Provide transformers specified in this Section that are listed and labeled. 3. The Terms "listed" and "labeled": As defined in NFPA 70, Article 100. 4. Subparagraph below is required by some Federal agencies. 5. Comply with IEEE C2. 6. Comply with NFPA 70. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. B. Cover transformer-ventilating openings to keep out dust. Store in a warm dry location with uniform temperature or apply temporary heat according to manufacturer's recommendations within the enclosure of each ventilated type transformer. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA LOW VOLTAGE DRY-TYPE TRANSFORMERS WOODARD & CURRAN 26 22 00-3 C. Handle transformers using only lifting eyes and brackets provided for that purpose. Protect units against entrance of rain, sleet or snow if handled in inclement weather. D. Temporary Heating: Apply temporary heat according to manufacturer's written instructions within the enclosure of each ventilated-type unit throughout periods during which equipment is not energized and is not in a space that is continuously under normal control of temperature and humidity. 1.08 SITE CONDITIONS A. Existing Conditions: per Division 01 General Requirements. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering transformers that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Square D; Schneider 2. Cutler-Hammer/Eaton Corp. 3. Federal Pacific Co.; Line Power Mfg. Corp. Subsidiary 4. GE Electrical Distribution & Control 5. Hammond Co. 6. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. 7. Approved Equal 2.02 TRANSFORMERS, GENERAL A. Description: Factory assembled and tested, air-cooled units of types specified, designed for 60 Hz service. 1. Cores: Grain-oriented, non-aging silicon steel 2. Coils: Copper - Continuous windings without splices, except for taps 3. Internal Coil Connections: Brazed or pressure type 4. Enclosure: Class complies with NEMA 250 for the environment in which installed 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA LOW VOLTAGE DRY-TYPE TRANSFORMERS WOODARD & CURRAN 26 22 00-4 5. Low Sound Level Units: Minimum of 3 dBA less than NEMA ST 20 standard sound levels when factory tested according to IEEE C57.12.91 2.03 GENERAL PURPOSE DISTRIBUTION AND POWER TRANSFORMERS A. Comply with NEMA ST 20 and list and label as complying with UL 1561 1. Cores: One leg per phase 2. Windings: One coil per phase in primary and secondary 3. Enclosure: Indoor, ventilated, drip-proof 4. Insulation Class: 180 or 220 degrees C class for transformers 15 kVA or smaller; 220 degrees C class for transformers larger than 15 kVA 5. Rated Temperature Rise: 150 degrees C maximum rise above 40 degrees C, for 220 degrees C class insulation; 115 degrees C maximum rise for 185 degrees C class insulation 6. Taps: For transformers 3 kVA and larger, full-capacity taps in high- voltage windings; Taps, 3 through 15 kVA shall be two 5-percent taps below rated high voltage; Taps, 15 through 500 kVA shall be six 2.5-percent taps, 2 above and 4 below rated high voltage. 7. Transformers shall meet or exceed the energy efficiency requirements of US Department of Energy Candidate Standard Level 3 (CSL-3). a. No load losses (core loss) shall not exceed: 15kVA: 49W, 30kVA: 90W, 45kVA: 100W, 75kVA: 145W, 112.5kVA 205W, 150kVA: 250W, 225kVA: 320W, 300kVA: 350W b. Shall meet or exceed DOE 10CFR Part 430 CSL-3 efficiency requirement tested per NEMA TP-2: 15kVA: 97.6%, 30kVA: 98.1%, 45kVA: 98.3%, 75kVA: 98.6%, 112.5kVA: 98.8%, 150kVA: 98.9%, 225kVA: 98.9%, 300kVA: 99.0%. 2.04 HARMONIC CANCELLATION AND NOISE REDUCTION TRANSFORMERS A. The manufacturing process shall incorporate Epoxy Vacuum Impregnation B. Quality assurance program: MIL-I-45208, equivalent or better C. General Transformer Characteristics 1. Indoor, dry type, 60 Hz, NEMA-1, drip proof enclosure with kVA size, primary and secondary voltages as indicated on the Drawings 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA LOW VOLTAGE DRY-TYPE TRANSFORMERS WOODARD & CURRAN 26 22 00-5 2. Construction: 3-phase Common Core. 3. Winding and terminals: Copper 4. Neutral conductor rating shall be 200 percent of phase 5. Insulation Class shall be R, with an operating Temperature rise of 130 degrees C 6. Taps shall be 2 by 2 1/2 percent above and below nominal 7. BIL test: 10 kV. 8. Sound Level: 45 Db max at 5 feet 9. Noise attenuation: Anti-vibration pads 10. Efficiency: 97.5 percent at 50 percent load 11. Positive and negative sequence impedance shall be between 3.2 – 4.5 percent 12. Zero Sequence Impedance shall be less than 1 percent and the Zero Sequence Reactance shall be less than 0.3 percent 2.05 CONTROL AND SIGNAL TRANSFORMERS A. Units comply with NEMA ST 1 and are listed and labeled as complying with UL 506 B. Ratings: Continuous duty - If rating is not indicated, provide capacity exceeding peak load by 50 percent minimum C. Description: Self-cooled, 2-windings 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA LOW VOLTAGE DRY-TYPE TRANSFORMERS WOODARD & CURRAN 26 22 00-6 2.06 VIBRATION ISOLATOR A. Vibration Isolator shall consist of rigid steel frames containing minimum 1-1/4 inch (32mm) thick neoprene elements at the top and steel spring. The ratio of the spring diameter divided by the compressed spring height shall be no less than 0.8. Springs shall have a minimum additional travel to solid equal to 50 percent of the rated deflection. The spring element shall be seated in a steel washer reinforced neoprene cup on the bottom. The neoprene element and the cup shall have neoprene bushings projecting through the steel box. Spring diameters and hanger box lower hole sizes shall be large enough to permit the hanger rod to swing through a 30 degree arc from side to side before contacting the cup bushing and short circuiting the spring. Submittals shall include a hanger drawing showing the 30 degree capability. Hangers shall be type 30N as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. or approved equal. 2.07 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Comply with safety requirements of IEEE C2 B. Arrange equipment to provide adequate spacing for access and for circulation of cooling air C. Identify transformers and install warning signs according to Division 26 Section Electrical Identification. D. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B. 3.02 GROUNDING A. Separately Derived Systems: Comply with NFPA 70 requirements for connecting to grounding electrodes and for bonding to metallic piping near the transformer 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to supervise the field assembly and connection of components and the testing and adjusting of transformer components and accessories. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA LOW VOLTAGE DRY-TYPE TRANSFORMERS WOODARD & CURRAN 26 22 00-7 C. Test Objectives: To ensure transformer is operational within industry and manufacturer's tolerances, is installed according to the Contract Documents, and is suitable for energizing D. Test Labeling: On satisfactory completion of tests for each transformer, attach a dated and signed Satisfactory Test label to tested component E. Schedule tests and provide notification at least 7 days in advance of test commencement F. Report: Submit a written report of observations and tests. Report defective materials and installation G. Tests: Include the following minimum inspections and tests according to manufacturer's written instructions. Comply with IEEE C57.12.91 for test methods and data correction factors. 1. Inspect accessible components for cleanliness, mechanical and electrical integrity, and damage or deterioration. Verify that temporary shipping bracing has been removed. Include internal inspection through access panels and covers. 2. Inspect bolted electrical connections for tightness according to manufacturers’ published torque values or, if not available, those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B. H. Test Failures: Compare test results with specified performance or manufacturer's data. Correct deficiencies identified by tests and retest. Verify that transformers meet specified requirements. 3.04 STARTUP & COMMISSIONING A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. 3.05 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. END OF SECTION This page intentionally left blank 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA PANELBOARDS WOODARD & CURRAN 26 24 16-1 SECTION 26 24 16 PANELBOARDS (FILED SUB-BID REQUIRED) PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 PROPRIETARY NOTIFICATION A. The Owner has determined that it is in the Public interest to include in the Specifications for the Project, the requirement that the Panelboards are described in this Section be a proprietary item, specifically Eaton/Cutler Hammer, or approved equal. The reason for this determination is that the Town has standardized panelboards by the same manufacturer, thus ensuring the following: interchangeability of parts to simplify and reduce the cost of maintenance and repairs, one common vendor to contact for service, familiarity with operators regarding operation and maintenance requirements, and common control schemes. B. Should the Contractor request a substituted system, the Owner must evaluate and determine whether the requested substitution is equal based upon the following: 1. It is at least equal in quality, durability, appearance, strength and design. 2. It will perform at least equally the function imposed by the general design for the public work being contracted for or the material being purchased. 3. It conforms substantially, even with deviations, to the detailed requirements, for the items included in this and related sections. C. Should a substituted system be approved by the Owner, the Contractor shall be responsible for all costs of redesign, including efforts associated with review and approval of the substituted system, necessary to incorporate the substituted system into the existing facility and remaining aspects of the Project. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Section Includes 1. Provide the labor, tools, equipment, and materials necessary to install panelboards in accordance with this Section and applicable reference standards listed in Article 1.03. 2. This section includes power distribution panelboards, and lighting and power panelboards rated 600 volts or less. B. Related Documents 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA PANELBOARDS WOODARD & CURRAN 26 24 16-2 1. Division 26: Section 26 05 00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 2. Division 26: Section 26 05 33 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 3. Division 26: Section 26 05 26 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 4. Division 26: Section 26 43 00 SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES 1.03 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Measurement and payment requirements: per Division 01 General Requirements. 1.04 REFERENCES A. Reference Standards 1. NEMA PB 1 – Panelboards 2. NEMA PB 1.1 – Instructions for Safe Installation, Operation, and Maintenance of Panelboards Rated 600 Volts or Less 3. NEMA AB 1- Molded Case Circuit Breakers 4. UL 50 – Enclosures for Electrical Equipment 5. UL 67 – Panelboards 6. UL 489 – Molded – Case Circuit Breakers and Circuit Breaker Enclosures 7. CSA Standard C22.2 No. 29-M1989 – Panelboards and Enclosed Panelboards 8. CSA Standard C22.2 No. 5-M91 – Molded Case Circuit Breakers 9. Federal Specification W-P-115C – Type I Class I 10. Federal Specification W-C-375B/Gen – Circuit Breakers, Molded Case, Branch Circuit And Service 11. Federal Specification W-C-865C – Fusible Switches 12. NFPA 70 – National Electrical Code (NEC) 13. ASTM – American Society of Testing Materials 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA PANELBOARDS WOODARD & CURRAN 26 24 16-3 1.05 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination, Sequencing, and Scheduling: per Division 01 General Requirements. 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. 1. Product data for each type panelboard specified 2. Approval documents shall include drawings. Drawings shall contain overall panelboard dimensions, interior mounting dimensions, and wiring gutter dimensions. The location of the main, branches, and solid neutral shall be clearly shown. In addition, the drawing shall illustrate one line diagrams with applicable voltage systems. 3. Panel schedules for installation in panelboards. Submit final versions after load balancing. B. Furnish manufacturer's product data, test reports, and materials certifications as required. 1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. 1.09 SITE CONDITIONS A. Existing Conditions: per Division 01 General Requirements. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturer List 1. Eaton/Cutler Hammer 2. Or Engineer Approved Equal 2.02 POWER DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS A. Panelboard Interior: 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA PANELBOARDS WOODARD & CURRAN 26 24 16-4 1. Power Distribution Panelboards shall be rated 600 Vac or 250 Vdc maximum. Continuous main current ratings as indicated on associated schedules not to exceed 1200 amperes maximum. Panelboard bus current ratings shall be determined by heat-rise tests conducted in accordance with UL 67. 2. Provide UL Listed short circuit current ratings (SCCR) as indicated on the associated schedules not to exceed the lowest interrupting capacity rating of any circuit breaker installed with a maximum of 200,000 RMS symmetrical amperes. Main lug and main breaker panelboards shall be suitable for use as Service Equipment when application requirements comply with UL 67 and NEC Articles 230.VI and VII. 3. The panelboard interior shall have three flat bus bars stacked and aligned vertically with glass reinforced polyester insulators laminated between phases. The molded polyester insulators shall support and provide phase isolation to the entire length of bus. 4. The bussing shall be fully rated with sequentially phased branch distribution. Panelboard bussing rated 100 through 600 amperes shall be aluminum. Bussing rated 800 amperes and above shall be plated copper. Bus bar plating shall run the entire length of the bus bar. The entire interleaved assembly shall be contained between two (2) U-shaped steel channels, permanently secured to a galvanized steel-mounting pan by fasteners. 5. Interior trim shall be of dead-front construction to shield user from all energized parts. Main circuit breakers through 800 amperes shall be vertically mounted. Main circuit breaker and main lug interiors shall be field convertible for top or bottom incoming feed. 6. A solidly bonded equipment ground bar shall be provided. 7. Solid neutral shall be equipped with a full capacity bonding strap for service entrance applications. Gutter-mounted neutral will not be acceptable. 8. Nameplates shall contain system information and catalog number or factory order number. Interior wiring diagram, neutral wiring diagram, UL Listed label, and Short Circuit Current Rating shall be displayed on the interior or in a booklet format. Leveling provisions shall be provided for flush mounted applications. B. Group Mounted Circuit Breakers through 1200A: 1. Circuit breaker(s) shall be group mounted plug-on with mechanical restraint on a common pan or rail assembly. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA PANELBOARDS WOODARD & CURRAN 26 24 16-5 2. The interior shall have three flat bus bars stacked and aligned vertically with glass reinforced polyester insulators laminated between phases. The molded polyester insulators shall support and provide phase isolation to the entire length of bus. 3. Circuit breakers equipped with line terminal jaws shall not require additional external mounting hardware. Circuit breakers shall be held in mounted position by a self-contained bracket secured to the mounting pan by fasteners. Circuit breakers of different frame sizes shall be capable of being mounted across from each other. 4. Line-side circuit breaker connections are to be jaw type. 5. All unused spaces provided, unless otherwise specified, shall be fully equipped for future devices, including all appropriate connectors and mounting hardware. C. Electronic Trip Molded Case Standard Function 80% Rated Circuit Breakers: 1. All electronic circuit breakers shall have the following time/current response adjustments: Long Time Pickup, Long Time Delay, Short Time Pickup, Short Time Delay, Ground Fault Pickup, Ground Fault Delay, and Instantaneous settings. Each adjustment shall have discrete settings (fully adjustable) and shall be independent of all other adjustments. 2. Circuit breaker trip system shall be a microprocessor-based true RMS sensing designed with sensing accuracy through the thirteenth (13th) harmonic. Sensor ampere ratings shall be as indicated on the associated schedule or drawings. 3. Local visual trip indication for overload, short circuit and ground fault trip occurrences. 4. Long Time Pickup indication to signal when loading approaches or exceeds the adjustable ampere rating of the circuit breaker shall be provided. 5. Furnish thermal magnetic molded case circuit breakers for 250A frames and below. D. Thermal Magnetic Molded Case Circuit Breakers: 1. Molded case circuit breakers shall have integral thermal and instantaneous magnetic trip in each pole. 2. Circuit protective devices shall be molded case circuit breakers. Circuit breakers shall be standard interrupting. Ampere ratings shall be as shown on the drawings. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA PANELBOARDS WOODARD & CURRAN 26 24 16-6 E. Enclosures: 1. Type 1 Boxes: a. Boxes shall be hot zinc dipped galvanized steel constructed in accordance with UL 50 requirements. Unpainted galvannealed steel is not acceptable. b. Boxes shall have removable blank end walls and interior mounting studs. Interior support bracket shall be provided for ease of interior installation. c. Maximum enclosure dimensions shall be 44” wide and 9.5” deep. 2. Type 1 Trim Fronts: a. Trim front steel shall meet strength and rigidity requirements per UL 50 standards. Shall have an ANSI 49 medium gray enamel electrodeposited over cleaned phosphatized steel. b. Trim front shall be hinged 1-piece with door available in flush or surface mount as indicated on the panel schedules. Trim front door shall have rounded corners and edges free of burrs. A clear plastic directory cardholder shall be mounted on the inside of the door. c. Locks shall be cylindrical tumbler type with larger enclosures requiring sliding vault locks with 3-point latching. All lock assemblies shall be keyed alike. One (1) key shall be provided with each lock. 3. Type 3R, 5 and 12: a. Enclosures shall be constructed in accordance with UL 50 requirements. Enclosures shall be painted with ANSI 49 gray enamel electrodeposited over cleaned phosphatized steel b. All doors shall be gasketed and be equipped with a tumbler type vault lock and two (2) additional quarter turn fasteners. A clear plastic directory cardholder shall be mounted on the inside of door. All lock assemblies shall be keyed alike. One (1) key shall be provided with each lock c. Maximum enclosure dimensions shall not exceed 44” wide and 14.5” deep. 2.03 LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE PANELBOARDS A. Lighting and Appliance Panelboards shall be designed for three phase, four wire, solid neutral, 60-hertz service rated for 480/277 volt or 120/208V service as indicated. Where main circuit breakers are indicated on the Drawings, provide main circuit breaker type interiors. Back-fed branch circuit breakers shall not be utilized for main circuit breakers. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA PANELBOARDS WOODARD & CURRAN 26 24 16-7 B. Panelboards shall be flush or surface mounted, etc., as indicated by panel schedule; code gauge galvanized steel boxes and enameled steel fronts sized for minimum 6" minimum side, top and bottom gutters, or greater as required by NEC. C. Each panel shall have door in door trim with full length piano hinge to allow for access to wireways. D. Each panel shall have door provided with cylinder lock and latch allowing for common key access to each panel. Each panel shall have fully typed out directory indicating outlets, fixtures, devices and locations served by the intended circuit. Panelboards for use as service disconnecting means shall additionally conform to UL 869. E. Mechanical lugs furnished with panelboards shall be cast copper or copper alloys of sizes suitable for the conductors indicated to be connected thereto. Panelboards shall have fully capacity neutral bus, ground bus and bolt-on circuit breakers. F. Circuit breakers shall be molded-case, thermal-magnetic, quick-make, quick- break, bolt-in type. Interrupting rating of circuit breakers shall be as indicated. Provide with suitable handle locks where indicated. Where interrupting rating is not indicated, panels for 120/208 volts service shall have breakers with 10,000 ampere RMS minimum interrupting rating at 240 volts, main circuit breakers where indicated shall have 25,000 ampere RMS minimum interrupting rating at 240 volts. Panels for 480/277 volt service shall have breakers with 14,000 ampere RMS minimum interrupting rating at 480 volts. 2.04 SPD DEVICES A. Refer to Section 26 43 00 “Surge Protective Devices" for specific requirements. B. IEEE C62.41, integrally mounted, plug-in style, solid-state, parallel-connected, sine-wave tracking suppression and filtering modules. C. Minimum single-impulse current rating shall be as follows: 1. Line to Neutral: 100,000A 2. Line to Ground: 100,000A 3. Neutral to Ground: 50,000A D. Protection modes shall be as follows: 1. Line to neutral 2. Line to ground 3. Neutral to ground 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA PANELBOARDS WOODARD & CURRAN 26 24 16-8 E. EMI/RFI Noise Attenuation Using 50-ohm Insertion Loss Test: 55dB at 100kHz. F. Accessories shall include the following: 1. Form-C contacts, one normally open and one normally closed, for remote monitoring of system operation. Contacts to reverse position on failure of any surge diversion module. 2. Audible alarm activated on failure of any surge diversion module. 2.05 ENCLOSURES A. Reference Specification 26 05 33 “Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems” for approved Enclosure Types. 2.06 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 PANELBOARDS A. Install panelboards and accessory items in accordance with NEMA PB 1.1,"General Instructions for Proper Installation, Operation, and Maintenance of Panelboards Rated 600 Volts or Less" and manufacturers' written installation instructions. B. Mounting Heights: Top of trim shall be 6' 2" above finished floor, except as indicated. C. Circuit Directory: Typed and reflective of final circuit changes required to balance panel loads. Obtain approval before installing. Number branch circuit devices accordingly to correspond to circuit directory. D. After substantial completion, conduct load balancing measurements and circuit changes. Should the difference at any panelboard between phases exceed 20 percent, rearrange circuits in the panelboard to balance the phase loads within 20 percent. Take care to maintain proper phasing for multi-wire branch circuits. E. Make equipment grounding connections for panelboards as indicated. F. Provide ground continuity to main electrical ground bus indicated. G. Electrical Tests: Include the following items performed in accordance with manufacturer's instructions: 1. Ground resistance test on system and equipment ground connections. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA PANELBOARDS WOODARD & CURRAN 26 24 16-9 2. Test main and subfeed overcurrent protective devices. 3.02 CLEANING A. Upon completion of installation, inspect all panelboards and transformers. Remove paint splatters and other spots, dirt, and debris. Touch up scratches and marks of finish to match original finish. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. 3.04 STARTUP & COMMISSIONING A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. END OF SECTION This page intentionally left blank 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA WIRING DEVICES WOODARD & CURRAN 26 27 26-1 SECTION 26 27 26 WIRING DEVICES (FILED SUB-BID REQUIRED) PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. The Contractor shall provide the labor, tools, equipment, and materials necessary to furnish and install wiring devices in accordance with the plans and as specified herein. B. This section includes the following: 1. Flush Wiring Devices 2. Control Relays 3. Motor Control Relays/Contactors 4. Control Stations 5. Door Intrusion Switches 6. Stand Alone Smoke Detectors 1.01 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Measurement and payment requirements: per Division 01 General Requirements. 1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 specification sections, apply to this section. B. Related Sections 1. Division 26: Section 26 05 00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 2. Division 26: Section 26 05 19 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 3. Division 26: Section 26 05 26 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA WIRING DEVICES WOODARD & CURRAN 26 27 26-2 4. Division 26: Section 26 05 33 RACEWAYS, BOXES & SUPPORTING DEVICES 1.03 REFERENCES A. Reference Standards 1. NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE (NEC) 2. UNDERWRITER'S LABORATORIES, INC. (UL) 3. NATIONAL ELECTRICAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (NEMA) COMPLIANCE 1.02 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination, Sequencing, and Scheduling: per Division 01 General Requirements. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Furnish manufacture’s product data, test reports, and materials certifications in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. 1.04 SITE CONDITIONS A. Existing Conditions: per Division 01 General Requirements. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 FLUSH WIRING DEVICES A. Wall Switches 1. Wall Switches shall be specifications grade, toggle operated, quiet type alternating current (ac) switches, NEMA heavy duty class, rated at 20 ampere, 120/277 v. Provide matching two pole, 3-way or 4-way switches as indicated. Switches shall be white in colar. Comply with UL 20 and NEMA Standards. 2. Where two or more switches are to be installed at the same location, they shall be mounted in one-piece ganged switch boxes, with appropriate gang cover plate. 3. Provide waterproof switches where indicated. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA WIRING DEVICES WOODARD & CURRAN 26 27 26-3 4. Explosion Proof Switches: Explosion Proof/Dust-Ignition Proof Wall Switches shall be specifically approved by Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc., or Factory Mutual for particular "Class," "Division," and "Group" of hazardous locations involved. Switches shall be tumbler operated equal to Appleton EDS Series, Crouse Hinds, or approved equal. Switches shall be factory sealed specifically designed to a U.L. standard so that any arcing devices are within a chamber which contains any explosions. Switches shall be approved for installation without any additional external sealing fittings. Switches shall be specifically designed to accept conduit sizes indicated on the Contract Drawings. B. Receptacles 1. Convenience receptacles for interior use shall be specification grade, industrial heavy duty type, 20-ampere, 125-volt ac, 2-pole, 3-wire, back wiring, metal plaster ears, single, duplex (as indicated) grounded, conforming to NEMA FB 11, NEMA WD 1 and to the 5-20R configuration in NEMA WD 6. Receptacles shall be white in color. Provide waterproof in-use covers where indicated and required. 2. Ground Fault Interrupter (GFI) Receptacles shall be specification grade. Provide 20 ampere, "feed through" type ground fault circuit interrupter, with integral heavy duty NEMA 5 20R duplex receptacles arranged to protect connected downstream receptacles on same circuit. Provide unit designed for installation in a 2 3/4 inch deep outlet box without adapter, grounding type, Class A, Group 1. Receptacles shall be white in color. Provide waterproof in-use covers where indicated and required. 3. Locking receptacles shall conform to NEMA WD 6. One (1) plug shall be furnished with each locking receptacle. 4. Receptacles shall meet the requirements for retention of plugs, overload, temperature, and assembly security in accordance with NEMA WD 1. 5. Special purpose outlets: NEMA heavy duty class, grounding type with matching plug. Coordinate NEMA type with equipment manufacturer. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA WIRING DEVICES WOODARD & CURRAN 26 27 26-4 6. Explosion Proof Receptacles: Explosion Proof/Dust-Ignition Proof Receptacles shall be specifically approved by Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc., or Factory Mutual for particular "Class," "Division," and "Group" of hazardous locations involved. Receptacles installed in hazardous locations shall be factory sealed as provide by Appleton Contendor U-Line Series, Crouse Hinds, or approved equal. Receptacles shall be 20 amp rated designed with dead front construction. To operate, a matching plug shall be utilized. When the plug is inserted and rotated, the receptacle shall be activated. Receptacles shall be approved for installation without any additional external sealing fittings. Receptacle enclosures shall be constructed of copper-free aluminum and malleable iron. Provide each receptacle with matching 20 amp plug. Plugs shall be constructed of thermoplastic polyester specifically designed for use where moisture and corrosion may be present. Plugs shall be designed for use with general purpose receptacles in non-classified locations. Provide each receptacle with two (2) spare matching plugs. C. Device Plates 1. Wall plates for flush wall switches and receptacles shall be the appropriate type and size and shall match the wiring devices for which they are intended. Dimensions for openings in wall plates shall be in accordance with NEMA WD 1. 2. Process area: Plates in process areas for receptacles, telephone, etc., shall Galvanized steel, smooth rolled outer edge sized to fit box. 3. Device plates in general areas for receptacles shall be stainless steel. 4. Device Plates in finished spaces (office) shall be impact resistant plastic, white in color. D. Weatherproof Device Plates 1. Provide weatherproof device plates where indicated and required. 2. Interior and Exterior Wet Locations: Device plates for interior and exterior wet locations shall be die-cast aluminum, gasket, with corrosion resistant screws to match plate cover finish. Provide weatherproof receptacles with vertical “in-use” covers for complete weatherproofing when plug is inserted. 3. Chemical Feed Room: Device plates for installation in the Chemical Feed Room shall be gasketed nonmetallic polyvinyl chloride (PVC), or fiberglass units, for complete weatherproofing and protection against corrosive chemicals. Provide receptacles with vertical “in-use” covers for complete weatherproofing when plug is inserted. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA WIRING DEVICES WOODARD & CURRAN 26 27 26-5 2.02 CONTROL RELAYS A. Control Relays: Allen Bradley Bulletin 700-H Series, Square D or equal. B. 120V coil as required or as indicated. C. Number of poles as indicated or required. D. Electrically Held, except as noted. E. Enclosure shall be NEMA-1, except as noted. 2.03 MOTOR CONTROL RELAYS/CONTACTORS A. Allen Bradley, Square D or equal. B. 120V and 277V coils as required or as indicated C. Number of poles as indicated or required. D. Horsepower rated for connected motor. E. Electrically Held, except as noted. F. Enclosure shall be NEMA-1, except as noted. G. 600V Rated. 2.04 CONTROL STATIONS A. All control stations shall be industrial, heavy duty type, with oil-tight construction and clearly marked legend plates. Enclosures shall be provided based upon location in accordance with NEMA requirements and as required for the area classifications as indicated and NEMA rating to meet environmental conditions of installed location. B. Enclosures shall be common or grouped mounted for devices in the same location. Devices shall include front mounted nameplates identifying function. C. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide control stations by one of the following: 1. Allen Bradley Company 2. Appleton Electric Company 3. Crouse-Hinds Company 4. Approved equal 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA WIRING DEVICES WOODARD & CURRAN 26 27 26-6 D. Selector Switches 1. Selector Switches shall be non-illuminated, standard knob operated rated for use at 120VAC. The knob operator insert shall be white in color. Units shall be rotary type with round or oval handles and positioning device to securely hold switch in selected position. Where shown on the Drawings selector switches shall be key type. 2. Provide compatible nameplate for each selector switch identifying intended functions: (I.E. "HAND/OFF/AUTO", "LOCAL/OFF/REMOTE", “JOG/OFF/AUTO”, ETC.) as indicated on the Contract Drawings. 3. Units shall be 30.5mm selector switches. E. Pushbuttons 4. Switches shall be non-illuminated momentary or maintained type rated for use at 120 VAC. Switches shall green in color for "START" pushbuttons, and shall be red in color for "STOP" pushbuttons. 5. Provide compatible nameplate for each pushbutton identifying intended functions (I.E. "STOP", "START", ETC.). 6. Emergency stop operators shall be mushroom style, 2-position push-pull type, with number of contacts as indicated on the Contract Drawings. Stations shall be provided with push-pull padlocking attachment and legend plate reading: "Push to Stop, Pull to Start.” 7. Units shall be 30.5mm pushbuttons. 2.05 DOOR INTRUSION SWITCHES A. Door intrusion switches shall be non-contact interlock position switches with a switching voltage of 120 VAC, 0.2A. Switch shall be UL listed and have a nominal break range of 1.2 inches, minimum lead lengths of 12", conduit connection of ½" NPT, and a hermetically sealed N.O. contact configuration. Enclosure shall be Nylon 6/6 and NEMA rating of 4X. Intrusion switches shall have a load rating of 84W. Intrusion switch shall be as manufactured by GE, Allen Bradley or approved equal. 2.06 STAND ALONE SMOKE DETECTORS A. Stand Alone Smoke Detectors shall be powered by 120vac with available battery backup. An LED power on indicator shall be provided for verification that the unit is active. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA WIRING DEVICES WOODARD & CURRAN 26 27 26-7 B. Unit shall be provided with test switch which shall electronically activate the chamber to simulate smoke and check for proper operation. Unit shall be provided with electronic horn with a level of 85 decibels at 10 feet. Unit shall meet the requirements of U.L Standard 217. C. Unit shall be provided with form C dry-contact for alarming to the facilities SCADA control panel. 2.07 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 WIRING DEVICES A. Wall Switches and Receptacles 1. Wall switches and receptacles shall be so installed that when device plates are applied, the plates will be aligned vertically to within 1/16-inch. 2. Ground terminal of each flush-mounted receptacle shall be bonded to the outlet box with an approved green bonding jumper. B. Device Plates 1. Device plates and receptacle cover plates for receptacles and light switches shall be suitably labeled, identifying the circuit number and the panel name; for example: RP1-12. 2. Device plates shall be identified on the inside of the plate by circuit number and panelboard. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA WIRING DEVICES WOODARD & CURRAN 26 27 26-8 C. Control Stations 1. Mount equipment so that sufficient access and working space is provided for ready and safe operation and maintenance. 2. Securely fasten equipment to walls or other surfaces on which they are mounted. Provide independent galvanized steel supports where no wall or other surface exists. 3. Install in conformance with National Electrical Code. 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. 3.03 STARTUP & COMMISSIONING A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. 3.04 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. END OF SECTION 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA ENCLOSED SWITCHES & CIRCUIT BREAKERS WOODARD & CURRAN 26 28 16-1 SECTION 26 28 16 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS (FILED SUB-BID REQUIRED) PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. This Section includes individually mounted enclosed switches and circuit breakers used for the following: 1) Service disconnecting means. 2) Feeder and branch-circuit protection. 3) Motor and equipment disconnecting means. B. Related Requirements: 1) Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 2) Section 26 05 00 Common Work Results for Electrical 3) Section 26 05 26 Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems 1.02 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Measurement and payment requirements: per Division 01 General Requirements. 1.03 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination, Sequencing, and Scheduling: per Division 01 General Require- ments. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of switch, circuit breaker, accessory, and component indicated. Include dimensions and manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, and finishes. A. Shop Drawings: For each switch and circuit breaker. 1) Dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details, including required clearances and service space around equipment. Show tabulations of installed devices, equipment features, and ratings. Include the following: 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA ENCLOSED SWITCHES & CIRCUIT BREAKERS WOODARD & CURRAN 26 28 16-2 a) Enclosure types and details. b) Current and voltage ratings. c) Short-circuit current rating. d) UL listing for series rating of installed devices. e) Features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual over-current protective devices and auxiliary components. f) Time-current curves, including selectable ranges for each type of circuit breaker. 2) Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring. Differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring. 2) Field Test Reports: Submit written test reports and include the following: 1) Test procedures used. 2) Test results that comply with requirements. 3) Results of failed tests and corrective action taken to achieve test results that comply with requirements. 3) Manufacturer's field service report. 4) Maintenance Data: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers and for components to include in maintenance manuals specified in Division 01. In addition to requirements specified in Division 01 Section 01 70 00 EXECUTION & CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS include the following: 1) Routine maintenance requirements for components. 2) Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting switches and circuit breakers. 3) Time-current curves, including selectable ranges for each type of circuit breaker. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. 1) Comply with NEMA AB 1 and NEMA KS 1. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA ENCLOSED SWITCHES & CIRCUIT BREAKERS WOODARD & CURRAN 26 28 16-3 2) Comply with UL #98, Enclosed Switches and UL #508, Industrial Control Equipment. 3) Federal Specification W-S-865- Heavy Duty Switches 4) Comply with NFPA 70. 5) Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for enclosed switches and circuit breakers, including clearances between enclosures, and adjacent surfaces and other items. Comply with indicated maximum dimensions. 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following conditions, unless otherwise indicated: 1) Ambient Temperature: Not less than minus 22 deg F (minus 30 deg C) and not exceeding 104 deg F (40 deg C). 2) Altitude: Not exceeding 6600 feet (2000 m). 1.07 COORDINATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of switches, circuit breakers, and components with other construction, including conduit, piping, equipment, and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels. 1.08 SITE CONDITIONS A. Existing Conditions: per Division 01 General Requirements. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS 1) Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1) Square D Co. 2) Eaton Corp.; Cutler-Hammer Products 3) General Electric Co.; Electrical Distribution & Control Division 4) Approved Equal 2.02 ENCLOSED SWITCHES 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA ENCLOSED SWITCHES & CIRCUIT BREAKERS WOODARD & CURRAN 26 28 16-4 A. Enclosed, Non-fusible Switch: NEMA KS 1, heavy duty type with lockable handle. 2) Rating: Voltage and number of poles as required for motor or equipment circuits being disconnected. Switches used for service entrance equipment shall bear a UL label and be rated for service entrance equipment. 3) Enclosed, Fusible Switch, 800A and Smaller: NEMA KS 1, heavy duty type with clips to accommodate specified fuses, lockable handle with two padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position. 4) Double Throw Safety Switches shall be unfused double throw with center OFF position, quick-make, quick-break mechanism, visible blades in the OFF position and safety handle. Rating, voltage and number of poles as required for the circuits being disconnected 2.03 ENCLOSED CIRCUIT BREAKERS A. Molded-Case Circuit Breaker: NEMA AB 1, with interrupting capacity to meet available fault currents. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time- current element for low-level overloads, and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable instantaneous, magnetic trip setting for circuit- breaker frame sizes 150 Amp through 400 Amp. 5) Molded-Case Circuit-Breaker Features and Accessories: Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles. Lugs shall be mechanical style suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and material of conductors. 6) Application Listing: Appropriate for application; Type SWD for switching fluorescent lighting loads; Type HACR for heating, air-conditioning, and refrigerating equipment. 7) Electronic Trip Unit Circuit Breakers (Frame sizes 400 Amp and larger): RMS sensing, interchangeable harmonic trip unit, LED trip indicators with the following field-adjustable settings: 1) Long-time pickup levels and adjustments (L). 2) Short-time pickup levels adjustments (S). 3) Instantaneous trip adjustments (I). 4) Ground fault pickup level, time delay, I2t response and adjustments (G). 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA ENCLOSED SWITCHES & CIRCUIT BREAKERS WOODARD & CURRAN 26 28 16-5 8) The circuit breaker operating handle shall be externally operable with the operating mechanism being an integral part of the box, not the cover. Provisions for padlocking the circuit breaker in the OFF position shall be provided. Enclosures shall have a dual cover interlock mechanism to prevent unintentional opening of the enclosure cover when the circuit breaker is ON and prevent turning the circuit breaker ON when the enclosure cover is open. The cover interlock mechanism shall have an externally operated override but the override shall not permanently disable the interlock mechanism. The tool used to override the cover interlock mechanism shall not be required to enter the enclosure in order to override the interlock. 2.05 DOUBLE THROW SAFETY SWITCHES A. Unfused, double throw with center OFF position, quick- make, quick-break mechanism, visible blades in the OFF position and safety handle. Rating, voltage and number of poles as required for the circuits being disconnected. 2.06 ENCLOSURES A. NEMA AB 1 and NEMA KS 1 to meet environmental conditions of installed location. 1) Reference Specification 26 05 34 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS for approved enclosure types. 2.07 FACTORY FINISHES A. Manufacturer's standard prime-coat finish ready for field painting. B. Finish: Manufacturer's standard grey paint applied to factory-assembled and - tested enclosures before shipping. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA ENCLOSED SWITCHES & CIRCUIT BREAKERS WOODARD & CURRAN 26 28 16-6 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine elements and surfaces to receive enclosed switches and circuit breakers for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Mount equipment so that sufficient access and working space is provided for ready and safe operation and maintenance. B. Securely fasten equipment to walls or other structural surfaces on which they are mounted. Provide independent galvanized steel supports where no wall or other structural surface exists C. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and temporary blocking of moving parts from enclosures and components. D. Install in conformance with National Electrical Code. 3.03 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs as specified in Division 26. B. Enclosure Nameplates: Label each enclosure with engraved metal or laminated- plastic nameplate mounted with corrosion-resistant screws. C. For double throw switches identify source of each service identify source of each service. 3.04 CONNECTIONS A. Install equipment grounding connections for switches and circuit breakers with ground continuity to main electrical ground bus. B. Install power wiring. Install wiring between switches and circuit breakers, and control and indication devices. C. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B. 3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA ENCLOSED SWITCHES & CIRCUIT BREAKERS WOODARD & CURRAN 26 28 16-7 A. Testing: After installing enclosed switches and circuit breakers and after electrical circuitry has been energized, demonstrate product capability and compliance with requirements. 1) Procedures: Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test indicated in NETA ATS, Section 7.5 for switches and Section 7.6 for molded-case circuit breakers. Certify compliance with test parameters. 2) Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest. 3.06 CLEANING A. On completion of installation, inspect interior and exterior of enclosures. Remove paint splatters and other spots. Vacuum dirt and debris; do not use compressed air to assist in cleaning. Repair exposed surfaces to match original finish. 3.07 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. END OF SECTION 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA ENCLOSED SWITCHES & CIRCUIT BREAKERS WOODARD & CURRAN 26 28 16-8 This page intentionally left blank 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS WOODARD & CURRAN 26 29 13-1 SECTION 26 29 13 ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS (FILED SUB-BID REQUIRED) PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes 1. General-purpose controllers and motor starters rated 600 V and less that are supplied as enclosed units. B. Related Requirements 1. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 2. Division 26: Section 26 05 00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 3. Division 26: Section 26 05 33 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 4. Division 26: Section 26 05 26 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 1.02 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Measurement and payment requirements: per Division 01 General Requirements. 1.03 REFERENCES A. Reference Standards. 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination, Sequencing, and Scheduling: per Division 01 General Requirements. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with the Division 01 General Requirements. B. Product Data: For each type of enclosed controller. Include dimensions and manufacturer's technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, and finishes. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS WOODARD & CURRAN 26 29 13-2 C. Shop Drawings: For each enclosed controller. 1. Dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details, including required clearances and service space around equipment. Show tabulations of installed devices, equipment features, and ratings. Include the following: a. Enclosure types and details. b. Nameplate legends. c. Short-circuit current rating of integrated unit. d. UL listing for series rating of over-current protective devices in combination controllers. e. Features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual over-current protective devices in combination controllers. f. Listing of the motor starters to be furnished with their location and equipment to be controlled and identified 2. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring. Differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring. D. Load-Current and Overload-Relay Heater List: Compile after motors have been installed and arrange to demonstrate that selection of heaters suits actual motor nameplate full-load currents. E. Closeout and Maintenance Material Submittals: per Division 01 General Requirements. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Maintain, within 100 miles (160 km) of Project site, a service center capable of providing training, parts, and emergency maintenance and repairs. C. Source Limitations: Obtain enclosed controllers of a single type through one source from a single manufacturer. D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. E. Comply with NEMA Standard ICS2 110, General Standards for Manual and Magnetic Controllers. F. Comply with NEMA Standard ICS2 321 AC General Purpose Class A Controller for Squirrel Cage Induction Motors, 600 volts and less. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS WOODARD & CURRAN 26 29 13-3 G. UL #508, Industrial Control Equipment. H. Comply with NFPA 70. I. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for enclosed controllers, including clearances between enclosed controllers, and for adjacent surfaces and other items. Comply with indicated maximum dimensions. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. B. Store enclosed controllers indoors in clean, dry space with uniform temperature to prevent condensation. Protect enclosed controllers from exposure to dirt, fumes, water, corrosive substances, and physical damage. C. If stored in areas subjected to weather, cover enclosed controllers to protect from weather, dirt, dust, corrosive substances, and physical damage. Remove loose packing and flammable materials from inside controllers; install electric heating of sufficient wattage to prevent condensation. 1.08 COORDINATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of enclosed controllers with other construction including conduit, piping, equipment, and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels. B. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. C. Coordinate features of enclosed controllers and accessory devices with pilot devices and control circuits to which they connect. D. Coordinate features, accessories, and functions of each enclosed controller with ratings and characteristics of supply circuit, motor, required control sequence, and duty cycle of motor and load. 1.09 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Spare Fuses: Furnish one spare for every five installed, but not less than one set of three of each type and rating. 2. Indicating Lights: Two of each type installed. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS WOODARD & CURRAN 26 29 13-4 1.10 SITE CONDITIONS 1. Existing Conditions: per Division 01 General Requirements. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Manual and Magnetic Enclosed Controllers: a. Square D Co b. ABB Power Distribution, Inc.; ABB Control, Inc. Subsidiary. c. Eaton Corp.; Cutler-Hammer Products. d. General Electrical Distribution & Control. e. Rockwell Automation Allen-Bradley Co.; Industrial Control Group. 2.02 ENCLOSED MANUAL MOTOR STARTERS A. Description: NEMA ICS 2, general purpose, Class A, with toggle action operated, horsepower rated with thermal and overload element. B. Provide in enclosure suitable for use with the manual motor starter. C. Enclosure cover shall include a white ON indicating light. D. Where indicated on the Drawings manual motor starters rated 600 volt, 3 pole and 240 volt, 2 pole, 20 amp without overload protection shall be provided to be used as disconnects. E. Enclosures: Flush- or surface-mounted cabinets as indicated or required to suite installation. 1. Reference Specification 26 05 33 “Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems” for approved enclosure types. 2.03 ENCLOSED MAGNETIC MOTOR STARTERS A. Description: NEMA ICS 2, Class A, full voltage, across the line, non-reversing, magnetic coil operated, horsepower rated, NEMA sized, with thermal overload bimetallic protection, unless otherwise indicated. Starter shall consist of one contactor, one overload relay, and a magnetic only circuit breaker. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS WOODARD & CURRAN 26 29 13-5 B. Control Circuit: 120 V; obtained from integral control power transformer of sufficient capacity to operate connected pilot, indicating and control devices, plus 100 percent spare capacity. Include two primary fuses for 480-volt systems, one secondary fuse and the other secondary leg grounded. For other voltage systems include one secondary fuse and the other secondary leg grounded. C. Combination Controller: Factory-assembled combination controller and disconnect switch. 1. Circuit-Breaker Disconnecting Means: NEMA AB 1, motor-circuit protector with field-adjustable, short-circuit trip coordinated with motor locked-rotor amperes. 2. Disconnecting means shall be provided with an external operating handle mounted in the flange of the enclosure which has a means to lock the handle in the off position. Mechanism shall prevent enclosure door from opening when handle is in the on position. D. Overload Relay: Ambient-compensated melting alloy, bimetallic type, interchangeable heaters with inverse-time-current characteristic and NEMA ICS 2, Class 20 tripping characteristic. Manually reset from outside the enclosure by means of an insulated button with normally open auxiliary contact for remote alarm purposes and separate heater elements sized for the full load ampere and service factor of the actual motors furnished. They shall have a visible trip indicator, a reset mechanism that resets on the upstroke only and a manual weld check which checks the overload contacts for welding. Provide with heaters or sensors in each phase matched to nameplate full-load current of specific motor to which they connect and with appropriate adjustment for duty cycle. E. Contactor contacts shall be silver alloy, double break, and shall be inspectable on NEMA Sizes 00 through 4 without the use of tools. Size 5 and larger shall be inspectable with standard tools. They shall be replaceable without removing the line, load, or control wiring from the starter, and replaceable without removing the starter from the enclosure. F. Contactor coils shall be the encapsulated type, and shall be replaceable on NEMA Sizes 00 through 4 without the use of tools. Size 5 and larger shall be replaceable with standard tools. They shall be replaceable without removing the line, load, or control wiring from the starter, and replaceable without removing the starter from the enclosure. G. Controls: Combination starters shall be provided with hand-off-auto selector switch, start push button, stop push button, red on indicating light (across coil) and green off indicating light. Operating controls, pilot and control devices shall be provided for each starter for proper operation. Pilot and control devices shall be mounted on the enclosure door. The auto position shall enable the motor to perform start/stop operations from remote dry contact from external control panel. Auxiliary contacts to remotely signal temperature control panel run and overload 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS WOODARD & CURRAN 26 29 13-6 conditions. Provisions to accept remote dry contact from stop station for shutdown of the motor. H. Enclosures: Flush- or surface-mounted cabinets as indicated or required to suite installation. 1. Outdoor Locations: NEMA Type 4X. Outdoor enclosures shall be equipped with a 50 watt, 120 volt, space heater with thermostatic control. 2. Reference Specification 26 05 33 “Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems” for approved enclosure types. I. The short circuit withstand rating of the combination starter is to be 65K RMS amperes symmetrical. 2.04 ACCESSORIES A. Devices shall be factory installed in controller enclosure, unless otherwise indicated. B. Push-Button Stations, Pilot Lights, and Selector Switches: NEMA ICS 2, heavy- duty type. C. Stop and Lockout Push-Button Station: Momentary-break, push-button station with a factory-applied hasp arranged so padlock can be used to lock push button in depressed position with control circuit open. D. Hand-Off –Automatic three position selector switch. E. Control Relays: Auxiliary and adjustable time-delay relays. 2.05 FACTORY FINISHES A. Manufacturer's standard prime-coat finish ready for field painting. B. Finish: Manufacturer's standard grey paint applied to factory-assembled and - tested enclosed controllers before shipping. 2.06 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and surfaces to receive enclosed controllers for compliance with requirements, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS WOODARD & CURRAN 26 29 13-7 B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 APPLICATIONS A. Select features of each enclosed controller to coordinate with ratings and characteristics of supply circuit and motor; required control sequence; duty cycle of motor, drive, and load; and configuration of pilot device and control circuit affecting controller functions. B. Select horsepower rating of controllers to suit motor controlled. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. For control equipment at walls, bolt units to wall or mount on lightweight structural-steel channels bolted to wall. For controllers not at walls, provide freestanding racks as required. B. Mount equipment so that sufficient access and working space is provided for ready and safe operation and maintenance. C. Securely fasten equipment to walls or other surfaces on which they are mounted. Provide independent galvanized steel supports reasonably close to motor where no wall or other surface exists. 3.04 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify enclosed controller components and control wiring according to Division 26 requirements. 3.05 CONTROL WIRING INSTALLATION A. Install wiring between enclosed controllers according to Division 26 requirements. B. Bundle, train, and support wiring in enclosures. C. Connect hand-off-automatic switch and other automatic-control devices where applicable. 1. Connect selector switches to bypass only manual- and automatic-control devices that have no safety functions when switch is in hand position. 2. Connect selector switches with enclosed controller circuit in both hand and automatic positions for safety-type control devices such as low- and high-pressure cutouts, high-temperature cutouts, and motor overload protectors. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS WOODARD & CURRAN 26 29 13-8 3.06 CONNECTIONS A. Conduit installation requirements are specified in other Division 26 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of conduit, fittings, and specialties. B. Ground equipment. C. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B. 3.07 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. B. Testing: Perform the following field quality-control testing: 1. Perform each electrical test and visual and mechanical inspection indicated in NETA ATS, Sections 7.5, 7.6, and 7.16. 2. Certify compliance with test parameters. 3. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest. C. Test Reports: Prepare a written report to record the following: 1. Test procedures used. 2. Test results that comply with requirements. 3. Test results that do not comply with requirements and corrective action taken to achieve compliance with requirements. 3.08 ADJUSTING A. Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges. 3.09 CLEANING A. Clean enclosed controllers internally, on completion of installation, according to manufacturer's written instructions. Vacuum dirt and debris; do not use compressed air to assist in cleaning. 3.10 STARTUP & COMMISSIONING A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS WOODARD & CURRAN 26 29 13-9 B. Verify that enclosed controllers are installed and connected according to the Contract Documents. C. Verify that electrical wiring installation complies with manufacturer's submittal and installation requirements in Division 16 Sections. D. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions. 3.11 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. END OF SECTION This page intentionally left blank 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES WOODARD & CURRAN 26 29 23-1 SECTION 26 29 23 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES (FILED SUB-BID REQUIRED) PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 PROPRIETARY NOTIFICATION A. The Owner has determined that it is in the Public interest to include in the Specifications for the Project, the requirement that the Variable Frequency Drives as described in this Section be a proprietary item, specifically ABB, or approved equal. The reason for this determination is that the Town has standardized VFD’s by the same manufacturer, thus ensuring the following: interchangeability of parts to simplify and reduce the cost of maintenance and repairs, one common vendor to contact for service, familiarity with operators regarding operation and maintenance requirements, and common control schemes. B. Should the Contractor request a substituted system, the Owner must evaluate and determine whether the requested substitution is equal based upon the following: 1. It is at least equal in quality, durability, appearance, strength and design. 2. It will perform at least equally the function imposed by the general design for the public work being contracted for or the material being purchased. 3. It conforms substantially, even with deviations, to the detailed requirements, for the items included in this and related sections. C. Should a substituted system be approved by the Owner, the Contractor shall be responsible for all costs of redesign, including efforts associated with review and approval of the substituted system, necessary to incorporate the substituted system into the existing facility and remaining aspects of the Project. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Section Includes 1. The Contractor shall provide the labor, tools, equipment, and materials necessary to furnish and install variable frequency drives in accordance with Section 01 Submittal Procedures. 2. Provide field programming and testing of each VFD. Program each VFD based on the actual motor sizes and ratings in the field. Provide adjustments to VFD parameters to account for European motors (if necessary). B. Related Requirements 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES WOODARD & CURRAN 26 29 23-2 1. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 specification sections, apply to work of this section. 2. Division 26: Section 26 05 00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 3. Division 26: Section 26 05 26 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 1.03 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Measurement and payment requirements: per Division 01 General Requirements. 1.04 REFERENCES A. Reference Standards 1. National Electrical Code® (NEC®). 2. UL® 198C - High-Interrupting Capacity Fuses; Current Limiting Type. 3. UL 198E - Class R Fuses. 4. NECA, "Standard of Installation" - published by National Electrical Contractors Association. 5. NEMA AB 1 - Molded Case Circuit Breakers. 6. NEMA ICS 2 - Industrial Control Devices, Controllers, and Assemblies. 7. NEMA ICS 6 - Enclosures for Industrial Controls and Systems. 8. NEMA KS 1 - Enclosed Switches. 1.05 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination, Sequencing, and Scheduling: per Division 01 General Requirements. 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. B. Furnish manufacturer's product data, test reports, and materials certifications as required. C. Submit the following in accordance with conditions of contract and Division 1 specification sections: 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES WOODARD & CURRAN 26 29 23-3 1. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data and installation instructions. 2. Wiring Diagrams: Submit power and control wiring diagrams for g connections to electrical power panels, feeders, and equipment. Differentiate between portions of wiring which are manufacturer installed and portions, which are field installed. 3. Motor Overloads: Submit for approval motor overload sizes for each new VFD furnished. Overload size shall be based on actual motor nameplate data and power factor correction size; where applicable. Include thermal overload compensation sizing information where motor(s) are operated at temperatures different than the motor controller. D. Closeout and Maintenance Material Submittals: per Division 01 General Requirements. 1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. B. Qualifications 1. Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of variable frequency drives of types and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years, or as indicated. 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. 1.09 SITE CONDITIONS A. Existing Conditions: per Division 01 General Requirements. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturer List 1. ABB 2. Or Engineer Approved Equal 2.02 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES (VFD) A. The VFD’s shall convert the input AC main power to an adjustable frequency and voltage as defined in the following sections. The VFD shall be UL Listed and 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES WOODARD & CURRAN 26 29 23-4 labeled as a complete unit, and shall include all accessories and requirements as described in this section and as identified on the Drawings. B. Each drive shall have a rating in horsepower (HP) equal to or greater than the motor name plate horsepower and each drive shall have a continuous output current rating equal to or greater than the motor full load amperes (FLA). C. Input Power: 1. The drive is available in two ranges and is self-adjustable to accept an input voltage range between; 380-500 V AC, three phase +/-10%, 525-690 V AC, three phase +/-10%. 2. Displacement power factor 0.98, lagging, over the entire speed range. The efficiency of the drive is a minimum of 97.5% at full load and speed. D. Environment: 1. Storage ambient temperature range: -40º C to 60º C (-40º to 140ºF). 2. Operating ambient temperature range without derating: IP21 / Type 10º C to 40º C (0º to 104º F). 3. The relative humidity range is 5% to 95% non-condensing. 4. Operating elevation: up to 1000 Meters (3,300ft) without derating. 5. Shock: 15G peak for 11ms duration 6. Vibration: 2.0 mm (0.0787 inches) displacement, 1G peak, EN50178 / EN60068-2-6 E. Output Power: 1. The output voltage is adjustable from 0 to rated motor voltage (400 V, 460 V, 575 V or 690 V). The output frequency range is adjustable from 0 to 320Hz. The inverter section will produce a pulse width modulated (PWM) waveform using latest generation IGBTs. F. Motor and Application Data: 1. The AC drives shall have the ability to operate variable or constant torque loads. The speed range shall be from a minimum speed of 1.0 Hz to a maximum speed of 60 Hz. The normal duty drive overload current shall be 100% continuous, 110% for 1 minute, and 150% for 3 seconds. The heavy duty drive overload current shall be 100% continuous, 150% for 1 minute, and 200% for 3 seconds. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES WOODARD & CURRAN 26 29 23-5 Equipment HP Voltage Application Duty Type Aeration Lift (Draft) Pump #1 26 480 Variable Torque Normal Aeration Lift (Draft) Pump #2 26 480 Variable Torque Normal Aeration Lift (Draft) Pump #3 26 480 Variable Torque Normal Aeration Lift (Draft) Pump #4 26 480 Variable Torque Normal RAS Pump #1 23 480 Variable Torque Normal RAS Pump #2 23 480 Variable Torque Normal RAS Pump #3 23 480 Variable Torque Normal RAS Pump #4 23 480 Variable Torque Normal Rotary Press Feed Pump #4 10 480 Variable Torque Normal G. Hardware: 1. The drive hardware employs the following power components: a. Diode or fully gated bridge on the input. b. AC line reactor on input for all ratings. c. Switching logic power supply operating from the DC bus. d. MOV protection available on Frame 9 only - phase to phase and phase to ground with ability to remove the phase to ground unit when applicable. e. Common Mode Capacitors available on all units. For use on ungrounded systems Frame 9 is orderable without and Frame 10 and higher removable by jumper. f. Gold plated plug-in connections on printed circuit boards. g. Microprocessor based inverter logic isolated from power circuits. h. Latest generation IGBT inverter section. i. Customer Interface common for all horsepower ratings. LCD digital display standard with choices for programming keypad and operator keys options. j. The Main Control Board is the same for all ratings to optimize spare parts stocking and exchange. k. Common control connection for all ratings. l. Optimized for 2kHz carrier frequency. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES WOODARD & CURRAN 26 29 23-6 m. Device Peripheral Interface (DPI) for connection to common options. n. Power LED viewable through the control box cover. o. Status LEDs for communications status, including embedded DPI status, adapter health and communications network status, viewable at HIM mounting plate. H. Control Logic: 1. The drive is programmable or self-adjusting for the following: a. Operating the drive with motor disconnected. b. Controlled shut down, when properly fused, with no component failure in the event of an output phase to phase or phase to ground short circuit and annunciation of the fault condition. c. Adjustable PWM carrier frequency within a range of 1-6 kHz. d. Selectable Sensorless Vector or V/Hz mode. e. Suitable for use on both Normal Duty and Heavy Duty loads. f. Multiple programmable stop modes including - Ramp, Coast, DC- Brake, Ramp-to-Hold and S-curve. g. Multiple acceleration and deceleration rates. h. All adjustments to be made with the door closed. i. Adjustable output frequency up to 320Hz. I. Terminal Blocks: 1. Separate terminal blocks are provided for control and power wiring. Power terminal blocks are rated a minimum of 90 ºC and marked for both inputs and outputs (L1, L2, L3 and U/T1, V/T2, W/T3). J. Power Conditioning: 1. The drive is designed to operate on an AC supply source that may contain line notching and up to 10% harmonic distortion. An input isolation transformer is not required for protection from normal line transients. If line conditions dictate the use of a transformer, the K factor should be 4.0 or less. K. Operator Interface: 1. Interface to the drive is provided via a removable Human Interface Module (HIM) with integral display. This unit is a 7 line by 21-character backlit LCD display with graphics capability. It is used to display drive operating conditions, fault / alarm indications and programming 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES WOODARD & CURRAN 26 29 23-7 information with full text support in multiple languages, including but not limited to English, German, French, Italian, Spanish, Portuguese and Dutch. 2. The keypads for these include programming keys, drive operating keys (Start, Stop, Direction, Jog and Speed Control), numeric keys for direct entry and an ALT (alternate function) key to allow some of the more common drive programming or operating functions to be accessed directly without knowledge of programming structure. These ALT functions include S.M.A.R.T. Start for fast and easy commissioning, View selection, Auto Manual operation, HIM removal under power, and device selection for programming. L. Input/Output Capabilities (Control Interface): 1. Analog Inputs/Outputs: a. Two (2) differential, +/-10V (bi-polar) / 20mA analog inputs, 11 bit plus sign, 160V common mode noise rejection. Both inputs shall be fully user programmable for a variety of uses including frequency command, process loop inputs, and others. Inputs are programmable for function, scaling, offset, signal loss detect and square root. b. Two (2) single-ended +/-10V (bi-polar) / 20mA analog output, 11 bit plus sign. Both shall be fully user programmable to be proportional to one of 25 process parameters including output frequency, output current, encoder feedback, output power, and others. Programming is available to select either absolute or signed values of these parameters. c. Input for motor protection thermistor (1.8k Ohm PTC). Drive will provide fault protection if temperature exceeds protection value. 2. Digital Inputs/Outputs: a. Six (6) digital inputs 24Vdc or 120Vac as shown. Inputs shall be configurable as sink or source. All inputs are individually programmable for functions from a list of 57 that include Start(3- wire control, Run(2-wire control), Stop, External fault, Speed select, Jog, Process PU functions, Level-sensitive Run, and others. 24V inputs draw 10mA each and require a 20V minimum for "ON" state and a maximum for 5V "OFF" state. 115Vac inputs draw 5mA each and require a 100V minimum for "ON" state and a maximum of 30V for "OFF" state. b. One input shall able to be set by a jumper to be a Hardware Enable. In this state, no microprocessor control is involved with disabling the drive outputs. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES WOODARD & CURRAN 26 29 23-8 c. Three (3) relay outputs, (1 form-C, 1 form-B, 1 form-A). Contact output ratings 240Vac/30Vdc, and require a 10mA minimum clearing current. Relays are programmable to 57 different conditions. All outputs shall have timers that control the amount of time before an output changes state. All outputs shall have an on- delay and off-delay timers relative to the function assigned to the input. M. Features: 1. Acceleration/Deceleration: Accel/Decel settings provide separate adjustments to allow either setting to be adjusted from 0.0 seconds to 3276.7 seconds. A second set of remotely selectable Accel/Decel settings is accessible through digital inputs. Programming capability allows the user to produce acc/dec profiles with linear or "S-Curve" characteristics that provide changing accel/decel rates. S-Curve profiles are adjustable. 2. Adjustments: The digital interface is used for all set-up, operation and adjustment settings. All adjustments are stored in nonvolatile memory (EEPROM). No potentiometer adjustments are used. The drive provides EEPROM memory for factory default values and user stored drive configurations. 3. Auto Economizer: This feature automatically reduces the output voltage when the drive is operating in an idle mode (drive output current less than programmed motor FLA). The voltage is reduced to minimize flux current in a lightly loaded motor thus reducing kW usage. If the load increases, the drive will automatically return to normal operation. 4. Auto / Manual Mode: The HIM can utilize the ALT function key to transfer the drive from Automatic mode to Manual mode and back. When in Auto mode, the drive receives its frequency command from the programmed source. When in Manual mode, control of the frequency command is transferred to the HIM speed control keys (or potentiometer). The user has the choice of preloading the HIM with the current “auto” frequency reference before transferring control to allow for smooth transitions without speed “jumps”. 5. Auto Restart: The drive provides up to nine automatic fault reset and restarts following a fault condition before locking out and requiring manual restart. The automatic mode is not applicable to a ground fault, shorted output faults and other internal microprocessor faults. The time between restarts is adjustable from 0.5 seconds to 30.0 seconds. 6. Bus Regulation: DC Bus regulation is available to reduce the possibility of drive overvoltage trips due to regenerative conditions. The drive’s reaction to a Bus voltage increase is programmable to one of 4 options. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES WOODARD & CURRAN 26 29 23-9 7. Communications Interface: The drive has the capability for either internally mounted or externally mounted communications interface cards. Internal cards use drive power and can operate at higher speeds. Externally mounted cards are separately powered and connected to the drive via a cable. The following should be available: a. Ethernet communications shall be available. 8. Control Mode: Programming provides the ability to select either Sensorless Vector or V / Hz mode. The sensorless vector mode uses motor nameplate data plus motor operating data such as IR drop, nominal flux current and flux up time to tune the motor / drive for optimum torque performance. The volts per hertz mode can be programmed straight line, preprogrammed fan curve or full custom patterns. 9. Current Limit: Programmable current limit from .1 amps to 150% of drive rated amps. Current limit is active for all drive states; accelerating, constant speed and decelerating. Both the source of the current limit value and the gain for responsiveness adjustment are programmable. The drive employs PI regulation with an adjustable gain for smooth transition in and out of current limit. 10. Fault Memory: The last eight fault codes with respective times are stored in the fault buffer. In addition, information about the drive’s condition at the time of the last fault such as operating frequency, output current, dc bus voltage and 28 other status conditions are stored at the time of fault. Information is maintained in the event of a power loss. A power up marker is also provided at each power up time to aid in analyzing fault data. The last eight alarm codes are also stored, without time stamp for additional troubleshooting reference. 11. Flying Start: The drive is capable of determining the speed and direction of a spinning motor and adjusts its output to "pick-up" the motor at the rotating speed. 12. Inertia Ride Through: The drive can respond to a loss of AC input power by adjusting the output frequency to create a regenerative situation in the motor. This regenerated energy recaptures the mechanical energy and converts it to electrical energy to power the drive logic during the power outage. This allows the drive to retain control of the motor during the power outage. Performance is based on the amount of system inertia and the length of the outage. The bus voltage level required to trigger inertia ride through is adjustable. Inertia Ride Through can be enabled or disable via programming. 13. Memory Storage: The drive stores the factory default settings in non- volatile memory (EEPROM) so that the user can return the drive to a known state. Additional memory storage locations in the drive, known as 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES WOODARD & CURRAN 26 29 23-10 User Sets can also be stored in the drive's non-volatile memory. Three User Set locations are offered. The user can name the sets per the process application and recall the configuration to active drive memory as needed. 14. Motor Overload Protection: The drive will provide Class 10 motor overload protection investigated by UL to comply with N.E.C. Article 430. Overload protection is speed sensitive and adjustable. To accommodate a variety of motors with different speed range capabilities, the frequency at which the overload begins to derate is programmable. A parameter is available to directly read the level of accumulated overload. 15. Process PI Control: The internal process PI regulator has proportional and integral gain adjustments as well as error inversion and output clamping functions. The feedback can be configured for normal or square root functions. If the feedback indicates that the process is moving away from the setpoint, the regulator will adjust the drive output until the feedback equals the reference. Process control can be enabled or disabled with a hardwired input. Transitioning in and out of process control can be tuned for faster response by preloading the integrator. Protection is provided for a loss of feedback or reference signal. A signal can also be provided to indicate that excess error exists. 16. Ride Through: The control logic is capable of "riding through" a power outage of at least 2 seconds in duration. The inverter section is shut off after an 28% drop in bus voltage to conserve power for the drive logic. The ride through method and trigger point are adjustable by the user. N. VFD Enclosures: 1. Where Enclosed Drives are required or specified, the following requirements shall be met. 2. Unit shall be wall or floor mountable and be NEMA Type 12 rated. 3. Unit shall be provided with lockable Main Input Circuit Breaker. 4. The enclosures shall be provided with an input Line Reactor with an Impedance rating of 3% for voltage transient protection, and for a degree of protection from harmonic distortion. 5. Units shall be provided with door mounted HAND/OFF/REMOTE selector switch. The HAND Mode shall provide a local start control. In the REMOTE Mode, the start control shall be provided via a remote contact in the SCADA control panel. Provide an extra set of contacts on the selector switch to monitor the switch position via the facilities SCADA control panel. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES WOODARD & CURRAN 26 29 23-11 6. Provide door mounted 120VAC push-to-test LED pilot lights for ON (green) and OFF (Red) indication. 7. Enclosure shall be provided with a door mounted Operator Interface as follows: a. Interface to the drive is provided via a removable Human Interface Module (HIM) with integral display. This unit is a 7 line by 21- character backlit LCD display with graphics capability. It is used to display drive operating conditions, fault / alarm indications and programming information with full text support in multiple languages, including but not limited to English, German, French, Italian, Spanish, Portuguese and Dutch. b. The keypads for these include programming keys, drive operating keys (Start, Stop, Direction, Jog and Speed Control), numeric keys for direct entry and an ALT (alternate function) key to allow some of the more common drive programming or operating functions to be accessed directly without knowledge of programming structure. These ALT functions include S.M.A.R.T. Start for fast and easy commissioning, View selection, Auto Manual operation, HIM removal under power, and device selection for programming. 8. VFD enclosures shall be furnished with integral Passive Harmonic Filters as follows: a. The harmonic filter shall be a Passive Filter as manufactured by MTE Corporation, General Electric, TCI or approved equal. The filter shall be physically sized to meet all requirements as shown on the Contract Drawings, and be furnished within a panel rated appropriately for the environment being installed. b. The harmonic filter shall treat all characteristic low frequency harmonics generated by a three phase full wave converter load (5th, 7th, 11th, 13th, etc.). c. The characteristic harmonics shall be suppressed without need for individual tuning or the requirement to phase shift against other harmonic sources. d. The harmonic filter shall be a passive series connected low pass filter consisting of an inductor capacitor network. Active electronic components shall not be used. e. The harmonic filter model supplied shall be capable of feeding a three phase input rectifier with or without line reactors, with or 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES WOODARD & CURRAN 26 29 23-12 without a DC link choke, with or without a combination line reactor and DC link choke. f. The harmonic filter shall not resonate with the power distribution system, nor attract harmonics from other sources. g. The filter shall be suitable for use with either a single nonlinear load or multiple nonlinear loads. h. The filter shall be listed per UL-508. i. In the operating range from full load to half load the power factor shall be .98 lagging to .95 leading. j. The harmonic filter in combination with the variable frequency drive shall meet all requirements specified in IEEE 519 for individual and total harmonic voltage and current distortion. The PCC for all voltage and current harmonic calculations and measurements shall be the input terminals of the harmonic filter. k. Total Demand Distortion (TDD) of the current at the input terminals of the harmonic filter shall not exceed the limits defined in Table 10-3 of IEEE 519. l. Total Harmonic Voltage Distortion (THVD) shall meet the requirements of Table 10-2 of IEEE-519. The harmonic filter supplier shall not be responsible for pre-existing voltage distortion caused by other harmonic sources. m. The harmonic filter shall suppress the characteristic harmonics to the levels specified provided that the line voltage unbalance is between 0% and 1%. If the line voltage unbalance is between 1% and 3% per ANSI C84.1-1995 the total harmonic input current distortion at any reduced load or speed condition shall not exceed the full load THID by more than 50% (i.e. if 5% THID required at full load, then not more than 7.5% THID at reduced load when voltage unbalance is more than or equal to 1% and less than or equal to 3%) n. The full load efficiency of the harmonic filter shall be greater than 98%. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES WOODARD & CURRAN 26 29 23-13 o. When fed from a power distribution system operating at the nominal distribution voltage, the harmonic filter output voltage at no load shall not be more than 4.6% of the nominal RMS and peak distribution voltage. p. When fed from a power distribution system operating at the nominal distribution voltage, the harmonic filter output voltage at full load shall not be less than the nominal RMS utilization voltage. q. All wiring shall be copper. r. At no load the harmonic filter shall not cause the voltage at the PCC to rise by more than 2%. s. To assure that the voltage source PWM inverters do not experience over voltage trips, the harmonic filter shall not cause the inverter bus voltage to increase by more than 5% when the filter is operating from the nominal distribution voltage. t. To assure that the filter will not reduce the life of a voltage source inverters bus capacitor, the output current waveform of the harmonic filter and the input current waveform of the inverter shall be consistent with the input waveform of an inverter fed from a drive equipped with a 3% minimum impedance line reactor. u. The harmonic filter shall be furnished will an integral output contactor. The output contactor shall have a 120Vac coil, and be energized upon the startup of the associated VFD. v. The harmonic filter shall be handled, stored, and installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommended installation practices as found in the manufacturer’s User Manual. Installation shall comply with all applicable local codes. w. To assure quality control and proper performance, the filter shall be manufactured by an ISO9001:2000 supplier in the supplier’s own manufacturing facility, and not by a contract manufacturer. Filters shall be fully tested prior to shipment. x. The harmonic filter shall be warranted to be free of defects in materials and workmanship for a period of one year from the date 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES WOODARD & CURRAN 26 29 23-14 of shipment when applied in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommended installation procedures. 2.03 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Examine areas and conditions under which VFDs are to be installed, and notify the Engineer in writing of conditions detrimental to proper completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Engineer. B. Per NEMA ICS 3.1, install equipment in accordance with the approved manufacturer's printed installation drawings, instructions, wiring diagrams, and as indicated on project drawings and the approved shop drawings. A field representative of the VFD manufacturer shall supervise the installation of all equipment, and wiring. C. Certified factory start-up shall be provided for each VFD provided. Service Engineers shall be employed by the manufacturer or be certified by the manufacturer and provide start-up services including physical inspection of drive and connected wiring and final adjustments to meet specified performance requirements. D. Make equipment grounding connections for each VFD in accordance with all applicable codes and as recommended by the manufacturer. E. Tighten connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in accordance with equipment manufacturer's published torque tightening values for equipment connectors. Where manufacturer's torquing requirements are not indicated, tighten connectors and terminals to comply with tightening torques specified in UL Standards 486A and B, and the MEC. F. Wall-mount the enclosures using spacers or standoffs (1/4 inch minimum) or per manufacturer recommendations. G. The VFD’s shall be warranted by the manufacturer for a period of one year, or the contracted period of any extended warrantee agreed upon by the Owner, after successful completion of the acceptance test. Any component failing to perform its function as specified and documented shall be repaired or replaced by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner. 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES WOODARD & CURRAN 26 29 23-15 B. Prior to energizing motor controller equipment, check with ground resistance tester, phase to phase and phase to ground insulation resistance levels to ensure requirements are fulfilled. C. Prior to energizing, check circuitry for electrical continuity, and for short circuits. 3.03 STARTUP & COMMISSIONING A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. 3.04 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. END OF SECTION This page intentionally left blank 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA FACILITY LIGHTNING PROTECTION WOODARD & CURRAN 26 41 00-1 SECTION 26 41 00 FACILITY LIGHTNING PROTECTION (FILED SUB-BID REQUIRED) PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes 1. Provide a complete lightning protection system for the following building(s) or structures: a. Headworks Building b. Gravity Thickners 2. The system shall provide safety for the building, the contents of the building and its occupants by preventing damage caused by lightning. The design shall be in strict accordance with this section of the specifications and with all contract drawings that apply. 3. The lightning protection system shall be installed by a firm actively engaged in the installation of Master Labeled Lightning Protection Systems and listed by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. The completed system shall comply with the latest editions of the National Fire Protection Association, Lightning Protection Standard, NFPA 780. 4. Furnish the labor, materials and services required for the completion of a functional and unobtrusive lightning protection system approved by the Owner, Engineer and Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. 1.02 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Measurement and payment requirements: per Division 01 General Requirements. 1.03 REFERENCES A. Reference Standards. B. The completed lightning protection system shall comply with the latest issue of the following standards and form a part of this specification. 1. NFPA 780, Standard for the Installation of Lightning Protection Systems. 2. UL 96A, Installation Requirements for Lightning Protection Systems. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA FACILITY LIGHTNING PROTECTION WOODARD & CURRAN 26 41 00-2 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination, Sequencing, and Scheduling: per Division 01 General Requirements. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with the Division 01 General Requirements. B. Submit shop drawings to the Engineer for approval prior to commencement of the installation. Shop drawings are to show the extent of the system layout designed specifically for the building(s) or structures included in the contract drawings along with details of the products to be used in the installation. C. Closeout and Maintenance Material Submittals: per Division 01 General Requirements. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. B. Furnish a UL Master Label or Letter of Findings upon completion of the installation. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. 1.08 SITE CONDITIONS A. Existing Conditions: per Division 01 General Requirements. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 STANDARD A. All materials used in the installation shall be new and shall comply in weight, size and composition as required by UL 96A and NFPA 780 and shall be labeled or listed by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. for use in lightning protection systems. The system furnished under this specification shall be the standard product of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the production of lightning protection equipment. The manufacturer shall be listed by UL as a recognized manufacturer of lightning protection components. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Class I materials shall be used on structures that do not exceed 75 feet in height, and Class II materials shall be used on structures that are 75 feet or higher above average grade. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA FACILITY LIGHTNING PROTECTION WOODARD & CURRAN 26 41 00-3 B. Copper materials shall not be mounted on aluminum surfaces including Galvalume, galvanized steel and zinc, and they shall not be mounted on any of these materials that have been painted. C. Aluminum materials shall not come into contact with the earth or with any material where rapid deterioration is possible. Aluminum materials shall not come into contact with copper surfaces. 2.03 AIR TERMINALS A. Air terminals shall project a minimum of ten inches above the object or area to be protected, and they shall be located at intervals not exceeding 20’-0” along ridges and along the perimeter of flat or gently sloping roofs. (Flat or gently sloping roofs include roofs that have a pitch less than 3:12.) Flat or gently sloping roofs exceeding 50’-0” in width shall be protected with additional air terminals located at intervals not exceeding 50’. Air terminals shall be located within two feet of roof edges and outside corners of protected areas. B. Air terminals shall be installed on stacks, flues, mechanical units and other metallic objects not located within a zone of protection and which have an exposed metal thickness less than 3/16 of an inch. Objects having an exposed metal thickness 3/16 of an inch or greater shall be connected to the lightning protection system as required by the specified standards using main size conductor and bonding plates having a minimum of 3 square inches of surface contact area. C. Air terminal bases shall be securely fastened to the structure in accordance with the specified standards including the use of adhesive that is compatible with the surface on which it is being used or they shall be fastened using stainless steel fasteners. D. Main conductors shall be sized in accordance with the specified standards for Class I or Class II structures and shall provide a two-way horizontal or downward path from each air terminal to connections with the ground system. Conductors shall be free of excessive splices, and no bend of a conductor shall form a final included angle of less than neither 90 degrees nor have a radius of bend less than 8 inches. E. Down conductors shall be sized in accordance with the specified standards, and in no case shall they be smaller than the main roof conductor. Down conductors shall be spaced at intervals averaging not more than 100 feet around the perimeter of the structure. In no case shall a structure have fewer than two down conductors. Where down conductors are installed in an exposed manner on the exterior of a structure and where they are subject to physical damage or displacement, guards shall be used to protect the conductor a minimum of 6 feet above grade. Metallic guards shall be bonded at each end. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA FACILITY LIGHTNING PROTECTION WOODARD & CURRAN 26 41 00-4 F. In buildings of structural steel frame construction, down conductors may be omitted, and roof conductors shall be connected to the structural steel frame at intervals not exceeding 100 feet along the perimeter of the structure. 2.04 ROOF PENETRATIONS A. Roof penetrations required for down conductors or for connection to structural steel framework shall be made using thru-roof assemblies with solid riser bars and appropriate roof flashing. Conductors shall not pass directly through the roof. The roofing contractor shall furnish and install the materials required to properly seal all roof penetrations of the lightning protection components. The roofing contractor shall also furnish and install any additional roofing materials or preparations required by the roofing manufacturer for lightning conductor runs in order to assure compatibility with the warranty for the roof. This would include any roof pads that may be required to protect the roof under each of the lightning protection components. 2.05 GROUND TERMINATIONS A. Ground electrodes shall be copper clad steel and aluminum, 5/8” diameter and 10 feet long. A ground electrode shall be provided for each down conductor. The down conductor shall be connected to the ground electrode using a bronze ground rod clamp having a minimum of 1 ½” contact between the ground electrode and the conductor measured parallel to the axis of the ground electrode or it shall be connected by an Ultraweld exothermically welded connection. Ground electrodes shall be located a minimum of 2 feet below grade and shall be installed below the frost line where possible (excluding shallow topsoil conditions). B. Where the structural steel framework is utilized as the down conductor for the system, ground terminals shall be connected to columns around the perimeter of the structure at intervals averaging not more than 60 feet apart. Columns shall be grounded using either bonding plates having 8 square inches of surface contact area or by Ultraweld exothermically welded connections. C. All ground electrodes shall be interconnected with a ground loop conductor on structures that exceed 60 feet in height. The ground loop conductor shall be sized in accordance with the specified standards, and in no case shall it be smaller than the main roof conductor. 2.06 EQUIPOTENTIAL GROUNDING A. Common interconnection of all grounded systems within the building shall be ensured by interconnecting to the lightning protection system using main size conductor and fittings. B. This interconnection shall include, but is not limited to, the electrical service, the telephone and antenna system grounds as well as all underground metallic piping 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA FACILITY LIGHTNING PROTECTION WOODARD & CURRAN 26 41 00-5 systems including water, gas and sewer. Interconnection to a gas or water line shall be made on the customer’s side of the meter. C. Grounded metal bodies located within the required bonding distance as determined by the bonding distance formula in the latest edition of NFPA-780 Standard for the Installation of Lightning Protection Systems shall be bonded to the lightning protection system using the required bonding conductors and connections. 2.07 SURGE PROTECTION A. Surge suppression shall be provided at all power service entrances and at entrances of conductive signal, data and communication services. 2.08 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. The installation shall be installed by an UL listed lightning protection installation company. 3.02 COORDINATION A. Coordinate the installation of the lightning protection system with other trades B. Coordinate all roof penetrations, fasteners and adhesive with the roofing contractor prior to installing any materials on the roof. 3.03 INSPECTION AND CERTIFICATION A. New Structures 1. Upon completion of the installation of the lightning protection system the Contractor shall furnish the UL Master Label issued by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. B. Additions or Renovations 1. If the protected structure is an addition to or is attached to an existing structure that does not have a functioning lightning protection system, the Contractor shall certify that the newly installed system complies with the specified standards. The Contractor shall also advise the Owner about any lightning protection work that may be required on the existing structure so that a Master Label may be obtained. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA FACILITY LIGHTNING PROTECTION WOODARD & CURRAN 26 41 00-6 2. If the protected structure is an addition to or is attached to an existing structure that does have a lightning protection system, the Contractor shall advise the owner of any additional work that may be required in order to bring the existing lightning protection system into compliance with the specified standards so that the structure may qualify for a Reconditioned Master Label from Underwriters Laboratories Inc. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. 3.05 STARTUP & COMMISSIONING A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. 3.06 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. END OF SECTION 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES WOODARD & CURRAN 26 43 00-1 SECTION 26 43 00 SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES (FILED SUB-BID REQUIRED) PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes 1. This section describes the materials and installation requirements for an integrated Surge Protective Device (SPD), in a Low Voltage Motor Control Centers (MCC’s), Low Voltage Switchboards, Low Voltage Switchgear, and Panelboards, and other equipment as indicated. These devices are used to protect AC electrical circuits from the effect of lightning induced currents, substation switching transients and internally generated transients resulting from inductive and or capacitive load switching B. Related documents 1. Division 26: Section 26 05 00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 2. Division 26: Section 26 05 33 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 3. Division 26: Section 26 05 26 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 4. Division 26: Section 26 24 16 PANELBOARDS 1.02 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Measurement and payment requirements: per Division 01 General Requirements. 1.03 REFERENCES A. UL 1449 Second Edition 2005 - Transient Voltage Surge Suppressors B. UL 1283 - Electromagnetic Interference Filters C. ANSI/IEEE C62.41.1-2002 - IEEE Guide on the Surge Environment in Low Voltage (1000 V and Less) AC Power Circuits; C62.41.2-2002 - IEEE Recommended Practice on Characterization of Surge Voltages in Low Voltage AC Power Circuits; and C62.45-2002 - IEEE Recommended Practice on Surge Testing for Equipment Connected to Low-Voltage AC Power Circuits 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES WOODARD & CURRAN 26 43 00-2 D. NEC 2005, Article 285 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination, Sequencing, and Scheduling: per Division 01 General Requirements. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. 1.08 SITE CONDITIONS A. Existing Conditions: per Division 01 General Requirements. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURER A. Acceptable manufacturers are as follows: 1. Square D/Schneider Electric 2. General Electric Co. 3. Siemens 4. Eaton/Cutler Hammer 5. Approved Equal 2.02 SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICE A. Internal SPD 1. SPD shall be Listed in accordance with UL 1449 Second Edition 2005 and UL 1283, Electromagnetic Interference Filters. 2. Integrated surge protective devices (SPD) shall be Component Recognized in accordance with UL 1449 Second Edition, Revision 2/9/2005 Section 37.3 and 37.4 at the standard’s highest short-circuit current rating (SCCR) 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES WOODARD & CURRAN 26 43 00-3 of 200 kA, including intermediate level of fault current testing that will be effective 2/9/2007. 3. SPD shall be tested with the ANSI/IEEE Category C High exposure waveform (20kV-1.2/50s, 10kA-8/20s). 4. SPD shall provide suppression for all modes of protection: L-N, L-G, and N-G in WYE systems. 5. The manufacturer of the SPD shall be the same as the manufacturer of the service entrance and distribution equipment in which the devices are installed and shipped. Also, this distribution equipment shall be fully tested and certified to the following UL standards: a. UL 67 - Panelboards b. UL 845 - Motor Control Centers c. UL 857 - Busway d. UL 891 - Switchboards e. UL 1558 - Low Voltage Switchgear 6. Recommended SPD ratings a. Minimum surge current ratings per phase of equipment shall be as follows: EQUIPMENT SURGE RATING SWITCHGEAR 200kA SWITCHBOARDS 160kA POWER PANELS 160kA LIGHTING PANELS 160kA RECEPTACLE PANELS 120kA TABLE 2.01A – MINIMUM SURGE CURRENT RATINGS b. UL 1449 clamping voltage must not exceed the following: VOLTAGE L-N L-G N-G 240/120 800/400V 800/400V 400V 208/120 400V 400V 400V 480/277 800V 800V 800V 600/347 1200V 1200V 1200V TABLE 2.01B – MAXIMUM CLAMPING VOLTAGE LIMITS c. Pulse life test: Capable of protecting against and surviving 5000 ANSI/IEEE Category C High transients without failure or degradation of clamping voltage by more than 10%. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES WOODARD & CURRAN 26 43 00-4 7. SPD shall be designed to withstand a maximum continuous operating voltage (MCOV) of not less than 115% of nominal RMS voltage. 8. SPD shall be constructed of one self-contained suppression module per phase. 9. Visible indication of proper SPD connection and operation shall be provided. The indicator lights shall indicate which phase as well as which module is fully operable. The status of each SPD module shall be monitored on the front cover of the enclosure as well as on the module. A push-to-test button shall be provided to test each phase indicator. Push-to- test button shall activate a state change of dry contacts for testing purposes. 10. SPD shall be equipped with an audible alarm which shall activate when any one of the surge current modules has reached an end-of-life condition. An alarm on/off switch shall be provided to silence the alarm. The switches and alarm shall be located on the front cover of the enclosure. 11. A connector shall be provided along with dry contacts (normally open or normally closed) to allow connection to a remote monitor or other system. The output of the dry contacts shall indicate an end-of-life condition for the complete SPD or module. 12. Terminals shall be provided for necessary power and ground connections. 13. The SPD shall be equipped the following items: a. A transient voltage surge counter shall be located on the diagnostic panel on the front cover of the enclosure. The counter shall be equipped with a manual reset and battery backup to retain memory upon loss of AC power. b. A remote monitoring device shall be provided to directly connect to the SPD with a dry contact connector for simple installation. The device will have indicator lights and an audible alarm to monitor for normal and fault conditions. B. SPD shall have a warranty for a period of ten (10) years from date of invoice. Warranty shall be the responsibility of the electrical distribution equipment manufacturer and shall be supported by their respective field service division. 2.03 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES WOODARD & CURRAN 26 43 00-5 PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. 3.02 STARTUP & COMMISSIONING A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. END OF SECTION This page intentionally left blank 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA INTERIOR LIGHTING WOODARD & CURRAN 26 51 00-1 SECTION 26 51 00 INTERIOR LIGHTING (FILED SUB-BID REQUIRED) PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. The Contractor shall provide the labor, tools, equipment, and materials necessary to furnish and install lighting fixtures in accordance with the plans and schedules as specified herein. B. Provide a complete lighting system as indicated. Lighting control equipment shall include, if indicated: light fixtures, control modules, power packs, dimming ballasts, occupancy sensors, and light level sensors. C. Section includes the following: 1. Light Emitting Diode (LED) 2. Luminaires and lamp holders 3. Exit signs 4. Emergency lighting units 5. Lamps 6. Ballasts 7. Dimming systems 8. Occupancy sensor systems 9. Photocell controls 10. Time switch D. Related Requirements 1. Division 26: Section 26 05 00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 2. Division 26: Section 26 05 33 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA INTERIOR LIGHTING WOODARD & CURRAN 26 51 00-2 3. Division 26: Section 26 05 26 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 4. Division 26: Section 26 56 00 EXTERIOR LIGHTING 1.02 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Measurement and payment requirements: per Division 01 General Requirements. 1.03 REFERENCES A. Reference Standards. 1. ILLUMINATING ENGINEERING SOCIETY OF NORTH AMERICA (IESNA) a. IESNA HB-9 (2000) Lighting Handbook 2. INSTITUTE OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERS (IEEE) a. IEEE C2 (2002) National Electrical Safety Code 3. NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA) a. NFPA 70 (2005) National Electrical Code 1.04 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS A. Publications listed below (including amendments, addenda, revisions, supplements and errata) form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. Publications are referenced in the text by designation only. B. American National Standards Institute (ANSI); 1. C78.1-91: Fluorescent Lamps – Rapid Start Types – Dimensional and Electrical Characteristics 2. C78.376-01: Chromaticity of Fluorescent Lamps C. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1. C635-07: Manufacture, Performance, and Testing of Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panel Ceilings D. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA): 1. 40 CFR 261: Identification and Listing of Hazardous Waste E. Federal Communications Commission (FCC): 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA INTERIOR LIGHTING WOODARD & CURRAN 26 51 00-3 1. CFR Title 47, Part 15: Radio Frequency Devices 2. CFR Title 47, Part 18: Industrial, Scientific, and Medical Equipment F. Illuminating Engineering Society (IES): 1. LM-79-08 : Electrical and Photometric Measurements of Solid-State Lighting Products 2. LM-80-08 : Measuring Lumen Maintenance of LED Light Sources 3. LM-82-12 : Characterization of LED Light Engines and LED Lamps for Electrical and Photometric Properties as a Function of Temperature G. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE): 1. C62.41-91: Surge Voltages in Low Voltage AC Power Circuits H. International Code Council (ICC): 1. IBC-12: International Building Code I. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 1. 70-11 National Electrical Code (NEC) 2. 101-12 Life Safety Code J. National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA): 1. C82.1-04: Lamp Ballasts – Line Frequency Fluorescent Lamp Ballasts 2. C82.2-02: Method of Measurement of Fluorescent Lamp Ballasts 3. C82.4-02: Lamp Ballasts - Ballasts for High-Intensity Discharge and Low- Pressure Sodium (LPS) Lamps (Multiple-Supply Type) 4. C82.11-11: Lamp Ballasts - High Frequency Fluorescent Lamp Ballasts 5. LL-9-09: Dimming of T8 Fluorescent Lighting Systems 6. SSL-1-10: Electronic Drivers for LED Devices, Arrays, or Systems K. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): 1. 496-08: Lampholders 2. 542-0599: Fluorescent Lamp Starters 3. 844-12: Luminaires for Use in Hazardous (Classified) Locations 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA INTERIOR LIGHTING WOODARD & CURRAN 26 51 00-4 4. 924-12: Emergency Lighting and Power Equipment 5. 935-01: Fluorescent-Lamp Ballasts 6. 1029-94: High-Intensity-Discharge Lamp Ballasts 7. 1029A-06: Ignitors and Related Auxiliaries for HID Lamp Ballasts 8. 1598-08: Luminaires 9. 1574-04: Track Lighting Systems 10. 2108-04: Low-Voltage Lighting Systems 11. 8750-09: Light Emitting Diode (LED) Light Sources for Use in Lighting Products 1.05 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination, Sequencing, and Scheduling: per Division 01 General Requirements. 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with the Division 01 General Requirements. B. Submit shop drawings, product data, test data, warranties, and other information as appropriate for the following: 1. Light Emitting Diode (LED), submit US DOE LED Lighting Facts label, and IES L70 rated life. 2. Luminaires and lamp holders 3. Exit signs 4. Emergency lighting units 5. Lamps 6. Ballasts 7. Photocell controls 8. Time switch C. Shop Drawings: Indicate construction details for products which are not manufacturer's standard, when product data does not adequately describe fixture physical characteristics, or upon request by Engineer. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA INTERIOR LIGHTING WOODARD & CURRAN 26 51 00-5 D. Product Data: Provide product data for each luminaire and lighting unit. E. Submit written warranty for extended warranty items such as batteries and ballasts. F. Submit luminaire shop drawings in booklet form with a separate sheet for each luminaire type. Indicate clearly on each sheet the proposed luminaire "type" designation, manufacturer, luminaire, lamp, and ballast designation. G. Submittals shall indicate materials, finishes, metal gauges, overall and detail dimensions, sizes of electrical and mechanical connections, fasteners, welds, joints, end conditions, provisions for the work of others and similar information. H. A photometric test report showing photometric candlepower distribution, brightness, coefficients of utilization, and paint reflectance shall be included for all fluorescent and HID fixtures. Photometric reports shall be prepared for actual fixture, lamp, lens, and ballast combination. Certify data as that taken under National Bureau of Standards calibrated test conditions according to standards of the Illuminating Engineering Society; upon request, submit photometric test of proposed fixture prepared by an independent testing laboratory such as ETL. I. The submittals shall state whether or not the fixture, as an assembly, has been UL tested and approved. J. Upon request, submit sample products for inspection. Provide luminaires identical with approved samples; retain approved samples at site for comparison until after all other luminaires have been shipped to site and installed. Transportation charges for samples shall be paid by Contractor. Unapproved samples will be returned at Contractor's expense. Upon notification of disapproval, immediately submit new samples that meet contract requirements. K. Upon request by Engineer, provide computerized illumination calculation data for specified interior or exterior areas in digital or isofootcandle format and in such detail as requested. L. Operating and Maintenance Instructions: Provide maintenance and operating instructions for battery powered lighting units. Include technical data sheets and parts ordering information for components used in all luminaires. M. Closeout and Maintenance Material Submittals: per Division 01 General Requirements. 1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA INTERIOR LIGHTING WOODARD & CURRAN 26 51 00-6 B. Warrant all lighting and components for one year after acceptance of the work and at no additional cost to the Owner. Promptly provide and install replacements for luminaires or components which are defective in materials or workmanship or repair installed equipment at the job site as necessary to restore first class operating condition. For any time during the warranty period that luminaires are not fully functional due to defects in materials or workmanship, provide, install and remove suitable temporary lighting. Warrant replacement luminaires in a similar manner for a period of one year following replacement including replacement of defective replacements. C. Warrant ballasts, batteries, and occupancy sensors as further specified herein. D. Provide products of firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of interior luminaires or components of similar types and ratings to those required. Such products shall have been in satisfactory use in similar applications for not less than two years. 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements B. Deliver luminaires and their components to job site, factory assembled and wired to the greatest extent practical, in strict accordance with approved shop drawings, samples, certificates and catalog cuts. C. Protect exposed finishes during manufacture, transport, storage and handling; replace damaged materials. D. Luminaires shall be stored under cover, above the ground, in clean, dry areas and shall be tagged and/or marked as to type and site destination. 1.09 SITE CONDITIONS A. Existing Conditions: per Division 01 General Requirements. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. Provide lighting fixtures as listed on the Lighting, Lamping, and Fixture Schedule on the drawings and as specified herein that meet the physical, performance and quality standard exhibited by that fixture. Substitutes shall be equal in all respects including mechanical, electrical, physical, performance, photometric and quality characteristics except minor variances in construction details, which do not affect overall quality or performance, are permitted. B. Accessories: Provide required accessories for mounting and operation of each luminaire as indicated. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA INTERIOR LIGHTING WOODARD & CURRAN 26 51 00-7 1. Recessed Luminaires: Provide trim type suitable for ceiling system in which luminaire is installed; design fixtures to operate in a 140 degree F environment. 2. Thermal Protection: Provide thermal protection devices to meet NFPA 70 requirements. 3. Disconnecting Means: Provide disconnecting means in fluorescent luminaires that utilize double-ended lamps and contain ballast(s) that can be serviced in place. 4. Surface Luminaires: Provide spacers and brackets required for mounting; design for a minimum ambient temperature of 92 degree F. 5. Pendant Luminaires: Provide swivel hangers, pendant rods, tubes, chains and other hardware as required and/or indicated to install luminaire at appropriate height. 2.02 LED LIGHT FIXTURES A. General: 1. LED light fixtures shall be in accordance with IES, NFPA, UL, as shown on the drawings, and as specified. 2. LED light fixtures shall be Reduction of Hazardous Substances (RoHS)- compliant. 3. LED drivers shall include the following features unless otherwise indicated: a) Minimum efficiency: 85% at full load. b) Minimum Operating Ambient Temperature: -20˚ C. (-4˚ F.) c) Input Voltage: 120 - 277V (±10%) at 60 Hz. d) Integral short circuit, open circuit, and overload protection. e) Power Factor: ≥ 0.95. f) Total Harmonic Distortion: ≤ 20%. g) Comply with FCC 47 CFR Part 15. 4. LED modules shall include the following features unless otherwise indicated: a) Comply with IES LM-79 and LM-80 requirements. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA INTERIOR LIGHTING WOODARD & CURRAN 26 51 00-8 b) Minimum CRI 80 and color temperature 3000˚ K unless otherwise specified in LIGHTING FIXTURE SCHEDULE. c) Minimum Rated Life: 50,000 hours per IES L70. d) Light output lumens as indicated in the LIGHTING FIXTURE SCHEDULE. B. LED Downlights: 1. Housing, LED driver, and LED module shall be products of the same manufacturer. C. LED Troffers: 1. LED drivers, modules, and reflector shall be accessible, serviceable, and replaceable from below the ceiling. 2. Housing, LED driver, and LED module shall be products of the same manufacturer. 2.03 EXIT SIGNS A. LED Exit Sign with Battery Backup 1. Lamps: Manufacturer's standard, light emitting diode (LED) type designed to NFPA 101 and 70 marking of egress requirements. Warrant lamps for 5 years full replacement. 2. Input Voltage: 120 volts for normal power, equip with self-contained battery, solid state charger with brown out protection, and test switch. 3. Battery: Sealed nickel cadmium, warrant for five years full replacement, plus additional 7 years prorated. B. Construction 1. Housing: High strength cast aluminum, equipped with low profile canopy mount. 2. Housing and Lens in High Abuse Areas: Injection molded polycarbonate. 3. Face: Aluminum or white painted steel stencil face with red letters, 6" high x 3/4" stroke. 4. Directional Arrows: Universal type for field adjustment. 5. Mounting: Universal, for field selection. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA INTERIOR LIGHTING WOODARD & CURRAN 26 51 00-9 6. Mounting in High Abuse Areas: Ceiling or wall as indicated. 2.04 EMERGENCY LIGHTING UNITS A. Self-Contained Emergency Lighting Unit: 1. Input Voltage: 120 volts. 2. Battery: Lead calcium maintenance free type, 3 year full, plus 7 year prorated (total 10 year) warranty. Gelled electrolyte batteries are not permitted. 3. Battery Charger: Dual rate type, solid state, with low voltage and brown out protection. 4. Lamps and Lamp holder: LH3-12V halogen, 12 watt. 5. Housing: Steel with manufacturer's standard finish. B. Indicators and Controls: AC ON, RECHARGING; TEST switch, battery charge voltmeter. C. Electrical Connection: Hardwired. 2.05 LAMPS A. Provide type and color indicated on the Lighting, Lamping, and Fixture Schedule. B. All fluorescent lamps shall be specifically approved by the Efficiency Maine Program for incentive qualification. 1. Acceptable Manufacturers a. General Electric b. Osram/Sylvania c. Venture d. Phillips e. Or Engineer Approved Equal C. Super T8 Fluorescent Lamps 1. Initial lumen rating: 3150, mean lumen rating 2992. 2. Rated lamp life shall be 35,000 hours when operating on Osram Quicktronic Prostart ballast in rapid start mode. 3. Color temperature shall be 3,500 degree K and color rendering index 85 or better. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA INTERIOR LIGHTING WOODARD & CURRAN 26 51 00-10 D. Rapid start medium bipin T-12 U-bent or 2G11 base single-ended twin tube lamps: 1. Lamp shall be rated at nominal 40 watts, bent in a "U" shape with nominal 6" spacing between legs, minimum initial rated lumen output 3,050 lumens, and minimum rated lamp life 12,000 hours, based on three-hour starts and tested in accordance with IES LM 40-87. 2. LLD shall be a minimum mean lumen value of 87% of the initial lamp lumens at 40% of rated life, and 81% at 70% of rated life. 3. Lamp life, color temperature, and color rendering index shall be as specified above for 32 watt lamp. E. T-8 U-Tube, 1" diameter, 31 watt, 6" leg spacing Lamps 4. Lamps shall only be operated on ballasts designed for T-8 lamps. 5. Rated lamp life shall be at least 15,000 hours or 20,000 hours, per IES LM 40-87, operating in an instant start or rapid start mode, respectively. 6. LLD shall be a minimum mean lumen value of at least 90% of the initial lamp lumens at 40% of rated life and 84% at 70% of rated life. 7. Lamp life, color temperature, and color rendering index shall be as specified above for 32 watt lamp. F. Compact Fluorescent-General: 1. Lamp shall be rare earth phosphor type with a correlated color temperature (CCT) of 3500 Kelvin, and color rendering index (CRI) of 80 or greater (NEMA designation RE 735). 2. Minimum LLD shall be a mean lumen value of 85% at 40% of rated life. 3. Installation shall conform to application manufacturers' recommendations for enclosed or open operation of both lamps and ballasts. G. Compact Fluorescent (Twin or Quad) Tube Lamps for Use with Preheat Ballasts and Starters: 1. Lamps shall be designed for operation with ballasts/starters system provided with luminaire. 2. Lamp wattage and lumen rating shall be as indicated on the drawings. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA INTERIOR LIGHTING WOODARD & CURRAN 26 51 00-11 2.06 PHOTOCELL SWITCH A. UL 773 or UL 773A, hermetically sealed cadmium-sulphide cell rated 240 volts ac, 60 hertz with single-throw contacts rated 1000 watts, and 600 volts. B. Mount switch in a cast weatherproof aluminum housing, with swivel arm mount, in a high impact resistant, non-corroding and non-conductive molded plastic housing, with an EEI-NEMA locking-type receptacle. C. The switch shall turn on below 3 footcandles and off at 3 to 10 footcandles. A time delay shall prevent accidental switching from transient light sources. Mount a directional lens in front of the cell to prevent fixed light sources from creating a turnoff condition. Aim switch according to manufacturer's recommendations. 2.07 TIME SWITCH A. Digital multi-purpose, 120 volts, 1 channel, 24 hour time switch. Provide switch with battery backup to maintain accurate time for a minimum of 72 hours following power failure. Provide time switch with a manual on-off bypass switch. Housing for the time switch shall be surface mounted, NEMA 1 enclosure conforming to NEMA ICS 6. 2.08 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Electrical installations shall conform to IEEE C2, NFPA 70, and to the requirements specified herein. B. Examine adjacent surfaces to determine that surfaces are ready to receive work. C. Install wiring in accordance with Section 26 05 19. D. Install luminaires and accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, as indicated, with equipment, materials, parts, attachments, devices, hardware, hangers, cables, supports, channels, frames and brackets necessary to make a safe, complete and fully operative installation. E. Install luminaires plumb, square and level with ceiling and walls, in alignment with adjacent luminaires, and secure in accordance with manufacturers' directions and approved shop drawings. Conform to the requirements of National Electrical Code ANSI/NFPA 70. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA INTERIOR LIGHTING WOODARD & CURRAN 26 51 00-12 1. Specified or indicated mounting heights are to be to the bottom of each luminaire for suspended and ceiling mounted luminaires, and to the center of each luminaire for wall mounted luminaires. Obtain approval of exact mounting for luminaires on the job before installation is commenced and, where applicable, after coordinating with type, style, and pattern of ceiling being installed. 2. Provide pendant accessory to mount suspended luminaires and exit signs at height indicated. Use swivel hanger on sloped ceilings. 3. Support surface mounted luminaires from ceiling grid tee structure; provide auxiliary support laid across top of ceiling tees and fasten to prohibit movement. 4. Install recessed luminaires to permit removal from below and install earthquake clips. 5. For lighting fixtures mounted in or on suspended ceilings, provide two support hangers per fixture so that each is independently supported from the building structure. 6. Provide two support hangers for the minimum security fixtures so that each is independently supported from the building structure. 7. Install lamps in luminaires and lamp holders. 8. Ground non-current carrying parts of electrical equipment in accordance with UL and NEC provisions. F. Install lighting fixtures where indicated on the plans; plans may be scaled for approximate locations; minor adjustments are permitted to avoid conflicts. Fixture placement that does not conform to the layout indicated shall be corrected; if in doubt about correct placement consult Engineer prior to roughing in. Install all lighting so that it is securely fastened, rows are uniformly spaced and in alignment, and fixture rests flat on mounting surface. G. Install ballasts and fixtures to avoid amplifying hum. Any ballast or fixture which develops an excessive hum within one year shall be replaced. H. Where multilevel switching is indicated, all outer lamps shall be switched together and all inner lamps together. I. Install 2 x 2 fixtures for consistent lamp orientation within each room. J. Perform insulation resistance and ground continuity test. 3.02 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Align luminaires and clean lenses and diffusers at completion of work. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA INTERIOR LIGHTING WOODARD & CURRAN 26 51 00-13 B. Aim adjustable luminaires and lamp holders as indicated or as directed. C. Adjust directional arrows on exit signs to meet approval of authority having jurisdiction. D. Clean paint splatters, dirt and debris from installed luminaires. E. Touch up luminaire and pole finish at completion of work. F. Re-lamp luminaires which have failed lamps at completion of work. 3.03 OWNER INSTRUCTION A. Provide on-site training of Owner’s personnel in operation of controls systems by a factory trained manufacturer's representative. Include instruction in programming time controls to obtain required control functions. Provide one follow-up visit if necessary. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. 3.05 STARTUP & COMMISSIONING A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. 3.06 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. END OF SECTION This page intentionally left blank 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA EXTERIOR LIGHTING WOODARD & CURRAN 26 56 00-1 SECTION 26 56 00 EXTERIOR LIGHTING (FILED SUB-BID REQUIRED) PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Luminaires and lampholders 2. Exterior exit signs 3. Lamps 4. Ballasts 5. Time switch 6. Photocell controls B. Related Documents: 1. Division 26: Section 26 05 00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 2. Division 26: Section 26 05 33 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 3. Division 26: Section 26 05 26 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 4. Division 26: Section 26 51 00 INTERIOR LIGHTING 1.02 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Measurement and payment requirements: per Division 01 General Requirements. 1.03 REFERENCES A. Furnish products listed by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., ETL Testing Laboratories, or other testing firm acceptable to the Owner. B. Conform to requirements of ANSI/NFPA 70. C. Conform to requirements of NFPA 101. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA EXTERIOR LIGHTING WOODARD & CURRAN 26 56 00-2 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination, Sequencing, and Scheduling: per Division 01 General Requirements. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with the Division 01 General Requirements. B. Submit shop drawings, product data, test data, warranties, and other information as appropriate for the following: 1. Luminaires 2. Exterior exit signs 3. Lamps 4. Ballasts 5. Time switch 6. Photocell controls C. Shop Drawings: Indicate construction details for products which are not manufacturer's standard, when product data does not adequately describe fixture physical characteristics, or upon request by Engineer. D. Product Data: Provide product data for each luminaire and lighting unit. E. For LED lighting fixtures, submit US DOE LED Lighting Facts label, and IES L70 rated life. F. Submit luminaire shop drawings in booklet form with a separate sheet for each luminaire type. Indicate clearly on each sheet the proposed luminaire "type" designation, manufacturer, luminaire lamp, and ballast designation. G. Submittals shall indicate materials, finishes, metal gauges, overall and detail dimensions, sizes of electrical and mechanical connections, fasteners, welds, joints, end conditions, provisions for the work of others and similar information. H. A photometric test report showing photometric candlepower distribution, brightness, coefficients of utilization, and paint reflectance shall be included for all fixtures. Photometric reports shall be prepared for actual fixture, lamp, lens, and ballast combination. Certify data as that taken under National Bureau of Standards calibrated test conditions according to standards of the Illuminating Engineering Society; upon request, submit photometric test of proposed fixture prepared by an independent testing laboratory such as ETL. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA EXTERIOR LIGHTING WOODARD & CURRAN 26 56 00-3 I. The submittals shall state whether or not the fixture, as an assembly, has been UL tested and approved. J. Upon request, submit sample products for inspection. Provide luminaires identical with approved samples; retain approved samples at site for comparison until after all other luminaires have been shipped to site and installed. Transportation charges for samples shall be paid by Contractor. Unapproved samples will be returned at Contractor's expense. Upon notification of disapproval, immediately submit new samples that meet contract requirements. K. Upon request by Engineer, provide computerized illumination calculation data for specified interior or exterior areas in digital or isofootcandle format and in such detail as requested. L. Operating and Maintenance Instructions: Provide maintenance and operating instructions for battery powered lighting units. Include technical data sheets and parts ordering information for components used in all luminaires. M. Closeout and Maintenance Material Submittals: per Division 01 General Requirements. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. B. Warrant all lighting and components for one year after acceptance of the work and at no additional cost to the Owner, promptly provide and install replacements for luminaires or components which are defective in materials or workmanship; or repair installed equipment at the job site as necessary to restore first class operating condition. For any time during the warranty period that luminaires are not fully functional due to defects in materials or workmanship, provide, install, and remove suitable temporary lighting. Warrant replacement luminaires in a similar manner for a period of one year following replacement including replacement of defective replacements. C. Warrant ballasts, batteries, and occupancy sensors as further specified herein. D. Provide products of firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of interior luminaires or components of similar types and ratings to those required. Such products shall have been in satisfactory use in similar applications for not less than two years. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA EXTERIOR LIGHTING WOODARD & CURRAN 26 56 00-4 B. Deliver luminaires and their components to job site, factory assembled and wired to the greatest extent practical, in strict accordance with approved shop drawings, samples, certificates and catalog cuts. C. Protect exposed finishes during manufacture, transport, storage and handling; replace damaged materials. D. Luminaires shall be stored under cover, above the ground, in clean, dry areas, and be tagged and/or marked as to type and site destination. 1.08 SITE CONDITIONS A. Existing Conditions: per Division 01 General Requirements. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. Provide lighting fixtures as listed on the Lighting, Lamping, and Fixture Schedule on the drawings and as specified herein that meet the performance and quality standard for that fixture. Substitutes shall be equal in all respects including mechanical, electrical, physical, performance, photometric, and quality characteristics except minor variances in construction details which do not affect overall quality or performance are permitted. B. Accessories: Provide required accessories for mounting and operation of each luminaire as indicated. 2.02 LUMINAIRES A. Luminaires shall be weatherproof, heavy duty, outdoor types designed for efficient light utilization, adequate dissipation of lamp and ballast heat, and safe cleaning and relamping. B. Illumination distribution patterns, BUG ratings and cutoff types as defined by the IESNA shall be as shown on the drawings. C. Incorporate ballasts in the luminaire housing, except where otherwise shown on the drawings. D. Lenses shall be frame-mounted, heat-resistant, borosilicate glass, with prismatic refractors, unless otherwise shown on the drawings. Attach the frame to the luminaire housing by hinges or chain. Use heat and aging-resistant, resilient gaskets to seal and cushion lenses and refractors in luminaire doors. E. Pre-wire internal components to terminal strips at the factory. F. Bracket-mounted luminaires shall have leveling provisions and clamp-type adjustable slip-fitters with locking screws. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA EXTERIOR LIGHTING WOODARD & CURRAN 26 56 00-5 G. Materials shall be rustproof. Latches and fittings shall be non-ferrous metal. H. Provide manufacturer's standard finish, as scheduled on the drawings. Where indicated on drawings, match finish process and color of pole or support materials. I. Luminaires shall carry factory labels, showing complete, specific lamp and ballast information. 2.03 LAMPS A. Install the proper lamps in every luminaire installed and every existing luminaire relocated or reinstalled as shown on the drawings. B. Lamps shall be general-service, outdoor lighting types. C. LED sources shall meet the following requirements: 1. Operating temperature rating shall be between -40 degrees C (-40 degrees F) and 50 degrees C (120 degrees F). 2. Correlated Color Temperature (CCT): as indicate on the Contract Drawings. 3. Color Rendering Index (CRI): ³ 85. 4. The manufacturer shall have performed reliability tests on the LEDs luminaires complying with Illuminating Engineering Society (IES) LM79 for photometric performance and LM80 for lumen maintenance and L70 life. 2.04 LED DRIVERS A. LED drivers shall meet the following requirements: 1. Drivers shall have a minimum efficiency of 85%. 2. Starting Temperature: -40 degrees C (-40 degrees F). 3. Input Voltage: 120 to 480 (±10%) volt. 4. Power Supplies: Class I or II output. 5. Surge Protection: The system must survive 250 repetitive strikes of “C Low” (C Low: 6kV/1.2 x 50 µs, 10kA/8 x 20 µs) waveforms at 1-minute intervals with less than 10% degradation in clamping voltage. “C Low” waveforms are as defined in IEEE/ASNI C62.41.2-2002, Scenario 1 Location Category C. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA EXTERIOR LIGHTING WOODARD & CURRAN 26 56 00-6 6. Power Factor (PF): ≥ 0.90. 7. Total Harmonic Distortion (THD): ≤ 20%. 8. Comply with FCC Title 47 CFR Part 18 Non-consumer RFI/EMI Standards. 9. Drivers shall be reduction of hazardous substances (ROHS)-compliant. 2.05 EXTERIOR EXIT SIGNS A. LED Exit Sign Fixture with Battery Backup: 1. Lamps: Manufacturer's standard, light emitting diode (LED) type designed to NFPA 101 and 70 marking of egress requirements. Warrant lamps for 5 years full replacement. 2. Input Voltage: 277 volts for normal power, equip with self-contained battery, solid state charger with brown out protection, and test switch. 3. Cold weather rated minimum -40C, and wet location. 4. Battery: Sealed nickel cadmium, warrant for five years full replacement, plus additional 7 years prorata. B. Construction: 1. Housing: High strength cast aluminum, with high impact polycarbonate cover and tamper proof screws. 2. Face: Aluminum or white painted steel stencil face with green letters, 6" high x 3/4" stroke. 3. Mounting: Wall mounted as indicated. 2.06 TIME SWITCH A. Digital multi-purpose, 277 volts, 2 channel, 7 day, 365 day advance single and block holiday time switch. Provide switch with battery backup to maintain accurate time for a minimum of 72 hours following power failure. Provide time switch with a manual on-off bypass switch. Housing for the time switch shall be surface mounted, NEMA 1 enclosure conforming to NEMA ICS 6. 2.07 PHOTOCELL SWITCH A. UL 773 or UL 773A, hermetically sealed cadmium-sulphide cell rated 240 volts ac, 60 hertz with single-throw contacts rated 1000 watts, and 600 volts. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA EXTERIOR LIGHTING WOODARD & CURRAN 26 56 00-7 B. Mount switch in a cast weatherproof aluminum housing, with swivel arm mount, in a high impact resistant, noncorroding and nonconductive molded plastic housing, with an EEI-NEMA locking-type receptacle. C. The switch shall turn on below 3 footcandles and off at 3 to 10 footcandles. A time delay shall prevent accidental switching from transient light sources. Mount a directional lens in front of the cell to prevent fixed light sources from creating a turnoff condition. Aim switch according to manufacturer's recommendations. 2.08 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Grounding: Ground noncurrent-carrying parts of equipment, including metal poles. Where the copper grounding conductor is connected to a metal other than copper, provide specially treated or lined connectors suitable for this purpose. B. Insulation Resistance Test: Perform before and after connection of fixtures and equipment. C. Ground Resistance Tests: Perform ground continuity test. D. Field Tests: Upon completion of installation, conduct an operating test to show that the equipment operates in accordance with the requirements of this specification section. 3.02 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Clean lenses and diffusers at completion of work. B. Aim adjustable luminaires and lampholders as indicated or as directed. C. Clean paint splatters, dirt, and debris from installed luminaires. D. Touch up luminaire and pole finish at completion of work. E. Relamp luminaires which have failed lamps at completion of work. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. 3.04 STARTUP & COMMISSIONING A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA EXTERIOR LIGHTING WOODARD & CURRAN 26 56 00-8 3.05 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. END OF SECTION 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA FILED SUB-BID ELECTRICAL TELE/DATA COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM WOODARD & CURRAN 27 05 00-1 SECTION 27 05 00 TELE/DATA COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM (FILED SUB-BID REQUIRED) PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Furnish, install, test and make ready for operation; complete telephone and data communications system as specified herein and as shown on the Drawings. The telephone and data systems shall include but are not limited to the following: 1. Backboards 2. Voice (Telephone) & Data Devises 3. Racks & Patch Panels 4. Television Coaxial Outlets 5. Wire and Cable 6. Cable Terminations 1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 specification sections, apply to this section. B. Related Sections 1. Division 26: Section 26 05 00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 2. Division 26: Section 26 05 33 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 3. Division 26: Section 26 27 26 WIRING DEVICES 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Reference Standards. 1. Install work in accordance with Telephone Utility Company's rules and regulations. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA FILED SUB-BID ELECTRICAL TELE/DATA COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM WOODARD & CURRAN 27 05 00-2 2. All work shall be performed in accordance with ANSI/TIA/EIA 568B cabling standards. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Provide manufacturer's product data, test reports, and materials certifications. B. Submit a complete master wiring diagram engineering drawing of the system with specification sheets covering all components of the system and block diagrams indicating all components and inter-wiring (quantity and size). The system and equipment shown in the engineering drawings and specifications shall meet all requirements of this specification. 1.05 RECORD DOCUMENTATION A. Provide drawings in accordance with EIA TIA/EIA-606-A. Accurately record actual locations and mounting heights of outlets if not as shown on Drawings, plus pull and junction box locations. B. Accurately record actual routing of conduits and cables. Indicated dimensions from nearest column lines on the As-Built Drawings. 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. The Contractor shall provide the labor, tools, equipment, and materials necessary to provide a complete tele/data communications system and/or extension of the existing systems in accordance with the plans and as specified herein. This includes the furnishing and installing of complete systems of interior raceways and junction boxes, wiring and jacks, cover plates, C & D type clamps and hangers, including final connections and terminations at the origination and outlet end of all cables. B. The contractor shall be responsible for running all wiring/cable for the tele/data communications system unless specifically indicated otherwise. Cables shall run for each outlet, device or equipment to locations indicated on the Contract Drawings. All cables shall be terminated and tested at both ends of the cable. C. Wire and cable routing is generally not shown on the Drawings. Route wire and cable as required to meet project conditions. In no case shall cable lengths exceed 328 feet. D. Determine exact routing, number of conductors and lengths required. 1.07 COORDINATION A. Coordinate service entrance conduits, including conduit up riser pole and service entrance cable installation with utility companies. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA FILED SUB-BID ELECTRICAL TELE/DATA COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM WOODARD & CURRAN 27 05 00-3 B. Locate all outlets such that they are readily accessible. C. Determine required separation between cables and other work. D. Determine cable routing to avoid interference with other work. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 COMPONENTS A. Provide telephone system equipment and accessories; of types, sizes, ratings and electrical characteristics indicated, which comply with utility and manufacturer's standard materials, design and construction. B. All networking components and equipment shall be of the same manufacturer and the entire installation shall be certified for full CAT6 compliance by the equipment manufacturer. 2.02 TELEPHONE BACKBOARD A. Provide a new 3/4 inch plywood backboard painted Dark Gray on all sides in location indicated on the Contract Drawings and as directed in the field by the Owner and Engineer. Backboard size shall be a minimum of 48”x96”, or as required by the local telephone company. The installation and painting of the backboard shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. B. At the telephone backboard, provide and install "telephone equipment ground bus" with one #6AWG bare stranded ground, cadweld to building steel and/or connect to main ground bus as required. Ground wire shall be run in minimum 1” EMT conduit. 2.03 TERMINAL BLOCKS A. S66 type, fire-retardant molded plastic, minimum 15 pair blocks with self- supporting legs to provide space behind the block for cables terminated on the wiring block. Designed to accept 22 through 26 gauge conductors. Category 6 compliant. Coordinate terminal block capacity to receive all outlets and cable pairs indicated on the drawings and as required by the local telephone company. B. As a minimum, provide number of blocks to receive all outlets and cable pairs indicated plus 50% spare. 2.04 DEVICES A. General 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA FILED SUB-BID ELECTRICAL TELE/DATA COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM WOODARD & CURRAN 27 05 00-4 1. At each telephone and data outlet location, the electrical contractor shall provide two-gang wall boxes with a minimum of one 1" conduit, or as otherwise noted or detailed on the Contract Drawings, from accessible ceiling space to each outlet indicated. B. Voice Outlets (Telephone) 1. Wall Mounted Telephones a. Provide stainless steel faceplate designed to receive cable termination module and provide mounting for standard wall phones. b. Faceplate shall be mounted on flush junction box. c. For each wall mounted telephone, provide in faceplate, one flat RJ- 45 CAT6 module. Module shall be color coded with “GRAY” icon to match cable. 2. Desk Mounted Telephones a. Provide one modular type faceplate capable of housing up to six cable termination modules. In locations where telephone and data outlets are indicated, they may share the same faceplate. b. Faceplate shall be mounted on flush junction box. c. For each desk mounted telephone, provide in faceplate, one flat RJ- 45 CAT6 module. Module shall be color coded with “GRAY” icon to match cable. C. Data Outlets 1. Desk Locations a. Provide one modular type faceplate capable of housing up to six cable termination modules. In locations where telephone and data outlets are indicated, they shall share the same faceplate. b. Faceplate shall be mounted on flush junction box. c. For each, provide in faceplate, one flat RJ-45 CAT6 module. Module shall be color coded with “BLUE” icon to match cable. D. SCADA Outlets 1. Desk Locations 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA FILED SUB-BID ELECTRICAL TELE/DATA COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM WOODARD & CURRAN 27 05 00-5 a. Provide one modular type faceplate capable of housing up to six cable termination modules. In locations where telephone, data, and SCADA outlets are indicated, they shall share the same faceplate. b. Faceplate shall be mounted on flush junction box. c. For each, provide in faceplate, one flat RJ-45 CAT6 module. Module shall be color coded with “YELLOW” icon to match cable. E. Voice (Telephone) and Data Termination Modules: 1. Data termination modules: RJ-45, eight pin modular, UL verified and listed Category 6, UL 1863, meeting FCC Part 68.5, gold plating over nickel under plating (50 micro-inch) beryllium copper jack contacts, phosphor bronze (100 micro-inch) tin/lead plating over nickel under plating IDC 110 contacts, TIA/EIA-568-B configuration, Hubbell HXJ6 series, or approved equal. 2. Telephone Jacks: RJ-45, eight pin modular, UL verified and listed Category 6, similar to Data Jack, TIA/EIA-568-B configuration. 3. All modules shall clearly indicate the intended use, "TELEPHONE", “DATA” or “SCADA”. This shall be accomplished by the color coding icon. 4. All modules shall be (White) in color. F. Faceplates 1. Faceplates shall be white in color. 2. Faceplates for wall mounted telephones shall be Stainless steel. 3. Faceplates for desk mounted outlet locations in the Office shall be impact resistant plastic. 4. Provide blank plates/covers for all unused ports, cover shall match faceplate. G. Television Coaxial Outlets 1. Outlets a. The contractor shall furnish and install cable television outlets in locations indicated on the Contract Drawings. b. Cable television outlets, including wall outlet plates, shall be equipped with a female connector to accept the connecting coaxial cable from the 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA FILED SUB-BID ELECTRICAL TELE/DATA COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM WOODARD & CURRAN 27 05 00-6 user's television set. Faceplates provided shall be impact resistant plastic and white in color. 2.05 WIRE AND CABLE A. Cabling shall be UL listed for the application and shall comply with EIA TIA/EIA-568-B and NFPA 70. Provide a labeling system for cabling as required by EIA TIA/EIA-606-A and UL 969. B. When running cables in ceiling return air plenums, use Teflon Air Plenum cable, unless used inside conduit or tubing sleeve. C. Provide conduit or tubing sleeves when passing through walls and floors. D. Provide bushings at each end of conduit runs. E. Cables shall be derated appropriately in accordance with NEC when combined in a common conduit run. F. Areas used as air plenums: run fire-resistant teflon cable approved for use in air plenums. G. Voice (Telephone System) 1. Furnish and install CAT6 four pair, 24 AWG annealed copper, UTP cables with PVC jackets at all locations indicated on the Drawings. 2. All cables shall be "GRAY" in color. 3. All cables shall be homerun from outlet location to the telephone backboard located in the electrical room in minimum 3/4"C. 4. All cables shall be terminated and tested at the telephone backboard terminal blocks, and at the termination module at the outlet location. H. Data 1. Furnish and install CAT6 four pair, 24 AWG annealed copper, UTP cables with PVC jackets at all locations indicated on the Drawings. 2. All cables shall be "BLUE” in color. 3. All cables shall be homerun from outlet location to the rack mounted patch panel/Ethernet Switch #1 (WAN/Internet) in the electrical room in minimum 3/4"C. 4. All cables shall be terminated and tested at the equipment rack, and at the termination module at the outlet location. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA FILED SUB-BID ELECTRICAL TELE/DATA COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM WOODARD & CURRAN 27 05 00-7 I. SCADA 1. Furnish and install CAT6 four pair, 24 AWG annealed copper, UTP cables with PVC jackets at all locations indicated on the Drawings. 2. All cables shall be "YELLOW” in color. 3. All cables shall be homerun from outlet location to the rack mounted patch panel/Ethernet Switch #2 (SCADA) in the electrical room in minimum 3/4"C. 4. All cables shall be terminated and tested at the equipment rack, and at the termination module at the outlet location. J. Fiber Optic Cable 1. Conductors shall be multimode, graded index, solid glass waveguides with a nominal core diameter of 62.5 microns. The fiber shall have transmission windows centered at 850 and 1300 nanometer wavelengths. The numerical aperture for each fiber shall be a minimum of 0.275. The attenuation at 850 nanometers shall be 3.5 dB/Km or less. The attenuation at 1300 nanometers shall be 1.5 dB/Km or less. The minimum bandwidth shall be 160 MHz-Km at 850 nanometers and 500 MHz-Km at 1300 nanometers. FO cable shall be certified to meet EIA ANSI/EIA/TIA-455- 30B and EIA ANSI/EIA/TIA-455-58B. 2. Fiber Cable installed below grade shall be installed within “inner duct” inside of all raceways. K. Coaxial Cable 1. Coaxial cable shall be RG-6/U, quad shield. Cable shall be label-verified. Cable jacket shall be factory marked at regular intervals identifying cable type. Interconnecting cables shall be cable assemblies consisting of RG-6/U coaxial cable with male connectors at each end, provided in lengths determined by equipment locations as shown. 2. All coaxial cables shall be homerun from outlet location to the telephone backboard in the Electrical Room in minimum ¾"C. PART 3 - EXECUTION 1.01 INSTALLATION A. Install cabling and pathway systems, including cable, pathway systems, Tele/Data outlet/connector assemblies, and associated hardware in accordance with all applicable standards and codes. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA FILED SUB-BID ELECTRICAL TELE/DATA COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM WOODARD & CURRAN 27 05 00-8 B. Install minimum one (1) 1" conduit, or as otherwise noted or detailed on the Contract Drawings, from accessible ceiling space to each outlet indicated. C. Provide and install required conduit wire, pullboxes, and accessory items to accomplish the work involved in providing the new telephone service as shown on the Drawings. All boxes, raceways, equipment, etc. shall be bonded in accordance with NEC. D. Coordinate service work with the Owner, and the local telephone company. E. Terminate all cables at the origination and outlet end of all cables. Tag all cables at the terminal block end to designate the locations of the outlets. All cables shall be bundled neatly, tie-wrapped and dressed appropriately. Obtain all permits, pay all fees and provide all materials and labor necessary for interfacing with utility equipment to install telephone service. F. Furnish and install all conduit, boxes, outlets and low voltage wire and accessory items necessary to accomplish the work detailed herein or in the Drawings. G. All work shall be coordinated with the Telephone Company and shall conform to their requirements so as to insure their approval for a complete installation. All labor and materials required by the Telephone Company to secure their approval shall be provided as part of the Allowance whether or not such labor and materials are specified or shown. H. Concealed wiring in dry locations above ceilings, except as specifically noted may be run without conduit. Wiring in all other locations shall be installed in approved raceways. 1. In ceiling return air plenums, use Teflon air Plenum type cable, unless used inside conduit or tubing sleeve. 2. Provide bushing at each end of conduit run. 3. Cable shall be installed as tight to roof deck as possible, parallel and perpendicular to beams, joists, etc.; if run perpendicular beams, joists, etc., provide necessary hardware for proper support. 4. Cables shall be properly secured in place. Support cables above accessible ceiling, using spring metal clips or approved cable ties to support cables from structure. 5. Do not support from ceiling suspension system. Do not rest cables on ceiling panels. Do not drape over ductwork or between bar joists. 6. Wiring shall not be run diagonally wherever possible and shall be cabled neatly. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA FILED SUB-BID ELECTRICAL TELE/DATA COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM WOODARD & CURRAN 27 05 00-9 I. In areas above suspended ceilings where cables are run without conduit, supports shall be provided at intervals not to exceed 5 feet and shall be independently attached to building structure. J. Maintain clearances between cables and all other systems as recommended by the cable manufacturer and system certifying entity. All cables shall be installed so as to not violate the manufacturer’s recommended bending radius and maximum pulling tension. K. No cables shall be spliced, except those specifically indicated at the backboard. L. Provide labeling in accordance with EIA TIA/EIA-606-A. Handwritten labeling is unacceptable. M. Cables shall be labeled using color labels on both ends with identifiers in accordance with EIA TIA/EIA-606-A. 1.02 TERMINATIONS A. Voice Riser (trunks): Terminate on 110 type insulation displacement connection (IDC) termination blocks, with the shield grounded. Maintain pair twists to within ½” of the termination points. B. Data Riser: Terminate fiber strands using the appropriate ST/SC connectors. C. Station Outlets: Flush mounted six position faceplate with unused positions covered with blank off insert. Terminate cables on jack inserts, install voice jack in top position, data jack(s) in bottom position(s). D. Station Terminal Fields: 1. Terminate voice and data station cables on Category 6 modular patch panels having 110 type insulation displacement connection termination for the station cable, and RJ-45 style eight (8) position jacks wired in TIA-T- 568-A pin configuration. Maintain pair twists to within ½”, or less, of the termination points. E. Ground patch panels via a bond connection to the appropriate telecommunications grounding busbar. 1.03 LABELING REQUIREMENTS A. Number both ends of each cable using adhesive cloth labels. Number code shall follow numbers assigned to jack location on floor plan, code voice cable XXXV and data cable XXXD, where XXX is jack location number. On face of outlet write jack number (XXX) using an indelible ink marker. If location numbers have 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA FILED SUB-BID ELECTRICAL TELE/DATA COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM WOODARD & CURRAN 27 05 00-10 not been assigned, contact Engineer who will obtain numbers; contractor to mark as-builts with assigned numbers. B. Number both ends of each cable with labels of waterproof materials and indelible ink text information, using either mechanical or waterproof adhesive attachment. C. The MDF and IDF’s termination blocks, patch panels, cables, and wall plates shall be numbered using the following scheme. The scheme is intended to insure that no two labeled items of the same type will have the same number. D. Wall Plate Marking 1. Wall Plate ID = FTNN where F= Floor Designator T= Terminal Identifier (i.e. “A”, “B”) N= Sequential station placement drop number (Keyed to room number) 2. Example: G-A-1024.3-3 = Ground floor, IDF A, Room 1024.3-Outlet number 3 in this room. 3. This designation must be permanently and indelibly marked on the wall plate in a clear and legible manner. The designation must also be marked on the terminal block or patch panel of the associated distribution frame location (MDF/IDF). 4. Record the wall plate number on the building floor plan record diagram. E. Riser (Trunk) Pair Marking 1. Riser Pair ID = NNN Where NNN= Sequential riser pair number. 2. Example: (Riser) 245 = Riser pair number 245. 3. The designation must be marked on the termination blocks at each end of the riser cables. Riser pair counts shall not be repeated. If riser pair 1-48 terminates at the first IDF, the next riser pair count in the following IDF shall start with pair number 49.] 1.04 GROUNDING REQUIREMENTS A. Extend service equipment ground to telephone back board using min. #6 AWG copper. In exposed locations, install ground wire in EMT. Bond all telecommunications raceway to form a continuous path to ground. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA FILED SUB-BID ELECTRICAL TELE/DATA COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM WOODARD & CURRAN 27 05 00-11 B. Ground patch panels, equipment racks and other telecommunications’ equipment via a min. #6 AWG bond connection to the appropriate telecommunications grounding busbar. C. Provide appropriate grounding for the protection of personnel, materials and equipment conforming to all applicable regulations, codes and standards. 1.05 TESTING A. Perform final verification tests after the complete Tele/Data cabling and workstation outlet/connectors are installed. B. All cabling and outlets shall be tested for certification with an approved industry scanner. C. Verify that all test equipment is within the required calibration intervals. Owner and Engineer shall be informed prior to all tests delineated in this procedure and witnessing tests as they see fit. D. All defects found during inspections shall be recorded. If cable systems do not meet the requirements, it shall be removed and replaced with new cable. E. All testing shall be documented, indicating cable designations and test results, all cables performing inadequately shall be replaced. All test reports shall be submitted to the Owner and Engineer. END OF SECTION This page intentionally left blank 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA EARTHWORK WOODARD & CURRAN 31 00 00-1 SECTION 31 00 00 EARTHWORK PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes 1. Provide excavating, filling, backfilling, stockpiling, bedding, compacting, grading, protection, installation and removal of support of excavation and other Work necessary for the construction of pipelines, conduits, structures, pavements, and appurtenant Work in accordance with this Section, the Drawings and applicable reference standards listed in Article 1.03. B. Related Requirements 1. 01 50 00 Temporary Facilities and Controls 2. 31 10 00 Site Clearing 1.02 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Measurement and payment requirements: per Division 01 General Requirements. 1.03 REFERENCES A. Reference Standards 1. MassDOT Standard Specifications and Supplements, except for Compensation sections 2. MassDOT Construction Details 3. ASTM D1556: Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by the Sand- Cone Method 4. ASTM D1557: Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort 5. ASTM D2922: Density of Soil and Soil Aggregate in Place by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth) 6. ASTM D6938 Standard Test Method for In-Place Density and Water Content of Soil and Soil-Aggregate by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth) 7. 29 CRF 1926/1910 – OSHA Safety and Health Standards 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA EARTHWORK WOODARD & CURRAN 31 00 00-2 8. Massachusetts Erosion and Sediment Control Guidelines for Urban and Suburban Areas (March 1997, reprinted May 2003)) 9. The United States Environmental Protection Agency’s Storm Water Management for Construction Activities, Developing Pollution Prevention Plans and Best Management Practices 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination, Sequencing, and Scheduling: per Division 01 General Requirements. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. B. Product Data C. Sample Test Reports and Evaluations 1. Materials gradations 2. Backfill moisture-density relationships 3. Field compaction testing D. All test reports shall include name of each supplier and specific type and source of material. E. Test Reports on material gradations. F. Dewatering System Design Certification G. Source and Field Quality Control Submittals H. Closeout and Maintenance Material Submittals: per Division 01 General Requirements. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. B. Contractor shall pay for all tests including initial tests, tests performed for convenience or any retesting due to non-compliance, except as otherwise noted in this Section. The Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating with Engineer and testing laboratory. A minimum of 48 hours notice for in-place testing shall be provided to Engineer. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA EARTHWORK WOODARD & CURRAN 31 00 00-3 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. B. Waste Management and Disposal 1. Legally dispose of excess or unsuitable material at no additional cost to Owner. 1.08 SITE CONDITIONS 1. Existing Conditions: per Division 01 General Requirements. 2. Data on indicated subsurface conditions are not intended as representations or warranties of accuracy. It is expressly understood that Owner will not be responsible for interpretations or conclusions drawn there from by Contractor. Data is mad available for convenience of Contractor. Additional test borings and other exploratory operations may be made by Contractor at no cost to Owner. 3. Locate existing underground utilities in areas of work. If utilities are to remain in place, provide adequate means of protection during earthwork operations. Demolish and completely remove from site existing underground utilities indicated to be removed. Coordinate with utility companies for shut-off of services if lines are active. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Pipe and Structure Bedding: 3/4 inch sized crushed stone; durable, clean angular rock fragments obtained by breaking and crushing rock material meeting the criteria of the M2.01.4 of the MassDOT Standard Specifications and Supplements for bedding beneath pipe and structures, to 6 inches above the crown of the pipe: Sieve analysis by weight: Sieve Size (inches) Percent Passing by Weight 1 100 3/4 95-100 1/2 35- 70 3/8 0- 25 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA EARTHWORK WOODARD & CURRAN 31 00 00-4 B. Suitable Backfill: well-graded granular material, of which at least 25 percent by weight shall be retained on the #40 sieve and contain less than 35 percent finer than a #200 sieve by weight, predominantly free from organic matter, man-made materials, ice, snow or other deleterious material and have characteristics so it can be readily placed and compacted. Place 6 inches above the crown of the pipe and around structures 6 inches above the crown of the highest pipe and up to the underside of the pavement section. C. Structural Fill: mixture of natural sand, gravel and free of silt, organics, and other deleterious material having suitable moisture content to allow for proper compaction as specified in Paragraph 3.08 of this Section. Gradation: Sieve Size Percent Passing by Weight 2/3 of loose lift thickness (6-inch max) 100 ¼ inch 25-90 #40 0-50 #200 0- 10 Alternatively, material that complies with M1.04.0b Sand Borrow of the MassDOT Standard Specifications and Supplements is and approved substitution for Structural Fill. D. Gravel Borrow: processed gravel for backfill per M1.03.1 of the MassDOT Standard Specifications and Supplements, consisting of inert material that is hard, durable stone and coarse sand, free from loam and clay, surface coatings and deleterious materials. Coarse aggregate percentage of wear: not more than 50 by the Los Angeles Abrasion Test. Gradation: Sieve Size Percent Passing by Weight 3 inch 100 1-1/2 inch 70-100 3/4 inch 50-85 #4 30-60 #200 0-10 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA EARTHWORK WOODARD & CURRAN 31 00 00-5 E. Sand: Sieve analysis by weight: Sieve Size Percent Passing by Weight 3/8-inch 100 #4 95-100 #16 50-85 #100 2-10 F. 3/4 Inch Crushed Stone: Durable crushed rock or crushed gravel stone; crushed stone per M2.01.4 of the MassDOT Standard Specifications and Supplements, free of ice, snow, sand, silt, clay, loam, shale, or other deleterious matter; graded within the following limits: Sieve Size Percent Passing by Weight 1 inch 100 3/4 inch 90 - 100 1/2 inch 10 - 50 #4 0 - 5 #200 –Less than 1 G. Drainage Stone: 1-1/2" crushed stone per M2.01.1 of the MassDOT Standard Specifications and Supplements consisting of durable, clean angular rock fragments obtained by breaking and crushing rock material: Sieve Size Percent Passing by Weight 2 inch 100 1-1/2 inch 95 - 100 1 inch 35 - 70 3/4 inch 0 - 25 H. Controlled Density Fill (CDF) (Flowable Fill): excavatable and used to limit settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout and other hazards created by earthwork operation as shown on the Drawings and when excavating around structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities. Batch CDF at concrete plant. 1. Portland Cement: AASHTO M85. 2. Fly Ash: AASHTO M4.05.02. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA EARTHWORK WOODARD & CURRAN 31 00 00-6 3. Sand: M4.02.02 of MassDOT Standard Specifications and Supplements. 4. Water: M4.02.04 of MassDOT Standard Specifications and Supplements. 5. Air Entraining Admixture: M4.02.05 of MassDOT Standard Specifications and Supplements. 6. Compressive Strength: 28 day = 30-80 psi, 90 day = 100 psi 7. Slump: 10 - 12 inches I. Unsuitable materials: material containing excessive clay, vegetation, organic matter, debris, pavement, stones or boulders over 6-inches in greatest dimension, and frozen material and will not provide a suitable foundation or structural support for the pipe or material unsuitable for use in backfill. J. Geotextile Fabric: Propex Geotex NW-801, Skaps GT-180, Tencate Mirafi 180N, or equal for use as separator between stone fill and existing soils. 2.02 SHORING AND BRACING MATERIALS A. Provide suitable shoring and bracing materials to support loads imposed. Materials may be used and in serviceable condition and are subject to inspection and approval of the Engineer once delivered to the Site B. If, in the sole opinion of the Engineer, materials used for shoring and bracing are not suitable for use on the Project, immediately remove the materials from the Site if rejected by Engineer. 2.03 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions 1. Before starting Work, check and verify governing dimensions and elevations. Survey condition of adjoining properties with Engineer. Take digital video recording any prior settlement or cracking of structures, pavements and other improvements. Prepare a list of such damages, verified by and signed by Contractor, Engineer, and others conducting the investigation. 2. Coordinate survey. Establish exact elevations at fixed points to act as benchmarks. Clearly identify benchmarks and record existing elevations. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA EARTHWORK WOODARD & CURRAN 31 00 00-7 Locate datum level used to establish benchmark elevations sufficiently distant so as not to be affected by excavation operations. 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. B. Laboratory Testing: Procedures for testing soil shall be performed in accordance with the following standards: Sieve Analysis ASTM C117/C136 Moisture Content ASTM D2216 Moisture/Density (Standard Proctor) ASTM D698 Moisture/Density (Modified Proctor) ASTM D1557 C. Field Testing: Procedures for testing soil shall be performed in accordance with the following standards: Density – Nuclear Method ASTM D6938 Density – Sand Cone ASTM D1556 Moisture Content – Nuclear Method ASTM D6938 D. Sieve Analysis: Sieve analysis tests shall be performed on soil samples obtained by the Contractor for acceptance of material from off site borrow sources or from on-site excavations. As a minimum, a test shall be performed on at least one random sample obtained from each type of fill being placed on site. Additional tests shall be performed on samples obtained from the fill when it is suspected by the Engineer that the material does not meet specifications. Tests shall also be performed when it is noted that the gradation of material actually being placed differs significantly from the documented gradation from a particular source. E. Site/Field Tests and Inspections 1. During excavation, resurvey benchmarks weekly, employing licensed Land Surveyor or registered Professional Engineer. Maintain accurate log of surveyed elevations for comparison with original elevations. Notify Engineer if changes in elevations occur or if cracks, sags or other damage is evident. 3.03 EXCAVATION A. Remove materials encountered to the limits shown on the Drawings, designated in the Specifications or as required by the Owner. 1. Do not perform excavation below normal grade to remove and replace unsuitable materials until approved by the Engineer. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA EARTHWORK WOODARD & CURRAN 31 00 00-8 2. Do not perform excavation of rock, boulder or unsuitable materials until material to be excavated has been cross-sectioned and classified by Engineer. B. Earth Excavation: removal and disposal of pavements, curbing and other obstructions visible on ground surface, underground structures and utilities indicated to be demolished and removed, and other materials encountered that are not classified as rock excavation or unauthorized excavation. Legally dispose of surplus materials resulting from excavation and not needed for use on the Project, as determined by the Engineer. Obtain necessary permits legal disposal of surplus material. C. Excavation in Asphalt Pavement Areas 1. Saw cut or mill to full depth through existing pavement prior to any excavation for pipe or structure placement. Minimize disturbance of remaining pavement. Cut and remove the minimum amount of pavement required to do the Work. 2. Use shoring and bracing where sides of excavation will not stand without undermining pavement. 3. Keep material and soil stockpiles a minimum 10 feet back from the edge of excavation, or in accordance with the approved support of excavation design, to avoid overloading of the sides of excavation and prevent slides or cave-ins. 4. Remove and dispose of existing pavements in the course of the Work. Take care to avoid mixing existing pavement material with excavation material to be used for backfill. D. Excavation for Trenches 1. Excavate to widths shown on the Drawings. 2. Produce an evenly graded flat trench bottom at the subgrade elevation required for installation of pipe and bedding material. 3. Load excavated material directly into trucks unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer. 4. Place backfill material directly into trench or excavation. Do not stockpile material to be used as backfill in traffic areas. E. Unauthorized Excavation: removal of materials beyond indicated subgrade elevations or dimensions without specific direction of Engineer. Unauthorized excavation, as well as remedial Work directed by Engineer including refilling, is at no additional cost to Owner. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA EARTHWORK WOODARD & CURRAN 31 00 00-9 1. Refilling Unauthorized Excavation a. Trenches: Use 3/4-inch crushed stone and stabilization fabric as a separator material, if necessary, as directed by Engineer. b. Elsewhere: Backfill and compact unauthorized excavations as specified for authorized excavations of same classification, unless otherwise directed by Engineer. F. Excavation Below Normal Grade: When excavation has reached required subgrade elevations, notify Engineer who will make an inspection of conditions. If unsuitable bearing materials, as defined in Paragraph 2.01 above, are encountered at required subgrade elevations, carry excavations deeper as directed by Engineer and replace excavated material with crushed stone or as directed by the Engineer. G. Excavation Above Normal Grade: If unsuitable materials, as defined in Paragraph 2.01 above, are encountered above normal grade, remove the unsuitable material and dispose of and do not use as backfill on any portion of the Project, unless otherwise approved by the Engineer. Use suitable stockpiled material approved by the Engineer, to replace the unsuitable material to backfill the trench to the dimensions for pipe and structure bedding and backfill as shown on the Drawings. If suitable stockpile material is not sufficient to backfill the trench to required dimensions, use gravel borrow to complete the trench backfill to the elevation shown for pipe and structure backfill. Furnish and install stockpiled material and gravel borrow at no additional cost to Owner. H. Material Storage 1. Stockpile and maintain suitable surplus excavated materials for re-use as backfill anywhere within the Project limits as directed by the Engineer. Place, grade, and shape stockpiles for proper drainage. Cover stockpiles when unused to limit infiltration by precipitation. 2. Provide erosion controls around stockpile areas as required by the local Conservation Agent and/or the Engineer at no additional cost to Owner. 3. Locate and retain soil materials at least 10 feet away from edge of excavations or as allowed approved support of excavation design. I. Field Quality Control 1. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. 3.04 ROCK REMOVAL A. General 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA EARTHWORK WOODARD & CURRAN 31 00 00-10 1. Notify Engineer immediately of change in classification. Should bedrock be encountered above the trench bottom grade or above the subgrade elevation, expose the bedrock surface and to allow the Engineer to perform the necessary elevation survey and take cross-sectional measurements. 2. Perform Rock Excavation by mechanical methods. 3. Boulders: Remove or partially remove boulders exposed on the sides of or in the bottom of excavations as directed by the Engineer. Remove boulders to not less than 2 feet outside structure walls, not less than 12 inches outside footings, not less than 6 inches below underslab subgrade, not less than the lateral trench width payment lines indicated, and not less than 12 inches below the underside of pipes. Depressions resulting from the removal of boulders and rock shall be refilled with approved compacted bedding. Bedding for refilling will not be paid for separately. 4. Refill unauthorized rock excavations, or excavations made beyond or below the indicated or directed excavation pay limits, with compacted bedding at no additional cost. 5. Remove and dispose of unused rock and boulders off-site. 3.05 SHORING AND BRACING A. General 1. Provide temporary sheeting, shoring, and bracing in locations where required to protect excavated areas as required for safety or compliance with OSHA and Laws and Regulations per Section 00 73 19, at no additional cost to the Owner. If the Engineer is of the opinion that at any point sufficient or proper supports have not been provided, additional supports may be ordered to be placed at no additional cost to the Owner. Compliance with such order shall not relieve the Contractor from responsibility for the sufficiency of such supports. 2. In no case should slope height, slope inclination, or excavation depth, including utility trench excavation depth, exceed those specified in Laws and Regulations per Section 00 73 19. As a minimum, follow the current OSHA Health and Safety Standards for Excavations, 29 CFR Part 1926. 3. Provide system to resist earth and hydrostatic pressures, including surcharges from surface loads. 4. Maintain shoring and bracing while excavation is open. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA EARTHWORK WOODARD & CURRAN 31 00 00-11 5. If not leaving in place, remove systems in stages to prevent disturbance of soils and damage to structures and improvements. Fill voids as soon as sheeting is withdrawn. B. Provide shoring and bracing designed by a Massachusetts Registered Professional Engineer to protect existing buildings, utilities, and other improvements and excavation against movement due to caving and to meet safety requirements of OSHA and Laws and Regulations per Section 00 73 19 for shoring and bracing. 1. Wood Sheeting and Bracing: used as needed to make excavation safe and secure. Leave wood sheeting in place. 2. Steel Sheet Piling: to be removed following completion of Work or remain in place when directed by the Engineer. Drive sheet piling prior to excavation where possible. Fill and compact voids outside sheeting to hold sides of excavation in place. Steel sheet piling may be left in place at the Contractor's option if approved by the Engineer and at no additional cost to the Owner. Cut off sheet piling to be left in place at least 5 feet below finish grade or less if directed by the Engineer. 3. Movable box: used where a shoring system is required but steel piling is not called for as determined by Contractor as not all areas of Work will be conducive to the use of a movable box. C. Field Quality Control 1. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. 3.06 DEWATERING A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. 3.07 BACKFILL AND FILL A. Do not backfill excavations and trenches until new utilities have been inspected and, if required, tested satisfactorily for conformance with the Drawings and Specifications unless directed otherwise by the Engineer. Place acceptable soil material in layers to required elevations as shown on the Drawings or as specified. Fill, backfill, and compact in accordance with this Section to produce minimum subsequent settlement of the material and provide adequate support for the surface treatment or structure to be placed on the material. Place material in approximately horizontal layers beginning at lowest area to be filled. Do not impair drainage. Replace fill that becomes frozen or saturated in stockpiles with suitable off-Site fill at no additional cost to Owner. B. Ground Surface Preparation 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA EARTHWORK WOODARD & CURRAN 31 00 00-12 1. Remove asphalt and concrete pavements, granular base course, existing sandy and gravelly fills, existing organic silty/clay soils, organic peat, vegetation, debris, unsatisfactory soil materials, obstructions, and deleterious materials from ground surface to excavation subgrade prior to placement of fills. Scarify surfaces so that fill material will bond with existing surface. 2. When existing ground surface has a density less than that specified under Article 3.07, Compaction, for particular area classification, break up ground surface, pulverize, moisture-condition to optimum moisture content, and compact to required depth and percentage of maximum density. C. Placement 1. Place backfill and fill materials in layers not more than 6 inches in loose depth for material compacted by heavy compaction equipment or hand- operated tampers. Do not place backfill or fill material on surfaces that are muddy, frozen, or contain frost or ice. 2. Place backfill and fill materials evenly adjacent to structures, to required elevations. Take care to prevent wedging action of backfill against structures by carrying material uniformly around structure to approximately same elevation in each lift. 3. Do not allow heavy machinery within 5 feet of structure during backfilling and compacting. D. Backfilling Excavations 1. Backfill excavations promptly as Work permits, but not until completion of the following: a. Inspection and recording locations of underground utilities b. Removal of concrete formwork c. Removal of shoring and bracing, and backfilling of voids with satisfactory materials d. Removal of trash and debris 2. Use care in backfilling to avoid damage or displacement of underground structures and pipe. 3. Backfill under existing utility pipes crossed by new utility pipes with CDF. The CDF will extend continuously from the bedding of the new pipe to the utility pipe crossed, including a 6-inch thick envelope of CDF around the existing utility pipes. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA EARTHWORK WOODARD & CURRAN 31 00 00-13 4. Backfill with CDF when clearance between proposed structure and existing structure is 18 inches or less and sufficient clearance is not provided to obtain suitable compaction, in the opinion of the Engineer. 5. Backfill with CDF for trenches within impervious surfaces with pipes containing less than 3 feet of cover. 6. Provide that 3/4 inch crushed stone backfill stands at its own angle of repose. "Haunching" or "forming" with common fill is not allowed. E. Backfilling Trenches 1. See Trench Detail on the Drawings. 2. Place pipe and structure bedding and gravel bedding to the extent and dimensions shown on the Drawings so that the pipes and structures have complete and uniform bearing. 3. Grade, compact and shape pipe and structure bedding so that the full length of pipe barrel has complete and uniform bearing. Dig bell holes and depressions for joints after the bedding has been graded and compacted, at proper clearance for jointing the pipes. 4. Following inspection and approval of pipe installation by Engineer, carefully hand place and properly compact additional approved bedding to the limits shown on the Drawings. Hand or mechanical tamping on the sides of the pipe. 5. Place 6 inches of suitable backfill in trenches above the crown of pipe as approved, not frozen and without stones larger than 3 inches in the greatest dimension. Spread in layers not exceeding 6 inches in loose thickness and compact each layer by at least 4 passes with an approved vibratory compactor. See Article 3.07 for compaction types and standards. Carefully place trench backfilling to avoid disturbance of new Work and of existing structures. Adjust moisture content of backfill to allow for proper compaction. 6. Bed pipe in pipe and structure bedding (3/4-inch crushed stone except where otherwise indicated. Limits of bedding and requirements for remaining trench backfill are shown on the Drawings. 7. Trenches in cross-country runs: Restore surface to that existing prior to construction, as shown on the Drawings, or required by the Engineer. Mound trench 6 inches above existing grade or as required by the Engineer. F. Field Quality Control 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA EARTHWORK WOODARD & CURRAN 31 00 00-14 1. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. 3.08 COMPACTION A. Use methods which produce the required degree of compaction throughout the entire depth of material placed without damage to new or existing facilities and which are approved by the Engineer. Adjust moisture content of soil as required. Remove and replace material which is too wet to compact to required density. Compact each layer as Work progresses. Compaction Method Maximum Stone Size Maximum Loose Lift Thickness Minimum Number of Passes Below Pavement Less Critical Areas Below Pavement Less Critical Areas Hand-operated vibratory plate or light roller in confined areas 4 inches 6 inches 8 4 4 Hand-operated vibratory drum rollers weighing at least 1,000 lbs. in confined areas 6 inches 10 inches 12 inches 4 4 Light vibratory drum roller min. weight at drum 5,000 lbs., min. dynapac force 10,000 lbs. 8 inches 6 inches 18 inches 4 4 Medium vibratory drum roller min. weight at drum 10,000 lbs., min. dynapac force 20,000 lbs. 8 inches 6 inches 24 inches 6 6 B. Degree of Compaction (minimum densities): Fill and Backfill Location Density Top 3 feet under pavement grade 95% of max. Below top 3 feet under pavement grade 92% of max. Pipe Bedding 92% of max. Beside structure foundation walls 95% of max. Maximum density: ASTM D698, modified Field density tests ASTM D1556 (sand cone) or ASTM D6938 (nuclear methods) 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA EARTHWORK WOODARD & CURRAN 31 00 00-15 Note: Fill that is too wet for proper compaction shall be disked, harrowed, or otherwise dried to proper moisture content for compaction to the required density. If the fill material cannot be dried within 48 hours of placement, remove and replace with drier fill. C. Field Quality Control 1. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. 2. Testing a. Determine actual in place densities using field tests as directed by the Engineer and in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. b. Perform additional Work to obtain proper compaction if in-place densities do not meet the specified densities. Retesting may be required by the Engineer. 3. Minimum Number of Tests a. Suitable Backfill: Compact backfill in maximum loose lifts per table above. For each lift make one field density test every 50 linear feet. b. Pavement Sub base: Make at least one field density test of sub base for every 50 linear feet of paved area. 3.09 GRADING A. Uniformly grade areas within limits of grading under this section, including adjacent transition areas. Smooth finished surface within specified tolerances, compact with uniform levels or slopes between points where elevations are shown, or between such points and existing grades. B. Grade areas adjacent to structure lines to drain away from structures and to prevent ponding. C. Finish surfaces: free from irregular surface changes and as follows. 1. Lawn or Other Unpaved Areas: Finish areas to receive topsoil to within not more than 0.10 feet above or below required subgrade elevations. 2. Pavements: Shape surface of areas under pavement to line, grade and cross-section, with finish surface not more than plus or minus 1 inch above or below required subgrade elevation. D. Compaction: After grading, compact subgrade surfaces to the percentage of maximum density for each area classification. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA EARTHWORK WOODARD & CURRAN 31 00 00-16 3.10 DISPOSAL OF EXCESS MATERIALS A. Legally dispose of excess or unsuitable material at no additional cost to Owner. 3.11 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. 3.12 MAINTENANCE A. Protect newly graded areas from traffic and erosion. Keep free of trash and debris. Repair and re-establish grades in settled, eroded, and rutted areas to specified tolerances. B. Where completed compacted areas are disturbed by subsequent construction operations or adverse weather, scarify surface, re-shape, and compact to required density prior to further construction. Immediately repair any subsequent settling and provide such maintenance for the remainder of the Contract at no additional expense to the Owner. C. Prior to paving upon the sub-grade, remove soft or unsuitable material and replace with suitable backfill material. Bring low sections, holes, or depressions to the required grade with approved material. Shape entire sub-grade to line, grade, and cross section and thoroughly compact. D. Provide erosion control measures in accordance with Laws and Regulations and in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. Keep roads free of debris. Use suitable watertight vehicles for hauling wet materials over roads and streets. Clean up materials dropped from or spread by vehicles promptly or when directed by the Engineer. END OF SECTION 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA SITE CLEARING WOODARD & CURRAN 31 10 00-1 SECTION 31 10 00 SITE CLEARING PART 1 – GENERAL SUMMARY A. Section Includes 1. Site clearing and grubbing PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Measurement and payment requirements: per Division 01 General Requirements. REFERENCES A. Definitions 1. Clearing: cutting and disposing of trees, downed timber, stubs, brush, bushes, snags, rubbish, debris, and other objectionable matter and materials and the removal and storage of fences, signs, walks, guard rails, curbs and other items to be restored. 2. Grubbing: removal and disposal of stumps, roots, duff, foundations and other objectionable matter and materials to a minimum of 6 inches below original ground surface. 3. Topsoil: friable loam surface soil found in a depth of not less than 4 inches from the original ground surface. “Satisfactory” topsoil is reasonably free of subsoil, clay lumps, stones, and other objects over 2 inch diameter, and free of weeds, roots, and other objectionable material. ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination, Sequencing, and Scheduling: per Division 01 General Requirements. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. B. Store trees, plants and shrubs in protected areas and give ample water to keep them in a thriving condition for subsequent replanting. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA SITE CLEARING WOODARD & CURRAN 31 10 00-2 C. Store slate and flagstone walk sections, granite and stone curbs, fences, signs, guard rails and other items removed at approved locations for subsequent reinstallation. D. Do not obstruct roads, driveways, sidewalks, gutters and drainage ditches, swales and channels with stored materials. SITE CONDITIONS A. Locations of trees, plantings, vegetation, sidewalks, curbs and other living and nonliving items shown on the Drawings were determined by actual surveys at the time surveys were made and conditions may have changed. Verify existing site conditions. PART 2 – PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify limiting boundaries such as permanent and temporary easements, property lines, rights-of-way and grading limits have been accurately located and clearly marked. B. Verify pipeline routings and other items of Work have been accurately located and clearly marked. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Mark all trees, plantings and other objects which are to be removed, trimmed, cut, or removed and preserved. Inspect these items with the Engineer prior to start of Work. Do not remove or trim unmarked items unless approved by Engineer. B. Protect existing trees and other vegetation indicated to remain in place, against unnecessary cutting, breaking or skinning of roots, skinning and bruising of bark, smothering of trees by stockpiling construction materials or excavated materials within drip line, excess foot or vehicular traffic, or parking of vehicles within drip line. Provide temporary guards to protect trees and vegetation to be left standing. C. Protect existing objects not indicated to be removed. Avoid interference with the use of, and passage to and from, adjacent buildings, facilities, driveways, walks, drainage systems and road. D. Saw-cut pavements required to be removed in advance, including highways, driveways and walks, but do not remove until the Work is ready to be installed. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA SITE CLEARING WOODARD & CURRAN 31 10 00-3 E. Do not remove highway signs, guard rails and other control, safety and warning devices until just prior to the installation of the Work. F. Leave items affecting traffic, safety, lives and the containment of humans and animals and essential to the protection of property or the operation of a business in place as long as possible and replace as soon as possible when such items must be removed. G. Do not remove fences until the property owners affected are notified at least four (4) days in advance of such removal. Unless written permission from a fence owner is received, do not remove a fence more than 48 hours in advance. 3.03 PERFORMANCE A. General 1. Do not use explosives for clearing and grubbing operations. 2. Limit the area of clearing and grubbing to the minimum area possible to allow for proper installation of Work and to preserve plantings and natural vegetation to the maximum extent. Conduct Work so that present growth will blend with the limits of construction and a natural appearance will be attained. 3. Confine clearing and grubbing operations to: a. areas where Work will be performed but to minimum extent possible to allow proper installation of Work; b. within grading limits as shown on the Drawings; and c. within Owner easements and property lines of lands owned by Owner. 4. Employ measures to avoid erosion. 5. Do not disturb property markers unless absolutely necessary. If necessary to disturb or remove a property marker, comply with Division 01 General Requirements and employ a registered land surveyor to establish the property marker location, mark area, and replace property marker as soon as possible. B. Stripping Topsoil 1. Strip topsoil within limits as designated on Drawings or as required to prevent mixing with underlying subsoil or objectionable material. 2. Stop topsoil stripping at a sufficient distance to prevent damage to main root systems of trees indicated to be left standing. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA SITE CLEARING WOODARD & CURRAN 31 10 00-4 3. Stockpile topsoil in storage piles in areas shown or where directed and provide for drainage of surface water. Cover storage piles as necessary to prevent windblown dust and erosion. 4. Surplus loam and topsoil not required for completion of the Work shall remain the property of the Owner. Stockpile surplus material on-Site and maintain and protect until Work is complete. C. Trees and Plantings 1. Remove only those items marked for removal in grassed, planted and open areas. 2. Trees a. Notify property owners in advance of tree trimming or removal to allow property owner to cut and remove trees and retain debris unless otherwise directed. b. If it is impractical to fell trees as a whole, remove them in sections according to standard practices of professional tree removal. Fall trees to the center of the area being cleared to minimize damage to trees that are to be left standing c. Remove and/or trim trees in wooded areas only as required. Minimize damage to trees that are to be left standing. Immediately remove and legally dispose of debris. d. Timber and wood removed by Contractor shall become the property of Contractor. e. Trim trees evenly to achieve neat severance with the least possible damage to the tree. f. apply wet burlap to prevent drying out where roots are cut or damaged. D. Pavements, Walks, Curbs and Guard Rails 1. Remove existing pavements, walks, and curbs to the limits shown on Drawings, or if not shown, to the minimum extent possible. 2. Saw-cut asphalt and concrete paved surfaces before removal. 3. Carefully remove slate and flag stone walks, granite and stone curbs and guard rails to the minimum extent possible. Terminate removals at a joint or guard rail post. Store and protect for reuse. E. Walls, Fences, and Other Obstructions 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA SITE CLEARING WOODARD & CURRAN 31 10 00-5 1. Carefully remove walls, fences, signs, sheds and other obstructions encountered and store for subsequent replacement. 2. Do not disturb property markers unless absolutely necessary. If it becomes necessary to disturb or remove a property marker, employ a Registered Land Surveyor at no extra cost to the Owner to establish the property marker location by providing a minimum of four (4) ties to the marker. The Registered Land Surveyor shall replace the property marker as soon as possible. 3. Promptly remove and legally dispose of materials not specified to be stored or re-used. Do not burn debris unless approved and required permits are obtained. 4. Replant and restore surfaces. Comply with requirements of Section 32 90 00 for planting. In addition to Section 02480, Landscaping. 5. Replace materials that have been removed in order to perform the Work to the original condition as approved. F. Disposal: Burning at the Site is not permitted unless otherwise approved by Engineer. If burning is allowed, the Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining all necessary permits. Materials not specified to be stored or re-used shall be promptly removed and disposed of off-site in a lawful manner. G. Protection: Carefully protect and guard all trees, shrubs and vegetation and take every precaution to avoid damage to utilities, buildings and other property. END OF SECTION This page intentionally left blank. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA ASPHALT PAVING WOODARD & CURRAN 32 12 16-1 SECTION 32 12 16 ASPHALT PAVING PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes 1. Furnish and install tack prime coat, hot mix asphalt pavement base and surface courses and miscellaneous patching in accordance with this Section and applicable reference standards listed in Article 1.03. B. Related Requirements 1. Section 31 00 00 – Earthwork 1.02 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Measurement and payment requirements: per Division 01 General Requirements. 1.03 REFERENCES A. Reference Standards 1. American Association of State Highways and Transportation Officials (AASHTO) a. AASHTO M140: Standard Specification for Emulsified Asphalt b. AASHTO M144: Standard Specification for Calcium Chloride c. AASHTO M226: Standard Specification for Viscosity Graded Asphalt Cement d. AASHTO T245: Standard Method of Test for Resistance to Plastic Flow of Bituminous Mixtures Using Marshall Apparatus 2. American Society of Testing and Materials (ASTM) a. ASTM D1188: Bulk Specific Gravity and Density of Compacted Asphaltic Mixtures using Paraffin-Coated Specimens b. ASTM D1559: Resistance to Plastic Flow of Bituminous Mixtures using Marshall Apparatus c. ASTM D2171: Standard Test Method for Viscosity of Asphalts by Vacuum Capillary Viscometer (RAP Asphalt Mixes) d. ASTM D2397: Cationic Emulsified Asphalt 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA ASPHALT PAVING WOODARD & CURRAN 32 12 16-2 e. ASTM D2726: Bulk Specific Gravity and Density of Non- Absorptive Compacted Asphaltic Mixtures f. ASTM D3381: Viscosity-Graded Asphalt Cement for use in Pavement Construction 3. Asphalt Institute (AI) a. MS-2: Mix Design Methods for Asphalt Concrete and Other Hot Mix Types b. MS-3: Asphalt Plant Manual c. MS-19: Basic Asphalt Emulsion Manual d. MS-22: Principles of Construction of Hot-Mix Asphalt Pavement, Addendum B. Where reference is made to one of the above standards, the revision in effect at the time of bid opening shall apply. 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination, Sequencing, and Scheduling: per Division 01 General Requirements. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. 1. Product Data 2. Manufacturer Instructions 3. Material Certificates: Certificates signed by material producer and Contractor stating that each material complies with specified requirements. 4. Design Mix: Provide for each grade of pavement to be used 20 days prior to start of paving. 5. Certified weigh slips: Provide for each truck load of hot bituminous material. B. Closeout and Maintenance Material Submittals: per Division 01 General Requirements. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA ASPHALT PAVING WOODARD & CURRAN 32 12 16-3 B. Standards: “Standards Specifications for Highways and Bridges,” 1988 Edition, The Commonwealth of Massachusetts Department of Public Works. C. The hot mix asphalt manufacturer shall be registered with and approved by the Massachusetts Department of Transportation. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. 1.08 SITE CONDITIONS A. Existing Conditions: per Division 01 General Requirements. B. Tack coat, additional limitations: 1. Apply bituminous prime and tack coats only when the ambient temperature in the shade is at least 50°F for 12 hours immediately prior to application. 2. Do not apply when the base surface is wet or contains an excess of moisture which would prevent uniform distribution and the required penetration, during inclement weather or the threat of inclement weather or when, in the Engineer’s judgment, weather conditions prohibit the proper application of materials. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 AGGREGATES FOR AGGREGATE (GRAVEL) BASE COURSE A. General: Section 31 00 00 - Earthwork 2.02 ASPHALT CEMENT A. Comply with Standard Specifications Section M3.01.0 B. Grade: AC-10 2.03 HOT MIX ASPHALT A. Comply with Standard Specifications 460 or the referenced standard, Section M3.11. B. Base Course: Class I Bituminous Concrete Base Course, Type I-1. C. Binder Course: Class I Bituminous Concrete Binder Course, Type I-1. D. Top Course: Class I Bituminous Concrete Top Course Type I-1. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA ASPHALT PAVING WOODARD & CURRAN 32 12 16-4 E. Joint Sealer: Shall be hot poured sealer conforming to the requirements of the referenced standard, Section M3.035.0. 2.04 RECLAIMED ROADWAY WITH PAVING A. Comply with Standard Specifications Sections 403.30, 403.60, 420, 460 and M3. 2.05 BITUMINOUS TACK COAT A. Comply with Standard Specification Section M3.03.0. B. Grade: RS-1 2.06 BITUMINOUS CONCRETE BERM A. Comply with the most recent edition of the Commonwealth of Massachusetts, Massachusetts Highway Standard Specifications for Highways and Bridges and with local and State road opening permits. B. Bituminous concrete for curbing shall be Class I conforming to the applicable requirements for Dense Mix (See Table A, M3.11.03) 2.07 PAVEMENT MARKING PAINT A. Standard Specification Section M7. Thermoplastic pavement markings shall be replaced in kind. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Check all frames, covers, grates, valve boxes, and other miscellaneous castings that are located in the proposed pavement areas to ensure that all have been correctly positioned and set to the proper slope and elevation. All covers and grates shall be set flush with the required finished surface. No depressions or mounds will be permitted in the pavement to accommodate inaccuracies in the setting of castings. Paint all vertical surfaces of structures and existing concrete surfaces in contact with new bituminous pavement with a uniform coating of an approved tack coat material. Avoid splattering or staining of surfaces that will be exposed after the paving is completed. Surfaces that are stained as a result of the Contractor’s operation shall be repaired or replaced at no additional cost to the Owner. Hot mix asphalt shall not be placed on any wet surface, or when weather conditions otherwise prevent the proper handling or finishing of the bituminous mixtures, as determined by the Engineer. Hot mix asphalt paving may not be placed under any of the following conditions: 1. When the underlying layer contains frozen moisture. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA ASPHALT PAVING WOODARD & CURRAN 32 12 16-5 2. When the temperature of the underlying layer, in the shade and away from any source of heat, is below 26OF. 3. When the temperature is below 40OF and the thickness of the lift to be placed is 1-1/2-inches, or less. 4. When the surface receiving the hot mix asphalt is wet, contains standing water, during inclement weather or when conditions prohibit the proper application of the hot mix asphalt, as determined by the Engineer. 3.02 AGGREGATE (GRAVEL) BASE COURSE A. Comply with Section 02200 and Standard Specifications Sections 401 and 405. B. Depth: As indicated on the detail in the Drawings. C. Placement: Shall be placed at the time of temporary pavement and shall extend 2 feet beyond each side of the trench on undisturbed material. 3.03 HOT MIX ASPHALT A. Placement and Spreading: Hot mix asphalt mixtures shall be spread at a minimum temperature of 240º F and a maximum temperature of 325º F by means of mechanical self-powered pavers, automated to spread the mixture true to the line, grade, and crown set by the Engineer. Bituminous pavers shall be provided with activated vibratory screed and solid vibratory screed extenders and capable of spreading and finishing courses of bituminous plant mixed material in lane widths applicable to the specified typical section and thickness shown on the Drawings. Pavement surfaces shall be uniformly sloped and graded such that water drains away. No ponding of water is permitted. Finished surfaces shall be true to the Drawings within ± 1/8-inch when tested with a 10-foot straightedge. Joint patterns shall be parallel to traffic flow. Pavement shall be installed by a Contractor registered and approved by the Massachusetts Highway Department. B. Base Course: Standard Specifications Section 420 C. Binder Course: Standard Specifications Section 460 D. Top Course: Standard Specifications Section 460 3.04 HOT MIX ASPHALT PERMANENT PAVEMENT PATCH A. Saw cut existing pavement as indicated. Mill existing and temporary pavement as shown on the Drawings. B. Depth: Place hot mix asphalt permanent pavement to indicated thickness. The permanent and finished pavement surface shall conform to the existing cross sections of the roadway or as directed. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA ASPHALT PAVING WOODARD & CURRAN 32 12 16-6 3.05 RECLAIMED ROADWAYS WITH PAVING A. Comply with standard specification Section 403.60, 420, 460 and M3. B. Depth: Reclamation and paving includes scarifying and pulverizing the in-place pavement and underlying material, mixing and/or blending the material to a minimum depth of 8-inches and placement of hot mix asphalt binder and surface courses to the thicknesses indicated on the Contract Drawings. 3.06 FULL WIDTH PAVING A. Comply with Standard Specification 403.60, 420, 460 and M3. B. Depth: Place hot mix asphalt in one or more courses to the thickness indicated on the Contract Drawings. Mill each gutterline to maintain existing drainage patterns and to eliminate ponding of runoff. C. Keyways: Provide keyways where overlay pavement ends and meets existing pavement of sufficient depth and width to prevent sliding and to provide a uniform transition from new pavement to existing pavement. 3.07 BITUMINOUS CONCRETE SIDEWALKS A. Prepare subgrade, place gravel base and surface course to the thickness specified. Preparation of base course and sidewalk surfacing shall be in accordance with Section 02200-Earthwork. Bituminous sidewalk and driveway material shall be placed and spread on the compacted base in one or more courses as indicated so as to give the required depth when rolled. Compaction shall be accomplished by means of a power roller of a type and weight acceptable to the Engineer. In areas inaccessible to the roller, hand tamping or hand roller will be permitted. In any case, the bituminous material shall be uniformly compacted. B. Unless otherwise directed, the walkway shall have a 1.5% slope to provide for proper drainage and to conform to handicap accessibility requirements. 3.08 BITUMINOUS TACK COAT A. Apply tack coat immediately prior to placing pavement to curbing, gutters, manholes, pavement, etc. for adequate bond. Generally a tack coat will not be required for pavement placed immediately following the rolling of the underlying course. B. Rate of application: No less than 0.3 gallons per square yard. 3.09 TRENCH PATCHING A. All unpaved trenches shall have temporary trench pavement prior to the weekend, at a minimum. Trenches shall receive temporary trench pavement more frequently if, in the opinion of the Engineer, it is required for the safety of the motoring 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA ASPHALT PAVING WOODARD & CURRAN 32 12 16-7 public or when requested by the Owner. Place aggregate subbase and base as shown on the detail in the Drawings and as specified. 3.10 ADJUST AND CLEAN A. Correct deficiencies of specified conditions and tolerances in a manner approved by Engineer. B. Irregularities and defects remaining after compaction shall be removed and sufficient new material placed for form a true and even surface. Roll all minor surface projections, joints and minor honeycombed areas to a smooth finish. The surface finish shall be of uniform texture conforming to line and grade shown on the Drawings. C. Clean all paved surfaces of dirt, stones and other debris. Move and properly dispose of off-site all discarded mix, boards, trash and all other debris. D. Whenever the subbase becomes dry enough to cause dust problems, spread calcium chloride uniformly over the gravel surface in sufficient quantity to eliminate the dust. E. No vehicular traffic or loads shall be permitted on the newly completed pavement until adequate stability has been attained and the material has cooled sufficiently to prevent distortion or loss of fines. If the climatic or other conditions warrant it, the period of time before opening to traffic may be extended at the discretion of the Engineer. 3.11 BITUMINOUS CONCRETE BERM A. Bituminous concrete for curbing shall be Class I conforming to the applicable requirements for Dense Mix. See Table A, M3.11.03 of the Standard Specifications. 3.12 PAVING EQUIPMENT A. The Contractor shall, at a minimum, use 10-feet wide spreader box paver (not including wings) for placement of overlay paving and paving on reclaimed or milled roads. A spreader box shall also be used for placement of surface course for permanent trench patch. 3.13 PAVING MARKINGS A. Replace all existing pavement markings and street lines in accordance with the manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices, latest edition, FHWA and comply with MHD-SSHB, Section 860 and the requirements of local and state permits. Cost of replacing pavement markings shall be considered incidental to the paving items in the Bid. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA ASPHALT PAVING WOODARD & CURRAN 32 12 16-8 3.14 PROTECTION A. After final compaction, provide barricades or other acceptable controls to prevent vehicular traffic on pavement until it has cooled and hardened B. Remove and replace any portion of the pavement that has become loose, broken, damaged, or found defective. C. No paving is to be placed in streets after November 15 or before April 15 without permission of the Owner. As a minimum, Contractor must maintain initial pavement on trench surfaces during the winter months. END OF SECTION 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA WOODARD & CURRAN SANITARY UTILITY SEWERAGE PIPING 33 31 00-1 SECTION 33 31 00 SANITARY UTILITY SEWERAGE PIPING PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Provide new sanitary sewer, storm drain and pressure piping systems as specified and as indicated on the Drawings. The Work shall include but is not limited to sanitary sewer piping, wastewater force main pressure piping, sewer services, storm drains, culverts, under drains and drain piping associated with clay dams. Provide all related appurtenances including but not limited to pipe fittings, thrust blocks, restraints, pipe supports, couplings and related items for complete systems. B. The piping included in this specification section may or may not all be required for the work outlined in the Contract Documents. Provide all piping that is indicated on the Drawings, is specified, and/or is required to complete the work outlined in the Contract Documents. 1.02 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Measurement and payment requirements: per Division 01 General Requirements. 1.03 REFERENCES A. The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only. Unless otherwise noted, the most recent version of the listed publications, including revisions, at time of bid opening shall apply. B. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO) 1. AASHTO M 252 Standard Specification for Corrugated Polyethylene Drainage Pipe 2. AASHTO M 294 Standard Specification for Corrugated Polyethylene Pipe, 300- to 1500-mm Diameter C. ASTM International (ASTM) 1. ASTM D 3350 Polyethylene Plastics Pipe and Fittings Materials 2. ASTM D 3034 Standard Specification for Type PSM Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA WOODARD & CURRAN SANITARY UTILITY SEWERAGE PIPING 33 31 00-2 3. ASTM D 3212 Standard Specification for Joints for Drain and Sewer Plastic Pipes Using Flexible Elastomeric Seals 4. ASTM F 477 Standard Specification for Elastomeric Seals (Gaskets) for Joining Plastic Pipe 5. ASTM F 405 Corrugated Polyethylene (PE) Tubing and Fittings D. American Water Works Association (AWWA) 1. AWWA C104/A21.4 Cement-Mortar Lining for Ductile-Iron Pipe and Fittings for Water 2. AWWA C110/A21.10 Ductile-Iron and Gray-Iron Fittings for Water 3. AWWA C111/A21.11 Rubber-Gasket Joints for Ductile-Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings 4. AWWA C150/A21.50 Thickness Design of Ductile-Iron Pipe 5. AWWA C151/A21.51 Ductile-Iron Pipe, Centrifugally Cast, for Water 6. AWWA C906 Polyethylene (PE) Pressure Pipe and Fittings, 4 In. (100 mm) through 63 In., (1,575 mm) for Water Distribution and Transmission 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. The following shall be submitted in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. All submittals shall have pertinent numerical data and information specified in the "English" language using "English" units. The submittals shall include but are not limited to the following in addition to Division 01 General Requirements. B. SD-03 Product Data 1. Provide Manufacturer's descriptive data, technical literature, catalog cuts, and installation instructions. Product data shall also include dimensional data for each type of pipe, tube, and fitting. 2. Prior to shipment of pipe, submit a certified affidavit of compliance from the pipe Manufacturer stating that the pipe, fittings, gaskets, linings and exterior coatings for this project have been manufactured and tested in accordance with AWWA and ASTM standards as well as the requirements specified herein. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA WOODARD & CURRAN SANITARY UTILITY SEWERAGE PIPING 33 31 00-3 C. SD-06 Reports 1. The Contractor shall submit test reports for each section of piping tested for pressure and leakage. 2. Construction Records: Record depth and location of the following: a. Sewers & treated effluent piping b. Service capped ends, cleanouts, bends in services, connection points to sewer main. c. Repairs to existing pipes. d. Force Main Pressure Piping e. Record all records neatly in a permanently bound notebook and submit to Engineer at Substantial Completion. Provide access to records for the Engineer at all times. Submit progress copies to the Engineer on a weekly basis. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide removal and disposal of all damaged pipe from the Project Site. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 PIPE AND FITTINGS - GENERAL A. Unless otherwise indicated, all fittings and appurtenances shall be of the same type and grade of materials as the connecting pipe. All products provided under this section shall conform to current AWWA and ANSI specifications as appropriate to the type of pipe specified. B. Provide commercially manufactured wyes or tees for service connections. Fittings shall have single piece gasket. 2.02 CULVERTS & STORM DRAINS A. Provide culverts, culvert replacement and storm drain piping as specified and as indicated on the Drawings. Pipe and fittings shall be corrugated exterior polyethylene drainage pipe, smooth wall interior, highway grade in accordance with AASHTO M294 and ASTM D3350. B. Pipe shall be joined using a bell & spigot joint meeting AASHTO M252, AASHTO M294, or ASTM F2306. The joint shall be soil-tight and gaskets, when applicable, shall meet requirements of ASTM F477. Gaskets shall be installed by the pipe manufacturer and shall be covered with a removable wrap to ensure the gasket is free from debris. A joint lubricant supplied by the manufacturer shall be used on the gasket and bell during assembly. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA WOODARD & CURRAN SANITARY UTILITY SEWERAGE PIPING 33 31 00-4 C. Fittings shall conform to AASHTO M252, AASHTO M294, or ASTM F2306. Bell and spigot connections shall utilize a spun-on or welded bell and valley or saddle gasket meeting the soil-tight joint performance requirements of AASHTO M252, AASHTO M294 or ASTM F2306. D. Virgin material for pipe and fitting production shall be high-density polyethylene conforming with the minimum requirements of cell classification 424420C for 4 inch through diameters, and 435400C for 12 inch through 60 inch diameters, as defined and described in the latest version of ASTM D3350, except that carbon black content should not exceed 4%. The 12- through 60-inch virgin pipe material shall comply with the notched constant ligament-stress (NCLS) test as specified in Sections 9.5 and 5.1 of AASHTO M294 and ASTM F2306 respectively. E. High density polyethylene storm drain and culvert piping shall be a product of the following manufacturer: 1. Hancor, Inc. – Surelock 2. ADS, Inc. - N-12 WT IB 3. Engineer Approved Equal 2.03 GRAVITY SEWER PIPE & FITTINGS A. All gravity sewer piping shall be PVC, SDR 35 in accordance with ASTM D3034 for sizes 4 inch to 15 inch and ASTM F679 for sizes 18 inch to 48 inch. B. Pipe and fittings shall be PVC in accordance with ASTM D1784 Cells Class 12454 or 12364. Gaskets shall be Nitrile (NBR/Buna-N) in accordance with ASTM F477. Joints shall be push-on integral bell and spigot in accordance with ASTM D3212. Pipe stiffness shall be in accordance with ASTM D2412 with F/∆Y = 46 psi or 115 psi. Provide factory pre-fabricated wyes and fittings which match the properties of the connecting pipe. All gravity sewer piping shall be a product of the following manufacturer: 1. J-M Manufacturing Company – Ring-Tite 2. North American Pipe Corporation 3. Engineer Approved Equal 2.04 DUCTILE IRON PIPE & FITTINGS – MECHANICAL JOINT A. All mechanical joint ductile iron piping and fittings shall be Class 350 for "Buried" force main pressure pipe applications as per AWWA C151/A21.51 standards. Refer to Specification 40 05 13 PROCESS PIPE AND FITTINGS for additional details and requirements for mechanical joint ductile iron pipe and fittings. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA WOODARD & CURRAN SANITARY UTILITY SEWERAGE PIPING 33 31 00-5 2.05 DUCTILE IRON PIPE & FITTINGS – PUSH ON JOINT A. All push on joint pipe and fittings shall be Class 350 for "Buried" applications as per AWWA C151/A21.51 standards. Pipe shall be supplied in standard lengths whenever possible. The pipe thickness design shall be in accordance with AWWA C150/A21.50 standards, except provide a minimum of Class 350 for all piping 12 inches and smaller. Provide a minimum Class 350 for piping from 14 inches to 24 inches and provide a minimum of Class 250 for piping larger than 24 inches. Refer to Specification 40 05 13 PROCESS PIPE AND FITTTINGS for additional details and requirements. 2.06 PERFORATED UNDERDRAIN PIPE & FITTINGS A. Provide non-pressure perforated HDPE piping for underdrain applications as specified and as indicated on the Drawings. Perforated HDPE piping shall be in accordance with the standards for culverts and storm drains listed above in section 2.02. 2.07 HIGH DENSITY POLYETHYLENE PRESSURE PIPE A. High Density Polyethylene Pressure Pipe shall be High Density Polyethylene (HDPE), DR 11, PE 3408 pipe with Iron Pipe Size (IPS) outside diameter for extension of outfall pipe, and Ductile Iron Pipe Size (DIPS) for water pipe. Pipe and fittings shall conform to the requirements of AWWA C906. Provide transition couplings, mechanical joint adaptors and stiffeners as required, as indicated on the Drawings as specified and as recommended by pipe manufacturers. Provide fusion welded connections and molded fittings for all HDPE pressure piping. B. Provide DR-11 IPS pipe for the outfall piping system. Provide DR-11 DIPS pipe for water distribution piping systems which will be performed using directional drilling methods. 2.08 PVC PRESSURE PIPE & FITTINGS A. PVC Pressure Pipe: Pipe, couplings and fittings shall be manufactured of materials conforming to ASTM D 1784, Class 12454B. Pipe shall conform to AWWA C900 or AWWA C905-10 standards and shall be plain end or gasket bell end, Pressure Class 235 psi (FM 150 psi), (DR 18), with ductile-iron-pipe- equivalent outside diameter. Fittings shall be PVC with push-on joint ends. All pipe bells shall incorporate gaskets which meet the requirements of ASTM F477. All gaskets shall be locked into the pipe bell. The assembled joint shall meet the requirements of ASTM D3139 standards. Pipe shall be designed for pressurized wastewater applications. All PVC pressure pipe shall be a product of the following manufacturer: 1. J-M Manufacturing Company 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA WOODARD & CURRAN SANITARY UTILITY SEWERAGE PIPING 33 31 00-6 2. North American Pipe Corporation 3. Engineer Approved Equal 2.09 CLAY DAM DRAIN PIPE A. Provide corrugated polyethylene drainage pipe, highway grade, AASHTO M 252, ASTM F 405-74 as shown on the Drawings or directed by the Engineer. 2.10 COUPLINGS A. Provide couplings, adapters and fittings for pipe transitions as specified and as indicated on the Drawings. Refer to Specification 40 05 14, PROCESS PIPE COUPLINGS AND CONNECTORS for additional details and requirements. 2.11 YARD HYDRANTS A. Yard hydrants shall be of the non-freeze type, 150 psi working pressure, 2-1/2 inch nominal size with one 2-1/2 inch NPSH connection and conform to the specifications for hydrants by the AWWA. Yard hydrants shall be of the post type as shown on the drawings, be installed with a 1/2 cubic yard of two inch crushed stone for drainage well, a concrete thrust block which does not interfere with the hydrant drain, reducers as necessary and a 3 inch gate valve with extension stem and box. Five post type hydrant wrenches shall be provided. 2.12 NON-WOVEN FILTER FABRIC A. Provide non-woven filter fabric for a Working Mat. Filter fabric shall be a nonwoven, needle punched geotextile made of 100% polypropylene slit film yarns. The filter fabric shall be designed in accordance MDOT “Standard Specification”, Section 722. 2.13 DETECTABLE UNDERGROUND MARKING TAPE A. Provide four (4) inch wide detectable underground metallic marking tape for all buried utilities including but not limited to force main pressure piping and gravity sewer piping systems. Provide detectable marking tape as follows: 1. Gravity Sewer Systems - Detectable tape shall be green and shall read "Caution - Buried Sewer Line Below". 2. Sanitary Pressure Piping Systems - Force Mains - Detectable tape shall be brown and shall read "Caution - Buried Force Main Below". B. Underground marking tape shall be detectable marking tape, with a minimum 5.0 mil overall thickness. Tape shall be manufactured using a 0.8 mil clear virgin polypropylene film, reverse printed and laminated to a 0.35 mil solid aluminum foil core, and then laminated to a 3.75 mil clear virgin polyethylene film. Tape 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA WOODARD & CURRAN SANITARY UTILITY SEWERAGE PIPING 33 31 00-7 shall be printed using a diagonally striped design for maximum visibility, and meet the APWA Color-Code standard for identification of buried utilities. 2.14 TRENCH DAMS A. Provide trench dams (trench baffles) only where specified or indicated on the Drawings for utility piping systems. Baffles shall be self-supporting and provide a watertight seal around the pipe by use of an appropriately sized elastomeric PVC flexible coupling. Baffles shall form an impenetrable barrier in the pipe envelope to the flow of water. Baffles shall be constructed of ABS or PVC plastic. Baffles shall be designed and constructed in accordance with the following: 1. Specific Gravity: 1.05, per ASTM D 792 2. Izod Impact: 6.0 ft-lbs/inch at 730F, per ASTM D 256 3. Tensile Strength: 4,800 psi, per ASTM D 638 4. Tensile Modulus: 280,000 psi, per ASTM D 638 5. Flexural Strength: 7,000 psi, per ASTM D 790 6. Flexural Modulus: 300,000 psi, per ASTM D 790 7. Deflection Temperature: 1900F, per ASTM D 648 8. Gardner Gloss: 10-15% at 600 Angle, per ASTM D 523 9. Hardness: 85 Rockwell R, per ASTM D 785 2.15 THRUST BLOCKS A. Provide concrete thrust blocks at all pressure pipe fittings as specified, as indicated on the Drawings and as directed by the Engineer. Thrust blocks shall be 3,000 psi (minimum) compressive strength concrete. Cast-in-place concrete thrust blocks shall be ready mixed concrete from a concrete truck. Pre-cast concrete thrust blocks shall also be acceptable. Refer to the Drawings for additional details and requirements. 2.16 RIGID INSULATION A. Provide rigid insulation as specified, as indicated on the Drawings or as directed by the Engineer. Insulation shall be rigid, cellular polystyrene thermal insulation with closed cells and integral high density skin, formed by the expansion of polystyrene base resin in an extrusion process to comply with ASTM C 578. Insulation shall conform to the following properties: 1. Thermal Resistance: 5.0 ft2-h-0F/Btu, per ASTM C 518 & ASTM C 177 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA WOODARD & CURRAN SANITARY UTILITY SEWERAGE PIPING 33 31 00-8 2. Compressive Strength: 25 psi (minimum), per ASTM D 1621 3. Water Absorption: 0.3% by volume, per ASTM C 272 4. Water Vapor Permeance: 0.8 perms, per ASTM E 96 5. Maximum Use Temperature: 165 0F 6. Coefficient of Linear Expansion: 3.5x10-5 in/in-0F, per ASTM C 203 7. Insulation Type: IV or V, per ASTM C 578 B. Provide 4-inch minimum compacted sand layers directly above and below insulation, or as directed by the Engineer. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION OF GRAVITY PIPING SYSTEMS A. Install gravity sewer pipe and fittings in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and the trench details as indicated on the Drawings. Use a laser beam for line and grade unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer. Secure each length of pipe with bedding before placing next length. Plug open ends of pipe when Work is suspended. Bed pipe as shown on the Drawings. A 30-inch minimum cover over the top of PVC pipe should be provided before the trench is wheel-loaded. B. Lay pipe to alignment and grade shown on the Drawings. If grade is not shown, determine elevations of start and finish points for each run of pipe. Lay pipe to a uniform grade between these points. Line and grade may be adjusted by the Engineer as required by field conditions. Install a mechanical water stop for every 10 vertical feet of sewer main elevation change. C. Lay pipe in the dry. Do not use installed pipe to remove water from work area. D. Flush all piping and remove all debris. Flushing method used shall be approved by the Engineer. Gravity flushing shall not be acceptable. Provide all labor, water, pumps and related appurtenances for pipe flushing. E. Connections to manholes and catch basins: Provide short length of pipe so that joints are located within 3 feet of inside surface of manholes and catch basins for piping other than PVC pipe. F. Unless otherwise specified or indicated on the Drawings residential house service fittings and leads shall be six (6) inch. Provide larger service connections as indicated on the Drawings. Depth and location of service shall be as specified or as indicated on the Drawings unless otherwise directed by the Engineer in the field. Provide pre-fabricated tee/wye or wye fittings on main line pipe. Extend 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA WOODARD & CURRAN SANITARY UTILITY SEWERAGE PIPING 33 31 00-9 services to property line. Cap and stake ends of new services. Provide stake which extends from cap to one (1) foot above ground surface. Provide assistance and labor to Engineer in measurement of pipe installed and in obtaining swing ties to ends of leads. G. Provide pre-cast sewer chimneys as specified and as indicated on the Drawings. Install chimneys in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Provide services of a Manufacturer's representative to provide a one day site visit to assist and instruct in the proper installation of sewer chimney products. H. Provide backwater valves as specified and as indicated on the Drawings. Provide adaptors to transition to solvent weld pipe connection to push-on pipe with flexible adapter. 3.02 INSTALLATION OF FORCE MAIN PRESSURE PIPE A. Install force main pressure piping in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations and the details as shown on the Drawings. Installation of HDPE pressure pipe shall conform to the Plastic Pipe Institute (PPI) Handbook of PE Pipe and the manufacturer's recommendations. Thermal butt fusion or electro- fusion methods are acceptable provided the Contractor has submitted evidence of training by a manufacturer's representative. B. Lay pipe to line and grade shown on the Drawings. Do not allow positive- negative grade discontinuities. Line and grade may be adjusted by the Engineer as required by field conditions. C. Flush all piping and remove all debris. Flushing method used shall be approved by the Engineer. Gravity flushing shall not be acceptable. Provide all labor, water, pumps and related appurtenances for pipe flushing. D. Lay pipe in the dry. Do not use installed pipe to remove water from work area. E. Install warning tape continuously from pumping stations to the end of each force main. At ends of rolls and repairs, splice tape with 3 foot overlap connected with tape. Provide the Owner with one full roll for future repairs. Extend to grade at each access manhole and at pump stations. F. Provide thrust protection via concrete thrust blocks at all bends in force main pressure piping systems in accordance with the Drawings. 3.03 UTILITIES TO BE ABANDONED A. Provide closure of abandoned utilities as specified and as indicated on the Drawings. Provide caps, or watertight plugs on open ends of abandoned underground utilities which are not indicated to be removed or demolished. Provide closures to withstand hydro-static or earth pressure which may result after ends of abandoned utilities have been closed. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA WOODARD & CURRAN SANITARY UTILITY SEWERAGE PIPING 33 31 00-10 3.04 INSULATION A. Provide rigid insulation as shown on the Drawings or directed by the Engineer. 3.05 TESTING OF SANITARY SEWERS A. Test all sanitary sewer pipes after backfilling. Install all house service leads on main line before testing. Perform tests in the presence of the Engineer. A maximum of 1,000 linear feet of pipe may be installed but not tested at any time. Provide low pressure air testing of all gravity sewer piping systems as follows: 1. Plug all ends of sections to be tested. 2. Supply air slowly to the pipe to be tested until the air pressure inside the pipe is 4.0 psi greater than the average back pressure of any groundwater submerging the pipe. 3. Disconnect air supply and allow a minimum of two minutes for stabilization of pressure. 4. Following stabilization period measure drop in pressure over the test period based on piping size. Nominal Pipe Size (Inches) Test Period (Minutes) 4 4 6 4 8 6 10 6 12 7 15 8 18 9 21 11 24 13 5. Acceptable Drop: Pressure drop shall not exceed more than 1.0 psi. B. Deflection Test for PVC Gravity Sewer Pipe: Provide testing of all pipe with "GO-NO-GO" gauge allowing a 5% maximum deflection. C. Special Testing for Gravity Sewer Replacing Existing Sewer: For all new sewer replacing existing sewer and requiring an immediate tie-in of existing services, provide sewer TV inspection and joint testing services per NASSCO specifications. Provide two (2) DVD copies of inspections to the Engineer upon completion of testing: Provide TV work during low flow periods (1:00 a.m.- 4:00 a.m.) unless otherwise directed by the Engineer. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA WOODARD & CURRAN SANITARY UTILITY SEWERAGE PIPING 33 31 00-11 D. Provide repair and retesting of all piping systems which do not pass tests using materials and methods approved by the Engineer. 3.06 TESTING OF FORCE MAIN PRESSURE PIPING A. Testing of force main pressure piping systems shall be as indicated in Specification 40 05 23, Process Piping. END OF SECTION 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA WOODARD & CURRAN SANITARY UTILITY SEWERAGE PIPING 33 31 00-12 This page intentionally left blank 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA PROCESS PIPE SUPPORTS WOODARD & CURRAN 40 05 15-1 SECTION 40 05 15 PROCESS PIPE SUPPORTS PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes the furnishing and installation of pipe hangers and supports for interior and exposed process piping. B. Provide all labor, materials, equipment, incidentals, hardware, and appurtenances to install a complete system of pipe supports in accordance with this Section and applicable reference standards listed in Article 1.03. C. Provide all labor, materials, equipment, incidentals, hardware and appurtenances to install a complete system of pipe hangers, pipe supports, concrete inserts, anchor bolts and related appurtenances for supporting non-buried piping as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein. All pipe hanger and support systems shall be designed and constructed to resist the seismic forces as specified herein or as indicated on the Drawings. D. Pipe supports and details are not always specifically shown on the Drawings. The absence of pipe supports and details on the Drawings shall not relieve the responsibility for providing them. Pipe supports indicated on the Drawings are shown only to convey the intent of the design for a particular location and are not intended to represent a complete system. E. All components of the pipe support systems shall meet all applicable codes including: 1) BOCA National Building Code 2) Massachusetts State Building Code 1.02 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Measurement and payment requirements: per Division 01 General Requirements. 1.03 REFERENCES A. Reference Standards 1. Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry (MSS) a. MSS SP-58 Standard for Pipe Hangers and Supports - Materials, Design and Manufacture 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA PROCESS PIPE SUPPORTS WOODARD & CURRAN 40 05 15-2 b. MSS SP-69 Standard for Pipe Hangers and Supports – Selection and Application c. MSS SP-90 Guidelines on Terminology for Pipe Hangers and Supports 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination, Sequencing, and Scheduling: per Division 01 General Requirements. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with the Division 01 General Requirements. B. Shop Drawings 1. Submittals shall include complete piping layout Drawings for each piping system. The piping layouts shall indicate the type of hanger and support, location, pipe support reactions transmitted to the structure, type of anchor, guides, and other pipe supporting appurtenances including the structural attachment hardware. Provide a description of the surface preparation and shop painting of all piping hangers and supports. The information shall include the manufacturing process and final dry film thicknesses. C. Product Data 1. Submit catalog cuts, Specifications and dimensioned Drawings for each type of pipe hanger and support. 2. The product data shall include a representative catalog cut for each different type of pipe hanger or support indicating the materials of construction, important dimensions and range of pipe sizes for which that hanger is suitable. Where standard hangers and/or supports are not suitable, submit detailed Drawings showing materials and methods of construction for each type of special hanger and support. Provide detailed information on anti- seize compounds. D. Closeout and Maintenance Material Submittals: per Division 01 General Requirements. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. B. The Contractor shall engage the services of an independent professional engineer (“Support Engineer”) registered in the Commonwealth of Massachusetts, with specific experience of not less than 3 designs in the last 5 years, in the structural design and configuration of pipe supporting systems, including any non-standard supports that need to be designed and certified. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA PROCESS PIPE SUPPORTS WOODARD & CURRAN 40 05 15-3 C. Provide pipe hangers and supports of which materials, design, and manufacture comply with MSS SP-58 standards. Select and apply pipe hangers and supports, complying with MSS SP-69 standards. Terminology in this Specification is defined in MSS SP-90 standards. D. Provide the Engineer with detailed Drawings and product data for any construction- related deviations in piping layouts, materials or routing. The review of construction-related deviation submittals shall only be for conformance to the Specifications and Drawings. All piping hangers, supports and appurtenances shall conform to the latest applicable requirements of the State Building Code of Massachusetts and ANSI B31.1, except as supplemented or modified by the requirements of this Specification. E. All piping hangers, supports and appurtenances shall be a standard design where possible. All piping hangers, supports and appurtenances shall be adequate to maintain the supported load in proper position under all operating conditions. The minimum working factor of safety for all supporting equipment, with the exception of springs, shall be 1/5 the ultimate tensile strength of the material, assuming a minimum 10 feet of water filled pipe being supported. F. Coordinate process piping hangers, supports, and appurtenances to eliminate interference with similar support systems to be installed for plumbing, heating, ventilating, and air conditioning (HVAC), electrical, and other disciplines of Work. The piping support systems shall account for structural expansion joints and co- located piping expansion joints. The piping hanger and support system shall provide and maintain unhindered access to all equipment for both operation and removal. No material handling equipment supports shall be used for piping supports under any circumstances. Do not attach piping hangers, supports, and appurtenances from structural struts or braces unless approved in writing by the Engineer. G. All process piping and appurtenances connected to equipment shall be supported in such a manner as to prevent any strain or force from being imposed on the equipment. When the equipment manufacturers have indicated that piping loads shall not be transmitted to their equipment, the Contractor shall submit a written certification stating that such requirements have been complied with. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. 1.08 SITE CONDITIONS A. Existing Conditions: per Division 01 General Requirements. 1.09 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty/Extended Correction Period 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA PROCESS PIPE SUPPORTS WOODARD & CURRAN 40 05 15-4 PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 EQUIPMENT A. Pipe hangers, supports and related appurtenances 1. Performance/Design Criteria - The fabricator of pipe hangers, supports and related appurtenances shall have not less than 5 years of current experience in the design and fabrication of the pipe hangers and supports as specified in this section. 2.02 PROCESS PIPING SUPPORTS - GENERAL A. The products specified are intended to support the various types of process piping systems shown on the Drawings. The Contractor shall be responsible for developing the final details associated with the specific installation conditions. The details include, but are not limited to, piping system temperatures and pressures associated with each application. B. The Contractor may propose minor adjustments to the piping arrangements in order to simplify the supports and to resolve conflicts in the layout of process piping systems. An example of an adjustment shall be a minor change to a pipe centerline elevation so that a single trapeze support may be used for a process piping system. C. Unless otherwise specified or shown on the Drawings, process piping hangers and supports shall be a manufacturer's standard product. All products specified or otherwise shall conform to the requirements of MSS SP-58 and MSS SP-69 standards. Any reference to specific catalog or figure numbers from a specific manufacturer shall be for the purpose of establishing the type, design, and quality of a piping support product. Any references contained in this Specification section shall not be considered as proprietary. D. All piping supports and hangers of the same type, style, and duty shall be supplied by a single manufacturer. All process piping supports and hangers shall be a product of the following manufacturer 1. Gulf States Hangers & Supports Manufacturers, Inc. 2. Anvil International, Inc. 3. Carpenter & Paterson, Inc. 4. Cooper B-Line, Inc. 5. PHD Manufacturing, Inc. 6. Or Engineer Approved Equal. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA PROCESS PIPE SUPPORTS WOODARD & CURRAN 40 05 15-5 E. All submerged piping supports, guides, and fasteners and those installed below channel, basin, and wet well wall tops and cover slabs shall be Type 316 stainless steel. All other exterior and interior supports guides and fasteners shall be Type 304 stainless steel where stainless steel pipe is used, and shall be galvanized steel where ductile iron pipe is used. F. All anchor bolts for pipe supports shall be Type 316 stainless steel. Expansion couplings and bellows installed in stainless steel aeration piping shall be Type 304 stainless steel and shall be compatible with aeration piping coupling systems. 2.03 PIPING FORCES A. Provide supports for all pipe and tubing to prevent significant stresses in the material, valves, fittings and other connected pipe appurtenances. All supports and anchors shall be designed to secure the pipe in the intended position and alignment. All supports and anchors shall be designed to secure all pipe and tubing against excessive dislocation due to thermal expansion and contraction. B. The pipe supports and anchor design shall specifically account for internal flow forces, all probable external forces from equipment connection, human contact, and all seismic forces. Provide all structural steel members to brace any piping system from excessive dislocation. All pipe fittings and appurtenances connected to equipment shall be supported in a manner to prevent any strain from being imposed on the equipment or piping systems. All pipe supports shall be installed such that they do not induce point loadings on the piping. All supports shall distribute pipe loads evenly along the pipe circumference. C. All valves shall be provided with a dedicated independent supporting system. Supporting of valves by the connected piping is not acceptable. All electric and hydraulic valve actuators shall be independently supported. 2.04 COUPLING SUPPORT A. All couplings shown on the Drawings and as specified for connection to tanks, pumps, equipment, and appurtenances shall be provided with supports. The supports shall be located at the end opposite the tank, pump, equipment, and appurtenance. B. All such couplings shall be rigidly supported, to prevent transfer of force to the equipment. Fixed or restraining supports shall not be installed between a flexible coupling and the connected piece of equipment/appurtenance. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA PROCESS PIPE SUPPORTS WOODARD & CURRAN 40 05 15-6 2.05 DISSIMILAR METALS A. All stainless steel piping shall be supported using stainless steel supports that shall be isolated from all ferrous metals including galvanized steel. Provide a neoprene sheet or stainless steel protection shields to prevent direct contact when installed. B. All copper piping shall be protected from galvanic corrosion from contact with ferrous metals. Provide corrosion protection by wrapping the copper pipe with 1/16 inch thick neoprene, sheet metal and a galvanized protection shield with isolators. Copper plated or polyvinyl chloride (PVC) coated hangers and supports may also be used to provide dielectric isolation. 2.06 NON-METALLIC PIPING A. All uninsulated non-metallic piping, including, but not limited to Type (PVC/1), Type (PVC/3), Type (PVC/4) and Type (PE/1), shall be protected from local stress concentrations at each support point. Protection from local stresses shall be provided by PVC coated steel or 304 stainless steel protection shields. B. All pipes which are bottom supported for 180 degrees shall be provided with arc shields. All pipes which are supported for 360 degrees shall be provided with protection shields for the entire exterior pipe circumference. All protection shields shall have an 18 gauge minimum thickness. All protection shields shall be a minimum of l2 inches in length. Securely fasten each protection shield to the pipe with 304 stainless steel straps not less than 1/2 inches in width. 2.07 INSULATED PIPE A. All insulated piping shall be provided with a rigid insulating saddle at each pipe support location. Provide protection shields at each support location. 2.08 GENERAL PIPE SUPPORT SPACING A. All solid metallic process piping, including, but not limited to cast iron, ductile iron, steel and stainless steel shall be provided with supports spaced in strict accordance with the pipe manufacturer's recommendations. Provide a minimum of one support per pipe section at joints, changes in direction, and valves. At a minimum provide supports for steel, stainless steel, cast iron, and ductile iron pipe in accordance with the following: Pipe Size (Inches) Maximum Span (feet) 1½ inches & smaller 5 feet 2 inches to 4 inches 10 feet 5 inches to 8 inches 15 feet 10 inches & larger 20 feet 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA PROCESS PIPE SUPPORTS WOODARD & CURRAN 40 05 15-7 B. Small diameter metallic piping, including, but not limited to steel, copper piping, copper tubing, and stainless steel shall be provided with supports spaced at a maximum of 5 feet. C. All solid PVC and high-density polyethylene pipe (HDPE) process piping shall be provided with supports spaced in strict accordance with the pipe manufacturer's recommendation. At a minimum provide supports for PVC and HDPE piping in accordance with the following Pipe Size (Inches) Maximum Span (feet) 1½ inches & smaller 4.5 feet 2 inches to 4 inches 6 feet 5 inches to 8 inches 9 feet 10 inches & larger 10 feet 2.09 VERTICAL PIPING A. Supports for all vertical pipes shall be provided when piping is in close proximity to the floor. All vertical piping shall be provided with Engineer approved supports spaced at intervals of not more than 10 feet by approved pipe collars, clamps, brackets, or wall rests. B. All floor and wall supports for vertical piping runs shall provide rigid and solid support. All vertical pipes passing through pipe sleeves shall be secured using a pipe collar. Whenever possible, floor supports shall be used rather than wall supports. Concrete supports, base elbows, and base tees shall be used where possible and as shown on the Drawings. 2.10 SUPPORT LOCATIONS A. Provide supports at all changes in directions of piping runs as well as at locations as shown on the Drawings or as specified. Do not support piping from other piping or appurtenances, including, but not limited to metal stairs, ladders, walkways, or process equipment unless specifically directed or authorized in writing by the Engineer. B. Pipe supports shall be provided to minimize lateral forces through valves as well as both sides of split type couplings and sleeve type couplings. All supports shall be designed and installed in a manner to minimize all forces on pump housings. Pump housings shall not be utilized to support connecting piping. Piping shall not be used to support process equipment and appurtenances. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA PROCESS PIPE SUPPORTS WOODARD & CURRAN 40 05 15-8 2.11 PLASTIC PIPING SUPPORTS A. Provide continuous supports for multiple and single Type - (PVC/1) plastic piping runs whenever possible. Provide supports for single Type - (PVC/1) piping with support spacing as recommended by the pipe Manufacturer. The support spacing shall not exceed 3 feet under any circumstances. Whenever possible, multiple, suspended, horizontal Type - (PVC/1) pipe runs shall be supported by v-troughs or ladder type cable trays. Refer to the Drawings for typical v-trough multiple pipe support details and requirements. B. All ladder type cable trays for Type - (PVC/1) piping support shall be shall be constructed of PVC coated aluminum, aluminum or stainless steel. The ladder rung spacing shall be a maximum of l2 inches. The tray width shall be a minimum of 6 inches for single piping runs and l2 inches for double piping runs. Provide all appurtenances, including, but not limited to all hanger rods, rod couplings, concrete inserts, hanger clips, etc., required for a complete support system. C. Individual plastic pipes shall be secured to the rungs of the cable tray by strap clamps or fasteners. The spacing between clamps and fasteners shall not be greater than 10 feet. The ladder type cable trays shall provide continuous support along the length of the pipe. Individual clamps, hangers and supports in contact with plastic pipe shall provide rigid support. The support shall be designed and installed so as to allow for longitudinal movement due to thermal expansion and contraction of the piping runs. D. All ladder cable trays of the same type, style, and duty shall be supplied by a single manufacturer. All ladder type cable trays for Type - (PVC/1) piping supports shall be a product of the following manufacturers or equal 1. MP Husky - Ladder Cable Tray 2. Cooper B-Line Inc. - Ladder Cable Tray 2.12 MATERIALS OF CONSTRUCTION A. Unless otherwise specified or shown on the Drawings, all rods, clamps, hangers, inserts, anchor bolts, brackets, components, and appurtenances for interior pipe supports shall be constructed of 304 stainless steel. All interior pipe clamps on plastic pipe shall be provided with a plastic coating or neoprene isolator. All supports for copper pipe shall be copper plated or shall have a minimum 1/16 inch plastic coating. B. All rods, clamps, hangers, inserts, anchor bolts, brackets, components, and appurtenances for exterior pipe, submerged pipe, polymer piping, and interior piping within chemical containment areas, pipe within unheated structures, pipe within tanks, interior pipe within manholes, interior pipe within channels, and exterior pipe within channels shall be constructed of stainless steel. The grade of stainless steel shall be in accordance with the following criteria 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA PROCESS PIPE SUPPORTS WOODARD & CURRAN 40 05 15-9 1. All process piping support systems shall be constructed of the following materials based on location unless otherwise specified or indicated on the Drawings a. All submerged piping: 316 stainless steel b. All outdoor piping: 316 stainless steel c. All interior in-basin, in-channel, as well as piping in access vaults (located above the maximum water level): 304 Stainless Steel d. All interior building piping: 304 Stainless Steel 2. All fasteners and related hardware for supports, including, but not limited to nuts, bolts, and washers shall be 316 stainless steel regardless of location. Fasteners for submerged support locations shall be 316 stainless steel. 2.13 HORIZONTAL PIPING HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Unless otherwise specified or indicated on the Drawings provide factory fabricated horizontal piping hangers and supports conforming to MSS SP-58 standards. Horizontal piping supports and hangers shall be one of the following Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry (MSS) types listed below. 1. The specific type of support shall be selected by the Contractor to suit the horizontal piping system layout in accordance with MSS SP-69 standards as well as the piping manufacturer's published support requirements. Whenever possible, use only 1 type of support system by one 1 manufacturer for each piping service. Select the size of hangers and supports to exactly fit the nominal pipe outside diameter for bare piping, and to exactly fit around piping insulation with a saddle or shield for all insulated piping. 2. Type 5 - Pipe Hangers, Type 12 - Pipe Clamps, and Type 26 - Pipe Clips shall not be used. Type 3 - Three Bolt Pipe Clamps shall not be used on insulated piping systems. Type 24 - U-Bolts shall only be used on trapeze type hanger systems or fabricated frames. 2.14 SINGLE PIPE CLEVIS HANGERS A. Whenever possible, single process piping runs shall be supported by single pipe adjustable clevis type hangers (MSS Type 1), suspended by hanger rods from structural steel members, concrete ceilings, or the bottom of trapeze hangers. The clevis type hanger shall be specifically designed for the process piping type being supported as follows 1. Adjustable Clevis Hangers a. Anvil International, Inc. - Figure No. 260 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA PROCESS PIPE SUPPORTS WOODARD & CURRAN 40 05 15-10 b. Carpenter & Paterson, Inc. - Figure No. 100 c. PHD Manufacturing, Inc. - Figure No. 425 2. Adjustable Clevis Hangers (Insulated Pipe) a. Anvil International, Inc. - Figure No. 300 b. Carpenter & Paterson, Inc. - Figure No. 100EL c. PHD Manufacturing, Inc. - Figure No. 430 3. Adjustable Clevis Hangers (Cast Iron or Ductile Iron Pipe) a. Anvil International, Inc. - Figure No. 590 b. Carpenter & Paterson, Inc. - Figure No. 100DI c. PHD Manufacturing, Inc. - Figure No. 420 2.15 PIPE CLAMPS A. Single process piping runs supported by pipe clamps, (MSS Type 4), shall be in accordance with the following 1. Anvil International, Inc. - Figure No. 212 2. Carpenter & Paterson, Inc. - Figure No. 175 3. PHD Manufacturing, Inc. - Figure No. 520/521 2.16 ADJUSTABLE BAND HANGERS A. Single process piping runs supported by adjustable band hangers, (MSS Type 7), shall be in accordance with the following 1. Carpenter & Paterson, Inc. - Figure No. 1A 2. PHD Manufacturing, Inc. - Figure No. 180, 181, & 183 2.17 PIPE SADDLE SUPPORTS A. Single process piping runs supported by pipe saddle supports, (MSS Type 36), shall be in accordance with the following 1. Anvil International, Inc. - Figure No. 258 2. PHD Manufacturing, Inc. - Figure No. 880 B. Provide pipe base supports and cast floor flanges for all pipe saddle supports. Refer to the details on the Drawings for additional requirements. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA PROCESS PIPE SUPPORTS WOODARD & CURRAN 40 05 15-11 2.18 PIPE STANCHION SADDLES A. Single process piping runs supported by pipe stanchion saddles, (MSS Type 37), shall be in accordance with the following 1. Anvil International, Inc. - Figure No. 259 2. Carpenter & Paterson, Inc. - Figure No. 125 3. PHD Manufacturing, Inc. - Figure No. 882 B. Provide pipe base supports and floor flanges for all pipe stanchion saddles. Refer to the details on the Drawings for additional requirements. 2.19 ADJUSTABLE ROLLER HANGERS A. Single process piping runs supported by adjustable roller hangers (MSS Type 43), shall be in accordance with the following 1. Anvil International, Inc. - Figure No. 181 2. Carpenter & Paterson, Inc. - Figure No. 140 3. PHD Manufacturing, Inc. - Figure No. 470 & 475 2.20 PIPE ROLL STANDS A. Single process piping runs supported by pipe roll stands, (MSS Type 44), shall be in accordance with the following 1. Anvil International, Inc. - Figure No. 271 2. Carpenter & Paterson, Inc. - Figure No. 54 3. PHD Manufacturing, Inc. - Figure No. 486 2.21 PIPE ROLLS & PLATES A. Single process piping runs supported by pipe rolls and plates, (MSS Type 45), shall be in accordance with the following 1. Anvil International, Inc. - Figure No. 277 2. Carpenter & Paterson, Inc. - Figure No. 63 2.22 PIPE GUIDES & SLIDE PLATES A. Provide structural slide assemblies and guides (MSS Type 35) using reinforced polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE) or graphite slides to allow for longitudinal pipe 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA PROCESS PIPE SUPPORTS WOODARD & CURRAN 40 05 15-12 movement. Slide materials shall be suitable for the system operating temperatures, atmospheric conditions, and bearing loads encountered. Lateral restraints shall be provided as needed. Where slides do not require provisions for lateral restraint the following methods may be used 1. For piping systems 4 inches and larger, when the temperature of the medium is 60 degrees F or higher, a pipe covering protective saddle (MSS Type 39) which is welded to the pipe may freely rest on the support. 2. For piping systems less than 4 inches, a pipe protection shield (MSS Type 40) attached to the pipe or insulation, may freely rest on the support. 3. For piping systems 4 inches and larger carrying medium less than 60 degrees F, a pipe protection shield (MSS Type 40) attached to the pipe or insulation, may freely rest on the support. B. In cases where there are high system temperatures and welding to piping is not desirable, pipe slide assemblies and guides shall include a pipe cradle, welded to the guide structure and strapped securely to the pipe. The pipe shall be separated from the slide material by at least 4 inches or by an amount adequate for the insulation, whichever is greater. C. Except as otherwise indicated, provide factory fabricated pipe guides and slide plate systems. Provide pipe guides and slide plates (MSS Type 35) in accordance with the following 1. Anvil International, Inc. - Figure No. 439 2. PHD Manufacturing, Inc. - Figure No. 690 3. Carpenter & Paterson, Inc. - Figure No. 1010 2.23 EXTENDED VERTICAL PIPING CLAMPS A. Except as otherwise indicated, provide factory fabricated extended vertical piping clamps. Use only one type by one manufacturer for each piping service. Select size of hangers and supports to exactly fit pipe size for bare piping. Provide larger diameter clamps to accommodate insulated piping and shields. Provide vertical piping two bolt extended riser clamps in accordance with the following 1. Anvil International, Inc. - Figure No. 100 2. Carpenter & Paterson, Inc. - Figure No. 267 3. PHD Manufacturing, Inc. - Figure No. 545 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA PROCESS PIPE SUPPORTS WOODARD & CURRAN 40 05 15-13 2.24 OFFSET PIPE CLAMPS A. Except as otherwise indicated, provide factory fabricated offset vertical piping clamps. Use only 1 type by 1 manufacturer for each piping service. Select the size of clamps and supports to exactly fit the pipe size for bare piping. Copper clad or PVC coated clamps shall be used on all copper piping. Provide vertical piping 2-bolt offset riser clamps in accordance with the following 1. Anvil International, Inc. - Figure No. 103 2. Carpenter & Paterson, Inc. - Figure No. 179 3. PHD Manufacturing, Inc. - Figure No. 535 2.25 PIPE RISER CLAMPS A. Pipe riser clamps (MSS Type 8) shall be used to support vertical piping runs extending through floor slabs. Copper clad or PVC coated clamps shall be used on copper pipes. Insulation shall be provided for the entire diameter of insulated pipes prior to installing riser clamps. Insulation shall not be damaged by clamp installation. Provide pipe riser clamps in accordance with the following 1. Anvil International, Inc. - Figure No. 261 2. Carpenter & Paterson, Inc. - Figure No. 126 3. PHD Manufacturing, Inc. - Figure No. 550, 551, or 553 2.26 WALL PIPE SUPPORTS A. Where pipe runs are in close proximity to supports, including, but not limited to walls, beams, and columns, and are also located an excessive distance from ceilings or the underside of beams, welded stainless steel wall pipe supports shall be used for hanging pipe. In cases where single pipes rest on top of bracket pipe supports, all attachments shall meet requirements as specified under multiple pipe hangers. Provide structural wall pipe supports in accordance with the following B. Light duty applications (MSS Type 31) shall be defined as small diameter piping less than 2 inches nominal pipe size. 1. PHD Manufacturing, Inc. - Figure No. 850 2. Carpenter & Paterson, Inc. - Figure No. 69 C. Medium duty applications (MSS Type 32) shall be defined as 3 inch through 6 inch PVC or stainless steel piping. 1. PHD Manufacturing, Inc. - Figure No. 855 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA PROCESS PIPE SUPPORTS WOODARD & CURRAN 40 05 15-14 2. Carpenter & Paterson, Inc. - Figure No. 84 D. Heavy duty applications (MSS Type 33) shall be used for all Type DI/1 & Type CS/1 piping and all piping larger than 6 inch nominal pipe size. 1. PHD Manufacturing, Inc. - Figure No. 860 2. Carpenter & Paterson, Inc. - Figure No. 139 E. Where applicable and approved by the Engineer, the use of C-channels with stainless steel brackets and pipe clamps shall be provided. All members shall be securely fastened to walls, columns, or other Engineer approved structural members. Attachment shall utilize double expansion shields or other methods as approved by the Engineer. Additional wall bearing plates shall be provided where required. 2.27 MULTIPLE PIPE HANGERS A. Suspended multiple pipes, running parallel in the same horizontal plane, which are adjacent to each other shall be suspended by trapeze type hangers or wall brackets. Trapeze hangers shall consist of stainless steel or aluminum structural channels supported from stainless steel threaded rods. Whenever possible attach multiple pipe supports to concrete walls, columns, structural steel, and other Engineer approved support members. B. Provide all other necessary accessories, including, but not limited to rods, concrete inserts, C-clamps, beam clamps, welded beam attachments, and expansion shields, as required and as specified for a complete piping support system. C. Unless otherwise specified or indicated on the Drawings, pipe anchors used for attaching pipe to trapeze or multiple pipe wall brackets shall be anchor or pipe chairs as required. D. The anchors shall be constructed of stainless steel. All chair U-bolts shall be tightened to allow freedom of movement for normal expansion and contraction of piping runs except where pipe shall be anchored to control direction of movement or act as a thrust anchor. 2.28 HANGER ROD ATTACHMENTS & BEAM CLAMPS A. All hanger rod attachments shall be stainless steel, machine threaded, and passivated after fabrication. The strength of the rod shall be based on its root diameter. Hanger rods shall be attached to concrete structures using concrete inserts. Threaded rods shall not be formed or bent in the field. B. All inserts shall be stainless steel. Beam clamps, C-clamps, or welded beam attachments shall be used for attaching hanger rods to structural steel members. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA PROCESS PIPE SUPPORTS WOODARD & CURRAN 40 05 15-15 C. Where required and as approved by the Engineer, expansion anchors shall be used for attaching to concrete structures. Provide a bituminous coating for all iron or steel in direct contact with concrete. D. All Top Beam C-Clamps (MSS Type 19) and C-Clamps (MSS Type 23) shall be torqued in accordance with MSS SP-69 standards. Both locknuts and retaining devices shall be furnished by the piping support manufacturer. E. Field fabricated clamp bodies and retaining devices are not acceptable. Side beam or channel clamps (MSS Type 20) shall be provided with an added iron heel plate or adaptor. U-bolts (MSS Type 24) shall only be used in conjunction with trapeze hanger systems or on fabricated frames. Whenever possible utilize center beam clamps (MSS Type 21). 2.29 ANCHORS A. Anchor piping at locations indicated on the Drawings or required per the Specifications. The anchor design and materials shall be in accordance with ANSI/ASME B.31 standards. Additional anchoring shall be provided as approved by the Engineer. All anchors shall be 316 stainless steel regardless of installation location. B. The length of expansion bolts shall be sufficient to place the wedge portion of the bolt a minimum of 1 inch behind the steel reinforcement. Concrete anchors for ceiling mounted pipe supports and appurtenances shall be adhesive or expansion type. C. Anchors for wall supports, floor supports and all related appurtenances shall be in accordance with the following. Size all supports as required for proper support as well as to provide compatibility with the associated pipe support. 1. Hilti – Kwik-Bolt 2. Simpson Strong-Tie – Wedge-All 3. Powers – Power-Stud 4. Or Engineer Approved Equal 2.30 INSULATION SHIELDS & SADDLES A. Provide pipe covering protective saddles (MSS Type 39) on insulated pipe 4 inches and larger when the temperature of the medium is 60 degrees F or higher. All pipe covering protective saddles shall be welded to the pipe. The saddle materials of construction shall match the connecting pipe. B. Provide pipe protection shields (MSS Type 40) for use on insulated piping systems less than 4 inches. Shields may be used on piping systems larger than 4 inches when 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA PROCESS PIPE SUPPORTS WOODARD & CURRAN 40 05 15-16 the temperature of the medium is 60 degrees F or less. All shields shall be 304 stainless steel. C. Single process piping protective sleeves (MSS Type 40), shall be stainless steel, 14 gauge sheet metal. All protective shields shall be in accordance with the following 1. Anvil International, Inc. - Figure No. 167 2. Carpenter & Paterson, Inc. - Figure No. 265 3. PHD Manufacturing, Inc. - Figure No. 170 2.31 HORIZONTAL SMALL DIAMETER PIPE SUPPORTS A. Horizontal piping runs less than 3 inches in diameter shall be held in position by supports fabricated from 304 stainless steel or aluminum C-channels, welded post bases and pipe clamps. B. To assure adequate support, fabricate supports using two vertical members and post bases connected together by a horizontal member of sufficient load capacity to support the piping run. Wherever possible, supports shall be anchored to nearby walls or other structural members to provide horizontal rigidity. More than 1 pipe may be supported from a common fabricated support as approved by the Engineer. 2.32 SMALL DIAMETER PLASTIC PIPE SUPPORT A. Provide all pipe supports for closely spaced vertical plastic piping systems 3 inches and smaller to provide a rigid support system. The interval of vertical support spacing shall be as specified, but in no case shall the vertical spacing interval exceed 6 feet between supports. The support system shall consist of a framework suitably anchored to floors, ceilings, roofs or other Engineer approved structural members. B. Vertical and horizontal supporting members shall be 304 stainless steel or aluminum U-shaped channels. The assemblies shall be furnished complete with all nuts, bolts and fittings for a complete assembly including end caps for all support members. C. Vertical piping shall be secured to the horizontal members by pipe clamps or pipe straps. For support of exterior pipe, submerged pipe, pipe within outdoor structures and interior pipe within channels all components shall be Type 316 stainless steel. Piping supports in chemical containment and storage areas shall be PVC coated. In all other areas, all components shall be 304 stainless steel or aluminum. D. The design of each individual framing system for small diameter plastic pipe support systems shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. Shop Drawings, as specified above shall be submitted and shall show all details of the installation, including dimensions and types of supports. In all instances the completed frame 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA PROCESS PIPE SUPPORTS WOODARD & CURRAN 40 05 15-17 shall be adequately braced to provide a complete rigid structure when all the piping has been attached. E. The framework for small diameter plastic piping supports shall be in accordance with the following; Size all supports for proper support as well as to provide compatibility with the associated piping material. Use only 1 type by 1 manufacturer for each piping service. All framework for small diameter plastic piping shall be a product of the following manufacturer 1. Unistrut Corporation 2. Globe Strut 3. Power-Strut 4. Cooper B-Line, Inc. 2.33 CUSTOM FABRICATED PIPE SUPPORTS A. Whenever possible utilize standard piping supports and appurtenances. If standard supports are not suitable for an application, provide custom fabricated structural shapes, concrete, and anchor hardware for support of process piping systems. All custom fabricated supports shall be of approved materials of construction identical to items previously specified. All anchor hardware shall be similar to items previously specified and shall meet the minimum requirements for support as approved by the Engineer. All custom fabricated piping supports shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer. B. All pipe support systems shall meet all requirements of this section and all related sections as well as the Drawings. Complete design details of the pipe support system and system components shall be submitted for review and approval as specified. No hanger or support shall be installed without the written approval of the Engineer. The pipe support system shall not impose loads on the supporting structures in excess of the loads for which the supporting structure was designed. 2.34 THIN-WALLED PIPE SUPPORTS A. Supports for thin walled pipe shall be provided per the requirements of this Specification, and shall include all required saddle bracing to avoid damaging the pipe at the point of contact with the associated support. 2.35 CONCRETE INSERTS A. Provide inserts (MSS Type 18) to allow a connection point for hanger rods in concrete. Inserts shall be secured to concrete forms before concrete is placed. Continuous inserts which allow more adjustment may be used if they otherwise meet the requirements for (MSS Type 18) inserts. Provide a bituminous coating for 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA PROCESS PIPE SUPPORTS WOODARD & CURRAN 40 05 15-18 all metallic inserts in direct contact with concrete. All concrete inserts shall be in accordance with the following 1. Anvil International, Inc. - Figure No. 282 2. Carpenter & Paterson, Inc. - Figure No. 650 3. PHD Manufacturing, Inc. - Figure No. 951 2.36 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Hangers, supports, and guides shown on the Drawings are for coordination purposes only and represent recommendations based on assumed pipe routing. Provide routing and installation of all hangers, supports and guides for complete piping systems. B. Proceed with the installation of piping and supports only after any building structural Work has been completed and all new concrete has reached its specified design strength. The installation of pipe support systems shall in no way interfere with the operation of monorails, access hatches, building system, overhead doors, etc. The installed systems shall not interfere with maintenance and operational access to any equipment installed under this section, or any other related section. C. All pipe supports shall be designed with liberal strength and stiffness to support the respective pipes under the maximum combination of peak loading conditions to include pipe weight, liquid weight, liquid movement and pressure forces, thermal expansion and contraction, vibrations and all probable externally applied forces, including seismic forces. Prior to installation, all pipe support systems shall be approved by the Engineer. 3.02 SEISMIC CONDITIONS A. Provide seismic restraints for all piping systems, including, but not limited to free standing, suspended or wall mounted piping. Use the restraints defined in the manual when the seismic criteria, and size of piping, are within the limits of the latest edition of the Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association (SMACNA) Seismic Restraints Manual at the time of bid opening. Select restraints from the tables that represent the highest seismic hazard class or level possible within the state in which the Project resides. Provide members of material of equal strength to those in the standards where materials other than carbon steel are specified. All process piping supports shall be designed in accordance with the seismic criteria indicated in the documents. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA PROCESS PIPE SUPPORTS WOODARD & CURRAN 40 05 15-19 3.03 INSTALLATION OF BUILDING ATTACHMENTS A. Install building attachments at required locations within concrete. Space attachments where support is required for additional concentrated loads, including flanges, valves, guides, strainers, expansion joints, and at changes in direction of piping. B. Apply anti-seize compound to all nuts, bolts, and other associated fasteners. Supports installed without the approved anti-seize compound shall be dismantled and correctly installed, at no additional cost to the Owner or Engineer. 3.04 INSTALLATION OF HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Install hangers, supports, clamps, and attachments to support piping properly from building structures in accordance with MSS SP-69. Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping to be supported together on trapeze type hangers where possible. Install supports with maximum spacing complying with MSS SP-69. Where piping of various sizes is to be supported together by trapeze hangers, space hangers for the smallest pipe size or install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipe. Do not use wire or perforated metal to support piping, and do not support piping from other piping. No piping shall be supported from existing precast concrete tees, metal stairs, ladders, concrete columns or concrete beams or walkways unless specifically directed or authorized by the Engineer. B. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers, and other accessories. Except as otherwise indicated for exposed continuous pipe runs, install hangers and supports of same type and style as installed for adjacent similar piping. C. Install hangers and supports such that piping live and dead loading, and stresses from movement, will not be transmitted to connected equipment. Equipment shall not be used to support piping. D. Except as otherwise permitted, make provisions for vertical adjustment of all hangers after installation. Locate 1 hanger immediately adjacent to each change of direction and offset additional hangers where installation of inline equipment produces concentrated loads. Provide additional guides or supports at offsets in piping as necessary to prevent deflection of the pipe axis due to expansion or pressure forces, except where right angle bends are utilized to compensate for expansion. E. Provide hangers and supports immediately adjacent to either side of all in-line instruments, including but not limited to valves and flow meters. 3.05 SUPPORT SPACING A. Provide hangers and support spacing for carbon steel pipe not exceeding 17 feet on center for 6-inch pipe, and 14 feet on center for 4-inch pipe. For all pipe support 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA PROCESS PIPE SUPPORTS WOODARD & CURRAN 40 05 15-20 vertical runs provide clamps at a maximum spacing of 6 feet on center. Provide hangers to give broad support to piping and permit free axial movement. Where temporary supports are used, provide sufficiently rigid support to prevent shifting or distortion of pipe. Provide support spacing in accordance with the recommendation of the pipe manufacturer. 3.06 COUPLING SUPPORT A. Pipe supports shall be provided to minimize lateral forces through valves, both sides of split type couplings and sleeve type couplings within 4 pipe diameters, and to minimize all pipe forces on pump housings and other equipment. Pump housings and other equipment shall not be utilized to support connecting pipes. 3.07 CONCRETE INSERTS A. Concrete inserts for pipe hangers and supports shall be installed on forms before concrete is placed. Before setting these items, all Drawings and figures shall be checked which have a direct bearing on the pipe location. Responsibility for the proper location of pipe supports shall be the responsibility of the installing Contractor. Continuous metal inserts shall be embedded flush with the concrete surface. Provide a bituminous coating for all metallic concrete inserts in contact with concrete. 3.08 FINISHING A. All sharp edges and comers within 7 feet of the floor or walking surfaces shall be ground down and/or protected with plastic protective covers. All ferrous metal surfaces shall be finished in accordance with section 09 90 00 Paints and Coatings. Stainless steel, galvanized steel, plastic, brass, bronze, copper and fiber-reinforced plastic (FRP) components shall not be painted unless otherwise indicated in the documents. 3.09 TESTING A. All pipe support systems shall be tested for compliance with this section. After installation, each pipe support system shall be tested in conjunction with the respective piping pressure tests as specified in section 40 23 00 Water and Wastewater Process Piping. If any part of the pipe support system proves to be defective or inadequate, it shall be repaired or augmented under this section to the satisfaction of the Engineer, at no additional cost to the Owner or Engineer. 3.10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. 3.11 STARTUP & COMMISSIONING A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA PROCESS PIPE SUPPORTS WOODARD & CURRAN 40 05 15-21 3.12 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. END OF SECTION This page intentionally left blank. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA PROCESS VALVES & STRAINERS WOODARD & CURRAN 40 05 23-1 SECTION 40 05 23 PROCESS VALVES AND STRAINERS PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. The Contractor shall provide and test process valves, strainers, and appurtenances as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein. The valves, strainers, and appurtenances shall be of sizes and connection types as shown on the Drawings as well as that specified herein. The following sections reference the process valve type and specification reference numbers shown in the valve tag symbols on the Drawings. Valves without valve tag symbols are specified elsewhere. The valves and strainers included in this specification section may or may not all be required for the Work of the Contract. The Contractor shall be Responsible for providing all valves that are indicated on the Drawings and/or are required to complete the Work outlined in the Contract Documents. 1.02 REFERENCES A. The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only. 1. AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARDS INSTITUTE (ANSI) ANSI B16.1 Cast Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings Classes 25, 125, and 250 Ref Title 2. ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM) ASTM A 126 Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings for Valves, Flanges, and Pipe Fittings ASTM A 216/A 216M Standard Specification for Steel Castings, Carbon, Suitable for Fusion Welding, for High-Temperature Service ASTM A 240/A 240M Standard Specification for Chromium and Chromium-Nickel Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip for Pressure Vessels and for General Applications ASTM A 276 Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA PROCESS VALVES & STRAINERS WOODARD & CURRAN 40 05 23-2 ASTM A 351/A 351M Standard Specification for Castings, Austenitic, Austenitic-Ferritic (Duplex), for Pressure-Containing Parts ASTM A 436 Standard Specification for Austenitic Gray Iron Castings ASTM A 48/A 48M Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings ASTM A 536 Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Castings ASTM B 124/B 124M Standard Specification for Copper and Copper Alloy Forging Rod, Bar, and Shapes ASTM B 150/B 150M Standard Specification for Aluminum Bronze Rod, Bar, and Shapes ASTM B 505/B 505M Standard Specification for Copper-Base Alloy Continuous Castings ASTM D 2000 Standard Classification System for Rubber Products in Automotive Applications ASTM D 3222 Unmodified Poly Vinyl Dene Fluoride (PVDF) Molding Extrusion and Coating Materials ASTM D 4024 Machine Made "Fiberglass" (Glass-Fiber- Reinforced Thermosetting Resin) Flanges ASTM D 429 Standard Test Methods for Rubber Property- Adhesion to Rigid Substrates ASTM B 61 Standard Specification for Steam or Valve Bronze Castings ASTM B 62 Standard Specification for Composition Bronze or Ounce Metal Castings ASTM D 1784 Rigid Poly Vinyl Chloride (PVC) Compounds and Chlorinated Poly Vinyl Chloride (CPVC) Compounds 3. ASME INTERNATIONAL (ASME) ASME B16.5 Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings NPS 1/2 Through NPS 24 Addenda A - 10/26/1998 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA PROCESS VALVES & STRAINERS WOODARD & CURRAN 40 05 23-3 4. AMERICAN WATER WORKS ASSOCIATION (AWWA) AWWA C550 Protective Epoxy Interior Coatings for Valves and Hydrants AWWA D102 Coating Steel Water-Storage Tanks AWWA C504 Standard for Rubber-Seated Butterfly Valves AWWA C508 Swing-Check Valves for Waterworks Service, 2 In. (50 mm) Through 24 In. (600 mm) NPS AWWA C509 Resilient-Seated Gate Valves for Water Supply Service 5. ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM) ASTM B 584 Standard Specification for Copper Alloy Sand Castings for General Applications 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. B. SD-02 Shop Drawings 1. Shop Drawings shall include descriptive literature, bulletins and/or catalog cuts of the valves and strainers as well as a complete bill of materials. Include the weights of all components. The Drawings shall specifically outline all required clearances for maintenance and manual operation. Shop Drawings shall show layout and dimensions of equipment, major components, key alignment locations and locations of bolt holes. Drawings shall also indicate where access points for maintenance and operations are located on the equipment. Drawings shall show all critical field dimensions identified by the Manufacturer and obtained by the Contractor. C. SD-03 Product Data 1. The Manufacturer shall submit data including details of construction, extent of shop assembly of the valves/strainers and a detailed description of installation procedures. The Manufacturer shall submit standard Drawings or catalog cuts. The type, thickness, application procedure, and test for coatings, and non-metallic and metallic linings shall also be included. D. SD-06 Reports 1. The Manufacturer shall submit performance test reports in booklet form showing all field tests performed to adjust each component and all field tests 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA PROCESS VALVES & STRAINERS WOODARD & CURRAN 40 05 23-4 performed to prove compliance with the specified performance criteria, upon completion and testing of the installed system. E. SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data Submittals 1. Submit operation and maintenance data for each valve and strainer in accordance with Section 01 78 23, "OPERATION & MAINTENANCE DATA", "Data Package 4". In addition to the requirements of Data Package 4, the manual shall include the following: 2. Complete information on operation, installation, lubrication, adjustment, safety precautions, routine and special maintenance disassembly, repair, reassembly, and trouble diagnostics of each valve or strainer. The manuals shall contain attached copies of the factory and field test reports as well as a description of the unit and its component parts. 3. Operation and Maintenance Data shall include all required cuts, Drawings, equipment lists, descriptions, etc., which are required to instruct operation and maintenance personnel unfamiliar with such equipment. 1.04 QUALIFICATIONS OF MANUFACTURER A. Materials and equipment shall be the standard products of a Manufacturer regularly engaged in the production of such products and shall essentially duplicate items that have been in satisfactory use in identical applications in other wastewater treatment facilities. The Manufacturer shall have a minimum of five (5) years of documented experience in the design and production of process valves or strainers of "all types", and not less than five (5) years of experience in the production of equal or larger sized units of the exact equipment models/designs as specified herein. B. The Manufacturer shall provide a list of at least ten (10) similar installations, including contact names and phone numbers. Equipment shall be supported by a service organization that is, in the opinion of the Engineer, reasonably convenient to the Site to ensure parts and service can be acquired in a timely fashion. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All valves and strainers of the same type shall be from one (1) Manufacturer. If required or shown on the Drawings; floor stands, associated adapters, extension stems, extension stem brackets, and all associated appurtenances shall be provided by the Manufacturer of the valve being served whenever possible. B. The pressure ratings and materials specified represent minimum acceptable standards for valves and strainers. All valves and strainers shall be suitable for the services specified and intended. All valves and strainers shall have a pressure rating no less than that required for the system in which they are installed. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA PROCESS VALVES & STRAINERS WOODARD & CURRAN 40 05 23-5 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE & HANDLING A. Surfaces such as female threads, internal mechanical joint ends or flange faces shall be protected from damage during shipment. The Contractor shall inspect all products and materials delivered to the Site for damage. All valves and strainers shall be stored with a minimum of handling. Store all materials on Site in enclosures or under protective coverings. Store rubber gaskets under cover out of direct sunlight. Do not store materials directly on the ground. Keep the inside of valves, strainers, and fittings free of dirt and debris. B. Materials delivered and placed in storage shall be stored with protection from the weather, excessive humidity variation, excessive temperature variation, dirt, dust and/or other contaminants. Proper protection and care of materials before, during and after installation shall be the Contractor's responsibility. Any materials found to be damaged shall be replaced at the Contractor's expense. Materials shall be stored with protection from puncture, dirt, grease, moisture, mechanical abrasions, excessive heat, and ultraviolet (UV) radiation. All valves and strainers shall be handled and stored in accordance with the Manufacturer's recommendations. Plastic valves shall be packed, packaged and marked in accordance with ASTM D 3892 standards. 1.07 WARRANTY A. The Manufacturer shall provide a full and comprehensive warranty for all valves and strainers as well as all related equipment/appurtenances specified in this section. All valves, strainers, and appurtenances shall be warrantied to be free from defects in workmanship, design, and materials for a period of not less than one (1) year. If any parts of the equipment supplied under this section should fail during the Manufacturer's Warranty Period, replacement of parts or the valve/strainer itself shall be provided. The valves/strainers shall be restored to active working service at no expense to the Owner. The Manufacturer shall incur all costs including but not limited to parts, labor, service, technicians, shipping, and handling required for restoration of equipment to active service as required under the Manufacturer's warranty. B. The Manufacturer's warranty shall commence at the date of substantial completion or partial utilization. 1.08 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. The Contractor shall become familiar with all details of the Work, verify all dimensions in the field, and shall advise the Engineer of any discrepancy before performing the Work. The Contractor shall coordinate with the equipment Supplier to determine and collect required field dimensions to ensure equipment, valves, strainers, hand wheels, chain wheels, extension stems, and all related appurtenances are properly manufactured and located in field. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA PROCESS VALVES & STRAINERS WOODARD & CURRAN 40 05 23-6 1.09 SPECIAL TOOLS A. Furnish one set of all special tools required to completely assemble, disassemble, or maintain the valves and/or strainers. Special tools shall refer to oversized or specially dimensioned tools, special attachments or fixtures, or any similar items. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. The following sections reference the process valve type and specification reference number shown in the valve tag symbols on the Drawings. Valves without valve tag symbols are specified elsewhere. The Contractor shall be Responsible for providing all valves that are indicated on the Drawings or referred to in the Specifications. The use of a Manufacturer's and/or identification catalog number shall be for the purpose of establishing a standard of quality and/or the valve configuration/assembly desired for the application specified or shown on the Drawings. The reference to specific product catalog, model, or figure numbers shall not be considered as "Proprietary". B. Valve sizes shall be equal to line sizes as shown on the Drawings, unless otherwise noted. The Contractor shall provide all necessary reducers and/or expansion fittings for connection of valves to pipelines that are not of equal size. All flanged valves shall conform to ANSI B16.1 standard unless otherwise noted. C. Valves and strainers shall include all required operator(s), actuator(s), handwheel(s), chain wheel(s), extension stem(s), floor stand(s), floor box(is) worm and gear operator(s), operating nut(s), chain(s), wrenches, and all other appurtenances required for a properly installed and operational valve assembly as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein. The installation shall form a complete workable system as shown on the Drawings. D. Cast marking(s) shall be provided on all valves and strainers. The marking(s) shall include size, working pressure, a cast arrow to indicate direction of flow, name of Manufacturer, and year of Manufacture. The marking shall be located on an appropriate part of the valve in a clearly visible location. All valves and strainers shall be suitable for the intended service shown on the Drawings and specified herein. Renewable parts shall not be of a lower quality than those specified and provided with the initially specified and installed valve or strainer assembly. E. All valves shall open by turning/rotating the valve actuator Counterclockwise ("Left"), unless otherwise specified or shown on the Drawings. The Contractor shall provide all special adaptors as required to ensure compatibility between valves, appurtenances, and adjacent piping. F. Unless otherwise noted, items shall have a minimum working pressure of l50 psi or be of the same working pressure as the pipe they connect to, whichever is higher and suitable for the pressures noted where they are installed. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA PROCESS VALVES & STRAINERS WOODARD & CURRAN 40 05 23-7 G. Provide all special adaptors as required to ensure compatibility between valves, appurtenances and adjacent pipe. H. Valves and actuators located outdoors but not within a building; within maximum 2-ft above liquid; in vaults; or where otherwise noted shall be especially designed for submerged service where water may completely submerge the valve and operator. All other units shall be as a minimum weather tight. 2.02 PRESSURE REGULATING VALVES A. Pressure regulating valves shall be factory tested. Outlet pressure shall be easily field adjustable over the pressure ranges and meet the criteria noted on the Drawing. B. All pressure regulating valves shall have flanged connections, or shall have unions mounted in the pipe on each side of the valve. C. Strainers for installation upstream of pressure regulating valves are specified elsewhere. The pressure regulating valve manufacturer shall specify the screen mesh or size of perforations that are required to protect the regulating valve. The valve supplier shall furnish both valve and strainer. D. Pressure Regulating Valves - 3-in and larger 1. Valves 3-in and larger and for pressure regulating shall be flanged with globe body, fully bronze mounted, external pilot operated, piston or diaphragm type single seat with seat base equal to size of valve and shall be equal to the Figure 4500D Pressure Reducing Valve as manufactured by GA Industries Inc., Pittsburg, PA; Clayton Model 90 by Cla-Val Company, Newport Beach, CA; Bailey, Fresno, CA; similar models by Ross; OCV; Watts/Muesecos or equal. 2. The valve shall be packed with leather material acceptable to the Engineer to ensure tight closure and prevent metal to metal friction and sticking. The valve shall be furnished with indicator rod, to show position of opening of the piston, and pet cocks for attachment to valve body for receiving gauges for testing purposes. 3. The pilot valve, controlling operation of the main valve, shall be easily accessible and so arranged to allow for its removal from the main valve, while the main valve is under pressure. The pilot valve shall be easily adjustable without removal of the springs, weights or use of special tools. The control piping on the valves shall have strainers to prevent plugging of control mechanisms. 4. The design shall be such that repairs and dismantling internally of main valve may be made without its removal from the line. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA PROCESS VALVES & STRAINERS WOODARD & CURRAN 40 05 23-8 5. The unit shall be flanged. The valve body shall be constructed of cast iron. 6. The valve shall maintain pre-adjusted downstream pressure for varying rates of flow through the positioning of the piston or diaphragm by the pilot without causing cavitation. E. Pressure Regulating Valves - 2-in and Smaller 1. Pressure regulating valves 2-in and smaller shall be rated 150 psig working pressure, with bronze and brass body; renewable stainless steel seat and flexible diaphragm of suitable material. Outlet pressure shall be easily field adjustable over the pressure ranges tabulated. 2. Pressure regulating valves 2-in and smaller shall be Figure No. 43D as manufactured by GA Industries, Inc.; Model 30A by Bailey or equal. 2.03 PVC OVERPRESSURE RELIEF VALVES (V05) A. Provide PVC overpressure relief valves in the sizes and quantities as shown on the Contract Drawings. Overpressure relief valves shall be Type 1, Grade 1 PVC. Valves shall have Viton or EPDM O-rings and seals or alternate materials as necessary for chemical compatibility. The relief pressure shall be adjustable to operate between 5 to 100 psi. The setting shall be maintained by a PVDF coated steel spring completely isolated from the system. 2.04 AIR RELEASE VALVES (V06) A. Provide air release valves of the size and quantities shown on the Drawings. Wastewater Air Release Valves shall be suitable for pressures up to 150 psig (1000 kPa). Wastewater Air Release Valves shall be automatic float operated valves designed to release accumulated air from a piping system while the system is in operation and under pressure. B. Valves shall be manufactured and tested in accordance with American Water Works Association (AWWA) Standard C512. The valves shall have full size NPT inlets and outlets equal to the nominal valve size. The body inlet connection shall be hexagonal for a wrench connection. The body shall have 2” NPT cleanout and 1” NPT drain connections on the sides of the casting. The cover shall be bolted to the valve body and sealed with a flat gasket. A threaded adjustable orifice button shall provide drop tight shut off to the full valve pressure rating. Floats shall be unconditionally guaranteed against failure including pressure surges. Extended mechanical linkage shall provide suitable mechanical advantage so that the valve will open under full operating pressure. C. The valve body and cover shall be constructed of ASTM A126 Class B cast iron. The orifice, float and linkage mechanism shall be constructed of Type 316 stainless steel. The orifice button shall be Buna-N. Backwash accessories shall be furnished 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA PROCESS VALVES & STRAINERS WOODARD & CURRAN 40 05 23-9 and shall consist of an inlet shut-off valve, a blow-off valve, a clean water inlet valve, rubber supply hose, and quick disconnect couplings. Accessory valves shall be quarter-turn, full ported bronze ball valves. A vacuum check shall be provided to prevent air from re-entering the system during negative pressure conditions. D. Valve interiors and exteriors shall be coated with an NSF/ANSI 61 certified fusion bonded epoxy. The exterior of the valve shall be coated with a universal alkyd primer. Wastewater Air Release Valves shall be Series 48A and 49A as manufactured by Val-Matic Valve and Manufacturing Corporation, Elmhurst, Il, USA or approved equal. 2.05 SOLENOID VALVES (V09) A. Valves shall be direct acting packless two-way solenoid valves for water service. Valves shall be normally closed, unless otherwise shown suitable for operation with 120 volt; single phase 60 Hertz power NEMA4X enclosure and have continuous duty Class A insulation and general purpose enclosure. B. Valve body shall be forged brass with safe body working pressure of at least 250 psi, NPT connections, with Buna-N seat, wetted parts shall be of stainless steel. Valves shall operate satisfactorily when mounted in any position. C. Valves shall include limit switch fail open and fail close capability. D. Valves shall be energized to open, except for valves on water seal lines to pumps which shall be energized to close. 2.06 RESILIENT SEATED GATE VALVES (V12) A. Valves shall be non-rising stem, opening by turning stem left and provided with a 2-inch square operating nut, or hand wheel, with the word “Open” and an arrow cast in the metal to indicate the direction to open. In general, provide a 2-inch operating nut in all buried or submerged applications and a hand wheel in all other applications, unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. B. The wedge shall be of cast iron completely encapsulated with rubber. The sealing rubber shall be permanently bonded to the cast iron wedge to meet ASTM tests for rubber metal bond ASTM D429. C. Stems for non-rising stem assemblies shall be cast bronze with integral collars in full compliance with AWWA. The non-rising stem stuffing box shall be the O-ring seal type with two rings located above the thrust collar. The two rings shall be replaceable with the valve fully open and subject to working pressure. D. There shall be two low torque thrust bearings located above and below the stem collar. The stem nut shall be independent of the wedge and shall be made of solid bronze. There shall be a smooth unobstructed waterway free of pockets, cavities, and depressions in the seat area. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA PROCESS VALVES & STRAINERS WOODARD & CURRAN 40 05 23-10 E. The body and bonnet shall be cast iron and shall be coated with a fusion coating both interior and exterior to meet AWWA C-550. Each valve shall have manufacturer’s name, pressure rating, and year of manufacture cast on the body. Valves shall be suitable for 150 psi operating pressure. F. Resilient seated design manufactured by American Darling Valve, Kennedy Valve, M&H Valve, or Equal. 2.07 PVC Ball Valve (V20) A. Provide PVC ball valves in the sizes and quantities as scheduled and as shown on the Drawings. PVC ball valves shall be molded of Type 1, Grade 1 PVC in accordance with ASTM D1784. B. PVC ball valves shall be true union design with two-way blocking capabilities. Valve seats shall be Teflon with elastomeric backing cushions to match the O-ring seals. C. PVC ball valves shall be rated to a minimum operating pressure of 200 psi. Provide operator extension kit for all submerged valves. 2.08 FERROUS BALL VALVES A. Ball valves for water service shall be either ductile iron or carbon steel body, full bore, fire-safe, rated for a line pressure of 150 psig. Except as noted, ball valves shall comply with AWWA C507. B. The design of the valve shall be such that it shall provide suitable seating in both directions. In order to determine the position of the ball within the valve (open or closed), there shall be an easily visible, permanent, indicator located conspicuously on the valve. Ball valves shall have Type 316 stainless steel seating surfaces. Seats shall be Type 304 stainless steel. The fully open port area shall be approximately 100 percent of the nominal pipe area. C. Valve shafts shall be ground and polished and shall be Type 304 stainless steel. Teflon-lined bearings shall be supplied in both trunnions of the valve body. D. The valves shall be constructed so that the seals, seats and balls are accessible for replacement without dismantling the piping. The valves shall not require lubrication but shall have stuffing boxes which can be packed with the valve in service without undue leakage. Ball valves shall be as manufactured by Henry Pratt Co., Aurora, IL; Willamette, Portland, OR or equal. 2.09 STAINLESS STEEL BALL VALVES (V24) A. Provide stainless steel ball valves in the sizes and quantities as shown on the Contract Drawings. All components of stainless steel ball valves shall be 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA PROCESS VALVES & STRAINERS WOODARD & CURRAN 40 05 23-11 constructed of 316 stainless steel unless note otherwise. Operating handles shall be made of 304 stainless steel. Valves shall be full port design. B. Valves shall contain PTFE seals. Stainless steel ball valves shall be rated to a minimum operating pressure of 200 psi. 2.10 PLUG VALVES A. Plug valves shall be of the offset disc type, 1/4 turn, non-lubricated, serviceable (able to be repacked) under full line pressure and capable of sealing in both directions at the rated pressure. The disc shall be completely out of the flow path when open. Plug valves specified herein shall be by DeZurik; Keystone or equal. All manufacturers, named or otherwise, must comply completely with this Section. 1. For clean liquid or screened sewage, all size plug valves shall have a minimum port area of 80 percent. 2. On sludge and scum lines, all valves 24-in and larger shall have a minimum 100 percent open port area; for all other valves, a minimum port area shall be 80 percent when measured by the percent cross-sectional area of equivalent size (nominal same diameter) pipe. 3. All plug valves for whatever service, shall be capable of passing "pigging' cleaning equipment (using a Girard or similar cleaning pig of full nominal pipeline diameter) in either direction and manufacturer shall so certify that this may be done without the use of special equipment. B. Valves shall be rated at minimum 175 psi WOG (Water, Oil and Gas) working pressure for sizes 4-in to 12-in inclusive and at minimum 150 psi WOG working pressure for sizes 14-in and larger. 1. All plug valves under this Paragraph shall be performance, leakage and hydrostatically tested in accordance with AWWA C504, except as modified herein. 2. At the above rated minimum working pressures, the valves shall be certified by the manufacturer as permitting zero leakage for a period of at least 1/2 hour with pressure applied to the seating face. 3. At the direction of the Engineer, the valve manufacturer may be requested to perform a valve seat leakage test, witnessed by the Engineer to prove compliance with this Section. C. Valve bodies shall be of cast iron, 30,000 psi tensile strength, ASTM A126, Grade B, or of ductile iron, ASTM A536 and of the top entry, bolted bonnet design, cast with integral flanges conforming to the connecting piping. All exposed bolts, nuts and washers shall be zinc or cadmium-plated, except for buried or submerged valves, which shall have Type 316 stainless steel hardware. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA PROCESS VALVES & STRAINERS WOODARD & CURRAN 40 05 23-12 D. The valve plugs shall: 1. Be type 316 stainless steel, epoxy lined / coated with grit excluders, grease fittings, and 2-inch nuts. 2. Be removable without removing the valve from the line. 3. Have an integral upper and lower shaft which shall have seals on the upper and lower journals to prevent entrance of solids into the journals. 4. Be one piece for all valves up to 14-in and maximum two piece for larger non-throttling valves. E. Shaft bearings shall be permanently lubricated, rigidly backed TFE, stainless steel at both upper and lower stem journals. The operator shaft shall have easily replaceable seals, which shall be externally adjustable and repackable without removing the bonnet from the valve, or shall have self adjusting packing. F. The valve seating surface shall provide full 360-degree seating by contact of a resilient seating material on the disc mating with welded-in high nickel content overlay seating surface in the body. 1. The seating design shall be resilient and of the continuous interface type having consistent opening and closing torques and shall be non-jamming in the closed position. Screw-in seats shall not be acceptable. 2. Discs shall have a full resilient facing of neoprene or Buna-N. G. The methods of mounting the actuator to the valve shall provide an air gap between the two. Actuator shall clearly indicate valve position and an adjustable stop shall be provided. Construction of actuator housing shall be semi-steel. Hardware on actuators shall be of the same materials as the valves. H. Unless otherwise required, due to location or operation, each valve 6-in and smaller shall be provided with its own securely attached lever. Provide adjustable limit stops for both opening and closing and a clearly marked position indicator. I. Plug valves shall be installed so that the direction of flow through the valve and the shaft orientation is in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Unless otherwise noted, shaft shall be horizontal, with plug opening up. 2.11 NEEDLE VALVES (V52) A. Needle valves shall have a cast bronze body and be constructed in accordance with ASTM B62 and shall be designed for an operating pressure of 125 psi and a 200 psi maximum test pressure. Ends shall be ANSI B2.1 threaded. The valves shall have a rising bronze stem and non-slip malleable iron hand wheel. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA PROCESS VALVES & STRAINERS WOODARD & CURRAN 40 05 23-13 B. The needle valves shall be Figure 680 as manufactured by the William Powell Company, Cincinnati, OH, or Figure 88 as manufactured by Crane Company, Valve Division, Chicago, IL or equal. 2.12 PVC BALL CHECK VALVE (V60) A. Provide swing check valves of size and quantities as shown on the Contract Drawings. Valve body, cover and disc shall be constructed of PVC. Valve to be suitable for 150 psi maximum pressure rating. Seals shall be constructed of EPDM or Viton and Viton where chlorine solutions are used. 2.13 SWING CHECK VALVE (V62) A. Check valves for metallic lines of 2-in to 24-in diameter shall be swing type and shall meet the requirements of AWWA C508. The valves shall be iron body, bronze mounted, single disc, 150 psi working water pressure, nonshock and hydrostatically tested at 300 psi. 1. When there is no flow through the line, the disc shall hang lightly against its seat in practically a vertical position. When open, the disc shall swing clear of the waterway. 2. Check valves shall have bronze seat and body rings, extended bronze hinge pins and bronze nuts on the bolts of bolted covers. 3. Valves shall be so constructed that disc and body seat may easily be removed and replaced without removing the valve from the line. Valves shall be fitted with an extended hinge arm with outside lever and weight. The position of the weight shall be adjustable. Various weights shall be provided and installation approved by the Engineer. Lever shall be installed to the horizontal in the closed position, for both horizontal and vertical pipeline installations. 4. Each pump discharge check valves shall have two weighted arms, one located at each end of the pivot arm. Each arm shall be equally weighted. The valve shall be for heavy duty service that requires very rapid closure. In addition, these valves shall incorporate a hydro-viscous damping system to cushion the final closure of the valve. The damper(s) shall be installed either on each valve arm or internally adjacent to the valve seating surface. 5. Each pump discharge check valve as designated on the Drawings shall be equipped with a limit switch set to operate the contacts when the valve is closed. The limit switches shall be shaft actuated type using a lever arm with a roller cam. The limit switches shall be mounted such that they are actuated by the outside lever of the check valve and designed so as to require no modification to the valve for mounting. The mounting shall allow for adjustment of the switch in relation to the lever ann. The initial setting of the limit switch shall be such that the switch closes when the valve opening 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA PROCESS VALVES & STRAINERS WOODARD & CURRAN 40 05 23-14 is greater than 10 percent. The switch shall have two normally open and two normally closed contacts and shall have a NEMA 4X enclosure. The limit switches shall be as manufactured by Cutler Hammer; Square D Company; General Electric Company, or equal. 6. Check valves shall be by APCO, American-Darling; M&H; Golden Anderson; Clow; Mueller or equal. B. Check valves 2-in and smaller for installation in copper and steel pipes shall be bronze, swing type, 125 lb with solder or screwed ends. 2.14 DUCK BILL ELASTOMERIC CHECK VALVES (V71) A. Check Valves are to be all rubber of the flow operated check type with a slip-on connection. The Check Valve is designed to slip over the specified pipe outside diameter and attached by means of vendor furnished stainless steel clamps. The port area shall contour down to a duckbill, which shall allow passage of flow in one direction while preventing reverse flow. The valve shall be one-piece rubber construction with nylon reinforcement. The bill portion shall be thinner and more flexible than the valve body and formed into a curve of 180°. B. Company name, plant location, valve size and serial number shall be bonded to the check valve. A single manufacturer shall provide all elastomer duckbill check valves. C. When line pressure inside the valve exceeds the backpressure outside the valve, the line pressure forces the bill of the valve open, allowing flow to pass. When backpressure exceeds the line pressure, the bill of the valve is forced closed. D. All valves shall be of the Series TF-2 as manufactured by Tideflex Technologies, Carnegie, PA 15106 or Engineer Approved Equal. E. Manufacturer shall have conducted independent hydraulic testing to determine headloss and jet velocity characteristics on a minimum of eight sizes of duckbill valves ranging from 2” through 48”. The testing must include multiple constructions (stiffness) within each size and must have been conducted for free discharge (discharge to atmosphere) and submerged conditions. F. Manufacturer shall have conducted an independent hydraulic test where multiple valves (at least four) of the same size and construction (stiffness) were tested to validate the submitted headloss characteristics and to prove the repeatability of the manufacturing process to produce the same hydraulic characteristics. G. Valves 48” and larger must incorporate a metallic support completely encapsulated in the wall thickness at the top portion of the valve to assist in supporting the weight of the valve. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA PROCESS VALVES & STRAINERS WOODARD & CURRAN 40 05 23-15 H. The bill slit of the duckbill valve must be at least 1.57 times the nominal pipe diameter. I. Manufacturer to have conducted Finite Element Analysis (FEA) on various duckbill valves to determine deflection, stress and strain characteristics under various load conditions. Modeling must have been done for flowing conditions (positive differential pressure) and reverse differential pressure. 2.15 GROUNDWATER RELIEF VALVES (V64) A. Provide pressure relief valve of size and quantity as shown on the Drawings. Valves shall be manufactured using a cast iron body and disc. B. The body shall have a machined bronze seat and the disc shall have a replaceable BUNA-N seat assembly. Equal to Troy Valve Model A2580. 2.16 TELESCOPING VALVES (V90) A. Provide telescoping valves of the size and quantity as shown on the Contract Drawings. B. The valves shall utilize a low friction seal to engage the slip tube and mount to the flange of the receiving pipe. C. All welds shall be performed by welders with AWS certification. The welds shall be sandblasted to remove the weld burn, and shall have a mill finish on stainless steel. D. Telescoping valves and all hardware shall be constructed entirely of Type 304 or 304L stainless steel. The valve body shall be made of structural tubing or pipe. E. The slip tube shall be constructed of Schedule 10 minimum thickness stainless steel pipe. The slip tube shall be supplied with Stainless Steel (304 or 316) cone weirs. V Notch weirs will not be accepted. F. The bail shall be constructed of stainless steel and shall be bolted to the stem and welded to the slip tube. G. The telescoping valve shall be provided with a self-adjusting seal system to restrict leakage between the slip tube and the receiving pipe. 1. The seal shall be a one–piece molded urethane seal with an upper lip type seal and an integral companion flange. 2. If a neoprene seal and separate companion flange is provided, the neoprene seal shall have a minimum thickness of 1/2-inch and the companion flange shall be stainless steel and shall have a minimum thickness of 3/8-inch. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA PROCESS VALVES & STRAINERS WOODARD & CURRAN 40 05 23-16 3. The companion flange shall be provided with a bolt pattern suitable for attachment to the flange on the receiving pipe. 2.17 AIR MODULATING DIAPHRAGM VALVE FOR AERATION CONTROL A. The valve must have a square control orifice with falling flow axis for precise control of airflow to individual control zones with continuous adjustment from 0% to 100% open over a large airflow range. B. The control valve must have a stable control curve which is proportional to stroke and proportional to the open orifice area. C. Deviations from the ideal, linear performance curve must not exceed 5% and must close gas-tight. The manufacturer must provide the control curves. D. The valve must be fitted with an electric, modulating duty actuator. E. The pressure loss of the valve (differential pressure across the valve during control operation) may not exceed 0.15 psi at maximum specified flow and wide open valve. F. Valve actuation from fully open to fully closed must require at least 18 turns of the drive spindle for accurate and repeatable positioning. G. The spindle and screws must be 306 SS, and the diaphragm material must be 316 SS. Guides and seals must be Teflon/carbon/HBNR. The valve body must zinc plated. H. The valve shall be delivered completely assembled with actuator. I. Control Range shall be between 0 and 3,000 scfm. J. Manufacturer shall be Binder Model VACOMASS square diaphragm control valve or Engineer Approved Equal. 2.18 ELECTRIC ACTUATOR FOR AIR MODULATING VALVE A. General 1. Equipment Requirements: a. The actuators shall be suitable for use on a 460 volts, 3 phase, 60 Hz power supply and must include motor, integral reversing starters, local controls and terminals for remote control and indication housed within a self-contained, sealed enclosure. Set-up of the actuator shall be carried out without the removal of any covers. Actuator calibration shall be by integral pushbuttons and selector switch. No separate special commissioning tools shall be required. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA PROCESS VALVES & STRAINERS WOODARD & CURRAN 40 05 23-17 In addition, provision shall be made for the protection of configured actuator settings by means of a password. 2. Actuator Sizing: a. The actuator shall be sized to guarantee valve closure at the specified torque and/or thrust requirement as indicated by the valve manufacturer. The actuator must be adequately sized to provide the torque required to operate the valve at 90% of the nominal voltage with the option of operation at up to -30% under voltage conditions. One actuator size (same outside dimensions) shall be available covering output speeds from 4.8 to 216 rpm for a given torque range, to avoid over sizing and unnecessary weight load on valve stem, flange and yoke. An increase of actuator size caused by higher actuator output speed is not acceptable. b. The operating speed shall provide valve closing and opening at approximately 12 inches per minute for gate valves, 4 inches per minute for globe valves and as indicated in the valve list for quarter turn valves. Quarter-turn valves shall be furnished with mechanical stops that restrict the valve/actuator travel. 3. Operation Conditions: a. Actuators shall be suitable for indoor and outdoor use. The actuator shall be capable of functioning in an ambient temperature ranging from -13°F to +160°F (-25°C to +70°C), up to 100% relative humidity. 4. Enclosure: a. Actuators shall be 0-ring sealed, watertight to NEMA 4X/6 and submersible to IP 68-8 [26 feet for 96 hours] in accordance with EN 60529. During submersion it must be possible to operate the actuator at least 10 times. Enclosure must allow for temporary site storage without the need for electrical supply connection. All external fasteners shall be of stainless steel. Gear case shall be cast iron. In order to prevent condensation, a heater must be installed inside the actuator, suitable for continuous operation. Actuator must provide an alarm signal in case of failure of anti- condensation heater. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA PROCESS VALVES & STRAINERS WOODARD & CURRAN 40 05 23-18 5. Motor: a. The electric motor shall be Class F insulated, with a duty rating of at least 15 minutes at 104°F (40°C) ambient temperature at an average load of at least 35% of rated actuator torque. Motor shall be specifically designed and built by the actuator manufacturer for electric actuator service characterized by high starting torque, low stall torque and low inertia. Commercially available motors shall not be acceptable. Electrical disconnection of the motor shall be by means of a plug and socket and motor removal shall be possible without loss of lubricant. The actuator must include a device to ensure that the motor runs with the correct rotation for the required direction of valve travel regardless of the connection sequence of the power supply. 6. Motor Protection: The following criteria shall be provided for motor protection: a. The motor shall be de-energized without damage in the event of a stall condition when attempting to move a jammed valve. b. The motor shall be de-energized in the event of an overtorque condition c. Thermal devices (one for each phase of power) shall be imbedded in the motor windings to de-energize the motor in case of overheating. d. Lost phase protection. 7. Gearing: a. The actuator gearing shall be totally enclosed in a grease-filled cast iron gear case suitable for operation in any orientation. Oil lubrication is not permitted. The gear case shall contain sensors capable of continuously recording temperatures and vibration within the actuator. Actuator gearing shall be hardened steel with alloy bronze worm wheel. Where required per application, electric actuators will be provided with worm gearboxes. The worm gearboxes shall be supplied with full 360° bronze or ductile iron worm wheels and end-of-travel mechanical stops. Designs with segmented worm gears will not be permitted. 8. Manual Operation: a. Manual operation shall be by handwheel which shall not rotate during motor operation. Handwheel declutch mechanism shall include an output contact to indicate actuator manual operation. Manual operation shall utilize the actuator worm shaft/worm wheel 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA PROCESS VALVES & STRAINERS WOODARD & CURRAN 40 05 23-19 to maintain self-locking gearing and to facilitate changeover from motor to manual operation when the actuator is under load. Actuator designs that bypass electric actuator worm gears when declutched are unacceptable. The declutching from motor operation shall be at the motor shaft to minimize declutching effort. The amount of force required to declutch the actuator shall be the same regardless of the size of the actuator. Designs that break the valve load at the worm and worm gear are unacceptable. Return from manual to electric mode of operation will be automatic upon motor operation. A seized or inoperable motor shall not prevent manual operation. 9. Drive Nut and Thrust Base Assembly: a. For multi turn rising stem applications, the drive nut shall be installed in a detachable thrust base. The design shall allow actuator removal from the thrust base, leaving the thrust base attached to the valve to retain valve position. Thrust bearings shall be lubricated by means of an easily accessible grease fitting. 10. Valve Position and Torque Calibration: a. Position and torque shall be sensed by absolute encoder using hall effect sensors. Incremental encoders requiring batteries to retain settings upon loss of power shall not be accepted. Position and torque settings will be stored in permanent non-volatile memory. b. Torque and travel adjustment parameters are to be as follows: 1) Position setting range 1 to 500 or 10 to 5,000 turns, with resolution of 2.81 degrees and accuracy to 5.0 degrees of actuator output. 2) Torque setting: 40% to 100% of rated torque. 3) Torque switch bypass to be provided for the torque sensing system to inhibit torque switch trip during unseating or during starting in mid-travel against high inertia loads. B. Electric Actuator Control (contact closure / discrete signals or analog signal) 1. Actuator status indication. a. Six contacts shall be provided. The contacts shall have a minimum rating of 5A, 250VAC. 1) One contact dedicated for collective fault (phase failure, motor protection tripped, torque fault) or one of eight other fault groups 2) Five additional indication contacts selectable from a list of at least 45 parameters including, but not limited to: end 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA PROCESS VALVES & STRAINERS WOODARD & CURRAN 40 05 23-20 position CLOSED, end position OPEN, selector switch in REMOTE mode, torque fault in CLOSED direction, and torque fault in OPEN direction. 2. Local indication a. The actuator shall include a digital position indicator with a display from full open to full close in 1% increments. b. Six indicating lights shall be included. Five of the lights are programmable local indicating lights to indicate functions including, but not limited to: end position CLOSED, end position OPEN, fault, selector switch in REMOTE and actuator moving. The sixth light shall indicate Bluetooth® interface connectivity. 3. Remote position and torque feedback a. Actuator shall provide a 4 to 20 mA analog position feedback signal. b. Actuator shall provide a 4 to 20 mA analog torque feedback signal corresponding to required valve torque for diagnostics and preventive maintenance. 4. Integral starter and transformer a. The starter shall be suitable for up to 1500 starts per hour for direct mount actuators used in modulating service. The applicable number of starts per hour depends on actuator size and output speed. b. A removable plug and socket controls housing containing LCD operations and diagnostics display, blue tooth interface, reversing starters, power supply/control transformer and local controls capable of being: 1) mounted integrally with the actuator and capable of being re- oriented at 90° increments, so that push buttons and indication lights will face the operator. 2) wall mounted remotely up to 330 ft where required by application conditions. 5. Integral local controls and control mode selector. a. The actuator shall include local Open/Stop/Close/Reset pushbuttons and a Local/Off/Remote selector switch lockable in any of the three positions. The Reset pushbutton shall be provided to facilitate actuator commissioning. It shall be possible to select maintained or non-maintained control independently for either the local or remote modes. It shall be possible to program the output direction of the actuator (clockwise or counterclockwise to close) without removal 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA PROCESS VALVES & STRAINERS WOODARD & CURRAN 40 05 23-21 of any covers. It shall be possible to re-orient local pushbutton controls in 90° increments. 6. Control capabilities – for control by contact closure / discrete signals a. The following control capabilities must be available: 1) Input remote control signals for: a) open/stop/close (maintained contacts) or emergency b) open/close ‘push to run’ (momentary) c) programmable emergency input for fail to any intermediate or end of travel positions when required 2) Programmable electronic torque switch bypass initialized in end and intermediate positions. Adjustable from 0-5 seconds. 3) Separate open and close direction pulse timer (stepping mode) circuits capable of initializing at any position (open, close or intermediate). 4) It shall be possible to reverse valve travel without the necessity of stopping the actuator. The starter contactors shall be protected from excessive current surges during travel reversal by an automatic time delay on energization of the contactor coils. 5) The internal circuits associated with the remote control and monitoring functions are to be designed to withstand simulated lightning impulses of up to 1.1 kV. 7. Control capabilities – for analog signal input a. The following control capabilities must be available: 1) 4-20 mA positioner to incorporate the following features: automatic end position settings, adaptive behavior (automatic setting of deadband), programmable deadband time, programmable tolerance for open/close end positions, programmable behavior on loss of signal, split range operation. 2) Programmable electronic torque switch bypass initialized in end and intermediate positions. Settable from 0-5 seconds. 3) Programmable emergency input for fail to any intermediate or end of travel positions when required. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA PROCESS VALVES & STRAINERS WOODARD & CURRAN 40 05 23-22 4) The internal circuits associated with the remote control and monitoring functions are to be designed to withstand simulated lightning impulses of up to 1.1 kV. 8. Monitoring facilities a. Facilities shall be provided for monitoring actuator operation and availability as follows: 1) Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) – minimum four lines back- lit for setting menu showing status indication and diagnostic information. 2) Monitoring capability via Bluetooth® connection 3) Retrievable (lifetime and adjustable) data logs including: a) motor run time b) total number of cycles c) number of torque trips in each direction of travel d) number of limit switch trips at each end of travel e) total torque trip faults f) motor thermal overloads. 4) Diagnostic capability, which will store and enable download of historical actuator operation, torque data to permit analysis of actuator, valve in-service performance and status signals according to NAMUR recommendation NE 107 via local display. Data download shall be carried out without removing any covers and all shall be available locally at the actuator or accessible via laptop computer. 5) Actuators installed in critical applications, shall be optionally equipped with a sensor package, consisting of torque, temperature and vibration diagnosis. In this case actuators shall also have a real time clock for event recording to support asset management functions and life cycle analysis. 9. Wiring and terminals a. Internal wiring shall be tropical grade insulated stranded cable of appropriate size for the control and main power. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA PROCESS VALVES & STRAINERS WOODARD & CURRAN 40 05 23-23 b. All external wiring shall terminate in a removable plug and socket head, which allows easy disconnection of all power and control voltages. Actuators furnished without plug and socket terminal connections must have power and control disconnect switches for ease of maintenance and safety. C. Electric Actuator Commissioning and Test Reports 1. Commissioning a. Each actuator will be provided with a commissioning kit consisting of a wiring diagram and installation and operation manual. No special commissioning tools or parts will be required for start-up. In order to prevent loss of screws during commissioning or maintenance, all covers shall be fixed with captive screws. In order to minimize the amount of spare parts required, parts such as covers, plug and sockets, parts must be interchangeable throughout all model sizes. 2. Performance Test Documentation a. Each actuator shall be performance tested. Test documentation shall be provided to the Engineer for review indicating the following: 1) torque sensing tripping points in both the open and closed directions of travel 2) current at the maximum torque tripping point 3) actuator output speed 4) high voltage test 3. Non-intrusive capability a. In order to maintain the integrity of the enclosure, setting of all actuator parameters including the torque levels, position limits, configuration of the indication contacts and positioner functionality shall be accomplished without removing covers from the actuator control assemblies or housing. Settings shall be made by entering the set up mode and following menu prompts appearing in the LCD window. The LCD window shall have four lines of data clearly indicating the set up options. Set up shall be accomplished by using the actuator integral selector switch and pushbuttons - without the need for a hand-held setting device. Actuator parameters may also be set by means of laptop computer via a two-way information infrared interface or laptop or PDA via Bluetooth® interface. No special setting tools or devices are acceptable. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA PROCESS VALVES & STRAINERS WOODARD & CURRAN 40 05 23-24 D. Electric Actuator Manufacturers 1. All actuators shall be model SAR with AC AUMATIC controls as manufactured by AUMA Actuators, Inc. of Canonsburg, PA. Equal products by Rotark may be utilized, but any modifications required to the control and/or wiring indicated in these Contract Documents, in order to use other equipment, shall be the Contractor’s responsibility. 2.19 BUTTERFLY VALVES FOR AERATION A. Valve Disc shall be of the single offset design to provide uninterrupted 360° sealing and to prevent pressure imbalance applied to the disc. Discs shall be designed with a concave face to minimize dynamic torque, decrease turbulence and maximize flow capacity. Discs shall be 316 stainless steel ASTM A351, Grade CF8M. B. Valve seats shall be pressure assisted PTFE capable of drip-tight bi-directional and dead end shutoff. ANSI Class 150 valves shall provide bubble-tight shutoff to 285 psi. C. Disc to shaft connection shall be subject to compression forces only thru the use of Tangential pin or torque plugs. Designs using shear or thru pin connections are not allowed. All valves shall have blow-out proof shafts connections. D. Valve Shafts. Shafts shall be of one-piece design and shall be centerless ground to minimize bearing and packing wear. Shaft material shall be 17-PH stainless steel. E. Valve bodies shall be constructed of 316 stainless steel ASTM A351, Grade CF8M. The valve body shall be cast lugged type. Waffer type will not be acceptable F. Adjustable Packing shall be multiple V-ring Teflon including anti-extrusion ring, also shall permit inspection, adjustment or complete replacement of packing without disturbing any part of the valve or actuator assembly except the packing follower. G. Certified Test Report shall include material certifications for pressure retaining components, low and high pressure seat leakage test per ANSI/FCI 70-2. Test reports shall be kept on file by the manufacturer, for a period of three years from the date of manufacture. H. Each valve and valve actuator shall be assembled, adjusted, and tested as a unit by the valve manufacturer. I. Two Year Warranty shall be provided for all valves and actuators. J. Valves shall be manufactured by DeZurik, Apco, or Engineer Approved Equal. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA PROCESS VALVES & STRAINERS WOODARD & CURRAN 40 05 23-25 2.20 SPRAY NOZZLES FOR AERATION TANKS AND GRAVITY THICKENER DISTRIBUTION BOX A. The foam control nozzles shall be installed in the aeration tanks and gravity thickener distribution box as shown in the Contract Drawings. B. The foam control nozzle shall be constructed of Brass with a flat spray pattern for continuous exposure to sunlight, seasonal temperature changes and the corrosive elements of municipal wastewater. C. The nozzle should have a lever that can be lifted should the nozzle become plugged allowing foreign material to be purged. D. The spraying operating pressure of the nozzle shall vary between 3 and 10 PSI. E. The spray nozzle shall be Model No. 22561-10529 as manufactured by Spraying System Co. or Engineer Approved Equal. 2.21 SPARE PARTS A. Concurrent with delivery and installation of the specified valves, spare parts for each different item of material and equipment specified that is recommended by the Manufacturer to be replaced any time up to three (3) years of service shall be furnished. For each type and size of valve, the following extra materials shall be provided: lubricator, lubricant (with appropriate temperature rating), lubricator/isolating valve; galvanized operating wrench, 4 feet long, for T-handled operators; galvanized operating key for cross handled valves. B. Extra materials shall include two (2) of the following spare parts for each type and size of valve: gaskets; O-ring seals; diaphragms (molded); all elastomer parts; stem packing; seat rings and seat ring pulling tool. 2.22 VALVE ACTUATORS & OPERATORS A. Unless otherwise specified or shown on the Drawings, all valves shall be manually actuated. All valves shall have an operating handwheel or a handle/lever mounted on the operator. Valves with operating nuts shall be non-rising stem design with an AWWA 2-inch square operating nut. The Contractor shall provide at least six (6) two (2) foot long steel operating bars for all operating nuts. All valves shall be provided with handwheel actuators on all manually actuated valves larger than four (4) inches in size unless otherwise specified or shown on the Drawings. B. The valve Manufacturer shall supply and factory mount all actuators; including any type of manual or powered actuators. The valves and actuators shall be shipped as a single unit. All valve actuators shall be sized to operate the associated valve for the full range of pressures and velocities. Position indicators shall be provided for interior NRS valves. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA PROCESS VALVES & STRAINERS WOODARD & CURRAN 40 05 23-26 C. The force in a manual operator shall not exceed 40 pounds of rim-pull under any operating condition, including initial breakaway. The operator shall be equipped with gear reduction when force exceeds 40 pounds of rim-pull. All manual operators shall be self-locking type or shall be equipped with a self-locking device. The actuators shall be capable of moving the valves from a fully open to a fully closed position and a fully closed position to a fully open position. The actuator shall be capable of holding the valve at any position in between the fully open and fully closed positions. A position indicator shall be supplied on quarter-turn valves. Each operating device shall have the word "OPEN" permanently cast as well as an arrow indicating the direction of operation. 2.23 CHAINWHEEL OPERATORS A. Unless otherwise specified or shown on the Drawings, chainwheel actuators shall be provided for all valves when the valve center line is located six (6) feet or greater above the operating floor. All chainwheel actuators shall be provided complete with chain guides. The operator chain shall loop within a minimum of four (4) feet from the operating floor level. Where chains hang in normally traveled areas, 316 stainless steel "L" type tie-back anchors shall be provided to allow for chain attachment. All chain shall be weldless single loop lock type. B. All chainwheel actuators and chain guides shall be specifically sized for the diameter of the valve handwheel. All chainwheel actuators shall be designed to allow for field adjustment and detachment. All chainwheel actuators shall be designed and constructed in accordance with the following criteria: 1. Size: Match to Valve Handwheel Diameter 2. Chainwheel: Cast Iron or Ductile Iron - Epoxy Coated 3. Chain Guide: Malleable Iron 4. Attachment Hardware: 316 Stainless Steel 5. Chain: 316 Stainless Steel 6. Chain: Spark-Resistant Brass (Explosion Proof Environments Only) C. The chainwheel rim shall contain a groove into which the chain guide attaches. The groove shall be an integral part of the casting. All ferrous metallic surfaces of the chainwheel actuators shall be provided with a two-part epoxy paint coating. The coating color system shall be matched to the valve piping system color coding. All chainwheel actuators which are located in Class 1, Division 1 & 2 "Explosion Proof" electrical hazard areas shall be equipped with spark-resistant brass chain. D. All chainwheel actuators of the same type, style, and duty shall be supplied by a single Manufacturer. Where applicable, chainwheel actuators shall be provided by the Manufacturer of the valve being served. All manufacturers, named or otherwise, 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA PROCESS VALVES & STRAINERS WOODARD & CURRAN 40 05 23-27 shall comply with that specified for the valves. The stem guides and extension stems shall be a product of the following Manufacturer: 1. M&H Valve Company 2. Kennedy Valve Company 3. Babbitt Steam Specialty Company 4. Engineer Approved Equal 2.24 GEAR OPERATORS A. Unless otherwise specified or shown on the Drawings, all valves larger than four (4) inches shall be provided with gear operators. All manually operated valves with a rim pull greater than 40 ft-lbs shall also be provided with gear operators. Worm and gear operators shall be a one-piece design with worm-gears of bronze or machine cut steel material. Worm shall be hardened alloy steel with the thread ground and polished. Traveling nut type operators shall have threaded steel reach rods with an internally threaded bronze or ductile iron nut. B. The output shaft shall be perpendicular to the valve shaft and be provided with a removable handwheel. Unless otherwise noted or specified all gear actuators shall conform to AWWA C504 standards. All butterfly valve actuators shall provide proof of certification. All gear actuators shall be removable from the valve without removing the valve from the line or dismantling the valve. C. All gear operators shall indicate the valve position and have adjustable stops. The maximum handwheel size shall be 24 inches in diameter. All position indicators shall be of the embossed, stamped, engraved, etched, or raised types. D. Unless otherwise specified or shown on the Drawings, all gear operated valves three (3) inches & larger shall be provided with position indication at the point of operation. Valves smaller than three (3) inches shall have position indication on the respective handwheel's or lever actuators. 2.25 UNDERGROUND OPERATORS A. Buried service operators on valves larger than 2.5 inches shall have a 2 inch operating nut. Buried operators on valves 2 inches and smaller shall have a cross handle for operation by a forked key. The moving parts of valves and operators shall be enclosed in a housing to prevent contact with the soil. Buried service operators for quarter-turn valves shall be designed to withstand an input torque of 450 foot-pounds at the fully open or fully closed positions, and shall be grease packed and gasketed to withstand a submersion in water to 10.2 psig. Buried valves shall have extension stems, bonnets, and valve boxes. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA PROCESS VALVES & STRAINERS WOODARD & CURRAN 40 05 23-28 2.26 EXTENSION STEMS & STEM GUIDES A. Where the depth of the valve is such that its centerline is more than six (6) inches below grade or operator level, an operator extension stem shall be furnished with a two (2) inch operating nut to bring the operating nut to a point six (6) inches below the surface of the ground and/or box cover. The operating nut shall be located in a floor box. B. Extension stems shall be two (2) inch 304L stainless steel. Provide support brackets for spans greater than five (5) feet. All extension stems and/or operating nuts shall be provided with universal joints and pin couplings when longer than ten (10) feet. All stem adaptors shall be provided as required. All extension stems and operating nuts shall have a rating of at least five (5) times the maximum operating torque. C. All stem guides shall be high strength stainless steel. The stem guides shall be of the adjustable wall bracket type. The guide shall be provided with bronze bushings where the extension stem passes through. The maximum spacing shall be ten (10) feet. All stem guides shall be designed and constructed in accordance with the following: 1. Bracket: 304L Stainless Steel 2. Guide: 304L Stainless Steel 3. Bushing: Brass CDA 360 4. Bolts & Nuts: 316 Stainless Steel ASTM A 276 5. Operator: 2-inch square nut or Handwheel as shown on Drawings D. All stem guides & extension stems of the same type, style, and duty shall be supplied by a single Manufacturer. Where applicable, stem guides and extension stems shall be provided by the Manufacturer of the valve being served. All manufacturers, named or otherwise, shall comply with that specified for the valves. The stem guides and extension stems shall be a product of the following Manufacturer: 1. Clow Valve Company 2. Troy Valve Company 3. M&H Valve Company 4. Kennedy Valve Company 5. Engineer Approved Equal 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA PROCESS VALVES & STRAINERS WOODARD & CURRAN 40 05 23-29 2.27 VALVE BOXES (OUTDOOR SUB-GRADE VALVES) A. Each exterior valve shall be provided with a valve box. Valve boxes shall be cast iron and of the adjustable, telescoping, heavy-pattern type. They shall be designed and constructed to prevent the direct transmission of traffic loads to the pipe or valve. B. Cast-iron valve boxes shall have minimum metal thickness of 3/16 inch. All boxes shall be extension type with slide-type adjustment and a flared base. The bell end of the valve box shall be sufficiently large enough to fit over the stuffing box of the respective valve. C. The boxes shall be adjustable through at least six (6) inches vertically without reduction of lap between sections to less than four (4) inches. The length shall be as necessary to suit the finish grade elevation. D. The inside diameter of the box shall be at least 5-1/4 inches. The covers shall be close fitting and dirt-tight. The top of the cover shall be flush with the top of the box rim. E. A minimum of two (2) T-handles for two (2) inch square operating nuts shall be provided. The T-handle wrenches shall be sized for the box length. Concrete boxes shall be the standard product of a Manufacturer of precast concrete structures. F. The box length shall adapt to the length required for the depth of the line and to the depth of cover required over the pipe at the valve location without full extension. Concrete boxes shall be installed only in locations not subjected to vehicular traffic. The boxes shall have housings of sufficient size to completely cover the valve or service stop and shall be complete with covers. G. All iron valve boxes of the same type, style, and duty shall be supplied by a single Manufacturer. All manufacturers, named or otherwise, shall comply with that specified for the valve boxes. The iron valve boxes shall be a product of the following Manufacturer: 1. Crescent Foundry Company 2. East Jordan Iron Works Inc. 3. Engineer Approved Equal 2.28 FLOOR STANDS A. Provide rising or non-rising stem (NRS) floor stands as required and as shown on the Drawings. The stands shall be provided with a factory applied rust-inhibiting prime coating as per section 09 90 00 "PAINTS AND COATINGS". The Contractor shall provide adapters as recommended by the Manufacturer. The floor stand shall be indicating type; complete with stem, coupling, handwheel, stem 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA PROCESS VALVES & STRAINERS WOODARD & CURRAN 40 05 23-30 guide brackets, and yoke attachment. The stem guide shall be spaced such that stem L/R ratio does not exceed 200. Anchors shall be supplied as required by the floor stand Manufacturer. B. The floor stand assembly shall be provided with an etched or cast arrow to show the direction of rotation to open the valve. A resilient moisture-resistant seal shall be provided around the stem penetration through the slab. Provide cantilevered floor stand supports as required or as shown on the Drawings. Provide hand wheel extension stems as required or as shown on the Drawings. C. Where the operator for a quarter-turn valve is located on a floor stand, an extension stem torque tube shall be provided and properly sized for the maximum torque capacity of the valve. All floor stands shall be designed and constructed in accordance with the following: 1. Type: Non-Rising Stem - Indicator Type 2. Stand: Cast Iron ASTM A 126 Class B 65-45-12 3. Stem: 304 Stainless Steel ASTM A 276 4. Bushing & Indicator Nut: Bronze 5. Drive Screw: Stainless Steel ASTM A 276 6. Bolts, Nuts, & Anchors: 316 Stainless Steel ASTM A 276 7. Operator: Handwheel or Hand Crank as Shown on Drawings 8. Closed Tag: Aluminum 9. Extension Stem (If Required): 304L Stainless Steel ASTM A 276 D. All floor stands of the same type, style, and duty shall be supplied by a single Manufacturer. Where applicable, floor stands shall be provided by the Manufacturer of the valve being served. All manufacturers, named or otherwise, shall comply completely with the Contract Documents. The floor stands shall be a product of the following Manufacturer: 1. Clow Valve Company 2. Troy Valve Company 3. M&H Valve Company 4. Kennedy Valve Company 5. Engineer Approved Equal 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA PROCESS VALVES & STRAINERS WOODARD & CURRAN 40 05 23-31 2.29 FINISHINGS & COATINGS A. All coatings and lubricants in contact with "Potable Water" shall be certified as acceptable for use with that fluid. If the valve Manufacturer does not require finished coating on any interior surfaces, then the Manufacturer shall state so in writing and no finish coating shall be required, if approved by the Engineer. B. Unless otherwise specified, all iron body valves shall be exterior primed with a shop coat of an Engineer approved rust-inhibitive primer. The primer shall be applied in accordance with the instructions of the paint Manufacturer. The primer shall be compatible with the finish coat provided. Unless otherwise specified, the finish coat shall match the coating of connecting pipe in type and color. All field painting shall be in accordance with section 09 90 00 "PAINTS & COATINGS". Stainless steel, brass, bronze, and plastic body valves shall not require coating. C. Unless otherwise specified or noted, all interior ferrous surfaces shall be given a shop finish of an asphalt varnish or epoxy coating in accordance with AWWA C550 and AWWA C509 standards. D. The epoxy paint shall be either a two-part liquid material or a heat-activated (fusion) material except that only a heat-activated material shall apply if a valve coating is specified as "fusion" or "fusion bonded" epoxy. The epoxy lining and coating shall have a minimum 4.0 mils dry film thickness except where it is limited by valve operating tolerances. Safety isolation valves and lockout valves with handles, handwheel's, or chain wheels shall be painted "Safety Yellow." E. Ferrous surfaces obviously not to be painted shall be given a shop coat of grease or other acceptable rust-inhibitive coating. 2.30 FLOOR BOXES A. The Contractor shall provide floor boxes for valve operating nuts recessed in the concrete as specified and as shown on the Drawings. The valve floor boxes shall be standard cast iron type, cast-in-place with a fastening top. The floor boxes shall be designed for use with non-rising stem valves (NRS). The floor boxes shall be designed to provide support for the extension stem and a cover for the operating nut on the stem. The floor boxes shall be designed and constructed in accordance with the following criteria: 1. Body: Cast Iron ASTM A 126 Class B 2. Cover: Cast Iron ASTM A 126 Class B 3. Bushing: Brass CDA 360 4. Length: As required and as shown on Drawings 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA PROCESS VALVES & STRAINERS WOODARD & CURRAN 40 05 23-32 B. All floor boxes of the same type, style, and duty shall be supplied by a single Manufacturer. Where applicable, floor boxes shall be provided by the Manufacturer of the valve being served. All manufacturers, named or otherwise, shall comply Completely with the Contract Documents. The floor boxes shall be a product of the following Manufacturer: 1. Clow Valve Company 2. Troy Valve Company 3. M&H Valve Company 4. Kennedy Valve Company 5. Engineer Approved Equal 2.31 VALVE IDENTIFICATION TAGS A. Provide valve identification tags painted onto the body of each valve. B. The tags shall include piping system abbreviation, and sequenced valve numbers painted using standard fiberboard stencils, prepared for required applications with letter sizes generally complying with recommendations of ANSI A13.1 for valves and similar applications. C. Utilize standard exterior type stenciling enamel; black, except as otherwise indicated; either brushing grade or pressurized spray-can form and grade. Utilize standard identification enamel of colors indicated or, if not otherwise indicated for piping systems, comply with ANSI A13.1 for colors. D. The valve tags shall conform to the following criteria: 1. Tag Size: 2 Inch Square 2. Lettering: Stenciled Painted Tags E. All buried valves shall be provided with tags embedded in a concrete pad surrounding the valve box. F. The Contractor shall confirm the final numbering sequence with the Engineer prior to ordering any tags. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA PROCESS VALVES & STRAINERS WOODARD & CURRAN 40 05 23-33 PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install valves as shown on the Drawings and in strict accordance with the Manufacturer's recommendations. Install valves with stems pointed up, in vertical position where possible, but in no case with stems pointed downward of the horizontal plane. Allow sufficient room for maintenance, removal and proper operation. All valves shall be located and oriented to permit easy access to the valve operator, and to avoid interferences. B. All valves shall be independently supported. Valves shall not be supported by the connecting piping. C. Flanged valve bolt holes shall be installed to straddle the vertical centerline of the pipe. Flanged faces shall be cleaned prior to inserting the gasket and bolts. All nuts shall be tightened progressively and uniformly. Threaded ends shall have the threads cleaned by wire brushing or swabbing prior to installation. D. Where any valve or appurtenance installation is covered by a standard, the Contractor shall install such equipment in accordance with the standard unless otherwise specified or indicated on the Drawings. The Contractor shall certify any such installations are in accordance with all applicable standards. E. Unless otherwise specified or shown on the Drawings, all valve connections/joints shall be installed in accordance with the specified and applicable standards. The Contractor shall be Responsible for all verification of Manufacturer's torque requirements. 3.02 VALVE ORIENTATION A. The operating stem of a manual valve shall be installed in a vertical position when the valve is installed in horizontal runs of pipe having centerline elevations of 4.5 feet or less above the finished floor, unless otherwise shown on Drawings. The operating stem of a manual valve shall be installed in a horizontal position in horizontal runs of pipe having centerline elevations between 4.5 feet 6 feet above the finish floor, unless otherwise shown on Drawings. B. All manually actuated valves three (3) inches and smaller shall have the valve indicators and operators located to display toward the normal operational locations. C. Butterfly valves: Orientation of butterfly valves shall take into account changes in pipe direction. Valve shafts shall be oriented so that unbalanced flows caused by pipe direction changes or other disturbances are equally divided to each half of the disc. D. Plug Valves: If a plug valve seat position is not shown in the Drawings, locate the seat position as follows: for horizontal flow, the flow shall produce an "unseating" 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA PROCESS VALVES & STRAINERS WOODARD & CURRAN 40 05 23-34 pressure, and the plug shall open into the top half of valve; and for vertical flow, the seat shall be installed in the highest portion of the valve. 3.03 VALVE TESTING A. Test all valves visually for leaks and proper operation under pressure. The Contractor shall also test the valves to ensure proper valve function and actuation. All valves shall be tested as part of the respective piping system or segment in accordance with Section 40 05 13 "PROCESS PIPE AND FITTINGS". B. Valves may either be tested while testing pipelines, or as a separate test. It shall be demonstrated that valves open and close smoothly with operating pressure on one side and atmospheric pressure on the other, and in both directions for two-way valve applications. The Contractor shall count and record the number of turns required to open and close each valve, and account for any discrepancies with the Manufacturer's data. C. Air and vacuum relief valves shall be examined as the associated pipe is being filled to verify venting and seating is fully functional. The Contractor shall set, verify, and record set pressures for all relief and regulating valves. Self-contained automatic valves shall be tested at both maximum and minimum operating ranges, and reset upon completion of test to the design value. D. The Contractor shall take care not to overpressure any valve and appurtenances during testing. E. Furnish all materials, equipment, tools and labor for testing. F. Valves which carry water or liquid under pressure shall be filled with water and subjected to a pressure of 100 psig or 1-1/2 times the normal working pressure, whichever is greater, for a period of 2 hours or longer as may be necessary to examine the valve for leaks. G. Should leaks be found, repair faulty joints. Caulking of threads or the use of chemical compounds to correct leaks will not be permitted. Replace defective valves and retest until test requirements are met to the satisfaction of the Engineer. 3.04 RETESTING A. If the equipment does not successfully pass the tests listed above, the Manufacturer/Contractor shall repair the equipment and perform the tests again until passing the tests successfully. If any deficiencies are revealed during any test, such deficiencies shall be corrected and the tests shall be re-conducted at no additional cost to the Owner or Engineer. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA PROCESS VALVES & STRAINERS WOODARD & CURRAN 40 05 23-35 3.05 CLEANING A. All items, including but not limited to all valves & valve interiors, shall be thoroughly cleaned prior to installation, testing, and final acceptance. All dirt, debris, and other foreign materials shall be removed. 3.06 TESTING OF BACKFLOW PREVENTERS A. The Contractor shall provide certified testing of each backflow prevention assembly. Each assembly shall be tested using gauges and equipment specifically designed for the testing of backflow prevention assemblies. Each assembly shall be tested by an independent backflow prevention assembly testing agency. B. Each backflow prevention assembly shall be tested for accuracy and proper functionality in accordance with the requirements of State or local regulatory agencies. If there is no State or local regulatory agency requirements, each assembly shall be tested for accuracy and proper functionality in accordance with the requirements of University of Southern California's Foundation of Cross Connection Control and Hydraulic Research or the American Water Works Association Manual of Cross Connection (Manual M-14), or any other approved testing laboratory having equivalent capabilities for both laboratory and field evaluation of backflow prevention assemblies. Provide a test report and form for each assembly. The test report shall include but is not limited to as a minimum; the following: 1. Data on Device 2. Type of Assembly 3. Manufacturer 4. Model # 5. Serial Number 6. Size 7. Location 8. Test Pressure Readings C. The test report shall also include data on the testing firm. The data shall include but is not limited to the following: 1. Name 2. Address 3. Certified Tester 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA PROCESS VALVES & STRAINERS WOODARD & CURRAN 40 05 23-36 4. Certified Tester Number 5. Date of Test 6. Serial Number and Test Data D. If unit(s) fail to meet the test standard requirements, the unit shall be repaired and retested to correct working order at no additional cost to the Owner or Engineer. Provide retesting of each unit following repairs. END OF SECTION 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA WOODARD & CURRAN SURFACE SPRAY SYSTEM – CIRCULAR TANKS 40 05 35-1 SECTION 40 05 35 SURFACE SPRAY SYSTEM - CIRCULAR TANKS PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE A. This section specifies continuous surface spray system for the area between the scum beach and the center of the tank. The water streams spray on a vector that is aligned with the inlet of the scum beach ramp creating a small current on the surface of the gravity thickener, which pushes the floating material to the perimeter of the gravity thickener. Additionally, rotating spray pipes are positioned above the surface of the tanks liquid level which will break up and re-introduce the biological solids floating on the surface back into the tank process. As the skimming blade rotates around the gravity thickener, the surface skimmer will aid in forcing the floating material into the scum ramp area. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED IN OTHER SECTIONS A. Section 016000: Product Requirements B. Section 055000: Metal Fabrications C. Section 467113: Circular Gravity Thickener D. Section 400523: Process Valves and Strainers E. Section 402300: Process Piping 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall be provided in accordance with Division 1 General Requirements and shall, as a minimum, include the following information: 1. General arrangement drawings showing the entire assembly. This shall include a materials list and descriptions of all major components including structural members, piping, spray nozzles, connectors, joints, fasteners and related hardware systems. 2. Data and specifications for each unit shall include the following: a. Descriptive literature, bulletins, catalog cuts and drawings for the equipment including minimum submergence requirements. b. Certified shop and installation drawings showing all details of construction, dimensions and anchor bolt requirements. c. Valves and strainers size and material. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA WOODARD & CURRAN SURFACE SPRAY SYSTEM – CIRCULAR TANKS 40 05 35-2 d. Sprayers size, type, and material. e. A list of manufacturer’s recommended spare parts with manufacturer’s current price for each item. f. Complete bill of materials for the equipment. g. Description of surface preparation and shop prime painting, including certification that the paint to be used to shop prime the equipment is compatible with the finish coat paint to be applied to the equipment. 3. Deviations from Contract Documents. B. Certificates 1. After the equipment has been manufactured, the manufacturer shall submit to the Engineer a certification stipulating that the equipment has been manufactured in accordance with the design and complies with all requirements specified herein. C. Operation and Maintenance Data 1. Copies of an operating and maintenance manual for each size pump shall be furnished to the Engineer as provided for in Section 3.04 of this specification. The manuals shall be prepared specifically for this installation and shall include all required cuts, drawings, equipment lists, descriptions, etc., that are required to instruct operating and maintenance personnel unfamiliar with such equipment. 2. A technical representative, from the respective pump manufacturer who has complete knowledge of proper operation and maintenance shall be provided for 1 day to instruct representatives of the Owner and the Engineer on proper operation and maintenance. This work may be conducted in conjunction with the inspection of the installation and test run as provided under Paragraph 3.03 below. If there are difficulties in operation of the equipment due to the manufacturer's design or fabrication, additional service shall be provided at no additional cost to the Owner. D. Closeout and Maintenance Material Submittals: per Division 01 General Requirements. 1.04 PERFORMANCE AND DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. The spray system shall be designed to spray the following area: 1. Gravity thickeners: The water streams spray before the scum beach ramp creating a small current on the surface of the clarifier, which pushes the floating material to the perimeter of the clarifier. Additionally, rotating spray pipes are positioned above the surface of the tanks liquid level which 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA WOODARD & CURRAN SURFACE SPRAY SYSTEM – CIRCULAR TANKS 40 05 35-3 will break up and re-introduce the biological solids floating on the surface back into the tank process. As the skimming blade rotates around the gravity thickeners, the surface skimmer will aid in forcing the floating material into the scum ramp area as denoted in the drawings and specifications of these Contracting Documents. 2. The spray system shall operate with a minimum water flow of 16 gpm and a pressure of 50 psig at the nozzle heads. 3. The spray system shall be operated continuously or in accordance with operational needs. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. B. All equipment in this Section shall be furnished by or through a single supplier. The Contractor shall be responsible for the coordination and proper operation of the entire system. Equipment shall be fabricated, assembled, erected and placed in proper operating condition in full conformity with the Drawings, Specifications, instructions and recommendations of the equipment manufacturer. C. The work of this Section shall be completely coordinated with the work of other Sections. Verify at the site both the dimensions and work of other trades adjoining items of work in this Section before fabrication and installation of items herein specified. Field measurements shall be taken at the site to insure proper fitting of all items. D. Qualifications of Manufacturer: The manufacturers shall be experienced in the design and construction of equipment for this purpose, and shall have furnished such equipment and can prove that it has performed successfully for a period of not less than five (5) years and can meet or exceed the performance and design requirements specified. Supplier must have over 10 years’ experience specifically using only water/liquids to suppress, direct and control materials on tanks and systems. E. The Contractor shall cause the equipment manufacturer to coordinate detailed fabrication of these items with the Contractor's supplier. The Contractor shall direct the spray cleaning system manufacturer for equipment specified herein, to coordinate with the gravity thickener equipment manufacturer for the equipment specified in Section 467113. F. If any other manufacturer is proposed by the Contractor for the Work covered in this Section, it shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to perform any required redesign and coordination associated with, but not limited to, mechanical equipment layout, electrical wiring, conduit and controls, and structural/architectural work, at no additional cost to the Owner. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA WOODARD & CURRAN SURFACE SPRAY SYSTEM – CIRCULAR TANKS 40 05 35-4 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Provide in accordance with Section Division 01 General Requirements, any additional requirements herein. B. All equipment delivered and placed in storage shall be stored with protection from the weather, humidity and temperature variations, dirt and dust, or other contaminants. C. If, for any reason, the equipment cannot be installed immediately upon receipt, it should be stored indoors following the appropriate manufacturer’s instructions. If this is not possible, ensure that the components are adequately protected from exposure to weather in accordance with the equipment manufacturer’s instructions. The equipment should be stored away from construction traffic and areas of debris. 1.07 WARRANTY A. Equipment supplied under this section shall be warranted to be free from defects in workmanship, design and materials for a period of one (1) year from manufacturer’s startup. If any part of the equipment should prove to be defective during the warranty period, the manufacturer at no expense to the Owner shall replace the part. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable level of quality: Equivalent to Vectored Surface Spray Systems equipment as manufactured by Gill Trading (GTC), Inc. 2.02 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A. Spray Assembly: 1. The spray system shall provide a means of attaching the spray system to the bridge of the tank mechanism in a manner that does not interfere with the normal operation of any components. B. Piping: 1. The piping of the surface spray system shall be constructed of appropriate materials and designed to attach to the spray assembly. 2. The piping system shall be attached to the bridge on existing strut channel with stainless steel strut clamps or other common fasteners. C. Nozzles: 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA WOODARD & CURRAN SURFACE SPRAY SYSTEM – CIRCULAR TANKS 40 05 35-5 1. The nozzles shall be constructed with Brass for continuous exposure to sunlight, seasonal temperature changes and the corrosive elements of municipal wastewater. D. Strainer 1. The strainer shall be a high capacity polypropylene strainer with an extra bowl and screen. 2. The strainer shall be made of thick-walled, glass reinforced black polypropylene for corrosion and chemical resistance. 3. The strainer shall have a type 316 stainless steel screen, an EPDM seal, and an easy access bottom blow off port with plug. E. Automatic Drain Valve 1. The backflow prevention auto-drain valve automatically drains lines when the water is turned off to prevent pipes from freezing. 2. The valve shall have an opening pressure of 3 - 5 psi and a closing pressure of 5 psi or greater. 3. A hollow brass ball shall be installed inside the piping chamber and when the system is pressurized the ball is forced onto its sealing seat closing off the drain port. When the piping is isolated from the pressure source the ball is lifted from its seat by a spring. F. Feedwell Inducer Plate 1. The inducer plate shall consist of a stainless steel plate attached to the skimmer arm of the gravity thickener and 12” down into the surface of the liquid in the center well. The plate is installed to induce rotation and force the floating material to the suppression zone of the gravity thickeners. G. Finishing Requirements: 1. All fabricated steel or ferrous metal shall be fully prepared with a shop or field-applied prime and final coats in accordance with the requirements of Section 09900. 2. Stainless steel elements shall not be painted. 2.03 SPARE PARTS A. One (1) complete set of spray nozzles, rotating joints, and an extra spray bar for each spray cleaning process. This will include up to 12 nozzles, 6 rotating bearings, 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA WOODARD & CURRAN SURFACE SPRAY SYSTEM – CIRCULAR TANKS 40 05 35-6 cylinder, and 2 spray bars. Spare parts shall be packaged and identified for long- term storage. 2.04 SHOP TESTING A. The surface spray system shall be given the manufacturer's standard quality control inspections and tests to ensure the quality of materials used in the manufacture of the units and workmanship conform to the specified requirements and highest industry practice, the units operate properly, and the units have been correctly and adequately prepared for shipment, long term site storage and initial operation. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. In accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. B. Each spray system and accessories shall be installed complete in strict accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and recommendations in the locations shown on the Drawings. 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Startup, training, and operation and maintenance requirements in accordance with Section 01 91 15. B. After installation and prior to being placed in operation, each unit will be inspected and checked by a qualified representative of the equipment manufacturer, as required. C. Make all adjustments to each unit as directed by the equipment manufacturer. 3.03 START-UP AND TESTING A. In accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. B. The spray system shall be checked by the equipment manufacturer’s representative while operating. This test shall be performed on site after system installation. Certified test reports shall be provided. C. Field tests shall not be conducted until such time that the entire installation is complete and ready for testing. D. The field tests shall be conducted in the presence of the Engineer. All appurtenances necessary for the testing shall be furnished by the Contractor. E. In the event the equipment fails to meet the test requirements, the necessary changes shall be made and the equipment retested. If the equipment remains unable to meet 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA WOODARD & CURRAN SURFACE SPRAY SYSTEM – CIRCULAR TANKS 40 05 35-7 the test requirements to the satisfaction of the Engineer, it shall be removed and replaced with satisfactory equipment at the Contractor’s expense. 3.04 MANUFACTURER’S FIELD SERVICE A. The Manufacturer’s representative shall provide minimum services in accordance with the following table: Purpose Minimum No. of Days Installation Supervision 1 Startup, Testing, & Operator Training 2 Follow-up Service 1 B. Installation Supervision: Provide a qualified manufacturer’s representative for a minimum of 1 day to assist and direct the purchaser in the proper installation of equipment, and confirm proper installation. C. Startup & Testing: Provide services of a Manufacturer's representative who is experienced in the installation, adjustment, and operation of the specified equipment for a minimum of 2 days. The representative shall check that the installation complies with requirements, adjust and test equipment. D. Training: The Manufacturer shall provide a qualified trainer to conduct a training course for operating staff as designated by the Engineer. The training period, of a total of 8 hours of normal working time, shall start after the system is functionally completed, but prior to final acceptance tests. The field instructions shall cover all of the items contained in the operating and maintenance instructions, as well as demonstrations of routine maintenance operations. The Engineer shall be notified at least 14 days prior to date of proposed conduction of training course. E. Follow-up Service: After six months of operation, a Manufacturer’s representative shall return for a full eight-hour day to inspect the condition of the equipment, address operational questions, and provide general operational and maintenance support to the Owner. F. The number of days indicated above shall be provided on an 8-hour-day on-site basis and shall be in addition to travel time. 3.05 O&M MANUALS A. Operation and maintenance manuals will be provided by the spray system manufacturer at least two weeks prior to shipment of all major equipment components. Each manual shall be a bound, indexed binder with drawings and parts lists prepared specifically for this project rather than general instructions that are not designed for this project. B. As a minimum the manual shall contain: 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA WOODARD & CURRAN SURFACE SPRAY SYSTEM – CIRCULAR TANKS 40 05 35-8 C. Certified as built drawings - General arrangement D. Certified as built drawings - General arrangement details E. Installation drawings. F. A complete bill of materials for the equipment including the weights of all structural steel components. 3.06 CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. END OF SECTION 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA WOODARD & CURRAN HYDRAULIC GATES 40 05 59-1 SECTION 40 05 59 HYDRAULIC GATES PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Furnish, install, test, and make ready for operation; slide gates, weir gates, guides, operators, accessories and appurtenances as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein. Provide all related appurtenances, including but not limited to attachments, foundations, anchors, grouting, support brackets, hardware and all related accessories to provide complete operational gate systems as specified herein and as shown on the Drawings. All appurtenances, accessory equipment, and auxiliaries for complete gate systems shall be provided. 1.02 REFERENCES A. The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only. Unless otherwise noted, the most recent version of the listed publications, including revisions, at time of bid opening shall apply. B. AMERICAN WATER WORKS ASSOCIATION (AWWA) 1. AWWA C 513 (1997) Open-Channel, Fabricated-Metal Slide Gates 2. AWWA C 540 (1993) Power Actuating Devices for Valves and Sluice Gates C. ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM) 1. ASTM A 240/A 240M (2009c) Standard Specification for Chromium and Chromium-Nickel Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip for Pressure Vessels and for General Applications 2. ASTM A 276 (2008a) Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes 3. ASTM D 4020 (2005) Ultra-High-Molecular-Weight Polyethylene Molding and Extrusion Materials 4. ASTM F 593 (2002; R 2008) Stainless Steel Bolts, Hex Cap Screws, and Studs 5. ASTM F 594 (2008) Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Nuts 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA WOODARD & CURRAN HYDRAULIC GATES 40 05 59-2 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. The following shall be submitted in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. All submittals shall have pertinent numerical data and information specified in the "English" language using "English" units. The submittals shall include but are not limited to the following in addition to Division 01 General Requirements. B. Shop Drawings 1. Shop drawings shall show layouts and dimensions of equipment, major components, key alignment locations and locations of bolt holes. Drawings shall show critical field dimensions identified by the Manufacturer. 2. Provide detailed drawings showing equipment fabrication, dimensions, methods of attachment (including number, locations and size of fasteners) and weights of fabrications. Include gate dimensions and the respective location for each application. 3. Shop drawings shall also include details of critical dimensions, joints, connections, fasteners and anchors. Include the size, spacing, and locations of structural members, connections, attachments, openings and fasteners. 4. Drawings shall include detailed assembly instructions, principal dimensions, materials, and any other details required to demonstrate that the system has been coordinated and will properly function as a unit. Drawings shall show proposed layout and anchorage of equipment, appurtenances, and equipment relationships to other parts of the work including clearances for maintenance and operation. C. Product Data 1. Provide product data to verify compliance with the specifications and to illustrate the construction and assembly of the products. Include compliance of materials and components with applicable CEAM, ASTM, AGMA and other standards as specified. List the manufacture, model and weights of major components. Include catalog cuts, illustrations, schedules, diagrams, performance charts, instructions and brochures illustrating size, physical appearance and other characteristics of materials, systems or equipment. Provide a detailed description of all materials used, including physical properties and methods of manufacturing/construction. 2. Include a complete list of equipment and materials, including manufacturer's descriptive data and technical literature, catalog cuts, installation instructions, and parts schedules. Provide spare parts data for each different item of material and equipment specified. Include a complete list of parts and supplies. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA WOODARD & CURRAN HYDRAULIC GATES 40 05 59-3 D. Operation And Maintenance Data 1. Submit operation and maintenance data in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. In addition to the requirements of Division 01, the manual shall include but is not limited to the following: a. A numbered parts list and predicted life of parts subject to wear b. Test data and performance information c. Installation instructions d. A written warrantee statement 2. Operation and Maintenance Data shall also include all required cuts, drawings, equipment lists, descriptions, etc., which are required to instruct operation and maintenance personnel unfamiliar with such equipment. 1.04 QUALIFICATIONS OF MANUFACTURER A. Materials and equipment shall be the standard products of a Manufacturer regularly engaged in the production of such products and shall essentially duplicate items that have been in satisfactory use in identical applications in other wastewater treatment facilities. The Manufacturer shall have a minimum of five (5) years of documented experience design/production of equal or larger sized designs/models of slide gates and weir gates as indicated in the Contract Documents. B. The Manufacturer shall provide an installation list of at least five (5) similar installations, including contact names and phone numbers. All components shall be supported by a service organization that is, in the opinion of the Engineer, reasonably convenient to the site to ensure parts and service can be acquired in a timely fashion. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. All equipment delivered and placed in storage shall be stored with protection from the weather, humidity and temperature variations, dirt and dust, or other contaminants in accordance with the Manufacturer's written instructions. B. Off-load equipment at the installation site using equipment of sufficient size and design to prevent damage to the equipment. Immediately after off-loading, inspect all products and appurtenances for shipping damage or missing parts. Any damage or discrepancy shall be noted in a written claim with the shipper prior to accepting delivery. Validate all serial numbers and parts lists with the shipping documentation. Notify the Manufacturer of any unacceptable conditions noted with the shipper if required. 1.06 WARRANTY A. The Manufacturer shall provide a full & comprehensive warranty for all equipment specified in this section. The equipment shall be warrantied to be free from defects 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA WOODARD & CURRAN HYDRAULIC GATES 40 05 59-4 in workmanship, design, and materials for a period of one (1) year. If any parts of the equipment supplied under this section should fail during the Manufacturer's warranty period, replacement of parts or the units themselves shall be provided. The units shall be restored to active working service at no expense to the Owner of the equipment. The Manufacturer shall incur all costs including but not limited to parts, labor, service, technicians, shipping, and handling required for restoration of equipment to active service as required under the Manufacturer's warranty. B. The Manufacturer's warranty shall commence at the date of substantial completion or partial utilization. 1.07 SPECIAL TOOLS A. Furnish one (1) set of all special tools required to completely assemble, disassemble, or maintain the equipment. Special tools shall refer to oversized or specially dimensioned tools, special attachments or fixtures, or any similar items. One (1) set of special tools shall be provided for each size of equipment or related system. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. All slide gates, weir gates, shall be designed to safely withstand the head and operating conditions of the installation as shown on the Drawings and/or as specified herein. Slide gates and weir gates shall be used to isolate channels, tanks, and vessels as shown on the Drawings. All slide gates and weir gates shall provide a seal system that meets the minimum requirements specified herein. B. All components of aluminum slide gates and weir gates shall be in accordance with AWWA C 513 standards. All components of stainless steel slide gates and weir gates shall fabricated in accordance with AWWA C 561 standards. When specifically specified or indicated on the Drawings aluminum components shall be entirely anodized in conformance with the AA C22-A41 standards. All aluminum gates shall be provided with a nickel acetate or nickel fluoride sealer. Specific materials of construction and finishes for each gate are indicated on the Drawings. C. All slide gates and weir gates shall be of the "Conventional" (Non Self-Contained) or "Self-Contained" frame type with rising or non-rising stems as specified and as indicated on the Drawings. All slide gates shall be fabricated of 6061-T6 aluminum or 304L stainless steel as indicated on the Drawings. All gates shall be designed to have adequate strength to prevent distortion in handling and placing and under any condition of service. D. All materials and equipment shall be as specified and as shown on the Drawings. Materials and equipment shall be new and unused, except for testing as required. Where two or more pieces of equipment performing the same function are required, they shall be duplicate products of the same Manufacturer. Under no circumstances, 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA WOODARD & CURRAN HYDRAULIC GATES 40 05 59-5 under the specified range of operation, shall the slide gates be subjected to factors including but not limited to: excessive strain and excessive deflection. 2.02 UNIT DESCRIPTIONS A. Provide gates as indicated in the Contract Documents. Refer to the Gate Schedule & Gate Detail on the Drawings for additional details and requirements for each gate. B. Materials of construction for each gate have been indicated on the Gate Schedule on the Drawings. Provide gate materials of construction as indicated on the Drawings and in conformance with the following requirements. 2.03 PROCESS DESIGN CONDITIONS A. All slide gates and weir gates shall be designed and constructed in accordance with the criteria specified herein and indicated on the Drawings. Refer to the gate details/schedules on the Drawings for additional details and specific design criteria for each gate. All slide gates and weir gates shall be sized to accommodate the dimensions and design head conditions indicated in the Contract Documents. 2.04 GATE FRAMES A. Slide gate and weir gate frames and retainers shall be manufactured of 6061-T6 high- strength extruded aluminum or ASTM A 240/A 240M 304L stainless steel. The frame shall be sufficiently proportioned so that where the guide extends above the operating floor to support the hoisting yoke no further reinforcing of the frame shall be required. Aluminum extrusions shall weigh a minimum of 3 lbs/ft for embedded and channel mounted guide frames. Refer to the Gate Schedule on the Drawings for additional details and requirements. B. Vane gate frames shall be of 316 stainless steel to the size shown on the contract drawings and shall be arranged to bolt to the front face of a concrete wall with anchor bolts and 1” nominal thick grout for leveling. A resilient seal shall be attached firmly to the gate frame to reduce leakage with the stainless steel seating face on the gate leaf when the gate is in the fully closed position. All stainless steel parts shall be 316 stainless steel. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA WOODARD & CURRAN HYDRAULIC GATES 40 05 59-6 C. Aluminum extrusions for face mounted slide gates shall weigh a minimum of 4 lbs/ft. Surfaces of aluminum in contact with concrete shall be coated as indicated on the Drawings. The arrangement of the yoke shall be such that the disc and stem can be removed without disconnecting the yoke. D. Alternatively, the invert of the frame shall be an angle or extrusion completely welded to the ends of the guides. The invert shall form a seating surface for the resilient seat mounted on the disc or invert member. A specially molded resilient seal shall be mounted on the bottom of embedded unit discs to provide flush bottom closure. The shape of the seal shall produce a seating surface having a minimum width of 3/4 inches and the seal shall extend into the secondary slot of the guide. E. The vertical face of the seal shall be in contact with the seating surface of the guide to provide a proper seal at the corners. Frames embedded in the concrete forming the channel walls and invert shall have keyways to hold the frames in the concrete. All gates with side frames and inverts bolted to the face of a wall shall have holes drilled 18 inches (minimum) apart in the frame for anchor bolts. All portions of the frame bolted to a wall shall have a one (1) inch minimum non-shrink grout pad between the frame and the concrete. F. ASTM D 4020 UHMW polyethylene seals shall be provided on the guides of all slide gates if necessary to comply with the specified leakage requirements of this specification section. Seals shall be easily removable to allow for replacement and adjustment. “J” or “P” type hollow bulb neoprene seals are not acceptable. G. Aperture or end of channel gates shall utilize flat frame style side mounting with a flush bottom. The bottom frame shall be installed completely flush with the bottom of the installed structure and shall not create any lip or threshold on the floor. Provide a one (1) inch grout surface for the sides and a recess size as recommended by the gate Manufacturer for embedment of the invert member. H. All stainless steel frame assemblies, including the guide members, invert member and yoke members shall be constructed of formed stainless steel plate with a minimum thickness of 1/4-inch. The frame design shall allow for embedded mounting, mounting directly to a wall with stainless steel anchor bolts and grout or mounting to a wall thimble with stainless steel mounting studs and a mastic gasket material. Mounting style shall be as shown on the Drawings. I. All wall mounted or wall thimble mounted gates shall have a flange frame. The structural portion of the frame that incorporates the seat/seals shall be formed into a one-piece shape for rigidity. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA WOODARD & CURRAN HYDRAULIC GATES 40 05 59-7 J. Gussets shall be provided as necessary to support the guide members in an unseating head condition. The gussets shall extend to support the outer portion of the guide assembly and shall be positioned to ensure that the load is transferred to the anchor bolts or the wall thimble studs. The frame shall extend to accommodate the entire height of the slide when the slide is in the fully opened position on upward opening gates or downward opening weir gates. K. On self-contained gates, a yoke shall be provided across the top of the frame. The yoke shall be formed by two structural members affixed to the top of the side frame members to provide a one-piece rigid assembly. The yoke shall be designed to allow removal of the slide. A rigid stainless steel invert member shall be provided across the bottom of the opening. The invert member shall be flush bottom type on upward opening gates. A rigid stainless steel top seal member shall be provided across the top of the opening on gates designed to cover submerged openings. A rigid stainless steel member shall be provided across the invert of the opening on downward opening weir gates. 2.05 GUIDES A. Guides in the gate frame shall be single or dual slot design. The primary slot shall accept the plate of the disc and the second slot shall be sufficiently wide so that the reinforcing ribs of the disc shall extend into it. Guides shall be supplied with (UHMW) polyethylene bearing strips on both the upstream and downstream sides of the disc to reduce friction along the guide surfaces. Guides shall be designed to mount on the face of, embedded in concrete, or to mount into an existing channel as specified or as shown on the Drawings. 2.06 DISC A. The disc (sliding member) shall be aluminum plate or 304L stainless steel, of the same composition as the frame, reinforced with U-shaped or angle-shaped aluminum or stainless steel extrusions. Reinforcement shall be spaced not more than 16 inches apart and shall be welded to the plate. The disc shall be designed so that it will not deflect more than L/360 of the span or 1/16 inch, whichever is smaller under the design head conditions as specified or shown on the Drawings. Reinforcing ribs shall extend into the guides so that they overlap the seating surface of the guide. All parts and structural components of the disc assembly shall have a minimum thickness of 1/4 inch. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA WOODARD & CURRAN HYDRAULIC GATES 40 05 59-8 B. For stainless steel gates, the slide and reinforcing stiffeners shall be constructed of ASTM A 240/A 240M 304L stainless steel plate. When the width of the gate opening multiplied by the maximum design head is 80 square feet or greater, the portion of the slide that engages the guide members shall be a "thick edge" design. The thick edge portion of the slide shall have a minimum thickness of three (3) inches. Reinforcing stiffeners shall be welded to the slide and mounted horizontally. Vertical stiffeners shall be welded on the outside of the horizontal stiffeners for additional reinforcement. The stem connector shall be constructed of two angles or plates. The stem connector shall be welded to the slide. A minimum of two stainless steel bolts shall connect the stem to the stem connector. 2.07 OPERATING STEM A. All slide gate and weir gate operating stems shall be constructed of ASTM A 276 304 stainless steel. Operating stems shall have a minimum threaded outside diameter of 1-1/2 inches. The stem shall be constructed of solid stainless steel bar for the entire length, the metal having a tensile strength of not less than 90,000 psi for stems that are three (3) inches or less in diameter. Stems that are in excess of three (3) inches in diameter shall have a tensile strength of 85,000 psi. Stems of more than one section shall be joined by stainless steel couplings. The coupling shall be bolted to the stems. B. All vane gate operating stems shall be of Type 316 stainless steel for the entire length, the metal having a tensile strength of not less than 60,000 psi. The stem shall have sufficient diameter to withstand the operating torque generated by maximum unbalanced head and fully allow for starting impact. C. The threaded portion of the stem shall be provided with a 16 micro-finish or better. In compression, the stem shall be designed for a critical buckling load caused by a 40 lb effort on the crank or hand wheel with a safety factor of two (2) using the Euler column formula. The stem shall be designed to withstand the tension load caused by the application of a 40 lb effort on the crank or hand wheel without exceeding 1/5 of the ultimate tensile strength of the stem material. Stems shall have a slenderness ratio (L/R) of less than 200. D. Rising stems shall be connected to the disc by means of a cast aluminum stem connection or two (2) angle sections, which are threaded and bolted to the stem and welded to the disc. Non-rising stems shall have a bronze nut. The stems shall have adjustable bronze stop collars above and below the lift nut to prevent over-opening or over-c1osing of the gate. E. All rising stems shall be provided with fracture-resistant clear plastic or polycarbonate stem covers complete with mylar indicator markings (indicator strips) to indicate gate position. Stem covers shall not discolor or become opaque for a minimum of five (5) years after installation. The top of the stem cover shall be closed. The bottom end of the stem cover shall be furnished with a housing or adapter plate for easy field mounting. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA WOODARD & CURRAN HYDRAULIC GATES 40 05 59-9 2.08 SEALS A. Slide gates and weir gates shall have a flush invert consisting of a specially molded resilient neoprene seal mounted in the invert extrusion. The neoprene seal shall be readily renewable. All seals shall be easily removable to allow for replacement and adjustment. The slide gates and weir gates shall be designed such that under the design seating head, the leakage rate shall not exceed 0.1 gpm/foot of seating perimeter. Additional seals shall be provided to ensure that the specified leakage requirement is met. B. For diverging flow applications, vane gates shall have a maximum allowable leakage of 0.5 gpm/foot of seal perimeter. C. Gates may also be equipped with UHMW polyethylene seat/seals to restrict leakage and to prevent metal to metal contact between the frame and slide. The seat/seals shall extend to accommodate 1-1/2 times the height of the slide when the slide is in the fully closed or fully opened position. All upward opening gates shall be provided with a resilient seal to seal the bottom portion of the gate. The seal shall be attached to the invert member or the bottom of the slide and it shall be held in place with stainless steel attachment hardware. D. All downward opening weir gates shall be provided with UHMW polyethylene seat/seals across the invert member. The seal system shall be durable and shall be designed to accommodate high velocities and frequent cycling without loosening or suffering damage. All seals shall be bolted or otherwise mechanically fastened to the frame or slide. Arrangement with seals that are force fit or held in place with adhesives shall be unacceptable. The seals shall be mounted so as not to obstruct the water way opening. 2.09 STEM GUIDES A. Stem guides shall be provided to ensure that the maximum L/R ratio for the unsupported part of the stem is 200 or less. Stem guide brackets shall be fabricated of ASTM A 276 304 stainless steel and shall be outfitted with UHMW or bronze bushings. All stem guides shall be adjustable in two directions. All lift nuts shall be ASTM B 584 bronze. 2.10 HARDWARE A. All hardware, including but not limited to bolts, nuts, washers, and anchors shall be 316 stainless steel. Provide all hardware, attachments, and related appurtenances for installation of the gates. All stainless steel bolts shall comply with ASTM F 593 standards. Stainless steel nuts shall comply with ASTM F 594 standards. All stainless steel shall conform to ASTM A 276 standards. All anchor bolts shall be a minimum of 1/2 inch diameter. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA WOODARD & CURRAN HYDRAULIC GATES 40 05 59-10 2.11 WALL THIMBLES A. Wall thimbles shall be provided when specified or as shown on the Drawings. The wall thimble depth shall be equal to the thickness of the concrete wall in which the thimble is to be mounted. Wall thimbles shall be fabricated 304L stainless steel construction of adequate section to withstand all operational and installation stresses. Wall thimbles shall be constructed of 1/4-inch minimum thickness 304L stainless steel and the front face shall have a minimum thickness of 1/4 inch. B. The fabrication process shall ensure that the wall thimble is square and plumb and the front face is flat to provide a proper mounting surface for the gate frame. The face of the wall thimble shall only be machined if recommended by the gate manufacturer. If the wall thimble is to be machined, the front face shall have a minimum thickness of 1/4-inch after machining. A water stop shall be welded around the periphery of the thimble. Wall thimbles shall be designed to allow thorough and uniform concrete placement during installation. Studs and nuts shall be 316 stainless steel. Water stop may be stitch welded. A neoprene gasket or bituminous coating shall be provided to seal between the gate frame and the wall thimble. 2.12 OPERATORS A. Unless otherwise specified or shown on the Drawings all slide gates, weir gates, and vane gates shall be actuated by a gear operated hand wheel or gear operated hand crank mounted on the yoke. The bench stand shall be fully enclosed and equipped with roller bearings above and below the operating nut. Provide a mechanical seal around the operating nut. The pinion shaft shall be stainless steel and supported on roller bearings. A mechanical seal shall be provided around the pinion shaft where it extends from the hoist enclosure. B. A side mount or front mount operator system utilizing right angle bevel boxes, stainless steel interconnecting shafting, and flexible couplings shall be provided by the Manufacturer when the bench stand is located over 48 inches above the operating floor. Chain and sprocket systems shall also be acceptable for remote operators. The transmission system design shall provide for the gate to be operated from a position 30 inches above the operating floor. Bevel boxes for the transmission system shall be provided with stainless steel pinion shafts supported on roller bearings. A mechanical seal shall be provided around the pinion shaft where it extends from the bevel box enclosure. C. An arrow with the word "OPEN" shall be permanently attached or cast onto the operator to indicate the direction or rotation to open the gate. Unless otherwise specified or indicated on the Drawings, the direction of rotation to open shall be to the "Left" (Counterclockwise). 2.13 FLOOR STANDS 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA WOODARD & CURRAN HYDRAULIC GATES 40 05 59-11 A. Floor stands shall be provided for all other gate operators not supported on the gate yoke. Floor stands shall be constructed of fabricated stainless steel. The pedestal height shall be such that the operator shaft shall be approximately 36 inches above the operating floor. Wall brackets shall be used to support floor stands where shown on the Drawings. Wall brackets shall be constructed of fabricated stainless steel. Wall brackets shall be designed to withstand all operating loads. B. Where shown on the Drawings, floor stands shall be offset type mounted on the floor surface and offset to align with the gate stem. Floor stands shall be mounted on a heavily ribbed reinforced fabricated stainless steel brackets anchored to structural members with 316 stainless steel hardware. The bracket and anchor bolts shall be sized to transfer the upward or downward thrust required to ultimately fail the stainless steel stem. The design and detail of the brackets and anchor bolts shall be provided by the gate Manufacturer for review by the Engineer. The bracket, anchors, back plate and accessories shall be provided as part of the gate assembly by the gate Manufacturer. 2.14 HAND WHEEL OPERATORS A. Hand wheel operators shall have a minimum 15-inch and maximum 24-inch diameter hand wheel and shall operate the gate under the specified operating head with not greater than 40 lbs of force (rim-pull) on the hand wheel. All operators shall be fully enclosed, equipped with roller bearings above and below the operating nut and include mechanical seals. 2.15 CRANK OPERATORS A. Crank operators shall have either single or double gear reduction depending upon the lifting capacity required. Double reduction operators shall also be 2-speed type with a square nut drive on the high speed and low speed shafts. Each type shall be provided with a threaded cast bronze lift nut to engage the operating stem. Bearings shall be provided above and below a flange on the operating nut to support both opening and closing thrusts. B. Operators shall be designed for a maximum crank effort of 40 lbs under the specified operating conditions. Gears, where required, shall be steel with machined cut teeth designed for smooth operation. The pinion shafts on crank-operated floor stands, either single or double ratio, shall be supported on tapered roller bearings and enclosed in a cast aluminum or ductile iron case and cover. C. Positive mechanical seals shall be provided on the operating nut and the pinion shafts to exclude moisture and dirt and prevent leakage of lubricant out of the hoist. Fittings shall be provided for the lubrication of all gears and bearings. The crank shall be cast aluminum or epoxy coated ductile iron with a revolving nylon or brass grip. The crank shall be removable. The operator shall be specifically designed to accommodate actuation via a drill drive when the crank is removed. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA WOODARD & CURRAN HYDRAULIC GATES 40 05 59-12 D. Provide dual operators on gates to maintain stability of the disc. Duel operators shall be joined together by a shaft such that operating a crank on one will cause both operators to move together. All rotating shafts shall be provided with guard shields. 2.16 ELECTRIC MOTOR ACTUATORS A. All electric actuators shall conform to the requirements of AWWA Standard C540 (latest revision). B. Actuators shall contain motor, gearing, manual over-ride, limit switches, torque switches, drive coupling, integral motor controls, position feedback transmitter (where required) and mechanical dial position indicator (where required). C. The motor shall be specifically designed for actuator service. The motor will be of the induction type with class F insulation and protected by means of thermal switches imbedded in the motor windings. Motor enclosure will be totally enclosed, non- ventilated. D. Motors will be capable of operating on 460 volt, 3 phase, 60 hertz power. E. Actuator enclosure shall be NEMA 4 (weatherproof). All external fasteners on the electric actuator will be stainless steel. Fasteners on limit switch and terminal compartments shall be captured to prevent loss while covers are removed. F. All gearing shall be grease lubricated and designed to withstand the full stall torque of the motor. G. Manual over-ride shall be by handwheel. Manual operation will be via power gearing to minimize required rimpull and facilitate easy change-over from motor to manual operation when actuator is under load. Return from manual to electric mode of operation will be automatic upon motor operation. A seized or inoperable motor shall not prevent manual operation. H. Limit switches shall be furnished at each end of travel. Limit switch adjustment shall not be altered by manual operation. Limit switch drive shall be by countergear. Limit switches must be capable of quick adjustment requiring no more than five (5) turns of the limit switch adjustment spindle. One set of normally open and one set of normally closed contacts will be furnished at each end of travel where indicated. Contacts shall be of silver and capable of reliably switching low voltage DC source from the control system furnished by others. I. Mechanically operated torque switches shall be furnished at each end of travel. Torque switches will trip when the valve load exceeds the torque switch setting. The torque switch adjustment device must be calibrated directly in engineering units of torque. J. All wiring shall be terminated at a plug and socket connector. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA WOODARD & CURRAN HYDRAULIC GATES 40 05 59-13 K. Quarterturn actuators will be furnished with mechanical stops that restrict the valve/actuator travel. L. Actuator must be capable of the following valve closing times/operating speeds: quarterturn valves -60 second closing time, gate valves and slide gates -12 inches per minute operating speed. M. Actuators will be capable of operating in an ambient temperature range of -20 to +175 degrees F (without motor controls) and -20 to +160 degrees F (with motor controls). N. All actuators in open/close service will be furnished with integral motor controls consisting of reversing starters, control transformer, phase discriminator, monitor relay (to signal fault conditions such as thermal switch trip, torque switch tripped in mid-travel, wrong phase sequence or phase failure), "open-stop-close" pushbuttons, "local-off-remote" selector switch in addition to red and green indicating lights. An interface with the control system must be furnished with optical isolators to separate incoming voltage signals from the internal motor controls. 2.17 FINISHING A. Before exposure to weather and prior to shop painting all ferrous metallic surfaces including but not limited to operators, supports, floor stands, etc. shall be thoroughly cleaned, dry and free from all mill-scale, rust, grease, dirt and other foreign matter. For corrosion resistance all ferrous metallic surfaces shall be finished in accordance with SSPC SP 5 standards prior to prime painting at the factory. B. All ferrous metallic surfaces shall be provided with a "Color Coordinated" two part epoxy paint finish in accordance with section 09 90 00, PAINTS & COATINGS and section 40 00 00 BASIC PROCESS MATERIALS AND METHODS. Stainless steel, brass, bronze, aluminum, FRP, galvanized, and plastic components shall not be painted. Nameplates shall not be painted. The coating shall be resistant to sewage and other chemicals normally found in wastewater. C. All stainless steel gates shall be provided with a mill finish. Unless otherwise specified or indicated on the Drawings, aluminum gates shall be provided with a mill finish. Provide anodized aluminum gates only where specifically specified or indicated on the Drawings. 2.18 WELDING A. All welding shall use shielded arc, inert gas, MIG or TIG method. Filler wire shall be added to all welds to provide for a cross section equal to or greater than the parent metal. Butt welds shall fully penetrate to the interior surface and gas shielding to interior and exterior of the joint shall be provided. All welding shall be in accordance with the latest edition of the American Welding Society (AWS) standards. Field welding of aluminum shall not be permitted unless directed by the Engineer. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA WOODARD & CURRAN HYDRAULIC GATES 40 05 59-14 B. Design and fabrication of structural steel members shall be in accordance with AISC and AWS Standards. The Manufacturer shall comply with the American Welding Society (AWS) and the American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC) most current listed standards and qualifications in 2004 D1.1, the criteria per the requirements of Section 6 - Inspection - Structural Welding Code. Evidence of such AWS and AISC compliance shall be submitted with shop drawing submittals as follows: 1. AWS Certified Welding Inspectors (minimum 2 on staff) shall conform to all standards, current or previous as listed in section 6.1.4 AWS QC1, Standard and Guide for Qualification and Certification of Welding Inspectors. 2. AWS Non Destructive Testing Inspectors (Level I, II, III) for Magnetic Particle and Ultra-Sonic testing (minimum 2 on staff) shall conform to all standards, current or previous as listed in and in conformance with The American Society for Non-Destructive Testing (ASNT-TC-1A). 2.19 PASSIVATION A. After fabrication all stainless steel gates shall undergo a passivation (pickling) process to ensure maximum resistance to corrosion. All stainless steel welds shall be bead blasted to remove weld scale. All welded areas shall be paste passivated. The gates shall be washed with a high-pressure wash of cold water to remove any remaining surface debris and promote the formation of an oxidized passive layer which is critical to the long life of the stainless steel. No stainless steel components shall be fabricated or assembled in a factory where carbon steel products are also fabricated, in order to prevent contamination by rust. 2.20 NAMEPLATES A. Each major item of equipment shall have the Manufacturer's name, address, type or style, model or serial number, catalog number, and all other pertinent data on a plate secured to the item of equipment per specification 40 00 00 BASIC PROCESS MATERIALS AND METHODS. 2.21 SPARE PARTS A. The Manufacturer shall furnish a total of one (1) set of the following spare parts for each of the gates specified in this section. At a minimum, a set of spare parts shall include the following: 1. One (1) set of seals of each size B. The spare parts shall be individually boxed with the project name and part number clearly identified on each individual box. All spare parts shall be shipped in a separate crate and clearly labeled. Spare parts shall be stored indoors in a temperature controlled environment. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA WOODARD & CURRAN HYDRAULIC GATES 40 05 59-15 2.22 OILS & LUBRICANTS A. The Manufacturer shall state in the operating and maintenance manual the amount of and specification for lubricants. All lubricants for the equipment shall be non- proprietary and easily obtainable from a local source for operations staff convenience. Designs which utilize proprietary and/or special lubricants shall not be acceptable. B. All lubrication fittings shall be brought to the outside of all equipment so that they are readily accessible from the outside without the necessity of removing covers, plates, housings, guards or other appurtenances. All lubrication fittings of all gates shall be readily accessible from operator level. Lubrication fittings which are located in areas requiring the Owner to enter tankage/vessels for access shall not be acceptable. Provide zerk-type fittings for all lubrication points. 2.23 DESIGN BASIS MANUFACTURER A. The Contract Drawings are based upon Whipps, Inc. As such, the physical installation, all services, all connections, and all appurtenances were designed around the characteristics of this product. In addition to an "Engineer Approved Equal", Rodney Hunt Company, and Hydro-Gate Corporation are acceptable Manufacturers. Their equipment will differ slightly from the Contract Documents. Modifications to piping, other services, and structures may be required. The Contractor shall coordinate these modifications with the Manufacturer and the Engineer. Any additional costs required for these modifications shall be at no additional cost to the Owner or Engineer. No change in Contract Time shall be granted for arrangements and/or modifications which differ from the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall assume the cost and the responsibility for satisfactorily accomplishing all necessary changes and/or modifications for "Named Alternate Manufacturers" as well as "Engineer Approved Equal" equipment which is submitted. B. Submittals for the "Design Basis Manufacturer", "Named" products and/or equipment other than the design basis; as well as "Engineer Approved Equal" products and/or equipment shall specifically outline "All" deviations from the Contract Documents. Submittals which do not specifically outline "All" deviations from the Contract Documents; including the "Design Basis Manufacturer", "Named Alternate Manufacturer(s)", and "Engineer Approved Equal Manufacturer(s)" will be "Rejected" without review. No change in Contract Time shall be granted for delays in construction which result from lack of coordination and/or lack of "All" deviations from the Contract Documents being specifically outlined in the submittals. C. All gates of the same type, style, and duty shall be supplied by a single Manufacturer. All slide gates and weir gates shall be a product of the following Manufacturer. 1. Whipps, Inc. 2. Rodney Hunt Corporation 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA WOODARD & CURRAN HYDRAULIC GATES 40 05 59-16 3. Hydro-Gate Corporation 4. Engineer Approved Equal PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install all slide gates, weir gates and appurtenances in accordance with the Manufacturer's instructions, recommendations, and reviewed shop Drawings. All frames and guides shall be installed in a true vertical plane with 90 degree corners. Prior to installation, check all gate grooves and remove/clean off all foreign matter. Clean all contact surfaces on each gate to ensure a proper fit and seal. B. Coated gate components shall be handled in a manner so as to avoid damaging the coating. All damaged coatings shall be repaired. C. Gates with embedded guides and inverts shall be installed in accordance with the recommendations of the Manufacturer and Engineer. All gates shall be aligned, secured, and checked for free operation prior to being grouted in place. 3.02 FIELD TESTING A. The equipment startup and demonstration period for the gates previously specified shall include the provisions of Division 01; and also include but is not limited to that which is specified herein. B. Prior to acceptance, an operational test of all gates shall be performed to determine if the installed equipment meets the purpose and intent of the Contract Documents. Tests shall demonstrate that the equipment is not mechanically, structurally, or otherwise defective; is in safe and satisfactory operating condition; and conforms to the specified operating characteristics. Tests shall include checks for proper alignment, proper operation (without binding), proper connections, and satisfactory operational performance. Provide a demonstration of the ability to operate each gate by opening and closing the gate completely without vibration or jamming. C. Provide all the requirements to conduct a proper field test which include but are not limited to: water, facilities, labor, materials, supplies and test instruments. D. After installation, all gates shall be field tested at maximum differential head for a minimum period of two (2) hours to ensure that all items of the equipment are in compliance with the contract documents, including the minimum leakage requirements specified herein. The maximum allowable leakage for the gates shall be 0.1 gpm/foot of perimeter under the design seating head. Gate leakage shall meet or exceed the requirements of AWWA C 513 standards. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA WOODARD & CURRAN HYDRAULIC GATES 40 05 59-17 3.03 RETESTING A. In the event that any unit fails to meet the above requirements, the necessary changes shall be made and the unit retested. If the unit remains unable to meet the test requirements to the satisfaction of the Engineer, it shall be removed and replaced with a satisfactory unit at no additional cost to the Owner. END OF SECTION This page intentionally left blank 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA PROCESS PIPING WOODARD & CURRAN 40 23 00-1 SECTION 40 23 00 PROCESS PIPING PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes 1. Provide and perform all labor, materials, and equipment, and incidentals as shown, specified and required to furnish, install, and test wastewater process piping and fittings in accordance with this Section, the Drawings and applicable reference standards listed in Article 1.03. B. Related Requirements 1. Section 09 90 00 – Painting 2. Division 43 – Process Gas and Liquid Handling, Purification, and Storage Equipment 3. Division 46 – Water and Wastewater Equipment 4. Section 40 05 15 – Process Pipe Supports 5. Section 40 05 23 – Process Valves and Strainers 1.02 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Measurement and payment requirements: per Division 01 General Requirements. 1.03 REFERENCES A. Reference Standards 1. American National Standards Institute a. ANSI A21.51 (AWWA-C151) Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Pipe, Centrifugally Cast in Metal Molds or Sand Lined Molds for Water and Other Liquids. b. ANSI A21.50 (AWWA-C150) Standard Specification for the Thickness Design of Ductile Iron Pipe. c. ANSI A21.10 (AWWA-C110) Standard Specification for the Cast Iron Fittings 2 through 48 for Water and Other Liquid. d. ANSI A21.4 (AWWA-C104) Standard Specification for Cement- Mortar Lining for Cast Iron Pipe and Fittings for Water. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA PROCESS PIPING WOODARD & CURRAN 40 23 00-2 e. ANSI A21.11 (AWWA-C111) Standard Specification for Rubber- Gasket Joints for Cast Iron and Ductile Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings. f. ANSI A21.15 (AWWA-C115) Standard Specification for Flanged Ductile Iron Pipe with Threaded Flanges. 2. American Society of Testing and Materials a. ASTM A307 – Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 psi Tensile. b. ASTM A320 – Specification for Alloys – Steel Bolting Materials for Low-Temperature Service. c. ASTM D1784 – Specification for Rigid Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Compounds and Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) _Compounds. d. ASTM D1785 – Specification for Rigid Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedule 40, 80, and 120. e. ASTM D2564 – Solvent Cements for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe and Fittings. f. ASTM D2467 – Specification for Socket-Type Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80. g. ASTM D2855 – Specification for Making Solvent – Cemented Joints with Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Pipe and Fittings. h. ASTM F437 – Specification for Threaded Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80. i. ASTM F441 – Specification for Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedule 40 and 80. j. ASTM F493 – Specification for Solvent Cements for Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe and Fittings. k. ASTM A-182 Standard Specification for Forged or Rolled Alloy- Steel Pipe Flanges, Forged Fittings, and Valves and Ports for High Temperature Service. l. ASTM A-312 Standard Specification for Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Pipes. m. ASTM A-320 for Alloy Steel Bolting Materials for Low- Temperature Service. n. ASTM A-351 Standard Specification for Castings, Austenitic Ferritic (duplex), for Pressure Containing Ports. o. ASTM A-403 Standard Specification for Wrought Austenitic Stainless Steel Pipe Fittings. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA PROCESS PIPING WOODARD & CURRAN 40 23 00-3 p. ASTM 743 Standard Specification for Castings Iron-Chromium, Iron-Chromium-Nickel, and Nickel-Base Corrosion-Resistant for General Application. q. ASTM A744 Standard Specification for As-Welded Wrought Austenitic Stainless Steel Fittings for General Corrosive Service at Low and Moderate Temperatures. r. ASTM A778 Standard Specification for Welded, Un-annealed Austenitic Stainless Steel Tubular Products. s. ASTM F593 Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bolts, Hex Cap Screws, and Studs. t. ASTM B42 – Specification for Seamless Copper Pipe, Standard Sizes. u. ASTM B88 – Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube. v. ASTM B16.22 – Specification for Wrought Copper and Bronze Solder Joint Pressure Fittings. w. ASTM 16.26 – Specification for Cast Bronze Fittings for Flared Copper Tubing. x. ASTM 16.15 – Specification for Cast Bronze or Brass Threaded Fittings. 3. Federal Specifications WW T-799C – Specification for Hard Drawn Copper Tubing, Type L. 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination, Sequencing, and Scheduling: per Division 01 General Requirements. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. B. Product Data 1. Submit catalog cuts, specifications, and installation instructions, for each type of pipe, tube and fitting, in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. C. Pressure and Leakage Testing Reports 1. Submit test reports documenting testing activities and demonstrating compliance with testing and performance requirements. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA PROCESS PIPING WOODARD & CURRAN 40 23 00-4 B. Qualifications: Per Division 01 General Requirements and as follows. 1. All piping systems, components, and appurtenances in contact with potable water (including potable water during any stage of treatment or conditioning) shall be certified to meet the requirements of ANSI/NSF 61 for water service. 2. The ductile iron pipe, gray iron or ductile iron fittings to be provided and installed under this Contract shall be inspected and tested at the foundry as required by the standard specifications to which the material is manufactured. Furnish in duplicate sworn certificates of the tests and the results. Fittings shall be manufactured in the United States of America. C. Regulatory Requirements 1. Comply with the requirements of the following codes: a. ASME Code for Pressure Piping B31.3, category D fluid service. b. The Contractor shall provide inspection, examination, and testing in accordance with ASME B31.3 category D fluid service. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. B. Where possible, store pipe and tube inside and protected from weather. Where necessary to store outside, elevate above grade and enclose with durable, waterproof wrapping. C. Protect flanges and fittings from moisture and dirt by inside storage and enclosure, or by packaging with durable, waterproof wrapping. D. All pipe and fittings shall be subjected to a careful inspection and hammer test just prior to being installed. 1.08 SITE CONDITIONS A. Existing Conditions: per Division 01 General Requirements. B. The Contractor shall become familiar with all details of the Work, verify all dimensions in the field, and shall advise the Engineer of any discrepancy before performing the Work. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA PROCESS PIPING WOODARD & CURRAN 40 23 00-5 PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Performance/Design Criteria 1. Provide fittings of same type and grade of materials as pipe. Substitution of alternative pipe materials or joints requires prior approval of the Engineer. B. Manufacturers 1. Cement Lined Ductile Iron a. U.S. Pipe b. McWane Cast Iron Pipe Company c. Or equal 2. PVC a. Plastic Piping Systems b. Certainteed c. Eslon Thermoplastics d. Or equal 3. Stainless Steel a. U.S. Pipe b. Felker Piping Products c. Or equal C. Ductile Iron Pipe & Fittings 1. ANSI/AWWA C151/A21.51 Standard, Class 53 pipe. Double cement lined per NSI/AWWA C104/A21.4. Tolerance shall be minus 0 inches, plus 1/8 inches. Sizes as shown on the Drawings. 2. Ductile iron pipe shall be flanged unless otherwise shown on the Drawings. Flanged fittings shall be ductile iron and conform to requirements of ANSI/AWWA - C110/A21.10 or ANSI B16.1 Class 125 fittings with 250 psi minimum pressure rating. 3. Flanges shall be faced and drilled after being screwed on the pipe, with flanges true to 90º with the pipe axis and shall be installed flush with the end of the pipe. Uni-flange type couplings are not acceptable. 4. Filler flanges and beveled filler flanges shall be furnished and installed as required by the Drawings or approved by the Engineer. Filler flanges and 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA PROCESS PIPING WOODARD & CURRAN 40 23 00-6 beveled filler flanges shall be furnished faced and drilled complete with extra length bolts. Filler flanges shall be equal to Clow Fig. F-1984 and beveled filler flanges shall be equal to Clow Fig. F-1986. Filler flanges and/or beveled filler flanges shall be installed only where shown on the Drawings or approved by the Engineer. 5. Mechanical joint fittings to be ductile iron and conform to requirements of ANSI/AWWA - C110/A21.10 and ANSI/AWWA - C111/A21.11 with 250 psi minimum pressure rating. For use on piping installed below slabs and as indicated on Drawings. 6. Sleeves and wall pipes shall be furnished and placed in accordance with the requirements of Section 11202; pressure rating of 250 psi. 7. Nuts and bolts shall be provided with an anti-seize, thread lubricating compound. Gaskets for flanged joints shall be full face, 1/8 inch red rubber. Ring gaskets shall be provided for piping 14-inches in diameter and larger. Hardware shall be zinc plated steel ASTM A307, Grade B bolts with heavy hex nuts. 8. Use of union flanges or other similar pipe or fitting connections in lieu of flanged or mechanical joint connections is not permissible. 9. Exterior of pipe shall be primed and finish painted as noted herein and in accordance with Section 09 90 00. D. PVC Pipe & Fittings 1. Where not indicated, as a minimum, drainage and vent piping shall be Schedule 40 and pressure piping shall be Schedule 80. 2. PVC pipe shall be manufactured from rigid, unplasticized, polyvinyl chloride compounds meeting ASTM D1784, Class 12454-B (Type I). The pipe shall be manufactured in accordance with ASTM D1785, PVC 1120. Pipe shall be of the sizes as shown on the Drawings. 3. PVC fittings shall be the socket type for solvent welded joints conforming to ASTM D2467. Solvent shall be specified in ASTM D2564. Joints shall be flanged where shown on Drawings. Flanges shall be furnished with 1/8- inch thick full-faced gaskets which shall be of a material suitably resistant to the fluid within the respective pipelines and shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer. Flange bolts and nuts shall be ASTM A320, Type 304, stainless steel, Grade B8. Threaded fittings to conform to requirements of ASTM D2464. 4. Fittings, specials, union, and flanges shall be of the same schedule number and manufactured of the same materials as the pipe. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA PROCESS PIPING WOODARD & CURRAN 40 23 00-7 E. Stainless Steel Pipe & Fittings 1. Stainless steel pipe shall be as-welded Type 304L or 316L as noted on the drawings, pickled and passivated, with beveled ends, butt welded and conforming to ASTM A778. 2. Pipe and fittings shall be supplied in the following nominal wall thicknesses: INTERIOR AND EXTERIOR ABOVE GRADE Pipe Size in Inches Pipe Schedule 8 inch and less 5S Greater than 8 inches 11 gauge EXTERIOR BELOW GRADE Pipe Size in Inches Pipe Schedule 8 inch and less 10S Greater than 8 inches 10S 3. Flanges shall be used at all valves, fittings, flowtubes or other appurtenances. Slip-on rolled angle face rings of stainless steel for flanges 2-1/2 inches to six inches shall be of 1/8 inch wall thickness. Flanges eight inches to ten inches shall be 3/16 inch wall thickness. Flanges 20 inches and larger shall be rolled from angle with a wall thickness of 1/4 inch. Backing flanges shall be of galvanized ductile iron and drilled to ANSI B16.1 Class 125 standard in the following thicknesses: Pipe Size (Inches) Pipe Thickness (Inches) 1 to 8 ½ 10 and 18 5/8 20 3/4 24 to 30 1 36 to 60 1-1/4 The rolled angle faces shall be true and perpendicular to the axis of the pipe or fitting. Plain ends of pipe or fittings shall be true and perpendicular to the axis with edges deburred. 4. Tees, reducers, and 90-degree and 45-degree elbows shall be ASTM A774 Type 304L stainless steel, pickled and passivated, Schedule 5S, MSS-SP43. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA PROCESS PIPING WOODARD & CURRAN 40 23 00-8 5. Gaskets shall be 1/8-inch thick neoprene rubber, durometer 80, 1500 psi tensile strength, 125 percent elongation, flat ring type for raised flange and full face type for flat face. 6. For exterior use, bolts shall be Type 316 stainless steel, ASTM A193, Grade B8M alloy steel, full length thread. Hex head nuts shall be Type 316 stainless steel ASTM A194, Grade M8. 7. For interior use, bolts shall be carbon steel, ASTM A307, Grade A, hex head bolts with ASTM A563, Grade A hex nuts. 8. Arched band type couplings to join pipe lengths shall be stainless steel of equal or superior alloy and wall thickness as the pipe and will be Depend- O-Lok type as manufactured by Brico, or equal. Couplings shall be fixed by fixed end unless noted otherwise on the drawings or required. The pipe shall be plain end with external weld beads ground smooth and with stainless steel restraining rings shop welded to the piping for fixed type couplings. Gaskets shall be EPDM, bolts and other hardware shall be stainless steel. 9. Welding in fabricator's shop shall be performed by qualified welders to approved procedures. Welding rod or wire shall be of the same composition or superior to the pipe and fittings material. The weld deposit at the seams shall have a slight crown on both sides of the weld and no cracks or crevices shall be allowed. Excessive weld deposits, slag, weld spatter and projections into interior of the pipe shall be removed by grinding. 10. Pipe and fittings shall be immersed in a pickling solution in the manufacturer's plant and scrubbed and washed until discoloration and possible iron, picked up from manufacturing process is removed. 11. During fabrication and installation care shall be taken to avoid contact of stainless steel pipe with structural steel, chain, wire-ropes, steel tools, and the like, as the contamination of stainless steel by steel may lead to marks due to rusting of imbedded steel. 12. Completed pipe lines shall be washed with steam or hot water to remove any dirt picked up during transport on construction site. 13. Blower piping shall be furnished and installed with 3/4 inch PVC drain piping and ball valve at all low points within the building(s). Blower suction and discharge piping inside of buildings shall be insulated. Allowances shall be made in the fabrication, installation, and layout of stainless steel piping for the installation of blower accessories as described elsewhere in these specifications. 14. Flexible couplings for exterior or underground service with ductile iron pipe shall be Type 316 stainless steel or triple coated inside and out with coal tar 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA PROCESS PIPING WOODARD & CURRAN 40 23 00-9 epoxy. Couplings for interior service shall be triple coated with coal tar epoxy, hot dip galvanized, or Type 316 stainless steel. Coupling shall be Dresser type 53 or 153; Rockwell, Style 431; or equal with Type 316 stainless steel hardware. F. Tubing 1. Tubing shall be Tygon, PVC, polyethylene or vinyl as shown on the Drawings. Tubing shall be compatible with the chemical being pumped and shall be translucent to allow chemical flow to be observed. G. Copper Pipe 1. Copper pipe for aboveground potable/plant water service, sample water equipment drains and vents shall be Type L, hard drawn, seamless conforming to ASTM B88. 2. Copper pipe for buried service shall be Type K with compression joints, conforming to ASTM B88. 3. Copper pipe for instrumentation piping shall be ASTM B88, Type L, annealed. Fittings shall be flared or compression type conforming to ANSI B16.26. 4. Fittings shall be wrought copper and brass solder joint pressure fittings conforming to ANSI B16.22. Solder shall be 95% tin and 5% antimony solder. Do not use core solder. 5. Copper piping requiring threaded joints shall be ASTM B42, hard drawn temper and regular weight. Fittings shall be threaded cast bronze or brass conforming to ANSI B16.15, Class 250. 6. Dielectric couplings shall be installed where copper connects to steel or cast iron pipe appurtenances. Couplings shall have steel bodies with non- conducting bushing on each threaded end. Couplings shall be rated at 200 psi. 7. Exterior of pipe shall be primed and finish painted. 8. All copper piping shall be thoroughly cleaned. Copper piping will not be painted. 2.02 FLEXIBLE COUPLINGS A. Flexible Couplings 1. Dresser Style 38, Dresser Style 62 as necessary, and as manufactured by Dresser, or approved equal. Couplings joining Stainless Steel lines shall be 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA PROCESS PIPING WOODARD & CURRAN 40 23 00-10 constructed of similar material. Coupling pressure rating to meet or exceed that of the connected pipe. B. Grooved End Couplings 1. Pipe grooves, grooved end couplings and grooved end fittings shall conform to ANSI/AWWA C-606. C. Expansion Joints 1. The expansion joint shall consist of an inner tube, body and outer cover and shall have flanged ends. The tube shall be rubber or synthetic material as specified. The body shall consist of fabric and rubber compounds reinforced with steel rings for strength. The body materials shall be compatible with the tube and shall be suitable for the specified service conditions. The cover shall be formed from natural rubber or synthetic materials suitable for specified conditions. Flanges shall be constructed integrally with the body to resist stresses. Flanges shall be full pattern so that gaskets are not necessary. Flanges shall be drilled to ANSI B16.5, Class 150#. All expansion joints shall be single arch. Expansion joints placed in high temperature service shall have control units. The control unit hardware shall be supplied by expansion joint manufacturer and be manufactured from galvanized steel. The hardware consisting of steel and rubber washers, gusset plates, control rod bolts and nuts and compression sleeve shall be installed in strict adherence to manufacturers’ instructions. All expansion joints shall be supplied with galvanized steel retaining rings. 2. The expansion joints may be straight or reducing as indicated on the Drawings. Straight expansion joints shall be RedflexTM Type J-1, reducing expansion joints shall be RedflexTM 3. Type J-10 or Type J-11 all as manufactured by the Red Valve Company, Inc. of Carnegie, PA, or approved equal. 2.03 PIPE INSULATION A. All plant water piping shall be insulated. In addition, all suction and discharge aeration piping within shall also be insulated. B. Install 1-1/2-inch fiberglass insulation equal to Owens-Corning Fiberglas, Johns- Manville, or Certain-Teed. Pipe insulation shall have factory-applied, all-service jacket composed of fiberglass yarn reinforced Kraft paper outer surface bonded to aluminum foil. Vapor barrier jackets shall be applied with a continuous vapor seal.Insulated piping with vapor barrier jacket shall be protected against vapor-seal damage at all pipe hangers by use of galvanized steel insulation protection saddles, ITT Grinnell Figure 160, or as approved. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA PROCESS PIPING WOODARD & CURRAN 40 23 00-11 C. Install a continuous galvanized steel insulation protection shield on all insulated piping that passes over electrical enclosures. The shield shall cover a minimum 1/3 of lower circumference of pipe insulation, be fabricated of 14-gauge steel, and permanently secured to the pipe insulation. The shield length shall extend a minimum of 4 feet beyond the electrical enclosure. 2.04 FINISHES A. All fabricated steel, aluminum, PVC and cast iron shall be prepared and painted in accordance with Section 09 90 00. Touch-up paint shall be provided as specified to restore integrity of coating system that may be damaged during construction. All paint system components for the entire project shall be the product of a single manufacturer as required by Section 09 90 00 unless otherwise noted on the Drawings or approved by the Engineer. B. All items that will remain unpainted shall receive a heavy application of rust resistant coating prior to installation. C. Stainless steel components will remain unpainted and uncoated. D. Labels and Colors: A pipe label and color schedule will be provided during construction. E. Pipes shall be labeled on two sides at 6' intervals. A flow direction arrow shall follow each label and be of the same color. Request color and label requirements from Engineer prior to painting and labeling. 2.05 TITLES FOR EQUIPMENT AND VALVE TAGS A. Titles shall be provided in vinyl film as specified above on all equipment using 1 in high Optima Bold upper case, Grid 2 spacing, white or black in color as approved depending on substrate. Use titles shown on mechanical Drawings for bidding purposes. Titles shall be mounted at eye level on machines where possible or at the upper most broad vertical surface of low equipment. Where more than one piece of the equipment item to be titled exists, the items shall be numbered consecutively as indicated on the mechanical Drawings or as directed by the Engineer; for example Pump No. 1, Pump No. 2, etc. Titles shall be composed in more than one line if required and justified on the left hand side as approved. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA PROCESS PIPING WOODARD & CURRAN 40 23 00-12 B. Valve tags shall be manufactured from a non-reactive material (polycarbonate, polyester, etc.), unless otherwise approved by the Owner or Engineer, and shall be manufacturer recommended for moist, abrasive, corrosive and hot environments. The format for tag information printed, stamped or engraved on the tags, as well the mode of attachment to the related equipment, shall be approved by the Owner or Engineer. 2.06 ACCESSORIES A. Rotameters: Rotameters (in-line flow meters) shall be provided where indicated on the Drawings. Rotameters shall be constructed of a clear polysulfone body (or equivalent chemically resistant plastic material), PTFE float, and Viton o-rings. Meter shall be rated for a minimum pressure of 150 psi. Flow rates shall be indicated by an easy to read scale printed on the body of the meter. Meter accuracy shall be +/- 5% or better. Flow range for each meter shall be as indicated on the Drawings. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Comply with the provisions of Section 40 05 15. Install pipe and fittings in accordance with recognized industry practices which will achieve permanently leakproof piping systems, capable of performing each indicated service without piping failure. Install each run with minimum joints and couplings, but with adequate and accessible unions for disassembly and maintenance/replacement of valves and equipment. Reduce sizes (where indicated) by use of reducing fittings. Align piping accurately at connections, within 1/16" misalignment tolerance. B. Locate piping runs, except as otherwise indicated, vertically and horizontally (pitched to drain) and avoid diagonal runs wherever possible. Orient horizontal runs parallel with walls and column lines. Locate runs as shown or, if not otherwise indicated, run piping in shortest route which does not obstruct usable space or block access for servicing building and its equipment. Hold piping close to walls, overhead construction, columns and other structural and permanent-enclosure elements of building. C. Piping System Joints: Provide joints of type indicated in each piping system. D. Flanged Joints: Match flanges within piping system, and at connections with valves and equipment. Clean flange faces and install gaskets. Tighten bolts to provide uniform compression of gaskets. E. Thread pipe in accordance with ANSI B2.1; cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded ends to remove burrs and restore full inside diameter. Apply pipe joint compound, or pipe joint tape (Teflon) where recommended by pipe/fitting manufacturer, on male threads at each joint and tighten joint to leave 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA PROCESS PIPING WOODARD & CURRAN 40 23 00-13 not more than 3 threads exposed. Field cutting and threading of ductile iron pipe is not permissible, all pipe to be precut and threaded at the factory. F. Ductile Iron Pipe 1. Flanged joints shall be made with opposite bolts tightened alternately and evenly. Bolt threads shall extend no more than 2-3 threads beyond the nut after tightening. 2. Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings, all interior ductile iron piping shall be joined with flanged fittings. All buried ductile iron piping shall be joined with mechanical joints. Grooved fittings will be allowed at the Engineer’s discretion. G. Plastic Pipe 1. Joints for PVC pipe shall be solvent welded except flanged or threaded where required. In making solvent welded connections, clean dirt and moisture from pipe and fittings, bevel pipe ends slightly with emery cloth, if necessary, and apply solvent cement of the proper grade. Solvent welded joints shall be made in accordance with ASTM D-2855. In making solvent weld connections, the solvent shall not be spilled on valves or allowed to run from joints. 2. All plastic pipe to metal pipe connections shall be made using flanged connections. Metal piping shall not be threaded into plastic fittings, valves, or couplings nor shall plastic piping be threaded into metal valves, fittings or couplings. Only socket to thread adaptors shall be used for threaded connections. 3. Comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations, and with applicable industry standards. Extreme care shall be taken when joining plastic pipe on chemical feed piping to avoid leaks. H. Stainless Steel Pipe 1. All stainless steel pipe and fittings shall be welded, grooved, or flanged unless specifically required to be threaded at equipment connections. Flanges shall be provided as a minimum at flanged valves, meters, couplings, and other equipment. Additional flanges will be required as shown on the Plans or as specifically approved by the Engineer. Field welding will be required for all joints not flanged or shop fabricated. All joints requiring welded construction shall be in accordance with ASME Code for pressure piping, B31.3, category D fluid service using approved procedures. 2. All angle face ring joints shall be cleaned, interior and exterior, of all welding spatter, stains and sharp edges after fabrication. Butt welded joints 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA PROCESS PIPING WOODARD & CURRAN 40 23 00-14 require only exterior cleaning. The exterior and interior welding bead profiles shall be consistent throughout each welded joint. 3. All flange bolts shall be made up with an anti-seize thread lubricating compound. 4. All fabricated piping shall be piece marked with identifying numbers or codes which correspond to the contractor’s layout and installation drawings. 5. All threaded pipe shall be removed and cleaned of all threading oil. Threaded joints shall be made up with an anti-seize thread lubricating compound. 6. The piping supplier during manufacturing, fabrication and handling stages, and the Contractor during handling and installation stages, shall use extreme care to avoid the contact of any ferrous materials with the stainless steel piping. All saws, drills, files, wire brushes, etc. shall be used for stainless steel piping only. Pipe storage and straps shall be used for handling stainless steel piping. Contact with ferrous items may cause rusting of iron particles embedded in the piping walls. After installation the contractor shall wash and rinse all foreign matter from the piping surface. If rusting of embedded iron occurs, the contractor shall pickle the affected surface with Oakite Deoxidizer SS or equal with stainless steel brushes and rinse clean. 7. Painting of the stainless steel pipe and galvanized backup flanges is not required. Supply and install the stainless steel piping with a consistently clean surface. Identifying spool piece marks shall be removed with paint thinner or solvents. I. Tubing 1. Install in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions J. Copper Pipe 1. Systems shall be arranged with low points and drains to permit complete drainage of the system. 2. Unions shall be provided close to main pieces of equipment and in branch lines to permit ready dismantling of piping without disturbing main pipe lines or adjacent branch lines. 3. Threaded joints shall be made with solder to thread adapters. Threaded joints shall be made tight with approved pipe compound. Threads shall be clean and undamaged. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA PROCESS PIPING WOODARD & CURRAN 40 23 00-15 4. In soldered joints, surfaces of pipe and fittings to be joined shall be cleaned with fine sandpaper to bright metal. Both surfaces to be joined shal be completely covered with a soldering flux approved by the Engineer. Joints shall be evenly heated from all sides before applying solder. Excess flux shall be removed from the joint after the solder has hardened. 5. Pipe, fitting, and device insulation is included in the Work of this Section and shall meet the requirements of Section 15400 Plumbing. K. Making Solvent-Cemented Joints: ANSI/ASTM D2235 and ANSI/ASTM F402. L. Sleeves 1. Do not install sleeves through structural members of work, except as detailed on Drawings, or as reviewed by Engineer. Install sleeves accurately centered on pipe runs. Size sleeves so that piping and insulation (if any) will have free movement in sleeve, including allowance for thermal expansion, but not less than two pipe sizes larger than piping run. Install length of sleeve equal to thickness of construction penetrated and finish flush to surface, except floor sleeves. Extend floor sleeves ¼" above and ¾" above floor finish sloped to drain. Provide temporary support of sleeves, and provide temporary closure to prevent concrete and other materials from entering sleeves. 2. Mechanical sleeve seals must be rubber links around pipe with bolts and pressure plates located under each bolt head and nut. Push into sleeve and center. Tighten bolts until links have expanded to form a watertight seal. M. Wall Pipes 1. Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings, wall pipes shall be D.I. Install wall pipes of size indicated on the Drawings 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. B. Cleaning, Flushing, Inspecting 1. Clean exterior surfaces of installed piping systems of superfluous materials. Flush out piping systems, except odor control piping, with clean water before proceeding with required tests. Inspect each run of each system for completion of joints, supports and accessory items. Inspect pressure piping in accordance with procedures of ANSI B31. C. Pipe Testing 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA PROCESS PIPING WOODARD & CURRAN 40 23 00-16 1. Provide temporary equipment for testing, including pump, valves, and gauges. Test piping system before insulation is installed, wherever feasible, and remove control devices before testing. Test each natural section of each piping system independently but do not use piping system valves to isolate sections where test pressure exceeds valve pressure rating. Test each section with water and pressurize for indicated pressure and time. 2. Hydrostatic pressure and leakage tests will be required. The test pressures for the various pipe lines shall be at least two times the operating pressure of the system or 150 psi minimum, with the exception of drain and vent piping which shall be tested at 15 psi. Actual test pressures will be determined by the Engineer. Required test period is 2 hours. 3. All PVC and CPVC piping shall remain undisturbed for 24 hours to develop complete strength at all joints. 4. Provide Engineer with 24 hour notice prior to test. Tests not witnessed by Engineer will not be accepted. Engineer shall determine test pressure for each test. Observe each test section for leakage at end of test period. Test fails if leakage is observed or if pressure drop exceeds 5% of test pressure. 5. Repair piping systems sections, which fail required piping test, by disassembly and re-installation, using new materials to extent required to overcome leakage. Do not use chemicals, stop-leak compounds, mastics, or other temporary repair methods. 6. Drain test water from piping systems after testing and repair work has been completed. 3.03 STARTUP & COMMISSIONING A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. END OF SECTION 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS GENERAL REQUIREMENTS WOODARD & CURRAN 40 61 01-1 SECTION 40 61 01 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS GENERAL REQUIREMENTS PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes · Provide equipment, instruments, services, appurtenances and labor as specified and in the following associated Specifications and as shown on the Drawings in accordance with this Section. B. Related Requirements · Section 01 60 00 – Product Requirements · Specification 40 70 00 – Instrumentation for Process Systems · Specification 40 63 43 – Programmable Logic Controllers · Specification 40 67 00 – Control System Equipment Panels and Racks 1.02 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Measurement and payment requirements: per Division 01 General Requirements. 1.03 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination, Sequencing, and Scheduling: per Division 01 General Requirements. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. B. Prior to submittal to the Engineer, Shop Drawings and submittal information will be thoroughly checked by the Contractor to ensure compliance with Contract Documents. The Contractor is responsible for verifying that equipment, instruments, and materials submitted fit within available space and maintain specified physical clearances, and that equipment is compatible with the operation of the overall system. Submittal to the Engineer of Shop Drawings and submittal information implies that the Contractor has reviewed the information and requirements have been satisfied. C. Submittals and Shop Drawings · Project name, location, and project number 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS GENERAL REQUIREMENTS WOODARD & CURRAN 40 61 01-2 · Contractor name and address · Table of contents or index, including equipment, instruments or materials being submitted, utilizing identification consistent with Contract Documents (equipment designation, instrument tag number, control panel name, etc.), as well as proposed, manufacturer, style, model, and part number. Identification requirements should also be in accordance with Section 01 60 00 Product Requirements. · For Programmable Logic Controllers (PLC) and Operator Interface Terminals (OIT) submittals, refer to Section 40 63 43, Programmable Logic Controllers, for specific requirements. · For control panel Shop Drawing submittals, refer to Section 40 67 00, Control System Equipment Panels and Racks, for specific requirements. · For instrumentation submittals, refer to Section 40 70 00, Instrumentation for Process Systems, for specific requirements. D. The submittal information for each section will be contained in a single submission. Incomplete or partial submissions are not accepted. E. Closeout and Maintenance Material Submittals: per Division 01 General Requirements. · Operations and Maintenance (O&M) Materials a. Include descriptions of equipment, the nature and intended modes of operation, testing procedures of units in the system, and safety measures to be taken in operation. Necessary procedures and methods for effective operation of the system shall be included. b. Include record Drawings and instructions necessary for the planned maintenance of equipment in the system. The O&M Manuals will incorporate maintenance procedures and schedules, and they will coordinate and be cross-referenced to detailed operation procedures provided by the manufacturers. c. Organize in three-ring binders, provided with labeled dividers, including a table of contents clearly describing the information included and order. d. Include a list of local service departments of authorized distributors for equipment, instruments, services, and appurtenances. These service departments should stock the manufacturer’s standard parts and equipment; provide local service options, etc. e. For Programmable Logic Controllers (PLC) and Operator Interface Terminals (OIT) O&Ms, refer to Section 40 63 43, Programmable Logic Controllers, for specific requirements. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS GENERAL REQUIREMENTS WOODARD & CURRAN 40 61 01-3 f. For SCADA control panel O&Ms, refer to Section 40 67 00, Control System Equipment Panels and Racks, for specific requirements. g. For instrumentation O&Ms, refer to Section 40 70 00, Instrumentation for Process Systems, for specific requirements. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. B. Qualifications: · The Contractor must have completed Work of similar or greater complexity on at least 3 previous projects within the last 5 years. Successful completion is defined as a finished Project completed on time, without any outstanding claims or litigation involving the Contractor. Provide, for a period of not less than 12 months from Final Acceptance of the Project, all labor, tools, materials, and equipment necessary to address issues or defects in any system that result from faulty workmanship, installation, equipment, instruments or materials, and any resulting damage from said defects or faults, at the convenience of the Owner. · The Contractor will furnish SCADA control panels fabricated per the Drawings (as shown on the I sheets), by an Underwriters Laboratories (UL) 508A approved panel shop regularly engaged in furnishing, installing and wiring similar equipment for use in water and wastewater treatment facilities, and that has been in satisfactory operation for at least 5 years. C. Instruments, SCADA control panels, and materials provided must comply with the Specifications, be supplied from manufacturers regularly engaged in the production of such products, be standard products wherever possible, and be the manufacturer’s latest design. D. Instruments, SCADA control panels, and materials supplied are subject to approval by the Engineer and demonstrate equal appearance, quality, and performance to that specified. The Contractor is responsible for verifying the availability of equipment, instruments and materials proposed for use prior to submission to Engineer for approval. If production of equipment, instrument, or material is discontinued, the Contractor will submit an alternate of comparable quality to the Engineer for approval prior to execution of Work, and at no additional cost to Owner. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. B. Coordinate equipment, instrument, and material delivery to coincide with the Project schedule. If the delivery schedule of any equipment, instrument, or material affects the overall Project schedule, notify the Engineer in writing immediately. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS GENERAL REQUIREMENTS WOODARD & CURRAN 40 61 01-4 Include in the written notification, documentation from the equipment Supplier indicating the revised delivery schedule and reason for the change. C. When applicable, coordinate delivery of equipment, instruments, or materials to be delivered directly to another trade or vendor for installation in a system or control panel provided under another Specification section. D. Exercise care while loading, unloading and transporting equipment, instruments and materials to avoid damage. Check all equipment, instruments, and materials for damage or defects within 7 days of delivery to the Project Site. E. Equipment, instruments, and materials required to be stored on Site prior to installation will be stored in such a manner to avoid damage or exposure to water, dust, or construction debris. F. Repair or replace, at no additional cost to the Owner, equipment, instruments and materials that are defective or damaged during installation, to the satisfaction of the Engineer. 1.07 SITE CONDITIONS A. Existing Conditions: per Division 01 General Requirements. PART 2 – PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Instruments, SCADA control panels, equipment, and other materials provided, that come with a manufacturer’s warranty, will have the warranty transferred to the Owner upon final acceptance. B. After installation, provided instruments and SCADA control panels will be powered up, tested, and witnessed by the Engineer for proper termination and operation. C. After installation, the Contractor will calibrate instruments that require calibration in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommended procedure. 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. 3.03 STARTUP & COMMISSIONING A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS GENERAL REQUIREMENTS WOODARD & CURRAN 40 61 01-5 3.04 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. END OF SECTION This page intentionally left blank. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLERS WOODARD & CURRAN 40 63 43-1 SECTION 40 63 43 PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLERS PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes 1. Provide labor, materials, equipment, and appurtenances to furnish and install the programmable logic controllers and operator interface terminals as specified and on the Drawings in accordance with this Section. a. Programmable Logic Controllers (PLC) b. Operator Interface Terminals (OIT) 2. Definitions a. PLC: Programmable Logic Controller b. RIO: Remote Input/Output Rack c. OIT: Operator Interface Terminal d. HMI: Human Machine Interface e. RTU: Remote Terminal Unit f. I/O: Input Output g. SCADA: Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition 3. Work not included a. PLC programming, HMI/OIT screen development, and integration of new SCADA system shall be provided by others. b. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary General Conditions and other Specification Sections, which apply to the Work of this Section. 1.02 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Measurement and payment requirements: per Division 01 General Requirements. 1.03 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination, Sequencing, and Scheduling: per Division 01 General Requirements. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLERS WOODARD & CURRAN 40 63 43-2 B. Product Data 1. Provide the following spare parts for the Project a. One of each type of PLC power supply used b. One of each type of PLC processor used c. One of each type of I/O module used d. One of each type of communication module used e. One of each type of memory module used C. Closeout and Maintenance Material Submittals: per Division 01 General Requirements. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. B. PLCs and OITs provided under this Contract shall comply with the Specifications, shall be supplied from manufacturers regularly engaged in the production of such products, shall be standard products wherever possible, and shall be of the manufacturer’s latest design. C. This Specification has been developed to establish minimum requirements for the solid-state programmable controllers and OITs designed to provide high reliability in industrial applications. All PLCs, OITs, and associated software provided under this Contract shall meet the requirements of this Specification unless approved by the Engineer. If production of equipment is discontinued, the Contractor shall submit an alternate of comparable quality to the Engineer for approval prior to execution of Work, and at no additional cost to Owner. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. 1. Coordinate equipment, instrument, and material delivery to coincide with the Project schedule. If the delivery schedule of any equipment, instrument, or material shall affect the overall Project schedule, notify the Engineer in writing immediately. Include in the written notification, documentation from the equipment Supplier indicating the revised delivery schedule and reason for the change. 2. When applicable, coordinate delivery equipment, instruments, or materials to be delivered directly to another trade or vendor for installation in a system or control panel provided under another Specification section. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLERS WOODARD & CURRAN 40 63 43-3 3. Repair or replace, at no additional cost to the Owner, all equipment, instruments and materials that are defective or damaged during installation, to the satisfaction of the Engineer. B. Packing, Shipping, Handling, and Unloading 1. Exercise care while loading, unloading and transporting equipment, instruments and materials to avoid damage. Check all equipment, instruments, and materials for damage or defects within 7 days of delivery to the Project Site. C. Storage and Protection 1. Equipment, instruments, and materials required to be stored on Site prior to installation shall be stored in such a manner to avoid damage or exposure to water, dust, or construction debris. 1.07 SITE CONDITIONS A. Existing Conditions: per Division 01 General Requirements. 1.08 MAINTENANCE A. Extra Materials: Furnish as specified below. Make interchangeable with and same material and workmanship as corresponding original parts. 1. Provide specific operations and maintenance data in accordance with Section 40 61 01, Instrumentation and Controls General Requirements. 2. Provide the following additional data and information a. Configuration and programming manuals for each type of PLC provided. b. Configuration and programming manuals for each type of OIT provided PART 2 – PRODUCTS A. Not Used. 2.02 OWNER-FURNISHED PRODUCTS A. PLC hardware and programming software shall be by the same manufacturer. B. All PLCs and OITs shall be housed in a new control panel as specified per Section 40 67 00, Process Control Panels and Hardware. Power provided to the control panel shall be 120VAC, 60 Hz, single phase. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLERS WOODARD & CURRAN 40 63 43-4 C. Minimum PLC input/output (I/O) requirements are indicated on the Drawings. Provide at minimum an additional 20 percent active spare I/O wired to terminal blocks. D. PLC rack or mounting space provided shall accommodate at minimum 20 percent spare slots for future expansion. E. Programmable Logic Controllers 1. The PLCs shall be microprocessor based devices and shall be furnished with power supplies, processors, process input and output modules, communication cards as required, rack mounted in the control panel. a. Power supplies shall be sized to accommodate all analog signals including all spares. The power supply shall accommodate the card's entire I/O capacity (i.e. if 5 analog outputs is required, the power supply shall be sized to handle the full 8 analog outputs of an 8 point card). 2. The PLC shall be capable of stand-alone operation in the event of a SCADA network or SCADA computer failure. 3. The programmable controller system shall use a modular, field expandable design. 4. Modules are defined as devices that plug into a chassis or connect to an adjacent module and are keyed to allow installation in only one direction. The design must prohibit upside down insertion or connection of the modules. Modules provided shall be compatible with processor type specified. 5. All hardware of the programmable controller shall operate at an ambient temperature of 0 – 60 degrees C (32 – 140 degrees F), with an ambient temperature rating for storage of (minus 40) – 85 degrees C ((minus 40) – 185 degrees F). 6. The programmable controller hardware shall function continuously in the relative humidity range of 5 – 95 percent, non-condensing. 7. The programmable controller system shall be designed and tested to operate in the high electrical noise environment of an industrial plant. 8. The Programmable controller system shall be Underwriters Laboratories (UL) listed. 9. Module-expandable PLCs and associated modules shall meet the following acceptable level of quality: 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLERS WOODARD & CURRAN 40 63 43-5 a. Processor: Allen Bradley CompactLogix 5370 L3 series, 1769- L33ER. b. Discrete input modules: Allen Bradley 1769-IQ16. c. Discrete output modules: Allen Bradley 1769-OW16. d. Analog input modules: Allen Bradley 1769-IF8. e. Analog output modules: Allen Bradley 1769-OF8C. f. Memory module: Allen Bradley 1784-SD1. 10. Chassis-style (rack-mounted) PLCs and associated modules shall meet the following acceptable level of quality: a. Processor: Allen Bradley ControlLogix, with minimum 2MB controller memory (part number 1756-L61). b. Ethernet communication module: Allen Bradley 1756-EN2T. c. Discrete input modules: Allen Bradley 1756-IA32. d. Discrete output modules: Allen Bradley 1756-OW16I. e. Analog input modules: Allen Bradley 1756-IF16. f. Analog output modules: Allen Bradley 1756-OF8. 11. Module-expandable ‘micro’ PLCs and associated modules shall meet the following acceptable level of quality: a. Base module: Allen Bradley MicroLogix 1100 or MicroLogix 1400. b. Discrete input modules: Allen Bradley 1762-IA8 or 1762-IQ16. c. Discrete output modules: Allen Bradley 1762-OW16. d. Analog input modules: Allen Bradley 1762-IF4 or 1762SC-IF8U. e. Analog output modules: Allen Bradley 1762-OF4. f. Memory module: Allen Bradley 1763-MM1 or 1766-MM1. 12. ‘Micro’ PLCs utilized for emergency float backup systems shall meet the following acceptable level of quality: a. Base module: Allen Bradley Micro810. b. Memory module: Allen Bradley 2080-MEMBAK-RTC. 2.03 EQUIPMENT A. Operator Interface Terminals 1. The operator interface terminal shall be color graphic display that connects directly to the PLC's communication port or a communication module and allow viewing and changing of the PLC's parameters. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLERS WOODARD & CURRAN 40 63 43-6 2. Shall be environmentally rated NEMA 4/4X 3. The OIT shall be powered by 24VDC. 4. The OIT shall be provided with an integrated real time clock with battery backup. 5. The OIT shall have a minimum resolution of 640 x 480 VGA graphics with 16 bit color graphics. 6. The OIT shall be provided with touch screen operation. 7. Minimum display size shall be 10.4 inch with a display area of 8.3 inch by 6.2 inch (width by height). 8. The OIT shall be provided with 10MB internal Project memory. Unit shall also include Compact Flash port. Contractor shall provide 1 GB Compact Flash Card for each operator terminal to store data. 9. The OIT shall provide real-time trending of process variables. 10. The OIT shall provide active and historical alarm screens with the ability to acknowledge and clear. 11. The OIT shall have the ability to go to a selectable screen based on specific alarm bits. 12. Provide all communications modules and cables for OIT - PLC communications as necessary. PLC interface shall be Ethernet/IP. RS-232 shall also be available for use. 13. Provide and coordinate all communications protocol drivers to establish reliable communications between PLC and OIT. 14. Provide OIT programming & configuration cables. 15. The OIT shall be provided with a licensed copy of programming software. 16. OITs shall be Allen-Bradley PanelView Plus 6-1000 10.4-inch Color active-matrix TFT Touch/Keypad Panel, part number 2711P-B10C4D8, or approved equivalent. 2.04 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. PART 3 – EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA CONTROL SYSTEM EQUIPMENT PANELS AND RACKS WOODARD & CURRAN 40 67 00-1 SECTION 40 67 00 CONTROL SYSTEM EQUIPMENT PANELS AND RACKS PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes B. Provide all wiring, labor, tools, materials, and equipment necessary to furnish, install, and test control panels and enclosures in accordance with this Section and applicable reference standards listed in Article 1.03. C. The Contractor shall furnish, deliver, unload, and power up control panels and enclosures as specified on the Drawings. D. Related Requirements 1. Refer to Division 40 for equipment furnished by other sections but require installation and startup to reflect complete integration of the systems, instrumentation, interlocking, interfacing, and installation under this section. 2. Refer to Division 26, Electrical for wiring standards and practices. 1.02 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Measurement and payment requirements: per Division 01 General Requirements. 1.03 REFERENCES A. Reference Standards 1. National Fire Protection Association 79, Annex "D" Standards, (NFPA) 2. National Electrical Code, (NEC) 3. National Electrical Manufacturer's Association Standards, (NEMA) 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA CONTROL SYSTEM EQUIPMENT PANELS AND RACKS WOODARD & CURRAN 40 67 00-2 5. American Society for Testing and Materials, (ASTM) 6. Operational Safety and Health Administration Regulations, (OSHA) 7. Underwriters' Laboratory, Inc., (UL) 8. American National Standards Institute, Inc. (ANSI) 9. Factory Mutual (FM) 10. The Instrumentation, Systems and Automation Society (ISA) 11. State and Local code requirements. 12. Where any conflict arises between codes or standards, the more stringent requirement shall apply. 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination, Sequencing, and Scheduling: per Division 01 General Requirements. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. B. Submit detailed information for the process control panels and enclosures in accordance with Section 40 90 00, Instrumentation and Controls General Requirements. C. In addition to the requirements of Section 40 90 00, the submittals shall include 1. Prior to submittal to Engineer, Shop Drawings and submittal information shall be thoroughly checked by Contractor to insure compliance with Contract Documents. Contractor shall be responsible for verifying that all equipment, instruments and materials submitted upon shall fit within available space and maintain specified physical clearances, and that all equipment is compatible with the operation of the overall system. Submittal to the Engineer of Shop Drawings and submittal information implies that the Contractor has reviewed the information and all requirements have been satisfied. 2. Bill of Materials for each control panel, including panel tag name or number, and component description, quantity, manufacturer name and model number for each component used in the fabrication of the control panel. The Bill of Materials shall be keyed to easily correlate the component shown in the Bill of Materials with the component shown on the control panel Equipment Layout Drawings. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA CONTROL SYSTEM EQUIPMENT PANELS AND RACKS WOODARD & CURRAN 40 67 00-3 3. Manufacturer’s descriptive literature for each component called out on the Bill of Materials, clearly designate the part number with highlights or arrows. 4. Equipment Layout Drawings for each control panel, indicating any deviations from the Contract Documents. 5. Panel communication diagrams for each control panel, indicating any deviations from the Contract Documents. 6. Power wiring diagrams for each control panel, indicating any deviations from the Contract Documents. 7. Programmable Logic Controllers (PLC) input/output (I/O) wiring diagrams, on a module-by-module basis, indicating any deviations from the Contract Documents. D. If Shop Drawing level control panel Drawings were included in the Drawings, Contractor shall have the option to submit a letter, included with copy of Drawings to be used for fabrication, indicating that control panel fabricator, PanelShop, shall fabricate control panels as specified. E. Substitutions of equipment or changes to panel design that deviate from the Drawings shall be submitted to Engineer for review prior to fabrication of control panels. F. Procurement of materials and manufacture of the control panels shall not begin until related submittals have been reviewed by the Engineer. G. As-Built Drawings 1. After fabrication of the control panels and factory acceptance testing is complete, PanelShop shall provide Drawings of the control panels, representing the as-built conditions. Submit panel Drawings in AutoCAD DWG and Adobe PDF file formats, on DVD-R media. 2. As-Built Drawings shall be submitted with the panel at delivery. H. Operation and Maintenance (O&M) Information 1. Refer to Section 40 90 00, Instrumentation and Controls General Requirements for O&M material requirements. In addition to the requirements in Section 40 90 00, the control panel section of the O&M manuals shall include a. Record Drawings of the control panels, updated to reflect the panels after checkout and startup. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA CONTROL SYSTEM EQUIPMENT PANELS AND RACKS WOODARD & CURRAN 40 67 00-4 b. Installation and operation manuals for all major control panel components, including the network switches, PLCs, I/O modules, communication equipment, etc. I. Closeout and Maintenance Material Submittals: per Division 01 General Requirements. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. B. Control panel fabricator, Panel Shop, shall hold a valid Underwriters' Laboratory, Inc. (UL) UL-508A certification for their panel fabrication facility, and shall have executed a minimum of 3 Projects of similar scope in the municipal water and wastewater markets in the past 5 years. C. Surge protection shall be provided by recognized manufacturer with a minimum of 5 years’ experience in the production of this equipment. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. B. Coordinate equipment, instrument, and material delivery to coincide with the Project schedule. If the delivery schedule of any equipment, instrument, or material shall affect the overall Project schedule, notify the Engineer in writing immediately. Include in the written notification, documentation from the equipment Supplier indicating the revised delivery schedule and reason for the change. C. When applicable, coordinate delivery equipment, instruments, or materials to be delivered directly to another trade or vendor for installation in a system or control panel provided under another Specification section. D. Exercise care while loading, unloading and transporting equipment, instruments and materials to avoid damage. Check all equipment, instruments, and materials for damage or defects within 7 days of delivery to the Project Site. E. Equipment, instruments, and materials required to be stored on Site prior to installation shall be stored in such a manner to avoid damage or exposure to water, dust, or construction debris. F. Repair or replace, at no additional cost to the Owner, all equipment, instruments and materials that are defective or damaged during installation, to the satisfaction of the Engineer. 1.08 SITE CONDITIONS A. Existing Conditions: per Division 01 General Requirements. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA CONTROL SYSTEM EQUIPMENT PANELS AND RACKS WOODARD & CURRAN 40 67 00-5 PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 CONTROL PANEL COMPONENTS A. The following table contains control panel components and recommended manufacturers for each component. Control Panel Components Manufacturer (or approved equivalent) Comments Enclosures Hoffman Hammond Saginaw Shall be suitable for use in the environments that they will be located (NEMA, NFPA, etc.) Programmable Logic Controllers (PLCs) Refer to section 40 63 43, Programmable Logic Controllers Operator Interface Terminals (OITs) Refer to section 40 63 43, Programmable Logic Controllers Wireway Panduit Hoffman DIN Rail Allen Bradley Phoenix Contact Radio Equipment Match existing Site standards as necessary. Terminal Blocks Allen Bradley Phoenix Contact Entrelec Utilize 2-tier terminal blocks wherever possible to conserve panel space. Terminal Block Fuse Holders Allen Bradley Phoenix Contact Entrelec Specify fuse holders with blown fuse indicators. Circuit Breakers Square D Allen Bradley 120VAC Surge Suppressors Phoenix Contact Square D Analog Surge Suppressors Phoenix Contact Citel Media Converters N-Tron B&B Electronics L-Com Furnish with DIN rail mount converters as required on the network architecture 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA CONTROL SYSTEM EQUIPMENT PANELS AND RACKS WOODARD & CURRAN 40 67 00-6 Control Panel Components Manufacturer (or approved equivalent) Comments Fuses Bussman Ferraz Shawmut All glass fuses in control panels shall be fast acting style. Motor circuit protection fuses shall be time delay style. Control Relays Allen Bradley Square D Omron Include all required bases, hardware, etc. Power Supplies Sola Phoenix Contact Allen Bradley Furnish with power supplies sized as required for equipment contained within the enclosures and to supply field equipment connected to the enclosure. Intrinsic Safety Barriers Pepperl & Fuchs MTL Phoenix Contact Discrete barriers shall be 2-channel barriers. Analog barriers shall be 2-wire barriers. Ethernet Switches (Unmanaged) Moxa B&B Electronics Switches shall be furnished with direct-wired low voltage power source within the enclosure. Ethernet Switches (Managed) N-Tron B&B Electronics Allen Bradley All switches comprising the ring topology throughout the facility shall be furnished from the same manufacturer. Fiber Patch Panels L-Com B&B Electronics Furnish with panel mount patch panels for incoming fiber optic cables as required Emergency Power System Sola Phoenix Contact Meanwell Include uninterruptible power supply (UPS) in each control panel sized to furnish with at least 10 minutes of emergency power. Panel Heaters Hammond Hoffman Furnish with panel heaters for outside control panels where temperature is a concern for electronic components. Receptacles Pass & Seymour Hubbel Leviton Furnish with receptacle for UPS and convenience receptacle in each PLC control panel. Pilot/Status Lights (Push to test) Allen Bradley General Electric Square D Color code as follows: Red-Fault, Green-Run HOR, On/Off, L/R switches and push buttons Allen Bradley General Electric Square D Refer to Section 26 27 26, Wiring Devices and Miscellaneous Electrical Equipment. Furnish switches and push buttons with matching nameplate 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA CONTROL SYSTEM EQUIPMENT PANELS AND RACKS WOODARD & CURRAN 40 67 00-7 2.02 SPARE PARTS A. Provide the following spare parts for the Project 1. One of each type of surge arrestor 2. 10 percent spare of each type of fuse used (minimum of 1 spare of each type of fuse used) 3. One of each type of 24VDC communication power supply 4. One of each type of intrinsic safety barrier 5. One of each type of radio 2.03 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 CONTROL PANEL FABRICATION A. General 1. The control panels shall include programmable logic controller, required I/O modules with chassis (if applicable) and power supply, cables, and all appurtenances as specified in this and all applicable sections. The enclosures shall include switches, lights, annunciators and all appurtenances as specified in this and all applicable sections. The panels and miscellaneous materials shall be furnished by one Supplier. 2. All electronic equipment shall utilize printed circuitry and epoxy or equal coating to prevent contamination by dust, moisture, and fungus. Solid-state components shall be conservatively rated for their purpose, to provide reliable performance over ambient atmosphere fluctuations between 0 – 140 degrees F and 0 – 95 percent relative humidity, non-condensing. The field mounted equipment and system components shall be designed for installation in dusty, humid, and slightly corrosive service conditions. 3. Equipment installed in a hazardous area shall meet Class, Group, and Division to comply with the NFPA 70 and CCR, Title 8, Electrical and General Safety Orders. 4. All equipment, cabinets, and devices furnished shall be heavy duty type, designed for continuous industrial service. The PLC system shall contain products of a single manufacturer, and shall consist of equipment models which are currently in production. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA CONTROL SYSTEM EQUIPMENT PANELS AND RACKS WOODARD & CURRAN 40 67 00-8 5. The following paragraphs describe general fabrication requirements of control panels, enclosures, consoles, and cabinets. All control panel assemblies shall be UL listed, to comply with UL 508A standards. 6. Control panel enclosures shall be sized to provide at least 20 percent spare space, for future expansion, addition of panel components, etc. This shall minimize impact of the addition of unintended equipment during the checkout and startup phases. 7. PLC hardware provided shall accommodate a minimum 20 percent spare of each I/O type used in the panel, wired to terminals during the fabrication process. This shall minimize impact of unintended I/O requirements added during the checkout and startup phases of the Project. B. Wiring 1. All interconnecting wiring shall be stranded and shall have 600 volt insulation and be rated for not less than 90 degrees Celsius. 2. Power distribution wiring on the line side of fuses shall conform to Division 26 requirements. 3. Power and low voltage DC wiring systems shall be routed in separate wireways. Crossing of power distribution wiring and control wiring shall be at right angles. Different system wires routed parallel to each other shall be separated by at least 6 inches. Different wiring systems shall terminate on separate terminal blocks. Wiring troughs shall not be filled to more than 60 percent visible fill. 4. All wiring shall terminate onto single-or-double tier terminal blocks, where each terminal is uniquely and sequentially numbered. Direct interlock wiring between equipment is not allowed. The control panel shall be fabricated with minimum 20 percent spare terminals. Terminal blocks shall be arranged in vertical rows and separated into groups; power, AC control, DC signal. Terminal blocks shall be the compression screw type. Spring- clamp style terminals will not be accepted. a. Discrete inputs and outputs (DI and DO) shall have 2 terminals per point with adjacent terminal assignments. All active and spare points shall be wired to terminal blocks. b. Analog inputs/outputs (AI and AO) shall have a minimum of three 3 terminals per shielded pair. Three terminals shall be provided for direct connection of powered, 4-wire loops. Four terminals shall be provided for direct connection of loop powered, 2-wire loops. Five terminals shall be provided for connection of analog loops incorporating a local indicator or recorder. One terminal is for shielded ground connections for cable pairs. Ground the shielded 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA CONTROL SYSTEM EQUIPMENT PANELS AND RACKS WOODARD & CURRAN 40 67 00-9 signal cable at the PLC cabinet. All active and spare points shall be wired to terminal blocks. c. Wire and tube markers shall conform to Division 26 requirements. d. Only one side of a terminal block row shall be used for internal wiring. The field wiring side of the terminal shall not be within 6-inches of the side panel or adjacent terminal, or within 8-inches of the bottom of the panel. e. Whenever possible, the terminals for field wiring shall be located to reduce the amount of routing through wireway necessary to carry the field wiring to the termination point. 5. All wiring, internal to the panel and field wiring, shall be provided with a service loop to allow for adjustment of the termination point in the future. The service loop shall be no more than 4-5 inches, and shall be stored in the associated wireway. 6. All wiring to hand switches, etc., which are live circuits independent of the panel's normal circuit breaker protection, shall be clearly identified as such. 7. All wiring shall be clearly tagged and color-coded in accordance with the National Electric Code (NEC). All tag numbers and color-coding shall correspond to the panel wiring diagrams prepared by the Engineer. All power wiring, control wiring, grounding, and DC wiring shall utilize different color insulation for each wiring system used. The color coding scheme shall be a. Incoming 120 VAC Hot – Black b. 120 VAC Hot Wiring (downstream of panel circuit breaker) – Red c. 120 VAC Neutral – White d. Ground – Green e. DC Wiring – Blue f. Intrinsically Safe Wiring - Light Blue g. Foreign Voltage – Yellow C. Control Panel Loss of Power 1. Each control panel containing a PLC shall have an input configured to alarm the operators upon loss of main control panel power. This alarm shall be displayed on the SCADA nodes to alert the operators that attention is required. D. Control Panel Overcurrent Protection 1. All overcurrent protection devices shall be properly sized to protect the devices and the loads to which they are associated. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA CONTROL SYSTEM EQUIPMENT PANELS AND RACKS WOODARD & CURRAN 40 67 00-10 2. Circuit Breakers a. Circuit breakers in the panel shall be sized to protect the associated equipment, and to provide the necessary power to operate. 3. Fuses a. Glass fuses not associated with motor circuit protection shall be specified as fast-acting style. Fuses associated with motor circuit protection shall be specified as time delay style. E. Lightning/Surge Suppression 1. Lightning/surge suppression shall be provided to protect the control panel and associated equipment from surges on the incoming power circuits, or those induced by lightning strikes and propagated along the signal or power lines connected to the control panels. Surge protection shall be provided by a qualified manufacturer complying with requirements in Article 1.04. Surge protection shall be sized properly for its intended purpose. 2. 120VAC surge suppression a. The incoming 120VAC power source for the control panel shall be provided with surge suppression in the control panel. Surge suppressors shall be provided with an auxiliary contact, connected to the PLC to indicate surge suppressor failure. Install surge suppression in strict accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations. 3. Analog signal surge suppression a. Analog signals connected to equipment or instrumentation that is located outside the building where the control panel is installed shall be supplied with German Institute for Standardization (DIN) rail mounted surge suppression in the control panel. Provide surge protection at both ends of the signal cable and mount surge protection as close to the equipment, instrument, or termination point as possible. Provide with a minimum of 10kA surge current suppression. 4. Telephone Line and Ethernet surge suppression a. Copper-based telephone lines and Ethernet cabling connected to the control panel that leaves the building where the control panel is installed shall be provided with surge suppression in the control panel. Provide surge protection at both ends of the telephone or Ethernet cabling and mount surge protection as close to the termination point as possible. F. Selector Switches, Pushbuttons and Pilot Lights 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA CONTROL SYSTEM EQUIPMENT PANELS AND RACKS WOODARD & CURRAN 40 67 00-11 1. All selector switches, pushbuttons, and pilot lights required for the enclosures shall be provided in accordance with Section 26 27 26, Wiring Devices and Miscellaneous Electrical Equipment. G. Uninterruptible Power Supplies 1. Each control panel containing a PLC shall be provided with an uninterruptible power supply (UPS) sized to provide a minimum of 10 minutes of power in the event of main control power loss. The UPS shall be provided with relay contact outputs, connected to the PLC, to indicate UPS fault and UPS low battery conditions. H. Ethernet Switches 1. Ethernet switches shall be configured to accept the number of connections shown on the Drawings. 2. Ethernet switches shall be provided with a minimum of 20 percent spare RJ-45 ports available for future expansion. I. Seal Fail and Motor Temperature Relays 1. Pumps, mixers, etc. equipped with proprietary seal fail and motor temperature relays, shall require these relays to be mounted in the SCADA control panel. The seal fail and motor over temperature alarm contacts shall be connected to the PLC as discrete inputs. J. Intrinsic Safety Barrier Panels 1. Intrinsic safety barriers required for interfacing with equipment and instruments located in a classified area shall be mounted in a panel separate from the control panels. 2. Panels housing intrinsic safety barriers shall be laid out to facilitate separation of hazardous and non-hazardous wiring. Wireway containing hazardous area wiring shall be clearly indicated as such. K. Equipment Mounting/Arrangement 1. All components shall be mounted in a manner that permits servicing, adjustment, testing and removal without disconnecting, moving or removing any other component. Components mounted on the inside of panels shall be mounted on removable plates and not directly to the enclosure. Mounting shall be rigid and stable unless shock mounting is required by the manufacturer to protect equipment from vibration. Components shall be identified with suitable plastic or metal engraved tags attached with drive pins adjacent to each component, identifying the component in accordance with the Drawings and Specifications. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA CONTROL SYSTEM EQUIPMENT PANELS AND RACKS WOODARD & CURRAN 40 67 00-12 2. All exterior panel mounted equipment shall be installed with suitable gaskets, faceplates, etc., required to maintain the NEMA rating of the panel. 3. A minimum of 1-1/2 inches shall be provided between panel wireway and terminal blocks, to insure that wiring can be accessed easily. 4. Maintain manufacturer recommended spacing around panel-mounted equipment, for heating and ventilation concerns. 5. ISA Recommended Practice RP60.3 shall be used as a guide in layout and arrangement of panels and panel mounted components. L. Nameplates 1. All panels and panel devices shall be supplied with suitable nameplates that identify the panel and individual devices as required. Each device nameplate shall include up to 3 lines, with the first line containing the device tag number as shown on the Drawings, the second line containing a functional description, and the third line containing a functional control description. 2. Unless escutcheon plates are specified or unless otherwise noted on the Drawings, nameplates shall be 3/32-inch thick, black and white, Lamacoid with engraved inscriptions. The letters shall be black against a white background. Edges of the nameplates shall be beveled and smooth. Nameplates with chipped or rough edges will not be acceptable. Nameplates shall be affixed to the panels using #4-40 threaded stainless steel button head hex screws. 3.02 CONTROL PANEL QUALITY ASSURANCE A. PanelShop shall, upon fabrication of the control panels apply power to each panel, to ensure that panels are wired correctly, and all devices contained within the panels power up properly. PanelShop shall provide written confirmation to the Engineer that a power up test was completed. B. PanelShop shall complete a point-to-point wiring checkout for all wiring contained in the control panels, and correct any errors or omissions found during that process. PanelShop shall provide written confirmation to the Engineer that checkout was completed. C. PanelShop shall provide advance notice to the Engineer that control panel fabrication is complete, and shall make the control panels available in their facility for completion of the Factory Acceptance Test by the Engineer or System Integrator. PanelShop shall not ship control panels prior to execution of the Factory Acceptance Test, unless indicated in writing by the Engineer. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA CONTROL SYSTEM EQUIPMENT PANELS AND RACKS WOODARD & CURRAN 40 67 00-13 3.03 INSTALLATION AND MOUNTING A. Contractor shall provide all labor, tools, material, and equipment required to mount the SCADA Panel only in the locations shown on the Drawings, in accordance to manufacturer-recommended mounting practices. The location of control panel shown on the Drawings is approximate only. Exact location shall be as approved by the Owner or Engineer during construction. Obtain in the field all information relevant to the placing of process control Work and in case of any interference with other Work, proceed as requested by the Engineer. 1. SCADA Panel will be installed by others but shall powered up upon delivery to the Owner. B. All control panels shall be powered up upon installation, and all field wiring shall be tested for proper termination. All analog signals shall be simulated for a full-scale 4-20ma test. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. 3.05 STARTUP & COMMISSIONING A. Contractor shall provide all labor, tools, materials and equipment necessary to assist in the startup and testing of the SCADA system with the Integrator after installation of control panels and instruments, and termination of field wiring to panels is complete. Start up and testing shall be witnessed by the Owner or Owner’s representative. 3.06 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. END OF SECTION This page intentionally left blank 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA INSTRUMENTATION FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS WOODARD & CURRAN 40 70 00-1 SECTION 40 70 00 INSTRUMENTATION FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes 1. Provide instrumentation, equipment mounting, vendor-supplied cables between elements and transmitters, and other related appurtenances as specified on the Drawings in accordance with this Section. 2. Provide labor, tools, materials, and equipment necessary to install and start up instruments as described on the Drawings. 1.02 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Measurement and payment requirements: per Division 01 General Requirements. 1.03 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination, Sequencing, and Scheduling: per Division 01 General Requirements. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. B. Submit detailed information for each instrument or control device in accordance with Section 40 61 01, Instrumentation and Controls General Requirements. C. In addition to the requirements of Section 40 61 01, the submittals will include 1. Instrument data sheet for each instrument 2. Product name and tag number as shown on the Drawings 3. Manufacturers complete model number 4. Location of device 5. Input - output characteristics 6. Range, size, and graduations 7. Physical size with dimensions, enclosure National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) classification, and mounting details 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA INSTRUMENTATION FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS WOODARD & CURRAN 40 70 00-2 8. Materials of construction of components 9. Calibration certificates provided by manufacturer 10. Installation and operation manuals D. Define exceptions or deviations to the Specifications or Drawings. Contractor will submit sufficient details to the Engineer for evaluation. E. Closeout and Maintenance Material Submittals: per Division 01 General Requirements. 1. Operations and Maintenance (O&M) Materials a. Operations and maintenance (O&M) information will be provided in accordance with Section 40 61 01, Instrumentation and Controls General Requirements. b. In addition to the requirements in Section 40 61 01, the instrumentation section of the O&M manuals will consist of the following 1) Instrument list or ISA data sheets, including tag numbers 2) All submittal information listed in paragraph 1.05 above 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. B. Instruments and appurtenances must comply with the Specifications, be supplied from manufacturers regularly engaged in the production of such products, be standard products wherever possible, and be the manufacturer’s latest design. C. Instruments and appurtenances are subject to approval by the Engineer, and will demonstrate equal appearance, quality, and performance to that specified. The Contractor is responsible for verifying the availability of equipment, instruments and materials proposed for use prior to submission to Engineer for approval. If production of equipment, instrument, or material is discontinued, the Contractor must submit an alternate of comparable quality to the Engineer for approval prior to execution of Work, and at no additional cost to Owner. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. B. Deliver, store, and handle products in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and in accordance with Section 40 61 01, Instrumentation and Control General Requirements. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA INSTRUMENTATION FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS WOODARD & CURRAN 40 70 00-3 1.07 SITE CONDITIONS A. Existing Conditions: per Division 01 General Requirements. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 INSTRUMENTATION – GENERAL A. Provide brackets and hangers for all equipment. B. Instrumentation supplied must be the manufacturer's latest design and produce or be activated by signals that are established standards for the water and wastewater industries. C. Instrumentation requiring power supplied from a source other than the control panel to which it is connected must operate on 120VAC, single phase, 60 HZ current, unless specifically indicated otherwise. This power will be supplied from the closest local electrical distribution panel with a breaker for each circuit. D. Electronic instrumentation must be solid-state. Analog control signals shall be linear and be industry standard currents of 4 to 20 milliampere direct current (mA DC), however, signals between instruments within the same panel or cabinet may be 1-5 volts direct current (VDC), or the like. No zero based signals are allowed. E. Outputs of equipment that are not of the standard signals as outlined, will have the output immediately raised or converted to compatible standards signals for remote transmission. No zero-based signals are allowed. F. Instruments will be provided with stainless steel mounting hardware or galvanized steel floor stands, wall brackets, or instrument racks as appropriate for each location. G. Equipment installed in a hazardous area shall meet class, group, and division as shown on the electrical Drawings, to comply with the National Electrical Code. H. Indicators and recorder readouts must be linear in the process units. I. Transmitters will be provided with either integral indicators or conduit mounted indicators in process units, accurate to plus or minus 2 percent. J. Electronic equipment must be the manufacturer's latest design. Circuit boards and associated components must have suitable conformal coating to prevent contamination by dust, moisture, and fungus. Solid-state components must be conservatively rated for their purpose to assure optimum long-term performance and dependability over normally anticipated atmospheric conditions of temperature, pressure and humidity. The field-mounted equipment and system 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA INSTRUMENTATION FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS WOODARD & CURRAN 40 70 00-4 components will be designed for installation in dusty, humid, and slightly corrosive service conditions. K. Instruments furnished will be heavy-duty type, designed for continuous industrial service. The system will contain products of a single manufacturer, insofar as possible, and will consist of equipment models that are currently in production. All equipment provided shall be of modular construction and be capable of field expansion. L. Lightning/Surge Suppression - Provide individual surge protection means for each field instrument mounted outside the building from the control panel to which they are connected. Instruments mounted inside the same building as the control panel to which they are connected shall not require surge protection. M. Instruments shall be provided as indicated on the instrument index and in the Instrument Data Sheets, included as an attachment at the end of this Section. These documents include the instrument tag names, physical requirements, control requirement, and basis of design manufacturer and model number information. 2.02 FLOW INSTRUMENTATION A. Thermal Mass Flow Meter – Refer to Instrument Data Sheet 2.02A B. Magnetic Flow Meter – Refer to Instrument Data Sheet 2.02B C. Ultrasonic Flow Meter – Refer to Instrument Data Sheet 2.02C D. Flow Gauge – Refer to Instrument Data Sheet 2.02D 2.03 LEVEL INSTRUMENTATION A. Submersible Pressure Transducer – Refer to Instrument Data Sheet 2.03A B. Ultrasonic Level Transmitter – Refer to Instrument Data Sheet 2.03B C. Mechanical Tilt Float Switches – Refer to Instrument Data Sheet 2.03C 2.04 ANALYTICAL INSTRUMENTATION A. DO Probe/Analyzer – Refer to Instrument Data Sheet 2.04A 2.05 PRESSURE INSTRUMENTATION A. Pressure Switch – Refer to Instrument Data Sheet 2.05A 2.06 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA INSTRUMENTATION FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS WOODARD & CURRAN 40 70 00-5 PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION AND MOUNTING A. Provide labor, tools, material, and equipment required to mount instruments in the locations shown on the Drawings, in accordance with manufacturer-recommended mounting practices. The location of equipment, transmitters, alarms, and similar devices shown on the Drawings are approximate only. Exact locations shall be as approved by the Engineer during construction. Obtain in the field information relevant to the placing of process control Work and in case of any interference with other Work, proceed as requested by the Engineer. B. Make necessary mechanical changes to install new instrumentation equipment provided under this Contract. This Work includes fittings, fabrications, supports, guides, restraints, bolting, gaskets, and accessories. C. The instrumentation Drawings indicate the intent of the interconnections between the individual instruments. Any exceptions should be noted and communicated to the Engineer in writing. D. Instrument cabinets located outdoors or in unheated locations must be provided with heating or cooling devices as necessary to maintain all instruments and or electronics installed in those cabinets within their design temperature limits. E. Install brackets and hangers to avoid interference with other equipment. F. The shield on each process instrumentation cable shall be continuous from source to destination and be grounded as directed by the manufacturer of the instrumentation equipment, but in no case shall more than 1 ground point be employed for each shield. G. The Contractor shall coordinate the installation, the placing and location of system components, their connections to the process equipment panels, cabinets, and devices. The Contractor is responsible to ensure that field wiring for power and signal circuits are done in accordance with best Industry Practice and provide for necessary system grounding to ensure a satisfactory functioning installation. 3.02 INSPECTION AND TESTING A. Submit detailed test, procedure, and startup instructions for each instrument. B. Provide the services of a qualified service representative for the instrumentation provided under this Contract, for checking the installation, making the necessary adjustments and calibrations, placing the equipment in operation, and performing the acceptance tests. The representative will be available for not less than 2 days to instruct operating personnel in the use, operation, and maintenance of the equipment during the initial operating period. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA INSTRUMENTATION FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS WOODARD & CURRAN 40 70 00-6 C. Test and calibrate in place the instrumentation to demonstrate that it meets the accuracy requirements for the conditions specified. Provide labor, equipment, and incidentals required for the tests, including electric power, water, instrument air, etc. required for tests. The Engineer will witness field tests and conduct field inspections. The Contractor will give the Engineer a minimum of 10 working days’ notice of the dates and times scheduled for tests. Rectify any deficiencies found and retest Work affected by such deficiencies at the Contractor’s expense. Record data from each field test will be recorded and documented in a formal field test report. 3.03 ATTACHMENTS A. Instrument Index B. Instrument Data Sheets 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. 3.05 STARTUP & COMMISSIONING A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. 3.06 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. END OF SECTION 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA INSTRUMENTATION FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS WOODARD & CURRAN 40 70 00-7 INSTRUMENT INDEX Drawing Number Instrument Tag Data Sheet Instrument Description Notes PR-301 FIT/FE-0371 2.02B IR Submerged Magnetic Flow Meter #1 PR-301 FIT/FE-0372 2.02B IR Submerged Magnetic Flow Meter #2 PR-301 FIT/FE-0301 2.02B RAS Pump #1 Discharge Flow Meter PR-301 FIT/FE-0302 2.02B RAS Pump #2 Discharge Flow Meter PR-301 FIT/FE-0303 2.02B RAS Pump #3 Discharge Flow Meter PR-301 FIT/FE-0304 2.02B RAS Pump #4 Discharge Flow Meter PR-301 FIT/FE-0643 2.02B Rotary Press Feed Pump #4 Flow Meter PR-301 FIT/FE-0710 2.02B Scum Pump 1&2 Discharge Flow Meter PR-201 FI/FET-0510 2.02B Primary Sludge Flow Meter PR-301 FIT/FE-0361 2.02A Aeration Basin #1 Air Flow Measurement PR-301 FIT/FE-0362 2.02A Aeration Basin #2 Air Flow Measurement PR-301 FIT/FE-0363 2.02A Aeration Basin #3 Air Flow Measurement PR-401 LIT-0701 2.03A Scum Well Level Transducer PR-301 LIT-0371 2.03B IMLR Box Level #1 PR-301 LIT-0372 2.03B IMLR Box Level #2 PR-301 LSL-0371 2.03C IMLR Box Level #1 PR-301 LSL-0372 2.03C IMLR Box Level #2 PR-301 AIT-0361 2.04A Analyzer Display/Controller/Transmitter PR-301 AE-0361-1 2.04A Dissolved Oxygen Probe – Anoxic Basin 1 PR-301 AE-0361-2 2.04A Dissolved Oxygen Probe – Anoxic Basin 1 PR-301 AE-0361-3 2.04A Dissolved Oxygen Probe – Anoxic Basin 2 PR-301 AE-0361-4 2.04A Dissolved Oxygen Probe – Anoxic Basin 2 PR-301 AE-0361-5 2.04A Dissolved Oxygen Probe – Anoxic Basin 3 PR-301 AE-0361-6 2.04A Dissolved Oxygen Probe – Anoxic Basin 3 PR-301 AE-0361-7 2.04A Nitrate Probe – Pre-Anoxic Basin 1 PR-301 AE-0361-8 2.04A Nitrate Probe – Pre-Anoxic Basin 2 PR-301 AE-0361-9 2.04A ORP Probe – Pre-Anoxic Basin 1 PR-301 AE-0361-10 2.04A ORP Probe – Pre Anoxic Basin 2 PR-301 AIT/AE-0401 2.04A Analyzer Display/Transmitter/Ammonia Probe PR-201 FIT/FE-0110 2.02C Influent Channel Flow Measurement PR-301 PS-0640 2.05A WAS Pump Inlet Pressure Switch 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA INSTRUMENTATION FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS WOODARD & CURRAN 40 70 00-8 INSTRUMENT INDEX Drawing Number Instrument Tag Data Sheet Instrument Description Notes PR-301 FI-0311 2.02D Local Aeration Air Flow Indicator PR-301 FI-0312 2.02D Local Aeration Air Flow Indicator PR-301 FI-0313 2.02D Local Aeration Air Flow Indicator PR-301 FI-0314 2.02D Local Aeration Air Flow Indicator PR-301 FI-0315 2.02D Local Aeration Air Flow Indicator PR-301 FI-0316 2.02D Local Aeration Air Flow Indicator PR-301 FI-0317 2.02D Local Aeration Air Flow Indicator PR-301 FI-0318 2.02D Local Aeration Air Flow Indicator PR-301 FI-0319 2.02D Local Aeration Air Flow Indicator This page intentionally left blank THERMAL DISPERSION MASS FLOWMETERS – INSTRUMENT DATA SHEET 2.02A THERMAL DISPERSION MASS FLOWMETER TAG NO: See Note PAGE: 1 of 1 PFD #: PR-301 PRINTED: 9/25/2016 SPEC. NO: 40 70 00 PROJECT NUMBER: 229123.00 REV REVISION DESCRIPTION BY DATE DESCRIPTION: SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES 0 Issue For Bid PS June, 2016 SERVICE: Aeration Blower Air Flow Measurement FLOW ELEMENT Insertion Length: Variable up to 10” Operating Temp: 0-200°F Flow Range: 0.75 – 150 SFPS Line Size: 6” and 10” (See Note 2) Process Connection: 3/4” NPT Line Material: Stainless Steel Element Material: 316L Stainless Steel Cable Length: N/A Enclosure Material: Aluminum Max Pressure: 150 psig TRANSMITTER Mounting: Remote / Wall Mounted Enclosure Material: Polycarbonate Power Supply: 18-36 VDC Enclosure Rating: IP68 Local Indicator/Style: Digital Display, LCD Accuracy: 1.5% of reading Totalizer: N/A Operating Temp: -40 to 130°F Communications: (1) 4-20 mA CALIBRATION Process (0% / 100%): 0 – 4000 scfm Output (4mA/20mA): 0 – 4000 scfm PROCESS DATA Proc Fluid / State: Aeration Air/Gas Flow (Min/Oper/Max): 0 3,000 Specific Gravity: - Flow Units: scfm Percent Solids: - Pressure (Min/Oper/Max): 0 15 Conductivity: - Pressure Units: PSIG Viscosity: - Temperature (Min/Oper/Max): 40 200 Line Size / Sched.: 6” and 10” / Schedule 40 Temperature Units: °F ACCESSORIES Empty Tube Detection: N/A Option-1: Hot Tapping Unit (See Note 4) Instrument Tag: Yes, stainless steel engraved Option-2: N/A Calibration Standard: See Note 3 Option-3: N/A ACCEPTABLE LEVEL OF QUALITY EQUAL TO: Manufacturer: Binder Vacomass Flow Meter Model AL100 with integrated stroke compensation COMMENT N/A NOTES 1. Refer to Instrument Index for quantity, tag numbers and associated drawings. 2. FIT-0361, FIT-0362 to be installed in 10” Lines, FIT-0363 to be installed in 6” Line. 3. Each flow meter must be tested prior to shipment and calibrated at a calibration Lab under actual operating conditions (considering piping layout, gas composition, pipe diameter, flow direction, flow rate...) per manufacturers standards. · Due to piping geometry, there is insufficient straight inlet and outlet piping available to achieve a regular flow profile. To achieve precise measurements, a special calibration based on the installation layout must be taken into consideration. Calibration shall consider individual components and their interactions including simulation of field installation conditions in a Calibration Lab. · Since straight pipe section is not sufficiently long, calibration of the flow meter must be done together with the square diaphragm control valve in a certified calibration laboratory. This calibration includes the simultaneous flow profile correction depending on the actual stroke of the control valve. In operation, the signal correction must be done electronically in real time. 4. Hot tapping unit for the air flow meter of included ball valve for easy assembly and disassembly of the flow meter during operation, version: with fixed installation position and insertion depth. MAGNETIC FLOWMETERS – INSTRUMENT DATA SHEET 2.02B MAGNETIC FLOWMETERS TAG NO: See Note 1 PAGE: 1 of 5 P&ID #: PR-301 PRINTED: 9/25/2016 SPEC. NO: 40 70 00 PROJECT NUMBER: 229123.00 REV REVISION DESCRIPTION BY DATE DESCRIPTION: SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES 0 Issued For Bid PS June, 2016 SERVICE: Return Activated Sludge (RAS) Flow Measurement FLOWTUBE Meter Size: 12” Electrode Material: 316SS Flow Range: 0-11,565 gpm Ground Type: Electrode/Grounding Ring End Connections: 150# RF Flanges Ground Material: 316SS Tube Material: SS / CS Line Size: 12” Liner Material: PTFE / Hard Rubber Line Material: Ductile Iron Electrode Type: Standard Enclosure Rating: NEMA 4X TRANSMITTER Mounting: Integral Enclosure Material: ABS / Aluminum Cable Length: N/A Enclosure Rating: NEMA 4X Power Supply: 18-36 VDC Accuracy: 0.5% Local Indicator/Style: Yes, LCD display Alarm Relays/Rating: N/A Totalizer: Active Pulse, 24VDC Comm. Protocol: 4-20 mA CALIBRATION Process (0% / 100%): 3000 gpm Pulse Output / Value: 50 gal/pulse Output (4mA / 20mA): 3000 gpm PROCESS DATA Proc Fluid / State: Wastewater / Liquid Flow (Min/Oper/Max): 0 2600 Specific Gravity: Water-like Flow Units: gpm Percent Solids: Water-like Pressure (Min/Oper/Max): 0 15 Conductivity: Water-liker Pressure Units: psig Viscosity: Water-like Temperature (Min/Oper/Max): 40 140 Line Size / Sched.: 12” Temperature Units: °F Line No.: ACCESSORIES Empty Tube Detection: Yes Option: Instrument Tag: SS-engraved Option: Calibration Standard: Option: ACCEPTABLE LEVEL OF QUALITY EQUAL TO: Manufacturer: Rosemount 8750W Series (basis of design) COMMENT NOTES 1. Refer to Instrument Index for quantity, tag numbers and associated drawings. 2. 3. 4. MAGNETIC FLOWMETERS – INSTRUMENT DATA SHEET 2.02B MAGNETIC FLOWMETERS TAG NO: FIT-0710 PAGE: 2 of 5 P&ID #: PR-401 PRINTED: 9/25/2016 SPEC. NO: 40 70 00 PROJECT NUMBER: 229123.00 REV REVISION DESCRIPTION BY DATE DESCRIPTION: SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES 0 Issued For Bid PS June, 2016 SERVICE: Scum Pumps #1 and #2 Discharge Flow FLOWTUBE Meter Size: 4” Electrode Material: 316SS Flow Range: 0-1,301 gpm Ground Type: Electrode/Grounding Ring End Connections: 150# RF Flanges Ground Material: 316SS Tube Material: SS / CS Line Size: 4” Liner Material: PTFE / Hard Rubber Line Material: Ductile Iron Electrode Type: Standard Enclosure Rating: NEMA 4X TRANSMITTER Mounting: Remote/Wall Mounted Enclosure Material: ABS / Aluminum Cable Length: 50 feet (See Note 1) Enclosure Rating: NEMA 4X Power Supply: 90-250VAC Accuracy: 0.5% Local Indicator/Style: Yes, LCD display Alarm Relays/Rating: Totalizer: Active Pulse, 24VDC Comm. Protocol: 4-20 mA CALIBRATION Process (0% / 100%): 0-200 gpm Pulse Output / Value: 4 gal/pulse Output (4mA / 20mA): 0-200 gpm PROCESS DATA Proc Fluid / State: Wastewater / Liquid Flow (Min/Oper/Max): 0 30 Specific Gravity: Water-like Flow Units: gpm Percent Solids: Water-like Pressure (Min/Oper/Max): 0 15 Conductivity: Water-liker Pressure Units: psig Viscosity: Water-like Temperature (Min/Oper/Max): 40 70 120 Line Size / Sched.: 6” Temperature Units: °F Line No.: 6"-RPF-DI53 ACCESSORIES Empty Tube Detection: Yes Option: Instrument Tag: SS-engraved Option: Calibration Standard: 0.5% Standard Option: ACCEPTABLE LEVEL OF QUALITY EQUAL TO: Rosemount 8750W Series (basis of design) COMMENT NOTES 1. Cable length to be verified in the field prior to ordering. 2. 3. 4. MAGNETIC FLOWMETERS – INSTRUMENT DATA SHEET 2.02B MAGNETIC FLOWMETERS TAG NO: FIT-0643 PAGE: 3 of 5 P&ID #: PR-301 PRINTED: 9/25/2016 SPEC. NO: 40 70 00 PROJECT NUMBER: 229123.00 REV REVISION DESCRIPTION BY DATE DESCRIPTION: SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES 0 Issued For Bid PS June, 2016 SERVICE: Rotary Press Feed Pump #4 Flow FLOWTUBE Meter Size: 6” Electrode Material: 316SS Flow Range: 0-2954 gpm Ground Type: Electrode/Grounding Ring End Connections: 150# RF Flanges Ground Material: 316SS Tube Material: SS / CS Line Size: 6” Liner Material: PTFE / Hard Rubber Line Material: Ductile Iron Electrode Type: Standard Enclosure Rating: IP68 (Note 2) TRANSMITTER Mounting: Remote/Wall Mounted Enclosure Material: ABS / Aluminum Cable Length: 50 feet (Note 1) Enclosure Rating: IP66 (NEMA 4X) Power Supply: 90-250VAC Accuracy: 0.5% Local Indicator/Style: Yes, LCD display Alarm Relays/Rating: N/A Totalizer: Active Pulse, 24VDC Comm. Protocol: 4-20 mA CALIBRATION Process (0% / 100%): 0-300 gpm Pulse Output / Value: 5 gal/pulse Output (4mA / 20mA): 0-300 gpm PROCESS DATA Proc Fluid / State: Wastewater / Liquid Flow (Min/Oper/Max): 0 175 Specific Gravity: Water-like Flow Units: gpm Percent Solids: Water-like Pressure (Min/Oper/Max): 0 30 Conductivity: Water-liker Pressure Units: psig Viscosity: Water-like Temperature (Min/Oper/Max): 40 70 140 Line Size / Sched.: 6” / Schedule 40 Temperature Units: °F Line No.: N/A ACCESSORIES Empty Tube Detection: Yes Option-1: Instrument Tag: SS-engraved Option-2: Calibration Standard: 0.5% Standard Option-3: ACCEPTABLE LEVEL OF QUALITY EQUAL TO: Rosemount 8750W Series (basis of design) COMMENT NOTES 1. Cable length to be verified in the field prior to ordering. 2. 3. 4. MAGNETIC FLOWMETERS – INSTRUMENT DATA SHEET 2.02B MAGNETIC FLOWMETERS TAG NO: See Note 1 PAGE: 4 of 5 P&ID #: PR-301 PRINTED: 9/25/2016 SPEC. NO: 40 70 00 PROJECT NUMBER: 229123.00 REV REVISION DESCRIPTION BY DATE DESCRIPTION: SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES 0 Issued For Bid PS June, 2016 SERVICE: Internal Mixed Liquor Recycle Flow Measurement FLOWTUBE Meter Size: 20” Electrode Material: 316SS Flow Range: 0-28,428 gpm Ground Type: Electrode/Grounding Ring End Connections: 150# RF Flanges Ground Material: 316SS Tube Material: SS / CS Line Size: 20” Liner Material: PTFE / Hard Rubber Line Material: Ductile Iron Electrode Type: Standard Enclosure Rating: IP68 (Note 2) TRANSMITTER Mounting: Remote/Wall Mounted Enclosure Material: ABS / Aluminum Cable Length: 50 feet (Note 2) Enclosure Rating: IP66 (NEMA 4X) Power Supply: 90-250VAC Accuracy: 0.5% Local Indicator/Style: Yes, LCD display Alarm Relays/Rating: N/A Totalizer: Active Pulse, 24VDC Comm. Protocol: 4-20 mA CALIBRATION Process (0% / 100%): 0-10,000 gpm Pulse Output / Value: 200 gal/pulse Output (4mA / 20mA): 0-10,000 gpm PROCESS DATA Proc Fluid / State: Wastewater / Liquid Flow (Min/Oper/Max): 0 7,000 Specific Gravity: Water-like Flow Units: gpm Percent Solids: Water-like Pressure (Min/Oper/Max): Conductivity: Water-liker Pressure Units: psig Viscosity: Water-like Temperature (Min/Oper/Max): 40 70 120 Line Size / Sched.: 20” / Schedule 40 Temperature Units: °F Line No.: N/A ACCESSORIES Empty Tube Detection: Yes Option-1: Instrument Tag: SS-engraved Option-2: Calibration Standard: 0.5% Standard Option-3: ACCEPTABLE LEVEL OF QUALITY EQUAL TO: Rosemount 8750W Series (basis of design) COMMENT NOTES 1. Refer to Instrument Index for quantity, tag numbers and associated drawings. 2. Rated for Continuous submergence with potted junction box and 50 feet of combo cable/cable gland 3. 4. MAGNETIC FLOWMETERS – INSTRUMENT DATA SHEET 2.02B MAGNETIC FLOWMETERS TAG NO: FIT/FE-0510 PAGE: 5 of 5 P&ID #: PR-201 PRINTED: 9/25/2016 SPEC. NO: 40 70 00 PROJECT NUMBER: 229123.00 REV REVISION DESCRIPTION BY DATE DESCRIPTION: SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES 0 Issued For Bid PS June, 2016 SERVICE: Primary Sludge Flow FLOWTUBE Meter Size: 6” Electrode Material: 316SS Flow Range: 0-2954 gpm Ground Type: Electrode/Grounding Ring End Connections: 150# RF Flanges Ground Material: 316SS Tube Material: SS / CS Line Size: 6” Liner Material: PTFE / Hard Rubber Line Material: Ductile Iron Electrode Type: Standard Enclosure Rating: NEMA 4X TRANSMITTER Mounting: Remote/Wall Mounted Enclosure Material: ABS / Aluminum Cable Length: 50 feet (Note 1) Enclosure Rating: IP66 (NEMA 4X) Power Supply: 90-250VAC Accuracy: 0.5% Local Indicator/Style: Yes, LCD display Alarm Relays/Rating: N/A Totalizer: Active Pulse, 24VDC Comm. Protocol: 4-20 mA CALIBRATION Process (0% / 100%): 0-500 gpm Pulse Output / Value: 5 gal/pulse Output (4mA / 20mA): 0-500 gpm PROCESS DATA Proc Fluid / State: Wastewater / Liquid Flow (Min/Oper/Max): 0 240 Specific Gravity: Water-like Flow Units: gpm Percent Solids: Water-like Pressure (Min/Oper/Max): 0 60 Conductivity: Water-liker Pressure Units: psig Viscosity: Water-like Temperature (Min/Oper/Max): 40 70 120 Line Size / Sched.: 6” / Schedule 40 Temperature Units: °F Line No.: N/A ACCESSORIES Empty Tube Detection: Yes Option-1: Instrument Tag: SS-engraved Option-2: Calibration Standard: 0.5% Standard Option-3: ACCEPTABLE LEVEL OF QUALITY EQUAL TO: Rosemount 8750W Series (basis of design) COMMENT NOTES 1. Cable length to be verified in the field prior to ordering. 2. 3. 4. ULTRASONIC FLOW TRANSMITTERS – INSTRUMENT DATA SHEET 2.02C ULTRASONIC LEVEL TRANSMITTER TAG NO: FIT/FE-0110 PAGE: 1 of 1 P&ID #: PR-201 PRINTE: 9/25/2016 SPEC. NO: 40 70 00 PROJECT NUMBER: 229123.00 REV REVISION DESCRIPTION BY DATE DESCRIPTION: SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES 0 Issued For Bid PS June, 2016 SERVICE: Headworks Building Influent Open Channel Flow TRANSDUCER Mounting: 1” NPT Housing Mat’l (Wet): PVDF Span (min/max): 0 to 30 Feet Housing Mat’l (Non-Wet): Aluminum (Polyurethaned) Press/Temp Rating: 0 to 120°F Flange/Bracket Material: 1” NPT Stainless Steel Bracket Area Classification: Class 1 Division 1 Cable Length: 32.81 Feet (10 meters) Beam Angle: 6° / 10° Frequency: 44 / 50kHz TRANSMITTER Mounting: Remote Wall Mounted Enclosure Material: Polycarbonate Cable Length: N/A Enclosure Rating: NEMA 4X Power Supply: 100-230VAC Accuracy: 0.25% Local Indicator/Style: LCD Display Alarm Relays/Rating: N/A No. of Transducers One (1) Comm. Protocol: N/A CALIBRATION Process (0%/ 100%): 0-3.75 Feet Output (4mA /20mA): 0 to 5700 gpm PROCESS DATA Proc Fluid / State: Sanitary Wastewater Level (Min/Oper/Max): 0 3.75 Specific Gravity: Water-like Level Units: Feet Percent Solids: Water-like Pressure (Min/Oper/Max): Ambient Conductivity: Water-like Pressure Units: PSI Viscosity: Water-like Temperature (Min/Oper/Max): 0 70 120 Tank Material.: Concrete Temperature Units: °F Tank No.: ACCESSORIES Instrument Tag: SS-engraved Option-1: N/A Calibration Standard: Option-2: N/A ACCEPTABLE LEVEL OF QUALITY EQUAL TO: Manufacturer: Siemens Hydroranger 200 HMI w/XPS-15 transducer (basis of design) COMMENT NOTES 1. Influent Flow measurement via Parshall Flume, range from 0 to 5700 gpm. 2. 3. 4. LOCAL FLOW GAUGES – INSTRUMENT DATA SHEET 2.02D FLOW GAUGES TAG NO: See Note 1 PAGE: 1 of 1 P&ID #: PR-301 PRINTE: 9/25/2016 SPEC. NO: 40 70 00 PROJECT NUMBER: 229123.00 REV REVISION DESCRIPTION BY DATE DESCRIPTION: SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES 0 Issued For Bid PS June, 2016 SERVICE: Local Aeration Air Flow Indication GENERAL Type: Differential Pressure Socket Material: N/A Gauge Size: 4” Movement Material: Color Face/Letter: White / Black Conn. Size / Loc: 1/8” NPT / Lower Case Material: Black Phenolic Gauge Range: 0-2” WC Ring Material: Thermoplastic Accuracy: 2% Full Scale Lens Material: Glass Liquid Filled Gauge: N/A Blow Out Protect.: N/A Liquid Fill Material: N/A Element Type: Diaphragm Throttle Screw: N/A Element Material: Overload Stop: Yes AVERAGING PITOT TUBE Insertion Length: 6” Sensor. Connections: 1/8” NPT Connection Size: 3/4” NPT Tube Material: 304L SS Valves: Quarter-turn ball valves PROCESS DATA Proc Fluid / State: Air / Gas Flow (Min/Oper/Max): 0 500 800 Specific Gravity: - Flow Units: scfm Percent Solids: - Pressure (Min/Oper/Max): 0 6 15 Conductivity: - Pressure Units: psig Viscosity: - Temperature (Min/Oper/Max): 40 70 120 Line Size / Sched.: 6” Schedule 40 Temperature Units: °F Line No.: ACCESSORIES Remote Capillary (Yes/No): No Capillary Material: N/A Capillary Length: N/A ACCEPTABLE LEVEL OF QUALITY EQUAL TO: Manufacturer: Dwyer Magnehelic 2000 with DS-300 Flow Sensor (basis of design) NOTES 1. Refer to Instrument Index for quantity, tag numbers and associated drawings. 2. Pipe mounting kit and required accessories. 3. 4. 5. SUBMERSIBLE LEVEL TRANSDUCERS – INSTRUMENT DATA SHEET 2.03A SUBMERSIBLE LEVEL TRANSDUCER TAG NO: LIT-0701 PAGE: 1 of 1 P&ID #: PR-401 PRINTED: 9/25/2016 SPEC. NO: 40 70 00 PROJECT NUMBER: 229123.00 REV REVISION DESCRIPTION BY DATE DESCRIPTION: SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES 0 Issued For Bid PS June, 2016 SERVICE: Advanced Treatment Building Scum Well Level Measurement GENERAL Type: Cage Style Body Material 316SS Mounting: Immersion Diaphragm Material: 316SS Span Range Min/Max: 0-34.6 ft Cable Jacket Material: Polyurethane Press/Temp Rating: 3x FSPR / 0 - 140°F Cable Length 40’, see note 2 Accuracy: 0.5% Full scale Power Supply: 24VDC, loop-powered Area Classification: C1 D1 Transmitter/Local Ind.: N/A Sealed/Vent Tube: Vent Tube Stilling Well: N/A CALIBRATION Process (0% / 100%): 0-19 ft Output (4mA/20mA): 0-19 ft PROCESS DATA Proc Fluid / State: Wastewater / Liquid Level (Min/Oper/Max): 0 19 Specific Gravity: Water-like Level Units: ft Density: Water-like Pressure (Min/Oper/Max): Conductivity: Water-like Pressure Units: psi Viscosity: Water-like Temperature (Min/Oper/Max): 40 72 120 Tank Material: Concrete Temperature Units: °F Tank No.: T-0711 ACCESSORIES Ind. Scale/Range: N/A Option-1: N/A Device Tag: SS, engraved Option-2: N/A ACCEPTABLE LEVEL OF QUALITY EQUAL TO: Manufacturer: Blue Ribbon Bird Cage BC001 Series (basis of design) COMMENT NOTES 1. Provide strain relief and weight & chain assembly as shown on the Drawings. 2. Cable length to be verified in the field prior to ordering. 3. 4. 5. ULTRASONIC LEVEL TRANSMITTERS – INSTRUMENT DATA SHEET 2.03B ULTRASONIC LEVEL TRANSMITTER TAG NO: See Note 1 PAGE: 1 of 1 P&ID #: PR-301 PRINTE: 9/25/2016 SPEC. NO: 40 70 00 PROJECT NUMBER: 229123.00 REV REVISION DESCRIPTION BY DATE DESCRIPTION: SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES 0 Issued For Bid PS June, 2016 SERVICE: Internal Mixed Liquor Recycle (IMLR) Distribution Box Level Measurement TRANSDUCER Mounting: 2” NPT Flange Housing Mat’l (Wet): PVDF Span (min/max): 0 to 26 Feet Housing Mat’l (Non-Wet): Aluminum (Polyurethaned) Press/Temp Rating: 0 to 120°F Flange/Bracket Material: 2” NPT Stainless Steel Bracket Area Classification: C1 D1 Cable Length: N/A Beam Angle: 10° Frequency: 44 / 50kHz TRANSMITTER Mounting: Integral to transducer Enclosure Material: Aluminum (Polyurethaned) Cable Length: N/A Enclosure Rating: NEMA 4X Power Supply: 24VDC, loop-powered Accuracy: 0.5% Local Indicator/Style: Integral Alarm Relays/Rating: N/A No. of Transducers One (1) Comm. Protocol: 4-20 mA CALIBRATION Process (0%/ 100%): 0-17.25 Feet Output (0%/ 100%): 0-17.25 Feet PROCESS DATA Proc Fluid / State: Sanitary Wastewater Level (Min/Oper/Max): 0 17.25 Specific Gravity: Water-like Level Units: Feet Percent Solids: Water-like Pressure (Min/Oper/Max): Ambient Conductivity: Water-like Pressure Units: PSI Viscosity: Water-like Temperature (Min/Oper/Max): 40 70 120 Tank Material.: Concrete Temperature Units: °F Tank No.: ACCESSORIES Instrument Tag: SS-engraved Option-1: N/A Calibration Standard: 0.5% Standard Option-2: N/A ACCEPTABLE LEVEL OF QUALITY EQUAL TO: Manufacturer: Siemens Probe LU Series (basis of design) COMMENT NOTES 1. Refer to Instrument Index for quantity, tag numbers and associated drawings. 2. 3. 4. MECHANICAL TILT FLOAT SWITCHES – INSTRUMENT DATA SHEET 2.03C MECHANICAL TILT FLOAT SWITCHES TAG NO: See Note 1 PAGE: 1 of 1 P&ID #: PR-301 PRINTED: 9/25/2016 SPEC. NO: 40 70 00 PROJECT NUMBER: 229123.00 REV REVISION DESCRIPTION BY DATE DESCRIPTION: SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES 0 Issued For Bid PS June, 2016 SERVICE: Internal Mixed Liquor Recycle (IMLR) Distribution Box Low Level Measurement GENERAL Type: Mechanical Tilt Tilt Angle: Wide Mounting Style: Tether Contact Type: SPDT Area Classification: C1-D1 Contact Rating: 8A @ 120VAC Float/Disp. Material: Polypropylene / ABS / EPDM Cable Length: 40’, see note 2 Float/Displacer Size: Cable Jacket Mat’l: Polyethylene / Neoprene / PVC Press/Temp Rating: None / 32 - 158°F Stilling Well: CALIBRATION 1st Switch Level: 3rd Switch Level: 2nd Switch Level: PROCESS DATA Proc Fluid / State: Sanitary Wastewater / Liquid Level (Min/Oper/Max): Specific Gravity: Water-like Level Units: ft Percent Solids: Water-like Pressure (Min/Oper/Max): Amb Conductivity: Water-like Pressure Units: psig Di-Electric Const.: Water-like Temperature (Min/Oper/Max): 40 72 120 Viscosity: Water-like Temperature Units: °F Tank Material.: Concrete Tank No.: T-2201 Tank Agitated: No ACCESSORIES Tether/Weight: Tether Option-1: See Note 3 Loc. Indicators/Style: Option-2: Instrument Tag: Option-3: ACCEPTABLE LEVEL OF QUALITY EQUAL TO: Manufacturer Conery B8 Series (Basis of Design) COMMENTS NOTES 1. Refer to Instrument Index for quantity, tag numbers and associated drawings. 2. Confirm cable length required prior to ordering. 3. Provide chain and weight mounting equipment for floats per Drawings; confirm length of chain necessary prior to ordering. ANALYZER INSTRUMENT DATA SHEET 2.04A DISSOLVED OXYGEN/NITRATE/ORP PROBES/ANALYZER TAG NO: See Note 4 PAGE: 1 of 2 P&ID #: PR-301 PRINTED: 9/25/2016 SPEC.: 40 70 00 PROJECT NUMBER: 229123.00 REV REVISION DESCRIPTION BY DATE DESCRIPTION: SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES 0 Issued For Bid PS June, 2016 SERVICE: Advanced Treatment System: Pre-Anoxic and Anoxic Tank Process Analysis ACCEPTABLE LEVEL OF QUALITY EQUAL TO: Manufacturer: YSI Display/Controller Part #: MIQ/TC 2020 XT-H3 Sensor 1 Part #: FDO 700 IQ 201650 | Sensor 2 Part #: Nitra Vis 701 IQ | Sensor 3 Part #: SensorLyt 700 IQ SENSOR 1 Type of Sensor: DO Electrode Material: Light Emitting LED Sensor Mounting: Immersion REF Electrode: Light Emitting LED Sensor Connection: 1.5” NPT Body Material: Stainless Steel Sensor Range: 0 to 20 ppm Enclosure Class: Immersion Rated Temp Compensation: Yes Cable Length: 22.9’ (See Note 1) SENSOR 2 Type of Sensor: Nitrate Electrode Material: Xenon Flash Lamp Sensor Mounting: Immersion REF Electrode: Xenon Flash Lamp Sensor Connection: N/A Body Material: Stainless Steel Sensor Range: 0 mg to 300 mg NO3 / L Enclosure Class: Immersion Rated Temp Compensation: N/A Cable Length: 22.9’ (See Note 1) SENSOR 3 Type of Sensor: ORP Electrode Material: Platinum Sensor Mounting: Immersion REF Electrode: Gel Polymer Solid Sensor Connection: 1.5” NPT Body Material: Stainless Steel Sensor Range: (-1500) – 1500 mV Enclosure Class: Immersion Rated Temp Compensation: Yes Cable Length: 22.9’ (See Note 1) CONTROLLER Device Tag: See Note 4 Output Signals: N/A Mounting: Remote Wall Mounted Local Indicator/Style: LCD Display Enclosure Rating: NEMA 4X Digital Comm.Protocol: Ethernet IP Communications Enclosure Material: Acrylonitrile styrene acrylate Alarm Relays/No.: N/A Power Supply: 120VAC Relay Type/Rating: N/A CALIBRATION Process (0% / 100%): 0/10 ppm Output (Ethernet IP): 0/10 ppm Process (0% / 100%): 0 mg to 200 mg NO3 / L Output (Ethernet IP): 0 mg to 200 mg NO3 / L Process (0% / 100%): (-1500) – 1500 mV Output (Ethernet IP): (-1500) – 1500 mV PROCESS DATA Proc Fluid / State: Sanitary Wastewater / Liquid Flow (Min/Oper/Max): Specific Gravity: Water-like Flow Units: GPM Percent Solids: - Pressure(Min/Oper/Max): Ambient Conductivity: - Pressure Units: PSI Viscosity: - Temperature(Min/Oper/Max): 40 70 120 Line Size / Sched.: N/A Temperature Units: °F ACCESSORIES Probe Mounting Hardware: Yes Sensor Cable: See Note 1 NOTES 1. Contractor shall field verify cable length prior to ordering components and IQ Sensor Cable. 2. Installation of probes will require a total of eight (8) MIQ/JB extension modules. 3. Installation of Controller will require a MIQ/CR3 Output module, MIQ/PS Power Supply Module and MIQ/MC2 microcontroller. 4. Refer to Instrument Index for quantity, tag numbers and associated drawings. ANALYZER INSTRUMENT DATA SHEET 2.04A AMMONIUM PROBE/ANALYZER TAG NO: AIT/AE-0401 PAGE: 2 of 2 P&ID #: PR-301 PRINTED: 9/25/2016 SPEC. NO: 40 70 00 PROJECT NUMBER: 229123.00 REV REVISION DESCRIPTION BY DATE DESCRIPTION: SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES 0 Issued For Bid PS June, 2016 SERVICE: UV Room Plant Effluent Discharge Analysis ACCEPTABLE LEVEL OF QUALITY EQUAL TO: Manufacturer: YSI Display/Controller Part #: MIQ/TC 2020 XT-H3 Sensor 1 Part #: AmmoLyt Plus 700 IQ 107070 SENSOR 1 Type of Sensor: Ammonium Electrode Material: ION Selective with soft PVC Sensor Mounting: Immersion REF Electrode: Porous PVDF Sensor Connection: 1.5” NPT Body Material: Stainless Steel Sensor Range: 0 to 1000 mg/L Enclosure Class: Immersion Rated Temp Compensation: Yes Cable Length: 22.9’ (See Note 1) CONTROLLER Device Tag: See Note 4 Output Signals: (1) 4-20mA Mounting: Wall Mounted Local Indicator/Style: LCD Display Enclosure Rating: NEMA 4X Digital Comm. Protocol: N/A Enclosure Material: Acrylonitrile styrene acrylate Alarm Relays/No.: N/A Power Supply: 120VAC Relay Type/Rating: N/A CALIBRATION Process (0% / 100%): 0/1000 mg/L Output (4mA/20mA): 0/1000 mg/L Process (0% / 100%): Output (4mA/20mA): PROCESS DATA Proc Fluid / State: Sanitary Wastewater / Liquid Flow (Min/Oper/Max): Specific Gravity: Water-like Flow Units: GPM Percent Solids: - Pressure (Min/Oper/Max): Ambient Conductivity: - Pressure Units: PSI Viscosity: - Temperature (Min/Oper/Max): 40 120 Line Size / Sched.: N/A Temperature Units: °F ACCESSORIES Cleaning Kits: N/A Air Cleaning System: Yes (Note 5) Sunshield: No Option-2: N/A Probe Mounting Hardware: Yes (see Note 4) Option-3: N/A IQ Sensor Cable: IQ Sensor Cable (See Note 1) NOTES 1. Contractor shall field verify cable length prior to ordering components. 2. Installation of probe will require one (1) MIQ/JB extension module. 3. Installation of Controller will require a MIQ/CR3 Output module, MIQ/PS Power Supply Module and MIQ/MC2 microcontroller. 4. 2458000Y SMK Quick Release Stainless Steel Handrail Mounting Bracket with 1.5-inch Mounting Adapter. 5. Installation of Air cleaning will require Head Assembly for IQ Sensors, JC-2 Dual Channel Compressor, and accessories. PRESSURE SWITCHES – INSTRUMENT DATA SHEET 2.05A PRESSURE SWITCHES TAG NO: PS-0640 PAGE: 1 of 1 P&ID #: PR-301 PRINTED: June, 2016 SPEC. NO: 40 70 00 PROJECT NUMBER: 229123.00 REV REVISION DESCRIPTION BY DATE DESCRIPTION: SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES 0 Issued For Bid PS June, 2016 SERVICE: WAS Pump Inlet Low Suction Pressure GENERAL Type: Diaphragm Diaphragm Seal/Type: Yes Mat’l Housing-Elect: Capillary / Length: N/A Mat’l Housing-Wetted: 31SS Capillary Material: N/A Enclosure Rating: Unclassified Capillary Armor: N/A Press. Element Type: Diaphragm Pressure Range: 0-15 psig Wetted Elastomer: Buna-N Diaphragm Seal Fluid: N/A Process Conn / Type: ½” NPT Diaphragm Material: SS Switch Conn / Type: ½” NPT Dia Housing Mat’l Wet: SS Power Supply: N/A Dia Housing Non-Wet: SS Switch Deadband: 1.0-1.5 psig Connection: N/A Switch Accuracy: Mounting: Switch Rating: 10A @ 120VAC Area Classification: Unclassified Switch Type: SPDT SWITCH Set Point SW #1: 4 psig, dropping (adjustable) Set Point SW #2: Set Point SW #3: Adj. Range: PROCESS DATA Proc Fluid / State: WAS / Liquid Flow (Min/Oper/Max): 0 80 Specific Gravity: Water-like Flow Units: gpm Percent Solids: Water-like Pressure (Min/Oper/Max): 0 30 Conductivity: Water-like Pressure Units: psig Viscosity: Water-like Temperature (Min/Oper/Max): 40 70 120 Line Size / Sched.: 6” / SS Temperature Units: °F Line No.: OPTIONS Device Tag: SS-engraved Other: Field-selectable setpoint ACCEPTABLE LEVEL OF QUALITY EQUAL TO: Manufacturer: Ashcroft G Series (basis of design) NOTES 1. 2. 3. 4. This page intentionally left blank 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA HORIZONTAL CHOPPER PUMPS WOODARD & CURRAN 43 23 11-1 SECTION 43 23 11 HORIZONTAL CHOPPER PUMPS PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals to install complete and ready for operation and field test one recirculation, horizontal, chopper type, centrifugal pump and appurtenances with all accessories as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein. This pump shall be specifically designed to recirculate, mix and pump waste solids at heavy consistencies without plugging or dewatering of the solids. Materials shall be chopped/macerated and conditioned by the pump as an integral part of the pumping action. The pump must have demonstrated the ability to chop through and pump high concentrations of solids such as plastics, heavy rags, grease and hair balls, wood, paper products and stringy materials without plugging, both in tests and field applications. 1.02 RELATED WORK 1. Section 02 40 00 – Demolition 2. Division 3 – Concrete 3. Section 09 90 00 - Painting 4. Division 26 - Electrical 5. Section 33 31 00 – Sanitary Utility Sewerage Piping 6. Division 40 – Process Integration 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. B. Submittals shall include, but not limited to: 1. Certified shop and erection drawings showing all important details of construction, dimensions and anchor bolt locations. 2. Descriptive literature, bulletins and/or catalogs of the equipment. 3. Manufacturer's specifications and product data required to demonstrate compliance with requirements which shall include complete parts listing showing materials of construction with applicable ANSI, ASTM or other standards. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA HORIZONTAL CHOPPER PUMPS WOODARD & CURRAN 43 23 11-2 4. Type, thickness, application procedure and test for coatings, and non- metallic and metallic linings. 5. Data on the characteristics and performance of the pumps. Data shall include guaranteed performance curves, based on actual shop tests of duplicate units, which show that they meet the specified requirements for head, capacity, efficiency, allowable NPSH, allowable suction lift and horsepower. Curves shall be submitted on 8-1/2-in by 11-in sheets. 6. Manufacturer's recommended testing, operation and maintenance procedures including a list of special tools and equipment required to maintain the units. 7. Provide a “letter of compliance” from the pump manufacturer stating that the characteristics of each pump (specifically naming the respective pumps) will not overload the specified motor horsepower under any head condition when operating at the specified maximum speed, over the entire curve. 8. Certified factory tests and pump curves for the supplied units, following fabrication, demonstrating compliance with the factory test requirements in Part 3 of this section. 9. The total weight of the equipment including weight of the single largest item. 10. A complete total bill of materials for all equipment. 11. A list of the manufacturer's recommended spare parts with the manufacturer's current price for each item. Include gaskets, packing, etc, on the list. List the bearings by the bearing manufacturer's numbers only. 12. A statement indicating bearing life. 13. Complete data on motors and power factor correction capacitors (if required) in accordance with Division 26. 14. Complete description of surface preparation and shop prime painting. 15. Complete wiring diagrams and control schematics. 16. Deviations from the Contract Documents. C. Certified Factory Test Reports by a registered Professional Engineer demonstrating compliance with the factory test requirements in Part 3 of this section shall be submitted prior to shipment. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA HORIZONTAL CHOPPER PUMPS WOODARD & CURRAN 43 23 11-3 D. Operation and Maintenance Data 1. Copies of an operating and maintenance manual for each size pump shall be furnished to the Engineer as provided for in Section 3.04 of this specification. The manuals shall be prepared specifically for this installation and shall include all required cuts, drawings, equipment lists, descriptions, etc., that are required to instruct operating and maintenance personnel unfamiliar with such equipment. 2. A technical representative, from the respective pump manufacturer who has complete knowledge of proper operation and maintenance shall be provided for 1 day to instruct representatives of the Owner and the Engineer on proper operation and maintenance. This work may be conducted in conjunction with the inspection of the installation and test run as provided under Paragraph 3.03 below. If there are difficulties in operation of the equipment due to the manufacturer's design or fabrication, additional service shall be provided at no additional cost to the Owner. E. Closeout and Maintenance Material Submittals: per Division 01 General Requirements. 1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. American Bearing Manufacturers Association (ABMA) B. American Gear Manufacturer’ Association (AGMA) C. American National Standard Institute (ANSI) D. American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM) E. ASTM A48 – Standard Specifications for Gray Iron Castings F. Standards of the American Water Works Association (AWWA) G. Factory Mutual (FM) H. Standards of the Hydraulic Institute (HI) I. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE) J. ISO 9001:2000 K. National Electrical Code (NEC) L. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) M. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA HORIZONTAL CHOPPER PUMPS WOODARD & CURRAN 43 23 11-4 N. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) O. Where reference is made to one of the above standards, the revision in effect at the time of bid opening shall apply. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The scum recirculation pump shall be Model HE3L6CS-070 as manufactured by Vaughan Co., Inc.; or Model CHOPX3B as manufactured by Hayward Gordon, or Model MPTK-I/OG-I80 as manufactured by Landia, or Engineer Approved Equal. B. The rated horsepower of the drive unit shall be such that the unit will not be overloaded nor the service factor reduced when the pump is operated at any point on the pump's capacity curve. If, due to the slope of the pump's performance curve, a drive unit of greater horsepower than specified is required to meet this condition, the pump will be considered for approval only if any and all changes in electrical work, etc, required by such a change will be provided at no additional cost to the Owner and be to the satisfaction of the Engineer. C. Call out of a specific pump model and manufacturer does not relieve the manufacturer from the responsibility of meeting all manufacturing and performance requirements specified herein. D. All pumping equipment furnished under this section shall be from a single supplier that shall be regularly engaged in the design, manufacture, and furnishing of wastewater pumping equipment for a minimum of 10 years. The manufacturer shall be able to show evidence of a minimum of 5 other installations of similar size and complexity that have been in operation for a minimum of 5 years. Pumps, motors and bases shall be provided as a single unit from the pump manufacturer. E. Pumps are to be engineered and manufactured under a written Quality Assurance program certified to ISO 9001:2000 Quality System Standard. The pumps shall conform to all applicable requirements of ASTM, ANSI, AWWA, and Hydraulic Institute. F. All equipment shall be designed and built for 24-hour continuous service at any and all points within the specified range of operation, without overheating, without cavitation, and without excessive vibration or strain. G. The pumping units required under this section shall be complete. All parts shall be so designed and proportioned as to have liberal strength, stability, and stiffness and to be especially adapted for the service to be performed. Ample room for inspection, repairs and adjustment shall be provided. H. Equipment substitutions shall be in accordance with the requirements of Division 1. Any redesign of the Work required as a result of the proposed substitution shall be completed at no additional cost to the Owner and as approved by the Engineer. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA HORIZONTAL CHOPPER PUMPS WOODARD & CURRAN 43 23 11-5 I. The pump manufacturer shall be fully responsible for the design, arrangement and operation of all connected rotating components as assembled and mounted on fabricated steel base to ensure that neither harmful nor damaging vibrations occur at any speed within the specified operating range. J. All working parts of the pumps and motors, such as bearings, wearing rings, shaft, and sleeves shall be standard dimensions built to limit gauges or formed to templates, such that parts will be interchangeable between like units and such that the Owner may, at any time in the future, obtain replacement and repair parts. K. Mechanical equipment, including drives and electric motors shall be supplied and installed in accordance with applicable OSHA regulations. The noise level of motors, unless otherwise noted, shall not exceed 85 dBA measured 5-ft from the unit under free field conditions while operating on utility power. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. B. All spare parts shall be packed in containers bearing labels clearly designating the contents and respective pieces of equipment for which they are intended. All spare parts shall be delivered at the same time as the pertaining equipment. C. All equipment delivered and placed in storage shall be stored with protection from the weather, humidity and temperature variations, dirt and dust, or other contaminants. D. Arrange delivery schedules to minimize handling at the Project site. E. All equipment and parts shall be properly protected against any damage during a prolonged period at the site. F. Factory assembled parts and components shall not be dismantled for shipment unless permission is received in writing from the Engineer. G. Finished surfaces of all exposed flanges shall be protected by wooden blank flanges, strongly built and securely bolted thereto. H. Finished iron or steel surfaces not painted shall be properly protected to prevent rust and corrosion. I. No shipment shall be made until approved by the Engineer in writing. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA HORIZONTAL CHOPPER PUMPS WOODARD & CURRAN 43 23 11-6 1.07 WARRANTY A. Equipment supplied under this section shall be warranted to be free from defects in workmanship, design and materials for a period of one (1) year from manufacturer’s startup. If any part of the equipment should prove to be defective during the warranty period, the manufacturer at no expense to the Owner shall replace the part. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A. General 1. This Section is intended to give a general description of what is required, but does not cover all details which will vary in accordance with the requirements of the equipment as offered. It is, however intended to cover all materials, equipment and appurtenances for the complete pumping units as herein specified, whether specifically mentioned in this Section or not. 2. For all units there shall be furnished and installed all necessary arid desirable accessory equipment and auxiliaries whether specifically mentioned in this Section or not and as required for an installation incorporating the highest standards for the type of service. 3. Stainless steel nameplates giving the name of manufacturer, the rated capacity, head, speed and all other pertinent data shall be attached to each pump and each motor. 4. The pump shall conform to the noise limitations specified in Section 01 70 00. 5. The pumps specified herein are intended to be standard pumping equipment as modified by this Section, of proven ability as manufactured by reputable manufacturers having long experience in the production of such pumps. The pumps furnished shall be designed, constructed and installed in accordance with the best practices and methods and shall operate satisfactorily when installed as shown on the Drawings. Pumps shall be manufactured in accordance with the Hydraulic Institute Standards. All equipment shall be furnished by a single manufacturer. 6. Pump and pump base shall have suitable provisions such that leakage may be collected and drained away from the pump. 7. The manufacturer shall supply complete factory mounted equipment with sufficient power and signal cable, as required by the location. 8. The pump and drive shall be designed to withstand the maximum turbine run-away speed of the pump due to backflow through the pump. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA HORIZONTAL CHOPPER PUMPS WOODARD & CURRAN 43 23 11-7 9. All electrical materials and equipment shall be UL listed or FM approved and NEMA rated, and shall otherwise be equal to that supplied under Division 26, where applicable. 10. Control status panels shall be factory wired, such that field wiring connections shall require connection of power and control/sensory wiring to the control panel and to the pumps and alarm wiring to the control status panel. Field wiring connections shall be to numbered terminal strips. The entire control system shall be factory tested before shipment. 2.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Each pump shall be designed for the conditions of service tabulated as follows and shall operate within the system head curves appended. B. The pump will be used to recirculate the scum stored in the scum box of the Gravity Thickeners. C. The pumps will be operated at constant speed with start and stop provided either manually or remotely by the instrumentation system specified in Division 40. The motors shall be squirrel cage induction submersible type. D. The submersible chopper pumps shall be as follows: Parameter Design No. of Units 1 (P-0703) Configuration Dry Pit horizontal Max. Capacity (GPM @ ft. TDH) 250 GPM @ 26 ft. TDH Liquid Pumped Primary and Secondary Scum Location Advanced Treatment Building Maximum Motor Size (HP) 5.0 Motor Voltage / Phase / Frequency (Hz) 460 / 3 / 60 Maximum Motor Speed (rpm) 1,800 Pump Discharge Size (in) 3.0 Minimum Solids Size (in) 3.0 Impeller Material Cast Steel Drive Type Motor Starter 2.03 PUMP CONSTRUCTION A. The pump shall be heavy duty, chopper-type, non-clog, single stage horizontal centrifugal pump and shall be designed for the conditions of services specified herein. All pumps shall be designed for the highest possible efficiency consistent with heavy duty operation. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA HORIZONTAL CHOPPER PUMPS WOODARD & CURRAN 43 23 11-8 B. The pump casing shall be of semi-concentric design, with the first half of the circumference being cylindrical beginning after the pump outlet, and the remaining circumference spiraling outward to the 150 lb. flanged centerline discharge. Back pull-out adapter plate shall allow removal of pump components from above the casing, and allow external adjustment of impeller-to-cutter bar clearance. Casing and adapter plate shall be ductile cast iron with all water passages to be smooth, and free of blowholes and imperfections for good flow characteristics. C. Furnish and install for each pump in the tapped holes in the suction and discharge flanges, copper pipe nipples complete with "T"-handle cocks for use in connecting pressure gauges. Nipples shall be of such length and provided with elbows if necessary so that a pressure gauge may be easily installed and read. D. Impeller shall be semi-open chopper type. Chopping/maceration of materials must be accomplished by the action of the curved, cupped and sharpened leading edges at the bottom of the impeller blades as they move across the cutter bar, creating a smooth efficient slicing effect Pump out vanes must be provided across the entire diameter of the impeller on the backing plate, in order to reduce pressure in the seal area, and to draw lubricant down from the reservoir should seal leakage occur. The impeller shall be held in place with a key, shall have no axial adjustments or set screws, and shall not extend past the cutter bar. The impeller shall be cast steel and heat treated to a minimum 60 Rockwell C Hardness, and dynamically balanced. E. Cutter Bar shall be recessed into the pump bowl, and shall extend diametrically across entire pump suction opening. Cutter bar shall be plate steel heat treated to minimum Rockwell C 60. F. Upper Cutter shall be threaded into the back pull-out adapter plate above the impeller, designed to cut against the pump-out vanes and the impeller hub, reducing and removing stringy materials from the mechanical seal area. Upper cutter shall be cast steel and heat treated to a minimum 60 Rockwell C Hardness. G. A cutter nut shall be used to affix the impeller to the shaft, and to eliminate binding or wrapping of stringy materials at the pump inlet. The cutter nut shall consist of a hex head sufficiently sized for ease of removal, and shall include an integral cast anvil which shears against the adjacent surface of the segment bars on the cutter bar. The cutter nut shall be cast steel and heat treated to a minimum 60 Rockwell C Hardness. H. Stuffing boxes shall be readily accessible and arranged for water sealing. The stuffing box shall be made of ASTM A536 ductile cast iron. A tapped hole shall be provided in the stuffing box to align with the lantern ring for sealing water connection. Sealing water piping shall be provided under Division 15. I. Mechanical seal with throttle bushing and water fitting for seal water flush. The seal shaft sleeve shall be Type 3 16 SS. Mechanical seal materials shall be Alloy 20 with silicon carbide faces. Seal shall be positively driven by set-screws. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA HORIZONTAL CHOPPER PUMPS WOODARD & CURRAN 43 23 11-9 Elastomers shall be of Buna N. Contractor is to provide separately a 6-10 gal/hr seal flush with filtered water, a rotameter, throttle valve, and solenoid operated seal water valve. J. The pump shaft and impeller shall be supported by ball bearings. Shafting shall be heat treated steel, adequately sized to minimize deflection during solids chopping. Shaft shall be SAE 1045 steel or better, accurately machined and ground to size. Where shafts pass through stuffing boxes or where exposed directly to sewage, they shall be protected by readily renewable, snug fitting, wearing sleeves, internally ground to the approved tolerances and positively secured to the shaft so as to prevent relative rotation. Passage of water from pump casing between shaft and sleeve shall be prevented by 0-Ring packing or other approved means. Wearing sleeves shall be extra thick, removable, hard, stainless steel containing not less than 13 percent chromium. The shaft sleeve shall extend from the impeller hub through the stuffing box. K. Shaft thrust in both directions shall be taken up by two back-to-back mounted single-row angular contact ball bearings. Two back-to-back mounted single-row radial bearings shall also be provided. B10 bearing life shall be minimum 100,000 hours. L. Bearing Housing shall be cast iron, and machined with piloted bearing fits for concentricity of all components. Interior surfaces of bearing housing shall be powder coated to seal all impurities from contaminating the oil and bearings. Bearing housing shall be oil bath lubricated with ISO Gr. 46 turbine oil and shall include a side-mounted site glass to provide a permanently lubricated assembly. Viton double lip seals riding on stainless steel shaft sleeves are to provide sealing at each end of the bearing housing. M. Anti-friction bearings which are pre-lubricated shall be protected in accordance with the bearing manufacturer's recommendations against the formation of rust during a long period of storage while awaiting the completion of installation and start-up. N. Anti-friction bearings which are not pre-lubricated shall be properly treated in accordance with the bearing manufacturer's recommendations against the formation of rust during a long period of storage while awaiting the completion of the installation and start-up by the application of Exxon Rust Bane No. 392 or an equal treatment. O. The pump assembly shall be mounted horizontally with a 150 LB. ANSI standard inlet flange, drain, cleanout and mounting feet. P. Pump and motor base shall be cast iron or fabricated steel, suitably constructed to support the full weight of pump and motor and shall be provided with grout holes. Base plate shall have a 3/4-in IPS tapped hole to drain leakage from the packing gland. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA HORIZONTAL CHOPPER PUMPS WOODARD & CURRAN 43 23 11-10 Q. The motor shaft shall be connected to the pump shaft through a spacer type, flexible coupling. Furnish a suitable coupling guard in conformance with OSHA. R. The pumps shall be driven by 480 Volt, 3 phase, 60 HZ, horizontal, totally enclosed fan-cooled, inverter duty, premium efficiency, NEMA B design motors with L-10 bearings rated for 100,000 hours. Motors shall be manufactured by General Electric, U.S. Electric, or equal. Motors shall be of a premium efficient design and shall be different from the manufacturer's standard efficient product. S. The pump motor shall be of the squirrel-cage asynchronous speed type. The motor shall be fan cooled and equipped with closed terminal board for electrical connection. The stator winding shall be insulated with moisture resistant Class F insulation, which shall resist temperatures of 315°F. The stator shall be dipped and baked three times in Class F varnish. The motor shall be designed for continuous- duty, capable of sustaining a maximum of 10 evenly spaced starts per hour. The rotor bars and short circuit rings shall be made of aluminum. The motor shaft, delivered with the rotor as an integral part, shall be shafting steel AISI 4340. The stator housing shall be of gray cast iron AISI A48-40B. 2.04 RECIRCULATION SYSTEM A. Two electrically operated valve actuators shall be used to switch between pump-out and mixed operations. A quarter-turn rotary actuator shall be used to provide valve positioning. Unit shall be watertight, Class 1, Div. 1, Groups C&D, 110 volts, single-phase power, and shall be capable of producing 83 ft. lbs. of actuation torque. A manual override shall also be provided. The actuator shall allow for open/close(divert) operation of the valve via a local Open/Close (O/C) pushbutton station. The actuator shall include normally opened dry contacts (5A at 120VAC) for remote indication at the SCADA system of the "LOR switch in remote", "full open" and "full closed (diverted)" positions. The actuator shall accept "open" and "close (divert)" commands by the timers and relays provided under this Section. B. The recirculation system shall be controlled by a series of timers and relays, all of which shall be provided by the pump manufacturer. There must be a timer that will control the time that the recirculation mode will last, and there must be two timers that control the valve actuator motor. Operation shall be as follows: 1. At the start of the pumping cycle, the recirculation valve will be in the recirculation position. To commence the cycle, the recirculation timer shall be switched by the motor starter. When the motor starter closes, this timer starts timing for an operator adjustable time between 0 and 60 minutes which is the length of time that the pump will be in the recirculation mode. 2. When the first timer times out, the discharge valve will move to the discharge position to allow the scum to be pumped from the wet well to the In Plant Pump Station. When the low level is sensed in the wet well, the 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA HORIZONTAL CHOPPER PUMPS WOODARD & CURRAN 43 23 11-11 pump will stop and the recirculation valve will be opened so that the pump will recirculate the contents in the wet well the next time it is energized. 2.05 LUBRICATION A. All lubrication fittings shall be readily accessible from the outside without the necessity of removing covers, plates, housings, or guards. 2.06 FINISHES A. All fabricated steel shall be factory prepared, factory primed and factory finish painted in accordance with Section 09 90 00. Touch-up paint shall be provided as specified to restore integrity of coating system that may be damaged during construction. All paint system components for the entire project shall be the product of a single manufacturer as required by Section 09 90 00 unless otherwise noted on the Drawings or approved by the Engineer. B. Ferrous surfaces not to be painted shall be given a shop coat of grease or other suitable rust-resistant coating. 2.07 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. 2.08 SPARE PARTS AND SPECIAL TOOLS A. Six sets of all special tools required for the maintenance, adjustments, and repair of the equipment shall be provided. B. The manufacturer's recommended spare parts and special tools shall be provided to the Owner prior to the start-up of the equipment. They shall be packaged and identified by name, function and equipment. The Contractor shall unload and store the parts in the location directed by the Owner. C. All spare parts shall be properly protected for long term storage and packed in clearly marked containers as to their contents. D. A set of any special tools required for the normal operation and maintenance of the pumps shall be provided. All such tools shall be furnished in a suitable steel tool chest complete with lock and duplicate keys. E. As a minimum, the following spare parts shall be provided: 1. Five lower mechanical seals. 2. Two complete sets of gaskets and 0-rings for each pump. 3. Five cutter bars. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA HORIZONTAL CHOPPER PUMPS WOODARD & CURRAN 43 23 11-12 4. One impeller 5. Five sets of cutter bar shims. 6. Five cutter bar nuts. 7. Five sets of manufacturer's standard overhaul tools. 8. One shaft sleeve for each pump. 9. One set of pump radial and thrust bearings for each pump. 10. One set of wearing rings for each pump. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Factory Testing 1. All pump tests shall be in accordance with the Hydraulic Institute’s Standards. All tests shall be performed at the manufacturer’s facility prior to shipment. All test results shall be certified by a registered professional engineer, and shall be submitted to Engineer for approval prior to shipment. 2. The pump shall be factory tested as follows: pump shall be hydrostatically tested at 100 psig internal pressure and 30 psig external pressure. Motor and cable insulation shall be tested for moisture content and defects before and after the above tests. Manufacturer shall submit written report with the details and results of the tests. 3. Controls shall be factory tested and documentation of the test shall be submitted. 4. Pump shall be performance tested at all specified duty points, plus five additional points. Pump test curves shall be developed to illustrate conformance with the contract documents. Capacity, head, motor speed, pump speed, efficiency and input horsepower shall be recorded for each test point. For variable speed units, each pump shall be tested at full speed plus 3 equally spaced speeds between maximum and minimum design conditions. 5. All pumping equipment shall be tested to check for proper operation, proper alignment, faulty equipment, and for excessive vibration. The Contractor shall provide vibration testing by a qualified and independent testing company. This testing of the complete system shall cover all duty conditions outlined in this Section of the Specifications. The vibration testing shall be conducted in the presence of the pump and pump motor field 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA HORIZONTAL CHOPPER PUMPS WOODARD & CURRAN 43 23 11-13 service representatives in accordance with procedures outlined in the applicable sections of the Hydraulic Institute Standards and all appropriate Sections of these specifications. 6. In the event vibration exceeds the specified limits and the cause of the vibration is attributable to the pumping equipment, the equipment manufacturers shall make the necessary balancing or alignment adjustments to bring the equipment to within the specified limits. 7. At the discretion and expense of the Contractor, an independent vibration analysis may be conducted on the new wastewater pump. The Contractor and manufacturer will be permitted to witness the test. 8. Each pump shall be hydrostatically tested to 1.5 times shutoff head. 9. All motors shall be tested in accordance with IEEE standards. All test results shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval prior to shipment. Each motor shall be tested at no load running current, high potential, and winding resistance. 10. Pump units shall not be shipped to Site until factory test reports are submitted and approved by Engineer. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Each pump and motor shall be installed in accordance with the written instructions of the manufacturer and under the direct supervision of the manufacturer's representative. Correct installation and assembly of the pumps and other equipment shall be the Contractor's responsibility and shall be in accordance with the Drawings and with the manufacturers' installation instruction manual. The Contractor shall furnish all bolts, shims, tools, and other devices necessary for installing the pumping units. The manufacturer's representative(s) familiar with the equipment being installed shall supervise the handling, installation, start-up, and testing of the equipment. B. A certificate from the pump manufacturer shall be provided stating that the installation of the pumping equipment is satisfactory, that the equipment is ready for operation, and that the operating personnel have been suitably instructed in the operation, lubrication and care of each type unit provided. C. Installation shall include furnishing of all required lubricants for initial operation, including startup and six (6) months of operation. The grades and quantities of oil supplied following acceptance shall be as recommended by the pump manufacturer. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA HORIZONTAL CHOPPER PUMPS WOODARD & CURRAN 43 23 11-14 B. Field Testing. 1. After installation of the pumping units and appurtenances is complete, operating tests shall be carried out to assure that the pumping equipment operates properly. The Contractor shall make arrangements to have the manufacturer's representatives present when field equipment tests are made. Each pumping unit shall be given a running field test in the presence of the Engineer for a minimum of 2 hours. Each pumping unit shall be operated at its rated capacity, the design conditions specified herein, or such other point on its head-capacity curve selected by the Engineer. The Contractor shall provide an accurate and acceptable method of measuring the discharge flow. Tests shall assure that the units and appurtenances have been installed correctly, that the assembly is free from undue stress imposed by the piping or mounting bolts, that there is no objectionable heating, vibration, or noise from any parts, and that all manual and automatic controls function properly. If any deficiencies are revealed during any tests, such deficiencies shall be corrected and the tests shall be re-conducted. 2. Contractor shall Supply all electric power, labor and water or wastewater and auxiliary equipment required to complete the field tests. 3. Provide Field Test Booklets for each unit showing all field tests performed to adjust each component and all field tests performed to prove compliance with the specified performance criteria, upon completion and testing of the installed system. Each test report shall indicate the final position of controls, and all data gathered during testing. 4. If the pump performance does not meet the specified requirements, corrective measures shall be taken, or pumps shall be removed and replaced with pumps with satisfy the conditions specified. 5. The pumps and motors shall be designed and constructed to avoid the generation of objectionable noise or vibration. The sound pressure level at full load shall not exceed 85 (A Seale) decibels above 300 cycles, when measured at a point not exceeding 5-ft from the motor. When operating at any point between no-load and full-load, the vibration measured in a horizontal plane at the top of the motor shall not exceed the limits recommended by the Hydraulic Institute Standards. 6. Any component parts which are damaged as a result of testing or which fail to meet the requirements specified shall be replaced, reinstalled and retested at the Contractor's expense. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA HORIZONTAL CHOPPER PUMPS WOODARD & CURRAN 43 23 11-15 C. Field Painting 1. Stainless steel, galvanized steel, and nonferrous surfaces shall not be painted. 2. Touch-Up Painting: Factory painted items requiring touching up in the field shall be thoroughly cleaned of all foreign material and shall be primed and top-coated with the manufacturer's standard factory finish. 3. Exposed Ferrous Surfaces: Exposed ferrous surfaces shall be painted with two coats of enamel paint conforming to SSPC Paint 21. Factory primed surfaces shall be solvent-cleaned before painting. Surfaces that have not been factory primed shall be prepared and primed with one coat of SSPC Paint 25 or in accordance with the enamel paint manufacturer's recommendations. D. Manufacturer Field Services 1. Provide the services of a factory trained service representative to assist in the installation, start-up, and testing of the equipment, and to perform training to plant personnel in the operation and maintenance of the equipment. A minimum of eight (8 on-site) hours of instruction shall be provided for training on these pumps. Instruction time shall be in addition to startup, checkout, testing and travel time. A factory-trained representative shall be present during testing of all pumps. 2. The manufacturer's representative shall provide minimum services in accordance with the following table: Purpose No. of Days Installation Supervision as required for proper installation Field Testing 2 Operator Training 1 3. The number of days indicated above shall be provided on an 8-hour-day on- site basis and shall be in addition to travel time. 4. The acceptance of O&M training will be in accordance to the successful completion of the Equipment Manufacturer's Certificate of Installation Testing and Instruction. This certificate will be completed by the manufacturer's representative and the Owner at the completion of the vendor training session. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA HORIZONTAL CHOPPER PUMPS WOODARD & CURRAN 43 23 11-16 a. This instruction period shall be scheduled at least 10 days in advance with the Owner and shall take place prior to plant start-up and acceptance by the Owner. The final copies of operation and maintenance manuals must have been delivered to the Owner prior to scheduling the instruction period with the Owner. 5. The actual number of days on site shall be increased as necessary, without additional cost to the Owner, to accomplish the purposes indicated. 6. The follow-up visit shall be at such time as requested by the Owner within the warranty period to answer questions, address specific problems, and review start up. 7. Service scheduling shall be provided, at the Owner's request, and at no additional cost to the Owner, at any time during the warranty period. 8. Manufacturer shall submit a letter stating that he has inspected the installation and checked its performance and certifies that the installation is satisfactory, that the system is operating correctly, and that the system meets all the requirements of this Section. 3.04 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS Operation and Maintenance Manuals shall be provided as specified below: A. Each Item of Equipment and Each System: Include a description of unit or system, and component parts. Give function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions. Include performance curves with engineering data, head loss, tests, and certifications where appropriate and complete nomenclature and commercial number of replaceable parts, where applicable. B. Panel Board Circuit Directories: Provide electrical service characteristics and name of load on each branch circuit breaker. C. Operating Procedures: Include start-up, break-in, and routine normal operating instructions and sequences. Include regulation, control, stopping, shut-down, and. emergency instructions. Include summer, winter, and any special operating instructions. D. Maintenance Requirements: Include routine procedures and guide for trouble- shooting; disassembly, repair, and reassembly instructions; alignment, adjusting, balancing, and checking instructions. Provide servicing and lubrication schedule, and list of lubricants required, cleaning requirements and frequency. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA HORIZONTAL CHOPPER PUMPS WOODARD & CURRAN 43 23 11-17 E. Controls: Provide the following: 1. Sequence of operation. 2. Original parts list, illustrations, assembly drawings, and diagrams required for maintenance. 3. As-installed control diagrams. 4. Contractor's coordination drawings, with as-installed color coded piping diagrams. 5. Charts of valve tag numbers, with location and function of each valve, keyed to flow and control diagrams. 6. As-installed color coded wiring diagrams. 3.05 STARTUP & COMMISSIONING A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. END OF SECTION This page intentionally left blank 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA DOUBLE DISC PUMPS WOODARD & CURRAN 43 23 80-1 SECTION 43 23 80 DOUBLE DISC PUMPS PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 PROPRIETARY NOTIFICATION A. The Owner has determined that it is in the Public interest to include in the Specifications for the Project, the requirement that the Double Disc Pumps as described in this Section be a proprietary item, specifically Penn Valley Pump, or approved equal. The reason for this determination is that the Town has standardized double disc pumps by the same manufacturer, thus ensuring the following: interchangeability of parts to simplify and reduce the cost of maintenance and repairs, one common vendor to contact for service, familiarity with operators regarding operation and maintenance requirements, and common control schemes. B. Should the Contractor request a substituted system, the Owner must evaluate and determine whether the requested substitution is equal based upon the following: 1. It is at least equal in quality, durability, appearance, strength and design. 2. It will perform at least equally the function imposed by the general design for the public work being contracted for or the material being purchased. 3. It conforms substantially, even with deviations, to the detailed requirements, for the items included in this and related sections. C. Should a substituted system be approved by the Owner, the Contractor shall be responsible for all costs of redesign, including efforts associated with review and approval of the substituted system, necessary to incorporate the substituted system into the existing facility and remaining aspects of the Project. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Section Includes 1. All related appurtenances, including but not limited to: double disc pumps, motors, discharge back pressure valve, suction vacuum switch assembly, discharge pressure switch assembly, pump base assembly, controls, and all related accessories necessary to install complete operational double disc pumping systems for three (3) Primary Sludge applications, two (2) Scum applications and one (1) Press Feed application. B. Items Not Furnished Under This Section 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA DOUBLE DISC PUMPS WOODARD & CURRAN 43 23 80-2 1. Additional appurtenances such as mechanical piping, electrical connections, anchor bolts, variable frequency drives and equipment assembly shall be provided by others under a separate contract. The double disc pump Manufacturer shall be responsible for starting up and testing the equipment after it is installed as specified in PART 3 of this Specification. C. Related Requirements 1. Division 9 – Finishes 2. Section 40 23 00 – Process Piping 3. Section 40 05 23 – Process Valves and Strainers 4. Section 40 90 00 – Instrumentation and Control for Process Systems 5. Division 26 - Electrical 1.03 REFERENCES A. Reference Standards 1. ASTM International (ASTM) a. ASTM A 269(2008) Standard Specification for Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Tubing for General Service b. ASTM A 276(2008a) Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes c. ASTM A 351/A 351M (2006) Standard Specification for Castings, Austenitic, Austenitic-Ferritic (Duplex), for Pressure-Containing Parts d. ASTM A 403/A 403M(2007a) Standard Specification for Wrought Austenitic Stainless Steel Piping Fittings e. ASTM A 48/A 48M (2003; R 2008) Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings f. ASTM A 666(2003) Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold- Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate and Flat Bar g. ASTM F 593(2002; R 2008) Stainless Steel Bolts, Hex Cap Screws, and Studs h. ASTM F 594(2008) Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Nuts 2. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) a. NEMA MG 1(2007; Errata 2008) Standard for Motors and Generators 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA DOUBLE DISC PUMPS WOODARD & CURRAN 43 23 80-3 3. Society for Protective Coatings (SSPC) a. SSPC SP 10(2007) Near-White Blast Cleaning 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. B. Product Data 1. Complete materials list of all items to be provided including supplier and delivery schedule. 2. Manufacturer's specifications and product data required to demonstrate compliance with requirements which shall include complete parts listing showing materials of construction with applicable ANSI, ASTM or other standards. 3. Type, thickness, application procedure and test for coatings, and non- metallic and metallic linings. 4. Certified dimension prints showing all details of fabrication, assembly, installation including anchorage details. 5. Manufacturer's recommended testing, operation and maintenance procedures including a list of special tools and equipment required to maintain the units. 6. Data on characteristics and performance of each pump. Data shall include guaranteed performance curves based on actual test data of duplicate units which show compliance with the specified requirements for head, capacity, efficiency, NPSHr, brake horsepower, motor horsepower, speed, and shutoff head. Performance curves for variable speed units shall show head and capacity in 100 rpm increments from minimum to maximum speed in addition to the above. Curves shall be plotted capacity versus head, brake horsepower, efficiency and NPSH required. 7. Provide a “letter of compliance” from the pump manufacturer stating that the characteristics of each pump (specifically naming the respective pumps) will not overload the specified motor horsepower under any head condition when operating at the specified maximum speed. 8. The weight of each major component and the total weight of the equipment. 9. A list of the manufacturer’s recommended spare parts including gaskets, bearings, and seals. 10. Complete data on motors including complete performance characteristics. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA DOUBLE DISC PUMPS WOODARD & CURRAN 43 23 80-4 11. Complete wiring diagrams and elementary or control schematics. 12. Deviations from the Contract Documents. 13. Data on characteristics and performance of each piece of equipment. Data shall include guaranteed performance curves based on actual test data, which show compliance with the specified requirements for flow and pressure. 14. The manufacturer shall provide the Contractor and Engineer with “Written Documentation” of all control set points which include but are not limited to hard wired interlock switch set points (suction and pressure), for the pumps to protect them from damage and to ensure proper equipment operation and function. Include “Written Documentation” describing the Manufacturer’s desired procedures for pumping equipment operation in conjunction with set points and interlock switches. 15. Drawings shall also indicate where access points for maintenance and operations are located on the equipment. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. B. Materials and equipment shall be the standard products of a Manufacturer regularly engaged in the production of such products and shall essentially duplicate items that have been in satisfactory use in identical applications in other waste water treatment facilities. The Manufacturer shall have a minimum of ten (10) years of documented experience in the design and production of carbon double disc sludge pumps, and not less than five (5) years of experience in the production of equal or larger sized models/designs of the exact equipment as specified herein. C. Equipment shall be supported by a service organization that is, in the opinion of the Engineer, reasonably convenient to the site to ensure parts and service can be acquired in a timely fashion. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. B. All spare parts shall be packed in containers bearing labels clearly designating the contents and respective pieces of equipment for which they are intended. All spare parts shall be delivered at the same time as the pertaining equipment. C. All equipment delivered and placed in storage shall be stored with protection from the weather, humidity, temperature variations, dirt, dust, or other contaminants in accordance with the Manufacturer's written instructions. Finished surfaces of all 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA DOUBLE DISC PUMPS WOODARD & CURRAN 43 23 80-5 exposed pump openings shall be protected by wooden blanks or other suitable covers to prevent foreign material and debris from entering the pumps. 1.07 WARRANTY A. The Manufacturer shall provide a full & comprehensive warranty for all equipment specified in this section. The equipment shall be warrantied to be free from defects in workmanship, design, and materials for a period of one (1) year from Manufacturer’s startup. If any part of the equipment supplied under this section should fail during the Manufacturer's warranty period, replacement of parts or the unit itself shall be provided at no expense to the Owner. The Manufacturer shall incur all costs including but not limited to parts, labor, service, technicians, shipping, and handling required for restoration of equipment to active service as required under the Manufacturer's warranty. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturer List 1. Penn Valley Pump Company 2. Or Engineer Approved Equal B. Product Options 1. All double disc pumps of the same type, style, and duty shall be supplied by a single Manufacturer. 2.02 DESCRIPTION A. The double disc sludge pumping equipment shall be of the positive displacement type, specifically designed to pump primary sludge, blended primary and waste activated sludge, and scum at the specified range of solids contents without plugging or ragging. The pumping action shall be created by utilizing dual reciprocating discs driven by a rotating eccentric shaft. The reciprocating discs shall also perform the duty of valves. Each pump shall provide a smooth operating, double acting, non-clogging, pumping action. Flexing membranes shall provide shaft sealing without the need for sliding or rotating seals. The pumps shall be capable of indefinite operation in a "totally dry condition" without damage. B. All pump materials and equipment shall be as specified herein. All pumping equipment shall be suitable for "Continuous" (24 Hour per Day) and/or "Intermittent" operation under the specified design conditions. Materials and equipment shall be new and unused, except for testing as required. Where two or more pieces of equipment performing the same function are required, they shall be duplicate products of the same Manufacturer. Under no circumstances, under the 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA DOUBLE DISC PUMPS WOODARD & CURRAN 43 23 80-6 specified range of operation, shall the pump(s) be subjected to factors including but not limited to: overheating, excessive vibration, and excessive strain. 2.03 PERFORMANCE/DESIGN CRITERIA A. All pumps shall be sized to accommodate the flow range as indicated in the following design criteria. The pump Manufacturer shall size each pump to meet the specified capacity requirements while also providing the maximum possible turndown to maximize operational flexibility. The pumped fluid shall be primary sludge, blended primary and waste activated sludge, and scum. Specifications for pump design and operating conditions shall in accordance with the following criteria: Table 1: Pump Operation Design Criteria Parameter Primary Sludge Pumps (P-0501, P-0502, P- 0503) Gravity Thickener Scum Feed Pumps (P-0701, P-0702) Press Feed Pump (P-0614) Number of Units 3 2 1 Flow (gpm) 80 30 175 TDH (ft.) 26 50 60 Motor Horsepower 5 5 10 Maximum Solid Size 1-inch solid Suction & Discharge Connection 4” 3” 6” Maximum Pump Speed (RPM) 500 Turndown Range 20:1 min Pumped Fluid Primary Sludge Scum Primary and Waste Activated Sludge Fluid Solids Content 1-5% Power Supply 460 Volts, 3 Phase, 60 Hertz, TEFC NPSHa /Flooded Suction Head 41 ft. 33 ft. 23.5 ft. Motor Mounting Piggy-Back Piggy-Back Side Mount Drive Motor Starter Motor Starter VFD B. There shall be no significant change in vibration and/or noise level over the entire specified range of operating conditions for each pumping system. The motor sizing shall provide a minimum of 25% reserve motor horsepower as evidenced by specific requirements at the maximum design conditions on a certified performance curve. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA DOUBLE DISC PUMPS WOODARD & CURRAN 43 23 80-7 2.04 PUMP BODY A. Each pump shall be provided with an ASTM A 48/A 48M, Class 30, cast iron housing. Each pump shall consist of three (3) housings horizontally split to allow access to the internal components. All pumps shall incorporate a repair-in-place hinged design that allows the pump to be serviced and discs to be replaced without removal of the pump from the suction and discharge piping. The discharge housing shall contain mounting lugs which shall be bolted directly to the mounting frame. The discharge, intermediate and suction housings shall incorporate an integral hinge arrangement that allows the suction and intermediate housings to be lowered and removed. The hinges shall be connected to each other with a quick release ball detent pin allowing for easy pin removal. B. Each pump body shall be provided with ANSI 150 lb. flanged suction and discharge connections of sizes as previously specified. The pump body shall be designed for a maximum shut-off head of 110 psi. Each pump body shall be hydrostatically tested to 50 percent above the shut-off head. The suction nozzle shall be a two piece design to allow for access to the clack valve for replacement. All pumps shall be mounted on a 304L stainless steel frame configured to provide access to the bottom of the pump body for maintenance. 2.05 DISCS AND TRUNNIONS A. The suction and discharge discs shall be universal and interchangeable with each other to increase the commonality of spare parts and eliminate potential confusion for the Owner. The discs shall be heavy duty, integral design, constructed of high tensile Buna-N with multiple layers of fabric for longevity and strength. Each disc shall be mounted to the connecting rod by a stub shaft constructed of hardened high tensile stainless steel. B. Sealing of the internal portions of the pump at the connecting rods shall be with flexible fabric reinforced Buna-N trunnions. Packing rings, mechanical seals, or water seals shall not be acceptable. The discs and trunnions shall be capable of withstanding a closed suction/discharge condition without damage. The discs and trunnions shall also be designed for a stall pressure of at least 110 psi. 2.06 SUCTION HOUSING A. The swan neck entry port to the suction housing shall be a two (2) piece design allowing for mounting of the suction connection in 90 degree increments to allow easy access for clack valve replacement. The upper swan neck shall be provided with a 2 inch NPT connection to allow mounting of the suction pulsation dampener. The entry port shall be a full diameter as previously specified to minimize the potential for debris buildup and blockages. The seating surface for the clack valve shall be machined on the mounting face of the swan neck. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA DOUBLE DISC PUMPS WOODARD & CURRAN 43 23 80-8 2.07 CLACK VALVE A. The clack valve shall be integrally mounted to the swan neck to facilitate access and replacement. The clack valve shall be manufactured of Buna-N construction with multiple layers of fabric encapsulating a rigid core. The clack valve shall incorporate an integral O-ring for positive sealing. 2.08 BEARING ASSEMBLY A. The bearing drive assembly shall consist of two (2) aluminum modular pedestals designed to provide accurate bearing alignment, superior bearing loading and ease of assembly. The drive shaft shall be a minimum 30 mm diameter. The drive shaft shall be capable of withstanding a dead head situation. The shaft shall be constructed of hardened high-tensile 400 series stainless steel and shall be mounted on four (4) self-aligning, sealed bearings. The eccentric cams shall be constructed of high tensile, cast bronze alloy and shall be pinned to the shaft by spiral drive pins to allow for the absorption of reciprocating loads generated by the pumping action. All drive bearings shall be completely sealed and shall not require any scheduled grease lubrication. B. All drive shaft bearings shall be anti-friction type, designed for all radial and thrust loads, including the belt drive. All bearings shall have an ABMA minimum B-10 life rating of 100,000 hours when operating at maximum design pump speed, capacity and head. The shaft and bearings shall be designed to withstand operation at a maximum pressure of 110 psi. All bearings shall include provisions for re- greasing. C. The eccentrics shall produce a stroke length sufficient to achieve a pump displacement of 0.22 gallons or greater when operating against the maximum design head previously specified. Eccentric bearings shall be anti-friction type ball bearings, with an ABMA minimum B-10 life rating of 100,000 hours when operating at maximum design pump speed, capacity and head. Bearings shall have provisions for re-greasing. 2.09 DRIVE ASSEMBLY A. Each pump shall be operated through a variable speed V-belt and drive assembly consisting of a two (2) groove arrangement. The pulley ratios shall be sized to provide the maximum pump speed and turndown previously specified. The drive assembly shall provide the required torque generated between the pump and motor. Each pump shall be provided with OSHA approved guards and covers. The V-belt drive cover and pump drive assembly cover shall be manufactured from 304L stainless steel. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA DOUBLE DISC PUMPS WOODARD & CURRAN 43 23 80-9 2.10 MOTOR A. Unless otherwise specified or indicated on the Drawings, all pump motors shall be designed for 460 volts, 3 phase, 60 hertz service. All motors shall be NEMA "Premium Efficiency" design. Motors that do not meet EPACT efficiency ratings shall not be acceptable. All motors shall have a NEMA B design rating. All stator windings and leads shall have a minimum Class F insulation rating. B. All motor housings shall be constructed of ASTM A 48/A 48M, Class 30 cast iron. All motors shall be designed for "Continuous" (24 Hours per Day) and/or "Intermittent" duty. All motors shall be capable of handling a minimum of 15 equally spaced starts per hour. All windings shall be rated for inverter duty in accordance with NEMA MG1, Part 31 standards to reduce damage caused by voltage spikes associated with variable frequency drives (VFDs). Motors that do not utilize inverter spike resistant windings shall not be acceptable. C. The combined service factor of all motors shall be a minimum of 1.15. The motor horsepower shall be selected such that the unit is non-overloading over the entire specified performance range. All motors shall conform to NEMA MG 1 standards. D. The rated horsepower shall be such that the motors will not be overloaded nor the service factor reduced when the pumps are operated at any point on the performance curve. Totally enclosed fan cooled motors shall be provided of the frame size selected by the pump Manufacturer to prevent overheating when continuously operated at minimum speed and full output torque. Provide a normally closed thermal switch in each drive motor to stop the motor on high winding temperature. 2.11 BASE FRAME ASSEMBLY A. Each pump and V-Belt assembly shall be mounted on a common 304L stainless steel sub base. The base design shall have raised cross-members on the suction and discharge end to allow for complete wash-out and draining without trapping liquid. Each sub base shall be manufactured from two (2) inch (minimum) 304L stainless steel square tubing. Each base shall be sufficiently gusseted, reinforced and braced to withstand all shock loads and resist all wearing and buckling during pump operation under the specified design conditions. All tubing ends shall be capped with black plastic plugs. B. The height of the base frame assemblies shall be finalized during the submittal phase. C. All components shall be fabricated from sheets and plates of AISI Type 304L stainless steel with a finish conforming to ASTM A 666 standards, unless otherwise specified or indicated on the Drawings. All rolled or extruded shapes shall be fabricated to conform to ASTM A 276 standards. All tubular products and fittings shall be fabricated from 304L stainless steel and conform to ASTM A 269, ASTM A 351/A 351M and ASTM A 403/A 403M standards. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA DOUBLE DISC PUMPS WOODARD & CURRAN 43 23 80-10 2.12 PULSATION DAMPERS A. Pulsation dampeners shall be provided on the suction and discharge lines of each pump. Dampener diameters shall match suction and discharge diameters included in Paragraph 203. shall be appropriate diameter schedule 40 carbon steel pipe with fully welded end caps. The suction dampener shall mount directly to the suction swan neck through a two (2) inch NPT connection. The discharge dampener shall be a separate piece with four (4) inch ASA 150 lb flanged connections. The dampeners shall be pressure tested to 60 psi for leaks. Each dampener shall be drilled and tapped at the top with a one (1) inch NPT connection. The connections shall be suitable for a pressure gauge/switch assembly as shown on the Drawings. Bladder type and three-piece assemblies using connecting rods and gaskets shall not be acceptable. The dampeners shall be air charged and shall be provided with a 316 stainless steel quick connect air charging connection with 316 stainless steel isolation ball valves. 2.13 VACUUM/PRESSURE SWITCHES AND GUAGES A. Provide vacuum gauges and switch assemblies on the suction side of each pump in addition to pressure gauges and switch assembles on the discharge side of each pump. The gauge/switch combination units shall be located on top of the suction and discharge pulsation dampener, respectively. The switches shall be designed to transmit an alarm signals to the control system. The pressure switches/gauges shall be of the same Manufacturer and model as the rest of the plant to ensure uniformity and simplicity for the Owner. The use of pressure switches/gauges from different Manufacturer's shall not be acceptable. B. The suction unit shall indicate pump suction pressure and shutdown the pump in the event of low suction pressure. The discharge gauge/pressure switch assembly shall indicate pump discharge pressure and shutdown the pump in the event of high discharge pressure. The assemblies shall be suitable for the process design conditions previously specified. The discharge gauge shall have a range of 0 to 100 psi. The suction gauge shall have a range of 0-30 in. Hg. Gauge accuracy shall be Class 2A, +/- 0.5 percent of scale range. Bourdon tube assembly shall be TIG welded 316 stainless steel. Connections shall be l/4 inch MNPT. Dials shall be liquid filled have black lettering and scales on a white background. All gauges shall bear a legend showing service and units of graduation. Gauge dials shall be sealed to prevent entrance of moist air. Cases shall be constructed of 316 stainless steel. C. Gauge and switch accessories shall include a seal with a housing constructed of 316 stainless steel. The seal shall be a diaphragm type with a flushing connection beneath the diaphragm or a annular sensing ring type with EPDM elastomers. The seal and gauge/switch assembly shall be shipped assembled with factory filled glycerin. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA DOUBLE DISC PUMPS WOODARD & CURRAN 43 23 80-11 2.14 DISCHARGE BACK PRESSURE VALVE A. The pump manufacturer shall provide an adjustable back pressure valve for the discharge header as recommended for the discharge layout (varies by pump application). B. The valve shall be of cast iron construction with an elastomeric faced valve disc for positive sealing and silent operation. Valve shall be capable of being mounted either vertically or horizontally. C. The valve shall incorporate a stainless steel 304 mounting bracket and customer engineered spring allowing pressure adjustment from 2 – 10psi. When valve is fully opened the back pressure shall not increase more than 3 psi over set pressure. 2.15 LOCAL CONTROL PANELS A. The pump manufacturer shall provide individual local control panels to monitor the suction (vacuum), discharge (pressure) and thermal switches for each pump. The panels shall be rated for minimum NEMA 12 atmosphere and shall have the following controls and alarms. 1. High Suction Vacuum Pressure Alarm Light (Amber) 2. High Discharge Pressure Alarm light (Amber) 3. Motor temperature overload light (Amber) 4. Power On Light (White) 5. Run light (Green) 6. Stop Light (Red) 7. Reset pushbutton 8. E-stop 9. High suction pressure (Vacuum) signal outputs (1 for each pump) 10. High discharge pressure signal outputs (1 for each pump) 11. High motor temperature signal outputs (1 for each pump) B. Hard wired interlocks shall be provided in the local control panel to shut down the pumps under a high vacuum condition, high pressure condition or motor temperature overload. The pumps will only return to automatic operation when the reset push button is pressed at the local control panel. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA DOUBLE DISC PUMPS WOODARD & CURRAN 43 23 80-12 2.16 HARDWARE A. All bolts, nuts, washers, appurtenances and related fastening hardware for the pumps, including anchor bolts, shall be furnished by the Manufacturer and all hardware shall be type 316 stainless steel. All stainless steel components shall be electro-polished or pacified to obtain maximum corrosion resistance. All necessary hardware, attachments, and related appurtenances for installation of all equipment shall be furnished. All stainless steel bolts shall comply with ASTM F 593 standards. Stainless steel nuts shall comply with ASTM F 594 standards. 2.17 FINISHES A. All fabricated steel, aluminum and cast iron shall be factory prepared, factory primed and factory finished painted in accordance with Section 09 90 00. Touch- up paint shall be provided as specified to restore integrity of coating system that may be damaged during construction. All paint system components for the entire project shall be the product of a single manufacturer as required by Section 09 90 00 unless otherwise noted on the Drawings or approved by the Engineer. B. Ferrous surfaces not to be painted shall be given a shop coat of grease or other suitable rust-resistant coating. 2.18 SPARE PARTS A. Spare Parts 1. The Manufacturer shall furnish a total of one (1) set of the following spare parts for each of the double disc sludge pumps specified in this section. At a minimum, a set of spare parts for each pump shall include the following: a. One (1) Suction Disc b. One (1) Discharge Disc c. Two (2) Trunnions d. One (1) Complete Set of Gaskets (including but not limited to suction, discharge, swan neck gaskets) e. One (1) Clack Valve 2. The spare parts shall be individually boxed with the project name and part number clearly identified on each individual box. All spare parts shall be shipped in a separate crate and clearly labeled. B. Tools 1. Furnish one (1) set of all special tools required to completely assemble, disassemble, or maintain the equipment. Special tools shall refer to oversized or specially dimensioned tools, special attachments or fixtures, or 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA DOUBLE DISC PUMPS WOODARD & CURRAN 43 23 80-13 any similar items. One (1) set of special tools shall be provided for each size system. 2.19 NAMEPLATES A. Each major item of equipment shall have the Manufacturer's name, address, type or style, model or serial number, catalog number, rated capacity, speed, and all other pertinent data on a plate secured to the item of equipment. The nameplate for each electric motor shall show at least the minimum information required by NEMA MG 1 standards. B. Each item of equipment (including associated instrumentation) shall have an engraved nameplate bearing the alphanumeric tag number and the descriptive name of the equipment. The nameplate securely affixed in a conspicuous place. The Manufacturer shall coordinate final nameplate wording and descriptive names with the Owner and Engineer prior to ordering. Install all equipment tag nameplates in a location as directed by the Engineer and Owner. 2.20 OILS AND LUBRICANTS A. The Manufacturer shall state in the operating and maintenance manual the amount of and specification for any lubricants required. All lubricants for the equipment shall be non-proprietary and easily obtainable from a local source for operations staff convenience. Designs which utilize proprietary and/or special lubricants shall not be acceptable. B. The Manufacturer shall furnish oil, grease and lubrication required for initial operation plus one (1) full year of service for each pump. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Each pump and motor shall be installed in by the Owner’s Contractor accordance with the written instructions of the Manufacturer and under the direct supervision of the Manufacturer's representative. Correct installation and assembly of each pump and ancillary equipment shall be the Contractor's responsibility. The Contractor shall install each pump and all related appurtenances in accordance with the Drawings and the Manufacturers' installation instruction manual. B. All appurtenances required for a complete and operating pumping system shall be provided, including but not limited to such items as piping, conduit, valves, wall sleeves, wall pipes, concrete foundations, anchors, anchor bolts, grouting, drivers, power supply, and controls (excluding the Local Control Panels). 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA DOUBLE DISC PUMPS WOODARD & CURRAN 43 23 80-14 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field Tests 1. Prior to acceptance, an operational test of all equipment, drivers, and control systems shall be performed by the Manufacturer to determine if the installed equipment meets the purpose and intent of the specifications. Tests shall demonstrate that the equipment is not electrically, mechanically, structurally, or otherwise defective; is in safe and satisfactory operating condition; and conforms with the specified operating characteristics. Prior to applying electrical power to any motor driven equipment, the drive train shall be rotated by hand to demonstrate free operation of all mechanical parts. Tests shall include checks for excessive vibration, leaks in all piping and seals, correct operation of control systems, proper alignment, excessive noise levels, and power consumption. 2. Manufacturer to provide labor and necessary testing materials/supplies to conduct proper field tests. 3. The Manufacturer shall test and inspect "all" necessary controls which include but are not limited to: all VFD set points and hard wired interlock switch set points, pressure switches, etc., required for proper functionality without causing damage to the equipment. The Manufacturer's representative shall provide the Contractor and Engineer with "all" necessary set points "in writing" prior to the site acceptance test visit as outlined in the submittals. 4. Provide Field Test Booklets for each unit showing all field tests performed to adjust each component and all field tests performed to prove compliance with the specified performance criteria upon completion and testing of the installed system. Each test report shall indicate the final position of controls. 5. Field testing shall demonstrate that all controls and systems function properly. A successful field test shall include "Continuous" operation of each pump for a minimum period of four (4) hours without alarms or shut downs, except as intended for testing. During testing the following items shall be measured at three (3) points specified previously. a. Discharge Head b. Suction Head c. Capacity d. Pump Speed e. Amperage draw B. Non-Conforming Tests 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA DOUBLE DISC PUMPS WOODARD & CURRAN 43 23 80-15 1. If the equipment does not successfully pass the tests listed above, the Manufacturer shall repair the equipment and perform the tests again until passing the tests successfully. If any deficiencies are revealed during any test, such deficiencies shall be corrected and the tests shall be re-conducted at no additional cost to the Owner or Engineer. C. Manufacturer’s Services 1. Services of a Manufacturer's representative who is experienced in the installation, adjustment, and operation of the equipment specified shall be provided. The Manufacturer shall submit qualifications of the representative for approval by the Engineer. The on-site days listed below are exclusive of travel time and do not relieve the Contractor of the obligation to provide sufficient service to place the equipment into satisfactory operation. 2. The Manufacturer's representative shall supervise adjustment and testing of the equipment. The Manufacturer's representative shall be present for a period of not less than one (1) day (8-hours on-site), to inspect the installed equipment, supervise the initial test run, field tests at specified design points and to provide field training to the plant personnel. 3. The Manufacturer's representative shall provide a certification of proper installation and satisfactory operation to the Owner and Engineer for each pump application. Certification shall be signed and dated by Manufacturer's representative. 4. The Manufacturer's representative shall make all necessary adjustments and settings to the controls and verify the high and low pressure / vacuum switch set points for each pump. 3.03 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. B. Training 1. A field training course shall be provided for designated operating and maintenance staff members. 2. Training shall be provided in conjunction with the visit of the Manufacturer’s representative. 3. The training shall start after the system is functionally complete but prior to final acceptance tests. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA DOUBLE DISC PUMPS WOODARD & CURRAN 43 23 80-16 4. Field training shall cover all of the items contained in the operating and maintenance manuals, including normal operations, trouble-shooting, maintenance, lubrication, and other related work. 5. Manufacturer shall demonstrate disassembly of the pump including removal/replacement of a diaphragm disc. END OF SECTION 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA SUBMERSIBLE PROPELLER PUMPS WOODARD & CURRAN 43 24 11-1 SECTION 43 24 11 SUBMERSIBLE PROPELLER PUMPS PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 PROPRIETARY NOTIFICATION A. The Owner has determined that it is in the Public interest to include in the Specifications for the Project, the requirement that the Submersible Propeller Pumps as described in this Section be a proprietary item, specifically Sulzer/ABS, or Engineer approved equal. The reason for this determination is that the Town has standardized submersible propeller pumps by the same manufacturer, thus ensuring the following: interchangeability of parts to simplify and reduce the cost of maintenance and repairs, one common vendor to contact for service, familiarity with operators regarding operation and maintenance requirements, and common control schemes. B. Should the Contractor request a substituted system, the Engineer must evaluate and determine whether the requested substitution is equal based upon the following: 1. It is at least equal in quality, durability, appearance, strength and design. 2. It will perform at least equally the function imposed by the general design for the public work being contracted for or the material being purchased. 3. It conforms substantially, even with deviations, to the detailed requirements, for the items included in this and related sections. C. Should a substituted system be approved by the Owner, the Contractor shall be responsible for all costs of redesign, including efforts associated with review and approval of the substituted system, necessary to incorporate the substituted system into the existing facility and remaining aspects of the Project. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Section Includes 1. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals to install submersible axial flow, propeller draft pumps, slide rail systems, portable davit cranes, and appurtenances with all accessories as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein. B. Related Requirements 1. Division 26 - Electrical 2. Section 09 90 00 – Painting 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA SUBMERSIBLE PROPELLER PUMPS WOODARD & CURRAN 43 24 11-2 3. Section 40 05 15 – Process Pipe Supports 4. Section 40 90 00 – Instrumentation and Control for Process Systems 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings and product data. Submittals shall include the following: 1. Certified dimensional drawings of each item of equipment and auxiliary apparatus to be furnished. 2. Certified foundation, pump support and anchor bolt plans and details. 3. Schematic electrical wiring diagram and other data as required for complete pump and motor installation and pump controls installation. 4. Literature and drawings describing the equipment in sufficient detail, including parts list and materials of construction, to indicate full conformance with the detail specifications. 5. Total weight of equipment including weight of single largest item. 6. A complete total bill of materials of all equipment. 7. Complete parts list for equipment furnished and list of manufacturer's recommended spare parts with current price for each item. Include gaskets, seals, etc. on the list. List bearings by the bearing manufacturer's name and number. 8. Complete description of surface preparation and shop prime painting, 9. Manufacturer's Warranty. B. Design Data 1. Manufacturer's certified rating curves, to satisfy the specified design conditions, showing 2. pump characteristics of discharge, head, brake horsepower, efficiency and guaranteed net positive suction head required (NPSHR). Curves shall show the full recommended range of performance and include shut-off head. This information shall be prepared specifically for the pump proposed. Catalog sheets showing a family of curves will not be acceptable. 3. Complete data on motors and accessories as specified in Section 01171, including ratings, electrical data, enclosures, cooling, insulation, motor efficiency and wiring diagrams. Tabulated data for the drive motors shall include rated horsepower, full load rpm, power factor and efficiency curves, service factor and kW input including when the pump is at its design point. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA SUBMERSIBLE PROPELLER PUMPS WOODARD & CURRAN 43 24 11-3 Submit a certified statement from the motor manufacturer that the motors are capable of continuous operation on the power supply without affecting their design life for bearings or windings. 4. A statement indicating bearing life. C. Test Reports 1. Certified motor and pump test data. 2. Tabulated data for the drive motors including rated horsepower, full load rpm, power factor and efficiency curves full load, service factor and kW input, including when the pump is at its design point. Submit a certified statement from the motor manufacturer that the motors are capable of continuous operation on the power supply without affecting their design life for bearings or windings. 3. A schedule of the date of shop testing and delivery of the equipment to the job site. 4. Description of pump factory test procedures and equipment. 5. A statement that the pump will function properly as installed with respect to the suction piping layout as shown on the Drawings. D. Operation and Maintenance Data 1. Complete operating and maintenance instructions shall be furnished for all equipment included under this Section as provided in Section 01730. The maintenance instructions shall include troubleshooting data and full preventative maintenance schedules and complete spare parts lists with ordering information. The manual shall be prepared specifically for this installation and shall include all required cuts, drawings, equipment lists, descriptions, etc. that are required to instruct operating and maintenance personnel unfamiliar with such equipment. 2. A technical representative of the pump manufacturer who has complete knowledge of proper operation and maintenance shall be provided for a minimum of two (2) days to instruct representatives of the Owner and Engineer on proper operation and maintenance. This work may be conducted in conjunction with the inspection of installation and test run as provided in PART 3. If more time is needed to adequately perform these services or if there are difficulties in operation of the equipment due to the manufacturer's design or fabrication, additional service shall be provided at no additional cost to the Owner. 3. Services of a technical representative shall also be provided when each pump is started-up. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA SUBMERSIBLE PROPELLER PUMPS WOODARD & CURRAN 43 24 11-4 E. In the event that it is not possible to conform to certain details of these Specifications, describe completely all nonconforming aspects. 1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. American National Standard Institute (ANSI) B. American Bearing Manufacturers Association (ABMA) C. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) D. National Electrical Code (NEC) E. Factory Mutual (FM) F. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) G. American Gear Manufacturer’ Association (AGMA) H. American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM) I. Standards of the American Water Works Association (AWWA) J. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE) K. Standards of the Hydraulic Institute (HI) L. ISO 9001:2000 M. Where reference is made to one of the above standards, the revision in effect at the time of bid opening shall apply. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The draft pumps shall be Model RCP500A120/12 as manufactured by Sulzer/ABS or Engineer Approved Equal. B. The rated horsepower of the drive unit shall be such that the unit will not be overloaded nor the service factor reduced when the pump is operated at any point on the pump's capacity curve. If, due to the slope of the pump's performance curve, a drive unit of greater horsepower than specified is required to meet this condition, the pump will be considered for approval only if any and all changes in electrical work, etc, required by such a change will be provided at no additional cost to the Owner and be to the satisfaction of the Engineer. C. Call out of a specific pump model and manufacturer does not relieve the manufacturer from the responsibility of meeting all manufacturing and performance requirements specified herein. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA SUBMERSIBLE PROPELLER PUMPS WOODARD & CURRAN 43 24 11-5 D. All pumping equipment furnished under this section shall be from a single supplier that shall be regularly engaged in the design, manufacture, and furnishing of wastewater pumping equipment for a minimum of 10 years. The manufacturer shall be able to show evidence of a minimum of 5 other installations of similar size and complexity that have been in operation for a minimum of 5 years. Pumps, motors and bases shall be provided as a single unit from the pump manufacturer. E. Pumps are to be engineered and manufactured under a written Quality Assurance program certified to ISO 9001:2000 Quality System Standard. The pumps shall conform to all applicable requirements of ASTM, ANSI, AWWA, and Hydraulic Institute. F. All equipment shall be designed and built for 24-hour continuous service at any and all points within the specified range of operation, without overheating, without cavitation, and without excessive vibration or strain. G. The pumping units required under this section shall be complete. All parts shall be so designed and proportioned as to have liberal strength, stability, and stiffness and to be especially adapted for the service to be performed. Ample room for inspection, repairs and adjustment shall be provided. H. All working parts of the pumps and motors, such as bearings, wearing rings, shaft, and sleeves shall be standard dimensions built to limit gauges or formed to templates, such that parts will be interchangeable between like units and such that the Owner may, at any time in the future, obtain replacement and repair parts. I. Vibration, when measured in the direction of maximum amplitude on the top motor bearing housing, shall not exceed 3-mils peak to peak displacement at a maximum peak velocity level of 0.20-in per second at any speed within the specified operating speed range. J. Mechanical equipment, including drives and electric motors shall be supplied and installed in accordance with applicable OSHA regulations. The noise level of motors, unless otherwise noted, shall not exceed 85 dBA measured 5-ft from the unit under free field conditions while operating on utility power. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. B. All spare parts shall be packed in containers bearing labels clearly designating the contents and respective pieces of equipment for which they are intended. All spare parts shall be delivered at the same time as the pertaining equipment. C. All equipment delivered and placed in storage shall be stored with protection from the weather, humidity and temperature variations, dirt and dust, or other contaminants. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA SUBMERSIBLE PROPELLER PUMPS WOODARD & CURRAN 43 24 11-6 D. Factory assembled parts and components shall not be dismantled for shipment unless permission is received in writing from the Engineer. E. The finished surfaces of all exposed flanges shall be protected by wooden or equivalent blank flanges, strongly built and securely bolted thereto. F. Finished iron or steel surfaces not painted shall be properly protected to prevent rust and corrosion. G. No shipment shall be made until approved by the Engineer in writing. H. For protection of bearings during shipment and installation, the bearing shall be properly processed. Anti-friction bearings, if pre-lubricated, shall be protected in accordance with the bearing manufacturer's recommendations against formation of rust during a long period of storage while awaiting completion of installation and start-up of the machine in which they are used. Anti-friction bearings which are not pre-lubricated shall be properly treated in accordance with the bearing manufacturer's recommendation against formation of rust during a long period of storage while waiting completion of installation and start-up by the application of Exxon Rust-Ban No. 392, or equal treatment. 1.07 WARRANTY A. The equipment shall be warranted for a period of one (1) year from date of substantial completion as defined under the General Conditions, Division 0, to be free from defects in workmanship, design or material. If the equipment should fail during the warranty period due to a defective part(s), it shall be replaced in the machine and the unit(s) restored to service at no additional cost to the Owner. 1.08 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. All of the equipment included herein is intended to be standard for submersible use in wastewater treatment. B. Each pump shall be designed for the conditions of service tabulated as follows and shall operate within the system head curves appended. C. The pump will be used to pump mixed liquor from anoxic tank into the common aeration tank influent channel. D. The pumps will be operated at variable speed with VFD provided either manually or remotely by the instrumentation system specified in Division 40. The motors shall be squirrel cage induction submersible type. E. Pumps shall be designed for continuous-duty operation. F. Motors shall be of the heavy-duty asynchronous speed type, as specified here under. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA SUBMERSIBLE PROPELLER PUMPS WOODARD & CURRAN 43 24 11-7 G. The guide rail arrangements shall permit easy removal of pumps for maintenance without the need for personnel entering the tank. H. The submersible chopper pumps shall be as follows: Parameter Design No. of Units 4 Configuration Axial-Flow submersible Max. Capacity (GPM @ ft. TDH) 8.9 MGD @ 5.3 ft. TDH Liquid Pumped Mixed Liquor and RAS Location Anoxic Tanks Maximum Motor Size (HP) 16 Motor Voltage / Phase / Frequency (Hz) 460 / 3 / 60 Maximum Motor Speed (rpm) 600 Pump Discharge Size (in) 20 Impeller Material 316 Stainless Steel Drive Type VFD 1.09 SPARE PARTS AND SPECIAL TOOLS A. Six sets of all special tools required for the maintenance, adjustments, and repair of the equipment shall be provided. B. The manufacturer's recommended spare parts and special tools shall be provided to the Owner prior to the start-up of the equipment. They shall be packaged and identified by name, function and equipment. The Contractor shall unload and store the parts in the location directed by the Owner. C. All spare parts shall be properly protected for long term storage and packed in clearly marked containers as to their contents. D. A set of any special tools required for the normal operation and maintenance of the pumps shall be provided. All such tools shall be furnished in a suitable steel tool chest complete with lock and duplicate keys. E. As a minimum, the following spare parts shall be provided: 1. Five lower mechanical seals. 2. One complete set of gaskets and 0-rings for each pump. 3. One impeller type 316 Stainless Steel. 4. Six sets of wearing rings. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA SUBMERSIBLE PROPELLER PUMPS WOODARD & CURRAN 43 24 11-8 5. Five sets of manufacturer's standard overhaul tools. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A. General 1. This Section is intended to give a general description of what is required, but does not cover all details which will vary in accordance with the requirements of the equipment as offered. It is, however intended to cover all materials, equipment and appurtenances for the complete pumping units as herein specified, whether specifically mentioned in this Section or not. 2. For all units there shall be furnished and installed all necessary arid desirable accessory equipment and auxiliaries whether specifically mentioned in this Section or not and as required for an installation incorporating the highest standards for the type of service. 3. Rail system shall be rigidly and accurately anchored into position on concrete and all necessary foundation bolts, plates, nuts and washers shall be furnished and installed. Anchor bolts and rail piping shall be Type 304 stainless steel. 4. Stainless steel nameplates giving the name of manufacturer, the rated capacity, head, speed and all other pertinent data shall be attached to each pump and each motor. 5. The manufacturer shall supply complete factory mounted equipment with sufficient power and signal cable, as required by the location. 6. The pump and drive shall be designed to withstand the maximum turbine run-away speed of the pump due to backflow through the pump. 7. All electrical materials and equipment shall be UL listed or FM approved and NEMA rated, and shall otherwise be equal to that supplied under Division 26, where applicable. 8. Control status panels shall be factory wired, such that field wiring connections shall require connection of power and control/sensory wiring to the control panel and to the pumps and alarm wiring to the control status panel. Field wiring connections shall be to numbered terminal strips. The entire control system shall be factory tested before shipment. 2.02 MOISTURE DETECTION A. Moisture sensing probe(s) shall be mounted in the seal chamber, to detect any water leakage past the lower seal. The pump manufacturer shall provide a corresponding 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA SUBMERSIBLE PROPELLER PUMPS WOODARD & CURRAN 43 24 11-9 relay which shall be installed in the control panel. The relay shall be used in conjunction with the seal probe to detect the presence of moisture. The moisture detection probes and system shall be rated for use in the "Electrical Hazard Area Classification" as previously specified for each application and as outlined in the Electrical Specifications (Division 26). The relay shall be rated for 125 VAC. 2.03 HIGH TEMPERATURE PROTECTION A. Thermal switches shall be embedded in each phase of the windings and be set to protect the motor against excess heat. The thermal switches shall be wired in series and be connected to the high temperature protection relay. The motor controls shall shut down the pump during a high temperature condition. The sensor(s) shall be designed to reset automatically when the motor cools or through a manual reset on the relay itself. 2.04 PUMP CONSTRUCTION A. Pumps: 1. Pump units shall be direct drive submersible type. All components including the motor shall provide continuous underwater operation while the blades are completely submerged. 2. Each pump unit shall be capable of handling mixed liquor suspended solids. Each unit shall be designed to be raised, lowered, and removed for inspection or service without personnel having to enter the tank. A sliding guide bracket shall be an integral part of the unit. The entire weight of the unit shall be guided by the guide bracket, which shall handle all thrust created by the unit. The unit with its appurtenances and cable shall be capable of continuous submergence without loss of watertight integrity to the depth shown on the drawings. 3. All mating surfaces where watertight sealing is required shall be machined and fitted with nitrile rubber O-rings. Fitting shall be such that sealing is accomplished by metal-to-metal contact between machined surfaces, resulting in compression of the O-rings without secondary sealing compounds, rectangular gaskets, elliptical O-rings, grease, or other devices shall be used. 4. The cable entry shall be an integral part of the stator casing. The cable entry shall be composed of a conical cable holder with a flange bearing against a shoulder in the stator casing opening. The cable entry cone shall be of gray cast iron AISI A48 Class 30. Sealing shall be accomplished by metal-to- metal contact between machined surfaces resulting in compression of the O-ring. The cable shall be cast into the cable entry cone providing a leak- proof, torque-free seal at the cable entrance. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA SUBMERSIBLE PROPELLER PUMPS WOODARD & CURRAN 43 24 11-10 5. Each pump shall be provided with an oil chamber in the propeller hub for the shaft sealing system. Drains and inspection plugs shall be provided with positive anti-leak seal and shall be accessible from the outside. 6. Each pump shall be furnished with an adequate length of power and control cable for connection without splicing. B. Motor 1. The motor shall be squirrel-cage, induction type design, housed in an air- filled, watertight chamber. The stator winding shall be insulated with moisture resistant Class F insulation. The stator shall be trickle impregnated with Class H resin. The motor shall be designed for continuous-duty, capable of sustaining a maximum of 10 evenly spaced starts per hour. The rotor bars and short circuit rings shall be made of aluminum. Motors shall be of a premium efficient design and shall be different from the manufacturer's standard efficient product. 2. The motor shaft shall rotate on two permanently lubricated bearings. The inner and outer bearing shall be single row, deep-groove bearings calculated for an L-10 life of 100,000 hours at full load. 3. Bimetallic thermal sensors, mounted in the stator windings end turns and wired into the pump control, shall monitor temperature. These shall supplement the external motor over current protection located in the motor control center. 4. Leak detection sensors, located in the stator housing and wired into the motor control shall detect leaks and signal leaks in conjunction with a supervision relay. 5. Seal Failure Warning System: An electrical probe shall be provided in the oil chamber to detect the presence of water in the oil. This probe shall be provided for both standard and explosion proof pumps. A solid-state device mounted in the pump control panel or in a separate enclosure shall send a low voltage, low amperage signal to the probe. If water enters the oil chamber, the probe shall signal the solid state relay in the control panel. The relay shall then energize a warning light on the control panel, or cause the pump to be shut down. Float switches, dual probes, or any other monitoring devices located in the stator housing are not considered to be early warning systems, and shall not be considered equal. C. Propellers 1. Pump propellers shall consist of three blades and shall be constructed of AISI 316 stainless. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA SUBMERSIBLE PROPELLER PUMPS WOODARD & CURRAN 43 24 11-11 2. The blade shape shall be a non-clogging, backward curved design that starts at the flange. The propeller shall be capable of handling solids, fibrous materials, heavy sludge, and other matter found in normal sewage applications. 3. The propeller shall be constructed of 316 stainless steel and shall be self- cleaning backward curved design preventing material buildup on the blades that decreases pump performance and increases vibration. Each blade shall be precision cut and welded to the hub. Each propeller shall be dynamically balanced so its imbalance is less than ISO 1940 G6.3 tolerances preventing excessive vibration or other unsatisfactory characteristics when the pump is operating. D. Guide Rail System 1. The pump shall be provided with a coupling system which consists of a hydraulic optimum volute insert and coupling flange. A counter flange or extension piece shall be welded onto the coupling flange if further connection with another pipe system is designed. The installation shall be equipped with two (2) 2-inch stainless steel guide pipes extending from the top of the coupling flange to a fixing bracket mounted at the top of the tank. A recess in the guide pipe shall be fabricated just below the upper fixing bracket making it easy to remove the pump for service without having to loosen or remove any bolts. 2. All components of the mounting system shall be constructed of AISI 316 stainless steel. The manufacturer of the pump shall provide the mounting system which shall include the coupling flange. 3. The guide rail system shall be non-sparking, approved by Factory Mutual for use in NEC Class 1, Division 1, Group C&D hazardous locations. E. Portable Davit Crane 1. Contractor shall provide a portable davit crane for the draft pump. Crane shall be Thern Model 5PT20S-M2 or Engineer approved equal. 2. Manufacturer shall have a minimum of 5 years’ experience producing substantially similar equipment. Manufacturer shall be registered ISO 9001:2000 compliant with an independent certification agency approved by the International Organization for Standardization. 3. Crane shall have a variable lift capacity depending on boom position. Lift capacity range shall be 1,100 lbs to 2,000 lbs. With the boom in the horizontal position, the maximum hook reach shall be 82” (measured from the mast center to the hook center) and the hook height shall be 43” minimum. The book angle shall be adjustable with a ratchet jack anywhere 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA SUBMERSIBLE PROPELLER PUMPS WOODARD & CURRAN 43 24 11-12 from horizontal to 45 degrees. Wire rope shall pass over a sheave at the end of the boom. Sheave shall have a bronze bearing. 4. The crane boom and mast shall be constructed of Type 304 stainless steel. 5. Each crane shall be equipped with a worm gear winch. Winch shall have epoxy finish. Winch shall allow for quick attachment and removal of wire rope assembly. 6. One drill drive kit shall be provided. Drill drive kit shall include one drill, 120 VAC, 11.5 amp, 300 RPM drill to power drive the hand winch. Kit shall include one 1-1/8” hex drive socket. 7. A pedestal base shall be provided for each crane. Pedestal base shall be Thern Model 5BP20S. Base shall be stainless steel. 8. Stainless steel wire rope with stainless steel swivel hook shall be provided for each crane. Stainless steel wire rope and hook shall have adequate load rating to lift the pump and wire rope length shall be sufficient to install and remove each pump. F. Hardware 1. All hardware shall be AISI 316 stainless steel. G. Anchor Bolts: Sleeve-type, embedded anchor bolts of Type 316 stainless steel, for securing the common base to the foundation. 2.05 LUBRICATION A. All lubrication fittings shall be readily accessible from the outside without the necessity of removing covers, plates, housings, or guards. 2.06 FINISHES A. All fabricated steel shall be factory prepared, factory primed and factory finish painted in accordance with Section 09 90 00. Touch-up paint shall be provided as specified to restore integrity of coating system that may be damaged during construction. All paint system components for the entire project shall be the product of a single manufacturer as required by Section 09 90 00 unless otherwise noted on the Drawings or approved by the Engineer. B. Ferrous surfaces not to be painted shall be given a shop coat of grease or other suitable rust-resistant coating. 2.07 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA SUBMERSIBLE PROPELLER PUMPS WOODARD & CURRAN 43 24 11-13 PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Factory Testing 1. All pump tests shall be in accordance with the Hydraulic Institute’s Standards. All tests shall be performed at the manufacturer’s facility prior to shipment. All test results shall be certified by a registered professional engineer, and shall be submitted to Engineer for approval prior to shipment. 2. The pump shall be factory tested as follows: pump shall be hydrostatically tested at 100 psig internal pressure and 30 psig external pressure. Motor and cable insulation shall be tested for moisture content and defects before and after the above tests. Manufacturer shall submit written report with the details and results of the tests. 3. Controls shall be factory tested and documentation of the test shall be submitted. 4. Pump shall be performance tested at all specified duty points, plus five additional points. Pump test curves shall be developed to illustrate conformance with the contract documents. Capacity, head, motor speed, pump speed, efficiency and input horsepower shall be recorded for each test point. For variable speed units, each pump shall be tested at full speed plus 3 equally spaced speeds between maximum and minimum design conditions. 5. All pumping equipment shall be tested to check for proper operation, proper alignment, faulty equipment, and for excessive vibration. The Contractor shall provide vibration testing by a qualified and independent testing company. This testing of the complete system shall cover all duty conditions outlined in this Section of the Specifications. The vibration testing shall be conducted in the presence of the pump and pump motor field service representatives in accordance with procedures outlined in the applicable sections of the Hydraulic Institute Standards and all appropriate Sections of these specifications. 6. In the event vibration exceeds the specified limits and the cause of the vibration is attributable to the pumping equipment, the equipment manufacturers shall make the necessary balancing or alignment adjustments to bring the equipment to within the specified limits. 7. At the discretion and expense of the Contractor, an independent vibration analysis may be conducted on the new wastewater pump. The Contractor and manufacturer will be permitted to witness the test. 8. Each pump shall be hydrostatically tested to 1.5 times shutoff head. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA SUBMERSIBLE PROPELLER PUMPS WOODARD & CURRAN 43 24 11-14 9. All motors shall be tested in accordance with IEEE standards. All test results shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval prior to shipment. Each motor shall be tested at no load running current, high potential, and winding resistance. 10. Pump units shall not be shipped to Site until factory test reports are submitted and approved by Engineer. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Each pump and motor shall be installed in accordance with the written instructions of the manufacturer and under the direct supervision of the manufacturer's representative. Correct installation and assembly of the pumps and other equipment shall be the Contractor's responsibility and shall be in accordance with the Drawings and with the manufacturers' installation instruction manual. The Contractor shall furnish all bolts, shims, tools, and other devices necessary for installing the pumping units. The manufacturer's representative(s) familiar with the equipment being installed shall supervise the handling, installation, start-up, and testing of the equipment. B. A certificate from the pump manufacturer shall be provided stating that the installation of the pumping equipment is satisfactory, that the equipment is ready for operation, and that the operating personnel have been suitably instructed in the operation, lubrication and care of each type unit provided. C. Installation shall include furnishing of all required lubricants for initial operation, including startup and six (6) months of operation. The grades and quantities of oil supplied following acceptance shall be as recommended by the pump manufacturer. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. B. Field Testing. 1. After installation of the pumping units and appurtenances is complete, operating tests shall be carried out to assure that the pumping equipment operates properly. The Contractor shall make arrangements to have the manufacturer's representatives present when field equipment tests are made. Each pumping unit shall be given a running field test in the presence of the Engineer for a minimum of 2 hours. Each pumping unit shall be operated at its rated capacity, the design conditions specified herein, or such other point on its head-capacity curve selected by the Engineer. The Contractor shall provide an accurate and acceptable method of measuring the discharge flow. Tests shall assure that the units and appurtenances have been installed correctly, that the assembly is free from undue stress imposed by the piping or mounting bolts, that there is no objectionable heating, vibration, or noise from any parts, and that all manual and automatic controls function 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA SUBMERSIBLE PROPELLER PUMPS WOODARD & CURRAN 43 24 11-15 properly. If any deficiencies are revealed during any tests, such deficiencies shall be corrected and the tests shall be re-conducted. 2. Contractor shall Supply all electric power, labor and water or wastewater and auxiliary equipment required to complete the field tests. 3. Provide Field Test Booklets for each unit showing all field tests performed to adjust each component and all field tests performed to prove compliance with the specified performance criteria, upon completion and testing of the installed system. Each test report shall indicate the final position of controls, and all data gathered during testing. 4. If the pump performance does not meet the specified requirements, corrective measures shall be taken, or pumps shall be removed and replaced with pumps with satisfy the conditions specified. 5. The pumps and motors shall be designed and constructed to avoid the generation of objectionable noise or vibration. The sound pressure level at full load shall not exceed 85 (A Seale) decibels above 300 cycles, when measured at a point not exceeding 5-ft from the motor. When operating at any point between no-load and full-load, the vibration measured in a horizontal plane at the top of the motor shall not exceed the limits recommended by the Hydraulic Institute Standards. 6. Any component parts which are damaged as a result of testing or which fail to meet the requirements specified shall be replaced, reinstalled and retested at the Contractor's expense. C. Field Painting 1. Stainless steel, galvanized steel, and nonferrous surfaces shall not be painted. 2. Touch-Up Painting: Factory painted items requiring touching up in the field shall be thoroughly cleaned of all foreign material and shall be primed and top-coated with the manufacturer's standard factory finish. 3. Exposed Ferrous Surfaces: Exposed ferrous surfaces shall be painted with two coats of enamel paint conforming to SSPC Paint 21. Factory primed surfaces shall be solvent-cleaned before painting. Surfaces that have not been factory primed shall be prepared and primed with one coat of SSPC Paint 25 or in accordance with the enamel paint manufacturer's recommendations. D. Manufacturer Field Services 1. Provide the services of a factory trained service representative to assist in the installation, start-up, and testing of the equipment, and to perform 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA SUBMERSIBLE PROPELLER PUMPS WOODARD & CURRAN 43 24 11-16 training to plant personnel in the operation and maintenance of the equipment. A minimum of eight (8 on-site) hours of instruction shall be provided for training on these pumps. Instruction time shall be in addition to startup, checkout, testing and travel time. A factory-trained representative shall be present during testing of all pumps. 2. The manufacturer's representative shall provide minimum services in accordance with the following table: Purpose No. of Days Installation Supervision as required for proper installation Field Testing 2 Operator Training 1 3. The number of days indicated above shall be provided on an 8-hour-day on- site basis and shall be in addition to travel time. 4. The acceptance of O&M training will be in accordance to the successful completion of the Equipment Manufacturer's Certificate of Installation Testing and Instruction. This certificate will be completed by the manufacturer's representative and the Owner at the completion of the vendor training session. 5. This instruction period shall be scheduled at least 10 days in advance with the Owner and shall take place prior to plant start-up and acceptance by the Owner. The final copies of operation and maintenance manuals must have been delivered to the Owner prior to scheduling the instruction period with the Owner. 6. The actual number of days on site shall be increased as necessary, without additional cost to the Owner, to accomplish the purposes indicated. 7. The follow-up visit shall be at such time as requested by the Owner within the warranty period to answer questions, address specific problems, and review start up. 8. Service scheduling shall be provided, at the Owner's request, and at no additional cost to the Owner, at any time during the warranty period. 9. Manufacturer shall submit a letter stating that he has inspected the installation and checked its performance and certifies that the installation is satisfactory, that the system is operating correctly, and that the system meets all the requirements of this Section. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA SUBMERSIBLE PROPELLER PUMPS WOODARD & CURRAN 43 24 11-17 3.04 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Each Item of Equipment and Each System: Include a description of unit or system, and component parts. Give function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions. Include performance curves with engineering data, head loss, tests, and certifications where appropriate and complete nomenclature and commercial number of replaceable parts, where applicable. B. Panel Board Circuit Directories: Provide electrical service characteristics and name of load on each branch circuit breaker. C. Operating Procedures: Include start-up, break-in, and routine normal operating instructions and sequences. Include regulation, control, stopping, shut-down, and. emergency instructions. Include summer, winter, and any special operating instructions. D. Maintenance Requirements: Include routine procedures and guide for trouble- shooting; disassembly, repair, and reassembly instructions; alignment, adjusting, balancing, and checking instructions. Provide servicing and lubrication schedule, and list of lubricants required, cleaning requirements and frequency. E. Controls: Provide the following: 1. Sequence of operation. 2. Original parts list, illustrations, assembly drawings, and diagrams required for maintenance. 3. As-installed control diagrams. 4. Contractor's coordination drawings, with as-installed color coded piping diagrams. 5. Charts of valve tag numbers, with location and function of each valve, keyed to flow and control diagrams. 6. As-installed color coded wiring diagrams. 3.05 STARTUP & COMMISSIONING A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. END OF SECTION 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA SUBMERSIBLE PROPELLER PUMPS WOODARD & CURRAN 43 24 11-18 This page left blank intentionally 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA SUBMERSIBLE CHOPPER PUMPS WOODARD & CURRAN 43 25 11-1 SECTION 43 25 11 SUBMERSIBLE CHOPPER PUMPS PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals to install one package submersible scum pump system, control panel, recirculation valves, slide rail systems and appurtenances with all accessories as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Concrete work is included in Division 3. B. Field painting is included in Section 09 90 00. C. Instrumentation and control work, except as specified herein, is included in Division 40. Instrumentation and controls provided in this Section shall adhere to Instrumentation and Control Specifications Sections in Division 40. D. Mechanical piping, valves, pipe hangers and supports are included in the respective Sections of Division 40. E. Electrical work is included under Division 26. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. B. Submit, in accordance with Division 01, copies of all materials required to establish compliance with this Section. Submittals shall include, but not limited to: 1. Certified shop and erection drawings showing all important details of construction, dimensions and anchor bolt locations. 2. Descriptive literature, bulletins and/or catalogs of the equipment. 3. Manufacturer's specifications and product data required to demonstrate compliance with requirements which shall include complete parts listing showing materials of construction with applicable ANSI, ASTM or other standards. 4. Type, thickness, application procedure and test for coatings, and non- metallic and metallic linings. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA SUBMERSIBLE CHOPPER PUMPS WOODARD & CURRAN 43 25 11-2 5. Data on the characteristics and performance of the pumps. Data shall include guaranteed performance curves, based on actual shop tests of duplicate units, which show that they meet the specified requirements for head, capacity, efficiency, allowable NPSH, allowable suction lift and horsepower. Curves shall be submitted on 8-1/2-in by 11-in sheets. 6. Manufacturer's recommended testing, operation and maintenance procedures including a list of special tools and equipment required to maintain the units. 7. Provide a “letter of compliance” from the pump manufacturer stating that the characteristics of each pump (specifically naming the respective pumps) will not overload the specified motor horsepower under any head condition when operating at the specified maximum speed, over the entire curve. 8. Certified factory tests and pump curves for the supplied units, following fabrication, demonstrating compliance with the factory test requirements in Part 3 of this section. 9. The total weight of the equipment including weight of the single largest item. 10. A complete total bill of materials for all equipment. 11. A list of the manufacturer's recommended spare parts with the manufacturer's current price for each item. Include gaskets, packing, etc., on the list. List the bearings by the bearing manufacturer's numbers only. 12. A statement indicating bearing life. 13. Complete data on motors and power factor correction capacitors (if required) in accordance with Division 26. 14. Complete description of surface preparation and shop prime painting. 15. Complete wiring diagrams and control schematics. 16. Deviations from the Contract Documents. C. Certified Factory Test Reports by a registered Professional Engineer demonstrating compliance with the factory test requirements in Part 3 of this section shall be submitted prior to shipment. D. Operation and Maintenance Data 1. Copies of an operating and maintenance manual for each size pump shall be furnished to the Engineer as provided for in Division 01. The manuals shall be prepared specifically for this installation and shall include all 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA SUBMERSIBLE CHOPPER PUMPS WOODARD & CURRAN 43 25 11-3 required cuts, drawings, equipment lists, descriptions, etc., that are required to instruct operating and maintenance personnel unfamiliar with such equipment. 2. A technical representative, from the respective pump manufacturer who has complete knowledge of proper operation and maintenance shall be provided for 1 day to instruct representatives of the Owner and the Engineer on proper operation and maintenance. This work may be conducted in conjunction with the inspection of the installation and test run as provided under Paragraph 3.03 below. If there are difficulties in operation of the equipment due to the manufacturer's design or fabrication, additional service shall be provided at no additional cost to the Owner. E. Closeout and Maintenance Material Submittals: per Division 01 General Requirements. 1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. American National Standard Institute (ANSI) B. American Bearing Manufacturers Association (ABMA) C. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) D. National Electrical Code (NEC) E. Factory Mutual (FM) F. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) G. American Gear Manufacturer’ Association (AGMA) H. American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM) I. Standards of the American Water Works Association (AWWA) J. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE) K. Standards of the Hydraulic Institute (HI) L. ISO 9001:2000 M. Where reference is made to one of the above standards, the revision in effect at the time of bid opening shall apply. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA SUBMERSIBLE CHOPPER PUMPS WOODARD & CURRAN 43 25 11-4 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The primary scum pump shall be Model CHOPX3A-S as manufactured by Hayward Gordon; or Model SE3F-065 as manufactured by Vaughan Co., Inc., or equivalent model as manufactured by Flygt, or Engineer Approved Equal. B. The rated horsepower of the drive unit shall be such that the unit will not be overloaded nor the service factor reduced when the pump is operated at any point on the pump's capacity curve. If, due to the slope of the pump's performance curve, a drive unit of greater horsepower than specified is required to meet this condition, the pump will be considered for approval only if any and all changes in electrical work, etc., required by such a change will be provided at no additional cost to the Owner and be to the satisfaction of the Engineer. C. Call out of a specific pump model and manufacturer does not relieve the manufacturer from the responsibility of meeting all manufacturing and performance requirements specified herein. D. All pumping equipment furnished under this section shall be from a single supplier that shall be regularly engaged in the design, manufacture, and furnishing of wastewater pumping equipment for a minimum of 10 years. The manufacturer shall be able to show evidence of a minimum of 5 other installations of similar size and complexity that have been in operation for a minimum of 5 years. Pumps, motors and bases shall be provided as a single unit from the pump manufacturer. E. Pumps are to be engineered and manufactured under a written Quality Assurance program certified to ISO 9001:2000 Quality System Standard. The pumps shall conform to all applicable requirements of ASTM, ANSI, AWWA, and Hydraulic Institute. F. All equipment shall be designed and built for 24-hour continuous service at any and all points within the specified range of operation, without overheating, without cavitation, and without excessive vibration or strain. G. The pumping units required under this section shall be complete. All parts shall be so designed and proportioned as to have liberal strength, stability, and stiffness and to be especially adapted for the service to be performed. Ample room for inspection, repairs and adjustment shall be provided. H. All working parts of the pumps and motors, such as bearings, wearing rings, shaft, and sleeves shall be standard dimensions built to limit gauges or formed to templates, such that parts will be interchangeable between like units and such that the Owner may, at any time in the future, obtain replacement and repair parts. I. Mechanical equipment, including drives and electric motors shall be supplied and installed in accordance with applicable OSHA regulations. The noise level of 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA SUBMERSIBLE CHOPPER PUMPS WOODARD & CURRAN 43 25 11-5 motors, unless otherwise noted, shall not exceed 85 dBA measured 5-ft from the unit under free field conditions while operating on utility power. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. B. All spare parts shall be packed in containers bearing labels clearly designating the contents and respective pieces of equipment for which they are intended. All spare parts shall be delivered at the same time as the pertaining equipment. C. All equipment delivered and placed in storage shall be stored with protection from the weather, humidity and temperature variations, dirt and dust, or other contaminants. 1.07 WARRANTY A. Equipment supplied under this section shall be warranted to be free from defects in workmanship, design and materials for a period of one (1) year from manufacturer’s startup. If any part of the equipment should prove to be defective during the warranty period, the manufacturer at no expense to the Owner shall replace the part. 1.08 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. All of the equipment included herein is intended to be standard for submersible use in wastewater treatment. B. Each pump shall be designed for the conditions of service tabulated as follows and shall operate within the system head curves appended. C. The pump will be used to pump primary scum, collected from primary clarifiers to the distribution box of the gravity thickeners. D. The pumps will be operated at constant speed with start and stop provided either manually or remotely by the instrumentation system specified in Division 40. The motors shall be squirrel cage induction submersible type. E. The submersible chopper pumps shall be as follows: 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA SUBMERSIBLE CHOPPER PUMPS WOODARD & CURRAN 43 25 11-6 Parameter Design No. of Units 1 Configuration Base-elbow-mounted submersible Max. Capacity (GPM @ ft. TDH) 100 GPM @ 14 ft. TDH Liquid Pumped Primary Scum Location Primary Scum Pit Maximum Motor Size (HP) 5.0 Motor Voltage / Phase / Frequency (Hz) 460 / 3 / 60 Maximum Motor Speed (rpm) 1,700 Pump Discharge Size (in) 3.0 Minimum Solids Size (in) 3.0 Impeller Material Cast Steel Drive Type Motor Starter 1.09 SPARE PARTS AND SPECIAL TOOLS A. Six sets of all special tools required for the maintenance, adjustments, and repair of the equipment shall be provided. B. The manufacturer's recommended spare parts and special tools shall be provided to the Owner prior to the start-up of the equipment. They shall be packaged and identified by name, function and equipment. The Contractor shall unload and store the parts in the location directed by the Owner. C. All spare parts shall be properly protected for long term storage and packed in clearly marked containers as to their contents. D. A set of any special tools required for the normal operation and maintenance of the pumps shall be provided. All such tools shall be furnished in a suitable steel tool chest complete with lock and duplicate keys. E. As a minimum, the following spare parts shall be provided: 1. Five lower mechanical seals. 2. One complete set of gaskets and 0-rings for each pump. 3. Five cutter bars. 4. One impeller 5. Five sets of cutter bar shims. 6. Five cutter bar nuts. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA SUBMERSIBLE CHOPPER PUMPS WOODARD & CURRAN 43 25 11-7 7. Five sets of manufacturer's standard overhaul tools. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A. General 1. This Section is intended to give a general description of what is required, but does not cover all details which will vary in accordance with the requirements of the equipment as offered. It is, however intended to cover all materials, equipment and appurtenances for the complete pumping units as herein specified, whether specifically mentioned in this Section or not. 2. For all units there shall be furnished and installed all necessary arid desirable accessory equipment and auxiliaries whether specifically mentioned in this Section or not and as required for an installation incorporating the highest standards for the type of service. 3. Pump base elbows and rail system shall be rigidly and accurately anchored into position on concrete and all necessary foundation bolts, plates, nuts and washers shall be furnished and installed. Anchor bolts and rail piping shall be Type 304 stainless steel. 4. Stainless steel nameplates giving the name of manufacturer, the rated capacity, head, speed and all other pertinent data shall be attached to each pump and each motor. 5. The manufacturer shall supply complete factory mounted equipment with sufficient power and signal cable, as required by the location. 6. The pump and drive shall be designed to withstand the maximum turbine run-away speed of the pump due to backflow through the pump. 7. All electrical materials and equipment shall be UL listed or FM approved and NEMA rated, and shall otherwise be equal to that supplied under Division 26, where applicable. 8. Control status panels shall be factory wired, such that field wiring connections shall require connection of power and control/sensory wiring to the control panel and to the pumps and alarm wiring to the control status panel. Field wiring connections shall be to numbered terminal strips. The entire control system shall be factory tested before shipment. 2.02 PUMP CONSTRUCTION A. The pumps shall be mounted on a guide rail system to allow the pumps to be easily removed for inspection or service, requiring no bolts, nuts or other fasteners to be 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA SUBMERSIBLE CHOPPER PUMPS WOODARD & CURRAN 43 25 11-8 removed for this purpose and no need for personnel to enter the pump well. Each pump shall be fitted with a stainless steel lifting chain of adequate strength and length to permit raising the pump for inspection and removal. 1. The pumps shall be submersible heavy duty, centrifugal chopper-type pumps. The pumps shall be located as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein. The integral pump/motor shall be designed to operate at a continuous full load duty completely submerged in water without the need for external cooling. 2. The pump casing shall be of semi-concentric design and shall be constructed of ASTM A532 high-chrome iron, 450 BHN minimum with ANSI B16.1, Class 125 standard flanged suction and discharge connections. All internal case clearances shall be equal to the discharge diameter so that all material which will pass through the discharge will pass through the pump. All cast parts shall be furnished in accordance with ASTM Standards. 3. The impeller shall be semi-open type. Chopping/maceration of materials shall be accomplished by the action of the cupped and sharpened leading edges of the impeller blades moving across the cutter bar at the intake openings, with a set clearance between the impeller and cutter bar of 0.015 to 0.020-in. Impeller shall be cast from A532 high-chrome iron, 450 BHN minimum and dynamically balanced. The impeller shall be keyed to the shaft with a hardened steel bolt with washer, and shall have no axial adjustments or set screws. Fabricated impellers shall not be acceptable. 4. The cutter bar shall be recessed into the pump bowl, with a funnel shaped inlet opening, and shall extend diametrically across the entire pump suction opening. The cutter bar shall be east from A532 high-chrome iron, 450 BHN minimum. Fabricated cutter bars shall not be acceptable. 5. The upper cutter assembly shall consist of a specially modified impeller working against a stationary cutting ring mounted into the back side of the casing, in order to eliminate any buildup of rags, hair, or other stringy material. The upper cutter shall be A532 high-chrome iron, 450 BHN minimum. 6. Each pump discharge elbow connection shall be permanently installed in the manhole along with the discharge piping. Each pump shall be automatically connected and sealed to its discharge connection elbow when lowered into place and shall be easily removable. Each pump shall be mounted on a sliding guide bracket which is used to guide the pump into place with the discharge connection elbow. The sliding guide bracket and the pump casing shall have a machined angle connection with yoke to connect with the cast iron discharge connection, which shall be bolted to the floor of the sump and so designed as to receive the pump angle connection 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA SUBMERSIBLE CHOPPER PUMPS WOODARD & CURRAN 43 25 11-9 without the need of any bolts or nuts. Provide Type 304 stainless steel anchor bolts for attachment to the floor. 7. Sealing of a pumping unit to its discharge connection shall be accomplished by a simple linear downward motion of the pump with the entire weight of the pumping unit guided to the wedging tightly against the angled discharge connection; no portion of the pump shall bear directly on the sump floor and no rotary motion of the pump shall be required for sealing. Sealing at the discharge connection by means of a diaphragm or similar method of sealing will not be accepted as an equal to a metal contact of the pump discharge and mating discharge connection as specified and required. 8. The lower guide holders shall be integral with the discharge connection. Each pump shall ride on dual guide bars when raised and lowered in the sump. Guide bars shall be of standard weight 2-in stainless steel pipe. The discharge connection elbow shall have a flanged connection to the discharge piping. B. Pump motor shall be housed in an air-filled or oil-filled watertight submersible casing and shall have Class F insulated windings which shall be moisture resistant. Pump motor shall be 480V, 3-Phase, 60 Hz. Motors shall be NEMA Design B. Pump motors shall have cooling characteristics suitable to permit continuous operation in totally or partially submerged conditions, and 15-minutes under non- submerged conditions without damage. The pump motor shall be capable of running without damage, for extended periods. Pump and motor shall be explosion- proof, suitable for Class I, Division 1, Group D applications. Motor shall be provided with bi-metallic pilot thermal sensors embedded in stator windings and leak sensors in the motor enclosure; sensors shall have a dry output contact rated I2QVAC, 10 amps. Provide sufficient field wiring from each pump to the terminal boxes as shown on the electrical drawing. C. Leak Detection: Manufacturer shall provide leak detection/over temperature sensor and interface relay for the submersible pump. D. Pump power cable shall be suitable for submersible pump and Class 1, Division 1, Group D applications. Cable sizing shall conform to NEC standards for pump motors, Cable entry to each pump shall be designed for submersible pump applications. The cable entry junction box and motor shall be separated by a stator load sealing gland or terminal board which shall isolate the motor interior from foreign materials gaining access through the pump top. Provide cable holder as herein specified. E. The pumps, with their appurtenances and cable, shall be designed for continuous submergence under water without loss of watertight integrity to a depth of 65-ft. The pumps shall receive a factory test to determine that each unit operates satisfactorily and that all seals are properly in place, to meet the project submergence conditions. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA SUBMERSIBLE CHOPPER PUMPS WOODARD & CURRAN 43 25 11-10 F. All wetted parts shall be shop primed in accordance with Division 09. 2.03 PUMP CONTROL PANEL A. The Contractor shall furnish and install a pump control panel for the primary scum pump. The panels shall be fabricated by the Contractor or pump manufacturer at the Contractor's discretion, but coordination of alarm conductors between the panel and pump shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. B. Each control panel shall include, at a minimum, the following: 1. Main circuit breaker / disconnect capable of being operated and locked out externally. 2. Motor- starters (combination motor circuit protector starter). 3. Thermal and leak detection units. 4. Timers, relays, and other devices required for operation of the recirculation valve specified in Paragraph 2.04. 5. The panel shall utilize 480-volt, 3-phase power and transform it to other voltages necessary for control. 6. Indicating lights and an audible alarm for the following alarm conditions: a. Motor off/ready b. Motor temperature overload c. Motor moisture/leak detection d. Motor on/ running e. Recirculation Valve Failure 7. A Hand/Off/Auto (HOA) selector switch shall be used to operate the pump locally or automatically based on the level inside the scum well. 8. Alarm silence button shall be provided at the panel to silence the local alarm. The panel shall be furnished ready for mounting, and shall be completely wired and ready for field connection of primary power, control/sensory and alarm wiring to the primary power and treatment plant SCADA system. The control panel shall be rated NEMA 4X, and constructed of stainless steel, designed for outdoor mounting. The panel shall be mounted in the locations shown on the Drawings. 9. The control panels shall include dry contacts rated for 5A at 120 VAC to transmit the following alarms/status to the SCADA PLC: 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA SUBMERSIBLE CHOPPER PUMPS WOODARD & CURRAN 43 25 11-11 a. Motor High temperature alarm b. Moisture/leak detected alarm c. HOA switch in Auto status d. Pump running status e. Alarms wired to panel lights and to the SCADA PLC shall be DPDT switches 10. Power supply to the control status panel shall be 120 Volt, single-phase, 60 Hz. 2.04 RECIRCULATION SYSTEM A. Recirculation Nozzle Assembly: Each pump shall be fitted with a recirculation nozzle assembly to permit recirculation of the pit contents prior to discharge. The recirculation nozzle shall be adjustable minimum 180 degrees horizontally and 45 degrees vertically. A valve assembly shall be connected to the pump discharge to adjust pump flow either to the nozzle or the pump discharge flange. Valve shall be ASTM A536 ductile cast iron, with Type 316 SS valve disk and 150 lb. flanged recirculation and discharge flange. The operating levers shall be located above at a mounting plate for easy access. B. An electrically operated valve actuator shall position the valve for pump-out or mixed operation. A quarter-turn rotary actuator shall be used to provide valve positioning. Unit shall be watertight, Class 1, Div. 1, Groups C&D, 110 volts, single-phase power, and shall be capable of producing 83 ft. lbs. of actuation torque. A manual override shall also be provided. The actuator shall allow for open/close(divert) operation of the valve via a local Open/Close (O/C) pushbutton station. The actuator shall include normally opened dry contacts (5A at 120VAC) for remote indication at the SCADA system of the "LOR switch in remote", "full open" and "full closed (diverted)" positions. The actuator shall accept "open" and "close (divert)" commands by the timers and relays provided under this Section. C. The recirculation system shall be controlled by a series of timers and relays, all of which shall be provided by the pump manufacturer. There must be a timer that will control the time that the recirculation mode will last, and there must be two timers that control the valve actuator motor. Operation shall be as follows: 1. At the start of the pumping cycle, the recirculation valve will be in the recirculation position. To commence the cycle, the recirculation timer shall be switched by the motor starter. When the motor starter closes, this timer starts timing for an operator adjustable time between 0 and 60 minutes which is the length of time that the pump will be in the recirculation mode. 2. When the first timer times out, the recirculation valve will move to the discharge position to allow the scum to be pumped from the wet well. When 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA SUBMERSIBLE CHOPPER PUMPS WOODARD & CURRAN 43 25 11-12 the low level is sensed in the wet well, the pump will stop and the recirculation valve will be opened so that the pump will recirculate the contents in the wet well the next time it is energized. 2.05 RAIL SYSTEM AND ACCESS HATCH A. Rail system shall include base elbow, sealing plate disconnect, pump discharge elbow, upper rail bracket, guide rail pipe, lifting chain, and brackets. A minimum of two guide rails shall be provided to prevent pump from rotating. Guide rails shall be (2) 2" diameter guide pipes or larger. Contractor shall provide all mounting hardware required for installation. B. Pump shall be accessible using the Rail System without entering the manhole. Guide rails shall be 316 SS, direct the pump to the disconnect, and create a watertight seal with the discharge piping once set in place. C. Slide rails shall extend from the wetwell/manhole floor to 6" below the bottom of the manhole cover. The Contractor shall field verify the length of slide rails. D. Disconnect: Each slide rail system shall be designed so that the pump may be disconnected from the discharge piping without entering the wetwell/manhole. E. The guide rail system shall be non-sparking, approved by Factory Mutual for use in NEC Class 1, Division 1, Group C&D hazardous locations. F. An aluminum access hatch shall be provided as required by the pump manufacturer. 2.06 PORTABLE DAVIT CRANE A. One crane assembly shall be provided for the primary scum pump. The assembly shall consist of a crane arm with telescopic capabilities, a marine grade spur gear or worm gear hand winch with brake for local control with stainless steel wire and hook. The crane arm assembly, floor sockets and winch shall be constructed of type 304 stainless steel. B. Crane assembly shall be manufactured by Thern or Engineer Approved Equal. Crane Manufacturer shall have a minimum of 5 years’ experience producing substantially similar equipment. Manufacturer shall be registered ISO 9001:2000 compliant with an independent certification agency approved by the International Organization for Standardization. C. A pedestal base shall be provided for each crane. Base shall be stainless steel and shall be manufactured by Thern or Engineer Approved Equal. D. Stainless steel wire rope with stainless steel swivel hook shall be provided for each crane. Stainless steel wire rope and hook shall have adequate load rating to lift the pump and wire rope length shall be sufficient to install and remove each pump. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA SUBMERSIBLE CHOPPER PUMPS WOODARD & CURRAN 43 25 11-13 2.07 LUBRICATION A. All lubrication fittings shall be readily accessible from the outside without the necessity of removing covers, plates, housings, or guards. 2.08 FINISHES A. All fabricated steel shall be factory prepared, factory primed and factory finish painted in accordance with Section 09 90 00. Touch-up paint shall be provided as specified to restore integrity of coating system that may be damaged during construction. All paint system components for the entire project shall be the product of a single manufacturer as required by Section 09 90 00 unless otherwise noted on the Drawings or approved by the Engineer. B. Ferrous surfaces not to be painted shall be given a shop coat of grease or other suitable rust-resistant coating. 2.09 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Factory Testing 1. All pump tests shall be in accordance with the Hydraulic Institute’s Standards. All tests shall be performed at the manufacturer’s facility prior to shipment. All test results shall be certified by a registered professional engineer, and shall be submitted to Engineer for approval prior to shipment. 2. The pump shall be factory tested as follows: pump shall be hydrostatically tested at 100 psig internal pressure and 30 psig external pressure. Motor and cable insulation shall be tested for moisture content and defects before and after the above tests. Manufacturer shall submit written report with the details and results of the tests. 3. Controls shall be factory tested and documentation of the test shall be submitted. 4. Pump shall be performance tested at all specified duty points, plus five additional points. Pump test curves shall be developed to illustrate conformance with the contract documents. Capacity, head, motor speed, pump speed, efficiency and input horsepower shall be recorded for each test point. For variable speed units, each pump shall be tested at full speed plus 3 equally spaced speeds between maximum and minimum design conditions. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA SUBMERSIBLE CHOPPER PUMPS WOODARD & CURRAN 43 25 11-14 5. All pumping equipment shall be tested to check for proper operation, proper alignment, faulty equipment, and for excessive vibration. The Contractor shall provide vibration testing by a qualified and independent testing company. This testing of the complete system shall cover all duty conditions outlined in this Section of the Specifications. The vibration testing shall be conducted in the presence of the pump and pump motor field service representatives in accordance with procedures outlined in the applicable sections of the Hydraulic Institute Standards and all appropriate Sections of these specifications. 6. In the event vibration exceeds the specified limits and the cause of the vibration is attributable to the pumping equipment, the equipment manufacturers shall make the necessary balancing or alignment adjustments to bring the equipment to within the specified limits. 7. At the discretion and expense of the Contractor, an independent vibration analysis may be conducted on the new wastewater pump. The Contractor and manufacturer will be permitted to witness the test. 8. Each pump shall be hydrostatically tested to 1.5 times shutoff head. 9. All motors shall be tested in accordance with IEEE standards. All test results shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval prior to shipment. Each motor shall be tested at no load running current, high potential, and winding resistance. 10. Pump units shall not be shipped to Site until factory test reports are submitted and approved by Engineer. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Each pump and motor shall be installed in accordance with the written instructions of the manufacturer and under the direct supervision of the manufacturer's representative. Correct installation and assembly of the pumps and other equipment shall be the Contractor's responsibility and shall be in accordance with the Drawings and with the manufacturers' installation instruction manual. The Contractor shall furnish all bolts, shims, tools, and other devices necessary for installing the pumping units. The manufacturer's representative(s) familiar with the equipment being installed shall supervise the handling, installation, start-up, and testing of the equipment. B. A certificate from the pump manufacturer shall be provided stating that the installation of the pumping equipment is satisfactory, that the equipment is ready for operation, and that the operating personnel have been suitably instructed in the operation, lubrication and care of each type unit provided. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA SUBMERSIBLE CHOPPER PUMPS WOODARD & CURRAN 43 25 11-15 C. Installation shall include furnishing of all required lubricants for initial operation, including startup and six (6) months of operation. The grades and quantities of oil supplied following acceptance shall be as recommended by the pump manufacturer. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. B. Field Testing. 1. After installation of the pumping units and appurtenances is complete, operating tests shall be carried out to assure that the pumping equipment operates properly. The Contractor shall make arrangements to have the manufacturer's representatives present when field equipment tests are made. Each pumping unit shall be given a running field test in the presence of the Engineer for a minimum of 2 hours. Each pumping unit shall be operated at its rated capacity, the design conditions specified herein, or such other point on its head-capacity curve selected by the Engineer. The Contractor shall provide an accurate and acceptable method of measuring the discharge flow. Tests shall assure that the units and appurtenances have been installed correctly, that the assembly is free from undue stress imposed by the piping or mounting bolts, that there is no objectionable heating, vibration, or noise from any parts, and that all manual and automatic controls function properly. If any deficiencies are revealed during any tests, such deficiencies shall be corrected and the tests shall be re-conducted. 2. Contractor shall Supply all electric power, labor and water or wastewater and auxiliary equipment required to complete the field tests. 3. Provide Field Test Booklets for each unit showing all field tests performed to adjust each component and all field tests performed to prove compliance with the specified performance criteria, upon completion and testing of the installed system. Each test report shall indicate the final position of controls, and all data gathered during testing. 4. If the pump performance does not meet the specified requirements, corrective measures shall be taken, or pumps shall be removed and replaced with pumps with satisfy the conditions specified. 5. The pumps and motors shall be designed and constructed to avoid the generation of objectionable noise or vibration. The sound pressure level at full load shall not exceed 85 (A Seale) decibels above 300 cycles, when measured at a point not exceeding 5-ft from the motor. When operating at any point between no-load and full-load, the vibration measured in a horizontal plane at the top of the motor shall not exceed the limits recommended by the Hydraulic Institute Standards. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA SUBMERSIBLE CHOPPER PUMPS WOODARD & CURRAN 43 25 11-16 6. Any component parts which are damaged as a result of testing or which fail to meet the requirements specified shall be replaced, reinstalled and retested at the Contractor's expense. C. Field Painting 1. Stainless steel, galvanized steel, and nonferrous surfaces shall not be painted. 2. Touch-Up Painting: Factory painted items requiring touching up in the field shall be thoroughly cleaned of all foreign material and shall be primed and top-coated with the manufacturer's standard factory finish. 3. Exposed Ferrous Surfaces: Exposed ferrous surfaces shall be painted with two coats of enamel paint conforming to SSPC Paint 21. Factory primed surfaces shall be solvent-cleaned before painting. Surfaces that have not been factory primed shall be prepared and primed with one coat of SSPC Paint 25 or in accordance with the enamel paint manufacturer's recommendations. D. Manufacturer Field Services 1. Provide the services of a factory trained service representative to assist in the installation, start-up, and testing of the equipment, and to perform training to plant personnel in the operation and maintenance of the equipment. A minimum of eight (8 on-site) hours of instruction shall be provided for training on these pumps. Instruction time shall be in addition to startup, checkout, testing and travel time. A factory-trained representative shall be present during testing of all pumps. 2. The manufacturer's representative shall provide minimum services in accordance with the following table: Purpose No. of Days Installation Supervision as required for proper installation Field Testing 2 Operator Training 1 3. The number of days indicated above shall be provided on an 8-hour-day on- site basis and shall be in addition to travel time. 4. The acceptance of O&M training will be in accordance to the successful completion of the Equipment Manufacturer's Certificate of Installation Testing and Instruction. This certificate will be completed by the manufacturer's representative and the Owner at the completion of the vendor training session. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA SUBMERSIBLE CHOPPER PUMPS WOODARD & CURRAN 43 25 11-17 a. This instruction period shall be scheduled at least 10 days in advance with the Owner and shall take place prior to plant start-up and acceptance by the Owner. The final copies of operation and maintenance manuals must have been delivered to the Owner prior to scheduling the instruction period with the Owner. 5. The actual number of days on site shall be increased as necessary, without additional cost to the Owner, to accomplish the purposes indicated. 6. The follow-up visit shall be at such time as requested by the Owner within the warranty period to answer questions, address specific problems, and review start up. 7. Service scheduling shall be provided, at the Owner's request, and at no additional cost to the Owner, at any time during the warranty period. 8. Manufacturer shall submit a letter stating that he has inspected the installation and checked its performance and certifies that the installation is satisfactory, that the system is operating correctly, and that the system meets all the requirements of this Section. 3.04 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS Operation and Maintenance Manuals shall be provided as specified below: A. Each Item of Equipment and Each System: Include a description of unit or system, and component parts. Give function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions. Include performance curves with engineering data, head loss, tests, and certifications where appropriate and complete nomenclature and commercial number of replaceable parts, where applicable. B. Panel Board Circuit Directories: Provide electrical service characteristics and name of load on each branch circuit breaker. C. Operating Procedures: Include start-up, break-in, and routine normal operating instructions and sequences. Include regulation, control, stopping, shut-down, and. emergency instructions. Include summer, winter, and any special operating instructions. D. Maintenance Requirements: Include routine procedures and guide for trouble- shooting; disassembly, repair, and reassembly instructions; alignment, adjusting, balancing, and checking instructions. Provide servicing and lubrication schedule, and list of lubricants required, cleaning requirements and frequency. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA SUBMERSIBLE CHOPPER PUMPS WOODARD & CURRAN 43 25 11-18 E. Controls: Provide the following: 1. Sequence of operation. 2. Original parts list, illustrations, assembly drawings, and diagrams required for maintenance. 3. As-installed control diagrams. 4. Contractor's coordination drawings, with as-installed color coded piping diagrams. 5. Charts of valve tag numbers, with location and function of each valve, keyed to flow and control diagrams. 6. As-installed color coded wiring diagrams. 3.05 STARTUP & COMMISSIONING A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. END OF SECTION 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA WET PIT SUBMERSIBLE CENTRIFUGAL WASTEWATER PUMPS WOODARD & CURRAN 43 25 13-1 SECTION 43 25 13 WET PIT SUBMERSIBLE CENTRIFUGAL WASTEWATER PUMPS PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 PROPRIETARY NOTIFICATION A. The Owner has determined that it is in the Public interest to include in the Specifications for the Project, the requirement that the Wet Pit Submersible Centrifugal Pumps as described in this Section be a proprietary item, specifically Sulzer/ABS, or Engineer approved equal. The reason for this determination is that the Town has standardized Wet Pit Submersible pumps by the same manufacturer, thus ensuring the following: interchangeability of parts to simplify and reduce the cost of maintenance and repairs, one common vendor to contact for service, familiarity with operators regarding operation and maintenance requirements, and common control schemes. B. Should the Contractor request a substituted system, the Owner must evaluate and determine whether the requested substitution is equal based upon the following: 1. It is at least equal in quality, durability, appearance, strength and design. 2. It will perform at least equally the function imposed by the general design for the public work being contracted for or the material being purchased. 3. It conforms substantially, even with deviations, to the detailed requirements, for the items included in this and related sections. C. Should a substituted system be approved by the Owner, the Contractor shall be responsible for all costs of redesign, including efforts associated with review and approval of the substituted system, necessary to incorporate the substituted system into the existing facility and remaining aspects of the Project. 1.02 SCOPE OF WORK A. The Contractor shall provide all labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals as shown, specified and required to furnish, install and test pumping units as shown on the Drawings and specified herein. B. The return activated sludge (RAS) pumps shall consist of (4) centrifugal, non-clog, submersible, wet pit solids handling wastewater pumps. 1.03 RELATED WORK A. Field painting is included in Section 09 90 00. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA WET PIT SUBMERSIBLE CENTRIFUGAL WASTEWATER PUMPS WOODARD & CURRAN 43 25 13-2 B. Instrumentation and control work, except as specified herein, is included in Division 40. Instrumentation and controls provided in this Section shall adhere to Instrumentation and Control Specifications Sections in Division 40. C. Mechanical piping, valves, pipe hangers and supports are included in the respective Sections of Division 40. D. Electrical work is included under Division 26. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. B. Submit, in accordance with Section 01001, copies of all materials required to establish compliance with this Section. Submittals shall include, but not limited to: 1. Certified shop and erection drawings showing all important details of construction, dimensions and anchor bolt locations. 2. Descriptive literature, bulletins and/or catalogs of the equipment. 3. Manufacturer's specifications and product data required to demonstrate compliance with requirements which shall include complete parts listing showing materials of construction with applicable ANSI, ASTM or other standards. 4. Type, thickness, application procedure and test for coatings, and non- metallic and metallic linings. 5. Data on the characteristics and performance of the pumps. Data shall include guaranteed performance curves, based on actual shop tests of duplicate units, which show that they meet the specified requirements for head, capacity, efficiency, allowable NPSH, allowable suction lift and horsepower. Curves shall be submitted on 8-1/2-in by 11-in sheets. 6. Manufacturer's recommended testing, operation and maintenance procedures including a list of special tools and equipment required to maintain the units. 7. Provide a “letter of compliance” from the pump manufacturer stating that the characteristics of each pump (specifically naming the respective pumps) will not overload the specified motor horsepower under any head condition when operating at the specified maximum speed, over the entire curve. 8. Certified factory tests and pump curves for the supplied units, following fabrication, demonstrating compliance with the factory test requirements in Part 3 of this section. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA WET PIT SUBMERSIBLE CENTRIFUGAL WASTEWATER PUMPS WOODARD & CURRAN 43 25 13-3 9. The total weight of the equipment including weight of the single largest item. 10. A complete total bill of materials for all equipment. 11. A list of the manufacturer's recommended spare parts with the manufacturer's current price for each item. Include gaskets, packing, etc., on the list. List the bearings by the bearing manufacturer's numbers only. 12. A statement indicating bearing life. 13. Complete data on motors and power factor correction capacitors (if required) in accordance with Division 26. 14. Complete description of surface preparation and shop prime painting. 15. Complete wiring diagrams and control schematics. 16. Deviations from the Contract Documents. C. Certified Factory Test Reports by a registered Professional Engineer demonstrating compliance with the factory test requirements in Part 3 of this section shall be submitted prior to shipment. D. Operation and Maintenance Data 1. Copies of an operating and maintenance manual for each size pump shall be furnished to the Engineer as provided for in Section 01730. The manuals shall be prepared specifically for this installation and shall include all required cuts, drawings, equipment lists, descriptions, etc., that are required to instruct operating and maintenance personnel unfamiliar with such equipment. 2. A technical representative, from the respective pump manufacturer who has complete knowledge of proper operation and maintenance shall be provided for 1 day to instruct representatives of the Owner and the Engineer on proper operation and maintenance. This work may be conducted in conjunction with the inspection of the installation and test run as provided under Paragraph 3.03 below. If there are difficulties in operation of the equipment due to the manufacturer's design or fabrication, additional service shall be provided at no additional cost to the Owner. E. Closeout and Maintenance Material Submittals: per Division 01 General Requirements. 1.05 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. American Bearing Manufacturers Association (ABMA) 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA WET PIT SUBMERSIBLE CENTRIFUGAL WASTEWATER PUMPS WOODARD & CURRAN 43 25 13-4 B. American Gear Manufacturer’ Association (AGMA) C. American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC) D. American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI) E. American National Standard Institute (ANSI) F. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME) G. American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM) H. American Welding Society (AWS) I. Standards of the American Water Works Association (AWWA) J. Factory Mutual (FM) K. Standards of the Hydraulic Institute (HI) L. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE) M. ISO 9001:2000 N. National Electrical Code (NEC) O. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) P. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) Q. The Society of Protective Coatings (SSPC) R. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) S. Where reference is made to one of the above standards, the revision in effect at the time of bid opening shall apply. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The RAS pumps shall be Model XFP305J-CB2 as manufactured by Sulzer/ABS, or Engineer Approved Equal. B. The rated horsepower of the drive unit shall be such that the unit will not be overloaded nor the service factor reduced when the pump is operated at any point on the pump's capacity curve. If, due to the slope of the pump's performance curve, a drive unit of greater horsepower than specified is required to meet this condition, the pump will be considered for approval only if any and all changes in electrical work, etc., required by such a change will be provided at no additional cost to the Owner and be to the satisfaction of the Engineer. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA WET PIT SUBMERSIBLE CENTRIFUGAL WASTEWATER PUMPS WOODARD & CURRAN 43 25 13-5 C. Call out of a specific pump model and manufacturer does not relieve the manufacturer from the responsibility of meeting all manufacturing and performance requirements specified herein. D. All pumping equipment furnished under this section shall be from a single supplier that shall be regularly engaged in the design, manufacture, and furnishing of wastewater pumping equipment for a minimum of 10 years. The manufacturer shall be able to show evidence of a minimum of 5 other installations of similar size and complexity that have been in operation for a minimum of 5 years. Pumps, motors and bases shall be provided as a single unit from the pump manufacturer. E. Pumps are to be engineered and manufactured under a written Quality Assurance program certified to ISO 9001:2000 Quality System Standard. The pumps shall conform to all applicable requirements of ASTM, ANSI, AWWA, and Hydraulic Institute. F. All equipment shall be designed and built for 24-hour continuous service at any and all points within the specified range of operation, without overheating, without cavitation, and without excessive vibration or strain. G. The pumping units required under this section shall be complete. All parts shall be so designed and proportioned as to have liberal strength, stability, and stiffness and to be especially adapted for the service to be performed. Ample room for inspection, repairs and adjustment shall be provided. H. All working parts of the pumps and motors, such as bearings, wearing rings, shaft, and sleeves shall be standard dimensions built to limit gauges or formed to templates, such that parts will be interchangeable between like units and such that the Owner may, at any time in the future, obtain replacement and repair parts. I. Vibration, when measured in the direction of maximum amplitude on the top motor bearing housing, shall not exceed 3-mils peak to peak displacement at a maximum peak velocity level of 0.20-in per second at any speed within the specified operating speed range. J. Mechanical equipment, including drives and electric motors shall be supplied and installed in accordance with applicable OSHA regulations. The noise level of motors, unless otherwise noted, shall not exceed 85 dBA measured 5-ft from the unit under free field conditions while operating on utility power. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. B. All spare parts shall be packed in containers bearing labels clearly designating the contents and respective pieces of equipment for which they are intended. All spare parts shall be delivered at the same time as the pertaining equipment. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA WET PIT SUBMERSIBLE CENTRIFUGAL WASTEWATER PUMPS WOODARD & CURRAN 43 25 13-6 C. All equipment delivered and placed in storage shall be stored with protection from the weather, humidity and temperature variations, dirt and dust, or other contaminants. D. Factory assembled parts and components shall not be dismantled for shipment unless permission is received in writing from the Engineer. E. The finished surfaces of all exposed flanges shall be protected by wooden or equivalent blank flanges, strongly built and securely bolted thereto. F. Finished iron or steel surfaces not painted shall be properly protected to prevent rust and corrosion. G. No shipment shall be made until approved by the Engineer in writing. H. For protection of bearings during shipment and installation, the bearing shall be properly processed. Anti-friction bearings, if pre-lubricated, shall be protected in accordance with the bearing manufacturer's recommendations against formation of rust during a long period of storage while awaiting completion of installation and start-up of the machine in which they are used. Anti-friction bearings which are not pre-lubricated shall be properly treated in accordance with the bearing manufacturer's recommendation against formation of rust during a long period of storage while waiting completion of installation and start-up by the application of Exxon Rust-Ban No. 392, or equal treatment. 1.08 WARRANTY A. Equipment supplied under this section shall be warranted to be free from defects in workmanship, design and materials for a period of one (1) year from manufacturer’s startup. If any part of the equipment should prove to be defective during the warranty period, the manufacturer at no expense to the Owner shall replace the part. 1.09 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. All of the equipment included herein is intended to be standard for submersible use in wastewater treatment. B. Each pump shall be designed for the conditions of service tabulated as follows and shall operate within the system head curves appended. C. The pumps will replace existing RAS pumps and will be used to pump the RAS flow to either the upstream end of the aeration zones utilizing an overflow weir distribution structure or pump the flow directly to the anoxic zones. D. The pumps will be operated at variable speed with VFD provided either manually or remotely by the instrumentation system specified in Division 40. The motors shall be squirrel cage induction submersible type. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA WET PIT SUBMERSIBLE CENTRIFUGAL WASTEWATER PUMPS WOODARD & CURRAN 43 25 13-7 E. The heavy duty submersible wastewater pump(s) shall be capable of handling raw unscreened sewage, storm water, and other similar solids-laden fluids without clogging. The pump shall be driven by a high efficiency, providing the highest levels of operational reliability and energy efficiency. F. The pumps shall operate throughout the entire operating range, within the vibration limits specified in Paragraph 1.06 I above. G. The submersible centrifugal pumps shall be as follows: Parameter Design No. of Units 4 Configuration Base-elbow-mounted submersible Max. Capacity (GPM @ ft. TDH) 3.68 MGD @ 9.4 ft. Liquid Pumped RAS Location MBR Tanks Maximum Size (HP) 23 Motor Voltage / Phase / Frequency (Hz) 460 / 3 / 60 Maximum Pump Speed (rpm) 900 Pump Discharge Size (in) 12 Impeller Material 316 Stainless Steel Drive Type VFD 1.10 SPARE PARTS AND SPECIAL TOOLS A. Six sets of all special tools required for the maintenance, adjustments, and repair of the equipment shall be provided. B. The manufacturer's recommended spare parts and special tools shall be provided to the Owner prior to the start-up of the equipment. They shall be packaged and identified by name, function and equipment. The Contractor shall unload and store the parts in the location directed by the Owner. C. All spare parts shall be properly protected for long term storage and packed in clearly marked containers as to their contents. D. A set of any special tools required for the normal operation and maintenance of the pumps shall be provided. All such tools shall be furnished in a suitable steel tool chest complete with lock and duplicate keys. E. As a minimum, the following spare parts shall be provided: 1. Five lower mechanical seals. 2. One complete set of gaskets and 0-rings for each pump. 3. One impeller Type 316 stainless steel. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA WET PIT SUBMERSIBLE CENTRIFUGAL WASTEWATER PUMPS WOODARD & CURRAN 43 25 13-8 4. Six sets of wearing rings. 5. Five sets of manufacturer's standard overhaul tools. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A. General 1. This Section is intended to give a general description of what is required, but does not cover all details which will vary in accordance with the requirements of the equipment as offered. It is, however intended to cover all materials, equipment and appurtenances for the complete pumping units as herein specified, whether specifically mentioned in this Section or not. 2. For all units there shall be furnished and installed all necessary arid desirable accessory equipment and auxiliaries whether specifically mentioned in this Section or not and as required for an installation incorporating the highest standards for the type of service. 3. Pump base elbows and rail system shall be rigidly and accurately anchored into position on concrete and all necessary foundation bolts, plates, nuts and washers shall be furnished and installed. Anchor bolts and rail piping shall be Type 304 stainless steel. 4. Stainless steel nameplates giving the name of manufacturer, the rated capacity, head, speed and all other pertinent data shall be attached to each pump and each motor. 5. The manufacturer shall supply complete factory mounted equipment with sufficient power and signal cable, as required by the location. 6. The pump and drive shall be designed to withstand the maximum turbine run-away speed of the pump due to backflow through the pump. 7. All electrical materials and equipment shall be UL listed or FM approved and NEMA rated, and shall otherwise be equal to that supplied under Division 26, where applicable. 8. Control status panels shall be factory wired, such that field wiring connections shall require connection of power and control/sensory wiring to the control panel and to the pumps and alarm wiring to the control status panel. Field wiring connections shall be to numbered terminal strips. The entire control system shall be factory tested before shipment. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA WET PIT SUBMERSIBLE CENTRIFUGAL WASTEWATER PUMPS WOODARD & CURRAN 43 25 13-9 2.02 PUMP CONSTRUCTION A. Major pump components shall be of gray cast iron with smooth surfaces devoid of porosity or other irregularities. All exposed fasteners shall be stainless steel 1.4401 (AISI type 316) construction. All metal surfaces coming into contact with the pumped media (other than the stainless steel components) shall be protected by a factory applied spray coating of high solids two part epoxy paint finish on the exterior of the pump. The pump shall be equipped with an open lifting hoop suitable for attachment of standard chain fittings, or for hooking from the wet well surface. The hoop shall ductile cast iron EN-GJS-400-18 (ASTM A536; 60-40-18). B. Sealing design for the pump/motor assembly shall incorporate machined surfaces fitted with Nitrile (Buna-N) rubber O-rings. Sealing will be the result of controlled compression of rubber O-rings in two planes of the sealing interface. Housing interfaces shall meet with metal-to-metal contact between machined surfaces, and sealing shall be accomplished without requiring a specific torque on the securing fasteners. Rectangular cross sectioned gaskets requiring specific torque limits to achieve compression shall not be considered equal. No secondary sealing compounds shall be required or used. C. Impeller: The impeller shall be of 316 stainless steel. The impeller shall be of the semi-open, non-clogging, two vane design impeller shall be capable of passing a minimum of 4.7 x 6.3 inch oblong solids. The impeller shall have a slip fit onto the motor shaft and drive key, and shall be securely fastened to the shaft by a stainless steel bolt which is mechanically prevented from loosening by a positively engaged ratcheting washer assembly. The head of the impeller bolt shall be effectively recessed within the impeller bore or supporting washer to prevent disruption of the flow stream and loss of hydraulic efficiency. The impeller shall be dynamically balanced to the ISO 10816 standard to provide smooth vibration free operation. D. Enclosed impellers will not be considered equal or acceptable. E. Self Cleaning Wear Plate: The wear plate shall be constructed from gray cast iron, EN-GJL-250 (ASTM A-48, Class 35B). The wear plate shall be designed with an inlet incorporating strategically placed cutting grooves to shred and force stringy solids outward from the impeller and through the pump discharge. The wear plate shall be mounted to the volute with four stainless steel securing screws and four stainless steel adjusting screws to permit close tolerance adjustment between the wear plate and impeller for maximum pump efficiency. Adjustment to allow for wear and restore peak pumping performance shall be easily accomplished using standard tools, and without requiring disassembly of the pump. The use of fixed or non-adjustable wear plates or rings, or systems that require disassembly of the pump or shimming of the impeller to facilitate adjustment shall not be considered equal or acceptable. The suction flange shall be integrated into the wear plate and its bolt holes shall be drilled and threaded to accept standard 12 inch ANSI class 125 flanged fittings. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA WET PIT SUBMERSIBLE CENTRIFUGAL WASTEWATER PUMPS WOODARD & CURRAN 43 25 13-10 F. Pump Volute: The pump volute shall be single piece gray cast iron, EN-GJL-250 (ASTM A-48, Class 35B) non-concentric design with centerline discharge. Passages shall be smooth and large enough to pass any solids that may enter the impeller. Discharge size shall be as specified on the pump performance curve. The discharge flange design shall permit attachment to standard ANSI or metric flanges/appurtenances. The discharge flange shall be drilled to accept both 12-inch ANSI class 125 and metric DN300 (PN 10) metric flanged fittings. Proprietary or non-standard flange dimensions shall not be considered acceptable. The minimum working pressure of the volute and pump assembly shall be 10 bar (145 psi). 2.03 MOTOR A. The motor shall be housed in a watertight gray cast iron, EN-GJL-250 (ASTM A- 48, Class 35B) enclosure capable of continuous submerged operation underwater to a depth of 20 meters (65 feet), and shall have an IP68 protection rating. The motor shall be of the squirrel-cage induction design, NEMA type B. The copper stator windings shall be insulated with moisture resistant Class H insulation material, rated for 180oC (356oF). The stator shall be press fitted into the stator housing. The use of bolts, pins or other fastening devices requiring penetration of the stator housing is unacceptable. The rotor bars and short circuit rings shall be made of cast aluminum. B. The motor shall be designed for continuous duty. The maximum continuous temperature of the pumped liquid shall be 40 °C (104 °F), and intermittently up to 50 °C (122 °F). The motor shall be capable of handling up to 15 evenly spaced starts per hour without overheating. The service factor (as defined by the NEMA MG1 standard) shall be 1.3. The motor shall have a voltage tolerance of +/- 10% from nominal, and a phase-to-phase voltage imbalance tolerance of 1%. The motor shall have a NEMA Class A temperature rise, providing cool operation under all operating conditions. The motor shall be FM and CSA approved for use in NEC Class I, Division I, Groups C & D hazardous locations. The surface temperature rating shall be T3C. The motor shall meet the requirements of NEMA MG1 Part 30 and 31 for operation on PWM type Variable Frequency Drives. C. The motor shall be capable of operating, completely submerged, partially submerged, or unsubmerged. D. Closed Loop Cooling System: The factory installed closed loop cooling system shall be adequately designed to allow the motor to run continuously under full load while in an unsubmerged or minimally submerged condition. A cooling jacket shall surround the stator housing, and an environmentally safe non-toxic propylene glycol solution shall be circulated through the jacket by an axial flow circulating impeller attached to the main motor shaft. The coolant shall be pumped through an integrated heat exchanger in the base of the motor whenever the motor is running, allowing excess heat to be transferred to the process liquid. Cooling systems that circulate the pumped medium through the cooling jacket, or those that use a toxic 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA WET PIT SUBMERSIBLE CENTRIFUGAL WASTEWATER PUMPS WOODARD & CURRAN 43 25 13-11 cooling liquid shall not be acceptable. The use of external heat exchangers, fans, or the supply of supplemental cooling liquid shall not be required. E. Thermal Protection: Each phase of the motor shall contain a normally closed bi- metallic temperature monitor switch imbedded in the motor windings. These thermal switches shall be connected in series and set to open at 140 °C +/- 5 °C (284 °F). They shall be connected to the control panel to provide a high stator temperature shutdown signal, and are used in conjunction with external motor overload protection. The bi-metallic system must be connected to the control to provide positive shutdown of the motor in the event of an overheat condition. This is required in order to conform to FM and CSA rules for explosion proof equipment. F. Mechanical Seals: Each pump shall be equipped with a triple seal system consisting of tandem mechanical shaft seals, plus a radial lip seal; providing three complete levels of sealing between the pump wet end and the motor. The mechanical seal system shall consist of two totally independent seal assemblies operating in a lubricant reservoir that hydro-dynamically lubricates the lapped seal faces at a constant rate. The mechanical seals shall be of non-proprietary design, and shall be manufactured by a major independent manufacturer specializing in the design and manufacture of mechanical seals. The lower, primary seal unit, located between the pump and the lubricant chamber, shall contain one stationary industrial duty solid silicon-carbide seal ring and one rotating industrial duty solid silicon- carbide seal ring. The stationary ring of the primary seal shall be installed in a seal holding plate of gray cast iron EN-GJL-250 (ASTM A-48, Class 35B). The seal holding plate shall be equipped with swirl disruption ribs to prevent abrasive material from prematurely wearing the seal plate. The upper, secondary seal unit, located between the lubricant chamber and the sensing chamber, shall contain one stationary industrial duty solid silicon-carbide seal ring, and one rotating one rotating industrial duty solid silicon-carbide seal ring. Each seal interface shall be held in contact by its own spring system. A radial lip seal shall be positioned above the sensing chamber, preventing any liquid that accumulates in the sensing chamber from entering the lower bearing and motor. The seals shall not require routine maintenance, or adjustment, and shall not be dependent on the direction of rotation for proper sealing. Each pump shall be provided with a lubricant chamber for the shaft sealing system that shall provide superior heat transfer and maximum seal cooling. The lubricant chamber shall be designed to prevent overfilling, and to provide lubricant expansion capacity. The drain and inspection plug shall have a positive anti-leak seal, and shall be easily accessible from the outside of the pump. The seal system shall not rely upon the pumped media for lubrication and shall not be damaged when the pump is run dry. Lubricant in the chamber shall be environmentally safe non-toxic material. G. The following seal types shall not be considered equal or acceptable: Seal systems with less than three complete levels of sealing between the pump wet end and the motor. Seals of proprietary design, or seals manufactured by other than major independent seal manufacturing companies. Seals requiring set screws, pins, or other mechanical locking devices to hold the seal in place, conventional double 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA WET PIT SUBMERSIBLE CENTRIFUGAL WASTEWATER PUMPS WOODARD & CURRAN 43 25 13-12 mechanical seals containing either a common single or double spring acting between the upper and lower seal faces, any system requiring a pressure differential to seat the seal and ensure sealing. H. Mechanical Seal Protection System: The primary mechanical seal shall be protected from interference by particles in the wastewater, including fibrous materials, by an active Seal Protection System integrated into the impeller. The back side of the impeller shall be equipped with a sinusoidal cutting ring, forming a close clearance cutting system with the lower submersible motor housing or seal plate. This sinusoidal cutting ring shall spin with the pump impeller providing a minimum of 75 shearing actions per pump revolution. Large particles or fibrous material which attempt to lodge behind the impeller or wrap around the mechanical seal, shall be effectively sheared by the active cutting system into particles small enough the prevent interference with the mechanical seal. The Seal Protection System shall operate whenever the pump operates, and shall not require adjustment or maintenance in order to function. Submersible pump designs that do not incorporate an active cutting system to protect the primary mechanical seal shall not be considered acceptable for wastewater service. I. Seal Failure Early Warning System: The integrity of the mechanical seal system shall be continuously monitored during pump operation and standby time. An electrical probe shall be provided in a sensing chamber positioned above the mechanical seals for detecting the presence of water contamination within the chamber. The sensing chamber shall be air filled, and shall have a drain / inspection plug with a positive anti-leak seal which is easily accessible from the outside of the pump. A solid-state relay mounted in the pump control panel or in a separate enclosure shall send a low voltage, low amperage signal to the probe, continuously monitoring the conductivity of the liquid in the sensing chamber. If sufficient water enters the sensing chamber through the mechanical seal system, the probe shall sense the increase in conductivity and signal the solid state relay in the control panel. The relay shall then energize a warning light on the control panel. Systems utilizing float switches or any other monitoring devices located in the stator housing rather than in a sensing chamber between the mechanical seals are not considered to be early warning systems, and shall not be considered equal or acceptable. J. Shaft: The pump shaft and motor shaft shall be an integral, one-piece unit adequately designed to meet the maximum torque required at any normal start-up condition or operating point in the system. The shaft shall have a full shutoff head design safety factor of 1.7, and the maximum shaft deflection shall not exceed .05 mm (.002 inch) at the lower seal during normal pump operation. Each shaft shall be stainless steel 1.4021 (AISI 420) material, and shall have a polished finish with accurately machined shoulders to accommodate bearings, seals and impeller. K. Bearings: Each pump shaft shall rotate on high quality permanently lubricated, greased bearings. The upper bearing shall be a cylindrical roller bearing and the lower bearings shall be a matched set of at least three heavy duty bearings, two angular contact ball bearings and one cylindrical roller bearing. All three lower 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA WET PIT SUBMERSIBLE CENTRIFUGAL WASTEWATER PUMPS WOODARD & CURRAN 43 25 13-13 bearings shall have identical outer race diameters to provide maximum bearing load capacity. Designs that utilize a roller bearing with a smaller outer diameter than the other bearings in the assembly do not provide maximum load capacity and shall not be considered equal. Bearings shall be of sufficient size and properly spaced to transfer all radial and axial loads to the pump housing and minimize shaft deflection. L-10 bearing life shall be a minimum of 100,000 hours at flows ranging from ½ of BEP flow to 1½ times BEP flow (BEP is best efficiency point). The bearings shall be manufactured by a major internationally known manufacturer of high quality bearings, and shall be stamped with the manufacturer’s name and size designation on the race. Generic or unbranded bearings from other than major bearing manufacturers shall not be considered acceptable. L. Power Cable: The power cables shall be sized according to NEC and CSA standards and shall be of sufficient length to reach the junction box without requiring splices. The outer jacket of the cable shall be oil, water, and UV resistant, and shall be capable of continuous submerged operation underwater to a depth of 65 feet. M. Cable Entry/Junction Chamber: The cable entry design shall not require a specific torque to insure a watertight seal. The cable entry shall consist of cylindrical elastomer grommets, flanked by stainless steel washers. A cable cap incorporating a strain relief and bend radius limiter shall mount to the cable entry boss, compressing the grommet ID to the cable while the grommet OD seals against the bore of the cable entry. The junction chamber shall be isolated and sealed from the motor by means of sealing glands. Electrical connections between the power cables and motor leads shall be made via a compression or post type terminal board, allowing for easy disconnection and maintenance. N. All wetted parts shall be shop primed in accordance with Division 9. 2.04 PUMP CONTROL PANEL A. The Contractor shall furnish and install a pump control panel for each RAS pump. The panels shall be fabricated by the Contractor or pump manufacturer at the Contractor's discretion, but coordination of alarm conductors between the panel and pump shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. B. Each control panel shall include, at a minimum, the following: 1. Main circuit breaker / disconnect capable of being operated and locked out externally. 2. Thermal and leak detection units. 3. The panel shall utilize 480-volt, 3-phase power and transform it to other voltages necessary for control. 4. Indicating lights and an audible alarm for the following alarm conditions: 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA WET PIT SUBMERSIBLE CENTRIFUGAL WASTEWATER PUMPS WOODARD & CURRAN 43 25 13-14 a. Motor off/ready b. Motor temperature overload c. Motor moisture/leak detection d. Motor on/ running 5. A Hand/Off/Auto (HOA) selector switch shall be used to operate the pump locally or automatically based on the level inside the MBR tanks. 6. Alarm silence button shall be provided at the panel to silence the local alarm. The panel shall be furnished ready for mounting, and shall be completely wired and ready for field connection of primary power, control/sensory and alarm wiring to the primary power and treatment plant SCADA system. The control panel shall be rated NEMA 4X, and constructed of stainless steel. The panel shall be mounted in the locations shown on the Drawings. 7. The control panels shall include dry contacts rated for 5A at 120 VAC to transmit the following alarms/status to the SCADA PLC: a. High temperature alarm b. Moisture/leak detected alarm c. HOA switch in hand status d. Pump run status e. Alarms wired to panel lights and to the SCADA PLC shall be DPDT switches 8. Power supply to the control status panel shall be 120 Volt, single-phase, 60 Hz. 9. The RAS Pumps Control Strategy shall be similar to the existing RAS pumps and shall be integrated in accordance with the written instructions of the MBR Manufacturer. 2.05 MOISTURE DETECTION A. Moisture sensing probe(s) shall be mounted in the seal chamber, to detect any water leakage past the lower seal. The pump manufacturer shall provide a corresponding relay which shall be installed in the control panel. The relay shall be used in conjunction with the seal probe to detect the presence of moisture. The moisture detection probes and system shall be rated for use in the "Electrical Hazard Area Classification" as previously specified for each application and as outlined in the Electrical Specifications (Division 26). The relay shall be rated for 125 VAC. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA WET PIT SUBMERSIBLE CENTRIFUGAL WASTEWATER PUMPS WOODARD & CURRAN 43 25 13-15 2.06 HIGH TEMPERATURE PROTECTION A. Thermal switches shall be embedded in each phase of the windings and be set to protect the motor against excess heat. The thermal switches shall be wired in series and be connected to the high temperature protection relay. The motor controls shall shut down the pump during a high temperature condition. The sensor(s) shall be designed to reset automatically when the motor cools or through a manual reset on the relay itself. 2.07 GUIDE RAIL BASE ASSEMBLY A. There shall be no need for personnel to enter the wet well to remove or reinstall the pump(s). In a wet pit installation, the discharge base & elbow assembly shall be permanently installed in the wet well and connected to the discharge piping. In order to prevent binding or separation of the pump from the guide rail system, the pump(s) shall connect to the guide rail base automatically and firmly, guided by (2) 2-inch stainless steel guide pipes the base elbow to the top of the wet well. Systems using guide cable in lieu of rigid guide bars or pipes shall not be considered acceptable. The sliding guide bracket shall be a separate part of the pumping unit, capable of being attached to standard 12-inch ANSI class 125 or metric DN300 pump flanges, so that the pump mounting is nonproprietary, and any pump with a standard discharge flange can be mounted on the base assembly. Base or bracket assemblies with proprietary or non-standard flange dimensions shall not be considered acceptable. B. A field replaceable Nitrile (Buna-N) rubber profile gasket or O-ring shall accomplish positive sealing of the pump flange/guide rail bracket to the discharge elbow. Base assemblies that rely solely on metal-to-metal contact between the pump flange and discharge base elbow as a means of sealing are inherently leak prone, and shall not be considered equal. No portion of the pump shall bear directly on the floor of the sump. The guide rail system shall be non-sparking, approved by Factory Mutual for use in NEC Class 1, Division 1, Group C&D hazardous locations. 2.08 PORTABLE DAVIT CRANE A. Contractor shall provide a portable davit crane for RAS Pump. Crane shall be Thern Model 5PT30JX-M1X or approved equal. B. Manufacturer shall have a minimum of 5 years’ experience producing substantially similar equipment. Manufacturer shall be registered ISO 9001:2000 compliant with an independent certification agency approved by the International Organization for Standardization. C. Crane shall have a variable lift capacity depending on boom position. Lift capacity range shall be 2,400 lbs to 3,000 lbs. With the boom in the horizontal position, the maximum hook reach shall be 112” (measured from the mast center to the hook center) and the hook height shall be 66” minimum. The book angle shall be 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA WET PIT SUBMERSIBLE CENTRIFUGAL WASTEWATER PUMPS WOODARD & CURRAN 43 25 13-16 adjustable with a ratchet jack anywhere from horizontal to 45 degrees. Wire rope shall pass over a sheave at the end of the boom. Sheave shall have a bronze bearing. D. The crane boom and mast shall be constructed of fabricated steel and shall have an epoxy coating. E. Each crane shall be equipped with a spur gear hand winch; Thern Model M452BEGRA-K. Winch shall have epoxy finish. Winch shall allow for quick attachment and removal of wire rope assembly. F. A pedestal base shall be provided for each crane. Pedestal base shall be Thern Model 5BP30X with epoxy finish. G. Stainless steel wire rope with stainless steel swivel hook shall be provided for each crane. Stainless steel wire rope and hook shall have adequate load rating to lift the pump and wire rope length shall be sufficient to install and remove each pump. 2.09 LUBRICATION A. All lubrication fittings shall be readily accessible from the outside without the necessity of removing covers, plates, housings, or guards. 2.10 FINISHES A. All fabricated steel shall be factory prepared, factory primed and factory finish painted in accordance with Section 09 90 00. Touch-up paint shall be provided as specified to restore integrity of coating system that may be damaged during construction. All paint system components for the entire project shall be the product of a single manufacturer as required by Section 09 90 00 unless otherwise noted on the Drawings or approved by the Engineer. B. Ferrous surfaces not to be painted shall be given a shop coat of grease or other suitable rust-resistant coating. 2.11 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Factory Testing 1. All pump tests shall be in accordance with the Hydraulic Institute’s Standards. All tests shall be performed at the manufacturer’s facility prior 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA WET PIT SUBMERSIBLE CENTRIFUGAL WASTEWATER PUMPS WOODARD & CURRAN 43 25 13-17 to shipment. All test results shall be certified by a registered professional engineer, and shall be submitted to Engineer for approval prior to shipment. 2. The pump shall be factory tested as follows: pump shall be hydrostatically tested at 100 psig internal pressure and 30 psig external pressure. Motor and cable insulation shall be tested for moisture content and defects before and after the above tests. Manufacturer shall submit written report with the details and results of the tests. 3. Controls shall be factory tested and documentation of the test shall be submitted. 4. Pump shall be performance tested at all specified duty points, plus five additional points. Certified pump test curves shall be developed to illustrate conformance with the contract documents. Capacity, head, motor speed, pump speed, efficiency and input horsepower shall be recorded for each test point. For variable speed units, each pump shall be tested at full speed plus 3 equally spaced speeds between maximum and minimum design conditions. 5. All pumping equipment shall be tested to check for proper operation, proper alignment, faulty equipment, and for excessive vibration. The Contractor shall provide vibration testing by a qualified and independent testing company. This testing of the complete system shall cover all duty conditions outlined in this Section of the Specifications. The vibration testing shall be conducted in the presence of the pump and pump motor field service representatives in accordance with procedures outlined in the applicable sections of the Hydraulic Institute Standards and all appropriate Sections of these specifications. 6. In the event vibration exceeds the specified limits and the cause of the vibration is attributable to the pumping equipment, the equipment manufacturers shall make the necessary balancing or alignment adjustments to bring the equipment to within the specified limits. 7. At the discretion and expense of the Contractor, an independent vibration analysis may be conducted on the new wastewater pump. The Contractor and manufacturer will be permitted to witness the test. 8. Each pump shall be hydrostatically tested to 1.5 times shutoff head. 9. All motors shall be tested in accordance with IEEE standards. All test results shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval prior to shipment. Each motor shall be tested at no load running current, high potential, and winding resistance. 10. Pump units shall not be shipped to Site until factory test reports are submitted and approved by Engineer. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA WET PIT SUBMERSIBLE CENTRIFUGAL WASTEWATER PUMPS WOODARD & CURRAN 43 25 13-18 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Each pump and motor shall be installed in accordance with the written instructions of the manufacturer and under the direct supervision of the manufacturer's representative. Correct installation and assembly of the pumps and other equipment shall be the Contractor's responsibility and shall be in accordance with the Drawings and with the manufacturers' installation instruction manual. The Contractor shall furnish all bolts, shims, tools, and other devices necessary for installing the pumping units. The manufacturer's representative(s) familiar with the equipment being installed shall supervise the handling, installation, start-up, and testing of the equipment. B. A certificate from the pump manufacturer shall be provided stating that the installation of the pumping equipment is satisfactory, that the equipment is ready for operation, and that the operating personnel have been suitably instructed in the operation, lubrication and care of each type unit provided. C. Installation shall include furnishing of all required lubricants for initial operation, including startup and six (6) months of operation. The grades and quantities of oil supplied following acceptance shall be as recommended by the pump manufacturer. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. B. Field Testing. 1. After installation of the pumping units and appurtenances is complete, operating tests shall be carried out to assure that the pumping equipment operates properly. The Contractor shall make arrangements to have the manufacturer's representatives present when field equipment tests are made. Each pumping unit shall be given a running field test in the presence of the Engineer for a minimum of 2 hours. Each pumping unit shall be operated at its rated capacity, the design conditions specified herein, or such other point on its head-capacity curve selected by the Engineer. The Contractor shall provide an accurate and acceptable method of measuring the discharge flow. Tests shall assure that the units and appurtenances have been installed correctly, that the assembly is free from undue stress imposed by the piping or mounting bolts, that there is no objectionable heating, vibration, or noise from any parts, and that all manual and automatic controls function properly. If any deficiencies are revealed during any tests, such deficiencies shall be corrected and the tests shall be re-conducted. 2. Contractor shall Supply all electric power, labor and water or wastewater and auxiliary equipment required to complete the field tests. 3. Provide Field Test Booklets for each unit showing all field tests performed to adjust each component and all field tests performed to prove compliance 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA WET PIT SUBMERSIBLE CENTRIFUGAL WASTEWATER PUMPS WOODARD & CURRAN 43 25 13-19 with the specified performance criteria, upon completion and testing of the installed system. Each test report shall indicate the final position of controls, and all data gathered during testing. 4. If the pump performance does not meet the specified requirements, corrective measures shall be taken, or pumps shall be removed and replaced with pumps with satisfy the conditions specified. 5. The pumps and motors shall be designed and constructed to avoid the generation of objectionable noise or vibration. The sound pressure level at full load shall not exceed 85 (A Seale) decibels above 300 cycles, when measured at a point not exceeding 5-ft from the motor. When operating at any point between no-load and full-load, the vibration measured in a horizontal plane at the top of the motor shall not exceed the limits recommended by the Hydraulic Institute Standards. 6. Any component parts which are damaged as a result of testing or which fail to meet the requirements specified shall be replaced, reinstalled and retested at the Contractor's expense. C. Field Painting 1. Stainless steel, galvanized steel, and nonferrous surfaces shall not be painted. 2. Touch-Up Painting: Factory painted items requiring touching up in the field shall be thoroughly cleaned of all foreign material and shall be primed and top-coated with the manufacturer's standard factory finish. 3. Exposed Ferrous Surfaces: Exposed ferrous surfaces shall be painted with two coats of enamel paint conforming to SSPC Paint 21. Factory primed surfaces shall be solvent-cleaned before painting. Surfaces that have not been factory primed shall be prepared and primed with one coat of SSPC Paint 25 or in accordance with the enamel paint manufacturer's recommendations. D. Manufacturer Field Services 1. Provide the services of a factory trained service representative to assist in the installation, start-up, and testing of the equipment, and to perform training to plant personnel in the operation and maintenance of the equipment. A minimum of eight (8 on-site) hours of instruction shall be provided for training on these pumps. Instruction time shall be in addition to startup, checkout, testing and travel time. A factory-trained representative shall be present during testing of all pumps. 2. The manufacturer's representative shall provide minimum services in accordance with the following table: 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA WET PIT SUBMERSIBLE CENTRIFUGAL WASTEWATER PUMPS WOODARD & CURRAN 43 25 13-20 Purpose No. of Days Installation Supervision as required for proper installation Field Testing 2 Operator Training 1 3. The number of days indicated above shall be provided on an 8-hour-day on- site basis and shall be in addition to travel time. 4. The acceptance of O&M training will be in accordance to the successful completion of the Equipment Manufacturer's Certificate of Installation Testing and Instruction. This certificate will be completed by the manufacturer's representative and the Owner at the completion of the vendor training session. a. This instruction period shall be scheduled at least 10 days in advance with the Owner and shall take place prior to plant start-up and acceptance by the Owner. The final copies of operation and maintenance manuals must have been delivered to the Owner prior to scheduling the instruction period with the Owner. 5. The actual number of days on site shall be increased as necessary, without additional cost to the Owner, to accomplish the purposes indicated. 6. The follow-up visit shall be at such time as requested by the Owner within the warranty period to answer questions, address specific problems, and review start up. 7. Service scheduling shall be provided, at the Owner's request, and at no additional cost to the Owner, at any time during the warranty period. 8. Manufacturer shall submit a letter stating that he has inspected the installation and checked its performance and certifies that the installation is satisfactory, that the system is operating correctly, and that the system meets all the requirements of this Section. 3.04 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS Operation and Maintenance Manuals shall be provided as specified below: A. Each Item of Equipment and Each System: Include a description of unit or system, and component parts. Give function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions. Include performance curves with engineering data, head loss, tests, and certifications where appropriate and complete nomenclature and commercial number of replaceable parts, where applicable. B. Panel Board Circuit Directories: Provide electrical service characteristics and name of load on each branch circuit breaker. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA WET PIT SUBMERSIBLE CENTRIFUGAL WASTEWATER PUMPS WOODARD & CURRAN 43 25 13-21 C. Operating Procedures: Include start-up, break-in, and routine normal operating instructions and sequences. Include regulation, control, stopping, shut-down, and. emergency instructions. Include summer, winter, and any special operating instructions. D. Maintenance Requirements: Include routine procedures and guide for trouble- shooting; disassembly, repair, and reassembly instructions; alignment, adjusting, balancing, and checking instructions. Provide servicing and lubrication schedule, and list of lubricants required, cleaning requirements and frequency. E. Controls: Provide the following: 1. Sequence of operation. 2. Original parts list, illustrations, assembly drawings, and diagrams required for maintenance. 3. As-installed control diagrams. 4. Contractor's coordination drawings, with as-installed color coded piping diagrams. 5. Charts of valve tag numbers, with location and function of each valve, keyed to flow and control diagrams. 6. As-installed color coded wiring diagrams. 3.05 STARTUP & COMMISSIONING A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. END OF SECTION This page intentionally left blank 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA PACKAGED ODOR CONTROL SYSTEM WOODARD & CURRAN 44 31 19-1 SECTION 44 31 19 PACKAGED ODOR CONTROL SYSTEM PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. The Contractor shall furnish all materials, equipment and incidentals required for activated carbon odor control equipment, appurtenances and coordinated systems as specified. The Contractor shall also provide all related appurtenances, including but not limited to, motors, pre-filters, fans, valves, wiring, attachments, control relays, foundations, anchors, supports, and all related accessories to provide a complete operational odor control system as specified herein and as shown on the Drawings. All appurtenances, accessory equipment, and auxiliaries for a complete odor control system shall be provided whether specifically mentioned or not. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 06 70 00 – Structural Composites 1.02 REFERENCES A. The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only. B. Air Movement and Control Association International (AMCA) 1. AMCA 210 Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Aerodynamic Performance Rating C. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE) 1. Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Aerodynamic Performance Rating D. ASTM International (ASTM) 1. A 48/A 48M Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings 2. F 593 Stainless Steel Bolts, Hex Cap Screws, and Studs 3. F 594 Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Nuts E. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA PACKAGED ODOR CONTROL SYSTEM WOODARD & CURRAN 44 31 19-2 1. ICS 1 Standard for Industrial Control and Systems General Requirements 2. MG 1 Standard for Motors and Generators F. The Society for Protective Coatings (SSPC) 1. SP 10 Near-White Blast Cleaning 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. The following shall be submitted in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. The submittals shall include but are not limited to the following in addition to Division 01 General Requirements. B. Shop Drawings 1. Shop Drawings shall show layout and dimensions of equipment, major components, piping connection points, key alignment locations and locations of bolt holes. Drawings shall also indicate where access points for maintenance and operations are located on the equipment. Drawings shall show critical field dimensions identified by the Manufacturer. Shop Drawings shall include electrical and control wiring diagrams for the equipment including motor wiring diagrams, control wiring diagrams, and grounding requirements. 2. Provide sufficient product data to verify compliance with the Specifications and to illustrate the construction and assembly of the products. Include compliance of materials and components with applicable CEAM, ASTM, AGMA and other standards. List the manufacture, model and weights of major components. Include catalog cuts, illustrations, schedules, diagrams, performance charts, instructions and brochures illustrating size, physical appearance and other characteristics of materials, systems or equipment. C. Product Data 1. Performance data including capacity in CFM, efficiency, and fan horsepower. 2. Manufacturer's descriptive data and technical literature, performance charts and curves, catalog cuts, and installation instructions shall also be included. 3. Warrantee language for the equipment and all related appurtenances. 4. Total weight of all components as shipped and as installed. 5. Fan motor data including size, hp, service factor, insulation rating, efficiency full load/locked rotor current, dimensions and power factor. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA PACKAGED ODOR CONTROL SYSTEM WOODARD & CURRAN 44 31 19-3 6. List of all parts including materials of construction. 7. A list of at least ten (10) installations of similar equipment, including contact names and phone numbers. D. Manufacturer Field Reports 1. Submit in accordance with Division 01 including written certification of proper installation, initial adjustments, and satisfactory operations, dated and signed by a Manufacturer's representative. E. Operation and Maintenance Data 1. Submit in accordance with Division 01. 1.04 QUALIFICATIONS OF MANUFACTURER A. Materials and equipment shall be the standard products of a Manufacturer regularly engaged in the production of such products and shall essentially duplicate items that have been in satisfactory use in identical applications in other wastewater treatment facilities. The Manufacturer shall have a minimum of ten (10) years of documented experience in the design and production of carbon odor control equipment of "all types", and not less than five (5) years of experience in the production of equal or larger sized models of the exact equipment as specified herein. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. All equipment delivered and placed in storage shall be stored with protection from the weather, humidity, temperature variations, dirt, dust, or other contaminants in accordance with the Manufacturer's written instructions. Finished surfaces of all exposed equipment openings shall be protected by wooden blanks or other suitable cover to prevent foreign material and debris from entering the equipment. B. The construction Contractor shall off-load equipment at the installation Site using equipment of sufficient size and design to prevent damage to the equipment. Immediately after off-loading, inspect all equipment and appurtenances for shipping damage or missing parts. Any damage or discrepancy shall be noted in a written claim with the shipper prior to accepting delivery. Validate all equipment serial numbers and parts lists with the shipping documentation. Notify the Manufacturer of any unacceptable conditions noted with the shipper if required. 1.06 SPECIAL TOOLS A. Furnish one (1) set of all special tools required to completely assemble, disassemble, or maintain the equipment. Special tools shall refer to oversized or specially 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA PACKAGED ODOR CONTROL SYSTEM WOODARD & CURRAN 44 31 19-4 dimensioned tools, special attachments or fixtures, or any similar items. One (1) set of special tools shall be provided for each size system. 1.07 WARRANTY A. For a period of minimum of one (1) year from date of substantial completion, manufacturer shall repair or replace, at no additional cost to the Owner, any equipment which has been found defective in materials or workmanship under normal conditions of use and maintenance. Guarantee need not cover alterations by Owner, damage from accidents, abuse, and vandalism nor Acts of God. Manufacturer's liability shall include the cost of materials and installation. This paragraph is not intended to void any manufacturer's guarantee or warranties which might be of a duration greater than 1 year. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. The Contractor shall furnish skid mounted, self-contained, activated carbon odor control equipment and all related appurtenances. The system shall be specifically designed to treat odorous air from raw untreated municipal wastewater containing sewer gasses including but not limited to hydrogen sulfide, ammonia, amines, and mercaptans. The system shall be designed to achieve removal of odorous compounds from the feed air stream to the minimum levels as specified herein. The system shall include but is not limited to; a carbon absorption vessel, fan, carbon media, interconnecting ductwork, flexible connectors, fan prefilter unit, fan outlet damper, skid support system, differential pressure gauge, and discharge stack. B. All components of the odor control equipment shall be designed for installation and continues, year-round operation while located outdoors as shown on the Drawings. C. All components of the odor control equipment shall be designed to handle corrosive gas and be rated for a Class 1, Division 1 environment. D. All odor control system materials and equipment shall be as specified and as shown on the Drawings. All odor control equipment shall be suitable for continuous or intermittent operation under the specified design conditions. Materials and equipment shall be new and unused, except for testing as required. Where two or more pieces of equipment performing the same function are required, they shall be duplicate products of the same Manufacturer. Under no circumstances, under the specified range of operation, shall the system be subjected to factors including but not limited to: overheating, excessive vibration, and excessive strain. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA PACKAGED ODOR CONTROL SYSTEM WOODARD & CURRAN 44 31 19-5 2.02 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS: A. Provide all polymer feed systems of the same type and for the same application from the same manufacturer. Provide complete polymer feed systems equal to those manufactured by: 1. Carbtrol 2. Duall 3. ECS Environmental Solutions 4. Or approved equal 2.03 PROCESS DESIGN CONDITIONS A. The process air stream is odorous air from raw unscreened municipal wastewater. B. All odor control equipment shall meet the following criteria: ODOR CONTROL EQUIPMENT DESIGN CRITERIA Number of Units One (1) Location Outdoors Airflow (6 ach) 2,250 CFM Inlet Hydrogen Sulfide 20 ppmv (Peak Instantaneous) Inlet Hydrogen Sulfide 3 ppmv (Average) Hydrogen Sulfide Removal 99% (Minimum) Carbon Capacity As specified below Fan Motor Power Rating 15 hp Maximum Power Supply 480 Volts, 3 Phase, 60 Hertz Motor Type Constant Speed Fan Pressure Losses Manufacturer shall size fan to overcome all anticipated losses in their equipment and media plus suction losses from ductwork as shown in Drawings. Inlet Air Connection Provide flexible coupling and transition fitting to FRP duct of size shown on drawing. Discharge Air Connection Stack provided by Manufacturer Sample Port Connections 1 inch (Minimum) 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA PACKAGED ODOR CONTROL SYSTEM WOODARD & CURRAN 44 31 19-6 Vessel Pressure Rating As required to withstand maximum pressure of fan against completely plugged media. Vessel Diameter 8-foot maximum Vessel Height 10.5-foot maximum Skid Length & Width Skid must fit in area shown on Drawings. Elastomers & Seals Buna-N 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA PACKAGED ODOR CONTROL SYSTEM WOODARD & CURRAN 44 31 19-7 2.04 CARBON VESSEL A. The carbon adsorption vessel shall be constructed of UV resistant Fiber Reinforced Plastic (FRP) or polypropylene (PPL). The vessel shall not have any moving parts and shall be specifically designed to allow replacement of the internal carbon media without disassembly. The vessel shall be reusable. The vessel shall have a maximum diameter and height as previously specified and as shown on the Drawings. At a minimum, the carbon vessel shall be designed to contain the previously specified amount of carbon media. The vessel shall include a carbon bed support system consisting of FRP grating with a (PPL) carbon retaining ring. The vessel shall be designed such that odorous air enters though an air inlet in the vessel sidewall, is processed up through the carbon bed and exits through a center top outlet. B. The inlet shall be an ANSI, standard 150 lb. nozzle of the size as previously specified. The outlet connection shall be a plain end nozzle of size as previously specified. The vessel discharge stack (outlet) shall be supplied with a 316 stainless steel bird screen and rain tee. The rain tee shall be manufactured of the same material as the vessel. The Manufacturer shall provide all interconnecting piping/ductwork between the fan and carbon vessel as shown on the Drawings. C. A grounding rod shall be provided for the vessel. The grounding rod shall be manufactured of 316 stainless steel and shall be connected to an external grounding lug on the tank at shown on the Drawings and have a condensate manifold. D. The vessel shall include a magnehelic differential pressure gauge assembly. The pressure gauge assembly shall be specifically designed for continuous outdoor installation/exposure at the Project location. E. Vessel top and sidewall shall be factory insulated to prevent condensation. Insulation shall be 2" thick and have a 3/16" FRP outer encapsulation. 2.05 CARBON MEDIA A. The activated carbon shall be single-use high capacity pelleted or granulated product, suitable for the vapor phase adsorption of sewage treatment odors at the concentrations previously specified. Direct activated, broken pellet and mixed media carbon shall not be acceptable. Sufficient activated carbon shall be provided to completely fill the reactor vessel. Caustic impregnation of the activated carbon shall not be permitted under any circumstances. B. The activated carbon shall have the following physical and chemical properties: 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA PACKAGED ODOR CONTROL SYSTEM WOODARD & CURRAN 44 31 19-8 Carbon Property Requirement Test Method Apparent Density (bulk dense packing) g/cc, minimum density. 0.38 - 0.44 ASTM D2854 Ball-pan Hardness number, minimum. 95 ASTM D3802 Mesh size, minimum 4 x 8 ASTM D2862 Ignition temperature, ºC., minimum 450 ASTM D3466 Moisture, percent, maximum as packed Maximum head loss at 50 fpm face 3-5 ASTM D2867 Velocity through a dense packed bed, Inches water column / ft. of bed depth 2.0 Hydrogen Sulfide breakthrough capacity, g H2S/cc carbon, minimum 0.20 ASTM D6646 C. The determination of H2S breakthrough capacity shall be made by passing a moist (85% R.H.) air stream containing 1% H2S at a rate of 1,450 cc/minute through a minimum one (1) inch diameter by nine (9) inch deep bed of uniformly packed activated carbon. The carbon shall be monitored to 50 ppm breakthrough. Results shall be expressed in grams H2S removed per cc of carbon. All testing shall be performed per ASTM Test Method D-6646 standards, without modification or addition. The Manufacturer shall submit certified test results of the activated carbon per ASTM D-6646 standards for review by the Engineer. Test results shall demonstrate the carbon to be provided meets and/or exceeds the minimum breakthrough capacity previously specified. D. The carbon bed shall be designed to last at least one (1) year at the average H2S load and flow previously specified. The Manufacturer shall include a written performance guarantee of carbon bed life for review and approval by the Engineer as outlined in the submittals. E. Under no circumstances shall the carbon media produce a filtrate with an acidic (0- 6) and/or basic (8-14) pH. 2.06 FAN A. Each odor control system shall include a constant speed, non-sparking, centrifugal fan, factory mounted on the structural skid. The fan shall be constructed of graphite-impregnated FRP. The fan shall have a 12-blade, backwardly inclined, non-overloading type wheel. Wheel shall be keyed to the shaft and shall be statically and dynamically balanced prior to delivery. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA PACKAGED ODOR CONTROL SYSTEM WOODARD & CURRAN 44 31 19-9 B. The fan shall be specifically designed for outdoor installation and exposure to the elements including but not limited to rain, wind, snow, ice, hail, sunlight, heat, cold, etc. Each fan shall have heavy-duty, grease-lubricated, self-aligning, precision, anti-friction pillow-block bearings with a minimum average life of 40,000 hours. The fan shall be specifically designed to provide the air flows previously specified. C. Each fan shall have been tested and rated according to AMCA 210-74 and ASHRAE 51-75 standards. Each fan shall be certified by the Air Movement and Control Association (AMCA) and shall be licensed to bear the AMCA seal. D. Each fan shall have a constant-pitch, V-belt drive with a minimum service factor of 1.15. All fan belts shall be minimum size "B", high-capacity type and shall be provided in matched sets. Each fan shall include a 316 stainless steel base with OSHA approved 316 stainless steel belt guard. 2.07 PREFILTER A. Housing: Housing shall be manufactured using fiberglass reinforced plastic. Stainless or alternate plastic materials are not acceptable. Manufacturer shall retain the services of an independent inspector who is responsible to confirm the prefilter has been manufactured in accordance with this specification and all FRP work meets or exceeds ASME RTP-1 level 2 visual inspection criteria. 1. Resin system shall be a corrosion resistant vinyl ester with a class 1 flame spread rating. Acceptable products are AOC K022-AC or Dow Derakane 510-B series. Resin system shall not require any additives such as nyacol or antimony to achieve the class 1 flame spread rating. Finished laminate including liner and structure shall be translucent. 2. All internal surfaces shall have a 100-mil corrosion liner made up of a single nexus veil followed by two layers of 1.5 oz chopped strand matt. 3. All exterior surfaces shall have gelcoat applied. This coating shall contain UV inhibitors, color to be selected by the owner. 4. Housing shall have machined UMHW guides to prevent stainless frame on filter pad from scratching or damaging the corrosion liner. 5. Filter housing shall be designed for 12” positive and negative pressure with a maximum of 1/8” deflection. 6. Housing shall have an access door for pad removal complete with EPDM gasket and 316 Stainless hinges / quick latches. For filter housings larger than 3’ across, two access doors shall be provided. Access doors shall have stainless toggle clamps for easy pad access. Bolt-on access doors are not acceptable. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA PACKAGED ODOR CONTROL SYSTEM WOODARD & CURRAN 44 31 19-10 7. Housing shall be provided with a 2” drain connection at the base, and come from the manufacturer complete with ball valve. 8. For installation, housing shall have (2) 8” diameter FRP legs. Length of legs shall be coordinated with the contactor. Housing shall be supported by these legs independent of the connecting ductwork, anchored with stainless steel HILTI bolts. 9. Housing shall have a differential gauge bracket and be supplied with a dwyer magnehlic pressure gauge and connections for gauge on either side of filter pad. Unit shall come complete from the factory with all DP equipment pre-assembled and installed. B. Filter Pad 1. Pad shall have 2” of 316 stainless mesh followed by 4” of poly mesh. Mesh shall be held together by a stainless steel frame. Total pad width including pads and frame shall be 8”. 2. Maximum pad segment width of pads is 24”. Pads larger than 24” wide must be segmented to allow easy removal by the owner. Segment width should not exceed 24”. C. Dimensions / Design: 1. End connections shall be sized for a maximum air velocity of 2500 f/m. Flange dimensions shall match the connecting ductwork. Flange thickness shall not be less than that listed in ASTM 3982. 2. Inlet cone shall be designed so that the airstream can spread evenly over the pad surface. Cone angle shall be no less than 60 deg. 3. Housing shall be sized so that air velocity through the filter pad is 400 f/m. 4. Particle removal efficiency shall be 99% of particles 10 microns or larger. 2.08 FAN MOTOR A. 480 volts, 3 phase, 60 hertz service. All motors shall be NEMA Premium Efficiency, NEMA B rating, minimum Class F insulation rating. B. Electrical Hazard Area Classification: Class 1, Division 1, Groups C&D, and Explosion Proof). C. Housing: ASTM A 48/A 48M, Class 30 cast iron. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA PACKAGED ODOR CONTROL SYSTEM WOODARD & CURRAN 44 31 19-11 D. Duty: continuous and/or intermittent duty, capable of handling a minimum of 15 equally spaced starts per hour. E. Service factor: 1.15. The motor horsepower shall be selected such that the unit is non-overloading over the entire specified performance range. All motors shall conform to NEMA MG 1 standards. F. The motor should be provided with a NEMA 12 rated motor starter, mounted inside. 2.09 FAN SOUND ENCLOSURE A. Each odor control fan shall be provided with a sound attenuation package. The package shall consist of a corrosion resistant 316L stainless steel or FRP acoustical enclosure placed over the fan assembly. This enclosure shall include provisions for access to allow operator maintenance of the fan assembly. All access areas shall be equipped with heavy duty 316 stainless steel hardware and with EPDM seals to minimize noise leakage. 316 stainless steel flashing shall be provided to enclose the penetrations in the enclosure for the fan inlet and outlet ducting. On skid mounted systems, an FRP inlet spool piece shall be provided to penetrate the enclosure. The enclosure shall be fitted with louvered vent(s) for heat dissipation/ventilation. The enclosure shall attenuate discharge of noise from the fan with a plenum to a maximum of 75 dBA at three (3) feet when at full speed operation in a free field noise environment. 2.10 STRUCTURAL SKID A. Provide one-piece, structural steel skid, designed to support the full weight of the fan and carbon vessel without deflection when fully loaded and lifted at the pickup points identified by the Manufacturer. The entire skid shall be coated with a two- part epoxy paint system in accordance with Section 09 90 00. Each skid shall be complete with a grounding lug for the adsorber unit and fan. Provide 316 stainless steel clips to hold the carbon vessel in position. Provide drains to prevent accumulation of water within the skid interior. 2.11 EXPANSION JOINTS A. Provide flexible boot type expansion joints on the inlet and discharge connections of the fan to prevent transmission of vibration from the fan to the inlet connecting piping. B. Material: minimum of 1/8 inches thick EPDM or silicone rubber with UV inhibitors for outdoor installation. 316 stainless steel clamps. C. Provide all fittings/adaptors as required for connection of the odor control piping to the fan and inlet flexible connector. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA PACKAGED ODOR CONTROL SYSTEM WOODARD & CURRAN 44 31 19-12 2.10 FLOW CONTROL VALVE A. Provide sealing butterfly valve for flow control during operation and isolation during water regeneration. PVC body and disk, stainless steel shaft, EPDM seat, and hand quadrant lever. 2.11 CARBON SAMPLING AND MONITORING A. Each odor control system shall include one (1) monitoring device containing media which changes colors to indicate breakthrough of organics and H2S, thus providing a visual indication of carbon degradation. Each system shall also include a grain thief sampling device for extracting carbon samples for analysis. 2.12 HARDWARE A. All Bolts, nuts, anchors, washers, appurtenances and related fastening hardware shall be type 316 stainless steel. All stainless steel components shall be electro- polished or pacified to obtain maximum corrosion resistance. All necessary hardware, attachments, and related appurtenances for installation of all equipment shall be furnished. All stainless steel bolts shall comply with ASTM F 593 standards. Stainless steel nuts shall comply with ASTM F 594 standards. 2.13 FINISHING A. All external ferrous metallic surfaces of the equipment shall be provided with a color-coordinated two-part epoxy coating in accordance with Section 09 90 00. The coating shall be resistant to sewage, high humidity, hydrogen sulfide, and other chemicals normally found in wastewater. All paint system components for the entire project shall be the product of a single manufacturer as required by Section 09 90 00 unless otherwise noted on the Drawings or approved by the Engineer. B. Stainless steel, brass, bronze, brass, aluminum, FRP and plastic components shall not be painted. C. Ferrous surfaces not to be painted shall be given a shop coat of grease or other suitable rust-resistant coating. 2.14 NAMEPLATES A. Carbon vessel and motor shall each be furnished with a stainless steel nameplate (with embossed data) securely mounted to the body of the equipment. As a minimum, the nameplate for carbon vessel shall include the manufacturer's name and model number, serial number, air flow capacity, and carbon capacity. As a minimum, the nameplate for motor shall include the manufacturer's name and model number, serial number, horsepower, speed, input voltage, amps, number of cycles, power and service factors. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA PACKAGED ODOR CONTROL SYSTEM WOODARD & CURRAN 44 31 19-13 2.15 SPARE PARTS A. The Manufacturer shall furnish a total of one (1) set of the following spare parts for each of the odor control systems specified in this section. At a minimum, a set of spare parts shall include the following: 1. One (1) set of fan V-Belts B. The spare parts shall be individually boxed with the Project name and part number clearly identified on each individual box. All spare parts shall be shipped in a separate crate and clearly labeled. Spare parts shall be stored indoors by the Contractor in a temperature-controlled environment. 2.16 OILS AND LUBRICANTS A. The Manufacturer shall state in the operating and maintenance manual the amount of and specification for any lubricants required. All lubricants for the equipment shall be non-proprietary and easily obtainable from a local source for operations staff convenience. Designs which utilize proprietary and/or special lubricants shall not be acceptable. 2.17 DESIGN BASIS MANUFACTURER A. All activated carbon odor control equipment of the same type, style, and duty shall be supplied by a single Manufacturer. All Manufacturers named or otherwise shall comply completely with the Contract Documents. 2.18 MANUFACTURER’S SERVICES A. Services of a Manufacturer's representative who is experienced in the installation, adjustment, and operation of the equipment specified shall be provided. The Manufacturer shall submit qualifications of the representative for approval by the Engineer. The on-Site man days listed below are exclusive of travel time and do not relieve the obligation to provide sufficient service to place the equipment into satisfactory operation. B. The service technician shall supervise the installation, adjustment, and testing of the equipment. The Manufacturer's service technician shall be present for a period of not less than two (2) days, to inspect the installed equipment, supervise the initial test run, and to provide instruction to the plant personnel. C. The Manufacturer's representative shall provide a certification of proper installation and satisfactory operation to the Owner and Engineer. Certification shall be signed and dated by Manufacturer's representative. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA PACKAGED ODOR CONTROL SYSTEM WOODARD & CURRAN 44 31 19-14 PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Per Manufacturer instructions. B. All appurtenances required for a complete and operating odor control system shall be provided, including but not limited to such items as piping, conduit, valves, wall sleeves, wall pipes, concrete foundations, anchors, grouting, equipment, drivers, power supply, and controls. C. Installation shall include the Contractor furnishing the required oil and grease for initial operation. The grades of oil and grease shall be in accordance with the Manufacturer’s recommendations. 3.02 STARTUP & TESTING A. Per Division 01 General Requirements B. If any deficiencies are revealed during any test, such deficiencies shall be corrected and the tests shall be re-conducted at no additional cost to the Owner. 3.03 FIELD PERFORMANCE DEMONSTRATION A. Test odor control system under actual operating conditions in order to demonstrate that it meets the minimum performance criteria previously specified within the Manufacturer's Warranty Period. The Manufacturer shall submit a detailed field testing procedure to the Engineer for review prior to conducting any testing. The Manufacturer shall furnish all labor, technicians, instruments, equipment, and appurtenances as necessary for testing. All testing shall be coordinated at least two (2) weeks in advance with the Engineer and Owner. B. Performance testing shall last for a minimum of six (6) consecutive hours. Engineer shall provide start time for test to coincide with high-odor time of day. Manufacturer shall test air samples taken from the inlet and outlet of the odor control system at one-hour intervals and analyze for hydrogen sulfide concentration using a portable, solid state analyzer. Analyzer shall have a current calibration certificate from a third party company specializing in instrument calibration. Manufacturer shall submit a written report of the testing and results to the Contractor, Engineer, and Owner. The Manufacturer shall modify or replace, at no additional cost to the Owner, any/all equipment that fails to meet the performance criteria previously specified. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA PACKAGED ODOR CONTROL SYSTEM WOODARD & CURRAN 44 31 19-15 3.04 FIELD TRAINING A. A field training course shall be provided for designated operating and maintenance staff members. Training shall be provided in conjunction with the visit of the Manufacturer’s representative. The training shall start after the system is functionally complete but prior to final acceptance tests. Field training shall cover all of the items contained in the operating and maintenance manuals, including normal operations, trouble-shooting, maintenance, lubrication, and other related Work. END OF SECTION This page intentionally left blank 229123/MassDEP No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA IN-LINE GRINDERS WOODARD & CURRAN 46 24 23-1 SECTION 46 24 23 IN-LINE GRINDERS PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 PROPRIETARY NOTIFICATION A. The Owner has determined that it is in the Public interest to include in the Specifications for the Project, the requirement that the In-Line Grinders as described in this Section be a proprietary item, specifically JWC, or Engineer approved equal. The reason for this determination is that the Town has standardized in-line grinders by the same manufacturer, thus ensuring the following: interchangeability of parts to simplify and reduce the cost of maintenance and repairs, one common vendor to contact for service, familiarity with operators regarding operation and maintenance requirements, and common control schemes. B. Should the Contractor request a substituted system, the Owner must evaluate and determine whether the requested substitution is equal based upon the following: 1. It is at least equal in quality, durability, appearance, strength and design. 2. It will perform at least equally the function imposed by the general design for the public work being contracted for or the material being purchased. 3. It conforms substantially, even with deviations, to the detailed requirements, for the items included in this and related sections. C. Should a substituted system be approved by the Owner, the Contractor shall be responsible for all costs of redesign, including efforts associated with review and approval of the substituted system, necessary to incorporate the substituted system into the existing facility and remaining aspects of the Project. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Section Includes 1. The Contractor shall provide and perform all labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals as shown, specified and required to furnish, install, and test in-line grinders in accordance with this Section, the Drawings and applicable reference standards listed in Article 1.03. 2. Grinder systems shall consist of six (6) in-line grinder systems: three (3) primary sludge grinders (G-0501, G-0502, G-0503), two (2) gravity thickener scum grinders (G-0701, G-0702), and one (1) press feed pump grinder (G-0614) including grinder unit (as a bid alternate), reducer, motor, controller, and all other appurtenances. 229123/MassDEP No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA IN-LINE GRINDERS WOODARD & CURRAN 46 24 23-2 B. Related Requirements 1. Division 9 – Finishes 2. Section 40 23 00 – Water and Wastewater Process Piping 3. Section 40 05 23 – Process Valves and Strainers 4. Division 40 61 01 – Instrumentation and Controls General Requirements 5. Division 26 – Electrical 1.03 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Measurement and payment requirements: per Division 01 General Requirements. 1.04 REFERENCES A. Reference Standards 1. American Bearing Manufacturers Association (ABMA) 2. American Gear Manufacturer’ Association (AGMA) 3. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 4. American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM) 5. Standards of the American Water Works Association (AWWA) 6. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE) 7. Standards of the Hydraulic Institute (HI) 8. National Electric Code (NEC) 9. Standards of the National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) 10. ISO 9001:2000 1.05 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination, Sequencing, and Scheduling: per Division 01 General Requirements. 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. 229123/MassDEP No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA IN-LINE GRINDERS WOODARD & CURRAN 46 24 23-3 B. Product Data 1. Complete materials list of all items to be provided including supplier and delivery schedule. 2. Manufacturer's specifications and product data required to demonstrate compliance with requirements which shall include complete parts listing showing materials of construction with applicable ANSI, ASTM or other standards. 3. Type, thickness, application procedure and test for coatings, and non- metallic and metallic linings. 4. Certified dimension prints showing all details of fabrication, assembly, installation including anchorage details. 5. The weight of each major component and the total weight of the equipment. 6. Complete data on motors including complete performance characteristics. 7. Complete wiring diagrams and control schematics C. Manufacturer’s recommended testing, operation and maintenance procedures including a list of special tools and equipment required to maintain the units. D. Certified factory tests for the supplied units, following fabrication, demonstrating compliance with the factory test requirements in Part 3 of this section. E. A list of manufacturer’s recommended spare parts including gaskets, bearings, and seals. F. Operation and Maintenance (O&M): Refer to Division 01 General Requirements. G. Deviations from the Contract Documents. 1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. B. Qualifications: per Division 01 General Requirements as follows. 1. All equipment shall be supplied by firms regularly engaged in grinder system fabrication whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar services for at least 5 years. 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. 229123/MassDEP No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA IN-LINE GRINDERS WOODARD & CURRAN 46 24 23-4 B. All equipment delivered and placed in storage shall be stored with protection from the weather, humidity, and temperature variations, dirt and dust, or other contaminants. 1.09 WARRANTY A. Equipment supplied under this section shall be warranted to be free from defects in workmanship, design and materials for a period of one (1) year from manufacturer’s startup. If any part of the equipment should prove to be defective during the warranty period, the manufacturer at no expense to the Owner shall replace the part. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 EQUIPMENT A. Provide six (6) in-line grinders and motor controllers as specified in this Section. B. Performance/Design Criteria 1. Performance shall be based on design criteria included in table below: Table 1: In-Line Grinder Design Criteria Parameter Primary Sludge (G-0501, G-0502, G-0503) Gravity Thickener Scum Feed (G-0701, G-0702) Press Feed (G-0614) Number of Units 3 2 1 Flow (gpm) 80 30 175 Maximum Solid Size 1-inch solid Suction & Discharge Connection 6” 4” 6” Process Fluid Primary Sludge Scum Primary and Waste Activated Sludge Motor Horsepower 5 (maximum) 5 (maximum) 2 Maximum Motor Speed (RPM) 1725 Motor Enclosure Totally Enclosed Fan Cooled (TEFC) Drive Shaft High-tensile 400 Series SS Power Supply 460 Volts, 3 Phase, 60 Hertz Drive Starter 229123/MassDEP No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA IN-LINE GRINDERS WOODARD & CURRAN 46 24 23-5 2. Grinder units shall be capable of grinding scum with a solids concentration ranging from 2% to 6%. The scum may contain rags, rocks, and other debris. 3. Grinder systems shall include main housings, cutter housing and drive assembly, and motor controller. a. The cutter cartridge and drive assembly shall be two-shaft design and be capable of continuous wet or dry operation. Single shaft devices utilizing a single rotating cutter bar with stationary cutters will not be acceptable. b. Two-shaft design shall consist of two parallel shafts alternately stacked with individual intermeshing cutters and spacers positioned on the shaft to form an offset or helical pattern. The two shafts shall counter-rotate with the driven shaft operating at approximately two-thirds (2/3) the speed of the drive shaft. c. Each unit of equipment shall be identified with a corrosion resistant nameplate, securely affixed in a conspicuous place. Nameplate information shall include equipment model number, serial number, manufacturer’s name and location. C. Manufacturers 1. JWC Environmental 2. Or Engineer Approved Equal 2.02 ASSEMBLY OR FABRICATION A. Grinders 1. Grinder end housings shall be cast of ASTM A536-80 ductile iron with ANSI 150-pound flange process pipe connections. The cutter head and drive assembly shall be removable without disconnecting the body from the process piping. 2. The inside profile of the main housing shall be concave to follow the radial arc of the cutters. The main housing shall maintain a clearance not to exceed 5/16-inch between the major diameter of the cutter and the concave arc of the housing. The main housing shall be provided with a covered access port for equipment inspection. Access port covers shall be ASTM A395-80 ductile iron. 3. An access opening shall be provided in the base of the grinder for tightening the cutter stacks. Stack compression shall be accomplished by 229123/MassDEP No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA IN-LINE GRINDERS WOODARD & CURRAN 46 24 23-6 torquing the stack nuts on the bottom of the unit. The stack nuts shall be externally accessible. B. Cutter Cartridge and Drive Assembly: The cutter cartridge assembly shall be a design using individual cutters and spacers. 1. 7-Tooth Cam-8620 Alloy Steel a. Cutter shall be an individual disk constructed of AISI 8620 alloy steel surface ground to thickness of .438-inches +.000/-.001 (11.1 mm +.000/-.003). b. Cutters shall be heat treated to produce a hardness of 60-65 Rockwell C. c. Cutters shall have 7 cam shaped teeth. Tooth height shall not be greater than ½-inch (13 mm) above the root diameter of the cutter. O.D. shall be 4.71-inches (120 mm). d. Spacers shall be an individual disk constructed of AISI 8620 alloy steel surface ground to a thickness of .446-inches +.001/-.000 (11.3 mm +.003/-.000). e. Spacers shall have a hardness of 34-38 Rockwell C. f. Spacers shall have a smooth outside diameter with no tooth profiles. 2. 13-Tooth Cam-8620 Alloy Steel a. Cutter shall be an individual disk constructed of AISI 8620 alloy steel surface ground to thickness of .215-inches +.000/-.001 (5.5 mm +.000/-.003). b. Cutters shall be heat treated to produce a hardness of 60-65 Rockwell C. c. Cutters shall have 13 cam shaped teeth. Tooth height shall not be greater than ½-inch (13 mm) above the root diameter of the cutter. O.D. shall be 4.71-inches (120 mm). d. Spacers shall be an individual disk constructed of AISI 8620 alloy steel surface ground to a thickness of .223-inches +.001/-.000 (5.7 mm +.003/-.000). e. Spacers shall have a hardness of 34-38 Rockwell C. f. Spacers shall have a smooth outside diameter with no tooth profiles. 229123/MassDEP No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA IN-LINE GRINDERS WOODARD & CURRAN 46 24 23-7 3. 11-Tooth Cam-17-4 Stainless Steel a. Cutter shall be an individual disk constructed of AISI 17-4 stainless steel surface ground to thickness of .310-inches +.000/- .001 (7.9 mm +.000/-.003). b. Cutters shall be heat treated to produce a hardness of 34-38 Rockwell C. c. Cutters shall have 11 cam shaped teeth. Tooth height shall not be greater than ½-inch (13 mm) above the root diameter of the cutter. O.D. shall be 4.71-inches (120 mm). d. Spacers shall be an individual disk constructed of AISI 17-4 stainless steel surface ground to a thickness of .319-inches +.001/- .000 (8.1 mm +.003/-.000). e. Spacers shall have a hardness of 38-42 Rockwell C. f. Spacers shall have a smooth outside diameter with no tooth profiles. C. Reducer: The gear speed reducer shall be a grease-filled planetary-type reducer with "Heavy Shock" load classification. The reduction ratio shall be 29:1. The high-speed shaft of the grinder shall be directly coupled with the reducer using a two-piece coupling. D. Bearings and Seals: 1. Radial and axial loads of the shafts shall be borne by four sealed oversize deep-groove ball bearings. The lower bearings shall be protected by a combination of a replaceable and independent tortuous path device and end face mechanical seals. Face materials must be a minimum of tungsten carbide to tungsten carbide, not requiring an external flush or any type of lubrication. The mechanical seal shall be rated at 90 PSI continuous duty by the seal manufacturer. The upper bearings shall be protected by a combination of a replaceable and independent tortuous path device and a dual lip nitrile or polyacrylate elastomer low-pressure seal rated at 7 PSI. 2. The bearings shall be part of a replaceable cartridge independent of the shafts which shall meet required pressure rating regardless of cutter stack fit. 3. O-rings shall be made of Buna-N elastomers or fluoroelastomers. Products requiring continuous or occasional lubrication or flushing shall not be accepted. 229123/MassDEP No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA IN-LINE GRINDERS WOODARD & CURRAN 46 24 23-8 E. Motor Controller 1. The controller shall be equipped with a HAND, OFF/RESET, AUTO switch. In the OFF/RESET position, the electric motor will not run. In the HAND position, the motor will run. In the AUTO position, grinder will receive a start/stop signal from SCADA and be interlocked with sludge pump operation by a remotely located dry contact. The controller can only be reset from the local panel controls. 2. Upon the grinder encountering a jam condition, the motor controller shall stop the grinder then reverse its rotation to clear the obstruction. If the jam is cleared, the controller shall return the grinder to normal operation. If the jam condition still exists, the controller shall go through two additional reversing cycles within 30 seconds (three times total) before signaling a grinder overload condition. Upon a grinder overload condition, the controller shall shut off the grinder and interlocked pump and activate a FAIL contact. 3. If a power failure occurs while the grinder is running, the grinder shall resume running when power is restored. If the grinder is stopped due to an overload condition and a power failure occurs, the overload indicator shall reactivate when power is restored. 4. The controller shall provide overcurrent protection. The overload relay shall be adjustable so that the range selected includes the full load amps (FLA) rating and service factor. 5. The controller shall have indicator lights for POWER ON, FAIL, and RUN conditions. 6. The controller shall be rated 480 volts, 3-phase, 60 hertz. 7. Each controller enclosure shall house the control devices, relays, terminal blocks, and reversing motor starter. 8. Control Devices: a. Control devices shall be mounted in the front panel of the enclosure. Indicating lights shall be integral transformer type with low voltage long life 6 volt lamps. Lamps and selector switches shall be heavy duty NEMA 4X type. b. Short circuit protection requires that a properly sized circuit breaker or fuses be installed by others. c. One 10A contact relay is provided for a FAIL signal and one 10A relay for RUN signal. 229123/MassDEP No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA IN-LINE GRINDERS WOODARD & CURRAN 46 24 23-9 9. The panel shall include dry contacts rated for 5A at 120 VAC to transmit the following alarms/status to SCADA: a. Grinder Fail Alarm b. Grinder Running Status c. Grinder H-O-A switch in “Auto” 10. Enclosure: lockable NEMA 4X, fiberglass reinforced polyester resins, suitable for wall mounting. Doors shall have hinges and corrosion resistant latches. 11. Reversing Motor Starter: Full voltage reversing type, 120 volt operating coil, interlock, and captive terminal crews. OL relay shall be sized to the motor full load amperage (FLA). 2.03 FINISHES A. All fabricated steel, aluminum and cast iron shall be factory prepared, factory primed and factory finished painted in accordance with Section 09 90 00. Touch- up paint shall be provided as specified to restore integrity of coating system that may be damaged during construction. All paint system components for the entire project shall be the product of a single manufacturer as required by Section 09 90 00 unless otherwise noted on the Drawings or approved by the Engineer. B. Ferrous surfaces not to be painted shall be given a shop coat of grease or other suitable rust-resistant coating. 2.04 SPARE PARTS A. The manufacturer’s recommended spare parts and special tools shall be provided to the Owner prior to the start-up of the equipment. They shall be packaged and identified by name, function and equipment. The Contractor shall unload and store the parts in the location directed by the Owner. B. All spare parts shall be properly protected for long term storage and packed in clearly marked containers as to their contents. C. Each grinder shall be provided with the following spare parts and special tools. Provide any additional recommended spare parts as appropriate: 1. Three (3) fuses 2. Three (3) 6V, long life lamps 3. One (1) complete gasket set 4. Three (3) cutters and three (3) spacers, or 229123/MassDEP No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA IN-LINE GRINDERS WOODARD & CURRAN 46 24 23-10 5. One (1) Cutter Cartridge that consists of six (6) cutters and six (6) spacers. D. A set of any special tools required for the normal operation and maintenance of the pumps shall be provided. All such tools shall be furnished in a suitable steel tool chest complete with lock and duplicate keys. E. Motor controller spare parts shall be stored inside the motor controller. Grinder spare parts shall be packaged in containers suitable for long term storage and shall bear labels clearly designating the contents and the equipment for which they are intended. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Grinder and motor controller shall be installed in compliance with all OSHA, local, state, and federal codes and regulations. 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. B. Factory Testing 1. Each grinder and motor controller shall be factory tested to ensure satisfactory operation. C. Provide minimum of one day (8-hours on-site) of services of a factory trained representative to check installation and start-up each grinder, and provide field training to Owner’s staff. Factory representative shall have complete knowledge of proper installation, operation, and maintenance of equipment supplied. 3.03 STARTUP & COMMISSIONING A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. END OF SECTION 229123/MassDEP No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA LIQUID CHEMICAL FEED EQUIPMENT WOODARD & CURRAN 46 33 00-1 SECTION 46 33 00 LIQUID CHEMICAL FEED EQUIPMENT PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes 1. Provide three (3) Liquid Polymer Feed Systems (P-1001, P-1002, and P- 1003), each including a metering pump, a mixing-mechanism, and all accessories and appurtenances as described herein and as shown on the Drawings, mounted on a pre-fabricated skid in accordance with this Section and applicable reference standards listed in Article 1.03. B. Related Requirements 1. Division 9 – Finishes 2. Section 40 23 00 – Process Piping 3. Section 40 05 23 – Process Valves and Strainers 4. Division 40 61 01 – Instrumentation and Controls General Requirements 5. Division 26 - Electrical 1.02 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Measurement and payment requirements: per Division 01 General Requirements. 1.03 REFERENCES A. Reference Standards 1. American Bearing Manufacturers Association (ABMA) 2. American Gear Manufacturer’ Association (AGMA) 3. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 4. American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM) 5. Standards of the American Water Works Association (AWWA) 6. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE) 7. Standards of the Hydraulic Institute (HI) 229123/MassDEP No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA LIQUID CHEMICAL FEED EQUIPMENT WOODARD & CURRAN 46 33 00-2 8. National Electric Code (NEC) 9. Standards of the National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) 10. ISO 9001:2000 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination, Sequencing, and Scheduling: per Division 01 General Requirements. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. B. Product Data 1. Complete materials list of all items including supplier and delivery schedule. 2. Manufacturer's specifications and product data required to demonstrate compliance with requirements which shall include complete parts listing showing materials of construction with applicable ANSI, ASTM or other standards. 3. Type, thickness, application procedure and test for coatings, and non- metallic and metallic linings. 4. Certified dimension prints showing all details of fabrication, assembly, installation including anchorage details. 5. The weight of each major component and the total weight of the equipment. 6. Complete data on motors including complete performance characteristics. 7. Complete wiring diagrams and elementary or control schematics. 8. Data on characteristics and performance of each pump. Data shall include guaranteed performance curves based on actual test data of duplicate units which show compliance with the specified requirements for flow and pressure. Performance curves for variable speed units shall show head and capacity in 100 rpm increments from minimum to maximum speed in addition to the above. Curves shall be plotted flow versus pressure. 9. Manufacturer's recommended testing, operation and maintenance procedures including a list of special tools and equipment required to maintain the units. 10. Provide a “letter of compliance” from the pump manufacturer stating that the characteristics of each pump (specifically naming the respective pumps) 229123/MassDEP No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA LIQUID CHEMICAL FEED EQUIPMENT WOODARD & CURRAN 46 33 00-3 will not overload the specified motor horsepower under any head condition when operating at the specified maximum speed. 11. Certified factory tests and pump curves for the supplied units, following fabrication, demonstrating compliance with the factory test requirements in Part 3 of this section. 12. A list of the manufacturer’s recommended spare parts including gaskets, bearings, and seals. 13. Deviations from the Contract Documents 14. Operations and Maintenance Manuals: Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. B. All equipment shall be supplied by a firm regularly engaged in furnishing similar equipment for use in wastewater treatment facilities and that has been in satisfactory operation for at least five (5) years. C. All pumps/feed equipment of the same type shall be from one manufacturer. D. Materials of construction shall be compatible with the chemicals and service for which they are to be used. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. B. All equipment delivered and placed in storage shall be stored with protection from the weather, humidity and temperature variations, dirt and dust, or other contaminants. 1.08 WARRANTY A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. B. For a period of minimum of one (1) year from date of substantial completion, manufacturer shall repair or replace, at no additional cost to the Owner, any equipment which has been found defective in materials or workmanship under normal conditions of use and maintenance. Guarantee need not cover alterations by Owner, damage from accidents, abuse, and vandalism nor Acts of God. Manufacturer's liability shall include the cost of materials and installation. This paragraph is not intended to void any manufacturer's guarantee or warranties which might be of a duration greater than 1 year. 229123/MassDEP No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA LIQUID CHEMICAL FEED EQUIPMENT WOODARD & CURRAN 46 33 00-4 PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 EQUIPMENT A. Provide three (3) neat polymer feed systems (P-1001, P-1002, and P-1003) as specified in this section. 1. The new polymer blending and feed system shall consist of three polymer blending systems, each consisting of a mixing chamber, neat polymer metering pump assembly, dilution water inlet assembly, solution discharge assembly, a system skid and associated controls. Three separate assemblies shall be provided. 2. The polymer system shall be capable of effectively activating and fully blending with water a homogeneous polymer solution ranging from 0.1% to 1% concentration of emulsion polymer with active contents up to 75%. 3. Performance/Design Criteria Liquid Polymer System (P-1001, P-1002, P-1003) Number of Units 3 Material Being Pumped Clarifloc NE-1880 Polyacryamide Emulsion Polymer Polydyne Inc. Taylor, PA. Maximum Capacity (gph) 8 Minimum Capacity (gph) 0.4 Total Dynamic Head (ft.) 125 Suction/Discharge Port Size 5/8” minimum Plant Water Inlet Port Size 1” Plant Water Pressure (psi) 50 Motor Horsepower (maximum) ½ Motor Enclosure TEFC, NEMA 4X Motor Electrical 120 Volts/1 Phase/60 Hz Dilution Water Flow Rate (gph) 120 – 1200 B. Manufacturers 1. VeloDyne 2. Fluid Dynamics 3. IPM Systems 4. or equal 229123/MassDEP No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA LIQUID CHEMICAL FEED EQUIPMENT WOODARD & CURRAN 46 33 00-5 2.02 ASSEMBLY A. Mixing Pump: 1. Each unit shall have one (1) neat polymer metering pump integrally mounted on the systems skid. The pump shall be a positive displacement, progressive cavity type metering pump. The rotor shall be 316 stainless steel. The stator shall be fluoroelastomer. The pump may have either a mechanical seal or packing seal, as recommended by the manufacturer. 2. Pump shall be fully tested to meet rated flow and pressure by the manufacturer. 3. The power supply shall be 120 VAC, 60 Hz, 1-phase or TEFC 0-90 volt DC wash-down duty motor. Pumps shall be driven by a NEMA 4X self- enclosed VFD mounted on power system frame or SCR located in the control panel. 4. Provide an optical type loss of polymer flow sensor. Flow sensors that restrict flow or rely on a sensing probe will not be accepted. 5. Provide a calibration column for each skid that includes two full port PVC ball valves with Viton o-rings. The column shall be calibrated for a one- minute draw-down and read in GPH and milliliters. Calibration columns shall be rigidly mounted to the system frame. Supporting the calibration column with the polymer piping is not acceptable. B. Mixing Equipment: Each skid shall include a mixing mechanism to activate and blend the polymer using a multi-stage mechanical and multi-stage non-mechanical mechanism (TYPE A) or a non-mechanical mixing technique (TYPE B). 1. TYPE A Multi Stage Mechanical/Non-Mechanical Mixing a. The multi-stage hydro-mechanical polymer mixing system shall be provided with both a non-mechanical and mechanical mixing stage: 229123/MassDEP No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA LIQUID CHEMICAL FEED EQUIPMENT WOODARD & CURRAN 46 33 00-6 1) Non-Mechanical Stage: The device shall be capable of activating and blending polymer based on plant water pressure alone. Polymer shall be injected directly into a water jet by means of an injection quill positioned such that the non-mechanical mixing energy is no way diminished prior to polymer and water contact. The non-mechanical zone shall be designed such that the velocity of the mixing energy-producing water jet is maintained or increases as flow decreases. 2) Hydro-Mechanical Mixing Stage: A variable intensity, controllable stainless steel hydro-mechanical mixer shall be provided with an impeller that is fully controllable and capable of inducing ultra-high, non-damaging mixing energy at all flow rates. The polymer mixing impeller shall be designed to produce both axial and radial flow to optimize mixing effectiveness and to effectively induce high, non- damaging mixing energy over the systems full flow range. Mixers that rely solely on plant water pressure and or flow for mixing energy will not be acceptable. Mixers where performance is affected by flow rate and therefore retention time resulting in under or over exposure to mixing energy, or which rely on constant speed impellers or that rely on close tolerances for blending shall not be acceptable. 3) In order to prevent polymer build-up, the mixing chamber shall maintain high velocity in the entire chamber and at no time shall there be low velocity within any portion of the mixing chamber. b. The mixing impeller shall be controlled by an SCR motor controller and driven by a wash-down duty motor. The motor shall be mounted horizontally or above the mixing chamber. Motors mounted under the mixing chamber where seal failure or leaks can damage the motor shall not be acceptable. c. The mixing chamber shall have a maximum rated pressure of 100 psi. d. Provide a pressure relief on the mixing chamber factory set at 75 psi. e. The mixer drive shaft shall be sealed by a mechanical seal which shall have an integrally mounted and factory plumbed seal flush. A drain port behind the seal shall be provided in the mixing chamber to drain the polymer solution in case of a seal failure. The seal shall be easily accessible for replacement. Systems without a seal flushing system shall not be considered. All bearings shall be external from the mixing chamber. Internal bearings shall not be acceptable. 229123/MassDEP No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA LIQUID CHEMICAL FEED EQUIPMENT WOODARD & CURRAN 46 33 00-7 f. Both mechanical and non-mechanical mixing zones shall be clear polycarbonate to view the mixing action and blending effectiveness. Acrylic chambers shall not be acceptable to meet this requirement. 2. TYPE B – Multi-Stage Non-Mechanical Mixing a. This process shall consist of a two stage non-mechanical activation process that combines the efficiency of high energy activation with low energy hydration to fully extend and hydrate the polymer molecules. b. The initial polymer activation zone injects polymer into the dilution water, providing high, non-damaging mixing energy over the full operating range of the system, where high velocity strips the oil from the polymer molecules, without damaging their structure. c. The second stage hydration chamber provides low energy flow of the activated polymer, through a zone consisting of multiple baffles or concentric chambers. The design is such that a minimum of 60 seconds of hydration time is achieved to complete the activation process. d. The system shall be designed for use with plant water. e. A mixing chamber drain valve with 1/2" fitting shall be provided and plumbed to the nearest floor drain. The mixing chamber shall have a maximum rated pressure of 150 psi. f. Provide a bronze, adjustable-range pressure relief valve on mixing chamber with a range of 50 to 175 psi. g. At no time shall polymer be exposed to excessive shear. System's which are "retention time dependent", a system which is prone to induce insufficient or excessive mixing energy depending on flow rate and the subsequent retention time in the mixing chamber, or which utilize conventional static mixers, mixing blocks, eductors or flash mixers, shall not be considered. h. All components that require periodic maintenance shall be readily accessible. C. Dilution Water Assembly 1. The dilution water flow rate shall be monitored by a Rotameter flow meter having the flow range as previously specified. Unions or flanges shall be provided on the flow meter to allow easy removal for cleaning. 2. The unit shall have a motor operated solenoid valve for on/off control of total dilution water flow. Solenoid valve shall have brass body with nitrile rubber seal. 229123/MassDEP No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA LIQUID CHEMICAL FEED EQUIPMENT WOODARD & CURRAN 46 33 00-8 3. The dilution water flow rate shall be monitored by a stainless steel turbine flow meter. The flow meter shall provide the ratio controller with a 4-20 mAdc or pulse signal representative of water flow rate. Unions shall be provided on the inlet and outlet of the flow meter to allow easy removal for cleaning or inspection. Meter body shall be machined, cast, 316 stainless steel with 316 stainless steel turbine 4. The dilution water flow rate shall be automatically adjusted through a flow control valve connected directly to the mixing chamber. The valve shall incorporate a linear actuator to position the flow regulation control needle in response to signals generated by the ratio control module. The valve body shall be PVC with 304 stainless steel needle and seat and double lip, viton seal. 5. Provide a 2-1/2” stainless steel liquid filled pressure gauge to monitor dilution water inlet pressure. D. Solution Discharge Assembly 1. Provide a 2-1/2” stainless steel liquid filled pressure gauge to monitor system discharge pressure. 2. Provide a swing type check valve to prevent back flow. The check valve shall be sized for the total solution flow of the system, constructed of PVC and Viton. E. System Skid 1. The system's frame shall be of rugged 304 stainless steel construction. All piping shall be rigidly supported. 2. Under no circumstance shall the pump suction exceed 5” from the bottom of the skid for progressive cavity pumps. 3. The overall system dimensions shall not exceed 36” W x 24” D X 68” H. F. Controls 1. A control panel integral to the systems frame shall be provided. The enclosure shall be rated NEMA 4X and constructed of 316 stainless steel. The control panel shall consist of all controllers, digital displays, potentiometers, switches, lights, relays, and other control devices required for a complete operable system. The control panel and all components shall be industrial duty. All skid mounted electrical components interconnected to the control panel shall terminate at numbered and labeled terminal blocks. The terminal blocks shall be sized for 14 ga. wire. Wires shall be neatly run through wire race-way and numbered with shrink tubing type labels. Adhesive labels shall not be used. The control panel shall be positioned such 229123/MassDEP No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA LIQUID CHEMICAL FEED EQUIPMENT WOODARD & CURRAN 46 33 00-9 that there are no obstructions in front of the control panel per related NFPA requirements. 2. Power: 120 VAC, 1 Ph, 60 Hz. with a rotary style disconnect switch located on the face of the control panel to serve as the main disconnect. Disconnect switch shall be interlocked with a main breaker inside the enclosure to de-energize the entire control panel when switch is in the open position. 3. The PLC shall be an Allen Bradley MicroLogix 1400 series, or approved equivalent. The touch screen shall be an Allen Bradley Panelview Plus 6 Series HMI, or approved equivalent. The Control panel shall include an Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) sized to provide a minimum of ten (10) minutes of power in the event of main control power loss, and a 4-port Ethernet switch. Systems that rely on microprocessors and alphanumeric displays shall not be acceptable. 4. The PLC shall be capable of Ethernet/IP communications through an onboard Ethernet port for interfacing with Plant SCADA for remote status and control. 5. The control of the polymer feed system shall be integrated with the existing Fournier Rotary Press control panel over Ethernet such that the Fournier panel can automatically adjust the flow rate of polymer solution. as described in this specification and on the contract drawings. 6. Controls shall include: 1) LOCAL start/stop mode: System shall run based on operator input from touch panel start/stop push-button. 2) REMOTE start/stop mode: System shall start and stop according to the state of remote dry contacts (closed = run, open = stopped). 3) MANUAL mode: The desired water, polymer and/or solution concentration flow is set manually. 4) Discrete Selector Switch & System Indicator: a) Main Power ON /OFF Switch b) Main Power ON indicator 5) Inputs (signals by others): a) Remote Enable / Disable (discrete dry contact) b) Pacing Signal Based on Process Flow (4-20mA) 229123/MassDEP No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA LIQUID CHEMICAL FEED EQUIPMENT WOODARD & CURRAN 46 33 00-10 6) Outputs: a) System Running (discrete dry contact) b) Remote Mode (discrete dry contact) c) Common Alarm (discrete dry contact) d) Polymer Pump Rate (4-20mA) 2.03 FINISHES A. All fabricated steel, aluminum and cast iron shall be factory prepared, factory primed and factory finished painted in accordance with Section 09 90 00. Touch- up paint shall be provided as specified to restore integrity of coating system that may be damaged during construction. All paint system components for the entire project shall be the product of a single manufacturer as required by Section 09 90 00 unless otherwise noted on the Drawings or approved by the Engineer. B. Ferrous surfaces not to be painted shall be given a shop coat of grease or other suitable rust-resistant coating. 2.04 ACCESSORIES A. Provide a neat polymer check valve specifically designed to isolate neat polymer from dilution water. The valve shall be designed with an open, unobstructed path to the valve seat. To minimize check valve plugging due to normally occurring polymer agglomerations, the minimum open area up to and including the valve seat shall be 3/16” without exception. The valve body shall be constructed of Teflon with Viton seals. The valve poppet and spring shall be stainless steel. The spring shall be outside of the polymer flow path to prevent build-up and plugging. The locking pin used to hold the valve in place shall be attached to the mixing chamber with a lanyard. The valve shall be readily accessible for cleaning and shall not require tools for removal, cleaning or replacement. Conventional check valves, valves that rely on ball seals, and or check valves that are installed inside the mixing chamber, or which require mixing chamber disassembly for servicing will not be accepted. B. Provide a polymer tote pump suction assembly. The assembly shall include quick disconnect cam-lock fittings, a 1” full port ball valve, and at least 15 feet of 1” braided PVC hose, per skid. C. Provide a Twin IBC Spill Containment Pallet large enough to hold horizontally two, 275-gallon liquid polymer totes. Containment unit shall be forklift accessible, shall have a minimum sump capacity of 535 gallons, and shall include a drain and drain plug. 229123/MassDEP No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA LIQUID CHEMICAL FEED EQUIPMENT WOODARD & CURRAN 46 33 00-11 2.05 SPARE PARTS A. The Manufacturer shall furnish a total of one (1) set of the following spare parts for each of the polymer feed systems specified in this section. At a minimum, a set of spare parts for each pump shall include the following: 1. One Check Valve 2. One Pump Stator 3. One Pump Rotor 4. Set of Two Pump Packing Rings 5. Two Lantern Rings B. The spare parts shall be individually boxed with the project name and part number clearly identified on each individual box. All spare parts shall be shipped in a separate crate and clearly labeled. C. Furnish one (1) set of all special tools required to completely assemble, disassemble, or maintain the equipment. Special tools shall refer to oversized or specially dimensioned tools, special attachments or fixtures, or any similar items. One (1) set of special tools shall be provided for each size system. 2.06 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install all items in accordance with printed instructions of manufacturers, as indicated and specified. Make adjustments necessary to place equipment in service at time of tests. Pumps to be calibrated by manufacturing representative. 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. B. Factory Testing 1. All pump tests shall be in accordance with the Hydraulic Institute’s Standards. All tests shall be performed at the manufacturer’s facility prior to shipment. All test results shall be certified by a registered professional engineer, and shall be submitted to Engineer for approval prior to shipment. 229123/MassDEP No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA LIQUID CHEMICAL FEED EQUIPMENT WOODARD & CURRAN 46 33 00-12 2. Each Pump shall be performance tested at all specified duty points, plus five additional points. Pump test curves shall be developed to illustrate conformance with the contract documents. Capacity, head, motor speed, pump speed, efficiency and input horsepower shall be recorded for each test point. For variable speed units, each pump shall be tested at full speed plus 3 equally spaced speeds between maximum and minimum design conditions. 3. Each pump shall be hydrostatically tested to 1.5 times shutoff head. 4. All motors shall be tested in accordance with IEEE standards. All test results shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval prior to shipment. Each motor shall be tested at no load running current, high potential, and winding resistance. 5. Pump units shall not be shipped to Site until factory test reports are submitted and approved by Engineer. 3.03 STARTUP & COMMISSIONING A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. B. Field Testing 1. After installation of the pumping units and appurtenances is complete, operating tests shall be carried out to assure that the pumping equipment operates properly. The Contractor shall make arrangements to have the manufacturer's representatives present when field equipment tests are made. Each pumping unit shall be given a running field test in the presence of the Engineer for a minimum of 2 hours. Each pumping unit shall be operated at its rated capacity, the design conditions specified herein, or such other point on its head-capacity curve selected by the Engineer. The Contractor shall provide an accurate and acceptable method of measuring the discharge flow. Tests shall assure that the units and appurtenances have been installed correctly, that the assembly is free from undue stress imposed by the piping or mounting bolts, that there is no objectionable heating, vibration, or noise from any parts, and that all manual and automatic controls function properly. If any deficiencies are revealed during any tests, such deficiencies shall be corrected and the tests shall be re-conducted. 2. Provide Field Test Booklets for each unit showing all field tests performed to adjust each component and all field tests performed to prove compliance with the specified performance criteria, upon completion and testing of the installed system. Each test report shall indicate the final position of controls, and all data gathered during testing. C. Manufacturer Field Services 229123/MassDEP No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA LIQUID CHEMICAL FEED EQUIPMENT WOODARD & CURRAN 46 33 00-13 1. Provide the services of a factory trained service representative of the polymer system manufacturer to assist in the installation, start-up, and testing of the equipment, and to perform training to WWTF personnel in the operation and maintenance of the equipment. Provide a minimum of eight (8) hours of instruction for training on the pump skids. Instruction time shall be in addition to startup, checkout, testing and travel time. A factory-trained representative shall be present during testing of all pumps. 2. Provide the services of a factory trained service representative of Fournier Industries to assist in the installation, start-up, and testing of the equipment, and to perform training to WWTF personnel in the operation and maintenance of the equipment. Provide a minimum of eight (8) hours of instruction for training on the pump skids. Instruction time shall be in addition to startup, checkout, testing and travel time. A factory-trained representative shall be present during testing of all pumps. 3. Both Polymer Equipment Factory-trained representative and Fournier Industries Factory-trained representative shall be present simultaneously during equipment startup to ensure proper controls integration. END OF SECTION 229123/MassDEP No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA LIQUID CHEMICAL FEED EQUIPMENT WOODARD & CURRAN 46 33 00-14 This page left blank intentionally 229123/MassDEP No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA HYPERBOLIC MIXERS WOODARD & CURRAN 46 41 41-1 SECTION 46 41 41 HYPERBOLIC MIXERS PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY: A. Work under this section includes furnishing of all labor, materials, tools, equipment and incidentals required and installation, start-up, testing and operator training for the hyperbolic mixers indicated on the Contract Drawings and specified herein. B. Materials provided shall include all connection adapters, support pads, electrical and plumbing connections and appurtenant equipment to provide a workable system as shown on the Contract Drawings and specified herein. C. Related work specified elsewhere includes: 1. Section 01 60 00 — Product Requirements 2. Division 3 — Concrete 3. Division 26 — Electrical work 4. Division 40 — Process Integration 1.02 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Measurement and payment requirements: per Division 01 General Requirements. 1.03 REFERENCES A. American Bearing Manufacturers Association (ABMA) B. American Gear Manufacturer’ Association (AGMA) C. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) D. American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM) E. Standards of the American Water Works Association (AWWA) F. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE) G. Standards of the Hydraulic Institute (HI) H. National Electric Code (NEC) I. Standards of the National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) 229123/MassDEP No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA HYPERBOLIC MIXERS WOODARD & CURRAN 46 41 41-2 J. ISO 9001:2000 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination, Sequencing, and Scheduling: per Division 01 General Requirements. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. B. Submit shop drawings, manufacturer's literature, maintenance data and operating instructions and warranty data in accordance with the General Conditions of the contract. C. Attention is directed to the fact that the Drawings are based on the Invent Hyperclassic hyperbolic mixers. If the equipment accepted requires an arrangement differing from the indicated on the Drawings, the Contractor shall prepare and submit for review detailed mechanical drawings showing all necessary changes. Such changes shall be at no additional cost to the Owner. D. Hyperbolic Mixer Drawings and Data 1. Data and specifications for each unit shall include the following a. Descriptive literature, bulletins, catalog cuts and drawings for the equipment including minimum submergence requirements. b. Certified shop and installation drawings showing all details of construction, dimensions and anchor bolt requirements. c. Shaft size and material d. Propeller size, type and material. e. Type and ratings of bearings. f. Complete bill of materials for the equipment. g. Spare parts list. h. Description of surface preparation and shop prime painting, including certification that the paint to be used to shop prime the equipment is compatible with the finish coat paint to be applied to the equipment. i. The weight of each component: motor, gearbox, shafting and impeller. j. The total weight of the complete assembled mixer. k. Complete motor data including size, make, type and characteristics of the electric motor along with wiring diagrams. 229123/MassDEP No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA HYPERBOLIC MIXERS WOODARD & CURRAN 46 41 41-3 E. Certificates 1. After the equipment has been manufactured, the manufacturer shall submit to the Engineer a certification stipulating that the equipment has been manufactured in accordance with the design and complies with all requirements specified herein. F. Test Reports 1. Copies of the test reports regarding the field performance tests shall be submitted to the Engineer within 14 days of the completion and the tests G. Submit general arrangement and assembly drawings indicating: 1. Construction details and dimensional drawings; 2. Structural requirements which include support base and anchor bolt requirements; 3. Operating weight distribution; 4. Installation requirements requiring coordination with the Contractor. H. Submit electrical load calculations, rated power, rated input power, shaft power curve and its relationship to percent solids, recommended position and depth of the mixers in the tank, minimum distances from tanks walls and bottom requirements. I. Bearing life calculations J. Shop test results. K. Operations and Maintenance Manuals shall be supplied in Accordance with Division 01. The O&M manuals shall include equipment descriptions, operating instructions, drawings, troubleshooting techniques, a recommended maintenance schedule, and the recommended lubricants. L. Nameplate requirements shall be in accordance with Section 01 60 00, Product Requirements. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. B. All equipment in this Section shall be furnished by or through a single supplier. The Contractor shall be responsible for the coordination and proper operation of the entire system. Equipment shall be fabricated, assembled, erected and placed in proper operating condition in full conformity with the Drawings, Specifications, instructions and recommendations of the equipment manufacturer. 229123/MassDEP No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA HYPERBOLIC MIXERS WOODARD & CURRAN 46 41 41-4 C. The work of this Section shall be completely coordinated with the work of other Sections. Verify at the site both the dimensions and work of other trades adjoining items of work in this Section before fabrication and installation of items herein specified. Field measurements shall be taken at the site to insure proper fitting of all items. D. Qualifications of Manufacturer: The manufacturers shall be experienced in the design and construction of equipment for this purpose, and shall have furnished such equipment and can prove that it has performed successfully for a period of not less than five (5) years and can meet or exceed the performance and design requirements specified. E. If any other manufacturer is proposed by the Contractor for the Work covered in this Section, it shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to perform any required redesign and coordination associated with, but not limited to, mechanical equipment layout, electrical wiring, conduit and controls, and structural/architectural work, at no additional cost to the Owner. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Provide in accordance with Section Division 01 General Requirements, any additional requirements herein. B. All equipment delivered and placed in storage shall be stored with protection from the weather, humidity and temperature variations, dirt and dust, or other contaminants. C. Care shall be taken to avoid supporting or lifting the mixers in a manner that will place excessive stress on parts or shafts that are not designed to support the weight of the unit. The mixer assembly shall be lifted by eyebolts provided in the top of motor drive or by slings. D. If, for any reason, the equipment cannot be installed immediately upon receipt, it should be stored indoors following the appropriate manufacturer’s instructions. If this is not possible, ensure that the components are adequately protected from exposure to weather in accordance with the equipment manufacturer’s instructions. The equipment should be stored away from construction traffic and areas of debris. 1.08 WARRANTY A. Equipment supplied under this section shall be warranted to be free from defects in workmanship, design and materials for a period of one (1) year from manufacturer’s startup. If any part of the equipment should prove to be defective during the warranty period, the manufacturer at no expense to the Owner shall replace the part. 229123/MassDEP No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA HYPERBOLIC MIXERS WOODARD & CURRAN 46 41 41-5 PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable level of quality: Equivalent to Hyperbolic Mixer Model HCM/2500- 24-3.0 hp by Invent Environmental Technologies, Inc. B. The anoxic zone hyperbolic mixers shall be standard equipment provided with all of the necessary accessories. The equipment shall be capable of completely mixing the anoxic basin in which it is installed, maintaining the mixed liquor solids in suspension without the introduction of air. 2.02 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Mixers shall be of the non-clogging, vertical shaft, hyperboloid-body type and shall contain one blade with eight (8) integral transport ribs. B. Mixers shall be capable of mixing the contents of the anoxic zones which shall contain biological activated sludge with a solids concentration ranging between 1,000 – 20,000 mg/L and shall be designed to prevent settlement in the tanks and to re-suspend heavy material on the tank bottom and floatable material on the surface. C. Each mixer shall operate independently and shall be controlled from a motor control center. The mixers shall be constant speed units designed to operate continuously. D. The mixer and its appurtenances shall be specifically designed for continuous duty operation in a submerged application in a biological reactor. The mixers shall not overload the motors at any point within the operating limits recommended by the mixer manufacturer. E. The mixer shall be designed with no submerged bearings and with a dry installed motor. F. The mixers shall be capable of completely mixing each anoxic zone as required to meet the requirements of the performance test outlined below. Each test will be conducted in the presence of the Engineer and the Owner. The performance requirements presented below define the minimum mixing capacity of each mixer. If additional mixing capacity is required to meet the performance test requirements, the Contractor shall provide the necessary equipment at no additional cost to the Owner. 229123/MassDEP No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA HYPERBOLIC MIXERS WOODARD & CURRAN 46 41 41-6 G. Mixers installed in Anoxic Tanks shall be designed to meet the following conditions: *Refer to contract documents for exact water depth 2.03 MATERIALS A. General 1. Each mixer assembly shall consist of a dry installed heavy-duty speed reducer with hollow shaft, electric motor, baseplate, surface agitator blade, composite FRP shaft, and composite hyperbolic mixer body. 2. The bottom of the hyperbolic mixing body should not exceed 12” above the basin floor. Parameter Design No. of mixers 2 Mixer configuration Hyperbolic Mixer Body One, with 8 integral transport ribs Liquid being mixed Mixed liquor and RAS Location Anoxic Zone Concentration Range 1,000 - 20,000 mg/L Maximum mixer speed 23 RPM Zone Size (L x W x D) 35.5 ft. x 29.3 ft. x 17.2 ft. Approximate Water Depth 12 ft.* Maximum Motor Size 3.0Hp Motor Type Squirrel Cage, Induction type Motor Efficiency NEMA MG1 Premium Efficiency Duty Continuous, designed for a minimum of ten starts per hour. Insulation Class F Voltage 460V, 3 Ph., 60 Hz. Motor Service Factor 1.15 229123/MassDEP No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA HYPERBOLIC MIXERS WOODARD & CURRAN 46 41 41-7 3. The mixer should be designed as a vertical shaft mixer, with a dry installed motor. During operation the mixer should not generate any upward forces on the support construction. 4. The mixer should have a steady stationary flow pointed downward parallel to the mixer shaft. The highest speeds and turbulent fluctuations should be produced in the bottom area. On the water surface, no or little surface turbulence should appear. B. Gear Drive 1. The gear drive assembly for each mixer shall consist of parallel-shaft helical gear box and motor as designed by SEW Eurodrive, or Engineer approved equal. 2. The gear drive assembly shall have a high-quality corrosion protection coating, robust weather protective hood, humidity and acid protection of the motor, and PTC resistor for thermal protection of the motor. The gearbox service factor shall be 2.0 or greater. 3. The gear box housing shall be cast iron covered with an acrylic coating, having a thickness of at least 6.0 mil. The gear box shall be connected to the mounting base using a flange connection with 316 additional stainless steel nuts and bolts. 4. The gear box speed shall not exceed 26 rpm. The calculated lifetime L10 of the bearings shall exceed 100,000 hours. C. Motors 1. The drive motors shall be a squirrel cage induction motor, 460 V, 3 phase, 60 Hz, 1,800 RPM, Class F insulation and IP55 protection. All motors shall be designed with applied IEEE, NEMA and ANSI standards. 2. The motors shall be equipped with a weather protection hood, increased protection of the winding against humidity and acid, and high-quality protective varnishing against corrosion. 3. Motors shall be NEMA Premium Efficient Type, NEMA design B, and shall be rated for continuous duty with at least 10 starts per hour. 4. The motors shall be equipped with integral thermal overloads mounted in the motor windings. 5. The hollow shaft shall be covered and sealed with a special hollow shaft cap. 229123/MassDEP No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA HYPERBOLIC MIXERS WOODARD & CURRAN 46 41 41-8 D. Mounting Base 1. The mounting base of each mixer shall consist of a gear base plate mounted in rubber buffers connected permanently to the supports by bolted connection. The gear plate shall be designed as a distortion-proof steel structure with an impact-proof powder-coated surface. The plate shall be able to be leveled using the threaded bolts, which can be adjusted in height. 2. The rubber buffers shall absorb start-up torque, prevent any transfer of vibrations to the support and constitute the galvanic separation of the mixer from its surroundings. 3. The mounting base shall be a fastening set for the concrete support with threaded rods and chemical anchors which are permanently anchored to the concrete. E. Shaft 1. The drive shaft of the mixer shall be made from high quality fiberglass reinforced plastic and resistant to most chemicals and wastewater. The top end of the shaft shall be a steel tappet for the connection to the gear hollow shaft. At the lower end there shall be a flange or adhesive surface with central cone, depending on the mixer design. The connection to the mixer body itself shall consist of a flanged screwed or adhered connection depending on the design. 2. All bolted connections shall utilize 316 stainless steel hardware. F. Hyperboloid Mixer Body 1. Each hyperboloid mixer body shall be manufactured of FRP and be a streamlined stress-free body without any mounted or fitted parts. 2. The transport ribs which accelerate the flow shall be integrated in the mixer body and be made of top quality FRP. 3. The mixer body shall be coated with a special gel coat to provide a polished surface. 4. The hyperboloid mixer shall have laminated stainless steel insert nuts. 5. All assembly bolts, nuts, washers, fasteners and rigging hardware shall be Type 316 stainless steel. 229123/MassDEP No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA HYPERBOLIC MIXERS WOODARD & CURRAN 46 41 41-9 G. Spare Parts 1. One set of all special tools required for normal operation and maintenance shall provided. 2. One set of rubber buffers per installed mixer type. 3. One complete spare set of bearings and grease seals. 4. One shaft holder for each shaft diameter supplied. 5. All lubricating oils required for the first year of operation shall be provided. The products supplied shall be factory prefilled, in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 6. Spare parts shall be identical to and interchangeable with similar parts installed. H. Surface Agitator Blade 1. A pitched blade shall be mounted on the shaft of mixer as specified in the construction drawings to improve the mixing flanges and remove floating scum. 2. The pitch blade shall be fabricated from AISI 316 stainless steel. 2.04 PROJECT/SITE REQUIREMENTS A. Equipment furnished under this Section shall be designed for marine environment in which the equipment is exposed to the atmosphere. The equipment shall be designed for humid atmospheric conditions in Coastal Massachusetts and shall be designed to operate continuously, 24 hours per day, 365 days per year 2.05 SURFACE PREPARATION A. All fabricated steel, aluminum and cast iron shall be factory prepared, factory primed and factory finished painted in accordance with Section 09 90 00. Touch- up paint shall be provided as specified to restore integrity of coating system that may be damaged during construction. All paint system components for the entire project shall be the product of a single manufacturer as required by Section 09 90 00 unless otherwise noted on the Drawings or approved by the Engineer. B. Ferrous surfaces not to be painted shall be given a shop coat of grease or other suitable rust-resistant coating. 2.06 SHOP TESTING A. The mixers shall be given the manufacturer's standard quality control inspections and tests to ensure the quality of materials used in the manufacture of the units and 229123/MassDEP No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA HYPERBOLIC MIXERS WOODARD & CURRAN 46 41 41-10 workmanship conform to the specified requirements and highest industry practice, the units operate properly, and the units have been correctly and adequately prepared for shipment, long term site storage and initial operation. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 FACTORY TESTS A. The hyperbolic mixer manufacturer shall perform the following inspections and tests on each unit before shipment: 1. Hyperbolic mixer body diameter, motor rating, and electrical connections shall be checked for compliance with contract requirements. B. Certified copies of all test procedures and results shall be provided to the Engineer prior to shipment. 3.02 MIXER INSTALLATION A. In accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. B. Each mixer, motor, shaft, associated equipment and accessories shall be installed complete in strict accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and recommendations in the locations shown on the Drawings. C. Scaffolding, Staging and Planking 1. The subcontractor for work of this Section shall furnish, install and maintain in a safe condition, scaffolding, staging, planking and• supports used for their work. Scaffolds shall have solid backs and floors to prevent dropping materials. Refer to Division 1 requirements for hoisting and for scaffolding, staging, planking and supports. Hoisting of the mixers is the responsibility of the subcontractor for the work of this Section. D. Installation 1. Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where required and approved for securing the mixers including threaded fasteners for concrete inserts, through-bolts and other required connectors. 2. Perform drilling and fitting for installation of the mixers. Set work in location, alignment and elevation plumb and level, true and free of rack, in accordance with approved shop drawings. Where aluminum contacts a dissimilar metal, apply a brush coat of non-chromate primer followed by two coats of aluminum metal and masonry paint to the dissimilar metal. Where aluminum contacts masonry or concrete, apply a coat of approved alkali resistant paint to the masonry or concrete. 229123/MassDEP No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA HYPERBOLIC MIXERS WOODARD & CURRAN 46 41 41-11 3. All steel surfaces that come into contact with exposed concrete shall receive a protective coating of an approved heavy bitumastic troweling mastic applied in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions prior to installation. E. Protection and Final Adjustment 1. Protect finish from damage during construction period. Remove temporary protective coverings when directed. 2. Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas. Wash railing systems thoroughly using clean water and soap, rinse with clean water. Do not use acid solution, steel wool or other harsh abrasives. If stain remains after washing remove finish and restore in accordance with NAAMM Finishes Manual. 3. Final adjustment: Check and readjust operating items, leaving items undamaged and in complete and proper operating order. 4. Remove damaged or defective work and replace with material that meets specified requirements at no additional cost to the Owner. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Startup, training, and operation and maintenance requirements in accordance with Section 01 91 15. B. After installation and prior to being placed in operation, each unit will be inspected and checked by a qualified representative of the equipment manufacturer, as required. C. Make all adjustments to each unit as directed by the equipment manufacturer. 3.04 START-UP AND TESTING A. In accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. B. The two (2) mixers shall be checked for balance by the equipment manufacturer’s representative while operating in air. This test shall be performed on site after mixer installation. Certified test reports shall be provided. C. There are two anoxic tanks that will be taken offline one at a time. The tanks will only be taken offline once. The performance tests for each tank will require two separate visits. Scheduling for testing shall be coordinated with the Engineer and the Owner. D. Field tests shall not be conducted until such time that the entire installation is complete and ready for testing. 229123/MassDEP No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA HYPERBOLIC MIXERS WOODARD & CURRAN 46 41 41-12 E. The field tests shall be conducted in the presence of the Engineer. All power and appurtenances necessary for the testing shall be furnished by the Contractor. F. Immediately following mixer installation, prior to any other field tests and prior to filling the tank, each mixer shall be run to confirm rotational direction according to the direction given by the manufacturer. Certification shall be provided to the Engineer, stating that each mixer is rotating in the direction intended. G. An equipment performance test shall be conducted on the installed mixers after wastewater is added to the tank in order to demonstrate power consumption. The power consumption shall be a maximum 95 percent of the motor nameplate rating. H. All mixers in the tank shall be checked with amperage and voltage measurements to assure that all mixers are operating at the same power draw. With all units operating, the transient power consumption of each size mixer as recorded by the wattmeter shall not vary more than plus/minus 5 percent from the average value for the two (2) units. I. Continue operating the mixer for 24 hours without overheating, excessive vibration or overloading. J. A Suspended Solids Concentration Test shall be conducted by the Engineer following complete installation as follows: 1. The mixer manufacturer shall guarantee the performance of each mixer and shall prove the quality of the mixer by performing a suspended solids concentration test demonstrating that each mixer achieves uniformity of the suspended solids within each zone. 2. Suspended solids concentration shall be conducted at or near the design MLSS values for the process. The SVI shall be greater than 60 ml/g for each sample. 3. Demonstrate that a uniform concentration of the mixed liquor suspended solids is achieved at the end of a 30-minute test period with the mixer running and no incoming flow. Uniformity shall be defined as plus or minus ten percent of the standard deviation of suspended solids concentration provided that 90% of the samples are within 10% of the average. The uniformity shall be calculated for each mixer and for all samples taken in each zone. 4. Sample quantity and location will be selected by the Engineer. Sample locations shall be equally spaced horizontally and vertically within each zone. The maximum depth at which any sample shall be taken shall be a minimum of 6-in above the basin floor. In addition, samples shall be collected a minimum of 12-in from any wall. The samples will either be collected by means of a discrete sampler, sample pump or digital TSS probe. If measurements are taken by means of digital TSS probe, every 229123/MassDEP No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA HYPERBOLIC MIXERS WOODARD & CURRAN 46 41 41-13 measurement shall be taken 2-3 times. For the evaluation of the data, the average of the two or three values will be used. Should any portion of the system fail to meet the requirements specified, then the Contractor shall make any and all necessary modifications such that the system does meet the requirement of this Section, at no additional cost to the Owner. 5. In the event the equipment fails to meet the test requirements, the necessary changes shall be made and the equipment retested. If the equipment remains unable to meet the test requirements to the satisfaction of the Engineer, it shall be removed and replaced with satisfactory equipment at the Contractor’s expense. 3.05 MANUFACTURER SERVICES A. Provide services of a manufacturer’s representative specifically trained on type of equipment specified. Submit qualifications of representative for approval. Man-day requirements listed below are exclusive of travel time, and do not relieve Contractor of obligation to provide sufficient service to place equipment in satisfactory operation. 1. Installation: Assist in installation and leveling of mixer and in coordinating electrical connections or any other miscellaneous coordination: a. 2 Days: 1 Day onsite per basin 2. Start-up, performance, acceptance testing, and operation and maintenance instructions: a. 4 Days: a total of two trips of two days per trip will be provided by the manufacturer (One trip per basin). B. The acceptance of O&M training will be in accordance with the successful completion of the equipment manufacturer’s certificate of installation, testing and instruction. The certificate will be completed by the manufacturer’s representative, the Engineer and the Owner at the completion of each vendor training session. 1. This instruction period shall be scheduled at least 10 days in advance with the Engineer and Owner and shall take place prior to plant start-up and acceptance. The final copies of operation and maintenance manuals specified in Section 01 15 30 must have been delivered to the Owner prior to scheduling the instruction period with the Owner. C. If there are difficulties in operation of the equipment due to the manufacturer’s design or fabrication, additional service shall be provided at no additional cost to the Owner. 229123/MassDEP No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA HYPERBOLIC MIXERS WOODARD & CURRAN 46 41 41-14 3.06 O&M MANUALS A. Operation and maintenance manuals will be provided by the Mixer manufacturer at least two weeks prior to shipment of all major equipment components. Each manual shall be a bound, indexed binder with drawings and parts lists prepared specifically for this project rather than general instructions that are not designed for this project. B. As a minimum the manual shall contain: 1. Certified as built drawings - General arrangement 2. Certified as built drawings - General arrangement details 3. Installation drawings. C. A complete bill of materials for the equipment including the weights of all structural steel components. 3.07 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements. END OF SECTION 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA CIRCULAR GRAVITY THICKENER WOODARD & CURRAN 46 71 13-1 SECTION 46 71 13 CIRCULAR GRAVITY THICKENERS PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Description 1. Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals required to install, complete and ready for operation, and field test, three new circular scraper shaft drive gravity thickeners in the existing rectangular tank as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein. 2. The work of the gravity thickeners includes, but is not limited to, drives, walkway and platform, rake mechanism with segmented blades, stationary influent pipe, influent well, torque shaft, effluent weirs, scum skimmer, scum box, scum baffles, and anchor bolts. Installation of new gravity thickener mechanism equipment and components as described in this Section and shown on the Drawings, and installation of a surface spray system in accordance with Section 40 05 35. 3. The mechanism shall be supported on the walkway spanning the tank with the flow entering the side of the tank and flowing into the feedwell through an influent pipe. Effluent will be collected in a peripheral launder and a center drive mechanism shall be provided for rotation of the two rake arms with rake blades. 4. The equipment shall be designed to effectively thicken settled primary and secondary sludge and scrape the settled solids from the basin floor to the sludge withdrawal sump as shown on the drawings. The clarified effluent shall be collected uniformly by the peripheral launder. Surface scum shall be collected by the scum skimming equipment and discharged through the scum withdrawal pipe. 5. Except where specifically indicated otherwise, all plates and structural members designated for submerged service shall have a minimum thickness of 1/4 inch. All structural steel will conform to ASTM A-36 requirements and steel plate will conform to ASTM A283C requirements. All anchor bolts used to secure the mechanism to the tank shall be 316 stainless steel. All assembly fasteners shall be 316 stainless steel. B. Related Requirements 1. Division 3 Concrete 2. Section 05 50 00 Miscellaneous Metals 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA CIRCULAR GRAVITY THICKENER WOODARD & CURRAN 46 71 13-2 3. Section 06 70 00 Structural Composites 4. Section 09 90 00 Painting 5. Section 40 05 15 Process Pipe Supports 6. Division 26 – Electrical 7. Division 40 – Process Integration 1.02 REFERENCES A. American Bearing Manufacturer’s Association (ABMA) 1. ABMA 11 (1999) Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Roller Bearings 2. ABMA 9 (2000) Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings B. American Gear Manufacturer’s Association (AGMA) 1. AGMA 2001 (2004) Fundamental Rating Factors and Calculation Methods for Involute Spur and Helical Gear Teeth 2. AGMA 6034 (1992) Practice for Enclosed Cylindrical Worm gear Speed Reducers and Gearmotors C. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 1. ANSI B1.1 (1989) Unified Inch Screw Threads (UN & UNR Thread Form) D. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 1. ASTM A 123 1989a) Zinc (Hot Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products 2. ASTM A 153/A 153M (2005) Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware 3. ASTM A 325 (2006) Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength E. American Welding Society (AWS) 1. AWS D 1.1 – Structural Welding Code 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. The following shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 70 00 Submittals: 1. Submit evidence of manufacturer’s experience based on Paragraph 1.04. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA CIRCULAR GRAVITY THICKENER WOODARD & CURRAN 46 71 13-3 2. Submit a complete bill of materials supported by descriptive literature, bulletins, and/or catalogs of the equipment. Include dimensions of equipment and parts. Include the manufacturer’s recommended summer and winter grades of lubricants along with the alternative references to products of other manufacturers. 3. Submit calculations for design cut-out and continuous operating torque for the thickener drives. 4. Submit information on general arrangement of drive unit verifying AGMA ratings, overload protection, housing materials and construction and horsepower. 5. Provide Welding Procedure Specification for all procedures used during fabrication and records of Welders Procedure Qualifications. 6. Submit a list of the manufacturer's recommended spare parts including any special tools necessary for equipment repair or maintenance. 7. Submit data on motors and speed reducers. 8. Submit complete description, control diagrams, schematics of torque overload device, and suitable outline drawings showing such details as are necessary to locate conduit stub-ups and field wiring. 9. Descriptive information shall include the following: a. List of twenty-five (25) installations of equipment in successful operation of the design in all essential regards as specified. b. Field dye performance data verifying the proposed design proportionately removes sludge from the entire tank bottom. Test site and testing laboratory shall be identified along with test methods and apparatus used. Data shall be from similar scraper mechanisms. 10. Submit proposed anchor bolts. 11. Submit certified copies of field test reports. 12. Certificate of design stamped by a Registered Professional Engineer stating that the equipment to be provided for this project meets or exceeds all design requirements of these specifications. The certificate shall state the respective loads and design criteria. 13. Drive mechanism rating calculations, stamped by a Registered Professional Engineer who is certified by the American Gear Manufacturer’s Association for gear design, verifying the compliance of the drive gears and bearings with the specified continuous torque rating and bearing life rating. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA CIRCULAR GRAVITY THICKENER WOODARD & CURRAN 46 71 13-4 14. Provide a Certification from the Equipment Manufacturer that the installation has been completed in accordance with their recommended procedures. 15. Operation and Maintenance Manuals 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Equipment Installation & Operation: The Contractor shall assume responsibility for the satisfactory installation and operation of the entire system of thickener mechanism. B. Equipment Manufacturer: The gravity thickener equipment is intended to be standard equipment of proven ability as manufactured by a single manufacturer who is fully experienced, reputable and qualified in the manufacture of the equipment to be furnished. The manufacturer shall have at least 15 years of experience in the design, application, and supply of circular thickeners in water or wastewater treatment plants, and shall submit a list of not less than 25 operating installations similar to that to be provided under this Section, each with gravity thickener(s) of the same size as or larger than the gravity thickeners on this project and the equipment shall have been in continuous and successful service for not less than 5 years. Submit evidence of Manufacturer's Experience. C. Best Practices: The equipment shall be manufactured, fabricated and installed in accordance with the best practices and methods and operate satisfactorily when installed as shown on the Drawings. D. Substitutions: Should equipment which differs from this Section be offered and determined to be the equal to that specified, such equipment shall be acceptable only on the basis that any revisions in the design and/or construction of the structure, piping, appurtenant equipment, electrical work, and associate items required to accommodate such a substitution shall be made at no additional cost to the Owner and be as approved by the Engineer. E. Services of Manufacturer's Representative Requirements: Provide the services of a factory trained service engineer experienced in the erection, alignment and operation of the equipment furnished under this Section to supervise the erection and adjustment of the equipment and to certify its readiness for operation. Equipment startup will not take place consecutively due to construction sequence requirements. F. Field Presence: The manufacturer's engineer shall be present at frequent intervals to ensure proper erection and satisfactory operation of equipment and shall be present at least once during each of the following times: 1. Final installation and alignment 2. Start-up and testing 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA CIRCULAR GRAVITY THICKENER WOODARD & CURRAN 46 71 13-5 G. Operation and Maintenance Instruction from Field Representative: A factory representative who has complete knowledge of the proper operation and maintenance of the equipment furnished shall be provided for one day as defined above and in addition to the days required above, to instruct representatives of the Owner and the Engineer on proper operation and maintenance of the equipment. H. Operations and Maintenance Manual: Submit a Draft and Final Operations and Maintenance Manual for the Gravity Thickener System to the Owner and Engineer in accordance with Section 01 70 00. The manual shall be prepared specifically for this installation and shall include all required catalog cut sheets, drawings, equipment lists, and descriptions necessary to instruct operating and maintenance personnel unfamiliar with such equipment. Furnish for review by the Owner and Engineer a draft version of the O&M Manual. Respond to Owner and Engineer comments and furnish six copies of final O&M Manual to Owner and Engineer in 3 ring binder. 1.05 SITE CONDITIONS A. Specified Services: The equipment required under this Section shall be provided in accordance with the sequencing requirements specified herein below. As a result, the services of the Manufacturer's Representative cannot occur in one continuous site visit. The specified services, including uncrating, alignment, final testing and startup shall be provided for each gravity thickener unit at the time required by the construction sequence. Additional days required to meet the specifications shall be at no additional cost to the Owner. B. Identical Equipment: All of the equipment provided for the two gravity thickeners shall be identical and interchangeable. C. Plant Disruption: In the performance of the work required in this Section, only one sludge holding tank may be removed from service at any one time for demolition and removal of existing equipment and installation of new equipment. Normal plant operations may not be disturbed in any way by the work required in this Section unless specifically approved by the Owner. D. Field Verification: Contractor shall verify all existing dimensions shown on the drawings or otherwise needed to enable the fabrication and installation of the work to be provided under this Section. Collector mechanisms shall be designed and fabricated to allow for such field adjustments and modifications. 1.06 DELIVERY A. Fabricated assemblies shall be shipped in the largest sections permitted by carrier regulations, properly match-marked for ease of field erection. B. All components shall be erected immediately upon receipt from the thickener manufacturer or stored in strict conformance with storage recommendations provided by the thickener manufacturer in the operations and maintenance manual. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA CIRCULAR GRAVITY THICKENER WOODARD & CURRAN 46 71 13-6 C. The mechanism shall be lubricated in strict accordance with the instructions of the thickener manufacturer's field service representative. The required lubricants shall be provided by the contractor. 1.07 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Spare Parts: 1. Contractor shall submit Manufacturer's recommended spare parts list. Recommended spare parts shall then be furnished with the equipment by the manufacturer in accordance with Section 01 70 00. 2. As a minimum, the following spare parts shall be furnished for each unit provided under this section: a. One set of rake blade squeegees (for all scrapers in one complete tank) b. One set of all gaskets, seals, sealing strips, etc. c. One drive chain. d. One set of heat treated bearing strip liner inserts, if required by manufacturer (main turntable assembly). e. Twelve shear pins (if used). f. One-year operation supply of lubrication. 3. All other spare parts recommended by the manufacturer as needed to replace equipment items failing due to normal wear and tear during a one-year period of operation following Substantial Completion. B. Special Tools: 1. Provide all special tools required for normal maintenance. Tools shall be packaged in a steel case, clearly and indelibly marked on the exterior to indicate equipment for which tools are intended. Include any special equipment required to facilitate drainage or refill of lubricating oils. Include the manufacturer's recommended summer and winter grades of lubricant along with alternative references to products of other manufacturers. 1.08 WARRANTY A. For a period of minimum of one (1) year from date of substantial completion, manufacturer shall repair or replace, at no additional cost to the Owner, any equipment which has been found defective in materials or workmanship under normal conditions of use and maintenance. Guarantee need not cover alterations by Owner, damage from accidents, abuse, and vandalism nor Acts of God. Manufacturer's liability shall include the cost of materials and installation. This 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA CIRCULAR GRAVITY THICKENER WOODARD & CURRAN 46 71 13-7 paragraph is not intended to void any manufacturer's guarantee or warranties which might be of a duration greater than 1 year. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 DESCRIPTION A. Summary 1. Flow Design: Primary and secondary sludge shall be sent to the gravity thickeners. Each feed pipe shall be supported from the outside concrete tank walls and the gravity thickener feedwells. Flow will pass under the lower rim of the influent well into the clarification zone and eventually discharge over the peripheral overflow weir and trough. The thickener shall be designed to remove settled sludge from the bottom of the tank and floating scum from around the periphery of the tank. 2. The thickener shall perform the following integrated functions: a. Dissipate energy and control localized currents. b. Separate solids form the clear liquid. c. Evenly withdraw the clear liquid. d. Transport and thicken settled sludge. e. Remove scum from the thickener surface. 3. Work and components include, but are not limited to the following: a. Drive mechanism complete with reducer, motor, and overload device. b. Torque tube. c. Scraper arms with pickets. d. Influent feedwell with support beams. e. Access bridge including center platform, handrails and toe plate. f. Hopper Scraper. g. Effluent weirs. h. Scum removal system including scum skimmer, scum box, and scum baffles. i. Associated attachment bolts and anchor bolts for above. 4. The thickener shall be of the center feed and peripheral overflow type, with a central driving mechanism which shall rotate two attached rake arms. The steel bridge and mechanism support shall be rigidly supported by the concrete tank wall. The steel bridge shall serve as the main structural framework for the access walkway and operating platform. Rake collector 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA CIRCULAR GRAVITY THICKENER WOODARD & CURRAN 46 71 13-8 blades attached to the arms shall be arranged to move the settled sludge on the tank bottom to a concentric sludge channel surrounding the center column. Scrapers attached to the arms shall move the sludge to the point of withdrawal. The rake arms and collector scraper blades shall be designed to operate at a peripheral speed not to exceed 10 fpm. B. Performance/Design Criteria Parameter Unit Design No. of Units 3 Unit Diameter ft 21 Side Water Depth ft 15 Design Flow Rate MGD 0.20 Design Solids Loading Rate lb./sf-day 10 Design Overflow Rate gpd/sf 200 Drive Type Shaft Maximum Motor Size hp 0.5 Rake Tip Speed FPM 6 -8 2.02 MANUFACTURERS The gravity thickeners shall be provided by WesTech, Ovivo, Envirex, or Engineer Approved Equal. 2.03 ASSEMBLY A. All the equipment shall be assembled in the manufacturers shop as far as practical to ensure proper fitting of parts, then match-marked for erection and disassembled for shipment. All field connections shall be bolted connections, sized and arranged to resist all static, live and erection loads. Field welded assembly, except for the bridge splice, will not be allowed. B. The Contractor shall submit a complete bill of materials for all items to be provided, including supplier and delivery schedule. C. Welding 1. Before construction activities begin, Manufacturer shall submit Welding Procedure Specification for all procedures used during fabrication. Manufacturer shall also include Post-weld de-scaling and cleaning procedures. Welding shall be performed only by AWS Certified D1.1 Structural Welding Code for all types of welding required. Manufacturer shall submit welder's certification and welding procedure qualification record for the qualified personnel and procedures. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA CIRCULAR GRAVITY THICKENER WOODARD & CURRAN 46 71 13-9 D. Equipment Construction: Manufacturer shall submit certified shop and erection drawings showing all important details of construction, dimensions, weld requirements and anchor bolt locations and sizes of the gravity thickener system. The Manufacturer shall provide installation templates for anchor bolts. Include total weight of the equipment including the weight of the single largest item or component. Include a complete bill of materials for all items to be provided, including supplier and delivery schedule. E. The equipment shall be constructed such that there will be no chains, sprockets, bearings or operating mechanism below the liquid surface or in contact with the liquid. 2.04 FINISHES A. Painting: All components of the gravity thickeners shall be prepared and painted in accordance with Section 09 90 00. Prime and finish painting shall be factory applied with a minimum of two (2) gallons of finish touchup paint provided. 2.05 MATERIALS A. All structural steel used in the fabrication of the mechanisms shall conform to the requirements of ASTM A36. Structural steel wide flange shapes shall conform to ASTM A992. Selection and fabrication of structural steel members shall be in accordance with the latest edition of the AISC "Specifications for Design, Fabrication and Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings". 1. All welding shall be continuous and conform to the latest standards of AWS. Submerged structural steel and steel parts shall have a minimum thickness of 1/4-in except as otherwise specified herein. All steel design shall be in accordance with the AISC Manual of Steel Construction, latest Edition, and the Uniform Building Code (UBC), latest edition. 2. Components shall be designed so that stresses developed do not exceed allowable stresses, as defined by current AISC standards, when designed for 120% of the AGMA rated torque. 3. Panel lengths and member sizes shall be selected such that slenderness ratios do not exceed 200 for compression and 240 for tension. For strength, the controlling member force shall be used to determine member size. 4. Maximum deflection in a span under combined live and dead loads shall not exceed L/360. 2.06 DRIVE ASSEMBLY A. Center Drive Assembly: The center drive assembly shall consist of: an electric motor primary reduction unit with a steel chain roller drive; a final reduction unit; and related equipment. The drive assembly shall be provided with automatic 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA CIRCULAR GRAVITY THICKENER WOODARD & CURRAN 46 71 13-10 overload activating systems. The drive assembly shall be completely factory assembled and shipped as a complete unit. All gearing shall be enclosed in gray cast iron ASTM A-48 Class 40B housing. Fabricated steel housing, exposed gearing, and submerged bearings will not be acceptable. B. Physical Characteristics The drive unit shall consist of a motor, secondary speed reducer, and support base. The drive shall be mounted on the walkway and support the entire rotating load of the mechanism. All speed reducers shall be fully enclosed and running in oil or grease. Support base for the drive shall be of welded steel to assure rigidity. Lubricant and dust seals shall be provided. Lubrication fittings shall be readily accessible. C. Rating: The drive assembly shall be rated on the basis of a maximum continuous output torque. At this maximum continuous output torque, and except as otherwise specified, all gearing in the drive train shall be rated in accordance with the latest AGMA standards with a service factor of 1.25. Submit documentation of the design torque rating of all components of the collector mechanism. Drive Assembly Torque Max. Continuous Operating Torque 9,000 ft.-lbs. AGMA Alarm Torque 11,250 ft.-lbs. Motor Shut-Off Torque 13,500 ft.-lbs. Mechanical Overload Shut-Off 15,750 ft.-lbs. D. Stalled Torque: The unit can withstand a maximum instantaneous torque of 200% of maximum continuous operating torque without physical damage to equipment. E. Drive Mechanism: Design drive mechanism for maximum continuous operating torque as specified above. Design drive mechanism capable of withstanding a stalled torque (momentary peak torque) of not less than twice maximum continuous operating torque specified. F. Submit calculations certifying the Drive Assembly AGMA Rating signed by a registered professional engineer who is certified by AGMA in gear design. G. Torque Overload Device: Set torque overload alarm as specified above. Make torque overload device capable of shutting unit down at torque specified above. Protect entire mechanism from torque specified above by a shear pin. H. Design Standards: The drive assembly shall be designed and rated in accordance with AGMA 2001-C and AGMA 6034-B, except that the maximum continuous 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA CIRCULAR GRAVITY THICKENER WOODARD & CURRAN 46 71 13-11 output torque rating shall be no less than specified above. The torque rating shall apply to both strength and durability, with the minimum value used as the controlling limit. The AGMA rating for all gears shall be based on a design life of 20 years continuous duty for both strength and durability. The drive assembly shall be capable of withstanding a momentary peak (stalled) torque of twice the maximum continuous output torque. At the momentary peak (stalled) torque, no components of the drive train or drive platform shall be stressed to a level greater than 90 percent of yield. I. Service Classification: Except where specified otherwise, gear assemblies used in speed reducers or geared motors shall conform to AGMA Service Classification II. All gear assemblies shall conform to the applicable requirements of the AGMA Standards specified in AGMA 6034 and shall be especially selected for the actual operating speed range of the mechanism. J. Bearings: Except where specified otherwise, all bearings incorporated within the drive assembly shall be of the anti1-friction type, oil bath lubricated, and shall be designed for a minimum B-10 life of 200,000 hours based on the ABMA 9 and ABMA 11 standards when operating at the maximum continuous output torque and rpm of the mechanism. K. Final Gear Reducer: The final gear reducer shall be a regularly manufactured product of the gravity thickener Manufacturer. a. The final reduction worm gear shall be a cut-tooth casting mounted on a replaceable four-point contact ball bearings assembly. The bearing shall be mounted in a housing of high strength cast iron. b. The housing shall be provided with an extended journal type torque tube steady bearing to prevent tipping of the gear. The final reduction gear and the anti-friction ball bearings shall run in an oil bath within the final gear reduction housing. The housing shall be effectively sealed against contaminants by a felt strip. A readily accessible oil filling and level pipe with sight gauge shall be furnished. c. A steel torque tube shall be bolted to the gear and supports the scraper mechanism. d. Provide worm gear speed reduction with grease and oil lubricated anti-friction type bearings in cast iron housing securely bolted on the machined top face of the final reduction unit. Worm and shaft shall be a two-piece assembly for ease of maintenance. Cycloidal and planetary gearing shall not be acceptable. e. Align and maintain accurate centers with the final reduction gearing. Swivel base mounting of the intermediate unit shall not be acceptable. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA CIRCULAR GRAVITY THICKENER WOODARD & CURRAN 46 71 13-12 L. Primary Reduction Unit: The primary reduction unit shall consist of an electric motor connected to a primary helical gear reducer, with drive and driven sprockets and drive chain. M. Drive Motor: The drive motor shall be chemical duty, totally enclosed fan cooled for outdoor service with a minimum service factor of 1.15. Motors shall be of a premium efficient design and shall be different from the manufacturer's standard efficient product. Power supply to the equipment shall be 480 Volt, 3 Phase 60 Hz. Motors for the gravity thickener drives shall be rated for a Class 1, Division 1, Groups C & D environments. Submit complete product data on motors and power factor correction capacitors. N. Primary Gear Reducer: The primary helical gear reducer shall be either of the directly connected geared motor type or be separately connected to the electric motor by a flexible coupling. Gear assemblies used in the primary gear reducers shall have a service factor of not less than 1.4. Gears shall be supported on anti- friction bearings and be oil lubricated. Oil fill, drain, vent and level indicator devices shall be provided. Oil level monitoring, drainage and refill shall be easily accomplished from a safe working position on the operating platform and all fittings shall be provided with clear accessibility and work room. Oil drain shall have an extension tube as required to allow collection of drained oil into a container. Vertically stacked gear reducers and arrangements requiring auxiliary oil pumps or recirculating systems shall not be acceptable. O. Chain and Sprocket Assembly: Power shall be transmitted from the primary reduction unit to the final gear reducer by a steel roller chain and sprocket assembly. The chain drive shall have a minimum factor of safety of 4 as applied to the ultimate breaking or transmission strength of the chain with respect to loads transmitted at twice the rated torque of the drive assembly. Chains shall be of the self-lubricated, steel roller type. Sprockets shall be fabricated from either steel or high test cast- iron. Chain and sprockets shall be enclosed in an OSHA approved, weatherproof fabricated stainless steel guard provided with service openings or equal configuration of corrosion resistant materials. Proper chain tension shall be provided for by an adjustable steel base mounted on the final reduction unit. P. Intermediate Gear Reducer: The intermediate gear set shall be a cylindrical worm and worm gear, secured to the turntable base. The worm gearing assembly shall be supported on anti-friction roller bearings and operate in an oil bath. The worm gear shall be made of cast bronze or high-test cast iron, manufactured in one or two parts. If the worm gear consists of two parts, namely a rim and a spider, it shall be shouldered, bolted and doweled for concentricity. The worm shall be made of hardened ground alloy steel or high-test heat-treated cast iron. Q. Enclosure: The worm gearing shall be enclosed in at least ASTM A48, Class 40 high-grade cast iron housing with a removable cover over the worm. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA CIRCULAR GRAVITY THICKENER WOODARD & CURRAN 46 71 13-13 R. Lubrication: Bearings shall be oil lubricated. The output pinion shaft shall be one- piece construction. The shaft shall be precision aligned supported by upper and lower taper bearing assemblies. Suitable oil fill, drain and oil level indicator devices shall be provided. Oil level monitoring, drainage and refill shall be easily accomplished from a safe working position on the operating platform and all fittings shall be provided with clear accessibility and work room. The oil drain shall have an extension tube as required to allow collection of drained oil into a container. S. Condensate Removal: A positive means of removing condensate and contaminants shall be provided. The condensate removal system shall manually drain condensate from the lowest points of the housing. The system shall not be adversely affected by evaporation of water from the system and shall have a positive means to prevent loss of water by sealing of the system discharge when condensate is not being drained. T. Torque Limiting Devices: Load-indicating, high-torque warning, and high-high torque shut-off device shall be incorporated into the drive assembly and shall be rated for Class 1, Division 1, Groups C & D environments. The assembly enclosure shall be completely weatherproof and provided with access panels for field adjustment or removal of parts when necessary and 120 volt heaters to prevent condensation. The enclosure for electrical components shall be weatherproof NEMA 4X, stainless steel suitable for Class 1, Division 1, Groups C & D environments. Exposed linkage bars and moving gear housings will not be acceptable. U. Overload Device: The overload device shall be actuated by the thrust from the worm shaft and shall have an indicating meter so that the load on the mechanism can be visually monitored from the platform at all times during operation. V. High-Torque Warning and Shut-Off: The high-torque warning and high-high torque mechanical overload shut-off device shall be pre-set at the factory to allow the transmission of remote signals in case of high torque and high-high torque. The device shall be set as follows: 1. To energize an alarm when the load on the mechanism reaches the alarm torque of 125 percent of the AGMA rated maximum continuous operating torque; 2. To stop the motor when the load reaches 150 percent of the AGMA rated maximum continuous operating torque; and 3. To provide a mechanical overload shutoff when the load reaches 175 percent of the AGMA rated maximum continuous operating torque. W. Electrical Supply: The electrical supply to the overload device shall be 120 Volts, single phase, 60 Hz. Provide dry contacts rated 10 Amps at 120VAC for remote control of alarms. Provide two pairs of contacts, each with one normally open and 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA CIRCULAR GRAVITY THICKENER WOODARD & CURRAN 46 71 13-14 one normally closed contact. Contacts provided to SCADA shall open on alarm condition. X. Shear Pin: A shear pin device (if used in lieu of a mechanical overload shutoff device) shall be provided and set for 175 percent of the maximum continuous operating torque. Y. Visual Indicator: A visual torque indicator shall be provided and oriented so that it may be read from the walkway. It shall be calibrated from 0 to 100 percent of drive duty rating or in units of torque such as foot pounds. 2.07 ACCESS BRIDGE AND WALKWAY A. General: The access walkway shall extend from the tank sidewall to the operating platform supported on the bridge. The bridge shall be supported at the tank sidewall and oriented as shown on the Drawings. The tank sidewall bearing member of the bridge shall slide and the drive base shall be stationary. The bridge shall not be supported from top of sidewall concrete. From the top of the sidewall concrete there shall not be a step up or down to the access bridge. The access walkway and operating platform shall be provided a complete cover to provide gas containment via walkway/platform cover and adjacent tanks covers. B. Materials: The bridge shall consist of structural trusses, beams or channels. The walkway shall be of aluminum grating, at least 36-in wide inside the handrails. The bridge and grating shall be in accordance with Section 05 50 00. C. Design Requirements: Walkway and bridge shall be designed for a superimposed live load of 150 lbs. /sq. ft. Deflection of the access bridge under this load shall not exceed 1/360 of span. The walkway surface shall be at the same elevation as the operating platform to provide a uniform walkway. D. Operating Platform: The operating platform at the turntable base shall be of skid- proof 3/8-in thick aluminum or 1/4-in Type 304 stainless steel checkered plate and shall provide a walkway space at least 2-ft-0-in wide on all sides of the drive. 2.08 SLUDGE FEED PIPE A. Sludge shall enter the gravity thickener through a sludge side feed pipe which shall be furnished as part of the gravity thickener equipment. The feed pipe shall terminate within the influent well. B. The feed pipe shall be flanged ductile iron pipe or butt-welded Schedule 10 Type 316 stainless steel pipe, and shall be attached to the feed piping from the gravity thickener distribution box, and shall include an energy dissipating tee at the inlet. The pipe shall include all necessary supports and be located below the rotating feedwell to allow for the rotation of the skimmer assembly. C. All pipe supports shall be furnished by the gravity thickener Manufacturer. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA CIRCULAR GRAVITY THICKENER WOODARD & CURRAN 46 71 13-15 2.09 INFLUENT WELL A. Influent well shall be of adequate size to diffuse the flow into the tank at a uniform flow through velocity and have a minimum projection of 3-in above the normal maximum water surface and shall extend not less than 4-ft-0-in below the water surface and at least to the bottom of the influent well outlet ports. The influent well shall be constructed of 3/16-in (minimum) steel plate reinforced with a top ring angle and stiffening angles where necessary, supported from the bridge. Four 6 inch by 18 inch ports 90 degrees apart shall be made for the continuous or periodic removal of floating material from inside the influent well, without allowing short circuiting of the influent liquid. The ports shall have adjustable weir gates to vary the elevation at which scum is released. The above provision shall take the form of weir gates or slots complete with baffles, which shall be accessible from the platform through hatches in the cover system. B. The influent well supports shall consist of two (2) structural steel beams spanning the tank which shall hold the well in alignment in both a horizontal and vertical plane. The beams shall be anchored to the tank walls. 2.10 BRIDGE MOUNTING A. Design: The bridge shall support the entire sludge collector mechanism. The bridge shall be constructed from 1/4-in thick (minimum) steel plate reinforced (as needed) and constructed such that no portion of the bridge will be stressed beyond the allowable limits as set forth in the AISC standards when 200% of the maximum continuous operating torque is applied. 2.11 TORQUE TUBE A. The steel center drive shaft shall be fabricated from minimum ¼” wall pipe construction or solid shafting designed to support the weight of the suspended structure and to withstand 200% of the maximum continuous operating torque of the drive. 2.12 SLUDGE COLLECTION EQUIPMENT A. General: Each sludge collector mechanism shall have two structural steel rake collector arms, located 180 degrees apart, and rigidly connected to the drive shaft. The rake collector arms shall be of a truss construction, either rectangular or triangular or structural steel channel, conforming to the slope of the tank floor and shall extend from the drive shaft to the inside face of the outer wall of the tank. B. Collector Arms: Each rake collector arm shall be provided with inward scraping steel blades to scrape the thickened sludge along the tank bottom to the sludge hopper located at the center of the tank. The rake arms and scraper blades shall be arranged to scrape the entire tank bottom twice per revolution of the mechanism. The rake collector blades shall have a minimum depth of 9-1/2-in and shall be of stilted construction for maximum thickening. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA CIRCULAR GRAVITY THICKENER WOODARD & CURRAN 46 71 13-16 C. Connections: The rake collector arms shall be connected to the drive shaft in such a manner that each arm can easily be removed completely or adjusted to conform to the angle of the tank floor when the tank is partially or completely empty. Furnish shims as required to adjust rake arm angle. D. Blades: All blades shall be provided with adjustable spring Type 316 stainless steel squeegees projecting approximately 1-1/2-in below the bottom of the blade and secured by Type 316 stainless steel bolts with nuts. Each squeegee shall have a minimum thickness of 26 gauge and be designed for a 2-in minimum adjustment in the vertical plane. E. Materials: Components of the rake collector arms shall be constructed from 1/4-in thick (minimum) steel plate and angle, suitably reinforced such that no portion of the rake arm will be stressed beyond the allowable limits set forth in the AISC standards when the full stall (motor cut-out) torque load of the drive assembly is applied as a distributed load on one of the rake arms. F. Pickets: The rake collector arms shall be equipped with vertical stirring angles (pickets) attached with Type 316 stainless steel bolts to provide a sludge discharge of maximum density. The pickets shall be spaced at 2-ft on center and shall terminate a maximum of 6-inches below influent sludge side feed pipe. G. Sludge Hopper: The sludge hopper shall be furnished with a four-blade scraper assembly. The scraper shall be designed to continuously move accumulated sludge to the sludge withdrawal pipe. The blade settings shall be such that the concentric sludge hopper is scraped four times with each revolution of the mechanism. Each scraper blade shall be rigidly fixed to the drive shaft. Each scraper shall be constructed such that no portion of the scraper will be stressed beyond the allowable limits set forth in the AISC standards when 25 percent of the stall torque load of the drive assembly is applied. 2.13 EFFLUENT REMOVAL A. A rectangular effluent launder shall be provided around the perimeter of the tank. The launder shall be formed as part of the concrete wall. A drop out box shall be provided in the bottom of the launder at one point for collection and discharge of the clarified effluent. B. Effluent weir plates shall be provided around the perimeter of the tank. Effluent weir plates shall consist of 1/4" thick 316 stainless steel or fiberglass sections with 3" deep 90-degree v-notches at 9" O.C. intervals. The weir sections shall be fastened to the tank wall using 316 stainless steel anchor bolts, hex nuts and washers, allowing for vertical adjustment. To prevent leakage, all surfaces between launder walls and weir plates shall be given a seal coat of suitable mastic by the contractor. C. Stainless steel will remain unpainted and uncoated. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA CIRCULAR GRAVITY THICKENER WOODARD & CURRAN 46 71 13-17 2.14 SCUM REMOVAL A. General 1. Each gravity thickener shall be equipped with two full radius skimmer arm assemblies to collect and discharge surface scum into a full radius scum trough cantilevered from the tank wall. Each skimming mechanism shall be arranged to sweep the surface of the sedimentation compartment, automatically removing scum and floating material to a scum box at the periphery of the tank. B. Each skimmer arm shall be either a structural steel truss assembly or a fabricated tube assembly connected to the center shaft and cantilevered from the rotating feedwell. Tie rods shall be properly located to allow adjustment of the skimmer arm as well as to resist horizontal forces. C. Scum Skimmer Assembly 1. A hinged scum skimmer assembly shall be mounted on the outer end of the skimmer blade. The hinged scum skimmer assembly shall be designed to form a pocket for trapping the scum. The hinged arrangement shall insure continual contact and proper alignment between wiper blade, scum baffle, and ramp as the blade travels up the scum box ramp. The wiper blade shall have a wearing strip on its outer end which contacts the scum baffle and a neoprene strip on its lower and inner edge. The neoprene wipers shall be a minimum 1/4 inch thickness. The scum is trapped as the wiper blade meets the ramp and is raised up the ramp to be deposited into the scum trough for disposal. The neoprene blade shall be fastened to the arm with stainless steel fasteners with steel back up bars. 2. The full radius scum trough shall be fabricated from 1/4 inch steel plate and shall be supported from the tank wall as shown on the drawings. The trough and support structure should be designed for all dead loads plus a 200-pound point load at the feedwell end of the trough with no more than 1/2 inch deflection. The trough shall be 8 inches wide with a uniformly sloped bottom to allow scum to discharge towards the tank wall. A 6-inch schedule 40 pipe connection shall be provided as shown on the drawings for connecting to the embedded 6-inch scum line. D. Scum Box 1. The scum box shall be of the size specified, supported from the tank wall and connected to the scum withdrawal piping. It shall be made of ¼ inch thick welded steel plate. The box shall have a scum trough, vertical steel sides, and a sloping approach ramp that extends from 1-1/2 inches above water level to 5-1/2 inches below. A similar ramp shall be provided at the opposite end to allow the skimmer blade to lower back to the operating position. A flexible connector shall be provided for connection to the contractor supplied scum withdrawal piping in the tank wall. E. Scum Flushing Valve 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA CIRCULAR GRAVITY THICKENER WOODARD & CURRAN 46 71 13-18 1. A valve shall be attached to the scum box which automatically opens and allows clarified liquid into the scum box to flush out solids. The valve shall actuate at every pass of the scum skimmer over the scum box, allowing sufficient delay after deposit of the solids before flushing begins. Delay and flush duration shall be adjustable. The opening and closing of the scum flushing valve shall be one smooth continuous movement. The valve shall provide 2 to 10 gallons of flush water per each pass of the skimmer assembly. All parts of the flush valve shall be structural steel except for the sealing plate and the pivoting bearing assembly. F. Scum Baffle 1. The baffle shall consist of 1/4-inch-thick x 12-inch-deep fiberglass sections. In the area of the scum box the scum baffle shall extend to 24 inches starting approximately 6 feet before and ending 2 feet after the scum box. The baffle sections shall be curved and fastened to the launder wall with adjustable FRP support brackets, stainless steel fasteners, and anchor bolts. 2.15 BOLTS, NUTS, WASHERS, ANCHORS, AND HARDWARE A. General: It shall be the responsibility of the equipment manufacturer to determine the number, size and location of all anchor bolts to be set in the existing concrete. Anchor bolts, nuts and washers shall be ASTM A276, Type 316 stainless steel, minimum ½ inch diameter. Anchor bolts for field tests may be mild steel bolts. All anchor bolts shall be furnished by the equipment manufacturer. B. Bolts, Nuts, and Fasteners: Except where specified otherwise, bolts for the equipment assembly shall be of the best-quality refined steel, minimum ½ inch diameter. Hexagonal nuts of the same quality of metal as the bolts shall be used. All threads shall be clean cut and shall conform to ANSI B1.1. Fasteners for high stressed conditions shall conform to ASTM A 325. C. Bolts, Nuts and Washers for Submerged Equipment Assemblies: Bolts, nuts and washers for the submerged equipment assemblies shall be of the Type 316 stainless steel. Bolts, nuts, and washers for non-submerged equipment assemblies shall be galvanized, or zinc-coated mild steel. Coating shall be applied after machining, by the hot-dip process in conformance with ASTM A 123 or ASTM A 153/A 153M, as appropriate. D. Anchorage Templates: The equipment manufacturer shall furnish all templates for setting the anchorage. 2.16 SURFACE PREPARATION AND PAINTING A. All fabricated steel, aluminum and cast iron shall be factory prepared, factory primed and factory finished painted in accordance with Section 09 90 00. Touch- up paint shall be provided as specified to restore integrity of coating system that 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA CIRCULAR GRAVITY THICKENER WOODARD & CURRAN 46 71 13-19 may be damaged during construction. All paint system components for the entire project shall be the product of a single manufacturer as required by Section 09 90 00 unless otherwise noted on the Drawings or approved by the Engineer. B. Prior to assembly of the drive unit, the casting shall have been shop sandblasted and thoroughly cleaned to remove any foreign particles in the drive base. After assembly, the drive mechanism shall be solvent cleaned and power wire brushed as needed prior to application of painting system in compliance with Section 09 90 00. C. Gear motors shall be furnished with Manufacturer's standard coating system. D. Ferrous surfaces not to be painted shall be given a shop coat of grease or other suitable rust-resistant coating. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Inspect all items immediately upon delivery to site for damage. B. Installation shall be in strict accordance with the Manufacturer's instructions and recommendations in the locations shown on the Drawings. Installation shall include providing the required oil and grease for initial operation. The grades of oil and grease shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Anchor bolts shall be furnished by the equipment manufacturer and set in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. C. Submit Manufacturer's Certification of Equipment Installation stating that the installed equipment has been examined and found to be in complete accordance with the manufacturer's requirements and specifications, that the equipment is ready for operation and that the operating personnel have been suitably instructed in the operation, lubrication and care of the equipment. D. Comply with fabricator’s and galvanizer’s requirements for installation of materials and fabrications, including use of nylon slings or padded cables for handling factory-coated materials. E. Post operating instructions for motor and gear motor. 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Startup, training, and operation and maintenance requirements in accordance with Section 01 91 15. B. After installation and prior to being placed in operation, each unit will be inspected and checked by a qualified representative of the equipment manufacturer, as required. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA CIRCULAR GRAVITY THICKENER WOODARD & CURRAN 46 71 13-20 C. Make all adjustments to each unit as directed by the equipment manufacturer. 3.03 START-UP AND TESTING A. Required Testing: Working under the direction of the manufacturer, perform field tests as follows: 1. A torque test shall be conducted prior to placement of the cement mortar finish on the floors. 2. The entire sludge collector mechanism shall be statically load tested by loading the rake arm with 150 percent of the specified design running torque. The test shall verify the torque overload control device settings for alarm and motor cutout. One truss arm shall be anchored and the load measured to demonstrate the rake arms’, cage’s, and drive unit’s ability to withstand the specified torque. Sketches and calculations shall be submitted illustrating how the torque will be applied prior to the test taking place. 3. Anchor bolts furnished by the equipment manufacturer shall be set in the existing concrete floor at points near the outer portion of the rake arms. The anchor bolts shall be suitable for the loads applied and shall be cut off flush with the rough concrete surface after the tests are completed. The bolts shall be arranged so that a single cable shall be used at the apex of the cables connecting panel points of the collector arms. A hydraulic cylinder of sufficient capacity with a known piston diameter, complete with pressure gauge, shall be connected to the anchor bolts to determine the horizontal load developed. The required gauge reading shall be such that the gauge indicates a force at the anchor bolts, which, when multiplied by the distance from the CL of the tank to the anchor bolts, will equal twice the specified maximum continuous working output torque. This force shall be maintained for a period of 15 seconds duration to assure that the equipment is capable of withstanding the required loading under static test conditions (i.e. without the drive motor in operation) and to verify or correct the setting of the overload device prior to the actual testing of the equipment with the drive motor. Also adjust the overload warning torque setting to the values specified in PART 2. Alternative methods of producing the required torque will be considered. Details of any alternative test procedure shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval. Test methods shall not apply impact loading or jerky loading conditions to the mechanism which may reduce the life of the equipment. 4. After the above test and adjustments and settings to the overload device have been made, the drive motor shall be switched on and the mechanism loaded to overload condition to assure that the mechanism will alarm, then stop when a predetermined overload condition occurs in the tank. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA CIRCULAR GRAVITY THICKENER WOODARD & CURRAN 46 71 13-21 B. The manufacturer's serviceman shall certify that the alarm and motor cut-out torque of the drives as calibrated in the manufacturer's shop drawing are in proper operation to shut down the units as specified. C. Upon completion of the static and operating torque tests, the mechanism shall be run dry for a period of a minimum of 4 continuous hours before flow is allowed to enter the system and shall operate without vibration, noise, jamming, or overheating. Special attention shall be given during the dry test run of the equipment for the clearance of the rake scraper blades. Motor amperage shall be checked at least hourly for any unusual or higher than normal figures. After the unit has successfully passed this initial test, flow shall be introduced into the tank and the same 4-hour observation test run shall be performed. D. The tests shall be conducted in the presence of the Engineer. The Contractor shall furnish all power, water, equipment and appurtenances required for testing. E. In the event the mechanisms fail to meet the above test, the necessary changes shall be made and each mechanism retested. If the mechanisms remain unable to meet the test requirements to the satisfaction of the Engineer, they shall be removed and replaced with satisfactory mechanisms at no additional cost to the Owner. 3.04 MANUFACTURER SERVICES A. Provide the services of a factory trained service representative to assist in the installation, start-up, and testing of the equipment, and to perform training to plant personnel in the operation and maintenance of the equipment. A minimum of eight (8 on-site) hours of instruction shall be provided for training on these thickeners. Instruction time shall be in addition to startup, checkout, testing and travel time. A factory-trained representative shall be present during testing of all thickeners. B. The manufacturer's representative shall provide minimum services in accordance with the following table: Purpose No. of Days Installation Supervision 2 Field Testing 2 Operator Training 1 Follow-up Service 1 C. The number of days indicated above shall be provided on an 8-hour-day on-site basis and shall be in addition to travel time. D. The acceptance of O&M training will be in accordance to the successful completion of the Equipment Manufacturer's Certificate of Installation Testing and Instruction. This certificate will be completed by the manufacturer's representative and the Owner at the completion of the vendor training session. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA CIRCULAR GRAVITY THICKENER WOODARD & CURRAN 46 71 13-22 1. This instruction period shall be scheduled at least 10 days in advance with the Owner and shall take place prior to plant start-up and acceptance by the Owner. The final copies of operation and maintenance manuals must have been delivered to the Owner prior to scheduling the instruction period with the Owner. E. The actual number of days on site shall be increased as necessary, without additional cost to the Owner, to accomplish the purposes indicated. F. The follow-up visit shall be at such time as requested by the Owner within the warranty period to answer questions, address specific problems, and review start up. G. Service scheduling shall be provided, at the Owner's request, and at no additional cost to the Owner, at any time during the warranty period. 3.05 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Operation and maintenance manuals will be provided by the thickener manufacturer at least two weeks prior to shipment of all major equipment components. Each manual shall be a bound, indexed binder with drawings and parts lists prepared specifically for this project rather than general instructions that are not designed for this project. B. As a minimum the manual shall contain: 1. Certified as built drawings - General arrangement 2. Certified as built drawings - General arrangement details 3. Erection drawings. 4. A complete bill of materials for the equipment including the weights of all structural steel components. 5. Installation and maintenance instructions for the specific equipment including the erection sequence, maintenance and trouble-shooting check points, and complete lubrication procedures with recommended grades of lubricants. 6. Cut sheets for all equipment items purchased from sub-vendors. 7. Operating Procedures: Include start-up, break-in, and routine normal operating instructions and sequences. Include regulation, control, stopping, shut-down, and. emergency instructions. Include summer, winter, and any special operating instructions. 229123/MassDEP CWSRF No. 4034 SURFSIDE WWTF UPGRADES Issue Date: SEPTEMBER 2016 TOWN OF NANTUCKET, MA CIRCULAR GRAVITY THICKENER WOODARD & CURRAN 46 71 13-23 8. A list of the thickener manufacturer's recommended spare parts specifically denoting wear items, long delivery items, and all items convenient for stocking as optional replacement items. END OF SECTION This page intentionally left blank woodardcurran.com COMMITMENT & INTEGRITY DRIVE RESULTS